t750 Bobcat Service Manual

Service Manual
T750 Compact Track Loader
S/N ANKA11001 & Above
Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale
EQUIPPED WITH
BOBCAT INTERLOCK
CONTROL SYSTEM (BICS™)
6989737 (12-10) Printed in U.S.A. © Bobcat Company 2010
1 of 898
2 of 898
MAINTENANCE SAFETY
Instructions are necessary before operating or servicing machine. Read and
understand the Operation & Maintenance Manual, Operator’s Handbook and
WARNING signs (decals) on machine. Follow warnings and instructions in the manuals
when making repairs, adjustments or servicing. Check for correct function after
adjustments, repairs or service. Untrained operators and failure to follow
instructions can cause injury or death. W-2003-0807
Safety Alert Symbol: This symbol with a warning statement, means: “Warning, be alert! Your safety is
involved!” Carefully read the message that follows.
CORRECT CORRECT CORRECT
P-90216 NA1711 NA1715

Never service the Bobcat Skid- Use the correct procedure to lift or Cleaning and maintenance are
Steer Loader without instructions. lower operator cab. required daily.
WRONG WRONG WRONG

NA1714 NA1710 NA1712
Have good ventilation when Disconnecting or loosening any Never work on loader with lift
welding or grinding painted hydraulic tubeline, hose, fitting, arms up unless lift arms are held
parts. component or a part failure can by an approved lift arm support
Wear dust mask when grinding cause lift arms to drop. Do not go device. Replace if damaged.
painted parts. Toxic dust and gas under lift arms when raised Never modify equipment or add
can be produced. unless supported by an attachments not approved by
Avoid exhaust fume leaks which approved lift arm support device. Bobcat Company.
can kill without warning. Exhaust Replace it if damaged.
system must be tightly sealed.
WRONG WRONG WRONG
NA1722 NA1725 B-6589

Stop, cool and clean engine of Keep body, jewelry and clothing Lead-acid batteries produce
flammable materials before away from moving parts, flammable and explosive gases.
checking fluids. electrical contact, hot parts and Keep arcs, sparks, flames and
Never service or adjust loader exhaust. lighted tobacco away from
with the engine running unless Wear eye protection to guard batteries.
instructed to do so in the from battery acid, compressed Batteries contain acid which
manual. springs, fluids under pressure burns eyes or skin on contact.
Avoid contact with leaking and flying debris when engines Wear protective clothing. If acid
hydraulic fluid or diesel fuel are running or tools are used. contacts body, flush well with
under pressure. It can penetrate Use eye protection approved for water. For eye contact flush well
the skin or eyes. type of welding. and get immediate medical
Never fill fuel tank with engine Keep rear door closed except for attention.
running, while smoking or when service. Close and latch door
near open flame. before operating the loader.
Maintenance procedures which are given in the Operation & Maintenance Manual can be performed by the owner/
operator without any specific technical training. Maintenance procedures which are not in the Operation & Maintenance
Manual must be performed ONLY BY QUALIFIED BOBCAT SERVICE PERSONNEL. Always use genuine Bobcat
replacement parts. The Service Safety Training Course is available from your Bobcat dealer.
MSW40-0609
3 of 898 1-1 T750 Service Manual


CONTENTS
SAFETY & MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-01
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-01
HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-01
DRIVE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-01
MAINFRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-01
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM & ANALYSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-01
ENGINE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-01
HEATING, VENTILATION, AIR CONDITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-01
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPEC-01
ALPHABETICAL INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .INDEX-01


FOREWORD
FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
FIRE PREVENTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Spark Arrestor Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Welding And Grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Fire Extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
SERIAL NUMBER LOCATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Loader Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Engine Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

DELIVERY REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
LOADER IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16


SAFETY &
FOREWORD
This manual is for the Bobcat loader mechanic. It provides necessary servicing and adjustment
procedures for the Bobcat loader and its component parts and systems. Refer to the Operation &
Maintenance Manual for operating instructions, starting procedure, daily checks, etc.
SYSTEM
A general inspection of the following items must be made after the loader has had service or repair:
1. Check that the ROPS/FOPS 9. The parking brake must
(Including side screens) is in function correctly.
good condition and is not
modified.
2. Check that ROPS mounting 10. Enclosure door latches must DRIVE
hardware is tightened and is open and close freely.
Bobcat approved.
3. The seat belt must be 11. Bob-Tach wedges and

correctly installed, functional linkages must function
and in good condition. correctly and be in good

condition.
4. The seat bar must be 12. Safety treads must be in good

correctly adjusted, clean and condition.
lubricated.
5. Check lift arm support device, 13. Check for correct function of
replace if damaged. indicator lamps.
HVAC
6. Machine signs (decals) must 14. Check hydraulic fluid level,

be legible and in the correct engine oil level and fuel
location. supply.
7. Steering levers, hand controls 15. Inspect for fuel, oil or

and foot pedals must return to hydraulic fluid leaks.
neutral (as applicable).
8. Check for correct function of 16. Lubricate the loader.

the work lights.
FW SSL-1008 SM

17. Check the condition of the 23. Operate the machine and
battery and cables. check all functions.
18. Inspect the air cleaner for 24. Check for correct function of
damage or leaks. Check the the Bobcat Interlock Control
condition of the element. System (BICS™) before the
machine is returned to the
customer.
19. Check the electrical charging 25. Check for proper function of
system. front horn and back-up alarm
(if equipped).
20. Check tires for wear and 26. Check function or condition of
pressure. Check tracks for all equipped options and
wear and tension. Use only accessories (examples: fire

approved tires or tracks. extinguisher, rotating beacon,
lift kits, etc.).
21. Inspect for loose or broken 27. Recommend to the owner
parts or connections. that all necessary corrections
be made before the machine
is returned to service.
22. Check for any field

modification not completed.
CALIFORNIA
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its
constituents are known to the state of California
to cause cancer, birth defects and other
reproductive harm.
FW SSL-1008 SM

FW SSL-1008 SM

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS The following publications provide information on the
safe use and maintenance of the Bobcat machine and
attachments:
Safety Alert Symbol
• The Delivery Report is used to assure that complete
This symbol with a warning statement means: instructions have been given to the new owner and
“Warning, be alert! Your safety is involved!” that the machine is in safe operating condition.
Carefully read the message that follows.
• The Operation & Maintenance Manual delivered with
the machine or attachment contains operating
information as well as routine maintenance and
service procedures. It is a part of the machine and can
WARNING be stored in a container provided on the machine.
Replacement Operation & Maintenance Manuals can
be ordered from your Bobcat dealer.
Instructions are necessary before operating or
servicing machine. Read and understand the • Machine signs (decals) instruct on the safe operation
Operation & Maintenance Manual, Operator’s and care of your Bobcat machine or attachment. The
Handbook and signs (decals) on machine. Follow signs and their locations are shown in the Operation
warnings and instructions in the manuals when & Maintenance Manual. Replacement signs are
making repairs, adjustments or servicing. Check for available from your Bobcat dealer.
correct function after adjustments, repairs or service.
Untrained operators and failure to follow instructions • An Operator’s Handbook fastened to the operator
can cause injury or death. cab. It’s brief instructions are convenient to the
W-2003-0903

operator. The handbook is available from your dealer
in an English edition or one of many other languages.
See your Bobcat dealer for more information on
translated versions.
IMPORTANT
• The AEM Safety Manual delivered with the machine
This notice identifies procedures which must be gives general safety information.
followed to avoid damage to the machine.
I-2019-0284 • The Service Manual and Parts Manual are available
from your dealer for use by mechanics to do shop-
type service and repair work.
• The Skid-Steer Loader Operator Training Course is
DANGER available through your local dealer or at

www.training.bobcat.com or www.bobcat.com.
This course is intended to provide rules and practices
The signal word DANGER on the machine and in the of correct operation of the Skid-Steer Loader. The
manuals indicates a hazardous situation which, if not course is available in English and Spanish versions.
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
D-1002-1107 • Service Safety Training Courses are available from
your Bobcat dealer or at www.training.bobcat.com
or www.bobcat.com. They provide information for
safe and correct service procedures.
WARNING • The Skid-Steer Loader Safety Video is available from

your Bobcat dealer or at www.training.bobcat.com
The signal word WARNING on the machine and in the or www.bobcat.com.
manuals indicates a potentially hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious
injury.
W-2044-1107
SI SSL-1008 SM

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS (CONT’D)
The dealer and owner / operator review the

recommended uses of the product when delivered. If the
owner / operator will be using the machine for a different
application(s) he or she must ask the dealer for
recommendations on the new use.
Cutting or drilling concrete containing sand or rock

containing quartz may result in exposure to silica dust.
Do not exceed Permissible Exposure Limits (PEL) to
silica dust as determined by OSHA or other job site Rules
and Regulations. Use a respirator, water spray or other
means to control dust. Silica dust can cause lung disease
and is known to the state of California to cause cancer.
Call Before You Dig

Dial 811 (USA Only)

1-888-258-0808 (USA & Canada)
When you call, you will be directed to a location in your
state / province, or city for information about buried lines
(telephone, cable TV, water, sewer, gas, etc.).
SI SSL-1008 SM

FIRE PREVENTION Hydraulic System
Check hydraulic tubes, hoses and fittings for damage

and leakage. Never use open flame or bare skin to check
for leaks. Hydraulic tubes and hoses must be properly
routed and have adequate support and secure clamps.
Tighten or replace any parts that show leakage.
Maintenance Always clean fluid spills. Do not use gasoline or diesel

fuel for cleaning parts. Use commercial nonflammable
The machine and some attachments have components
solvents.
that are at high temperatures under normal operating
conditions. The primary source of high temperatures is
Fueling
the engine and exhaust system. The electrical system, if
damaged or incorrectly maintained, can be a source of
arcs or sparks.
Flammable debris (leaves, straw, etc.) must be removed

regularly. If flammable debris is allowed to accumulate, it
can cause a fire hazard. Clean often to avoid this
accumulation. Flammable debris in the engine
compartment is a potential fire hazard. Stop the engine and let it cool before adding fuel. No
smoking! Do not refuel a machine near open flames or
The operator’s area, engine compartment and engine sparks. Fill the fuel tank outdoors.

cooling system must be inspected every day and cleaned
if necessary to prevent fire hazards and overheating. Starting
All fuels, most lubricants and some coolants mixtures are Do not use ether or starting fluids on any engine that has
flammable. Flammable fluids that are leaking or spilled glow plugs or air intake heater. These starting aids can
onto hot surfaces or onto electrical components can cause explosion and injure you or bystanders.
cause a fire.
Use the procedure in the Operation & Maintenance
Operation Manual for connecting the battery and for jump starting.
Do not use the machine where exhaust, arcs, sparks or

hot components can contact flammable material, Spark Arrestor Exhaust System
explosive dust or gases. The spark arrestor exhaust system is designed to control
the emission of hot particles from the engine and exhaust
Electrical system, but the muffler and the exhaust gases are still
hot.
Check the spark arrestor exhaust system regularly to

make sure it is maintained and working properly. Use the
procedure in the Operation & Maintenance Manual for
cleaning the spark arrestor muffler (if equipped).
Check all electrical wiring and connections for damage.
Keep the battery terminals clean and tight. Repair or
replace any damaged part or wires that are loose or
frayed.
Battery gas can explode and cause serious injury. Use

the procedure in the Operation & Maintenance Manual
for connecting the battery and for jump starting. Do not
jump start or charge a frozen or damaged battery. Keep
any open flames or sparks away from batteries. Do not
smoke in battery charging area.
SI SSL-1008 SM

FIRE PREVENTION (CONT’D)
Welding And Grinding
Always clean the machine and attachment, disconnect

the battery, and disconnect the wiring from the Bobcat
controllers before welding. Cover rubber hoses, battery
and all other flammable parts. Keep a fire extinguisher
near the machine when welding.
Have good ventilation when grinding or welding painted

parts. Wear dust mask when grinding painted parts.
Toxic dust or gas can be produced.
Dust generated from repairing nonmetallic parts such as

hoods, fenders or covers can be flammable or explosive.
Repair such components in a well ventilated area away
from open flames or sparks.
Fire Extinguishers

Know where fire extinguishers and first aid kits are
located and how to use them. Inspect the fire
extinguisher and service the fire extinguisher regularly.
Obey the recommendations on the instructions plate.
SI SSL-1008 SM

SERIAL NUMBER LOCATIONS Engine Serial Number
Always use the serial number of the loader when Figure 3

requesting service information or when ordering parts.
Early or later models (identification made by serial
number) may use different parts, or it may be necessary
to use a different procedure in doing a specific service
operation.
Loader Serial Number
Figure 1
P-90641A
1
The engine serial number (Item 1) [Figure 3] is located

on the side of the engine above the oil filter.

P100390
The loader serial number plate (Item 1) [Figure 1] is

located on the outside of the loader frame.
Figure 2
Module 2 - Production
Sequence (Series)
Module 1 - Model / Engine

Combination P-90175
Explanation of loader Serial Number [Figure 2]:
1. The four digit Model / Engine Combination Module

number identifies the model number and engine
combination.
2. The five digit Production Sequence Number identifies

the order which the loader is produced.

DELIVERY REPORT
Figure 4
B-16315
The delivery report [Figure 4] must be completed by the

dealer and signed by the owner or operator when the
Bobcat loader is delivered. An explanation of the form
must be given to the owner.

LOADER IDENTIFICATION
FRONT OPERATION &

LIGHTS MAINTENANCE
MANUAL AND
OPERATOR’S
GRAB HANDBOOK
HANDLES
OPERATOR SEAT
with SEAT BELT
AND SEAT BAR
TILT
CYLINDERS
FRONT AUXILIARY
QUICK COUPLERS
[1] BUCKET

STEP
BUCKET
STEPS
[2] OPERATOR CAB

LIFT (ROPS AND FOPS)
CYLINDER LIFT ARM
SUPPORT DEVICE
REAR
GRILLE
LIFT ARM
BACK-UP
ALARM
REAR
LIGHT
REAR
TAIL LIGHT [3] UNDERCARRIAGE NA5374
DOOR NA5375
AND TRACK
[1] BUCKETS - Several different buckets and other attachments are available for the Bobcat loader.
[2] ROPS, FOPS - Roll Over Protective Structure, per ISO 3471, and Falling Object Protective Structure per ISO
3449, Level I. Level II is available.
[3] UNDERCARRIAGE and TRACK - Undercarriage and Track options are available.

SAFETY & MAINTENANCE
LIFTING AND BLOCKING THE LOADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10-1

Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10-1
LIFT ARM SUPPORT DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20-1

Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20-1
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20-2
OPERATOR CAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30-1
Raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30-2
Lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30-3
Cab Door Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30-4
TRANSPORTING THE LOADER ON A TRAILER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40-1

Loading And Unloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40-1
Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40-1
TOWING THE LOADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50-1

Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50-1

REMOTE START TOOL KIT-MEL1563 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60-1
Remote Start Tool - MEL1563 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60-1
Service Tool Harness Control - MEL1565 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60-2
Service Tool Harness Communicator - MEL1566 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60-3
Remote Start Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60-3
REMOTE START TOOL (SERVICE TOOL) KIT - 7003031 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61-1
Remote Start Tool (Service Tool) - 7003030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61-2
Loader Service Tool Harness - 6689747 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61-3
Computer Service Tool Harness - 6689746 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61-4
Remote Start Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61-5
SERVICE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70-1

Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70-1
AIR CLEANER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80-1

Replacing Filter Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80-1
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90-1

Maintenance Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90-1
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90-2
Checking Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90-3
Removing And Replacing Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90-4

FUEL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100-1
Fuel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100-1
Biodiesel Blend Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100-1
Filling The Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100-2
Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100-3
Removing Air From The Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100-3
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-110-1

Checking And Adding Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-110-1
Engine Oil Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-110-1
Removing And Replacing Oil And Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-110-2
HYDRAULIC / HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-120-1

Checking And Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-120-1
Hydraulic / Hydrostatic Fluid Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-120-1
Removing And Replacing Hydraulic Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-120-2
Removing And Replacing Hydraulic / Hydrostatic Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-120-4
Removing And Replacing Hydraulic Charge Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-120-5
Breather Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-120-6
BOB-TACH (HAND LEVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-130-1

Inspection And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-130-1
BOB-TACH (POWER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-131-1

LUBRICATING THE LOADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-140-1

Lubrication Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-140-1
SPARK ARRESTOR MUFFLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-150-1

Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-150-1
PIVOT PINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-160-1

LOADER STORAGE AND RETURN TO SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-170-1

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-170-1
Return To Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-170-1
STOPPING THE ENGINE AND LEAVING THE LOADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-180-1

Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-180-1
EMERGENCY EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-190-1

External Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-190-1
Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-190-1
Front Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-190-1
SEAT BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-200-1


LIFTING AND BLOCKING THE LOADER Figure 10-10-2
Procedure
Figure 10-10-1
P-85425
P-85423
Lift the rear of the loader and install jackstands in the

B-7023A notched area of the frame [Figure 10-10-2].
Figure 10-10-3
WARNING

AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Instructions are necessary before operating or
servicing machine. Read and understand the
Operation & Maintenance Manual, Operator’s
Handbook and signs (decals) on machine. Follow
warnings and instructions in the manuals when
making repairs, adjustments or servicing. Check for
Untrained operators and failure to follow instructions
can cause injury or death.
W-2003-0807 P-85424
Read the Removal And Installation, Disassembly And Lift the front of the loader and install jackstands under the
Assembly, etc. completely to become familiar with the struts [Figure 10-10-3].
procedure before beginning [Figure 10-10-1].
NOTE: Make sure the jackstands do not touch the
Always park the loader on a level surface. tracks. Make sure the tracks clear the floor or
any obstacles.
NOTE: The lift arms are raised for photo clarity.

WARNING
MACHINE FALLING OR MOVING CAN CAUSE
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
Put jackstands under the front and rear of the
machine before running engine for service.
W-2718-0208
21 of 898 10-10-1 T750 Service Manual


LIFT ARM SUPPORT DEVICE Figure 10-20-1
Installing
WARNING 1
Never work on a machine with the lift arms up unless

the lift arms are secured by an approved lift arm
support device. Failure to use an approved lift arm
support device can allow the lift arms or attachment
to fall and cause injury or death.
Service lift arm support device if damaged or if parts

are missing. Using a damaged lift arm support or P-85463A P100009
with missing parts can cause lift arms to drop
causing injury or death.
W-2572-0407
Put jackstands under the rear corners of the loader frame
(Inset) [Figure 10-20-1].
Remove the lift arm support device (Item 1) [Figure 10-

20-1] from the storage position.
DANGER

The operator must stay in the operator seat with the seat
belt fastened and the seat bar lowered until the lift arm
support device is installed.
Start the engine and raise the lift arms all the way up.
Figure 10-20-2
P-90328
AVOID DEATH
• Disconnecting or loosening any hydraulic
tubeline, hose, fitting, component or a part failure
can cause lift arms to drop.
• Keep out of this area when lift arms are raised
unless supported by an approved lift arm
support. Replace if damaged.
D-1009-0409
Remove attachment from the loader. (See BOB-TACH

(HAND LEVER) on Page 50-40-1.) OR (See BOB-TACH P-90567B
(POWER) on Page 50-41-1.)
Have a second person install the lift arm support device

over the rod of one of the lift cylinders [Figure 10-20-2].
The lift arm support device must be tight against the

cylinder rod.

LIFT ARM SUPPORT DEVICE (CONT’D) Removing
Installing (Cont’d) The operator must be in the operator’s seat, with the seat
belt fastened and seat bar lowered, until the lift arm
Figure 10-20-3 support device is removed and the lift arms are lowered
all the way.
Start the engine and raise the lift arms all the way up.
Have a second person remove the lift arm support

device.
Lower the lift arms all the way and stop the engine.
P100399
Return the lift arm support device to the storage position
and secure with clamping knobs.
Remove the jackstands.
P100398
Lower the lift arms slowly until the lift arm support device
is held between the lift arms and the lift cylinder. The tabs

of the lift arm support device must go past the end of the
cylinder (Inset) [Figure 10-20-3].

OPERATOR CAB
Description
The Bobcat loader has an operator cab (ROPS and

FOPS) as standard equipment to protect the operator
from rollover and falling objects. The seat belt must be
worn for rollover protection.
Check the ROPS / FOPS cab, mounting and hardware

for damage. Never modify the ROPS / FOPS cab.
Replace the cab and hardware if damaged. See your
Bobcat dealer for parts.
ROPS / FOPS - Roll Over Protective Structure per ISO

3471, and Falling Object Protective Structure per ISO
3449, Level I. Level II is available.
Level I
Protection from falling bricks, small concrete blocks,

and hand tools encountered in operations such as
highway maintenance, landscaping, and other
construction sites.

Level II
Protection from falling trees, rocks: for machines

involved in site clearing, overhead demolition or
forestry.
WARNING
Never modify operator cab by welding, grinding,
drilling holes or adding attachments unless
instructed to do so by Bobcat Company. Changes to
the cab can cause loss of operator protection from
rollover and falling objects, and result in injury or
death.
W-2069-0200

OPERATOR CAB (CONT’D)
Raising
WARNING
Always stop the engine before raising or lowering the
operator cab.
UNEXPECTED LOADER, LIFT ARM OR ATTACHMENT
MOVEMENT CAUSED BY CAB CONTACT WITH
Stop the loader on a level surface. Lower the lift arms. If
CONTROLS CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
the lift arms must be up while raising the operator cab,
INJURY OR DEATH
install the lift arm support device. (See LIFT ARM
SUPPORT DEVICE on Page 10-20-1.) • STOP ENGINE before raising or lowering cab.
W-2758-0908
Figure 10-30-1
NOTE: On some machines, the operator cab frame
could contact the steering levers while raising
or lowering the operator cab. The engine
MUST be stopped before raising or lowering
the operator cab.
Figure 10-30-3

P-85463A
Install jackstands under the rear of the loader frame

[Figure 10-30-1].
Figure 10-30-2
Hardware Installed Hardware Removed

P-90564A
Lift on the grab handles and bottom of the operator cab

[Figure 10-30-3] slowly until the operator cab is all the
way up and the latching mechanism engages.
P100235A P100236A
Remove the nuts and washers [Figure 10-30-2] (both

sides) at the front corners of the operator cab.

OPERATOR CAB (CONT’D) Support the operator cab and release the latching
mechanism (Inset) [Figure 10-30-4]. Remove your hand
Lowering from the latch mechanism when the operator cab is past
the latch stop. Use both hands to lower the operator cab
Always stop the engine before raising or lowering the all the way down.
operator cab.
NOTE: Always use the grab handles to lower the

operator cab.
WARNING
Figure 10-30-4
PINCH POINT CAN CAUSE INJURY
Remove your hand from the latching mechanism
when the cab is past the latch stop.
W-2469-0803
Figure 10-30-5
Hardware Removed Hardware Installed

N-20120 P-90565A
Pull down on the bottom of the operator cab until it stops

at the latching mechanism [Figure 10-30-4].
NOTE: The weight of the operator cab increases

when equipped with options and accessories P100236A P100235A
such as cab door, heater, air conditioning,
etc. In these cases, the operator cab may need
to be raised slightly from the latch to be able Install the washers and nuts (both sides) [Figure 10-30-
to release the latch. 5].
Tighten the nuts to 54 - 61 N•m (40 - 45 ft-lb) torque.
WARNING
UNEXPECTED LOADER, LIFT ARM OR ATTACHMENT
MOVEMENT CAUSED BY CAB CONTACT WITH
CONTROLS CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH
• STOP ENGINE before raising or lowering cab.
W-2758-0908
NOTE: On some machines, the operator cab frame

could contact the steering levers while raising
or lowering the operator cab. The engine
MUST be stopped before raising or lowering
the operator cab.

Cab Door Sensor
This machine may be equipped with a Cab Door Sensor.
Figure 10-30-6
S3999A
1
2
P-68116A P-68115A

The cab door has a sensor (Item 1) [Figure 10-30-6]
installed which deactivates the lift and tilt valves when the
door is open.
A decal is located on the latch mechanism (Item 2)

[Figure 10-30-6].
The LIFT AND TILT VALVE light (Item 3) [Figure 10-30-

6] will be OFF when the door is closed, the key switch is
turned to RUN or the RUN button is pressed, the seat bar
is lowered and the PRESS TO OPERATE LOADER
button is pressed.
Figure 10-30-7
P-76461Q
The LIFT AND TILT VALVE light (Item 3) [Figure 10-30-

6] will be ON when the door is open, the key switch is
turned to RUN or the RUN button is pressed, the seat bar
is lowered and the PRESS TO OPERATE LOADER
button is pressed.
[DOOR] will appear in the data display [Figure 10-30-7].

TRANSPORTING THE LOADER ON A TRAILER Fastening
Loading And Unloading Figure 10-40-2

Rear Tie Down Front Tie Down
WARNING
AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
Adequately designed ramps of sufficient strength are
needed to support the weight of the machine when
loading onto a transport vehicle. Wood ramps can
break and cause personal injury. P-85615A P-85616A
W-2058-0807
Be sure the transport and towing vehicles are of

adequate size and capacity for weight of loader. (See
Performance on Page SPEC-10-2.)
Figure 10-40-1

P100727A
Alternate Rear Tie Down Alternate Front Tie Down
1
P100728A
P-85466
P-85717A P-85599B
A loader with an empty bucket or no attachment must be
loaded backward onto the transport vehicle [Figure 10-
40-1]. Use the following procedure to fasten the Bobcat loader
to the transport vehicle to prevent the loader from moving
The rear of the trailer must be blocked or supported (Item during sudden stops or when going up or down slopes
1) [Figure 10-40-1] when loading or unloading the loader [Figure 10-40-2].
to prevent the front end of the trailer from raising up.
1. Lower the bucket or attachment to the floor.
2. Stop the engine.
3. Engage the parking brake.
4. Install chains at the front and rear loader tie down

positions [Figure 10-40-2]. (Lift arms shown raised
for clarity.)
5. Fasten each end of the chain to the transport vehicle.
6. Use chain binders to tighten the chains.


TOWING THE LOADER
Procedure
Because of the design of the loader, there is not a

recommended towing procedure.
• The loader can be lifted onto a transport vehicle.
• The loader can be skidded a short distance to move

for service (EXAMPLE: Move onto a transport
vehicle.) without damage to the hydrostatic system.
(The tracks will not turn.) There might be slight wear
to the tracks when the loader is skidded.
The towing chain (or cable) must be rated at 1.5 times

the weight of the loader. (See Performance on Page
SPEC-10-2.)


REMOTE START TOOL KIT-MEL1563 Figure 10-60-2
Remote Start Tool - MEL1563
Tools that will be needed to complete the following steps

are:
2
MEL1563 - Remote Start Tool 3
MEL1565 - Service Tool Harness Control 1
MEL1566 - Service Tool Harness Communicator
(Computer Interface)
Figure 10-60-1
P16117
1
The traction lock switch (Item 1) [Figure 10-60-2] is used

to turn traction lock ON or OFF. Push the switch to the
override position. The switch will illuminate to indicate
traction lock OVERRIDE, in this position the wheels are
able to turn.

The maximum flow / variable flow switch (Item 2) [Figure
10-60-2] is used to activate the auxiliary hydraulics.
Pressing the switch will activate variable flow. The switch
P16114 will illuminate to indicate the flow rate is active. Pressing
the switch again will turn the flow OFF. The switch is used
when checking pressures and flow rate.
The remote start tool (Item 1) [Figure 10-60-1] is
required when the service technician is checking the NOTE: With the engine running; pushing and holding
hydraulic / hydrostatic system, adjusting the steering the pressure release switch (Item 3) [Figure
linkage, and electrical diagnostics. 10-60-2] will cause the engine to stop.

REMOTE START TOOL-MEL1563 (CONT'D) Figure 10-60-5
Service Tool Harness Control - MEL1565
Figure 10-60-3
2
2
1
1
P-85728
Loaders equipped with an attachment harness (Item 1)

P16114 must disconnect the attachment harness from the loader
harness (Item 2) [Figure 10-60-5].
The service tool harness control (Item 1) is used to Connect the service tool harness to the ACD connector
connect the remote start tool (Item 2) [Figure 10-60-3] to and the loader harness connector.

the electrical system on the loader.
NOTE: To monitor, diagnose or load new software
Figure 10-60-4 the Service PC must be connected to the
Remote Start Tool.
P-85729
Remove the cap (Item 1) [Figure 10-60-4] from the

loader harness connector.
Connect the service tool harness control to the loader

harness connector.

REMOTE START TOOL-MEL1563 (CONT'D) Remote Start Procedure
Service Tool Harness Communicator - MEL1566 The tool listed will be needed to do the following
procedure:
Figure 10-60-6
MEL1563: Remote Start Tool Kit
2
Figure 10-60-7
1
1
P16119
The service tool harness communicator (Item 1) is P16115

required to connect remote start tool to the Service PC

(Item 2) [Figure 10-60-6].
The remote start tool (Item 1) [Figure 10-60-7] is
required when the operator cab is in the raised position
for service and the service technician needs to turn the
key switch on or start the engine. Example: adjusting the
steering linkage.
Lift and block the loader.
Raise the lift arms (if required by the procedure) and

install an approved lift arm support device.
Raise the operator cab (if required by the procedure).
Open the rear door of the loader.

REMOTE START TOOL-MEL1563 (CONT'D) Figure 10-60-10
Remote Start Procedure (Cont'd)
Figure 10-60-8
1
1
P-85728
Figure 10-60-11
P-85729
Figure 10-60-9
1

2
P-85726
Connect the remote start tool to the engine harness

P-85728
connector (Item 1) [Figure 10-60-10].
OR
Remove the cap (Item 1) [Figure 10-60-8].
Connect the remote start tool to the engine harness
OR connector (Item 1) and to the attachment control harness
(Item 2) [Figure 10-60-11] (If equipped).
Disconnect the attachment control harness (Item 1)
[Figure 10-60-9] (If equipped). NOTE: The key switch on the right-hand side
operator panel must be in the off position or
the Remote Start Tool Kit will not operate.

REMOTE START TOOL KIT-MEL1563 (CONT'D) Figure 10-60-13
WARNING
2
3 1
UNAUTHORIZED AND UNEXPECTED ENGINE
STARTUP CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
With the 7-pin connector plugged into the machine
and Remote Start Tool Key Switch in the OFF
position, the engine can be started from the operator
panel inside the cab.
P16118
• Place the key switch of the Remote Start Tool in
the RUN position to disconnect the operator
panel from the start circuit. The traction lock switch (Item 1) [Figure 10-60-13] is
• Remove the operator panel key (key switch), lock used to turn traction lock ON or OFF. Push the switch to
the keypad with a unique password (keyless) or the override position. The switch will illuminate to indicate
otherwise disable the starter before working in traction lock OVERRIDE, in this position the wheels are
the engine area. able to turn.
W-2457-1110

The maximum flow / variable flow switch (Item 2) [Figure
Figure 10-60-12 10-60-13] is used to activate the auxiliary hydraulics.
Pressing the switch will activate variable flow. The switch
will illuminate to indicate the flow rate is active. Pressing
the switch again will turn the flow OFF. The switch is used
when checking pressures and flow rate.
NOTE: With the engine running; pushing and holding

the pressure release switch (Item 3) [Figure
1 10-60-13] will cause the engine to stop.
WARNING
P16116
• Use traction lock override switch for service
work with seat bar raised.
The remote start tool (Item 1) [Figure 10-60-12] has • Traction lock is engaged when light is OFF.
three rocker switches. • Lift and block the loader. Check that wheels are
clear.
• Traction lock is disengaged when light is ON.
• See Service Manual for more instruction.
W-2785-0209

REMOTE START TOOL KIT-MEL1563 (CONT'D)
Figure 10-60-14
P-85311
Push the couplers on the front auxiliary block toward the

block and hold for five seconds to release the front

auxiliary pressure [Figure 10-60-14].

REMOTE START TOOL (SERVICE TOOL) KIT -
7003031
Description
The Remote Start Tool (Service Tool) Kit is a replacement

tool for MEL 1563 Remote Start Tool and MEL 1400B -
BOSS® Diagnostic Tool.
The Remote Start Tool (Service Tool) Kit, P/N 7003031,

can be used to service newer loaders using the supplied
harness P/N 6689747.
A computer can be connected to the Remote Start Tool

(Service Tool) for diagnostics and software updates using
the computer harness P/N 6689746 in conjunction with
the loader harness.

REMOTE START TOOL (SERVICE TOOL) KIT - Figure 10-61-2
7003031 (CONT'D)
2
Remote Start Tool (Service Tool) - 7003030
Tools that will be needed to complete the following steps

5 3
are:
Order from Bobcat Parts P/N: 7003031 - Remote Start 6 4

Tool (Service Tool) Kit
Kit Includes:
1
7003030 - Remote Start Tool (Service Tool)
6689747 - Loader Service Tool Harness
6689746 - Computer Service Tool Harness
P-76439
6689745 - BOSS® Service Tool Harness
Figure 10-61-1
The Remote Start Tool (Service Tool) (Item 1) [Figure 10-
61-2] has five buttons.
The STOP button (Item 2) [Figure 10-61-2] is used to

stop the Remote Start Tool (Service Tool) from
communicating and stop the loader engine.

The RUN button (Item 3) [Figure 10-61-2] is used to turn
the Remote Start Tool (Service Tool) on and activates the
loader ignition power. The button will illuminate to
1
indicate the service tool is active.
The START button (Item 4) [Figure 10-61-2] is used to

start the loader engine.
P-76678
The traction lock button (Item 5) [Figure 10-61-2] is used
to turn traction lock ON or OFF. Push the button and the
The remote start tool (Item 1) [Figure 10-61-1] is button will illuminate indicating the traction lock is
required when the service technician is checking the disabled in which the wheels or tracks are able to turn.
hydraulic / hydrostatic system, adjusting the steering
linkage, and electrical diagnostics. The auxiliary button (Item 6) [Figure 10-61-2] is used to
activate the auxiliary hydraulics. The button will illuminate
to indicate the auxiliary hydraulics are active. Pressing
the button a second time will turn the flow OFF. The
button is used when checking pressures and flow rate.

7003031 (CONT'D)
Loader Service Tool Harness - 6689747

1
Figure 10-61-3
2 3
P-90972
2
Loaders with an attachment control harness (7 pin or 14

pin), the attachment harness (Item 1) must remove the tie
P-76678 strap (Item 2) and disconnect the attachment harness
from the loader harness (Item 3) [Figure 10-61-5].
The loader service tool harness (Item 1) [Figure 10-61-3] When the remote start procedure is completed, replace
is used to connect the remote start tool (service tool)

the loader connector cap (Item 1) [Figure 10-61-4] or
(Item 2) [Figure 10-61-3] to the electrical system on the reconnect the attachment control harness to the loader
loader. harness [Figure 10-61-5].
Figure 10-61-4
P-90973
Loaders without an attachment control harness, remove

the loader harness cap (Item 1) [Figure 10-61-4] and
connect the Loader Service Tool Harness from the
Remote Start Tool (Service Tool).

REMOTE START TOOL (SERVICE TOOL) KIT - Computer Service Tool Harness - 6689746
7003031 (CONT'D)
Figure 10-61-7
Loader Service Tool Harness - 6689747 (Cont’d)
Figure 10-61-6
3 2
1 P-76450
P-90976 The computer service tool harness (Item 1) [Figure 10-

61-7] is required to connect remote start tool (service
tool) to the Service PC (Item 2) [Figure 10-61-7].
NOTE: The Remote Start Tool (Service Tool)
connection harness has two connectors (Item

1) and (Item 3). The main connector (Item 1)
[Figure 10-61-6] is always used for connection
to the loader harness.
The second connector (Item 3) [Figure 10-61-

6] is used for attachment ACD upgrades or
attachment operational diagnostics only. This
connector has a cap attached to it to prevent
damage or corrosion when not in use.
Connect the Remote Start Tool (Service Tool) connector

(Item 1) to the loader harness connector (Item 2) and the
other Remote Start Tool (Service Tool) connector to the
ACD harness connector (Item 3) [Figure 10-61-6].
NOTE: The key switch must be in the off position or

the Remote Start Tool (Service Tool) will not
operate.
WARNING
• Lift and block the machine.
• Check that wheels or tracks are clear.
• Cab ignition must be in the “STOP” position to
start the engine with the Service Tool (if
applicable).
• See machine Service Manual for more
instructions.
W-2792-0409

REMOTE START TOOL (SERVICE TOOL) KIT - Open the rear door of the loader.
7003031 (CONT'D)
Figure 10-61-9
Remote Start Procedure
WARNING
UNAUTHORIZED AND UNEXPECTED ENGINE
STARTUP CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH 1
With the 7-pin connector plugged into the machine
and Remote Start Tool Key Switch in the OFF
position, the engine can be started from the operator
panel inside the cab.
• Place the key switch of the Remote Start Tool in
the RUN position to disconnect the operator
P-90973
panel from the start circuit.
• Remove the operator panel key (key switch), lock
the keypad with a unique password (keyless) or Loaders without an attachment control harness, remove
otherwise disable the starter before working in the loader harness cap (Item 1) [Figure 10-61-9] and
the engine area. connect the Loader Service Tool Harness from the
W-2457-1110
Remote Start Tool (Service Tool).

The tool listed will be needed to do the following NOTE: When using a Remote Start Tool (Service tool)
procedure: harness on loaders not equipped with an
attachment control device, the Remote Start
7003031: Remote Start Tool (Service Tool) Kit Tool (Service Tool) harness attachment
Figure 10-61-8 control device connector must be capped.
Figure 10-61-10
P-76450
P-90974
61-8] is required when the operator cab is in the raised
position for service and the service technician needs to Loaders with an attachment control harness (7 pin or 14
turn on the loader or start the engine. Example: adjusting pin), the attachment harness (Item 1) must be
the steering linkage. disconnected from the loader harness (Item 2) [Figure
10-61-10].
Lift and block the loader.
Raise the lift arms (if required by the procedure) and When the remote start procedure is completed, replace
install an approved lift arm support device. the loader connector cap (Item 1) [Figure 10-61-10] or
reconnect the attachment control harness to the loader
Raise the operator cab (if required by the procedure). harness.

7003031 (CONT'D)
2
Figure 10-61-11
5 3
6 4
2 1
P-76439
3
1
61-12] has five buttons.
P-90976
The STOP button (Item 2) [Figure 10-61-12] is used to
stop the Remote Start Tool (Service Tool) from
NOTE: The Remote Start Tool (Service Tool) communicating and stop the loader engine.
connection harness has two connectors (Item

1) and (Item 3). The main connector (Item 1) The RUN button (Item 3) [Figure 10-61-12] is used to
[Figure 10-61-11] is always used for turn the Remote Start Tool (Service Tool) on and
connection to the loader harness. activates the loader ignition power. The button will
illuminate to indicate the service tool is active.
The second connector (Item 3) [Figure 10-61-
11] is used for attachment ACD upgrades or The START button (Item 4) [Figure 10-61-12] is used to
attachment operational diagnostics only. This start the loader engine.
connector has a cap attached to it to prevent
damage or corrosion when not in use. The traction lock button (Item 5) [Figure 10-61-12] is
used to turn traction lock ON or OFF. Push the button and
Connect the Remote Start Tool (Service Tool) connector the button will illuminate indicating the traction lock is
(Item 1) to the loader harness connector (Item 2) and the disabled in which the wheels or tracks are able to turn.
other Remote Start Tool (Service Tool) connector to the
ACD harness connector (Item 3) [Figure 10-61-11]. The auxiliary button (Item 6) [Figure 10-61-12] is used to
activate the auxiliary hydraulics. The button will illuminate
NOTE: The key switch must be in the off position or to indicate the auxiliary hydraulics are active. Pressing
the Remote Start Tool (Service Tool) will not the button a second time will turn the flow OFF. The
operate. button is used when checking pressures and flow rate.
WARNING
• Lift and block the machine.
• Check that wheels or tracks are clear.
• Cab ignition must be in the “STOP” position to
start the engine with the Service Tool (if
applicable).
• See machine Service Manual for more
instructions.
W-2792-0409

7003031 (CONT'D)
Figure 10-61-13
1 2
P-85311B
Push the couplers on the front auxiliary block toward the

block and hold for five seconds to release the front
P-76441 auxiliary pressure [Figure 10-61-14].
The gear icon with the left facing arrows (Item 1) [Figure
10-61-13] will illuminate and blink when the RUN key is

pressed and the loader is communicating with the service
tool.
The computer icon with the right facing arrows (Item 2)

[Figure 10-61-13] will illuminate and blink when the
Remote Start Tool (Service Tool) is transmitting data to
and from the computer.
NOTE: To relieve the pressure at the rear or

secondary front auxiliary, (if equipped) press
the RUN button on the remote start tool. Then
press the auxiliary (AUX) hydraulics button on
the remote start tool and move the AUXILIARY
Hydraulic Switch to the right and left several
times.


SERVICE SCHEDULE
Chart
Maintenance work must be done at regular intervals. Failure to do so will result in excessive wear and early failures. The
service schedule is a guide for correct maintenance of the Bobcat loader.
Instructions are necessary before operating or servicing machine. Read and
understand the Operation & Maintenance Manual, Operator’s Handbook and
signs (decals) on machine. Follow warnings and instructions in the manuals
WARNING when making repairs, adjustments or servicing. Check for correct function
after adjustments, repairs or service. Untrained operators and failure to follow
instructions can cause injury or death. W-2003-0903
SERVICE SCHEDULE HOURS

[5] [5] [5]
ITEM SERVICE REQUIRED
8-10 50 100 250 500 1000
Engine Oil Check the oil level and add as needed. Do not overfill.
Check display panel. Service only when required. Check for leaks and
Engine Air Filter and Air System
damaged components.
Clean debris from oil cooler, radiator and grille. Check coolant level COLD and
Engine Cooling System
add premixed coolant as needed.
Fuel Filter Remove the trapped water.
Lift Arms, Lift Links, Cylinders,
Lubricate with multipurpose lithium based grease.
Bob-Tach, Pivot Pins, Wedges
Check the condition of seat belt. Clean or replace seat belt retractors as
Seat Bar, Control Interlocks, Seat
needed. Check the seat bar and control interlocks for correct operation. Clean
Belt, Seat Belt Retractors
dirt and debris from moving parts.
Bobcat Interlock Control Systems Check for correct function. Lift and Tilt functions MUST NOT operate with seat
(BICS) bar raised. See details in this Manual.

Front Horn / Back-up Alarm Check for proper function.
Check for damaged signs (decals) and safety treads. Replace any signs or
Safety Signs and Safety Treads
safety treads that are damaged or worn.
Operator Cab Check the fastening bolts, washers and nuts. Check the condition of the cab.
Indicators and Lights Check for correct operation of all indicators and lights.
Heater and Air Conditioning
Clean or replace filters as needed.
Filters (If Equipped)
Hydraulic Fluid Check fluid level and add as needed.
Hydraulic Hoses and Tubelines Check for damage and leaks. Repair or replace as needed.
Tracks Check for damaged and worn tracks and correct tension. [1]
Track Sprocket Nuts Check torque. Tighten as needed. See procedure in this manual.
Parking Brake, Foot Pedals,
Hand Controls and Steering Check for correct operation. Repair or adjust as needed.
Levers or Joysticks
Spark Arrester Muffler Clean the spark chamber.
Battery Check cables, connections and electrolyte level. Add distilled water as needed.
Fuel Filter Replace filter element.
Engine / Hydrostatic Drive Belt Check for wear or damage. Check idler arm stop. [2]
Drive Belts (Alternator, air
Check condition. Replace as needed.
conditioning, water pump)
Bobcat Interlock Control System
Check the function of the lift arm bypass control.
(BICS)
Engine Oil and Filter Replace oil and filter. [2] [3]
Hydraulic Charge Filter,
Replace the charge filter and the reservoir breather.
Hydraulic Reservoir Breather
Hydrostatic Drive Motors Replace oil with high performance synthetic oil P/N 7003026.
Hydraulic / Hydrostatic Filter Replace the hydraulic / hydrostatic filter.
Hydraulic Reservoir Replace the fluid.
Engine Valves Adjust the engine valves. [4]
Coolant Replace the coolant Every 2 years
[1] Check every 8 - 10 hours for the first 24 hours, then at 50 hour intervals.
[2] Perform at first 50 hours, then as scheduled.
[3] Change oil and filter every 100 hours when operating under severe conditions.
[4] Perform at first 500 hours, then as scheduled.
[5] Or every 12 months.


AIR CLEANER SERVICE Figure 10-80-3
Replacing Filter Elements
Figure 10-80-1
1 1
P-90647
P-76460G
Pull the outer filter element (Item 1) [Figure 10-80-3] out

It is important to change the air filter element only when and discard.
necessary. The service indicator (Item 1) will FLASH.
Press the information button (Item 3) until the display NOTE: Make sure the filter housing is free of dirt and
screen (Item 2) shows the service codes. Service code debris. Verify that sealing surfaces are clean.
[M0117] (Air Filter Plugged) will show in the display DO NOT use compressed air.

screen (Item 2) [Figure 10-80-1] when air filter change is
necessary. Install new filter element. Push all the way in until it
contacts the base of the housing.
Replace the inner filter every third time the outer filter is
replaced or as indicated. Install the cover and secure the latches [Figure 10-80-2].
Outer Filter NOTE: Ensure the intake hose is connected to the

fitting on the fan housing (Inset) [Figure 10-
Remove the rear grille. (See REAR GRILLE on Page 50- 80-5].
60-1.)
NOTE: Ensure the coolant tank is secured into the
NOTE: The coolant tank can be raised to facilitate coolant tank bracket.
access to the air cleaner.
Install the rear grille.
Figure 10-80-2
2
1
P100229
Open the latches (Item 2) and remove the cover (Item 1)

[Figure 10-80-2].

AIR CLEANER SERVICE (CONT’D) Figure 10-80-5
Replacing Filter Elements (Cont’d)
Inner Filter
Only replace the inner filter element under the following

conditions:
• Replace the inner filter element every third time the

outer filter is replaced. 2
• After the outer element has been replaced, start the

engine and run at full rpm. If service code [M0117]
(Air Filter Plugged) is still displayed in the data 1
display, replace the inner filter element. P100229
P-90648A
Remove the rear grille. (See REAR GRILLE on Page 50-

60-1.) Install the cover (Item 1) and secure the latches (Item 2)
[Figure 10-80-5].
Remove the cover [Figure 10-80-2] and the outer filter
element [Figure 10-80-3]. NOTE: Ensure the intake hose is connected to the
fitting on the fan housing (Inset) [Figure 10-
Figure 10-80-4 80-5].

NOTE: Ensure the coolant tank is secured into the
coolant tank bracket.
P-90646
Remove the inner filter element (Item 1) [Figure 10-80-

4].
NOTE: Make sure the filter housing is free of dirt and

debris. Verify that sealing surfaces are clean.
DO NOT use compressed air.
Install new inner filter element. Push all the way in until it
contacts the base of the housing.
Install the outer filter element [Figure 10-80-3].

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Check the cooling system every day to prevent over-

heating, loss of performance or engine damage.
Maintenance Platform
Figure 10-90-1
P100039A

A maintenance platform (Item 1) [Figure 10-90-1] is
available from your Bobcat dealer to facilitate access
when cleaning the engine cooling system.
WARNING
Wear safety glasses to prevent eye injury when any
of the following conditions exist:
• When fluids are under pressure.
• Flying debris or loose material is present.
• Engine is running.
• Tools are being used.
W-2019-0907

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM (CONT’D) Loaders Without Air Conditioning
Cleaning Figure 10-90-4

60-1.)
Loaders With Air Conditioning

1
Figure 10-90-2
2
2 2
P100779
3
Use low air pressure or water pressure to clean the top of

the oil cooler (Item 1) [Figure 10-90-4].
All Loaders

P100329
Unhook the two rubber straps (Item 2) [Figure 10-90-4].

Use low air pressure or water pressure to clean the top of
the air conditioning condenser (Item 1) [Figure 10-90-2]. Figure 10-90-5
The area between the air conditioning condenser and the
oil cooler will require occasional cleaning. Remove the
bolts (Item 2) and the brackets (Item 3) [Figure 10-90-2].
Figure 10-90-3
1
1
2
3
2 P100327
P100331 Raise the oil cooler (Item 1) until the bar (Item 2) drops
into place to support the oil cooler. Use low air pressure
NOTE: Be careful when raising and lowering the air or water pressure to clean the top of the radiator (Item 3)
conditioning condenser so that the air [Figure 10-90-5].
conditioning condenser does not fall on the
oil cooler and damage the fins. Raise the bar (Item 2) [Figure 10-90-5] slightly and lower
the oil cooler. Fasten the two rubber straps.
Raise the air conditioning condenser (Item 1) and use
low air pressure or water pressure to clean the top of the Check the cooling system for leaks.
oil cooler (Item 2) [Figure 10-90-3].
Lower the air conditioning condenser (Item 1) [Figure Install the rear grille.
10-90-3]. Install the brackets (Item 3) [Figure 10-90-2]
and the bolts (Item 2) [Figure 10-90-2].

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM (CONT’D)
Checking Level

60-1.)
Figure 10-90-6
P100330

Check coolant level using the level markers (Item 2)
[Figure 10-90-6] on the tank. Coolant must be between
top and bottom level markers when the engine is cold.
NOTE: The loader is factory filled with propylene

glycol coolant (purple color). DO NOT mix
propylene glycol with ethylene glycol.
Use a refractometer to check the condition of propylene

glycol in your cooling system.
IMPORTANT
AVOID ENGINE DAMAGE
Always use the correct ratio of water to antifreeze.
Too much antifreeze reduces cooling system

efficiency and may cause serious premature engine
damage.
Too little antifreeze reduces the additives which

protect the internal engine components; reduces the
boiling point and freeze protection of the system.
Always add a premixed solution. Adding full strength

concentrated coolant can cause serious premature
engine damage.
I-2124-0497

Removing And Replacing Coolant
For the service interval for replacing the engine

coolant (See SERVICE SCHEDULE on Page 10-70-1.)
Open the rear door and remove the rear grille.
Remove the coolant fill cap (Item 1) [Figure 10-90-6].
Figure 10-90-7

P-90657A
Attach a hose to the coolant drain petcock (Item 1)

[Figure 10-90-7] located to the left of the oil filter
assembly. Open the petcock and drain the coolant into a
container. Close the petcock and remove the hose.
Recycle or dispose of coolant in an environmentally safe
manner.
Close the rear door.
Mix new coolant in a separate container. (See Capacities

on Page SPEC-10-5.)
The correct mixture of coolant to provide a -37°C (-34°F)

freeze protection is 5 L propylene glycol mixed with 4,4 L
of water OR 1 U.S. gal propylene glycol mixed with 3.5 qt
of water.
Add premixed coolant, 47% water and 53% propylene

glycol to the coolant tank until the coolant level reaches
the lower marker on the tank [Figure 10-90-6].
Install the coolant fill cap.
NOTE: When installing the coolant fill cap, the cap

must be tightened until it clicks.
Run the engine until it is at operating temperature. Stop

the engine. Check the coolant level when cool. Add
coolant as needed.

FUEL SYSTEM Biodiesel Blend Fuel
Fuel Specifications Biodiesel blend fuel has unique qualities that should be
considered before using in this machine:
Use only clean, high quality diesel fuel, Grade No. 2 or
Grade No. 1. • Cold weather conditions can lead to plugged fuel
system components and hard starting.
The following is one suggested blending guideline which
should prevent fuel gelling during cold temperatures: • Biodiesel blend fuel is an excellent medium for
microbial growth and contamination which can cause
TEMPERATURE NO. 2 NO. 1 corrosion and plugging of fuel system components.
-9°C (+15°F) 100% 0% • Use of biodiesel blend fuel may result in premature
Down to -29°C (-20°F) 50% 50% failure of fuel system components, such as plugged
Below -29°C (-20°F) 0% 100% fuel filters and deteriorated fuel lines.
• Shorter maintenance intervals may be required, such

At a minimum, Low Sulfur (500 ppm sulfur) Diesel Fuel
as cleaning the fuel system and replacing fuel filters
must be used in this machine:
and fuel lines.
The following fuels may also be used in this machine:
• Using biodiesel blended fuels containing more than
five percent biodiesel can affect engine life and cause
• Ultra Low Sulfur (15 ppm sulfur) Diesel Fuel.
deterioration of hoses, tubelines, injectors, injector
pump and seals.

• Biodiesel Blend Fuel - Must contain no more than five
percent biodiesel mixed with low sulfur or ultra low
Apply the following guidelines if biodiesel blend fuel is
sulfur petroleum based diesel. This is commonly
used:
marketed as B5 blended diesel fuel. B5 blended
diesel fuel must meet ASTM D975 (US Standard) or
• Ensure the fuel tank is as full as possible at all times
EN590 (EU Standard) specifications.
to prevent moisture from collecting in the fuel tank.
• Ensure that the fuel tank cap is securely tightened.
• Biodiesel blend fuel can damage painted surfaces,

remove all spilled fuel from painted surfaces
immediately.
• Drain all water from the fuel filter daily before

operating the machine.
• Do not exceed engine oil change interval. Extended

oil change intervals can cause engine damage.
• Before vehicle storage; drain the fuel tank, refill with

100% petroleum diesel fuel, add fuel stabilizer and
run the engine for at least 30 minutes.
NOTE: Biodiesel blend fuel does not have long term

stability and should not be stored for more
than 3 months.

FUEL SYSTEM (CONT’D) Figure 10-100-2
Filling The Fuel Tank WRONG
WARNING
Stop and cool the engine before adding fuel. NO
SMOKING! Failure to obey warnings can cause an
explosion or fire.
W-2063-0807
Open the rear door. NA1726
Figure 10-100-1
Use a clean, approved safety container to add fuel of the
correct specification. Add fuel only in an area that has
free movement of air and no open flames or sparks. NO
SMOKING [Figure 10-100-2].
Install and tighten the fuel cap (Item 1) [Figure 10-100-

1 1].
WARNING
P100035 AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Always clean up spilled fuel or oil. Keep heat, flames,
sparks or lighted tobacco away from fuel and oil.
Remove the fill cap (Item 1) [Figure 10-100-1]. Failure to use care around combustibles can cause
explosion or fire.
W-2103-0508

FUEL SYSTEM (CONT’D) Removing Air From The Fuel System
Fuel Filter After replacing the filter element or when the fuel tank
has run out of fuel, the air must be removed from the fuel
For the service interval for removing water from, or system before starting the engine.
replacing the fuel filter (See SERVICE SCHEDULE on
Page 10-70-1.)
Removing Water
WARNING
Figure 10-100-3
Diesel fuel or hydraulic fluid under pressure can
penetrate skin or eyes, causing serious injury or
death. Fluid leaks under pressure may not be visible.
Use a piece of cardboard or wood to find leaks. Do
not use your bare hand. Wear safety goggles. If fluid
enters skin or eyes, get immediate medical attention
from a physician familiar with this injury.
W-2072-0807
2
Figure 10-100-4
1

1
P-90653A
Loosen the drain (Item 1) [Figure 10-100-3] at the

bottom of the filter element to remove water from the
filter.
Replacing Element
2
Remove the filter element (Item 2) [Figure 10-100-3].
Clean the area around the filter housing. Put clean oil on
the seal of the new filter element. Install the fuel filter, and P100780
hand tighten.
Open the vent (Item 1) [Figure 10-100-4] on the fuel filter
Remove air from the fuel system. (See Removing Air
housing.
From The Fuel System on Page 10-100-3.)
Squeeze the hand pump (priming bulb) (Item 2) [Figure
10-100-4] until fuel flows from the vent with no air
bubbles.
WARNING Close the vent (Item 1) [Figure 10-100-4].

Failure to use care around combustibles can cause
explosion or fire.
W-2103-0508


ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM Engine Oil Chart
Checking And Adding Engine Oil Figure 10-110-2

ENGINE OIL
Check the engine oil level every day before starting the RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY NUMBER
engine for the work shift. (LUBRICATION OILS FOR DIESEL ENGINE
CRANKCASE)
Figure 10-110-1
P-90654A

TEMPERATURE RANGE ANTICIPATED BEFORE
Park the machine on level ground. Open the rear door NEXT OIL CHANGE (DIESEL ENGINES MUST USE API
and remove the dipstick (Item 1) [Figure 10-110-1]. CLASSIFICATION CI-4 OR BETTER)
[1] Synthetic Oil - Use recommendation from Synthetic
Keep the oil level between the marks on the dipstick. Do Oil Manufacturer.
not overfill.
Use good quality engine oil that meets API Service
Remove the oil fill cap (Item 2) [Figure 10-110-1] to add Classification of CI-4 or better [Figure 10-110-2].
engine oil.
WARNING
explosion or fire.
W-2103-0508

ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM (CONT’D) Install and tighten the oil drain cap [Figure 10-110-4].
Removing And Replacing Oil And Filter Install the cover and the cover mounting bolts [Figure
10-110-3]. Tighten all bolts.
For the service interval for replacing the engine oil and
filter (See SERVICE SCHEDULE on Page 10-70-1.) Figure 10-110-5
Run the engine until it is at operating temperature. Stop

the engine.
Figure 10-110-3 2
3
1
P-90654A
2
Open the rear door, remove the oil filter (Item 2) [Figure

10-110-5] and clean the filter housing surface.
3 P-90497A
P-90499A
Use genuine Bobcat filter only.
The oil drain hose is located behind a cover under the Put clean oil on the new filter gasket, install the filter and
right rear corner of the loader (Inset) [Figure 10-110-3]. hand tighten.
Remove two cover mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure 10- Remove the oil fill cap (Item 3) [Figure 10-110-5].
110-3].
Put oil in the engine and replace the fill cap. For the
Loosen one cover mounting bolt (Item 2) and slide the correct quantity (See Capacities on Page SPEC-10-5.)
cover (Item 3) [Figure 10-110-3] to the rear of the loader. Do not overfill.
Figure 10-110-4 Start the engine and let it run for several minutes. Stop
the engine and check for leaks at the filter.
Remove the dipstick (Item 1) [Figure 10-110-5] and

check the oil level.
Add oil as needed if it is not at the top mark on the

dipstick. Install the dipstick and close the rear door.
WARNING
1 AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
P-90498A
explosion or fire.
Remove the oil drain cap (Item 1) [Figure 10-110-4] from W-2103-0508
the oil drain hose and drain the oil into a container.
Recycle or dispose of used oil in an environmentally safe
manner.

HYDRAULIC / HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM Hydraulic / Hydrostatic Fluid Chart
Checking And Adding Fluid Figure 10-120-3

HYDRAULIC / HYDROSTATIC FLUID
Check the hydraulic / hydrostatic fluid level every day RECOMMENDED ISO VISCOSITY GRADE (VG)
before starting the work shift. AND VISCOSITY INDEX (VI)
Park the loader on a level surface, lower the lift arms and
place the attachment flat on the ground or tilt the Bob-
Tach fully back if no attachment is installed.
Stop the engine.
Figure 10-120-1
TEMPERATURE RANGE ANTICIPATED

DURING MACHINE USE
[1] VG 100; Minimum VI 130
1
[3] BOBCAT All-Season Fluid
[4] BOBCAT Synthetic Fluid
[5] BOBCAT Biodegradable Hydraulic / Hydrostatic
Fluid (Unlike biodegradable fluids that are vegetable

based, Bobcat biodegradable fluid is formulated to
prevent oxidation and thermal breakdown at operating
P100391 temperatures.)
Check the fluid level in the sight gauge (Item 1) [Figure Use only recommended fluid in the hydraulic system
10-120-1]. Keep the fluid level within the operating range. [Figure 10-120-3]. (See Hydraulic System on Page
SPEC-10-4.)
60-1.)
Figure 10-120-2
WARNING
1 sparks or lighted tobacco away from fuel and oil.
explosion or fire.
W-2103-0508
P100055
Remove the fill cap (Item 1) [Figure 10-120-2].
Add fluid as needed to bring the level within the operating

range in the sight gauge (Item 1) [Figure 10-120-1].
Install the fill cap (Item 1) [Figure 10-120-2] and install

the rear grille.

HYDRAULIC / HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM (CONT’D) Figure 10-120-5
Removing And Replacing Hydraulic Fluid
For the correct service interval (See SERVICE

SCHEDULE on Page 10-70-1.)
Replace the fluid if it becomes contaminated or after 1

major repair.
Always replace the hydraulic / hydrostatic filter and the 2

hydraulic charge filter whenever the hydraulic fluid is
replaced. (See Removing And Replacing Hydraulic /
Hydrostatic Filter on Page 10-120-4.) and (See
Removing And Replacing Hydraulic Charge Filter on
Page 10-120-5.) P100327

60-1.) Raise the oil cooler (Item 1) until the bar (Item 2) [Figure
10-120-5] drops into place to support the oil cooler. This
Figure 10-120-4 will aid in draining the hydraulic fluid.
Figure 10-120-6

1
1
P100055
P100007
Remove the right side access cover bolts (Item 1)

[Figure 10-120-6] and remove the cover. (Lift arms
shown raised for visual clarity.)
P100779
Remove the hydraulic fill cap (Item 1) and unhook the

two rubber straps (Item 2) [Figure 10-120-4].

Removing And Replacing Hydraulic Fluid (Cont’d)
Figure 10-120-7
1
1
P-90506
Remove and clean the hydraulic fill screen (Item 1)

P100784 [Figure 10-120-8]. Use low air pressure to dry the
screen.
Pinch off and disconnect the hose (Item 1) [Figure 10- Install hydraulic fill screen and add the correct fluid to the
120-7] from the cooling fan motor. Route the hose out the reservoir until the fluid level is within the operating range

side of the loader and drain the fluid into a container. of the sight gauge. (See Capacities on Page SPEC-10-
5.) and (See Checking And Adding Fluid on Page 10-
Connect the hose to the cooling fan motor when the fluid 120-1.)
stops draining.
Install the hydraulic fill cap.
Recycle or dispose of used fluid in an environmentally
safe manner. Install the rear grille.
Start the engine and operate the loader hydraulic

controls.
WARNING
Stop the engine and check for leaks.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir and add as needed.
(See Checking And Adding Fluid on Page 10-120-1.)
explosion or fire.
W-2103-0508
Install the side access cover and bolts [Figure 10-120-6].
Raise the bar supporting the oil cooler and lower the oil
cooler. Fasten the two rubber straps [Figure 10-120-4].

HYDRAULIC / HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM (CONT’D) Install new O-ring and lubricate with clean oil.
Removing And Replacing Hydraulic / Hydrostatic Install new filter element ensuring that element is fully
Filter seated in the housing.
For the correct service interval. (See SERVICE Install the filter cap and tighten to 25 N•m (18 ft-lb)
SCHEDULE on Page 10-70-1.) torque.

60-1.)
The filter housing is located behind the hydraulic fluid

WARNING
reservoir.
Clean the top of the filter housing. Always clean up spilled fuel or oil. Keep heat, flames,
Figure 10-120-9 Failure to use care around combustibles can cause
explosion or fire.
W-2103-0508

controls.

1
WARNING
P100047 Diesel fuel or hydraulic fluid under pressure can
Remove the filter cap (Item 1) [Figure 10-120-9].
Figure 10-120-10
W-2072-0807
1
Stop the engine and check for leaks at the filter.

2 P100044 P100046
Remove the filter element (Item 1) [Figure 10-120-10]

and discard.
Remove the O-ring (Item 2) [Figure 10-120-10] and

discard.

Removing And Replacing Hydraulic Charge Filter
The hydraulic charge filter is located under the operator

cab. For the correct service interval (See SERVICE
Raise the operator cab. (See Raising on Page 10-30-2.) 1
Figure 10-120-11
1
P100785A
2 Remove and discard the filter element (Item 1) [Figure

10-120-13].
Clean the surface of the filter housing and the filter base
where they contact the filter element seal.
1

Put clean oil on the seal of the new filter element. Install
P100275 the element on the filter base. Install and tighten the filter
housing to 47 - 54 N•m (35 - 40 ft-lb) torque.
Unhook the four rubber straps (Item 1) and remove the

lower fan duct (Item 2) [Figure 10-120-11].
Figure 10-120-12
WARNING
explosion or fire.
W-2103-0508
1
Install the lower fan duct [Figure 10-120-11].
NOTE: Failure to install the lower fan duct correctly

may result in decreased cooling.
Lower the operator cab. (See Lowering on Page 10-30-

P100785 3.)

Place a suitable container below the filter housing and controls.
remove the filter housing (Item 1) [Figure 10-120-12]
using a socket wrench.

safe manner.

HYDRAULIC / HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM (CONT’D) Breather Cap
Removing And Replacing Hydraulic Charge Filter See the SERVICE SCHEDULE for the correct
(Cont’d) replacement interval. (See SERVICE SCHEDULE on
Page 10-70-1.)

WARNING 60-1.)
Figure 10-120-14
not use your bare hand. Wear safety goggles. If fluid 1
W-2072-0807
Stop the engine and check for leaks at the filter.


P100055
Remove the breather cap (Item 1) [Figure 10-120-14]

and discard.
Install new breather cap.

BOB-TACH (HAND LEVER) The spring loaded wedges (Item 1) must contact the
lower edge of the holes in the attachment mounting
Inspection And Maintenance frame (Item 2) [Figure 10-130-2].
Figure 10-130-1 If the wedges do not contact the lower edge of the holes
[Figure 10-130-2], the attachment will be loose and can
come off the Bob-Tach.
Figure 10-130-3
P-85513A
Move the Bob-Tach levers down to engage the wedges

[Figure 10-130-1].

The levers and wedges must move freely.
WARNING
The Bob-Tach wedges must extend through the
holes in the attachment mounting frame. Levers
must be fully down and locked. Failure to secure
wedges can allow attachment to come off.
W-2715-0208
Figure 10-130-2
B-17460
1
Inspect the mounting frame on the attachment and Bob-

Tach, linkages and wedges for excessive wear or
2
damage [Figure 10-130-3]. Replace any parts that are
damaged, bent or missing. Keep all fasteners tight.
Wedge must contact lower Look for cracked welds. Contact your Bobcat dealer for
edge of hole in the repair or replacement parts.
attachment mounting
frame. Lubricate the wedges. (See SERVICE SCHEDULE on
Page 10-70-1.) and (See LUBRICATING THE LOADER
P-31233A P-31233
on Page 10-140-1.)
The wedges (Item 1) [Figure 10-130-2] must extend

through the holes in the attachment mounting frame.


BOB-TACH (POWER) The wedges (Item 1) [Figure 10-131-2] must extend
through the holes in the attachment mounting frame.
This machine may be equipped with a Power Bob-Tach.
The spring loaded wedges (Item 1) must contact the
Inspection And Maintenance lower edge of the holes in the attachment mounting
frame (Item 2) [Figure 10-131-2].
Figure 10-131-1
If the wedges do not contact the lower edge of the holes
[Figure 10-131-2], the attachment will be loose and can
come off the Bob-Tach.
1
Figure 10-131-3
P-85320A
Push and hold the BOB-TACH “WEDGES UP” switch

(Item 1) until wedges are fully raised. Push and hold the
BOB-TACH “WEDGES DOWN” switch (Item 2) [Figure
10-131-1] until the wedges are fully down.
The levers and wedges must move freely.
WARNING
The Bob-Tach wedges must extend through the
holes in the attachment mounting frame. Levers
must be fully down and locked. Failure to secure
wedges can allow attachment to come off.
W-2715-0208
Figure 10-131-2
B-17460
1
Inspect the mounting frame on the attachment and Bob-

Tach, linkages and wedges for excessive wear or
2 damage [Figure 10-131-3]. Replace any parts that are
damaged, bent or missing. Keep all fasteners tight.
Look for cracked welds. Contact your Bobcat dealer for

Wedge must contact lower repair or replacement parts.
edge of hole in the
attachment mounting Lubricate the wedges. (See SERVICE SCHEDULE on
frame. Page 10-70-1.) and (See LUBRICATING THE LOADER
on Page 10-140-1.)
P-31233A P-31233


LUBRICATING THE LOADER Figure 10-140-2
Lubrication Locations
Lubricate the loader as specified for the best

performance of the loader. (See SERVICE SCHEDULE
on Page 10-70-1.)
Record the operating hours each time you lubricate the

Bobcat loader.
2
Always use a good quality lithium based multipurpose
grease when you lubricate the loader. Apply the lubricant
until extra grease shows.
Remove attachment from the loader. P-90572A
Tilt the Bob-Tach forward until it contacts the ground.

2. Base End Lift Cylinder (Both Sides) (2) [Figure 10-
Stop the engine. 140-2].
Lubricate the following: Figure 10-140-3
Figure 10-140-1

3
P-90543A
P-90666
3. Lift Arm Pivot Pin (Both Sides) (2) [Figure 10-140-3].
1. Rod End Lift Cylinder (Both Sides) (2) [Figure 10-

140-1].

LUBRICATING THE LOADER (CONT’D) Figure 10-140-6
Lubrication Locations (Cont’d)
Figure 10-140-4
P-85720
6. Rod End Tilt Cylinder (Both Sides) (2) [Figure 10-

P-90542A
140-6].
Figure 10-140-7
4. Lift Arm Link Pivot (Both Sides) (2) [Figure 10-140-4].

Figure 10-140-5
5
7
P-85719
P-85484
7. Bob-Tach Pivot Pin (Both Sides) (2) [Figure 10-140-
7].
5. Base End Tilt Cylinder (Both Sides) (2) [Figure 10-

140-5].

LUBRICATING THE LOADER (CONT’D) Figure 10-140-10
Lubrication Locations (Cont’d)
Figure 10-140-8
10
P-90544A
10. Front Control Link (Both Sides) (2) [Figure 10-140-

P-85487
10].
8. Bob-Tach Wedge (Both Sides) (2) [Figure 10-140-8].

Figure 10-140-9
P100393
9. Rear Control Link (Both Sides) (2) [Figure 10-140-9].


SPARK ARRESTOR MUFFLER
Cleaning Procedure
WARNING
See the SERVICE SCHEDULE for service interval for
cleaning the spark arrester muffler. (See SERVICE
When the engine is running during service, the
driving and steering controls must be in neutral and
the parking brake engaged. Failure to do so can
Do not operate the loader with a defective exhaust
cause injury or death.
system. W-2006-1209
Start the engine and run for about 10 seconds while a

IMPORTANT second person, wearing safety glasses, holds a piece of
wood over the outlet of the muffler.
This machine is factory equipped with a U.S.D.A. This will force contaminants out through the cleanout
Forestry Service approved spark arrestor exhaust hole.
system.
Stop the engine.
The spark arrestor muffler, if equipped, must be
cleaned to keep it in working condition. The spark Install and tighten the plug. Close the rear door.
arrestor muffler must be serviced by dumping the
spark chamber every 100 hours of operation.
WARNING

On some models, the turbocharger functions as the
spark arrestor and must operate correctly for proper
spark arrestor function. AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
When an engine is running in an enclosed area, fresh
If this machine is operated on flammable forest, air must be added to avoid concentration of exhaust
brush, or grass covered land, it must be equipped fumes. If the engine is stationary, vent the exhaust
with a spark arrestor attached to the exhaust system outside. Exhaust fumes contain odorless, invisible
and maintained in working order. Failure to do so will gases which can kill without warning.
be in violation of California State Law, Section 4442. W-2050-0807
PRC. Refer to local laws and regulations for spark
arrestor requirements.
I-2284-0409
Stop the engine and open the rear door. WARNING

Figure 10-150-1
Stop engine and allow the muffler to cool before
cleaning the spark chamber. Wear safety goggles.
Failure to obey can cause serious injury.
W-2011-1285
WARNING
1
Never use machine in atmosphere with explosive
dust or gases or where exhaust can contact
P-90662A flammable material. Failure to obey warnings can
cause injury or death.
Remove the plug (Item 1) [Figure 10-150-1] from the W-2068-1285
bottom of the muffler.


PIVOT PINS
Inspection And Maintenance
Figure 10-160-1
P-90667
All lift arm and cylinder pivots have a large pin held in
position with a retainer bolt and lock nut (Item 1) [Figure

10-160-1].
Check that the lock nuts are tightened to 48 - 54 N•m (35

- 40 ft-lb) torque.


LOADER STORAGE AND RETURN TO SERVICE Return To Service
Storage After the Bobcat loader has been in storage, it is

necessary to follow a list of items to return the loader to
Sometimes it may be necessary to store your Bobcat service.
loader for an extend period of time. Below is a list of
items to perform before storage. • Check the engine and hydraulic oil levels; check
coolant level.
• Thoroughly clean the loader including the engine
compartment. • Install a fully charged battery.
• Lubricate the loader. • Remove grease from exposed cylinder rods.
• Replace worn or damaged parts. • Check all belt tensions.
• Park the loader in a dry protected shelter. • Be sure all shields and guards are in place.
• Lower the lift arms all the way and put the bucket flat • Lubricate the loader.
on the ground.
• Check track condition and remove blocks from under
• Put blocks under the frame to remove weight from the frame.
tracks.
• Remove cover from exhaust pipe opening.
• Put grease on any exposed cylinder rods.

• Start the engine and let run for a few minutes while
• Put fuel stabilizer in the fuel tank and run the engine observing the instrument panels and systems for
a few minutes to circulate the stabilizer to the pump correct operation.
and fuel injectors.
• Operate machine, check for correct function.
If biodiesel blend fuel has been used, perform the
following: • Stop the engine and check for leaks. Repair as
needed.
Drain the fuel tank, refill with 100% petroleum diesel
fuel, add fuel stabilizer and run the engine for at least
30 minutes.
• Drain and flush the cooling system. Refill with

premixed coolant.
• Replace all fluids and filters (engine, hydraulic /

hydrostatic).
• Replace air cleaner, heater and air conditioning filters.
• Put all controls in neutral position.
• Remove the battery. Be sure the electrolyte level is

correct then charge the battery. Store it in a cool dry
place above freezing temperatures and charge it
periodically during storage.
• Cover the exhaust pipe opening.
• Tag the machine to indicate that it is in storage

condition.


STOPPING THE ENGINE AND LEAVING THE Unbuckle the seat belt.
LOADER
Remove the key from the switch (Standard Key Panel) to
Procedure prevent operation of the loader by unauthorized
personnel.
Stop the loader on level ground.
NOTE: Activating the Password Lockout Feature on
Fully lower the lift arms and put the attachment flat on the machines with the Keyless Start Panel or the
ground. Deluxe Instrumentation Panel allows
operation of the loader without using a
Figure 10-180-1 password. (See Password Lockout Feature on
Page 60-190-2.) or (See Password Lockout
Feature on Page 60-191-1.)
Figure 10-180-3

P-90525A
P-85737A P-85735A
Push the engine speed control fully down [Figure 10-

180-1] to decrease the engine speed. Exit the loader using grab handles, safety tread and
steps (maintaining a 3-point contact) [Figure 10-180-3].
Engage the parking brake.
Figure 10-180-2
1
WARNING
Before you leave the operator’s seat:
2 • Lower the lift arms and put the attachment flat on
the ground.
• Stop the engine.
• Engage the parking brake.
• Raise the seat bar.
P-90688A P-90214A • Move all controls to the NEUTRAL / LOCKED
position to make sure the lift, tilt and traction
drive functions are deactivated.
Turn the key switch to the STOP position (Item 1) or
press the STOP button (Item 2) [Figure 10-180-2]. The seat bar system must deactivate these functions
when the seat bar is up. See your Bobcat dealer for
NOTE: If the loader lights are ON, they will remain ON service if controls do not deactivate.
for approximately 90 seconds after turning W-2463-1110
the loader OFF.
Raise the seat bar and make sure the lift and tilt functions
are deactivated.


EMERGENCY EXIT Figure 10-190-3
The front opening on the operator cab and rear window

provide exits.
External Access
Figure 10-190-1
P-90676
Exit through the rear of the operator cab [Figure 10-190-

3].
Front Door
P-90669A
This machine may be equipped with a front door.

The rear window can be removed from outside the loader NOTE: Use this procedure to remove the front door
using a T40 TORX® driver. Turn both screws (Item 1) only under emergency conditions. Damage to
[Figure 10-190-1] in until the latches disengage from the machine may occur.
window frame. Pull the top of the window away from the
cab and lift up to remove. Figure 10-190-4
Rear Window
NOTE: Use this procedure to remove the rear window

only under emergency conditions. Damage to
machine may occur.
Figure 10-190-2 1
P-90725
Turn both latches (Item 1) [Figure 10-190-4] down until

they disengage from the door frame.
Push the door out of the operator cab door frame.
P-85309A Exit through the opening.
Turn both latches (Item 1) [Figure 10-190-2] in until they

disengage from the window frame.
Push the rear window out of the rear of the operator cab.

EMERGENCY EXIT (CONT’D) Figure 10-190-7
Front Door (Cont’d)
Front Door Reassembly

2
Reassemble the front door using the following
instructions if the door was opened using the emergency
exit procedure.
Figure 10-190-5
1
1
P-90685
Orient the latches as shown (Item 1) and install the door

hinges (Item 2) [Figure 10-190-7] on the door. (Bottom
hinge shown)
2
Figure 10-190-8

P-85781A
1
Disconnect electrical connector (Item 2) and washer fluid

hose (Item 1) [Figure 10-190-5]. 2
Figure 10-190-6
2
3
P-90686A
Install cast washers (Item 2) on door hinges taking care

to match rectangular surfaces. Hold cast washer firmly
1 against door and rotate latch (Item 1) [Figure 10-190-8]
up to lock cast washer into place. (Bottom hinge shown)
(Plastic cap shown removed for clarity)
P-85588A P-85589A Install door on loader.
Install the gas spring socket on the ball stud fitting. Install
Rotate and pull the clip (Item 1) out of the gas spring the clip into the hole in the gas spring socket. Rotate the
socket. Pull the gas spring socket (Item 3) straight off the clip to lock into place [Figure 10-190-6].
ball stud fitting (Item 2) [Figure 10-190-6].
Connect electrical connector (Item 2) and washer fluid
Remove the door hinges from the loader. hose (Item 1) [Figure 10-190-5].

SEAT BELT Figure 10-200-9
Inspection And Maintenance 1
WARNING 3
Failure to properly inspect and maintain the seat belt

can cause lack of operator restraint resulting in
serious injury or death.
W-2466-0703
2 4
Check the seat belt daily for correct function.
Inspect the seat belt system thoroughly at least once

each year or more often if the machine is exposed to
severe environmental conditions or applications.
Any seat belt system that shows cuts, fraying, extreme or

unusual wear, significant discolorations due to ultraviolet
UV exposure, dusty / dirty conditions, abrasion to the
seat belt webbing, or damage to the buckle, latch plate,

retractor (if equipped), hardware or any other obvious
problem should be replaced immediately. B-22283
The items below are referenced in [Figure 10-200-9].
1. Check the webbing. If the system is equipped with a

retractor, pull the webbing completely out and inspect
the full length of the webbing. Look for cuts, wear,
fraying, dirt and stiffness.
2. Check the buckle and latch for correct operation.

Make sure latch plate is not excessively worn,
deformed or buckle is not damaged or casing broken.
3. Check the retractor web storage device (if equipped)

by extending webbing to determine if it looks correct
and that it spools out and retracts webbing correctly.
4. Check webbing in areas exposed to ultraviolet (UV)

rays from the sun or extreme dust or dirt. If the original
color of the webbing in these areas is extremely faded
and / or the webbing is packed with dirt, the webbing
strength may have deteriorated.
See your Bobcat dealer for seat belt system replacement

parts for your machine.


HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10-1

Glossary Of Hydraulic / Hydrostatic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10-1
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10-5
CYLINDER (LIFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-20-1

Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-20-1
Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-20-2
Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-20-6
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-20-7
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-20-9
CYLINDER (TILT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-21-1

Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-21-1
Base End Pivot Pin Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-21-4
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-21-6
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-21-8

CYLINDER (BOB-TACH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22-1
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22-1
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22-4
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22-5
MAIN RELIEF VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-30-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-30-1
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-30-2
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-30-4

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (STANDARD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40-1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40-1
Mount Bracket Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40-5
Identification Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40-6
Lift Load Check Valve Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40-7
Load Check Valve Removal And Installation (Tilt And Auxiliary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40-8
Anti-Cavitation Valve Removal And Installation (Lift, Rod End) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40-9
Port Relief / Anti-Cavitation Valve Removal And Installation (Lift, Base End) . . . . . . 20-40-9
Port Relief / Anti-Cavitation Valve Removal And Installation (Tilt, Base End) . . . . . 20-40-10
Port Relief / Anti-Cavitation Valve Removal And Installation (Tilt, Rod End) . . . . . 20-40-10
Port Relief Valve Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-40-11
Plug Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40-12
Rubber Boot Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40-13
End Cap Block Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40-14
Lift Spool And Detent Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40-15
Tilt Spool Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40-25
Auxiliary Spool Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40-27
Auxiliary Solenoid Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40-29
Solenoid Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40-30
Lock Valve Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40-31

Lift Arm Bypass Orifice Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40-33
Main Relief Valve Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40-33
Check Valve Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40-34

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (ACS) OR (SJC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41-1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41-1
Actuator Removal And Installation (In Loader) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41-5
Actuator Removal And Installation (Out Of Loader) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41-7
Identification Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41-10
Mount Bracket Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-41-11
Lift Load Check Valve Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-41-11
Load Check Valve Removal And Installation (Tilt And Auxiliary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41-12
Anti-Cavitation Valve Removal And Installation (Lift, Rod End) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41-13
Port Relief / Anti-Cavitation Valve Removal And Installation (Lift, Base End) . . . . . 20-41-13
Port Relief / Anti-Cavitation Valve Removal And Installation (Tilt, Base End) . . . . . 20-41-14
Port Relief / Anti-Cavitation Valve Removal And Installation (Tilt, Rod End) . . . . . 20-41-14
Port Relief Valve Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41-15
Plug Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41-16
End Cap Block Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41-17
Lift Spool Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41-17
Lift Spool Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41-19
Tilt Spool Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41-21
Auxiliary Spool Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41-23
Auxiliary Solenoid Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41-24

Lock Valve Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41-26
Lift Arm Bypass Orifice Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41-27
Main Relief Valve Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41-27
Check Valve Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41-28
LIFT ARM BYPASS CONTROL VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-50-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-50-1
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-50-1
Bracket Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-50-3
Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-50-3
HYDRAULIC PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-60-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-60-1
Pump Test At Quick Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-60-1
Direct Pump Test (Standard Section) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-60-2
Direct Pump Test (Charge Section) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-60-4
Hydraulic Pump Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-60-7

HYDRAULIC PUMP (HIGH FLOW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-61-1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-61-1
Pump Test At Quick Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-61-1
Direct Pump Test (Standard Section) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-61-2
Direct Pump Test (Charge Section) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-61-3
Direct Pump Test (High Flow Section) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-61-5
High Flow Relief Valve Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-61-7
High Flow Relief Valve Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-61-8
Solenoid Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-61-9
Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-61-10
Hydraulic Pump Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-61-11
Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-61-12
Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-61-13
HYDRAULIC / HYDROSTATIC FILTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-70-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-70-1
Housing Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-70-1
HYDRAULIC FLUID RESERVOIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-80-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-80-1

Hydraulic Fluid Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-80-2
OIL COOLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-90-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-90-1
BUCKET POSITION VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-100-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-100-1
Solenoid Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-100-2
REAR AUXILIARY DIVERTER VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-110-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-110-1
Solenoid Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-110-1
Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-110-2
Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-110-3
BOB-TACH (POWER) BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-120-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-120-1
FRONT AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC COUPLER BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-130-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-130-1

HYDRAULIC/HYDROSTATIC SCHEMATIC
WITH NO OPTIONS
T750 (S/N ANKA11001 AND ABOVE)
Printable Version Click Here
(PRINTED NOVEMBER 2010)

V-1429legend
LEGEND
1 RESERVOIR: 16 PILOTED ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL
CONTROL VALVE - LIFT CONTROL 33 HYDRAULIC BRAKE – SPRING APPLIED –
Capacity at sight gauge . . 9,8 L (2.6 U.S. gal)
PRESSURE RELEASE (SAPR)
System Capacity . . . . . . . 36,0 L (9.5 U.S. gal)
17 SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL
2 SIGHT GUAGE CONTROL VALVE - BICS CONTROL 34 SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL
CONTROL VALVE – BRAKE VALVE
18 FILTER - BICS CONTROL VALVE
3 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH:
(SCREEN) 35 FILTER – BRAKE VALVE
103 kPa (1,03 bar) (15 psi)
Normally Closed 19 CHECK VALVE - With 100 kPa (1,0 bar) 36 CHECK VALVE
(14.5 psi) Spring
4 FILTER - HYDRAULIC (CANISTER)
20 RESTRICTION . . . . . . . 2,0 mm (0.079 in) 37 CHARGE PUMP -
5 SPRING LOADED FILTER BY-PASS 51,1 L/min (13.5 U.S. gpm) at High Engine Idle
VALVE: 172 kPa (1,7 bar) (25 psi) 21 PULL BUTTON ACTIVATED
38 HYDRAULIC PUMP . . . . . . . Gear Type
6 DIAGNOSTIC COUPLER DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVE - LIFT
87,1 L/min (23.0 U.S gpm) at High Engine Idle
ARM BY-PASS
Dealer Copy -- Not
39 forVARIABLE
Resale CAPACITY DISPLACEMENT
7 RELIEF VALVE - MAIN: 22 ANTICAVITATION VALVE BIDIRECTIONAL HYDROSTATIC PUMP
24132 kPa (241 bar) (3500 psi)
at Front Quick Couplers 23 PROPORTIONAL RELIEF VALVE –
40 RELIEF/REPLENISHING VALVE - HIGH
8 RELIEF/ANTICAVITATION VALVE - (Fan Speed Regulator): 10797 – 12300 kPa PRESSURE: 36500 kPa (365 bar) (5294 psi)
PORT: 27579 kPa (276 bar) (4000 psi) (108 - 123 bar) (1566 - 1784 psi)
41 RELIEF VALVE - CHARGE INLET:
9 RELIEF/ANTICAVITATION VALVE - 24 SPRING LOADED FILTER BY-PASS VALVE: 3206 kPa (32, bar) (465 psi)
PORT (OPTIONAL): 27579 kPa
517 – 572 kPa (5,2 - 5,7 bar) (75 - 83 psi) at High Engine Idle
(276 bar) (4000 psi)
With 60 ° C (140 ° F) Fluid
10 SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL 25 FIXED CAPACITY DISPLACEMENT
HYDRAULIC MOTOR 42 CHECK VALVE – COLD WEATHER BY-PASS
CONTROL VALVE - AUXILIARY
With 345 kPa (3,45 bar) (50 psi) Spring
11 LOAD CHECK VALVE 26 FILTER - HYDRAULIC (CANISTER)
12 ANTICAVITATION VALVE 27 SENSOR – CHARGE PRESSURE –

Fan Filter
13 LIFT CYLINDER SPOOL - MADE TO 28 SENSOR – HYD. TEMPERATURE
RESTRICT FLOW DURING BOOM
DOWN BUT NOT DURING BOOM UP 29 RESTRICTION - 2,0 mm (0.079 inch)
14 FRONT AUXILIARY MANUAL PRESSURE
BLEED-OFF VALVE 30 CHECK VALVE - With 1400 kPa (14,0 bar)
(203 psi) Spring
15 PILOTED ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL
31 DRIVE MOTOR SHUTTLE VALVE
CONTROL VALVE - TILT CONTROL
32 FIXED CAPACITY DISPLACEMENT

BIDIRECTIONAL HYDROSTATIC NOTE: Unless otherwise specified
MOTOR springs have NO significant
pressure value.
Printed in U.S.A. V-1429legend (12-7-10)
91 of 898
INTEGRATED QUICK COUPLER BLOCK
(FRONT AUXILIARY LEFT SIDE LIFT ARM)
Male
DRIVE MOTOR 14
Male
L
30
29
Female
31
HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (SPOOL VALVE)
32
9
Z
10
A
10
33 B
Auxiliary Spool
TILT CYLINDERS
8
11
6 BICS CONTROL VALVE
HYDROSTATIC PUMP
39 Tilt Spool
8
15
M4
M
11
3
D C 16 LIFT CYLINDERS)
12 Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

40 40 Lift Spool
13
41 11 18 18
A
19
B
17 ?
IN 20
2
M2 M1 7
6
21
40 40 Oil Cooler
1
39 42
RESERVOIR
T 3 2 (VENTED)
4 1
38
37 5
VARIABLE SPEED HYDRAULIC

FAN MOTOR W/ INTEGRATED FILTER
HYDRAULIC FILTER
26
24
27 WORKING CIRCUIT
BRAKE VALVE -
CHARGE
SPRING APPLIED
PRESSURE B
33 A
PRESSURE
RELEASE (SAPR) DRAIN / RETURN
25 22
3
Z
P DR 23
36 2
35 32
35 DRAIN/RETURN MANIFOLD
1
34
28 STANDARD WITH NO OPTIONS
31 29 T750 (S/N ANKA11001 & ABOVE)
30
L
DRIVE MOTOR
92 of 898
7194314
PRINTED IN U.S.A.
WITH ALL OPTIONS

V-1430legend
LEGEND
1 RESERVOIR: 19 PULL BUTTON ACTIVATED RELIEF VALVE - 8274 kPa (83 bar) (1200 psi) 57 DRIVE MOTOR SHUTTLE VALVE
36
Capacity at sight gauge . . 9,8 L (2.6 U.S. gal) DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVE - LIFT
System Capacity . . . . . . . 36,0 L (9.5 U.S. gal) ARM BY-PASS 37 CHECK VALVE - With 552 kPa) (5,5 bar) 58 FIXED CAPACITY DISPLACEMENT
(80 psi) Spring BIDIRECTIONAL HYDROSTATIC MOTOR
2 SIGHT GUAGE 20 LIFT CYLINDER SPOOL - MADE TO
38 RELIEF VALVE - 13790 kPa (137 bar) (2000 psi) 59 HYDRAULIC BRAKE – SPRING APPLIED –
RESTRICT FLOW DURING BOOM
3 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH: PRESSURE RELEASE (SAPR)
DOWN BUT NOT DURING BOOM UP 39 CHECK VALVE - With 2068 kPa (20,7 bar) (300
103 kPa (1,03 bar) (15 psi) 21 ANTICAVITATION VALVE 60 PILOT ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL
psi) Spring And With 0,40 mm (0.016 in) Orifice
Normally Closed CONTROL VALVE – 2 Speed
4 FILTER - HYDRAULIC (CANISTER) 22 PROPORTIONAL RELIEF VALVE – 40 RESTRICTION - 0,51 mm (0.020 in)
61 FIXED CAPACITY DISPLACEMENT
(Fan Speed Regulator): 10797 – 12300 kPa 41 SHUTTLE VALVE BIDIRECTIONAL HYDROSTATIC MOTOR
5 SPRING LOADED FILTER BY-PASS (108 - 123 bar) (1566 - 1784 psi)
VALVE: 172 kPa (1,7 bar) (25 psi) 42 RESTRICTION - 0,51 mm (0.020 in) 62 CHARGE PUMP -
23 SPRING LOADED FILTER BY-PASS VALVE:
6 DIAGNOSTIC COUPLER 517 – 572 kPa (5,2 - 5,7 bar) (75 - 83 psi) 51,1 L/min (13.5 U.S. gpm) at High Engine Idle
43 HYDRAULIC PUMP . . . . . . . Gear Type
24 FIXED CAPACITY DISPLACEMENT 63 HIGH FLOW HYDRAULIC PUMP Gear Type
7 RELIEF VALVE - MAIN: 87,1 L/min (23.0 U.S. gpm) at High Engine Idle
HYDRAULIC MOTOR Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale 51,1 L/min (13.5 U.S. gal) at High Engine Idle
24132 kPa (241 bar) (3500 psi) 44 PILOT ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL
at Front Quick Couplers 25 FILTER - HYDRAULIC (CANISTER) 64 RELIEF VALVE - 24132 kPa (241 bar) (3500 psi)
CONTROL VALVE - REAR AUXILIARY
8 RELIEF/ANTICAVITATION VALVE -
26 SENSOR – CHARGE PRESSURE – 45 RELIEF VALVE: 22753 kPa (228 bar) (3300 psi) 65 DUMP VALVE – ON / OFF
PORT: 27579 kPa (276 bar) (4000 psi)
Fan Filter 46 SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL 66 CHECK VALVE - With 34,5 kPa (0,34 bar)
9 RELIEF/ANTICAVITATION VALVE - 27 SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL (5.0 psi) Spring
CONTROL VALVE - TWO COIL
PORT (OPTIONAL): 27579 kPa CONTROL VALVE - BUCKET POSITION 67 FRONT AUXILIARY MANUAL PRESSURE
(276 bar) (4000 psi) 47 RESTRICTOR - 0,8 mm (0.031 in)
VALVE (ON/OFF) BLEED-OFF VALVE
10 SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL 28 FLOW DIVIDER ADJUSTMENT VALVE 48 LOAD SHUTTLE VALVE - BLEED OFF SENSOR – HYD. TEMPERATURE
68
CONTROL VALVE - AUXILIARY
29 PILOTED ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL 49 SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL 69
11 LOAD CHECK VALVE RIDE CONTROL VALVE
CONTROL VALVE - FLOW CONTROL CONTROL VALVE - BASE
12 ANTICAVITATION VALVE SPOOL 50 SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL 70 HIGH PRESSURE CHAMBER
30 CHECK VALVE - BUCKET POSITION CONTROL VALVE - ROD
13 PILOTED ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL 71 LOW PRESSURE CHAMBER
VALVE 51 VARIABLE CAPACITY DISPLACEMENT
CONTROL VALVE - TILT CONTROL
31 PILOTED ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL BIDIRECTIONAL HYDROSTATIC PUMP 72 SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECECTIONAL
14 PILOTED ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL
CONTROL VALVE - UNLOADING 52 RELIEF/REPLENISHING VALVE - HIGH CONTROL VALVE – BRAKE
CONTROL VALVE - LIFT CONTROL
SPOOL PRESSURE: 36500 kPa (365 bar) (5294 psi) 73 FILTER – BRAKE VALVE
32 PILOT ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL CONTROL 53 RELIEF VALVE - CHARGE INLET:
CONTROL VALVE - BICS CONTROL 74 CHECK VALVE
VALVE – HYDRAULIC POWERED BOB-TACH 3206 kPa (32, bar) (465 psi)
16 FILTER - BICS CONTROL VALVE With Build-up Valve 207 kPa (2,07 bar) (30 psi) at High Engine Idle 75 SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL
(SCREEN) With 60 ° C (140 ° F) Fluid
CHECK VALVE - With 100 kPa (1,0 bar) 33 FILTER - BOB-TACH VALVE CONTROL VALVE – 2 Speed Shift
17 54 CHECK VALVE – COLD WEATHER BY-PASS
(14.5 psi) Spring 76 SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL
34 RESTRICTION - 2,08 mm (0.08 in) With 345 kPa (3,45 bar) (50 psi) Spring
CONTROL VALVE – 2 Speed Make-up
18 RESTRICTION . . . . . . . 2,0 mm (0.079 in) 55 RESTRICTION - 1,5 mm (0.06 in)
35 SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL NOTE: Unless otherwise specified
CONTROL VALVE (TWO COIL) 56 CHECK VALVE - With 1379 kPa 13,8 bar springs have NO significant
(200 psi) Spring pressure value.
93 of 898
INTEGRATED QUICK COUPLER BLOCK
(FRONT AUXILIARY LEFT SIDE LIFT ARM)
Male
TWO SPEED DRIVE MOTOR (OPTIONAL)
L
56 67
Male
55
57 66
Female
RIDE CONTROL (OPTIONAL)

X
71 70 LIFT CYLINDERS)
60
W
REAR AUXILIARY COUPLERS (OPTIONAL) 9

61 58
FEMALE MALE 69
10
10
Z Auxiliary Spool
? 48 ?
A B
59
50
49 8
46 11
? ? BICS CONTROL VALVE
BUCKET POSITIONING
HYDROSTATIC PUMP VALVE (OPTIONAL)
E1 E2 A1 A2
47 E3
Tilt Spool 27
51
B
8
45 13
28
M4
M
11 ? 29
3
44 30
REAR AUXILIARY
2-SPEED & SAPR D C VALVE (OPTIONAL) 14 D2
BRAKE VALVE P in P out T 12
(OPTIONAL) 75 76
B A D
73
72
T 52 52 Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale Lift Spool
30
31
BOBTACH CYLINDER (OPTIONAL) 8 C2
C1 D1
P 20
53 11 16 16
B1 A1 C 37 17
B A
41 15 ?
73 36
74 39 IN 18
74 M2 M1 7 2
6
35
38 TILT CYLINDERS
3.0 x 1.63 x 13.97 in
19 (76.2 x 41.3 x 355 mm)
52 1
52 Oil Cooler
51 54 42
D
34 40
RESERVOIR
T 3 2 (VENTED)
33 4 1
43 POWER BOBTACH
VALVE (OPTIONAL)
32
62 5

HYDRAULIC FILTER
63
64
65
25
23
? WORKING CIRCUIT
26
CHARGE
PRESSURE
59 DRAIN / RETURN
B A
Z
24 21
P DR 22
61 58
W
60 DRAIN/RETURN MANIFOLD
68 HYDRAULIC/HYDROSTATIC SCHEMATIC
STANDARD WITH ALL OPTIONS
T750 (S/N ANKA11001 & ABOVE)
57 55
56
L
94 of 898
7194314
PRINTED IN U.S.A.
SJC WITH NO OPTIONS

V-1431legend
LEGEND
1 RESERVOIR: 14 LIFT CYLINDER SPOOL - MADE TO 28 SENSOR – CHARGE PRESSURE – 42 HYDRAULIC BRAKE – SPRING APPLIED –
Capacity at sight gauge . . 9,8 L (2.6 U.S. gal) RESTRICT FLOW DURING BOOM Fan Filter PRESSURE RELEASE (SAPR)
System Capacity . . . . . . . 36,0 L (9.5 U.S. gal) DOWN BUT NOT DURING BOOM UP
29 HYDRAULIC PUMP . . . . . . . Gear Type 43 SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECECTIONAL
2 SIGHT GUAGE 15 PILOTED ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL 87,1 L/min (23.0 U.S. gpm) at High Engine Idle CONTROL VALVE – BRAKE
CONTROL VALVE - TILT CONTROL 44 FILTER – BRAKE VALVE
30 CHARGE PUMP -
3 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH: 51,1 L/min (13.5 U.S. gpm) at High Engine Idle
16 PILOTED ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL 45 CHECK VALVE
103 kPa (1,03 bar) (15 psi)
CONTROL VALVE - LIFT CONTROL 31 VARIABLE CAPACITY DISPLACEMENT
Normally Closed
17 BIDIRECTIONAL HYDROSTATIC PUMP
4 FILTER - HYDRAULIC (CANISTER) SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL
CONTROL VALVE - BICS CONTROL 32 RELIEF/REPLENISHING VALVE - HIGH
5 SPRING LOADED FILTER BY-PASS 18 FILTER - BICS CONTROL VALVE PRESSURE: 36500 kPa (365 bar) (5294 psi)
VALVE: 172 kPa (1,7 bar) (25 psi) (SCREEN) 33 RELIEF VALVE - CHARGE INLET:
6 DIAGNOSTIC COUPLER 19 CHECK VALVE - With 100 kPa (1,0 bar) Dealer Copy -- Not 2654 kPa (26,5 bar) (385 psi) at High
for Resale
(14.5 psi) Spring Engine Idle With 60 ° C (140 ° F) Fluid
7 RELIEF VALVE - MAIN: 20 RESTRICTION . . . . . . . 2,0 mm (0.079 in) 34 SERVO PISTON – Swash Plate
24132 kPa (241 bar) (3500 psi)
at Front Quick Couplers 21 PULL BUTTON ACTIVATED 35 SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVE - LIFT CONTROL VALVE – FORWARD/REVERSE
ARM BY-PASS 36 FILTER
PORT: 27579 kPa (276 bar) (4000 psi)
22 SENSOR – HYD. TEMPERATURE
9 RELIEF/ANTICAVITATION VALVE - 37 CHECK VALVE – COLD WEATHER BY-PASS
PORT (OPTIONAL): 27579 kPa 23 ANTICAVITATION VALVE With 345 kPa (3,45 bar) (50 psi) Spring
(276 bar) (4000 psi)
38 RESTRICTION - 2,0 mm (0.079 in)
10 SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL 24 PROPORTIONAL RELIEF VALVE –
(Fan Speed Regulator): 10797 – 12300 kPa
CONTROL VALVE - AUXILIARY 39 CHECK VALVE - With 1400 kPa (14,0 bar)
(108 - 123 bar) (1566 - 1784 psi)
(203 psi) Spring
11 LOAD CHECK VALVE
25 SPRING LOADED FILTER BY-PASS VALVE: 40 DRIVE MOTOR SHUTTLE VALVE
517 – 572 kPa (5,2 - 5,7 bar) (75 - 83 psi)
12 FRONT AUXILIARY MANUAL PRESSURE
BLEED-OFF VALVE 26 FIXED CAPACITY DISPLACEMENT 41 FIXED CAPACITY DISPLACEMENT
HYDRAULIC MOTOR BIDIRECTIONAL HYDROSTATIC
13 ANTICAVITATION VALVE MOTOR
27 FILTER - HYDRAULIC (CANISTER)
NOTE: Unless otherwise specified

springs have NO significant
pressure value.

95 of 898
INTEGRATED COUPLER BLOCK
Male
12
DRIVE MOTOR Male
L
39
Female
38
40
OUT
9
41
10
42
10
Z
Auxiliary Spool
A B
TILT CYLINDERS
8
6 11
BICS CONTROL VALVE
R
TANDEM HYDROSTATIC 31
DRIVE PUMP T
35
X1 36 Tilt Spool
34 8
X2
15
32 32 11

16 LIFT CYLINDERS
MA 36 13
MB
A B
MG
Lift Spool
33
8
G
A B
MB 14 18
18
MA
36 11 19 ?
17
IN
7 2 20
32 ? 6
32
X2
34
X1 ? Oil Cooler
1 21
36
31 35
37
RESERVOIR
T
3 (VENTED)
2
R
4
29 1
30
5
HYDRAULIC FILTER
27
WORKING CIRCUIT
28 25 CHARGE
BRAKE VALVE - 65 PRESSURE
SPRING APPLIED DRAIN / RETURN

B A
3
Z 23
26
2
45 24
P DR
44 44 41
1
43
DRAIN/RETURN MANIFOLD
SJC WITH NO OPTIONS
22
40
38 Printable Version Click Here
39
L (PRINTED NOVEMBER 2010)
DRIVE MOTOR
96 of 898 7194315
PRINTED IN U.S.A.
SJC WITH ALL OPTIONS

V-1432legend
LEGEND
1 RESERVOIR: 20 RESTRICTION . . . . . . . 2,0 mm (0.079 in) 39 CHECK VALVE - With 552 kPa) (5,5 bar) 62 CHECK VALVE - With 1379 kPa 13,8 bar
Capacity at sight gauge . . 9,8 L (2.6 U.S. gal) (80 psi) Spring (200 psi) Spring
System Capacity . . . . . . . 36,0 L (9.5 U.S. gal) 21 PULL BUTTON ACTIVATED 40 SHUTTLE VALVE 63 DRIVE MOTOR SHUTTLE VALVE
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVE - LIFT
2 SIGHT GUAGE 41 RELIEF VALVE - 13790 kPa (137 bar) (2000 psi) 64 FIXED CAPACITY DISPLACEMENT
ARM BY-PASS
3 22 RIDE CONTROL VALVE 42 BIDIRECTIONAL HYDROSTATIC MOTOR
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH: CHECK VALVE - With 2068 kPa (20,7 bar) (300
103 kPa (1,03 bar) (15 psi) psi) Spring And With 0,33 mm (0.013 in) Orifice 65 HYDRAULIC BRAKE – SPRING APPLIED –
23 ANTICAVITATION VALVE PRESSURE RELEASE (SAPR)
Normally Closed
43 RESTRICTION - 0,51 mm (0.020 in)
4 FILTER - HYDRAULIC (CANISTER) 24 PROPORTIONAL RELIEF VALVE – 66 PILOT ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL
(Fan Speed Regulator): 10797 – 12300 kPa 44 RESTRICTION - 0,51 mm (0.020 in) CONTROL VALVE – 2 Speed
5 SPRING LOADED FILTER BY-PASS (108 - 123 bar) (1566 - 1784 psi) 67 FIXED CAPACITY DISPLACEMENT
VALVE: 172 kPa (1,7 bar) (25 psi) 45 SENSOR – HYD. TEMPERATURE
25 SPRING LOADED FILTER BY-PASS VALVE: BIDIRECTIONAL HYDROSTATIC
6 DIAGNOSTIC COUPLER 46 NOT USED FOR THIS MODEL
517 – 572 kPa (5,2 - 5,7 bar) (75 - 83 psi) MOTOR – 2 Speed
7 RELIEF VALVE - MAIN: 26 FIXED CAPACITY DISPLACEMENT PILOT ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL 68 HYDRAULIC PUMP . . . . . . . Gear Type
47
24132 kPa (241 bar) (3500 psi) HYDRAULIC MOTOR CONTROL 87,1 L/min (23.0 U.S. gpm) at High Engine Idle
Dealer Copy -- Not for ResaleVALVE - REAR AUXILIARY
at Front Quick Couplers
8 27 FILTER - HYDRAULIC (CANISTER) 48 RELIEF VALVE: 22753 kPa (228 bar) (3300 psi) 69 CHARGE PUMP -
RELIEF/ANTICAVITATION VALVE - 51,1 L/min (13.5 U.S. gpm) at High Engine Idle
PORT: 27579 kPa (276 bar) (4000 psi) 28 SENSOR – CHARGE PRESSURE – 49 SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL
Fan Filter CONTROL VALVE - TWO COIL 70 HIGH FLOW HYDRAULIC PUMP Gear Type
SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL 51,1 L/min (13.5 U.S. gpm) at High Engine Idle
PORT (OPTIONAL): 27579 kPa 29 50 RESTRICTOR - 0,8 mm (0.031 in)
(276 bar) (4000 psi) CONTROL VALVE - BUCKET POSITION 71 FILTER - BRAKE
10 SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL VALVE (ON/OFF) 51 LOAD SHUTTLE VALVE - BLEED OFF 72 SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECECTIONAL
CONTROL VALVE - AUXILIARY 30 FLOW DIVIDER ADJUSTMENT VALVE CONTROL VALVE – BRAKE
11 LOAD CHECK VALVE
31 PILOTED ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVE - BASE 73 CHECK VALVE
12 FRONT AUXILIARY MANUAL PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE - FLOW CONTROL 53 SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL 74 RELIEF VALVE - 24132 kPa (241 bar) (3500 psi)
BLEED-OFF VALVE SPOOL CONTROL VALVE - ROD
13 ANTICAVITATION VALVE 32 CHECK VALVE - BUCKET POSITION 75 DUMP VALVE – ON / OFF
54 VARIABLE CAPACITY DISPLACEMENT
VALVE BIDIRECTIONAL HYDROSTATIC PUMP CHECK VALVE - With 34,5 kPa (0,34 bar)
14 LIFT CYLINDER SPOOL - MADE TO 76
RESTRICT FLOW DURING BOOM 33 PILOTED ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL RELIEF/REPLENISHING VALVE - HIGH (5.0 psi) Spring
55
DOWN BUT NOT DURING BOOM UP CONTROL VALVE - UNLOADING PRESSURE: 36500 kPa (365 bar) (5294 psi) 77 SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL
SPOOL CONTROL VALVE – 2 Speed Shift
15 PILOTED ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL 56 RELIEF VALVE - CHARGE INLET:
CONTROL VALVE - TILT CONTROL 34 PILOT ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL 2654 kPa (26,5 bar) (385 psi) at High 78 SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL
PILOTED ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVE - HYDRAULIC Engine Idle With 60 ° C (140 ° F) Fluid CONTROL VALVE – 2 Speed Make-up
16
CONTROL VALVE - LIFT CONTROL POWERED BOB-TACH 57 SERVO PISTON – Swash Plate 79 HIGH PRESSURE CHAMBER
17 SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL 35 FILTER - BOB-TACH VALVE
CONTROL VALVE - BICS CONTROL 80 LOW PRESSURE CHAMBER
36 RESTRICTION - 2,08 mm (0.08 in) CONTROL VALVE – FORWARD/REVERSE
18 FILTER - BICS CONTROL VALVE 59 FILTER
(SCREEN) 37 SOLENOID ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL NOTE: Unless otherwise specified
19 CHECK VALVE - With 100 kPa (1,0 bar) CONTROL VALVE (TWO COIL) 60 CHECK VALVE – COLD WEATHER BY-PASS springs have NO significant
38 With 345 kPa (3,45 bar) (50 psi) Spring pressure value.
(14.5 psi) Spring RELIEF VALVE - 8274 kPa (83 bar) (1200 psi)
61 RESTRICTION – 1,5 mm (0.06 in)
97 of 898
INTEGRATED COUPLER BLOCK
TWO SPEED DRIVE MOTOR (OPTIONAL) Male
L
62 12
Male
61
63 75
Female
OUT
X HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (SPOOL VALVE)

RIDE CONTROL (OPTIONAL)
LIFT CYLINDERS
66 80 79
W
67 9
64 REAR AUXILIARY COUPLERS (OPTIONAL)
FEMALE MALE
10
65 22
10
Z
Auxiliary Spool
A
? 51 ?
B
53
52 8
6 11
? ?
49 BICS CONTROL VALVE
R BUCKET POSITIONING
TANDEM HYDROSTATIC 54 VALVE (OPTIONAL)
DRIVE PUMP T
E1 E2 A1 A2
50 E3
58
X1 59 Tilt Spool
B
57 8
X2
15
48 30
55 55 11 ?
REAR AUXILIARY 29 32
VALVE (OPTIONAL) 16
77 78 47
D2
B A D MA 59 P in P out T
13 31
MB
72 A
T B
MG
32
Lift Spool
56 33 C2
8
G
C1 D1
P BOBTACH CYLINDER (OPTIONAL)
A B
MB 14 18
B1 18
2-SPEED & SAPR MA
59 11 19
BRAKE VALVE ?
71 (OPTIONAL) 17
73 39 IN
7 2 20
55 ?
38 42 6
55
X2
57 TILT CYLINDERS
X1 ? 41 Oil Cooler
1 21
59
54 58 37
60
44 RESERVOIR
T D 36 43 (VENTED)
3 2
R
4 1
68
35
POWER BOBTACH
VALVE (OPTIONAL) 34
69
5
HYDRAULIC FILTER
70 74
75
27
WORKING CIRCUIT
?
28 25 CHARGE
PRESSURE
DRAIN / RETURN
B
65 A
Z 23
26
P DR
24
67 64
W
DRAIN/RETURN MANIFOLD
66
X
45 HYDRAULIC/HYDROSTATIC SCHEMATIC
SJC WITH ALL OPTIONS
63
61 Printable Version Click Here
62
L
98 of 898
PRINTED IN U.S.A. 7194315
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM INFORMATION
Glossary Of Hydraulic / Hydrostatic Symbols

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
FLOW LINES and CONNECTIONS BASIC and MISCELLANEOUS SYMBOLS
WORKING CIRCUITS - Continuous, RESTRICTION - Line with Fixed

Solid Line - Working (Main) Line, Restriction - Affected by Viscosity
Return Line (line conducting fluid (property of resistance to flowing
from working devices to the reservoir) fluid).
and Feed line (main line conductor).
VARIABLE ADJUSTMENT
RESTRICTION - Regulated or
Variable Restriction.
PILOT PRESSURE - Dashed Line -
Pilot Line (Line which conducts TEMPERATURE CONTROL -
control fluid). (Indication of temperature).
DRAIN CIRCUITS - Dotted Line -

TEMPERATURE INDICATOR -
Drain Line (drain or bleed line - line
(temperature measurement -
conducting fluid from a component
thermometer).
housing to the reservoir.

FILTER (strainer or screen) - For fluid
conditioning.
COMPONENTS - Long Chain Line -
Enclosure outline for several
components assembled in one unit. VENTED AND FILTERED
RESERVOIR (reservoir open to
atmosphere).
MECHANICAL CONNECTIONS -
Double Line (Shaft, Lever, Piston
Rod). PRESSURIZED, VENTED AND
FiLTERED RESERVOIR (Reservoir
uses a pressured cap).
CONNECTED JUNCTION OF OIL
LINES (Flow Line Connection). OIL COOLER (heat exchanger) - The
arrows in the diamond indicate the
extraction of heat (heat dissipation).
OIL LINES CROSSING (NOT PRESSURE SENSOR - Varies

Connected). electric signal with pressure.
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
COUPLER - Quick - Acting Coupling SWITCH - Switch activates when
(uncoupled, closed by non-return pressure difference reaches specified
valve). level.
PRESSURE SWITCH - Switch

activates when pressure reaches
specified level.
MUFFLER (silencer) - Reduces

noise.

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM INFORMATION (CONT’D)
Glossary Of Hydraulic / Hydrostatic Symbols (Cont’d)

CYLINDER: Equipment to convert hydraulic energy into CONTROL MECHANISMS

linear energy and in which the fluid pressure operates
alternately in both directions (forward and backward CONTROL VALVE WITH DETENT
strokes). (Holds Valve in Position) - device for
maintaining a given position
DOUBLE ACTING HYDRAULIC (mechanical).
CYLINDER, UNEQUAL
DISPLACEMENT - With single piston CONTROL VALVE ACTIVATED BY A
rod. PULL BUTTON (manual).
DOUBLE ACTING HYDRAULIC

CYLINDER, UNEQUAL CONTROL VALVE ACTIVATED BY A
DISPLACEMENT and CUSHION ON PUSH-PULL BUTTON (manual).
ONE END - With single piston rod.
CONTROL VALVE ACTIVATED BY A

LEVER (manual).
PUMP: To convert mechanical energy into hydraulic

energy.
CONTROL VALVE ACTIVATED BY A
PEDAL (manual).
FIXED CAPACITY DISPLACEMENT
HYDRAULIC PUMP - With one
direction of flow.
CONTROL VALVE WITH SPRING
RETURN (mechanical).
VARIABLE CAPACITY
DISPLACEMENT BIDIRECTIONAL
HYDRAULIC PUMP - With two CONTROL VALVE ACTIVATED BY
directions of flow (bidirectional). AN ELECTRIC SOLENOID
(electrical).
MOTOR: To convert hydraulic energy into rotary CONTROL VALVE ACTIVATED BY A

mechanical energy. PROPORTIONAL ELECTRICAL
SOLENOID (electrical).
FIXED CAPACITY DISPLACEMENT CONTROL VALVE ACTIVATED BY

BIDIRECTIONAL HYDRAULIC DUAL ELECTRICAL SOLENOID
MOTOR - With two directions of flow (electrical).
(bidirectional.
CONTROL VALVE ACTIVATED BY
PILOT PRESSURE (indirect control,
pilot actuated by application of
pressure).


NON-RETURN VALVE, SHUTTLE VALVE: Valve which DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVE: Valve providing for
allows free flow in one direction only. the opening (fully or restricted) or the closing of one or
more flow paths (represented by several squares).
NON-RETURN VALVE (Check Valve) TWO PORTS and CLOSED FLOW

OUT IN - Used as Replenishing Valve, Lock PATHS
Check Valve or Anticavitation Valve -
Opens if the Inlet pressure is higher
than the Outlet pressure. Often SOLENOID ACTIVATED
contains internal spring which has NO DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVE
significant pressure value. (Two Position) - controlled by an
electric solenoid (with return spring).
SPRING LOADED VALVE (bypass
OUT IN Valve) - Opens if the Inlet pressure is PILOT ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL
greater than the Outlet pressure plus CONTROL VALVE (Two Position) -
the spring pressure. controlled by pressure (with return
spring).
PILOT CONTROLLED NON-

RETURN VALVE- It is possible to MANUALLY ACTIVATED
open the valve by pilot pressure. DIRECTION CONTROL VALVE
T
OUT IN
(Variable Position) Joystick
P
Controlled, variable pressure to shift
the pilot activated directional control
SHUTTLE VALVE - The Inlet port
valve spool.
IN IN connected to the higher pressure is
OUT
automatically connected to the Outlet MANUALLY ACTIVATED FLOW
port while the other Inlet port is CONTROL VALVE (Two Position)
closed. allows for changing pilot flow to
ST
O
IS
D
FRON T
BACK
control switching joystick functions for
STD / ISO Control (Excavators Only).
STEERING CONTROL VALVE

(Variable Position) - Used for
controlling the hydraulic flow for the
steering cylinders in relationship to
the amount the steering wheel is
rotated.


PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE: Valve ensuring the MISCELLANEOUS

control of pressure.
ACCUMULATOR - Supplies
RELIEF VALVE - When the Inlet temporary reserve pressure to the
pressure overcomes the opposing hydraulic system when the engine
IN OUT
force of the spring, the valve opens has been stopped.
permitting flow from the Outlet port.
RELIEF / REPLENISHING VALVE or

RELIEF / ANTICAVITATION VALVE -
When the Inlet pressure overcomes
IN OUT
the opposing force of the spring, the
valve opens permitting flow from the
Outlet port - Allows free flow in the
opposite direction.
DUAL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE -

When the Inlet pressure overcomes
IN OUT
the opposing force of the spring, the
valve opens permitting flow from the
Outlet port. Pilot pressure provides a
second pressure value.
LOCK VALVE - hydraulic pressure is

applied to open the valve to allow the
hydraulic cylinder to move.
FLOW CONTROL VALVE: Valve controlling the flow in

one or both directions.
ONE WAY RESTRICTOR VALVE

(Non-Return Valve with Restriction) -
Unit allowing free flow in one direction
but restricted flow in the other
direction.
TOW VALVE - Normally in closed

position.
LOAD SENSE BLEED VALVE -

Regulates small amount of fluid flow
(leakage).

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM INFORMATION (CONT'D)
Troubleshooting
WARNING
The following troubleshooting chart is provided for
assistance in locating and correcting problems which are
Check for correct function after adjustments, repairs
most common. Many of the recommended procedures
or service. Failure to make correct repairs or
must be done by authorized Bobcat Service Personnel
adjustments can cause injury or death.
only. W-2004-1285
If a service code appears in the left instrument panel.

(See DIAGNOSTIC SERVICE CODES on Page 60-90-
1.)
PROBLEM CAUSE
The hydraulic system will not operate. 1, 2, 3, 5, 8
Slow hydraulic system action. 1, 3, 4, 6, 8
Hydraulic action is not smooth. 1, 4, 5, 6, 7
Lift arms go up slowly at full engine rpm 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
The lift arms or Bob-Tach will move when the pedal is in neutral position 4
The lift arms come down with the pedal in neutral position 4, 9, 10, 11
Lift Arm Bypass Control valve stuck 12

Lift Arm Bypass Control valve stem bent or broken 13
KEY TO CORRECT CAUSE
1. The fluid level is not correct.

2. The pedal linkage is disconnected.
3. The hydraulic pump has damage.
4. The pedal linkage is not adjusted correctly.
5. Relief valve is not at the correct pressure.
6. Suction leak on the inlet side of the hydraulic pump.
7. Fluid is cold. Wrong viscosity fluid. (See HYDRAULIC / HYDROSTATIC FLUID SPECIFICATIONS on Page
SPEC-40-1.)
8. Exceeding the loaders rated operating capacity.
9. Internal leak in the lift cylinder(s).
10. External leak from the cylinder(s).
11. Damaged lift spool.
12. Rotate shaft.
13. Replace Lift Arm Bypass Control valve assembly.


CYLINDER (LIFT) Figure 20-20-2
Testing
Figure 20-20-1
P-90617
1
Install a cap (Item 1) [Figure 20-20-2] on the hose and
P-90616 tighten.
Engage the parking brake. Lower the seat bar. Start the
Lower the lift arms. Stop the engine. Raise the seat bar. engine and press the PTOL button.

Operate the controls that lower the lift arms.
WARNING If there is any leakage from the fitting on the cylinder

(Item 2) [Figure 20-20-2], remove the lift cylinder for
repair. Repeat the procedure to check the other lift
Hydraulic fluid escaping under pressure can have cylinder.
sufficient force to enter a person’s body by
penetrating the skin. This can cause serious injury
and possible death if proper medical treatment by a
physician familiar with this injury is not received
immediately.
W-2145-0290
Check only one cylinder at a time. Disconnect the hose

(Item 1) [Figure 20-20-1] which goes to the base end of
the lift cylinder.

CYLINDER (LIFT) (CONT'D)
Removal And Installation

WARNING
Lift and block the loader. (See Procedure on Page 10-10-
1.)
NOTE: Remove only one cylinder at a time.
explosion or fire.
WARNING W-2103-0508
Figure 20-20-4
Put jackstands under the front axles and rear corners
of the frame before running the engine for service.
Failure to use jackstands can allow the machine to
fall or move and cause injury or death.
W-2017-0286
2
1
IMPORTANT

When repairing hydrostatic and hydraulic systems,
2
clean the work area before disassembly and keep all
parts clean. Always use caps and plugs on hoses,
P-90824
tubelines and ports to keep dirt out. Dirt can quickly
damage the system.
I-2003-0888 Cap and plug both fittings on the cylinder (Item 1)
[Figure 20-20-4].
Figure 20-20-3
NOTE: Do not cap or plug the two hydraulic hoses
(Item 2) [Figure 20-20-4].
Place the hoses (Item 2) [Figure 20-20-4] in a suitable

container to collect the hydraulic oil as the lift arms are
raised.

safe manner.
1
WARNING
P-90616 AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Mark and disconnect the two hydraulic hoses (Item 1) death. Fluid leaks under pressure may not be visible.
[Figure 20-20-3]. Use a piece of cardboard or wood to find leaks. Do
W-2072-0807

Removal And Installation (Cont’d)
Figure 20-20-5
P-90602A
Remove the retaining bolt and nut (Item 1) [Figure 20-

20-5] from the pin on the rod end of the lift cylinder.

Installation: Tighten the retainer bolt and nut to 48 - 54
N•m (35 - 40 ft-lb) torque.
Figure 20-20-6
P-90611
With a slide hammer, remove the pin (Item 1) [Figure 20-

20-6] from the rod end of the lift cylinder.

CYLINDER (LIFT) (CONT'D) Figure 20-20-7
DANGER
1
P-90605
P-90328
AVOID DEATH Install a sling in the middle of the Bob-Tach as shown in

• Disconnecting or loosening any hydraulic (Item 1) [Figure 20-20-7].
can cause lift arms to drop. Using a chain hoist raise the lift arms and install an
• Keep out of this area when lift arms are raised approved lift arm support device on the cylinder that is
unless supported by an approved lift arm connected to the lift arm.

D-1009-0409 Figure 20-20-8
2 1
WARNING
W-2059-0598
P-90823
Install a bolt (Item 1) [Figure 20-20-8] through the eyelet

of the cylinder and install a strap (Item 2) [Figure 20-20-
8] to secure the cylinder.

Open the rear door.

1
NOTE: When removing the left side lift cylinder the
battery will need to be removed to gain access
to the lower retaining bolt and nut.
Remove the battery (If required). (See Removal And

Installation on Page 60-20-1.)
Figure 20-20-9
P-90827
1
20-11] from the base end of the lift cylinder.
Figure 20-20-12

1
P-90834

20-9] from the pin on the base end of the lift cylinder.
Installation: Tighten the retainer bolt and nut to 48 - 54 1

Figure 20-20-10 P-90823
Using a chain hoist remove the lift cylinder (Item 1)

[Figure 20-20-12] from the loader.
P-90825
Remove the grease fitting (Item 1) [Figure 20-20-10]

from the base end of the lift cylinder.
Installation: Tighten the grease fitting to 20 N•m (15 ft-

lb) torque.

Parts Identification
1. Lift Cylinder
2. Hydraulic Tubeline
3. Cylinder Case Tube
4. Plug
5. Clamp 1
6. Nut
7. Back-up Ring
8. O-ring
9. Piston Assembly 4
10. Spacer
11. O-ring
12. Back-up Ring
13. O-ring 3
14. Head
15. Seal 4
16. Seal 5
17. Shaft
18. Grease Fitting

7
2 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
NA1413S

Disassembly
2
Use the following tools to disassemble the cylinder:
MEL1074 - O-ring Seal Hook 1

Spanner Wrench
Hold the hydraulic cylinder over a drain pan and move

the rod in and out slowly to remove the fluid from the
cylinder.
Put the base end of the cylinder in a vise. 3
Figure 20-20-13 P-48038
1 Remove the back-up ring (Item 1) and O-ring (Item 2)

[Figure 20-20-15] from the piston.
NOTE: If the fiber surface (Item 3) [Figure 20-20-15]

on the piston, becomes damaged, the
complete piston must be replaced.

Figure 20-20-16
P-48033
Use a spanner wrench to loosen the head (Item 1)

[Figure 20-20-13] from the cylinder case.
2
Figure 20-20-14
4
3 P-48039
2
1 Remove the two O-rings (Item 1) and the back-up ring

(Item 2) [Figure 20-20-16] from the cylinder head.
P-48036
Remove the nut (Item 1), piston (Item 2), spacer (Item 3)
and head (Item 4) [Figure 20-20-14].

Disassembly (Cont'd)
Figure 20-20-17
P-48040
Remove the wiper seal (Item 1) [Figure 20-20-17] from

the cylinder head.

Figure 20-20-18
P-48042
Remove the rod seal (Item 1) [Figure 20-20-18] from the

cylinder head.

Assembly
Use the following tools to assemble the cylinder: 1
MEL1396 - Seal Installation Tool 2

MEL1033 - Rod Seal Installation Tool
Piston Ring Compressor
Spanner Wrench
Figure 20-20-19
P-48038
Install the O-ring (Item 1) and seal (Item 2) [Figure 20-

20-20] on the cylinder piston.
Figure 20-20-21

P7424 1
Wash the cylinder parts in solvent and air dry them.
Inspect the cylinder parts for nicks, scratches or other

damage. Replace any damaged parts.
Always install new O-rings and seals during assembly.
Lubricate all O-rings and seals with hydraulic oil during P-48043 P7427
installation.
Install the new seal on the tool and slowly stretch it until it Install the rod seal on the rod seal tool [Figure 20-20-21].
fits the piston [Figure 20-20-19].
NOTE: During installation the spring side of the seal
Allow the seal to stretch for 30 seconds before installing it (Item 1) [Figure 20-20-21] must be installed
on the piston. toward the inside of the cylinder.
Rotate the handles to collapse the rod seal [Figure 20-

20-21].

Assembly (Cont'd)
Figure 20-20-22 1
2 3
P-48036
NOTE: Clean and dry the threads before installing the

P7425 nut. Install the new nut from the kit.
Install the head (Item 1), spacer (Item 2) piston (Item 3),
Install the rod seal in the head [Figure 20-20-22]. and nut (Item 4) [Figure 20-20-24].

Figure 20-20-23 Tighten the nut (Item 4) [Figure 20-20-24] to 1491 N•m
(1100 ft-lb) torque.
Figure 20-20-25
2
1
1
P-48041 P-48042
Install the wiper seal, with the wiper side of the seal (Item
P-48035
1) toward the outside of the head (Item 2) [Figure 20-20-
23].
Put the base end of the hydraulic cylinder in a vise.
Using a spanner wrench, tighten the head (Item 1)

[Figure 20-20-25] until the head is flush with the end of
the cylinder tube assembly.

CYLINDER (TILT) Figure 20-21-2
Testing
Figure 20-21-1
1
2
P-85552
Install a cap (Item 1) [Figure 20-21-2] in the hydraulic

P-85553 hose and tighten.
Remove the attachment. Roll the Bob-Tach fully back. engine and press the PTOL button.
Stop the engine. Raise the seat bar.

Operate the controls that rolls the Bob-Tach forward.
If there is any leakage from the fitting on the cylinder

WARNING (Item 2) [Figure 20-21-2]. Remove the lift cylinder for
repair.
Hydraulic fluid escaping under pressure can have Repeat procedure to check the other tilt cylinder.
immediately.
W-2145-0290
Disconnect the hose (Item 1) [Figure 20-21-1] which

goes to the base end of the tilt cylinder.

CYLINDER (TILT) (CONT'D) Figure 20-21-5
Figure 20-21-3
2
1
1
P-85562
Disconnect the two hydraulic hoses (Items 1 and 2)

P-85554 [Figure 20-21-5] from the tilt cylinder.
Cap the hoses and plug the fittings on the cylinder.

Remove the attachment from the Bob-Tach. Roll the Bob-
Tach forward Figure 20-21-6

Remove the retainer bolt and nut (Item 1) [Figure 20-21-

3] from the rod end pivot pin.
1
Installation: Tighten the retainer nut to 48 - 54 N•m (35 -
40 ft-lb) torque.
Figure 20-21-4
P-85648
Remove the base end pivot bolt and washer (Item 3)

[Figure 20-21-5].
Remove the retainer nut and washer (Item 1) [Figure 20-

21-6] from the base end pivot pin.
Installation: Tighten the retainer nut to 257,6 N•m (190

P-85649 ft-lb) torque.
Remove the rod end pivot pin (Item 1) [Figure 20-21-4].

CYLINDER (TILT) (CONT'D)
Removal And Installation (Cont'd)
Figure 20-21-7
P-85564
Slide the cylinder from the base pin and remove the tilt
cylinder from the loader [Figure 20-21-7].

Base End Pivot Pin Removal And Installation
Figure 20-21-8
P-85567
1
Check pivot pin and replace as needed [Figure 20-21-
P-85565 10].
Figure 20-21-9

1
P-85566
Remove the tilt cylinder from the cylinder base pin (Item
1) [Figure 20-21-8]. (See Removal And Installation on
Page 20-21-2.)
Use a 0,875 mm (7/8 in) shaft (Item 1) [Figure 20-21-9]

and a hammer to remove the tilt cylinder base pin from
the lift arms.

1. Tube
2. Piston
3. Head
4. Rod
5. Bushing
6. Nut
7. O-ring
8. Seal TS-1688b
9. O-ring 17
10. Washer
11. O-ring
12. Seal 12
13. Seal
14. Plug
15. O-ring 9
16. Tubeline 1
17. Grease Fitting 15
18. Seal 10
16 14

11
15 6
3
14
2 13
4
8
18
18
17
TS-1688a PE3951S
TS-1060a

Disassembly
MEL1074 - O-ring Seal Hook

Spanner Wrench
1
cylinder.
Put the base end of the cylinder in a vise.
Figure 20-21-11 P-85647
1
Use a spanner wrench to loosen the head (Item 1)
[Figure 20-21-12] from the cylinder case.
2
Figure 20-21-13

3
1 2
P-85651
Remove the seals (Item 1) [Figure 20-21-11] on both

sides of the pivot bushing.
Remove and replace bushing (Item 2) with a driver tool P-48071

and hammer [Figure 20-21-11].
Remove the nut (Item 1), piston (Item 2) and head (Item
3) [Figure 20-21-13].

Figure 20-21-14
1
2
P-48040
Remove the wiper seal (Item 1) [Figure 20-21-16] from

P-48073 the cylinder head.
Figure 20-21-17
Remove the seal (Item 1), and O-ring (Item 2) [Figure
20-21-14] from the piston.

Figure 20-21-15
P-48042
Remove the rod seal (Item 1) [Figure 20-21-17] from the

P-48039 cylinder head.
Remove the two O-rings (Item 1) and the back-up washer

(Item 2) [Figure 20-21-15] from the cylinder head.

Assembly
1
Use the following tools to assemble the cylinder:
MEL1396 - Seal Installation Tool 2

MEL1033 - Rod Seal Installation Tool
Spanner Wrench
Figure 20-21-18
P-48073
Install the O-ring (Item 1) and seal (Item 2) [Figure 20-

21-19] on the cylinder piston.
Figure 20-21-20

P7424 1

Lubricate all O-rings and seals with hydraulic oil during P-48043 P7427
installation.
Install the new seal on the tool and slowly stretch it until it Install the rod seal on the rod seal tool [Figure 20-21-20].
fits the piston [Figure 20-21-18].
Allow the seal to stretch for 30 seconds before installing it (Item 1) [Figure 20-21-20] must be installed
on the piston. toward the inside of the cylinder.

21-20].

Assembly (Cont'd)
Figure 20-21-21 1
2
P-48071
NOTE: Clean and dry the threads before installing the

P7425 nut. Install the new nut from the kit.
Install the head (Item 1), piston (Item 2) and nut (Item 3)
Install the rod seal in the head [Figure 20-21-21]. [Figure 20-21-23].

Figure 20-21-22 Tighten the nut (Item 3) [Figure 20-21-23] to 1152 N•m
(850 ft-lb) torque.

2
Figure 20-21-24
P-48041 P-48042
Install the wiper seal, with the wiper side of the seal (Item
1) toward the outside of the head (Item 2) [Figure 20-21-
22].
P-85647
Using a spanner wrench, tighten the head (Item 1)

[Figure 20-21-24] until the head is flush with the end of
the cylinder tube assembly.

Assembly (Cont'd)
Figure 20-21-25
P-85650
Install the bushing (Item 1) and seals (Item 2) [Figure 20-

21-25] using a driver tool and hammer.

CYLINDER (BOB-TACH) Figure 20-22-2
Testing
WARNING 1
enters skin or eyes, get immediate medical attention P-85570
W-2072-0807
Disconnect the hose (Item 1) [Figure 20-22-2] from the
power Bob-Tach cylinder base end port.
WARNING Figure 20-22-3

1
explosion or fire.
W-2103-0508
Figure 20-22-1
P-85568
Install a plug in the hose (Item 1) [Figure 20-22-3] and

tighten.
engine.
Push and hold the BOB-TACH “WEDGES UP” Switch

(Front Accessory Panel).
P-85570
If there is any leakage from the base end cylinder port

Tilt the Bob-Tach forward, so it is parallel to the floor (Item 2) [Figure 20-22-3], remove the cylinder for repair.
[Figure 20-22-1].
Push and hold BOB-TACH “WEDGES UP” switch until

levers are in the unlocked position (Wedges fully raised).

CYLINDER (BOB-TACH) (CONT'D)
Figure 20-22-4
P-85570
Disconnect the hoses from the rod and base end cylinder
fitting (Item 1) [Figure 20-22-4].

Installation: Tighten the bolts to 29,8 - 32,5 N•m (22 - 24
ft-lb) torque.
Install plugs in the hoses and cap on fittings.
Figure 20-22-5
1
1
P-85569
Remove the bolts and washers (Item 1) [Figure 20-22-

5].
Installation: Tighten the bolts to 48 - 54 N•m (35 - 40 ft-

lb) torque.
Remove the cylinder from the lever pivots.

1. Tube 8. Ring
2. Nut 9. O-ring
3. Piston 10. Head
4. O-ring 11. Seal
5. Ring 12. Seal
6. Spacer 13. Rod
7. O-ring

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
PE3954S

CYLINDER (BOB-TACH) (CONT'D) Figure 20-22-8
Disassembly 3 2 1
Figure 20-22-6
P16295
Piston: Remove the O-ring (Item 1), and seal (Item 2)

P-85647 from the piston (Item 3) [Figure 20-22-8].
Figure 20-22-9

MEL1074 - O-ring Seal Hook
Spanner Wrench 4

2
1
cylinder.
Put the base end of the cylinder in a vise.

5
Use a spanner wrench to loosen the head [Figure 20-22- 3
6].
Figure 20-22-7 N-20611
2
4 3 1 Remove the wiper seal (Item 1), and rod seal (Item 2),
the back-up washer (Item 3), the thin O-ring (Item 4), and
the thick O-ring (Item 5) [Figure 20-22-9] from the head.
P16294
Remove the head and rod assembly from the cylinder

[Figure 20-22-7]. Put the rod end in a vise.
Remove the nut (Item 1), piston (Item 2), spacer (Item 3),
and head (Item 4) [Figure 20-22-7] from the rod.

Assembly
3 1
2
Figure 20-22-10
P16295
Piston: Install the O-ring (Item 1) and seal (Item 2) on the

P7424 piston (Item 3) [Figure 20-22-11].
NOTE: The piston center hole (Item 4) [Figure 20-22-

Use the following tools to assembly the cylinder: 11] has a bevel on one end. The bevel goes
toward the rod.

MEL1396 - Seal Installation Tool
MEL1033 - Rod Seal Installation Tool Figure 20-22-12
Spanner Wrench

Lubricate all O-rings and seals with hydraulic oil during

installation.
Install the new seal on the tool and slowly stretch it until it
fits the piston [Figure 20-22-10]. N-20612
Allow the seal to stretch for 30 seconds before installing it

on the piston. Install the rod seal on the rod seal tool [Figure 20-22-12].

must be toward the inside of the cylinder.

Assembly (Cont'd)
Figure 20-22-13
2
3
P7422
Install the thin O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 20-22-15].

N-20613
Install the back-up washer (Item 2) and thick O-ring (Item
3) [Figure 20-22-15] into the groove on the head.
22-13]. NOTE: Clean and dry the threads before installing the

nut. Install the new nut from the seal kit.
Figure 20-22-14
Figure 20-22-16
3
2 4
1
P7425
P16294
Install the rod seal in the head [Figure 20-22-14].

Install the head (Item 1), and spacer (Item 2) [Figure 20-
Install the wiper seal with the wiper toward the outside of 22-16].
the head.
Install the piston (Item 3) [Figure 20-22-16].
Grease the piston where the nut contacts the piston. do

not get grease on the threads. Install the new nut (Item 4)
[Figure 20-22-16].
Tighten the nut to 122 N•m (90 ft-lb) torque.

Assembly (Cont'd)
Figure 20-22-17
P-85647

Tighten the head using a spanner wrench [Figure 20-22-
17].


MAIN RELIEF VALVE
Description
The main relief valve limits the hydraulic system pressure

by opening at a certain pressure and allowing the
hydraulic oil to flow back to the hydraulic reservoir. (See
Hydraulic System on Page SPEC-10-4.)
The main relief valve is adjustable and is located on the

hydraulic control valve near the bottom, facing the front of
the loader.

MAIN RELIEF VALVE (CONT’D) Figure 20-30-1
Testing
1
2
IMPORTANT
The hydraulic tester must be in the fully open
position before you start the engine.
I-2024-0284
P-85571
WARNING
Connect the IN port (Item 1) [Figure 20-30-1] of the
When the engine is running during service, the hydraulic tester to the bottom (female) quick coupler on
driving and steering controls must be in neutral and the loader.
the parking brake engaged. Failure to do so can
cause injury or death. Connect the OUT port (Item 2) [Figure 20-30-1] of the
W-2006-1209 hydraulic tester to the top (male) quick coupler on the

loader.
Figure 20-30-2
WARNING
W-2017-0286
2
1
The tools listed will be needed to do the following
procedure:
TWX-RFIK200-S-6 204,4 L/min (54 U.S gpm) FLOW

METER
MEL10006 - Hydraulic Test Kit P-76460C
NOTE: This procedure is for standard loaders,

loaders equipped with ACS option and Start the engine and run at low idle.
loaders equipped with SJC option. The main
relief valve is located in the same place on all • Press the AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS Button (Item 1)
of the loaders. [Figure 20-30-2] once to engage the auxiliary
hydraulics.
1.) NOTE: The light (Item 2) [Figure 20-30-2] will be on.

MAIN RELIEF VALVE (CONT’D) With the engine at high idle and hydraulic oil at 60°C
(140°F) turn the restrictor control on the tester until the
Testing (Cont’d) flow through the tester drops to zero. Check the relief
pressure.
Figure 20-30-3
If the relief pressure is not correct, stop the engine and
Right adjust the main relief valve.
Steering
Lever
Control
P-85572
Figure 20-30-4

Joystick Option Only
Right
Steering
1 Lever
Control
P-26697
• Push the front switch (Item 1) [Figure 20-30-3] and

[Figure 20-30-4] to give the front quick couplers a
constant flow of fluid.
• To release from continuous operation, press the front

switch (Item 1) [Figure 20-30-3] and [Figure 20-30-
4] a second time.
Watch the flow meter on the hydraulic tester to make

sure the flow is correct. Increase the engine speed to full
rpm.
Refer to (See Hydraulic System on Page SPEC-10-4.) for

both flow and pressure specifications of the hydraulic
system.
Check the free flow specification.

MAIN RELIEF VALVE (CONT’D)
Adjusting

loaders equipped with ACS option and
loaders equipped with SJC option. The main
relief valve is located in the same place on all
of the loaders.
Figure 20-30-5
1
2

P-85573
If the pressure is not correct, adjust the main relief valve.

Loosen the lock nut (Item 1) [Figure 20-30-5].
Turn the adjusting screw (Item 2) [Figure 20-30-5] in or

out until the pressure is correct. Turning screw in will
increase pressure.
NOTE: If the correct pressure can not be reached,

replace the main relief valve. Check the
pressure setting of the new relief valve.

MAIN RELIEF VALVE (CONT’D) Figure 20-30-7
IMPORTANT
damage the system.
I-2003-0888
P-37689
Raise the operator cab. (See Raising on Page 10-30-2.)
Clean the area around the control valve. Remove the O-rings and back-up washers from the main
relief valve [Figure 20-30-7].
loaders equipped with ACS option and Clean the main relief valve in clean solvent. Use air
loaders equipped with SJC option. The main pressure to dry the valve.
relief valve is located in the same place on all

of the loaders. Install new O-rings and back-up washers. Install the main
relief valve and tighten [Figure 20-30-7].
Figure 20-30-6
Installation: Tighten the main relief valve to 48 - 54 N•m
(35 - 40 ft-lb) torque.
Check the pressure again. (See Testing on Page 20-30-

2.)
1
P-85573
The main relief valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-30-6] is located

at the lower front of the control valve below the lift and tilt
spool connections.
Loosen and remove the main relief valve (Item 1) [Figure

20-30-6].


HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (STANDARD)
Description
Figure 20-40-1
P-90327
The hydraulic control valve is located inside the main

frame on the right hand side, below the operators cab.

The hydraulic control valve is the hydraulic component
that uses spools to direct the flow of hydraulic fluid to the
lift, tilt and auxiliary functions.
The lift and tilt functions in the hydraulic control valve are
operated by linkage connected to the foot pedals.
The auxiliary function is operated by pilot pressure.

There is one solenoid located by each side of the spool.
Only one solenoid at a time is activated by the switch on
the right side control handle / lever. The activated
solenoid sends pilot pressure oil to one side of the spool
and forces the spool to shift.
The hydraulic control valve also contains a main relief

valve which is adjustable.

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (STANDARD) Drain the hydraulic reservoir. (See Removing And
(CONT’D) Replacing Hydraulic Fluid on Page 10-120-2.)
Removal And Installation Remove the control panel. (See Removal And Installation
on Page 50-100-2.)
Remove the control linkage. (See Linkage Removal And

DANGER Installation on Page 50-90-2.)
NOTE: Mark all tubelines, hoses, and electrical

connections for correct installation.
NOTE: Cap and plug all hydraulic connection points

when tubelines or hoses are removed.
Clean area around control valve.
P-90328
Open rear door.
AVOID DEATH
• Disconnecting or loosening any hydraulic Figure 20-40-2
• Keep out of this area when lift arms are raised 3

D-1009-0409 1
WARNING
the lift arms are secured by an approved lift arm 2
P-90187
to fall and cause injury or death. Remove the two bolts (Item 1), move the hose clamp
W-2059-0598 (Item 2) to the middle of the hose, and the place the fuel
inlet assembly (Item 3) [Figure 20-40-2] off to the side.
IMPORTANT
damage the system.
I-2003-0888
Raise the lift arms and install an approved lift arm support
device. (See LIFT ARM SUPPORT DEVICE on Page 10-
20-1.)

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (STANDARD) Figure 20-40-5
(CONT’D)
Figure 20-40-3
2
1
P-90270
Disconnect the hose (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-5] that

routes from the control valve to the brake valve.
P-90267
routes from the control valve to the fan motor.
The fixed end main valve hose assembly is connected to
a fixed end fitting on the control valve. The hose is routed

Figure 20-40-6
to the junction block at the rear of the loader where it
feeds the base end of both lift cylinders. The hose can
only be removed by first removing it from the fitting (Item
1)[Figure 20-40-3].
Figure 20-40-4 1
P-90271
2

1 routes from the top of the control valve to the hydraulic
filter.
P-90269
Disconnect the wire harness connectors (Item 1) [Figure

20-40-4] from the control valve.

routes from the control valve to the drain manifold.

routes from the control valve to the inlet fitting of the
hydraulic pump.

(CONT’D)
Figure 20-40-7
1 1
2 2
1 1
P-90274
Disconnect the three tubelines (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-9]

that route from the control valve to the junction block at
P-90272 the rear of the loader.
Figure 20-40-10
Remove the tubeline clamp (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-7].

Disconnect the two tubelines (Item 2) [Figure 20-40-7]
that route from the control valve to the front auxiliary
1
hydraulics.
Figure 20-40-8
P-90275

1 routes from the control valve to the junction block at the
rear of the machine.
P-90273 Disconnect the lift arm bypass drain hose (Item 2)

[Figure 20-40-10] from the control valve.

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (STANDARD) Mount Bracket Removal And Installation
(CONT’D)
Figure 20-40-13
Figure 20-40-11
1
P-90280
P-90276 Support the mounting bracket (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-13].
Figure 20-40-14
routes from the bottom of the control valve to the outlet

2
fitting of the hydraulic pump.
Figure 20-40-12
P-90279
Remove the two control valve mount bolts (Item 1)

[Figure 20-40-14].
P-90278
Remove the two frame bolts (Item 2) [Figure 20-40-14]
Support the control valve and remove the two bolts (Item Installation: Torque the two frame bolts (Item 2) [Figure
1) [Figure 20-40-12]. 20-40-14] to 406 - 447 N•m (300 - 330 ft-lb).
Remove the control valve from the loader. Remove the control valve bracket from the loader.

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (STANDARD) (CONT'D)
Identification Chart
Figure 20-40-15
C2 C3
J4 J2
B3 E3
E3
F2
G1 G2
D5
A3 D3
B2
A2
D4 F4 E2
C4
D1
D2
A1
H3
F3 E1
H2 B1
F1 MR J3

H1 J1 C1
P-90307
ITEM T650 LOADER ITEM T650 LOADER

A1 Lift Cylinder Base End E1 Lift Spool Detent
A2 Tilt Cylinder Base End E2 Tilt Spool Centering Spring
A3 Auxiliary Hydraulic Rod End E3 Auxiliary Spool / Centering Springs
B1 Lift Cylinder Rod End F1 Lift Spool
B2 Tilt Cylinder Rod End F2 Tilt Spool
B3 Auxiliary Hydraulics Base End F3 Lift Spool Lock Solenoid
C1 Load Check F4 Tilt Spool Lock Solenoid
C2 Load Check Valve Tilt Function G1 Auxiliary Solenoid Stem
C3 Load Check Valve Auxiliary Function G2 Auxiliary Solenoid Stem
C4 Check Valve H1 BICS Solenoid
D1 Anti-Cavitation Valve
H2 BICS Lock Valve (Tilt)
Lift (Rod End)
D2 Port Relief / Anti-Cavitation Valve – 27,6 MPa H3 BICS Lock Valve (Lift)
(275,8 bar) (4000 psi) J1 Inlet Fluid Flow (From Pump)
Lift (Base End)
J2 Outlet Fluid Flow (Return to Tank)
D3 Port Relief / Anti-Cavitation Valve – 27,6 MPa
J3 Lift Arm Bypass Orifice
(275,8 bar) (4000 psi)
Tilt (Base End) J4 Drain (Case)
D4 Port Relief / Anti-Cavitation Valve – 27,6 MPa MR Main Relief Valve – 24,1 MPa (241,3 bar)
(275,8 bar) (4000 psi) (3500 psi)
Tilt (Rod End)
D5 Port Relief / Anti-Cavitation Valve (Auxiliary)
27,6 MPa (275,8 bar) (4000 psi) (Optional)

(CONT'D)
Lift Load Check Valve Removal And Installation

1
Figure 20-40-16
3
1 P-90309
Remove and install new O-rings (Item 1) and back-up

ring (Item 2) [Figure 20-40-18].
P-90308
Check the free movement load check valve and spring
(Item 3) [Figure 20-40-18].
Remove the charge tubeline (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-16]
from the BICS valve fitting on the top of the lift load check

valve.
Figure 20-40-17
P-90310
Remove the lift load check valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-

17] and fitting from the top of the control valve.
Installation: Lubricate the O-ring and threads and

tighten to 75 - 88 N•m (55 - 65 ft-lb) torque.

(CONT'D)
Load Check Valve Removal And Installation (Tilt And

Auxiliary)
1
Figure 20-40-19
2
3
4
2
1
P-90312
Remove the spring (Item 1) and poppet (Item 2) [Figure

20-40-20].
P-90311 Check the orifice (Item 3) [Figure 20-40-20] in the

poppet to be sure it is not plugged.
At the front side of the control valve locate the tilt section

Installation: Install a new O-ring (Item 4) [Figure 20-40-
load check valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-19]. 20] on the plug and lightly lubricate with oil before
installing. Tighten the plug to 52 - 61 N•m (38 - 45 ft-lb)
At the front side of the control valve locate the auxiliary torque.
section load check valve (Item 2) [Figure 20-40-19].
NOTE: The tilt and auxiliary load check valves are

interchangeable.
IMPORTANT
damage the system.
I-2003-0888

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (STANDARD) Port Relief / Anti-Cavitation Valve Removal And
(CONT'D) Installation (Lift, Base End)
Anti-Cavitation Valve Removal And Installation (Lift, Figure 20-40-23

Rod End)
Figure 20-40-21
P-90314
P-90314 Loosen the lift circuit port relief / anti cavitation valve
(Item 1) [Figure 20-40-23].
At the back side of the control valve, remove the lift

Figure 20-40-24
section anti-cavitation valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-21].
Figure 20-40-22
3 1
4
P-90315
P-90312 Replace the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-24] before

installation.
Remove the spring (Item 1) and poppet (Item 2) [Figure Installation: Tighten to 52 - 61 N•m (38 - 45 ft-lb) torque.
20-40-22].
Check the orifice (Item 3) [Figure 20-40-22] in the


22] on the plug and lightly lubricate with oil before
torque.

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (STANDARD) Port Relief / Anti-Cavitation Valve Removal And
(CONT'D) Installation (Tilt, Rod End)
Port Relief / Anti-Cavitation Valve Removal And Figure 20-40-27

Installation (Tilt, Base End)
Figure 20-40-25
P-90314
P-90314 Remove the tilt port relief / anti cavitation valve (Item 1)
[Figure 20-40-27] from the rod end of the tilt section.
Remove the tilt port relief / anti cavitation valve (Item 1)

Figure 20-40-28
[Figure 20-40-25] from the base end of the tilt section.
Figure 20-40-26
1
1
P-90319

installation.
Replace the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-26] before Installation: Tighten to 52 - 61 N•m (38 - 45 ft-lb) torque.
installation.
Installation: Tighten to 52 - 61 N•m (38 - 45 ft-lb) torque.

(CONT'D)
Port Relief Valve Removal And Installation 1
Figure 20-40-29
P-90318A
The control valve may be equipped with an optional

auxiliary port relief valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-31].
P-90314
Remove the auxiliary port relief valve.
Remove the port relief plug (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-29] Figure 20-40-32
from the auxiliary circuit of the control valve.

Figure 20-40-30
P-51640
2
P-90318 Installation: Always use new O-rings (Item 1) [Figure
20-40-32]. Tighten to 52 - 61 N•m (38 - 45 ft-lb) torque.
Installation: Always use new O-rings (Item 1) [Figure


(CONT'D)
Plug Removal And Installation
Figure 20-40-33
1
P-51461
At the bottom side of the control valve remove the plug

(Item 1) [Figure 20-40-35].
P-68016
Figure 20-40-36
At the top side of the control valve, remove the plug (Item
1) [Figure 20-40-33].

Figure 20-40-34
P-51462

1 20-40-36]. Tighten to 54 N•m (40 ft-lb) torque.
P-51460A

20-40-34]. Tighten to 54 N•m (40 ft-lb) torque.

(CONT'D)
Rubber Boot Removal And Installation
Figure 20-40-37
P-51506
Remove the three screws (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-37] on

the rubber boot retainer plate.

Installation: Tighten the screws to 10,2 - 11,3 N•m (90 -
100 in-lb) torque.
Figure 20-40-38
1
2
P-51701
Remove the rubber boots (Item 1) from the retainer plate

(Item 2) [Figure 20-40-38].

(CONT'D)
End Cap Block Removal And Installation
Figure 20-40-39
1 1
1 1
P-51699A
1
Figure 20-40-42
P-51697
1
Remove the lift spool lock solenoid (Item 1) and the tilt
spool lock solenoid (Item 2) [Figure 20-40-39] from the

end cap / spool lock block.
4
Figure 20-40-40
1
P-51701
Remove the four end cap / spool lock block mount

screws (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-41] and [Figure 20-40-
1 42].

100 in-lb) torque.
P-90320
Remove the rubber boots and retainer plate (Item 2)
[Figure 20-40-42] from the lift and tilt spools.
Disconnect the tube line (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-40] from
the end cap / spool lock block. Remove the end cap / spool lock block (Item 4) [Figure

(CONT'D)
Lift Spool And Detent Removal And Installation
The tool listed will be needed to do the following 1

procedure:
MEL1278 - Detent Tool

MEL1285 - Detent Spring Tool
Remove the end cap / spool lock block from the control
valve.
Figure 20-40-43
P-90321
Remove the end cap (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-45].
Figure 20-40-46

P-51511A
1
Remove the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-43]. 2
Installation: Replace the O-ring, and lubricate the o-ring

lightly with grease or oil before installation of the end cap
P-51514
/ spool lock block.
Figure 20-40-44 Use a screwdriver to remove the snap ring (Item 1)

[Figure 20-40-46].
Remove the washer (Item 2) [Figure 20-40-46].
P-51512
Remove the spacer (Item 1) and O-ring (Item 2) [Figure

20-40-44] from the lift spool.

(CONT'D)

(Cont'd)
Figure 20-40-47
1 P-51516
Put a rag around the detent assembly [Figure 20-40-48].

This will prevent the detent balls and spring from being
1 lost when the detent sleeve is removed.
2
P-51515
Figure 20-40-49

Remove the screws (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-47] from the
detent bonnet.
Remove the detent bonnet (Item 2) [Figure 20-40-47].
Installation: Lubricate the screws and tighten to 10,2 -

11,3 N•m (90 - 100 in-lb) torque.
2 1
3
IMPORTANT
The detent assembly has small springs and balls. Do 2 P-51517
not lose these parts during disassembly and

assembly.
Remove the detent sleeve (Item 1), detent balls (Item 2)
I-2012-0284
and spring (Item 3) [Figure 20-40-49].

(CONT'D)

(Cont'd)
Figure 20-40-50
P-8988
Clamp the linkage end of the spool in a vise [Figure 20-

1 40-52].
P-51518 NOTE: Protect spool before clamping in vise.
Figure 20-40-53
Remove the lift spool assembly and seal (Item 1) [Figure

20-40-50] from the control valve. 2
Figure 20-40-51
1
3
1
N-18915
Install the spring tool (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-53] over the

P-51519 centering spring.
NOTE: Be careful when removing the detent adapter

Remove the lift spool seal (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-51] (Item 2) [Figure 20-40-53] from the centering
from the linkage end of the valve. spring, as it is under spring pressure.

(CONT'D)
Lift Spool And Detent Removal And Installation 1

(Cont'd)
Figure 20-40-54
N-19009
Remove spring tool (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-56] from the

1 spring assembly.
2
N-18916 Figure 20-40-57
Put a rag around the detent assembly [Figure 20-40-54]. 1

2
This will prevent the detent balls and spring from being
lost when the detent adapter is removed. 3
Remove the detent adapter with an Alan wrench.

4
Remove the back-up washer (Item 1) and spool seal
(Item 2) [Figure 20-40-54].
Figure 20-40-55
1
N-18919A
Inspect the adapter (Item 1), collar (Item 2), spring (Item
3) and washer (Item 4) [Figure 20-40-57].
N-19004
Remove the detent adapter (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-55]

from the spring assembly.

(CONT'D)

(Cont'd)
2
Figure 20-40-58
1
N-18961
Install the O-ring (Item 1) over the nipple on the plastic

plug (Item 2) [Figure 20-40-60].
N-18918 NOTE: Check the O-ring for damage. The lift spool
will have an internal leak if there is damage to
Remove the stud from the end of the spool [Figure 20- this O-ring. Always replace the O-ring and

40-58]. recheck the lift spool before the control valve
is replaced.
Figure 20-40-59
Figure 20-40-61
N-18920
N-18963
Removal of the plastic plug:
Make a center point in the plug using a 1,6 mm (1/16 in) Install the plastic plug and O-ring in the spool [Figure 20-
drill. 40-61].
Drill a hole all the way through the plug using a 2,8 mm
(7/64 in) tap drill
Turn a 6-32 tap (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-59] into the plug.

Pull the tap and plug out of the spool. Be careful, do not
break the tap.
Clean all the debris from inside the spool bore.
NOTE: DO NOT USE Loctite® ON THE STUD

THREADS.

(CONT'D)

(Cont'd)
2
Figure 20-40-62
O-ring
1 3
2
N-18958
Plastic
Plug
0.60 inch Apply grease on all the detent component surfaces
(15,2 mm)
before assembly [Figure 20-40-64].
B-14712 Install the spring (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-64] and detent

balls (Item 2) [Figure 20-40-64] into the adapter (Item 3)
[Figure 20-40-64] and compress with the detent pliers
Install the stud and tighten until the other end of the stud

(Item 1) [Figure 20-40-65].
is out about 15,2 mm (0.600 in) from the spool [Figure
20-40-62]. Figure 20-40-65
Figure 20-40-63
N-18968
N-18967
Install the detent adapter to the collar [Figure 20-40-65].
Clamp the collar (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-63] in a vice. NOTE: The collar and the detent adapter are held
together by spring pressure when assembled
to the lift spool not the detent balls. Hold the
detent adapter and collar together to prevent
the detent balls and spring from falling out.

(CONT'D)

(Cont'd)
Figure 20-40-66
N-19005
Install the spring assembly to the lift spool hand tight

[Figure 20-40-68].
N-19004 Remove the spring tool.
Check the alignment of the detent adapter and the


washer.
washer, spring, collar and detent adapter.
Tighten the adapter to 10,2 - 11,3 N•m (90 - 100 in-lb).
Figure 20-40-67
NOTE: The adapter must fit in the center of the
washer (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-68].
Figure 20-40-69
2
N-18917
Install the spool seal (Item 1) and back-up washer (Item

2) [Figure 20-40-67].
CD-15051
Install the detent balls and spring [Figure 20-40-69].

(CONT'D)

(Cont'd)
Figure 20-40-70
2
P-51515
Install the lift spool assembly in the spool bore [Figure

20-40-72].
N-19007 Install the detent bonnet (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-72].
Install the mounting screws (Item 2) [Figure 20-40-72].

Hold the detent balls in place with the detent pliers

[Figure 20-40-70]. Installation: Lubricate the screws and tighten to 10 -
11,3 N•m (90 - 100 in-lb) torque.
Figure 20-40-71
Figure 20-40-73
1
N-19008
P-51514
Install the detent sleeve (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-71] to the

detent adapter. Install the washer (Item 1) and snap ring (Item 2) [Figure
20-40-73].

(CONT'D)

(Cont'd)
Figure 20-40-74
1
1
P-51512
Install the O-ring (Item 1) and bushing (Item 2) [Figure

20-40-76] on the lift spool.
P-90321 Figure 20-40-77
Install the end cap (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-74].

Figure 20-40-75
P-51511A
Install the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-77] on the

control valve.
P-51520
Install the spool seal (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-75] on the

linkage end of the valve.

(CONT'D)

(Cont'd)
Figure 20-40-78
2
1
P-51697
3
Use an ohmmeter to measure the lock solenoid coils
resistance.
4
P-51701 The correct resistance for the coil is 16.02 - 19.58 ohm.
Installation: Install the lift spool (Item 1) and tilt spool

Install the end cap / spool lock block (Item 1) and the

(Item 2) lock solenoids and tighten to 52 - 61 N•m (38 -
mount bolt (Item 2) [Figure 20-40-78]. 45 ft-lb) torque [Figure 20-40-80].
Install the lift and tilt spool rubber boots and mount plate
(Item 3) and install the three mounting screws (Item 4)
[Figure 20-40-78].

100 in-lb) torque.
Figure 20-40-79
P-90320
Connect the tubeline (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-79].

(CONT'D)
Tilt Spool Removal And Installation
Remove the lift and tilt end cap / spool lock block. (See
End Cap Block Removal And Installation on Page 20-40- 2
14.)
Figure 20-40-81
P-90323
Remove the spool centering block (Item 1) [Figure 20-

1 2
40-83] from the control valve.
Installation: Replace the O-ring (Item 2) [Figure 20-40-

83] and lubricate the O-ring lightly with grease or oil
before installation of the end cap / spool lock block.

P-51521
Figure 20-40-84

20-40-81] from the tilt spool.
Figure 20-40-82
P-51544
2 1 Remove the tilt spool, centering spring, back-up washer

and spool seal [Figure 20-40-84].
P-90321
Assembly: Always use a new spool seal.

from the spool centering block.
Remove the three screws (Item 2) [Figure 20-40-82]

Installation: Tighten the bolt to 10,2 - 11,3 N•m (90 - 100

in-lb) torque.

(CONT'D)
Tilt Spool Removal And Installation (Cont'd)

2 1
Figure 20-40-85
3
4
1
N-18944A
N-18942
Figure 20-40-88
Put the linkage end of the spool in the vice [Figure 20-
40-85]. 2

1
Install the spool tool (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-85] over the
centering spring.
Figure 20-40-86
1
1
P-51545 N-18943
Remove the spool seal(s) (Item 1) and the back-up

N-19014
Remove the bolt (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-86] holding the

centering spring to the spool.

in-lb) torque.
Remove spring tool from the spring assembly.

(CONT'D)
Auxiliary Spool Removal And Installation
Figure 20-40-89
1
1
2 3 2
P-51547
2 1 Remove the spacer (Item 1) and O-ring (Item 2) [Figure

20-40-91] from the auxiliary spool.
P-90321
Figure 20-40-92
Remove the two tubelines (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-89]



in-lb) torque. 2
1
40-89] from the control valve.
Figure 20-40-90
P-51549A
Remove the spring (Item 1) and center spring retainer

(Item 2) [Figure 20-40-92] from the auxiliary spool.
NOTE: If the centering spring retainer (Item 2) [Figure

2 20-40-92] must be replaced, replace the
1 retainer on the opposite end also.
P-51546A


20-40-90] must be replaced, replace the
retainer on the opposite end also.

(CONT'D)
Auxiliary Spool Removal And Installation (Cont’d)
Figure 20-40-93
1
2
P-51550


Figure 20-40-94
P-51551
Remove the spool (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-94].

(CONT'D)
Auxiliary Solenoid Removal And Installation
Figure 20-40-95
1
2
P-85528
Remove the screws (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-95] from both

solenoids.

Remove the solenoids (Item 2) [Figure 20-40-95] from
the control valve.
Installation: Tighten the nut to 2,44 - 2,98 N•m (21.6 -

26.4 in-lb) torque.
Figure 20-40-96
P-85556
Check and remove the O-rings (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-

96] from the solenoid stem.
Use an ohmmeter to measure the solenoid coil

resistance.
The correct resistance for the coil is 4.1 - 6.1 ohm.

(CONT'D)
Solenoid Removal And Installation
Figure 20-40-97 1
1
2
P-85528
Remove the solenoid stem (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-99].
P-90310 Installation: Lubricate the O-rings and tighten the stem

to 27 - 33 N•m (20 - 24 ft-lb) torque.
Remove the nut (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-97] from the Figure 20-40-100
solenoid stem.

Installation: Tighten the nut to 6 N•m (53 in-lb) torque.
Remove the solenoid coil (Item 2) [Figure 20-40-97]. 3

2
Figure 20-40-98
N-18694
Remove the O-rings (Item 1) and back-up rings (Item 2)

[Figure 20-40-100] from the stem.
Clean all parts in solvent and dry with compressed air.

N-18693A
Inspect all parts for wear and replace any showing
excessive wear.
Remove the O-rings (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-98] from
both ends of the solenoid coil. NOTE: The screen (Item 3) [Figure 20-40-100] may be
cleaned with solvent. If it is torn or worn,
Use an ohmmeter to measure the solenoid coil replace the solenoid valve.
resistance.
Use only new O-rings and apply oil to all O-rings and
The correct resistance for the coil is 9.5 - 10.08 ohm. back-up rings before installation.
Install new O-rings (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-98] and

[Figure 20-40-100] and new back-up rings (Item 2)
[Figure 20-40-100] on the solenoid stem.

(CONT'D)
Lock Valve Removal And Installation
Figure 20-40-101 1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
2 P-51564

[Figure 20-40-103] from the lift lock valve, and replace
P-90310 with new.
Figure 20-40-104
Locate the two BICS lock valves, (Item 1) is for the tilt
circuit and (Item 2) [Figure 20-40-101] is for the lift

circuit.
Figure 20-40-102
P-51705
Locate the tilt circuit lock valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-

104].
P-90321
Remove the lift lock valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-102]

from the back of the control valve.
Installation: Lightly lubricate the lock valve O-rings and


(CONT'D)
Lock Valve Removal And Installation (Cont’d)
Figure 20-40-105 1
1
1
2
1
2
2
1 2
P-51564

[Figure 20-40-107] from the tilt lock valve, and replace
P-90325 with new.
Remove the lift spool lock solenoid (Item 1) [Figure 20-

40-105].

Remove the tilt spool lock solenoid (Item 2) [Figure 20-
40-105].
Installation: Lubricate the O-rings and tighten the spool

lock solenoids to 52 - 61 N•m (38 - 45 ft-lb) torque.
Figure 20-40-106
P-90324
Remove the tilt lock valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-106]

from the front of the control valve.


HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (STANDARD) Main Relief Valve Removal And Installation
(CONT'D)
Figure 20-40-110
Lift Arm Bypass Orifice Removal And Installation
Figure 20-40-108
1
P-51707
P-90308 Remove the main relief valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-

110].
Remove the fitting (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-108] from the Figure 20-40-111
valve.

Figure 20-40-109
P-51463
P-51437 Remove the O-rings from the main relief valve (Item 1)
[Figure 20-40-111].
Check the lift arm bypass orifice (Item 1) [Figure 20-40- Installation: Always use new O-rings. Tighten to 52 - 61
109]. N•m (38 - 45 ft-lb) torque.
NOTE: This orifice is not removable from the valve

casting.

(CONT'D)
Check Valve Removal And Installation
Figure 20-40-112
1
P-68869
Installation: Lubricate the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-

114] and tighten the fitting to 27 - 33 N•m (20 - 24 ft-lb)
P-90308 torque.
Figure 20-40-115
Remove the tubeline (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-112].

Figure 20-40-113
P-90326
P-90310 Inspect the screen (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-115].
Remove the check valve fitting (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-

113] from the hydraulic control valve.

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (ACS) OR (SJC) Removal And Installation
Description
Figure 20-41-1
DANGER
P-90328
AVOID DEATH
P-90337
The hydraulic control valve is located inside the main support. Replace if damaged.
frame on the right hand side, below the operator’s cab. D-1009-0409

The hydraulic control valve is the hydraulic component
that uses spools to direct the flow of hydraulic fluid to the
lift, tilt and auxiliary functions.
WARNING
The lift and tilt functions in the hydraulic control valve are
operated using electronic control handles / levers that Never work on a machine with the lift arms up unless
send an electronic signal to the electronic actuators to the lift arms are secured by an approved lift arm
move the lift and tilt spools in the control valve. support device. Failure to use an approved lift arm
The auxiliary function is operated by pilot pressure. to fall and cause injury or death.
There is one solenoid located by each side of the spool. W-2059-0598
Only one solenoid at a time is activated by the switch on
the right side control handles / levers. The activated
solenoid sends pilot pressure oil to one side of the spool
and forces the spool to shift.
The hydraulic control valve also contains a main relief IMPORTANT

valve which is adjustable.
damage the system.
I-2003-0888

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (ACS) OR (SJC) Figure 20-41-3
(CONT’D)
Removal And Installation (Cont’d) 3
Raise the lift arms and install an approved lift arm support 1
device. (See LIFT ARM SUPPORT DEVICE on Page 10-
20-1.)

2
Drain the hydraulic reservoir. (See Removing And
Replacing Hydraulic Fluid on Page 10-120-2.)
1
Remove the control panel. (See Removal And Installation
on Page 50-100-2.)
P-90269
NOTE: Mark all tubelines, hoses, and electrical

connections for correct installation. Disconnect the wire harness connectors (Item 1) [Figure
NOTE: Cap and plug all hydraulic connection points
when tubelines or hoses are removed. Disconnect the hose (Item 2) [Figure 20-41-3] that
routes from the control valve to the drain manifold.
Clean area around control valve.

Open rear door. routes from the control valve to the inlet fitting of the
hydraulic pump.
Figure 20-41-2
Figure 20-41-4
1
2
1
P-90267
P-90270
The fixed end main valve hose assembly is connected to

a fixed end fitting on the control valve. The hose is routed Disconnect the hose (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-4] that
to the junction block at the rear of the loader where it routes from the control valve to the brake valve.
feeds the base end of both lift cylinders. The hose can
only be removed by first removing it from the fitting (Item Disconnect the hose (Item 2) [Figure 20-41-4] that
1)[Figure 20-41-2]. routes from the control valve to the fan motor.

(CONT’D)
Figure 20-41-5
1
1
P-90273
P-90271 Figure 20-41-8

routes from the top of the control valve to the hydraulic

filter.
1 1
Figure 20-41-6
2 2
1
1
P-90274
Disconnect the three tubelines (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-8]

that route from the control valve to the junction block at
the rear of the loader.
P-90272

that route from the control valve to the front auxiliary
hydraulics.

(CONT’D)
Figure 20-41-9
1
1
P-90278
Support the control valve and remove the two bolts and
nuts (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-11].
P-90275
Remove the control valve from the loader.

routes from the control valve to the junction block at the

rear of the machine.
Disconnect the lift arm bypass drain hose (Item 2)

[Figure 20-41-9] from the control valve.
Figure 20-41-10
P-90276

routes from the bottom of the control valve to the outlet
fitting of the hydraulic pump.

(CONT’D)
Actuator Removal And Installation (In Loader)
WARNING
W-2059-0598
P-54587
device. (See Installing on Page 10-20-1.) Remove the two screws (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-13] from
the actuator retainer.
Installation: Tighten the bolts to 10,2 - 11,3 N•m (90 -
Mark the actuator wiring harness connectors for proper 100 in-lb) torque.
installation.

Figure 20-41-14
Figure 20-41-12
1 2
P-54566
P-90330
Pull the actuator (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-14] away from

Unplug the actuator connectors (Item 1) [Figure 20-41- the control valve.
12] from the loader harness.
Use a punch to remove the actuator pin (Item 2) [Figure
20-41-14] from the actuator and spool.
Remove the actuator from the hydraulic control valve.
NOTE: The calibration procedure must be followed

when replacing a lift or tilt actuator. (See Lift
And Tilt Calibration (SJC) on Page 60-160-4.)

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (ACS) OR (SJC)
(CONT’D)
Actuator Removal And Installation (In Loader)

(Cont’d)
Figure 20-41-15
1
2
P-54568
Inspect the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-15] on the face

of the actuator, and replace as needed.
Inspect the linkage pin (Item 2) [Figure 20-41-15] and

replace as needed.

(CONT’D)
Actuator Removal And Installation (Out Of Loader)
Remove the control valve from the loader.
Figure 20-41-16
P-54339
Using a punch and a hammer, remove the actuator

1 linkage pin (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-18] from the actuator
and the tilt spool.
P-54337 Remove the actuator and linkage pin from the valve.

Figure 20-41-19
Remove the two mount bolts (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-16]
from the tilt actuator.
Installation: Tighten the mounting bolts to 10,2 - 11,3

N•m (90 - 100 in-lb) torque.
Figure 20-41-17
P-54340
1 Inspect the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-19] on the face

of the actuator, and replace as needed.
Inspect the linkage pin (Item 2) [Figure 20-41-19] and

P-54338 replace as needed.
Slide the actuator mount bracket (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-

17] away from the control valve.
Pull the actuator away from the control valve [Figure 20-
41-17].

(CONT’D)
Actuator Removal And Installation (Out of Loader)

(Cont’d)
Figure 20-41-20
1 1
P-54343
Using a punch and a hammer, remove the actuator

linkage pin (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-22] from the actuator
1 and the tilt spool.
P-54341
Remove the actuator and linkage pin from the valve.

Figure 20-41-23
from the lift actuator.

Figure 20-41-21
P-54340
Inspect the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-23] on the face

1 of the actuator, and replace as needed.
P-54342 Inspect the linkage pin (Item 2) [Figure 20-41-23] and

replace as needed.
Slide the actuator mount bracket (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-

21] away from the control valve.
Pull the actuator away from the control valve [Figure 20-
41-21].

(CONT’D)
Actuator Removal And Installation (Out Of Loader)

(Cont’d)
Figure 20-41-24
4 3
1
3
P-90329
NOTE: The two longer bolts (Item 1) are used to

mount the lift actuator and end cap (Item 2)
[Figure 20-41-24] to the control valve.
The two shorter mount bolts (Item 3) are used
to mount the tilt actuator to the end cap (Item
4) [Figure 20-41-24].

N•m (90 - 100 in-lb) torque (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-24]

(CONT’D)
Figure 20-41-25
C2 C3
J4 J2
B3 E3
E3
F2
G1 G2
D5
A3 D3
B2
A2
D4 F4 E2
C4
D1
D2
A1
H3
F3 E1
H2 B1

F1 MR J3
H1 J1 C1
P-90307
ITEM S850 LOADER ITEM S850 LOADER

A1 Lift Cylinder Base End E1 Lift Spool Detent
A2 Tilt Cylinder Base End E2 Tilt Spool Centering Spring
A3 Auxiliary Hydraulic Rod End E3 Auxiliary Spool / Centering Springs
B1 Lift Cylinder Rod End F1 Lift Spool
B2 Tilt Cylinder Rod End F2 Tilt Spool
B3 Auxiliary Hydraulics Base End F3 Lift Spool Lock Solenoid
C1 Load Check F4 Tilt Spool Lock Solenoid
C2 Load Check Valve Tilt Function G1 Auxiliary Solenoid Stem
C3 Load Check Valve Auxiliary Function G2 Auxiliary Solenoid Stem
C4 Check Valve H1 BICS Solenoid
D1 Anti-Cavitation Valve H2 BICS Lock Valve (Tilt)
Lift (Rod End)
D2 Port Relief / Anti-Cavitation Valve – 27,6 MPa H3 BICS Lock Valve (Lift)
(275,8 bar) (4000 psi) J1 Inlet Fluid Flow (From Pump)
Lift (Base End) J2 Outlet Fluid Flow (Return to Tank)
D3 Port Relief / Anti-Cavitation Valve – 27,6 MPa J3 Lift Arm Bypass Orifice
(275,8 bar) (4000 psi)
J4 Drain (Case)
Tilt (Base End)
MR Main Relief Valve – 24,1 MPa (241,3 bar)
D4 Port Relief / Anti-Cavitation Valve – 27,6 MPa
(3500 psi)
(275,8 bar) (4000 psi)
Tilt (Rod End)
D5 Port Relief / Anti-Cavitation Valve (Auxiliary)
27,6 MPa (275,8 bar) (4000 psi) (Optional)

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (ACS) OR (SJC) Lift Load Check Valve Removal And Installation
(CONT’D)
Figure 20-41-28
Mount Bracket Removal And Installation
Figure 20-41-26
P-90308
P-90280 Remove the charge tubeline (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-28]

from the BICS valve fitting on the top of the lift load check
valve.
Support the mounting bracket (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-26].

Figure 20-41-29
Figure 20-41-27
2 1
P-90310
P100202
Remove the lift load check valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-

Remove the two control valve mount bolts (Item 1) 29] and fitting from the top of the control valve.
[Figure 20-41-27].
Installation: Lubricate the O-ring and threads and
Remove the two frame bolts (Item 2) [Figure 20-41-27] tighten to 75 - 88 N•m (55 - 65 ft-lb) torque.
Installation: Torque the two frame bolts (Item 2) [Figure

20-41-27] to 406 - 447 N•m (300 - 330 ft-lb).
Remove the control valve bracket from the loader.

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (ACS) OR (SJC) Load Check Valve Removal And Installation (Tilt And
(CONT’D) Auxiliary)
Lift Load Check Valve Removal And Installation Figure 20-41-31

(Cont’d)
Figure 20-41-30
2
P-90311
3
P-90309 At the front side of the control valve locate the tilt section
load check valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-31].
Remove and install new O-rings (Item 1) and back-up

At the front side of the control valve locate the auxiliary
ring (Item 2) [Figure 20-41-30]. section load check valve (Item 2) [Figure 20-41-31].
Inspect the free movement load check valve and spring NOTE: The tilt and auxiliary load check valves are
(Item 3) [Figure 20-41-30]. interchangeable.
Figure 20-41-32
IMPORTANT
When repairing hydrostatic and hydraulic systems, 1
parts clean. Always use caps and plugs on hoses, 2
damage the system. 3
I-2003-0888 4
P-90312
Remove the spring (Item 1) and poppet (Item 2) [Figure

20-41-32].
Inspect the orifice (Item 3) [Figure 20-41-32] in the


torque.

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (ACS) OR (SJC) Port Relief / Anti-Cavitation Valve Removal And
(CONT’D) Installation (Lift, Base End)
Anti-Cavitation Valve Removal And Installation (Lift, Figure 20-41-35

Rod End)
Figure 20-41-33
P-90314
P-90314 Loosen the lift circuit port relief / anti cavitation valve
(Item 1) [Figure 20-41-35].
At the back side of the control valve, remove the lift

Figure 20-41-36
section anti-cavitation valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-33].
Figure 20-41-34
3 1
4
P-90315

installation.
Remove the spring (Item 1) and poppet (Item 2) [Figure Installation: Tighten to 52 - 61 N•m (38 - 45 ft-lb) torque.
20-41-34].
Inspect the orifice (Item 3) [Figure 20-41-34] in the


torque.

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (ACS) OR (SJC) Port Relief / Anti-Cavitation Valve Removal And
(CONT’D) Installation (Tilt, Rod End)
Port Relief / Anti-Cavitation Valve Removal And Figure 20-41-39

Installation (Tilt, Base End)
Figure 20-41-37
P-90314
P-90314 Remove the tilt port relief / anti cavitation valve (Item 1)
[Figure 20-41-39] from the rod end of the tilt section.
Remove the tilt port relief / anti cavitation valve (Item 1)

Figure 20-41-40
[Figure 20-41-37] from the base end of the tilt section.
Figure 20-41-38
1
1
P-90319

installation.
Replace the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-38] before Installation: Tighten to 52 - 61 N•m (38 - 45 ft-lb) torque.
installation.
Installation: Tighten to 52 - 61 N•m (38 - 45 ft-lb) torque.

(CONT’D)
Port Relief Valve Removal And Installation 1
Figure 20-41-41
P-90318A
The control valve may be equipped with an optional

auxiliary port relief valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-43].
P-90314
Remove the auxiliary port relief valve.
Remove the port relief plug (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-41] Figure 20-41-44
from the auxiliary circuit of the control valve.

Figure 20-41-42
P-51640
P-90318 Installation: Always use new O-rings (Item 1) [Figure



(CONT’D)
Plug Removal And Installation
Figure 20-41-45
1
P-51461
At the bottom side of the control valve remove the plug

(Item 1) [Figure 20-41-47].
P-68016
Figure 20-41-48
At the top side of the control valve, remove the plug (Item
1) [Figure 20-41-45].

Figure 20-41-46
P-51462

1 20-41-48]. Tighten to 81,3 N•m (60 ft-lb) torque.
P-51460A

20-41-46]. Tighten to 81,3 N•m (60 ft-lb) torque.

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (ACS) OR (SJC) Lift Spool Removal And Installation
(CONT’D)
The tool listed will be needed to do the following
End Cap Block Removal And Installation procedure:
Remove the lift and tilt actuators from the control valve. MEL 1285 - Spring Tool
(See Actuator Removal And Installation (In Loader) on
Page 20-40-5.) Remove the end cap block from the control valve.
Figure 20-41-49 Figure 20-41-51
1 2

P-90338
P-68042
Disconnect the tube line (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-49] from Remove the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-51].
the end cap block.
Installation: Replace the O-ring, and lubricate lightly
Remove the two end cap block mount screws (Item 2) with oil before installation of the end cap block.
[Figure 20-41-49].
Figure 20-41-52
100 in-lb) torque.
Figure 20-41-50
P-68047
1
P-90339 20-41-52] from the lift spool.
Remove the end cap block (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-50]

from the control valve.

(CONT’D)
Lift Spool Removal And Installation (Cont'd)
Figure 20-41-53
1
1
P-68045
1
Remove the lift spool assembly and seal (Item 1) [Figure

P-68043
Figure 20-41-56
Remove the two screws (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-53] from

the lift spool end cap.

Installation: Lubricate the screws and tighten to 10,2 -
11,3 N•m (90 - 100 in-lb) torque.
Figure 20-41-54
P-68046
1 Remove the lift spool seal (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-56]

from the linkage end of the valve.
P-68044
Remove the lift spool end cap (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-54]

from the control valve.

(CONT’D)
Lift Spool Disassembly And Assembly

1
Figure 20-41-57
N-190146

P-51772
in-lb) torque.
Clamp the linkage end of the spool in a vise [Figure 20-
41-57].

NOTE: Protect spool before clamping in vise. Figure 20-41-60
Figure 20-41-58
3
4 1
1
P-51776
P-51773
centering spring.

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (ACS) OR (SJC) NOTE: Inspect the O-ring for damage. The lift spool
(CONT’D) will have an internal leak if there is damage to
this O-ring. Always replace the O-ring and
Lift Spool Disassembly And Assembly (Cont,d) plastic plug. Inspect the lift spool before the
control valve is replaced.
Figure 20-41-61
Figure 20-41-63
N-18920
P-74184
Removal of the plastic plug:
Make a center point in the plug using a 1,6 mm (1/16 in)

Install the plastic plug and O-ring in the spool [Figure 20-
drill. 41-63].
Drill a hole all the way through the plug using a 2,8 mm Figure 20-41-64
(7/64 in) tap drill.
Turn a 6-32 tap (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-61] into the plug.

Pull the tap and plug out of the spool. Be careful, do not 2
1
break the tap.
Clean all the debris from inside the spool bore.
NOTE: DO NOT USE Loctite® ON THE STUD

THREADS.
1
Figure 20-41-62
P-68046 P-51775
2
1 Remove the spool seal(s) (Item 1) and the back-up

P-74183
Install the O-ring (Item 1) over the nipple on the plastic

plug (Item 2) [Figure 20-41-62].

(CONT’D)
Tilt Spool Removal And Installation
Remove the end cap block. (See End Cap Block

Removal And Installation on Page 20-40-17.)
2
Figure 20-41-65
P-90342

2 41-67] from the control valve.
1 Installation: Replace the O-ring (Item 2) [Figure 20-41-
67] and lubricate lightly with oil / grease before
P-68049 installation of the end cap block.

Figure 20-41-68
20-41-65] from the tilt spool.
Figure 20-41-66
1
1
1 P-68052
2
Remove the tilt spool, centering spring, back-up washer
P-90321 and spool seal (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-68].

Disconnect the two tubelines (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-66].


in-lb) torque.

(CONT’D)
Tilt Spool Disassembly And Assembly

2 1
Figure 20-41-69
3
4
1
N-18944A
N-18942
Figure 20-41-72
Put the linkage end of the spool in the vice [Figure 20-
41-69]. 2

1
centering spring.
Figure 20-41-70
1
1
P-51545 N-18943
Remove the spool seal(s) (Item 1) and the back-up

N-19014


in-lb) torque.

(CONT’D)
Auxiliary Spool Removal And Installation
Figure 20-41-73
2
1
2
P-68054
1
2 Remove the spacer (Item 1) and O-ring (Item 2) [Figure

P-90321
Figure 20-41-76


Installation: Tighten the bolts to 10,2 - 11,3 N•m (90 -

100 in-lb) torque.
2
Remove the spool centering block from the control valve. 1
Figure 20-41-74
P-68076


2 20-41-76] must be replaced, replace the
P-68053


20-41-74] must be replaced, replace the

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (ACS) OR (SJC) Auxiliary Solenoid Removal And Installation
(CONT’D)
Figure 20-41-79
Auxiliary Spool Removal And Installation (Cont,d)
Figure 20-41-77
2
1
2
2 P-90337
P-68077 Remove the screws (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-79] from both

solenoids.
Remove the spacer (Item 1) and O-ring (Item 2) [Figure Remove the solenoids (Item 2) [Figure 20-41-79].

Installation: Tighten the screws to 2,44 - 2,98 N•m (21.6
Figure 20-41-78 - 26.4 in-lb) torque.
Figure 20-41-80
P-68078
P-85556
Remove the auxiliary spool (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-78].
Inspect and remove the O-rings (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-

80] from the solenoid stem.
Use an ohmmeter to measure the solenoid coil

resistance.
The correct resistance for the coil is 4.1 - 6.1 ohm.

(CONT’D)
Figure 20-41-81 1
P-90346
Remove the solenoid stem (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-83].
P-90337 Installation: Lubricate the O-rings and tighten the stem

to 27 - 33 N•m (20 - 24 ft-lb) torque.
Remove the nut (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-81] from the Figure 20-41-84
solenoid stem.

Installation: Tighten the nut to 6 N•m (53 in-lb) torque.
Remove the solenoid coil (Item 2) [Figure 20-41-81]. 3

2
Figure 20-41-82
N-18694

[Figure 20-41-84] from the stem.
Clean all parts in solvent and dry with compressed air.

N-18693A
Inspect all parts for wear and replace any showing
excessive wear.
Remove the O-rings (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-82] from
both ends of the solenoid coil. NOTE: The screen (Item 3) [Figure 20-41-84] may be
cleaned with solvent. If it is torn or worn the
Use an ohmmeter to measure the solenoid coil solenoid stem needs to be replaced.
resistance.
Use only new O-rings and apply oil to all O-rings and
The correct resistance for the coil is 9.5 - 10.08 ohm. back-up rings before installation.
Install new O-rings (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-82] and

[Figure 20-41-84] and new back-up rings (Item 2)
[Figure 20-41-84] on the solenoid stem.

(CONT’D)
Lock Valve Removal And Installation
Figure 20-41-85
1
2 P-51792
Remove the tilt lock valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-87]

P-90310
Locate the two BICS lock valves, (Item 1) is for the tilt
circuit and (Item 2) [Figure 20-41-85] is for the lift circuit.

Figure 20-41-88
Figure 20-41-86
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
P-51564
P-90321
[Figure 20-41-88] from the valve, and replace with new.
Remove the lift lock valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-86]


HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (ACS) OR (SJC) Main Relief Valve Removal And Installation
(CONT’D)
Figure 20-41-91
Lift Arm Bypass Orifice Removal And Installation
Figure 20-41-89
1
P-51794
P-90308 Remove the main relief valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-91].
Figure 20-41-92
Remove the fitting (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-89] from the
valve.

Figure 20-41-90
1
1
P-90344
Remove the O-rings from the main relief valve (Item 1)

P-51437 [Figure 20-41-92].
Installation: Always use new O-rings. Tighten to 52 - 61

Inspect the lift arm bypass orifice (Item 1) [Figure 20-41- N•m (38 - 45 ft-lb) torque.
90].
NOTE: This orifice is not removable from the valve

casting.

(CONT’D)
Check Valve Removal And Installation
Figure 20-41-93
1
P-68869
Installation: Lubricate the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-

95] and tighten the fitting to 27 - 33 N•m (20 - 24 ft-lb)
P-90308 torque.
Figure 20-41-96
Remove the tubeline (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-93].

Figure 20-41-94
P-90326
P-90310 Inspect the screen (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-96].
Remove the check valve fitting (Item 1) [Figure 20-41-

94] from the hydraulic control valve.

LIFT ARM BYPASS CONTROL VALVE
Description
The lift arm bypass control valve is located on the right

side of the machine.
The lift arm bypass control valve is manually operated by

pulling on the valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-1] and turning
the knob 90° clockwise. The valve releases the hydraulic
fluid from the base end of the lift cylinder(s) which allows
the lift arm to slowly come down to the transport position.
Testing
Figure 20-50-1

P-85290B P-85290A
Raise the lift arms 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. Stop the
engine. Turn the Lift Arm Bypass Control Knob (Item 1)
[Figure 20-50-1] 90° clockwise. Then pull up and hold
the Lift Arm Bypass Control Knob until the lift arms slowly
lower.
The knob should return to its normal position.

LIFT ARM BYPASS CONTROL VALVE (CONT’D) Figure 20-50-2
1
3
DANGER
2
P-85670
P-90328
AVOID DEATH Hold the lift arm bypass control knob (Item 1) [Figure 20-
• Disconnecting or loosening any hydraulic 50-2] and loosen the jam nut on the lift arm bypass valve
tubeline, hose, fitting, component or a part failure shaft.
• Keep out of this area when lift arms are raised Remove the lift arm bypass control knob (Item 1).
unless supported by an approved lift arm Remove the jam nut (Item 2) from the valve shaft [Figure

20-50-2].
D-1009-0409
Remove the rubber washer (Item 3) [Figure 20-50-2].
Figure 20-50-3
WARNING 2
W-2059-0598
Lower the lift arms.

1
P-85671
Disconnect and cap the hydraulic tubeline and hose

(Item 1) [Figure 20-50-3].
Remove the two mounting bolts and nuts (Item 2)

[Figure 20-50-3].
Installation: Tighten the mounting bolts to 21 - 23 N•m

(180 - 200 in-lb) torque.
Remove the lift arm bypass valve.

LIFT ARM BYPASS CONTROL VALVE (CONT’D) Disassembly And Assembly
Bracket Removal And Installation Figure 20-50-5
Figure 20-50-4
1 2
P-85673
P-85672
Remove the lift arm bypass valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-
5] from the valve block. Inspect the bypass valve for
Remove the two bolts (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-4] to damage and replace if necessary.
replace the bypass valve mounting bracket if necessary.

Installation: Tighten the valve to 45 - 50 N•m (33 - 37 ft-
Reverse the removal procedure to install the lift arm lb) torque.
bypass valve in the loader.
Inspect the hydraulic fittings (Item 2) [Figure 20-50-5] on
the valve block for damage and replace if necessary.


HYDRAULIC PUMP Start the engine and run at low idle rpm. Press the
Auxiliary hydraulics button. Engage the front auxiliary
Description with the trigger on the right handle or joystick. Make sure
the tester is connected correctly. If no flow is indicated on
The hydraulic pump is attached to the end of the the tester, the hoses are connected wrong. With the
hydrostatic pumps and is located on the right side of the hoses connected correctly, increase the engine speed to
loader between the hydraulic control valve and the full rpm*.
engine.
Warm the fluid to 60°C (140°F) by turning the restrictor
The hydraulic pump is a combination of gear pumps that control clockwise on the tester so it reads about 6,9 MPa
provide hydraulic flow to several hydraulic systems. (68,9 bar) (1000 psi).
The hydraulic pump has a dedicated charge pump. This NOTE: DO NOT EXCEED 25,5 MPa (255,1 bar) (3700
supplies flow to the hydraulic fan motor and charge psi).
pressure to the hydrostatic pump.
Turn the restrictor control (Item 2) [Figure 20-60-1] on
A seal kit is available to service the hydraulic pump. If the tester counterclockwise to obtain free flow, the flow
any of the main components of the pump are damaged, should be approximately 87,1 - 90,8 L/min (23 - 24 U.S
the entire pump must be replaced. gpm). Start turning the restrictor clockwise, causing more
restriction on the flow. The U.S gpm should drop off
Pump Test At Quick Couplers slightly until the pressure reaches approximately 21,4
MPa (213,7 bar) (3100 psi). At approximately 21,4 MPa
The tools listed will be needed to do the following (213,7 bar) (3100 psi) the flow should start decreasing
procedure: rapidly until the pressure reaches 23,8 - 34,1 MPa (237,9

- 241,3 bar) (3450 - 3500 psi). At 23,8 - 34,1 MPa (237,9
TWX-RFIK200-S-6 204,4 L/min (54 U.S gpm) Flow Meter - 241,3 bar) (3450 - 3500 psi) the flow should be at 0 L/
MEL10006 - Fitting Kit min (0 U.S gpm). Turn the restrictor (Item 2) [Figure 20-
60-1] counterclockwise to free flow. Shut the auxiliary
Figure 20-60-1 hydraulics off.
1 If flow and pressure specifications are not obtained, go to

Direct Pump Testing. (See Direct Pump Test (Standard
Section) on Page 20-60-2.)
*Refer to (See Hydraulic System on Page SPEC-10-4.)

for system relief pressure and full rpm.
2 P-90171
NOTE: When testing the hydraulic flow of a machine,

hoses must be at least 19,05 mm (3/4 in) in
diameter and connected directly to the
hydraulic tester without using any type of
“quick coupler” on the connection to the
tester. Also make sure your hydraulic tester is
capable of at least 189,3 L/min (50 U.S gpm).
Install a hydraulic tester (Item 1) [Figure 20-60-1] onto

the front auxiliary quick couplers.
This procedure will require one operator in the cab and

one operator running the tester.

HYDRAULIC PUMP (CONT'D) Figure 20-60-2
Direct Pump Test (Standard Section)

procedure:
MEL1563 or 6689779 - Remote Start Tool 2

TWX-RFIK200-S-6 204,4 L/min (54 U.S gpm) Flow Meter
MEL10006 - Fitting Kit
1
1
WARNING 2
P-90178 P-90176
Failure to use jackstands can allow the machine to Disconnect the OUTLET hose (Item 1) [Figure 20-60-2]
fall or move and cause injury or death. that comes from the gear pump, and connects to the
W-2017-0286
control valve.
Lift and block the loader. (See Procedure on Page 10-10- Figure 20-60-3
1.)

device. (See Installing on Page 10-20-1.)
1
WARNING 2

P-90177
W-2059-0598
Raise the operator cab. (See Raising on Page 10-30-2.) Connect the INLET hose (Item 1) [Figure 20-60-3] from
the tester to the OUTLET hose (Item 1) [Figure 20-60-2]
Connect the remote start tool. (See REMOTE START of the pump. Connect the OUTLET hose (Item 2) [Figure
TOOL KIT-MEL1563 on Page 10-60-1.) or (See 20-60-3] from the tester to the control valve fitting (Item
REMOTE START TOOL (SERVICE TOOL) KIT - 2) [Figure 20-60-2] on the control valve.
7003031 on Page 10-61-1.)
NOTE: The control panel is shown removed for photo

clarity.
IMPORTANT
I-2024-0284

HYDRAULIC PUMP (CONT'D)
Direct Pump Test (Standard Section) (Cont'd)
Start the engine and run at low idle rpm. Make sure the
tester is connected correctly. If no flow is indicated on the
tester, the hoses are connected wrong. With the hoses
connected correctly, increase the engine speed to full
rpm*.

control on the tester to about 6,9 MPa (68,9 bar) (1000
psi). DO NOT exceed system relief pressure. Open the
restrictor control and record the free flow (U.S gpm) at full
rpm*.
On the remote start tool engage the auxiliary hydraulics,

the light will come ON. Pull the trigger on the right handle
or joystick for fluid flow to the quick coupler (fluid
pressure will go over main relief). Record the highest
pressure (psi) and flow (U.S gpm). The high pressure
flow must be at least 80% of free flow.
%= HIGH PRESSURE FLOW (U.S gpm) X 100

FREE FLOW (U.S gpm)
A low percentage may indicate a failed pump.


Direct Pump Test (Charge Section)

procedure:
MEL1563 or 6689779 - Remote Start Tool

1
WARNING
P-85897A
Failure to use jackstands can allow the machine to Disconnect the inlet hose (Item 1) [Figure 20-60-4].
W-2017-0286
Figure 20-60-5

1.)

1
2
WARNING
P-90177
W-2059-0598 Connect the INLET hose (Item 1) [Figure 20-60-5] from
NOTE: The fluid from the charge pump must be of the pump. Connect the OUTLET hose (Item 2) [Figure
filtered after it passes through the Hydraulic 20-60-5] from the tester to the inlet fitting on the fan (Item
Tester, to prevent any contamination to the 1) [Figure 20-60-4].
Hydrostatic Pumps.
Connect the remote start tool. (See REMOTE START

TOOL KIT-MEL1563 on Page 10-60-1.) or (See
7003031 on Page 10-61-1.)

Direct Pump Test (Charge Section) (Cont’d)
IMPORTANT
I-2024-0284
tester, the hoses are connected wrong. With the hoses
rpm*.

psi). DO NOT exceed 8,3 MPa (82,7 bar) (1200 psi).
Open the restrictor control and record the free flow (U.S
gpm) at full rpm*.

Turn the restrictor down to system operating pressure
approximately 6,9 MPA (68,9 bar) (1000 psi). DO NOT
EXCEED 8,3 MPa (82,7 bar) (1200 psi). Refer to
Hydraulic Schematics for flow. The high pressure flow
must be at least 80% of free flow.
HIGH PRESSURE FLOW (U.S gpm)
%= X 100
FREE FLOW (U.S gpm)
*Refer to the Hydraulic Schematics for pump flow and

rpm.

HYDRAULIC PUMP (CONT'D) Drain the hydraulic fluid from the reservoir. (See
Removing And Replacing Hydraulic Fluid on Page 10-
Removal And Installation 120-2.)

to fall and cause injury or death. 1
W-2059-0598
1
1
1
DANGER
P-90180
Disconnect and cap the four hoses (Item 1) [Figure 20-

60-6] from the hydraulic pump.
Remove the Power Bob-Tach block if equipped. (See

P-90328 Removal And Installation on Page 20-130-1.)
AVOID DEATH Figure 20-60-7

unless supported by an approved lift arm 1
D-1009-0409
2
1
IMPORTANT 3
P-90509
tubelines and ports to keep dirt out. Dirt can quickly Disconnect and cap the outlet hoses (Item 1) [Figure 20-
damage the system. 60-7] from the hydraulic pump.
I-2003-0888
Remove the two mounting bolts (Item 2) [Figure 20-60-
Lift and block the rear of the loader. (See Procedure on 7] from the hydraulic pump.
Page 10-10-1.)
Raise the lift arms and install an approved lift arm support (55 - 60 ft-lb) torque.
Remove the hydraulic pump (Item 3) [Figure 20-60-7]
Raise the operator cab. (See Raising on Page 10-30-2.) from the loader.

Removal And Installation (Cont’d) Momentary Switch
Figure 20-60-8
1
Starter Bypass Tool
P-59354
To crank the engine without starting, the machine key

P-43940 P-43938A switch can be bypassed. Obtain a starter bypass tool
from a local source which can be used as a universal
connection to remotely crank the engine without starting.
Replace the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 20-60-8] on the
hydraulic pump. The starter bypass tool consists of two wires, each with a

clamp. The momentary switch, when depressed, will
Reverse the removal procedure to install the hydraulic allow current to pass through the circuit.
pump.
Connect the starter bypass tool to the starter solenoid
Hydraulic Pump Startup battery terminal and S terminal. Crank the engine for 15
seconds, then stop for at least 30 seconds. Again, crank
NOTE: This procedure is necessary to prevent a dry the engine for 15 seconds. Remove the starter bypass
startup of the hydraulic pump. tool.
Fill the system with hydraulic fluid. (See Removing And Start the loader from the operators cab and run the
Replacing Hydraulic Fluid on Page 10-120-2.) engine at low idle for 1 - 2 minutes without operating the
hydraulics.
After operating the engine at low idle, remove the lift arm
support device and fully raise and lower the loader lift
arms several times or until air is purged from the system.
Avoid running over the relief valve setting at the end
of cylinder stroke.
With the loader parked on a level surface and lift arms

down, check and fill the hydraulic reservoir as required.
Check for hydraulic leaks.

Figure 20-60-10
18
12
6
11
4
17

2 15
5
5 13 14
6
2
3
7
6
10
2
5
8 9
6
4 5
3
16 2
P-66540

HYDRAULIC PUMP (STANDARD) (CONT'D) Disassembly And Assembly
Parts Identification (Cont’d)
The items listed below refer to Page 20-60-8 [Figure 20-

60-10]. IMPORTANT
1. Auxiliary Pump End Section When repairing hydrostatic and hydraulic systems,
2. Section Seal parts clean. Always use caps and plugs on hoses,
3. Pre-Load Seal damage the system.
I-2003-0888
4. Load Seal
Mark the pump sections for correct assembly.
5. Wear Plate
To disassemble and assemble the hydraulic pump, follow
6. Alignment Pins the Parts Identification page (See Parts Identification on
Page 20-60-8.) for proper placement of components
7. Drive Gear (Auxiliary Pump) along with the information below.
8. Idler Gear (Auxiliary Pump) NOTE: A seal kit is available through Bobcat Service
Parts.
9. Auxiliary Pump Center Section

Assembly: Tighten the eight pump housing bolts (Item
10. Auxiliary Pump End Section 19) [Figure 20-60-10] to 50 N•m (37 ft-lb) torque.
11. Spline Shaft NOTE: Position the wear plate (Item 5) [Figure 20-60-
10] inlets and traps as shown with the bronze
12. Drive Gear (Charge Pump) side toward the gears on all wear plates.
13. Idler Gear (Charge Pump) NOTE: Inspect all gears, shafts and pump end
sections. If any of these components have
14. Charge Pump Center Section excessive wear or damage is visible, the
complete pump must be replaced.
15. Charge Pump End Section
16. Shaft Seal
17. Bolts (4)
18. Bolts (4)


HYDRAULIC PUMP (HIGH FLOW) Install a hydraulic tester (Item 1) [Figure 20-61-1] onto
the front auxiliary quick couplers.
Description
This procedure will require one operator in the cab and
The hydraulic gear pump is attached to the end of the one operator running the tester.
hydrostatic pumps and is located on the right side of the
loader between the hydraulic control valve and the Start the engine and run at low idle rpm. Press the
engine. Auxiliary hydraulics button. Engage the front auxiliary
with the trigger on the right handle or joystick. Make sure
The hydraulic gear pump is a combination of gear pumps the tester is connected correctly. If no flow is indicated on
that provide hydraulic flow to several hydraulic systems. the tester, the hoses are connected wrong. With the
hoses connected correctly, increase the engine speed to
The hydraulic gear pump has a dedicated charge pump. full rpm*.
This supplies flow to the hydraulic fan motor and charge
pressure to the hydrostatic pump. Warm the fluid to 60°C (140°F) by turning the restrictor
control clockwise on the tester so it reads about 6,9 MPa
The high flow hydraulic pump has an additional pump (68,9 bar) (1000 psi).
section that provides an additional amount of flow that is
controlled by an external valve. The valve is switched NOTE: DO NOT EXCEED 25,5 MPa (255,1 bar) (3700
from a button on the panel in the cab. psi).
A seal kit is available to service the hydraulic pump. If Turn the restrictor control (Item 2) [Figure 20-61-1] on
any of the main components of the pump are damaged, the tester counterclockwise to obtain free flow, the flow
the entire pump must be replaced. should be approximately 87,1 - 90,8 L/min (23 - 24 U.S

gpm). Start turning the restrictor clockwise, causing more
Pump Test At Quick Couplers restriction on the flow. The U.S gpm should drop off
slightly until the pressure reaches approximately 21,4
The tools listed will be needed to do the following MPa (213,7 bar) (3100 psi). At approximately 21,4 MPa
procedure: (213,7 bar) (3100 psi) the flow should start decreasing
rapidly until the pressure reaches 23,8 - 24,1 MPa (237,9
TWX-RFIK200-S-6 204,4 L/min (54 U.S gpm) Flow Meter - 241,3 bar) (3450 - 3500 psi). At 23,8 - 24,1 MPa (237,9
MEL10006 - Fitting Kit - 241,3 bar) (3450 - 3500 psi) the flow should be at 0 L/
min (0 U.S. gpm). Turn the restrictor (Item 2) [Figure 20-
Figure 20-61-1 61-1] counterclockwise to free flow. Shut the auxiliary
hydraulics off.
1
If flow and pressure specifications are not obtained, go to
Direct Pump Testing. (See Direct Pump Test (Standard
Section) on Page 20-61-2.)

2 P-90171
NOTE: When testing the hydraulic flow of a machine,

hoses must be at least 19,05 mm (3/4 in) in
diameter and connected directly to the
hydraulic tester without using any type of
“quick coupler” on the connection to the
tester. Also make sure your hydraulic tester is
capable of at least 189,3 L/min (50 U.S gpm).

HYDRAULIC PUMP (HIGH FLOW) (CONT'D) Figure 20-61-2
Direct Pump Test (Standard Section)

procedure:
MEL1563 or 6689779 - Remote Start Tool 2

1
1
WARNING 2
P-90178 P-90176
Failure to use jackstands can allow the machine to Disconnect the OUTLET hose (Item 1) [Figure 20-61-2]
fall or move and cause injury or death. that comes from the gear pump, and connects to the
W-2017-0286
control valve.
Lift and block the loader. (See Procedure on Page 10-10- Figure 20-61-3
1.)

1
WARNING 2

P-90177
W-2059-0598
Raise the operator cab. (See Raising on Page 10-30-2.) Connect the INLET hose (Item 1) [Figure 20-61-3] from
Connect the remote start tool. (See REMOTE START of the pump. Connect the OUTLET hose (Item 2) [Figure
TOOL KIT-MEL1563 on Page 10-60-1.) or (See 20-61-3] from the tester to the control valve fitting (Item
REMOTE START TOOL (SERVICE TOOL) KIT - 2) [Figure 20-61-2] on the control valve.
7003031 on Page 10-61-1.)
NOTE: The control panel is shown removed for photo

clarity.

HYDRAULIC PUMP (HIGH FLOW) (CONT'D) Direct Pump Test (Charge Section)
Direct Pump Test (Standard Section) (Cont'd) The tools listed will be needed to do the following
procedure:
tester is connected correctly. If no flow is indicated on the MEL1563 or 6689779 - Remote Start Tool
tester, the hoses are connected wrong. With the hoses TWX-RFIK200-S-6 204,4 L/min (54 U.S gpm) Flow Meter
connected correctly, increase the engine speed to full MEL10006 - Fitting Kit
rpm*.

psi). DO NOT exceed system relief pressure. Open the
WARNING
restrictor control and record the free flow (U.S gpm) at full
rpm*. Put jackstands under the front axles and rear corners
On the remote start tool engage the auxiliary hydraulics, Failure to use jackstands can allow the machine to
the light will come ON. Pull the trigger on the right handle fall or move and cause injury or death.
or joystick for fluid flow to the quick coupler (fluid W-2017-0286
pressure will go over main relief). Record the highest
pressure (psi) and flow (U.S gpm). The high pressure Lift and block the loader. (See Procedure on Page 10-10-
flow must be at least 80% of free flow. 1.)
%= HIGH PRESSURE FLOW (U.S GPM) X 100 Raise the lift arms and install an approved lift arm support

FREE FLOW (U.S GPM) device. (See Installing on Page 10-20-1.)

WARNING
W-2059-0598
NOTE: The fluid from the charge pump must be

filtered after it passes through the Hydraulic
Tester, to prevent any contamination to the
Hydrostatic Pumps.

7003031 on Page 10-61-1.)

HYDRAULIC PUMP (HIGH FLOW) (CONT'D) Start the engine and run at low idle rpm. Make sure the
Direct Pump Test (Charge Section) (Cont’d) tester, the hoses are connected wrong. With the hoses
Figure 20-61-4 rpm*.

psi). DO NOT exceed 8,3 MPa (82,7 bar) (1200 psi).
gpm) at full rpm*.
Turn the restrictor down to system operating pressure

1 approximately 6,9 MPa (68,9 bar) (1000 psi). DO NOT
EXCEED 8,3 MPa (82,7 bar) (1200 psi). Refer to
Hydraulic Schematics for flow. The high pressure flow
must be at least 80% of free flow.
HIGH PRESSURE FLOW (U.S GPM)
%= X 100
FREE FLOW (U.S GPM)
P-85897A
Disconnect the inlet hose (Item 1) [Figure 20-61-4]. *Refer to the Hydraulic Schematics for pump flow and
rpm.

Figure 20-61-5
1
2
P-90177
Connect the INLET hose (Item 1) [Figure 20-61-5] from

of the pump. Connect the OUTLET hose (Item 2) [Figure
20-61-5] from the tester to the inlet fitting on the fan (Item
1) [Figure 20-61-4].
IMPORTANT
I-2024-0284

Direct Pump Test (High Flow Section)
1
WARNING
W-2017-0286
P-90186
WARNING Install a jumper hose (Item 1) [Figure 20-61-6] onto the

front auxiliary quick couplers.

W-2059-0598
IMPORTANT
I-2024-0284

procedure:

MEL10003 - Hydraulic Tester
MEL10006 - Hydraulic Test Kit

1.)

7003031 on Page 10-61-1.)

HYDRAULIC PUMP (HIGH FLOW) (CONT'D) Warm the fluid to 60°C (140°F) by turning the restrictor
Direct Pump Test (High Flow Section) (Cont'd) psi).
Figure 20-61-7 NOTE: DO NOT EXCEED 25,5 MPa (255,1 bar) (3700
psi).
1 gpm) at full rpm. Increase the restriction and the flow
should drop to 0 L/min (0 U.S gpm) between 24,1 MPa
(241,3 bar) (3500 psi) and 25,5 MPa (255,1 bar) (3700
psi).
If pressure readings are not obtained go to the High Flow

Valve, relief valve adjustment procedure.(See High Flow
Relief Valve Removal And Installation on Page 20-61-8.)
2
Record the highest pressure (psi) and flow (U.S gpm).
The high pressure flow must be at least 80% of free flow.
P-90183
%= HIGH PRESSURE FLOW (U.S GPM) X100
Disconnect the high flow pump OUTLET hose (Item 1) FREE FLOW (U.S GPM)
from the high flow check valve INLET fitting (Item 2)

[Figure 20-61-7].
Figure 20-61-8 *Refer to Hydraulic Schematics Legend for system relief

pressure and full rpm.
1
2
P-90177
Connect the INLET hose (Item 1) [Figure 20-61-8] from

the tester, to the high flow pump OUTLET hose (Item 1)
[Figure 20-61-7]. Connect the OUTLET hose (Item 2)
[Figure 20-61-8] from the tester, to the high flow check
valve INLET fitting (Item 2) [Figure 20-61-7].
Lower the cab.
Start the engine and run at low idle rpm. Press the front
auxiliary button. Press the High Flow button. Push the
button (on the right control lever) for fluid flow to the quick
coupler. Make sure the tester is connected correctly. If no
flow is indicated on the tester, the hoses are connected
wrong. With the hoses connected correctly, increase the
engine speed to full rpm*.

High Flow Relief Valve Adjustment
If the pump is unable to reach 24,1 MPa (241,3 bar)

(3500 psi) stop the engine. The relief screw (Item 1)
P-45443
[Figure 20-61-11] will need to be turned 90° clockwise
and retested with the procedure above. (90° turn equals
approximately 1,4 MPa (13,8 bar) (200 psi).)
1
NOTE: If the relief screw has been turned in 1/4 turn 2
and the pressure remains the same, go to the
high flow relief valve removal and installation
section. (See High Flow Relief Valve Removal
And Installation on Page 20-61-8.) If relief
valve has been checked and is OK, go to the P-64022
high flow pump disassembly and assembly
section. (See Disassembly And Assembly on
Page 20-61-13.) Locate the high flow relief valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-61-
10] along the right side of the engine.
Remove the track from the right side of the loader. (See
Track Removal And Installation on Page 40-20-4.) OR Remove the plug (Item 2) [Figure 20-61-10] located on
(See Track Removal And Installation on Page 40-21-4.) the bottom of the high flow relief valve.

Figure 20-61-9 Figure 20-61-11
1 1
1
1
1
P-90352 P-45445
Remove the mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure 20-61-9] NOTE: [Figure 20-61-11] shows adjusting the relief
from the access cover and remove the cover from the screw on a wheeled machine for photo clarity.
loader.
If the pump reaches 25,5 MPa (255,1 bar) (3700 psi) and
there is flow stop the engine. The relief screw must be
turned 90° counterclockwise and retested with the
procedure above.

High Flow Relief Valve Removal And Installation
WARNING
Failure to use jackstands can allow the machine to 1
W-2017-0286
Remove the track from the right side of the loader. (See P-64022
Track Removal And Installation on Page 40-20-4.) OR
(See Track Removal And Installation on Page 40-21-4.)
Locate the high flow relief valve through rear door along
Figure 20-61-12 the right side of the engine.
Remove the relief valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-61-13] from

the pump.

Installation: Tighten the relief valve to 41 - 47 N•m (30 -
35 ft-lb) torque.
1 1
Figure 20-61-14
1
1 1 1
P-90352 3
Remove the mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure 20-61-12] 2

from the access cover and remove the cover from the
loader.
P-45459
Inspect the relief valve and replace the two O-rings (Item
If the relief valve is bad, it must be replaced as a

complete unit.
Remove the plug (Item 3) and inspect the O-ring [Figure

20-61-14] damage and replace as needed.

Solenoid Removal And Installation 2
Figure 20-61-15
P-45461
NOTE: Mark the pump housing (Item 1) [Figure 20-61-

P-43958 17] for proper installation of the solenoid
valve cartridge.
At the right side access hole, disconnect the electrical Remove the valve cartridge (Item 1) [Figure 20-61-17].
connector (Item 1) [Figure 20-61-15] from the high flow

pump solenoid. Installation: Tighten the solenoid valve to 47 - 54 N•m
(35 - 40 ft-lb).
Figure 20-61-16
Figure 20-61-18
P-45460
P-45462
Remove the solenoid nut (Item 1) [Figure 20-61-16].

Inspect the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 20-61-18] and
Remove the solenoid (Item 2) [Figure 20-61-16]. replace as needed.
Installation: Tighten the solenoid nut to 5 - 8 N•m (48 - Inspect the O-ring and back-up washer (Item 2) [Figure
72 in-lb) 20-61-18] and replace as needed.

HYDRAULIC PUMP (HIGH FLOW) (CONT'D) Drain the hydraulic fluid from the reservoir. (See
Removing And Replacing Hydraulic Fluid on Page 10-
Removal And Installation 120-2.)
Never work on a machine with the lift arms up unless 1

1
W-2059-0598
DANGER 1
1
P-90184

Disconnect and cap the inlet hoses (Item 1) [Figure 20-
61-19] from the front of the hydraulic pump.
Figure 20-61-20
P-90328
AVOID DEATH
D-1009-0409
1
IMPORTANT P-90185

Disconnect and cap the hoses (Item 1) [Figure 20-61-20]
from the back of the hydraulic pump.
Remove the Power Bob-Tach block if equipped. (See
damage the system.
I-2003-0888
Lift and block the rear of the loader. (See Procedure on

Page 10-10-1.)

HYDRAULIC PUMP (HIGH FLOW) (CONT'D) Hydraulic Pump Startup
Removal And Installation (Cont’d) NOTE: This procedure is necessary to prevent a dry
startup of the hydraulic pump.
Figure 20-61-21
Fill the system with hydraulic fluid. (See Removing And
1 Replacing Hydraulic Fluid on Page 10-120-2.)
2
Figure 20-61-23
Momentary Switch
2
3
P-90509A
Disconnect and cap the outlet hoses (Item 1) [Figure 20-

61-19] from the hydraulic pump. Starter Bypass Tool
P-59354

19] from the hydraulic pump. To crank the engine without starting, the machine key
switch can be bypassed. Obtain a starter bypass tool
Installation: Tighten the mounting bolts to 75 - 85 N•m from a local source which can be used as a universal
(55 - 60 ft-lb) torque. connection to remotely crank the engine without starting.
Remove the hydraulic pump (Item 3) [Figure 20-61-19] The starter bypass tool consists of two wires, each with a
from the loader. clamp. The momentary switch, when depressed, will
allow current to pass through the circuit.
Figure 20-61-22
Connect the starter bypass tool to the starter solenoid
battery terminal and S terminal. Crank the engine for 15
seconds, then stop for at least 30 seconds. Again, crank
the engine for 15 seconds. Remove the starter bypass
tool.
Start the loader from the operators cab and run the
engine at low idle for 1 - 2 minutes without operating the
hydraulics.
1
After operating the engine at low idle, remove the lift arm
support device and fully raise and lower the loader lift
arms several times or until air is purged from the system.
Avoid running over the relief valve setting at the end
P-43940 P-43938A of cylinder stroke.
With the loader parked on a level surface and lift arms

Replace the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 20-61-22] on the down, check and fill the hydraulic reservoir as required.
hydraulic pump. Check for hydraulic leaks.
Reverse the removal procedure to install the hydraulic

pump.

HYDRAULIC PUMP (HIGH FLOW) (CONT'D)
Figure 20-61-24
21
1. Stem
22
2. Valve
5 3. Wear Plate
4 4. Seal Section
3
6 5. Rear Housing
6. Bolt
7. Pre-load Seal
8. Load Seal
22 9. Spline Connector
24 10. Pin
11. Gear Set
1 12. Gear Housing
10 13. Gear Housing
2

14. Gear Set
3
11 15. Gear Housing
8 9
7 16. Gear Set
23 4 17. Center Housing
10
17 12 18. Center Housing
19. Front Housing
4 20. Shaft Seal
3
21. High Flow Relief
22. Seal
10 23. Nut
3 24. Coil
9 14
8
7
4
10 13
18
4
3
10
4
8
7
4 15
16
19
20
10
MS1456S

HYDRAULIC PUMP (HIGH FLOW) (CONT'D)
Disassembly And Assembly
IMPORTANT
damage the system.
I-2003-0888
Mark the pump sections for correct assembly.
To disassemble and assemble the hydraulic pump, follow

the Parts Identification page (See Parts Identification on
Page 20-61-12.) for proper placement of components
along with the information below.
NOTE: A seal kit is available through Bobcat Service

Parts.
Assembly: Tighten the eight pump housing bolts (Item 6)

[Figure 20-61-24] to 50 N•m (37 ft-lb) torque.
NOTE: Position the wear plate (Item 3) [Figure 20-61-

19] inlets and traps as shown with the bronze
side toward the gears on all wear plates.
NOTE: Inspect all gears, shafts and pump end

sections. If any of these components have
excessive wear or damage is visible, the
complete pump must be replaced.
NOTE: The relief valve and the solenoid can be

replaced along with the o-rings and back-up
washers.


HYDRAULIC / HYDROSTATIC FILTERS Figure 20-70-1
Description
2
The hydraulic / hydrostatic filters help to remove 2
contaminants from the fluid when the hydraulic /
hydrostatic systems are operating.
The hydraulic / hydrostatic filter system consists of one

main filter and one charge flow filter.
The main filter removes contaminants before entering

gear pumps including oil returning from the main valve.
1
2
The charge flow filter removes contaminants after the
charge pump. P-90010
Housing Removal And Installation

DANGER Raise the operator cab. (See Raising on Page 10-30-2.)
Drain the fluid from the reservoir. (See Removing And

Disconnect the electrical connector (Item 1) [Figure 20-

70-1] from the hydraulic / hydrostatic filter sender.
Disconnect and plug the three hoses (Item 2) [Figure 20-

70-1] from the hydraulic / hydrostatic filter housing.
P-90328
AVOID DEATH
D-1009-0409
WARNING
W-2059-0598

HYDRAULIC / HYDROSTATIC FILTER (CONT’D)
Housing Removal And Installation (Cont’d)
Figure 20-70-2
P-90011
Remove and plug the two hoses (Item 1) [Figure 20-70-

2] from the bottom of the hydraulic / hydrostatic filter

housing.
Figure 20-70-3
1
1 P-90537
Remove the two bolts (Item 1) [Figure 20-70-3].
Remove the hydraulic / hydrostatic filter housing from the

loader.

HYDRAULIC FLUID RESERVOIR Figure 20-80-2
Description
The hydraulic fluid reservoir is a storage container for the

loader’s hydraulic / hydrostatic fluid. The reservoir
contains a vented fill cap with a fluid screen to prevent
contaminants from entering the reservoir while adding
fluid. 1
The hydraulic fluid reservoir is located behind the

operator’s cab under the rear grille on the right side of the
loader.

P-90579
Remove the two bolts, (Item 1) [Figure 20-80-2] nuts,
Raise the operator cab. (See Raising on Page 10-30-2.) and bracket.
Drain the fluid from the reservoir. (See Removing And Remove the hydraulic fluid reservoir from the loader.
Installation: Tighten the mount bolts and nuts to 21,7 -

Remove the Hydraulic / Hydrostatic Filter Housing (See 24,4 N•m (16 - 18 ft-lb) torque.
Housing Removal And Installation on Page 20-70-1.)
Remove the rear grille (See Removal And Installation on

Page 50-60-1.)
Figure 20-80-1
P-90013
Remove the clamp and the hose (Item 1) [Figure 20-80-

1].

HYDRAULIC FLUID RESERVOIR (CONT'D)
Hydraulic Fluid Screen
Remove the rear grille (See Removal And Installation on

Page 50-60-1.)
Figure 20-80-3
P-90506

Remove the hydraulic fluid reservoir breather cap
[Figure 20-80-3] from the reservoir.
Remove the hydraulic fluid screen (Item 1) [Figure 20-

80-3] from the reservoir.
Wash the screen in clean solvent and air dry, before

replacing.

OIL COOLER Figure 20-90-2
Description
The oil cooler is used to cool the loaders hydraulic and 2

1
hydrostatic oil. Oil passages are coiled into a heat
exchanger. Air is forced, with the cooling fan, around the
passages cooling the oil.
The oil cooler is located underneath the rear grille

between the A/C condenser (if so equipped) and the 3
radiator.
P-85936
IMPORTANT Slide the plastic sleeve (Item 1) away from the oil cooler
(Item 2). Remove the clip (Item 3) [Figure 20-90-2] and
When repairing hydrostatic and hydraulic systems, pull hose out.
parts clean. Always use caps and plugs on hoses, Cap or plug all hoses and fittings.

damage the system.
I-2003-0888
Remove the rear grille from the loader. (See Removal

And Installation on Page 50-60-1.)
Figure 20-90-1
1 2
P-85938
Slide the plastic sleeve (Item 1) away from the oil cooler
(Item 2). Remove the clip (Item 3) [Figure 20-90-1] and
pull hose out.
Cap or plug all hoses and fittings.

OIL COOLER (CONT’D)
Figure 20-90-3
4 4
2
5
3
P-85905
Undo the rubber straps (Item 1) [Figure 20-90-3]

Remove the bolts (Item 2) and remove the condenser
guards (Item 3) [Figure 20-90-3].
Remove the clips and pins (Item 4) [Figure 20-90-3].
Remove the bolt (Item 5) [Figure 20-90-3] from the prop

rod.
NOTE: When installing the cooler hoses, the fittings

should make a clicking sound when pushed
together.
Lift up the oil cooler and remove the cooler from the
loader.

BUCKET POSITION VALVE Cover the fuel tank inlet.
Description Figure 20-100-2

The Bucket Position Valve is an option that allows the
operator to hold the attachment at the same angle from
the ground to maximum lift height without using the tilt
function. 3
The bucket position valve is mounted to the inside lower
right rear side of the loader frame.
See Hydraulic Schematic for more circuit information. 2
DANGER
1 P-90197
Disconnect the wire harness connector (Item 1) [Figure

20-100-2] from the bucket position shut-off solenoid.
Disconnect the cap the two tubelines (Item 2) [Figure 20-

100-2].
P-90328
Remove the solenoid nut, coil, and stem (Item 3) from the
AVOID DEATH bucket positioning valve [Figure 20-100-2].
tubeline, hose, fitting, component or a part failure Installation: Put oil on O-rings and back-up washers and
can cause lift arms to drop. tighten the solenoid stem to 40,7 - 50,2 N•m (30 - 40 ft-lb)
• Keep out of this area when lift arms are raised torque.
support. Replace if damaged. Installation: Tighten the solenoid nut to 8 N•m (6 ft-lb)
D-1009-0409 torque. Overtightening may cause valve failure.
Drain the hydraulic reservoir. (See Removing And NOTE: The engine is shown removed for photo
Replacing Hydraulic Fluid on Page 10-120-2.) clarity.
Figure 20-100-1 Figure 20-100-3
1
1 2
2 N-18191
P-90187
Remove the two bolts (Item 1), move the hose clamp
Inspect the solenoid stem and replace the O-rings (Item
(Item 2) to the middle of the hose, and the place the fuel
1) and the back-up washer (Item 2) [Figure 20-100-3].

BUCKET POSITION VALVE (CONT'D) Cover the fuel tank inlet.
Solenoid Testing Figure 20-100-5
Refer to Bobcat Advanced Troubleshooting System

(B.A.T.S.) for electrical testing and troubleshooting
information. It is recommended that these procedures be
performed by authorized Bobcat Service Personnel only.
DANGER
1 P-90197
NOTE: The engine is shown removed for photo

clarity.
P-90328 NOTE: Mark all hoses and tubelines for correct

installation.
AVOID DEATH
• Disconnecting or loosening any hydraulic Disconnect the electric solenoid connector (Item 1)
tubeline, hose, fitting, component or a part failure [Figure 20-100-5].
• Keep out of this area when lift arms are raised Figure 20-100-6
D-1009-0409
1
Figure 20-100-4
3 2
4 3
1
P-90188
Disconnect and cap the tilt base inlet hose (Item 1), the
tilt rod inlet hose (Item 2), the lift rod inlet hose (Item 3),
and the lift base inlet hose (Item 4) [Figure 20-100-6]
that route from the control valve.
2
P-90187
Remove the two bolts (Item 1), move the hose clamp
(Item 2) to the middle of the hose, and the place the fuel

BUCKET POSITION VALVE (CONT'D) Figure 20-100-9
Figure 20-100-7
P-90190A
2
1
Remove the mounting screws (Item 1) [Figure 20-100-
P-90189A 9].
Remove the bucket position valve from the loader.

Disconnect and cap the tilt cylinder hose (Item 1) and the
tilt cylinder base end hose (Item 2) [Figure 20-100-7]

from the valve block.
Figure 20-100-8
2
2
1
P-90197A
Disconnect and cap the lift base outlet hose and tubeline
(Item 1) and the lift rod outlet hose and tubeline (Item 2)
[Figure 20-100-8] that route from the lift cylinders.

BUCKET POSITION VALVE (CONT'D) Figure 20-100-12
Figure 20-100-10
3
1
2
1 3
2
P-90194
Remove the tilt cylinder check valve (Item 1), spring (Item
P-90192 2), and plug (Item 3) [Figure 20-100-12]. Check for wear,
check the O-ring and replace as needed.
Remove the solenoid nut (Item 1), coil (Item 2), and the Assembly: Tighten the plug to 75,9 - 86,8 N•m (56 - 64
stem (Item 3) [Figure 20-100-10]. ft-lb) torque.

Assembly: Tighten the nut to a maximum of 8 N•m (6 ft- Figure 20-100-13
lb) torque. Overtightening may cause valve failure.
Assembly: Put oil on O-rings and back-up washers and

tighten the solenoid stem to 40,7 - 50,2 N•m (30 - 40 ft-lb)
1
torque. 2 3
Figure 20-100-11
P-90193
Remove the plug (Item 1), spring (Item 2) and unloading

spool (Item 3) [Figure 20-100-13].
Check all parts and replace as needed. Install a new O-

P-90195 ring on the plug before installing.
Assembly: Tighten the plug to torque.

Remove the flow adjustment valve and O-ring (Item 1)
[Figure 20-100-11].
Assembly: Tighten the flow adjustment valve to 36,6 -

48,8 N•m (27 - 36 ft-lb) torque.
NOTE: Always install new O-rings before any parts

are installed into the valve. Check the parts
for wear or damage and replace as needed.

REAR AUXILIARY DIVERTER VALVE
Description
The rear auxiliary diverter valve is an optional valve that

diverts oil from the main valve inlet to two sets of rear
auxiliary couplers. The couplers are used for rear
mounted attachments.The right side auxiliaries are used
for older attachments.
The rear couplers are located, one set on each side of

the rear frame uprights.
See Hydraulic Schematic for more circuit information.
Solenoid Testing
Figure 20-110-1

P9137
Use a test meter to measure coil resistance [Figure 20-

110-1]. Coil wires do not have polarity. Correct resistance
is 8.6 - 9.5 ohm.
Replace the test meter with 12 volt power. You can see
and hear the spool shift.

REAR AUXILIARY DIVERTER VALVE (CONT'D) Figure 20-110-3
1
DANGER 1
P-93303
P-90328
AVOID DEATH Disconnect and cap the tubelines (Item 1) [Figure 20-
• Disconnecting or loosening any hydraulic 110-3]
can cause lift arms to drop. Figure 20-110-4

D-1009-0409
1
Put jackstands under the rear corners of the loader.

P-93312
Figure 20-110-2
Disconnect the accessory wiring harness (Item 1)
[Figure 20-110-4] from the main harness.
P-90583
Disconnect and cap the tubelines (Item 1) [Figure 20-

110-2]

REAR AUXILIARY DIVERTER VALVE (CONT'D) Disassembly And Assembly
Removal And Installation (Cont’d) Figure 20-110-6
Figure 20-110-5
1
1
P-48751
P-90581
Figure 20-110-7
Remove the two bolts (Item 1) and remove the valve

(Item 2) [Figure 20-110-5]

1
P-48752
Clean the diverter valve to remove dirt before

disassembly. Valve ports are labeled for correct
assembly.
Several plugs (Item 1) [Figure 20-110-6] and [Figure 20-

110-7] are located all over the diverter valve and can be
removed for clean out purposes.
Assembly: Put oil on O-rings and back-up

washers.Tighten to 13,6 N•m (10 ft-lb) torque.

Disassembly And Assembly (Cont'd)
IMPORTANT
tubelines and ports to keep dirt out. Dirt can quickly 1
damage the system.
I-2003-0888
P-48755
Figure 20-110-8
Figure 20-110-11
1
2
2

1
P-48755
P-48757
Figure 20-110-9
Remove the differential sensing valve (Item 1) [Figure

20-110-10] and [Figure 20-110-11] from diverter valve
and inspect the O-rings and back-up washers (Item 2)
[Figure 20-110-11] for damage.
2
2 2
Assembly: Put oil on O-ring and back-up washers.
1 Tighten to 68 - 75 N•m (50 - 55 ft-lb) torque.
P-48756
Remove the shuttle valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-110-8] and

[Figure 20-110-9] from diverter valve and inspect the O-
rings and back-up washers (Item 2) [Figure 20-110-9] for
damage.
Assembly: Put oil on the O-rings and back-up washers.

Tighten to 14 - 16 N•m (10 - 12 ft-lb) torque.

Figure 20-110-12
P-48759
1
Figure 20-110-15
P-48753
Figure 20-110-13

1
3
1
2 2
P-48760
NOTE: Before removing the solenoid coils mark the

P-48754 coils for proper alignment.
Remove the nut (Item 1) [Figure 20-110-14] and [Figure

Remove the relief valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-110-12] and 20-110-15] from the solenoid valve stem.
[Figure 20-110-13] from the diverter valve and inspect
the O-rings and back-up washers (Item 2) [Figure 20- Assembly: Tighten the nut to 5 - 8 N•m (4 - 6 ft-lb)
110-13] for damage. torque.
Assembly: Put oil on O-ring and back-up washers. Remove the spacer (Item 2) and solenoid valve coils
Tighten to 27 - 34 N•m (20 - 25 ft-lb) torque. (Item 3) [Figure 20-110-15].

Figure 20-110-16
1
1
P-48762
Figure 20-110-18
P-48761
NOTE: Before removing the solenoid coils mark the

coils for proper alignment.

Remove the nuts (Item 1) [Figure 20-110-16] from the
solenoid valve stems.
Assembly: Tighten the nut to 5 - 8 N•m (4 - 6 ft-lb)

2 2
torque. 1 1
P-48763
Remove the solenoid valve stem (Item 1) [Figure 20-

110-17] and [Figure 20-110-18] and inspect the O-rings
and back-up washers (Item 2) [Figure 20-110-18] for
damage.
Assembly: Put oil on O-rings and back-up washers.


Figure 20-110-19
P-48765
Remove the plug (Item 1) [Figure 20-110-21].

P-48763A
Assembly: Tighten the plug to 51,5 N•m (38 ft-lb) torque.
Figure 20-110-20 Figure 20-110-22

1 2
1
P-48764 P-48766
Remove the solenoid valve stem (Item 1) [Figure 20- Remove and inspect the orifice (Item 1) [Figure 20-110-
110-19] and [Figure 20-110-20] and inspect the O-rings 22] for dirt and debris.
and back-up washers (Item 2) [Figure 20-110-20] for
damage. Assembly: Tighten the orifice to 29,8 N•m (22 ft-lb)
torque.
Assembly: Put oil on O-rings and back-up washers.

Figure 20-110-23
1
1
P-48758
Remove the plugs (Item 1) [Figure 20-110-25].

P-48765
Assembly: Tighten the plug to 19 N•m (14 ft-lb) torque.
Remove the plug (Item 1) [Figure 20-110-23]. Inspect cartridges, check valves, solenoid valves and
sealing washers for contamination or damage. Wash all

Assembly: Tighten the plug to 13,6 N•m (10 ft-lb) torque. parts in clean solvent. Use air pressure for drying them.
Install new O-rings and back-up washers.
Figure 20-110-24
Inspect diverter valve cavities for contamination. Wash
valve in clean solvent. Use air pressure to dry.
P-48786
Remove the orifice (Item 1) [Figure 20-110-24].
Assembly: Tighten the orifice to 4,5 N•m (3.3 ft-lb)

torque.

BOB-TACH (POWER) BLOCK Removal And Installation
Description
The power Bob-Tach is an option that allows the operator

to hydraulically control the Bob-Tach levers for mounting
WARNING
and dismounting the attachments.
The power Bob-Tach is operated by a switch on the right the lift arms are secured by an approved lift arm
switch panel. support device. Failure to use an approved lift arm
The power Bob-Tach block is mounted on the right side to fall and cause injury or death.
of the machine in front of the engine on the back side of W-2059-0598
the hydraulic pump.
DANGER

P-90328
AVOID DEATH
D-1009-0409
IMPORTANT
damage the system.
I-2003-0888

BOB-TACH (POWER) BLOCK (CONT'D) Figure 20-120-3

1 1
Figure 20-120-1
1
1
P101859P-
90009
Remove the four mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure 20-120-

P100806 3].
Installation: Tighten the mounting bolts to 35 - 40 ft-lb

Lift and block the loader. (See Procedure on Page 10-10- (48 - 54 N•m) torque.
1.)

Remove the power Bob-Tach block.

Disconnect the two electrical solenoid coil connectors

(Item 1) [Figure 20-120-1] from the loader electrical
harness.
Figure 20-120-2
2
1
2 2
P101862
Disconnect and cap the outlet hose (Item 1) [Figure 20-

120-2] from block.
Disconnect and cap the hoses (Item 2) [Figure 20-120-2]
from block.

IMPORTANT 2

damage the system.
I-2003-0888
P100769
Figure 20-120-4
Clean the block (Item 1) [Figure 20-120-5] to remove dirt

before disassembly. Block ports are labeled for correct
assembly.

1

Installation: Tighten the plug to 67,8 N•m (50 ft-lb)
torque.
Figure 20-120-6
3
P100820
Do not remove these plugs (Item 1) [Figure 20-120-4].

1
NOTE: Do not remove the two plugs located next to
the outlet port. A new Power Bob-tach valve 2
will be required if tampered with. All other
plugs can be removed.
4
P100770
Remove plug (Item 1), spring (Item 2) and spool (Item 3)

[Figure 20-120-6] and inspect. Replace damaged parts
as needed.
Inspect the O-ring (Item 4) [Figure 20-120-6] on the plug

and replace as needed.

Figure 20-120-7
P100826
Remove the plug (Item 1) [Figure 20-120-9], inspect the

P100823 O-ring and replace as needed.
Installation: Tighten the plug (Item 1) [Figure 20-120-9]

Remove the plug (Item 1) [Figure 20-120-7], inspect the to 17,6 N•m (13 ft-lb) torque.
O-ring and replace as needed.

Installation: Tighten the plug (Item 1) [Figure 20-120-7]
to 17,6 N•m (13 ft-lb) torque.
Figure 20-120-8
1
2
P100833
Remove the spring (Item 1), the spool (Item 2) and the
orifice (Item 3) [Figure 20-120-8]. Inspect the spring,
spool and orifice replace as needed.
Installation: Clean threads on the orifice and apply

Loctite® 603. Tighten the orifice (Item 3) [Figure 20-120-
8].

Figure 20-120-10
P100773
1
Remove the first solenoid coil (Item 1) and the second

P100821 solenoid coil (Item 2) [Figure 20-120-12].
Figure 20-120-13
Remove the orifice screw (Item 1) [Figure 20-120-10].

Installation: Tighten the orifice screw (Item 2) [Figure
20-120-10] to 8,1 - 10,8 N•m (6 - 8 ft-lb) torque.
Figure 20-120-11
1
P100827
Remove the solenoid coil stem (Item 1) [Figure 20-120-

13].
P100774 Installation: Tighten the solenoid coil stem to 27,14 N•m

(20 ft-lb) torque.
NOTE: Remember the solenoid coil orientation for

ease of installation.
Remove the solenoid coil nut (Item 1) [Figure 20-120-

11].
Installation: Tighten the solenoid coil valve stem nut to

6,8 N•m (5 ft-lb) torque.

Figure 20-120-14
2 2 2
1 1 1 1 P100829
Inspect the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 20-120-16] and

P100776 replace as needed.
Figure 20-120-17
Inspect the O-rings (Item 1) and the back-up washers
(Item 2) [Figure 20-120-14].

Figure 20-120-15
P100840
Remove the plug (Item 1) [Figure 20-120-17], inspect

P100828 the O-ring and replace as needed.
Installation: Tighten the plug (Item 1) [Figure 20-120-

Remove the fitting (Item 1) [Figure 20-120-15]. 17] to 17,6 N•m (13 ft-lb) torque.

Figure 20-120-18
2
1
P100843
1
Remove the shuttle seat (Item 1) and check ball (Item 2)

P100841 [Figure 20-120-20]. Inspect the shuttle seat and check
ball, replace as needed.
Remove the filter assembly (Item 1) [Figure 20-120-18], Figure 20-120-21

inspect and replace as needed.

Figure 20-120-19
P100845
P100842 Remove the plug (Item 1) [Figure 20-120-21], inspect

the O-ring and replace as needed.
Remove the plug (Item 1) [Figure 20-120-20], inspect Installation: Tighten the plug (Item 1) [Figure 20-120-
the O-ring and replace as needed. 21] to 30 N•m (22 ft-lb) torque.

19] to 17,6 N•m (13 ft-lb) torque.

Figure 20-120-22
P100837


Remove the plug (Item 1) [Figure 20-120-22], inspect 24] to 17,6 N•m (13 ft-lb) torque.

Figure 20-120-25
Figure 20-120-23
2
1
P100838
Remove the spring (Item 1) and the check ball (Item 2)

P100835 [Figure 20-120-25], inspect and replace as needed.
Remove the spring (Item 1) and the check ball (Item 2)

[Figure 20-120-23], inspect and replace as needed.

Figure 20-120-26
P100847
remove pilot piston [Figure 20-120-28].

P100846
Figure 20-120-29


Installation: Tighten the plug (Item 1) [Figure 20-120- 2 2
26] to 30 N•m (22 ft-lb) torque.
1
Figure 20-120-27
1 P100834
Inspect the pilot piston (Item 1), the back-up washers

(Item 2) and the O-ring (Item 3) [Figure 20-120-29] for
damage and replace as needed.
P100853
Using a small diameter tool remove the pilot piston (Item

1) [Figure 20-120-27].

Figure 20-120-30 1
P100850


Remove the plug (Item 1) [Figure 20-120-30], inspect 32] to 30 N•m (22 ft-lb) torque.

Figure 20-120-33
Figure 20-120-31
1
2
P100851


Remove the annular orifice shaft (Item 1) and the annular 33] to 17,6 N•m (13 ft-lb) torque.
orifice shaft guide (Item 2) [Figure 20-120-31], inspect

BOB-TACH (POWER) BLOCK (CONT'D)
Figure 20-120-34
P100854
Remove the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 20-120-34] and

replace.


FRONT AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC COUPLER BLOCK Disassembly And Assembly
The front auxiliary hydraulic coupler block is the 1

connection block that houses the two main auxiliary
couplers along with a case drain coupler. These couplers
are for suppling hydraulic flow for various attachments.
2
The front auxiliary coupler block is located at the front of
the left side lift arm.
Removal And Installation 3
IMPORTANT P-90002

clean the work area before disassembly and keep all Figure 20-130-3
damage the system. 1

I-2003-0888
Figure 20-130-1 2
P-90003
P-85281

1].
Pull the block away from the lift arms and disconnect the
auxiliary hoses from the coupler block [Figure 20-130-1].

FRONT AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC COUPLER BLOCK Figure 20-130-5
(CONT’D)
Disassembly And Assembly (Cont’d)

1
Figure 20-130-4
4
4 1
4
4 2
2
P-34665
3
Check the O-rings (Item 1) back-up O-rings (Item 2) for

damage and replace as needed [Figure 20-130-5].
P-90001
Figure 20-130-6
Remove the male coupler, spring, and fitting (Item 1)
[Figure 20-130-2], [Figure 20-130-3] and [Figure 20-

1
130-4]
Assembly: Tighten the male coupler (Item 1) [Figure 20-

130-3] and [Figure 20-130-4] to 80 N•m (59 ft-lb)
Remove the drain coupler, spring, and fitting (Item 2)

130-4].
Assembly: Tighten the drain coupler (Item 2) [Figure 2

20-130-3] and [Figure 20-130-4] to 50 N•m (37 ft-lb)
P-34664
Remove the female coupler, spring, and fitting (Item 3)
130-4]. Check the O-rings (Item 1) back-up O-rings (Item 2) for
damage and replace as needed [Figure 20-130-6].
Assembly: Tighten the female coupler (Item 3) [Figure
20-130-3] and [Figure 20-130-4] to 80 N•m (59 ft-lb)
Check the O-rings (Item 4) [Figure 20-130-4] and

replace as needed.

HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM
HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-10-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-10-1
HYDROSTATIC DRIVE MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-20-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-20-1
Removing And Replacing Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-20-1
CHARGE PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-30-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-30-1
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-30-1
Sender Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-30-3
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-30-4
HYDROSTATIC PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-40-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-40-1

Hydrostatic Pump Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-40-3
Replenishing / High Pressure Relief Valve Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-40-4
Parts Identification (Left Half) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-40-5
Parts Identification (Right Half) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-40-6
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-40-7
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-40-14
HYDROSTATIC PUMP (SJC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-41-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-41-1
Hydraulic Controller Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-41-2
Hydrostatic Pump Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-41-6
High Pressure Relief And Bypass Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-41-8
Charge Relief Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-41-9
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-41-10
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-41-19
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-41-23
Mechanical Neutral Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-41-33
Hydraulic Controller Neutral Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-41-36
DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-50-1

Belt Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-50-1
Belt Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-50-1
Stop Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-50-3
Tensioner Pulley Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-50-4
Tensioner Pulley Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-50-4

DRAIN MANIFOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-60-1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-60-1
Drain Manifold Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-60-1

HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM INFORMATION
Description
The hydrostatic system consists of tandem hydrostatic

pump and two hydrostatic motors. The hydrostatic
system allows forward and reverse motion in the loader.
The hydrostatic pump is connected to the engine by a

drive belt and provides fluid to the hydrostatic motors.
The charge pressure system assists in replenishing the
fluid that is lost do to internal leakage in the components
of the hydrostatic system.

HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM INFORMATION (CONT’D)
Troubleshooting
WARNING
assistance in locating and correcting problems which are
most common. Many of the recommended procedures
must be done by authorized Bobcat Service Personnel
only. W-2004-1285
If a service code appears in the left instrument panel.

(See DIAGNOSTIC SERVICE CODES on Page 60-90-
1.)
PROBLEM CAUSE
No drive on one side, in one direction. 1, 2
No drive on one side in both directions. 2, 3, 4
The loader does not move in a straight line. 2, 3, 4, 5, 9
The hydrostatic system is overheating. 6,7,8
KEY TO CORRECT THE CAUSE

1. The hydrostatic pump replenishing valves not seating.
2. The steering linkage needs adjustment.
3. The hydrostatic pump has damage.
4. The hydrostatic motor has damage.
5. Track tension is to tight, on one side.
6. The hydrostatic fluid is not at the correct level.
7. The oil cooler has a restriction.
8. The loader is not being operated at the correct rpm.
9. The hydrostatic pump is to properly calibrated, and / or incorrect steering drift compensation setting.

HYDROSTATIC DRIVE MOTOR Removing And Replacing Oil
Description For the correct service interval (See SERVICE

The hydrostatic drive motors are driven by the hydrostatic
pump. Machines equipped with SJC are monitored by a Park the loader so that the plug in the hydrostatic drive
sensor mounted onto the motor housing. The sensor is motor is at the bottom.
used for detection of motion and for rate of speed for the
SJC option. Standard machines use the same motor but Remove the plug and let the oil drain from the hydrostatic
have a plate and O-ring that covers the sensor hole. drive motor.
The hydrostatic drive motors contain a spring applied Figure 30-20-1

pressure release braking system to stop the loader. In
addition there is a separate oil chamber in the motor that
is filled with high performance synthetic oil for maximum
durability, this oil has a recommended service interval.
(See SERVICE SCHEDULE on Page 10-70-1.)
There are two hydrostatic drive motors and they are

located on the track carriage. 1

P-90680B
Rotate the hydrostatic drive motor so that the plug (Item

1) [Figure 30-20-1] is at the top. Add high performance
synthetic oil (P/N 7003026). (See Capacities on Page
SPEC-10-5.)
Clean the threads of the plug and drain hole. Apply

Loctite® 243 to the plug threads. Install and tighten the
plug.
Repeat for the other hydrostatic drive motor.
Recycle or dispose of the used oil in an environmentally

safe manner.

HYDROSTATIC MOTOR (CONT'D) Remove the track. (See Track Removal And Installation
on Page 40-20-4.)
Figure 30-20-2
IMPORTANT 1

clean the work area before disassembly and keep all 1 1
damage the system.
I-2003-0888
Place the loader on jackstands. (See Procedure on Page

10-10-1.)
P-85927
DANGER Remove the mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-2]

from the access cover and remove the cover from the
loader.

Remove the sprocket. (See Sprocket Removal And
Installation on Page 40-20-12.) OR (See Sprocket
(SJC equipped machines only) Disconnect and remove

the speed sensor (SJC). (See Removal And Installation
P-90328 on Page 60-80-2.)
AVOID DEATH NOTE: Speed sensor removal is recommended to

• Disconnecting or loosening any hydraulic prevent damage while removing the
tubeline, hose, fitting, component or a part failure hydrostatic motor from the track carriage.
D-1009-0409
WARNING
W-2059-0598

HYDROSTATIC MOTOR (CONT'D) Figure 30-20-4
Figure 30-20-3 1 1
1
P-85991
3 With an arm hoist support the hydrostatic motor.
P-85992 Remove the ten hydraulic motor mounting bolts (Item 1)

[Figure 30-20-4].
Remove the case drain hydraulic hose (Item 1) [Figure
30-20-3] from the motor. Installation: Tighten the motor mounting bolts to 257,6

N•m (190 ft-lb) torque.
Remove the hydraulic brake hose (Item 2) [Figure 30-
20-3] from the motor. Remove the hydrostatic motor from the loader.
Remove the eight flange bolts (Item 3) from the main

drive hoses. Remove the flanges and drive hoses (Item
4) [Figure 30-20-3].
Installation: Fill the main drive hose ports on the motor

with new hydraulic oil before installing the drive hoses.
Installation: Tighten the flange bolts to 48 - 54 N•m (35 -

40 ft-lb) torque.

HYDROSTATIC MOTOR (CONT'D)
10
9
7 8
5 6
4
2 3
25
24
1 23
22
10 21
12
20
11
17 15

16
18
16
13 15
14
19 52
50 51
48 49
37 46
35 33 47
27 33
29 31 40
30 38 36
26 32 34 53 54
28
39
43 44
41 42 60 62
59 61
45
58
57
56
55 63
P-90205

HYDROSTATIC MOTOR (CONT'D)
Parts Identification (Cont’d)
Ref. Description Ref. Description

1. PLUG 33. SPRING
2. SHAFT 34. SPOOL
3. SEAL 35. WASHER
4. BEARING 36. O-RING
5. HOUSING / FRONT 37. PLUG
6. SEAL 38. BOLT
7. BEARING 39. PIN
8. WASHER 40. O-RING
9. RINGS 41. O-RING
10. O-RING 42. PLUG
11. NUT 43. O-RING
12. STUD 44. PLUG
13. RPM TARGET DISK 45. HOUSING / REAR
14. ROLL PIN 46. HOUSING / BRAKE
15. SNAP RING 47. SHAFT
16. RETAINER 48. SHIM

17. ROLLER 49. SHIM
18. PISTON 50. DISC / OUTER
19. BLOCK 51. DISC / INNER
20. CAM 52. SEAL
21. DISTRIBUTOR 53. WASHER
22. SPRING 54. BOLT
23. SEAL W / O-RING 55. BUSHING
24. SEAL W / O-RING 56. PISTON
25. SEAL W / O-RING 57. SEAL
26. PLUG 58. WASHER
27. O-RING 59. GASKET
28. SPRING 60. COVER
29. SHIM 61. O-RING
30. POPPET 62. PLUG
31. PLUG 63. BOLT
32. O-RING

Figure 30-20-5
1
1
1
2 N-18295
Remove the twenty four mounting bolts (Item 1) and the

P-48683 brake cover plate (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-7].
NOTE: The bolts should be removed and / or

NOTE: Motors that do not have the SJC sensor will be tightened, one turn at a time to maintain equal
covered by a plate with and O-ring. The plate preload on the end cap.

will need to be ordered separately when
ordering a new motor from Bobcat Parts. Assembly: Replace the gasket and end cap.
Figure 30-20-6 Assembly: Tighten the bolts to 14 - 16 N•m (10 - 12 ft-lb)

torque.
Figure 30-20-8
N-18294
NOTE: Mark the motor, brake and motor housings for

N-18296
proper alignment during assembly [Figure 30-
20-6].
Remove the disk spring (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-8] from
Drain the oil from the motor casing. the brake housing.
Check for the vendor motor serial number (Item 1) NOTE: Mark the top side of the disk spring for proper
[Figure 30-20-6], these serial numbers may be needed installation.
when ordering replacement parts.
Assembly: Put multi-purpose moly grease on the
surface of the disc spring where it contacts the piston.

Figure 30-20-9
2 1
N-18299
1
Check the piston surface (Item 1) and the bushing

N-18297 surface (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-11] in the brake shaft.
NOTE: The bushing (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-11] can be

Remove the piston from the brake housing [Figure 30- replaced in the brake shaft. When the bushing
20-9]. is replaced, install the bushing flush with the

top of the brake shaft.
NOTE: The use of air pressure through the brake line
connection (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-9] will aid in
piston removal.
Figure 30-20-10
N-18298
Check the brake piston (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-10] for

damage including the surface that contacts the brake
shaft.
Replace the seal (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-10].
Assembly: Apply oil to the seal (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-

10] for added protection when installing the brake piston.

Figure 30-20-12
1
1
2 1
3
N-18350
1
Assembly: Install the needed amount of shims (Item 1)
1
N-18300 [Figure 30-20-13]. Outer discs can also be used as
shims.
Remove the eight mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-20- Figure 30-20-14
12] and washers from the brake housing.

Remove the brake housing (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-12]
from the rear housing.
Remove the inner piston seal (Item 3) [Figure 30-20-12].
NOTE: Install seal with metal case end towards the

brake pack.
Assembly: Use the reference marks to install the brake

housing on the rear housing.
Assembly: Install new washers on the brake housing

mount bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-12]. N-18347
Assembly: Apply Loctite® #243 or equivalent

threadlocker to the bolts and install bolts and washers Assembly: Clamp the disc pack in a vise and check the
into the rear housing. Start each bolt by hand, tighten disc pack height [Figure 30-20-14].
opposite bolts to maintain squareness.
Assembly: The correct disc pack specifications is 37,7 +
Assembly: Tighten bolts to 117 - 122 N•m (86 - 90 ft-lb) 0,05 mm (1.48 + 0.002 in).
torque.
Assembly: Extra outer disc's (Item 2) are used to reduce
the number of required shims (Item 3) [Figure 30-20-14]
to make up the required thickness for the brake pack.

Figure 30-20-15
1
2
1
N-18302
Remove the brake shaft (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-17] from

N-18348 the rear housing.
NOTE: Be sure shaft seats fully into the cylinder

Assembly: Assemble the brake discs into a pack making block.
sure the inner discs, alternate with the outer disc and an

outer disc is placed at each end of the disc pack (Item 1) Assembly: Install new O-ring (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-17]
[Figure 30-20-15]. on the rear housing.
Figure 30-20-16 Figure 30-20-18
1
1 1
1 1
N-18301 P-48684
Disassembly: Remove the brake disks (Item 1) [Figure Remove the eight mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-
30-20-16] and shims from the brake shaft. 18] from the rear housing.
Assembly: Use Loctite® #243 on the threads and install

the eight mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-18].
Assembly: Tighten the bolts to 282 - 300 N•m (208 - 221

ft-lb) torque.

Figure 30-20-19
1
1
N-18318
Remove the two seals and back-up O-rings (Item 1)

P-48685 [Figure 30-20-21] under the seals, from the rear
housing.
Remove the rear housing assembly (Item 1) [Figure 30- Assembly: Apply a slight amount of oil to the O-rings
20-19] from the rotating group / front housing assembly. and seals (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-21].

Figure 30-20-20 Remove and inspect the stop pin (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-
21].
1
Figure 30-20-22
2
P-48686
Remove and replace with a new O-ring (Item 1) [Figure P-48713

30-20-20].
Remove the distributor (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-20] from Remove the twelve springs from the distributor (Item 1)
the rear housing. [Figure 30-20-22].
Assembly: Install the distributor (Item 2) [Figure 30-20- Remove and replace the two seals and back-up O-rings
20] by using the alignment pin. (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-22] under the seals, from the
distributor.
Inspect the distributor surfaces for scratches.
Assembly: Apply a small amount of grease to the

springs to hold them in place during installation.

Figure 30-20-23
1 1
1 N-18309
Remove the plugs (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-25] from the

N-18323 rear housing assembly to check alignment of springs,
washer and spool when reassembling.
Assembly: When installing the distributor align the stop Figure 30-20-26
pin (Item 1) with the notch in the distributor marked L

(Item 2) [Figure 30-20-23].
4
When the distributor is aligned correctly, the distributor
can be depressed slightly. 3
Figure 30-20-24
2
1
N-18315
Inspect all parts and replace as needed [Figure 30-20-

26].
N-18308
Remove the plug (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-24] from the

rear housing assembly.
Remove the spring (Item 1), spool (Item 2), and washer
(Item 3) and rear spring (Item 4) [Figure 30-20-26].

Figure 30-20-27 2
N-18312
Remove the internal plug (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-29].

N-18310
Check the O-ring (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-29] and replace
as needed.
Remove the drain plug (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-27].
Figure 30-20-30

Figure 30-20-28
N-18313
N-18311

Check the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-28] on the plug


2
Figure 30-20-31 1
4
1
3
2
P-48688
Remove and replace the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-

N-18314 33] from the front housing assembly.
Assembly: Slightly smear the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure

Remove the spring (Item 1) shim (Item 2) and poppet 30-20-33] with grease to hold in place.
(Item 3) [Figure 30-20-31].

Remove the rotating group (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-33]
Inspect all parts and replace as needed. from the front housing assembly.
Install a new O-ring (Item 4) [Figure 30-20-31] on the Figure 30-20-34

plug before installation.
Figure 30-20-32
1
P-48690
P-48687 Remove the snap ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-34] from

the bottom side of the rotating group.
Remove the cam ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-32] from the

front housing assembly.
Check the cam ring inside surface for wear and

scratches.
Assembly: Align the marks (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-32]

on the cam rings to the front housing.

Figure 30-20-35
P-48694
1 The retainer ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-37] cannot be

P-48691 removed from the top side of the rotating group, because
the rpm target disk is attached directly to the rotating
group.
Remove the retainer ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-35] from
the bottom side of the rotating group. Figure 30-20-38

Figure 30-20-36
P-48695
1
P-48689
Lift the retaining ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-38].
Remove the snap ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-36] from Use low air pressure and remove the roller / piston
the top side of the rotating group. assembly (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-38] from the cylinder
block.
NOTE: Soak the roller / piston assembles (Item 2)

[Figure 30-20-38] in oil and put all roller /
piston assembles back in the original bore.
NOTE: The roller / piston assembly (Item 2) [Figure

30-20-38] is not a serviceable part.

Figure 30-20-39
1 2
N-18343
Disassembly: With a hammer and punch remove the

P-48693 split ring and the preload washer located under the split
ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-41].
Check the rpm target disk (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-39] for Figure 30-20-42
wear and replace as needed.

If the rpm target disk needs to be changed, remove the 1
heads of the five roll pins (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-39] and 2
remove the disk. Replace the target disk and use new roll
pins. Using a small hammer, tap the new roll pins through
the new target disk into the cylinder block.
Figure 30-20-40 3
N-18345
Assembly: Install the front housing (Item 1) and bearing

1
over the shaft. Install the special tool (MEL1562) (Item 2)
[Figure 30-20-42] over the bearing and press the
bearing onto the shaft. Apply 40034 N (9000 lbf) to set
the bearing. Rotate the housing to check for free travel.
NOTE: The 40034 N (9000 lbf), is NOT the amount of

P0076
pressure required by the press. It is the
amount of downward force applied by the
Disassembly: Remove the oil fill plug (Item 1) [Figure press.
30-20-40] from the housing to drain the oil from the Assembly: Install the split ring (Item 3) [Figure 30-20-
bearing and face seal area. 42] with a feeler gauge measure the distance between
the split ring and the top of the bearing inner race.
Assembly: Add the necessary washer to get closest to
the measurement and re install the split ring.
Assembly: Release the pressure from the bearing and

remove the tool.

Figure 30-20-43
2
2
1
1
P13083
Assembly: Remove and replace the face seal (Item 1)

P0020 [Figure 30-20-45] from the shaft.
Assembly: Install a new bearing (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-

Disassembly: Install the bearing puller (Item 1) [Figure 45] onto the shaft.
30-20-43] under the front housing and support the puller

and housing with blocks. Figure 30-20-46
Disassembly: Press the shaft (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-43]

from the housing. 2
1
Figure 30-20-44
P0123
Remove and replace the face seal (Item 1) [Figure 30-

20-46] on the front housing.
P0682
NOTE: When installing face seals, apply a layer of
good quality lithium grease to the mating
Disassembly: Use a bearing puller to remove the surfaces of the face seal.
bearing from the shaft [Figure 30-20-44].
Remove and replace the bearing cup (Item 2) [Figure
NOTE: The bearing will be destroyed during the 30-20-46] on the front housing.
removal procedure. Be sure to have a new
bearing on hand before removing the old NOTE: The bearing cup in the housing may be loose
bearing. after installation. The bearing cup will tighten
in its bore after the motor is completely
assembled.


3/4
Figure 30-20-47
Full
1 Range
1/2
P-24562
Fill housing with synthetic Mobilgear SHC XMP 150 to

P0122 [Figure 30-20-49] 1/2 to 3/4 full.
Remove and inspect the bearing (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-

47] located in the front housing.

Replace the bearing if worn or damaged.
Figure 30-20-48
1
3
P0126
Remove the shaft seal (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-48].
Replace the outer O-ring and inner shaft seal (Item 2)

[Figure 30-20-48].
Remove the bearing cup (Item 3) [Figure 30-20-48] if it

needs replacement.


CHARGE PRESSURE Testing
Charge pressure is a supply of oil to the hydrostatic

pumps. Charge pressure is regulated by a charge relief
valve located inside the hydrostatic pump. Charge
pressure is used to replenish hydrostatic fluid removed
from the drive circuit, pump and motor “internal leakage”
and from the hydrostatic motors shuttle (flushing) valve.
Charge pressure is also used to operate other hydraulic

functions, such as shifting the auxiliary spool, and to pilot
open the BICS system for the lift and tilt in the main
2 4
hydraulic control valve. 1 3
The charge pressure sender is located on the hydraulic

fan motor. Charge pressure alarm settings are pre- P-43196
programmed into the main controller and are based on
loader type and options installed.
The tools needed to check charge pressure, hydraulic
hose (Item 1), T fitting (P/N 13K-5) (Item 2), Hydraulic
gauge 6,9 MPa (68,9 bar) (1000 psi) (Item 3) and adapter
fitting (P/N 93F-5) (Item 4) [Figure 30-30-1].

WARNING
W-2059-0598
Raise the loader lift arms and install an approved lift arm
support device. (See Installing on Page 10-20-1.)

10-10-1.)

CHARGE PRESSURE (CONT’D) Figure 30-30-4
Testing (Cont’d)
Figure 30-30-2
1
1
2
3 3
2
P-90301
Install the T fitting (P/N 13K-5) (Item 1) [Figure 30-30-4].

P-43197
Install the hose (Item 2) [Figure 30-30-4], that was
disconnected from the motor, to the T fitting.
Connect the gauge (Item 1), to the adapter fitting (P/N
93F5) (Item 2) [Figure 30-30-2]. Install the hose (Item 3) [Figure 30-30-4], that is

attached to the pressure gauge, to the T fitting.
Connect the hydraulic hose (Item 3) [Figure 30-30-2] to
the adapter fitting. Tighten all connections. Tighten the hydraulic fittings.
Figure 30-30-3 Connect the remote start tool. (See REMOTE START
7003031 on Page 10-61-1.)
Start the loader and warm the hydraulic fluid to 140

degrees Farenheit.
On non-SJC equipped loaders the charge pressure at

high idle, with the fluid temperature of 140 degree
Farenheit is 3,0 - 3,4 MPa (30,0 - 34,1 bar) (435 - 495
1
psi) with the pump in neutral.
NOTE: If the machine is equipped with SJC option

the charge pressure should be set at 2,5 - 2,8
P-90302 MPa (24,8 - 28,3 bar) (360 - 410 psi) at 60°C
(140°F) fluid @ High idle.
Disconnect the hydraulic hose (Item 1) [Figure 30-30-3].

CHARGE PRESSURE (CONT’D)
Sender Removal And Installation
Figure 30-30-5
P-90302
Disconnect the wire (Item 1) [Figure 30-30-5] from the

sender.

Remove the sender (Item 2) [Figure 30-30-5] from the
motor.
Installation: Tighten the charge pressure sender to 10 -

10,9 N•m (7.4 - 8.1 ft-lb) torque.
NOTE: Inspect the O-ring on the sender before

installation.

CHARGE PRESSURE (CONT'D) Figure 30-30-7
Adjusting
Non SJC Machines
IMPORTANT
damage the system.
N-17231
I-2003-0888
Figure 30-30-6 Remove the plug, spring and poppet [Figure 30-30-7].
Check the poppet, spring and poppet seat for wear or

1 damage.
Figure 30-30-8

P-43856
1
If the charge pressure is not correct loosen the charge
relief valve plug (Item 1) [Figure 30-30-6].
N-19568
Always use a new O-ring. Tighten the plug to 41 - 68 N•m
There are several different thickness of the shims (Item
1) [Figure 30-30-8] and are used to adjust the charge
pressure.
NOTE: 0,254 mm (0.010 inch) is approximately 55,2

kPa (0,55 bar) (8 psi) increase in pressure. Do
not add more than 5 shims without retesting.
If testing is still low more shims may be
added.
On non-SJC equipped loaders the charge pressure at

high idle, with the fluid temperature of 60°C (140°F) is 3,0
- 3,4 MPa (30,0 - 34,1 bar) (435 - 495 psi) with the pump
in neutral.

CHARGE PRESSURE (CONT'D) Figure 30-30-10
Adjusting (Cont’d)
SJC Machines
IMPORTANT
damage the system.
P-64435
I-2003-0888
Figure 30-30-9 Check the poppet and spring for wear or damage.
Inspect the seat inside the hydrostatic pump case for

wear or damage.
There are several different thickness of shims (Item 1)

[Figure 30-30-10] used to adjust the charge pressure.
1 NOTE: 1,0 mm shim (Item 1) [Figure 30-30-10] = 300,0

kPa (3,0 bar) (43.5 psi) in pressure change.
Adding shims increases charge pressure.
Removing shims decreases charge pressure.
The charge pressure should be set at 2,5 - 2,8 MPa (24,8

- 28,3 bar) (360 - 410 psi).
P-64431
If the charge pressure is not correct remove the charge

relief valve (Item 1) [Figure 30-30-9].
NOTE: The pump has been removed for photo clarity.

The charge pressure relief valve is located on
the engine side of the hydrostatic pump when
installed in the loader.
Assembly: Always use a new O-ring. Tighten the plug to

41 - 68 N•m (30 - 50 ft-lb) torque.


HYDROSTATIC PUMP
Description
The hydrostatic pump is composed of two hydrostatic

piston pumps connected together. The pumps provide bi-
directional flow to two separate drive motors. The pump
flow and direction are controlled by two hand levers, one
for each pump.
The hydrostatic pump contains replenishing valves. The

function of these valves is to give replacement fluid to the
low pressure side of the hydrostatic circuit. Replacement
fluid is needed because of normal internal leakage and
the controlled flow to the oil cooler for cooling. Another
function of the replenishing valve is to keep high pressure
fluid out of the low pressure side of the hydrostatic circuit.
The hydrostatic pump is located in the center of the

mainframe mounted to the engine flywheel housing.

HYDROSTATIC PUMP (CONT'D) Figure 30-40-1
Remove the hydrostatic pump / engine assembly from

the loader. (See Engine Removal And Installation on
Page 70-10-7.)
Remove the Hydraulic Pump. (See Removal And

Remove the Drive Belt. (See DRIVE BELT on Page 30- 1

50-1.)
P-90222
IMPORTANT
Use a puller (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-1] to loosen the
When repairing hydrostatic and hydraulic systems, pulley from the pump drive shaft.
parts clean. Always use caps and plugs on hoses, NOTE: DO NOT strike puller or pump shaft with a
tubelines and ports to keep dirt out. Dirt can quickly hammer. Internal pump damage may result.
damage the system.

I-2003-0888 Remove the nut and washer from the pump drive shaft.
Figure 30-10-1 Remove the pump pulley and key from the pump drive
shaft.
Figure 30-40-2
1
1
P-90221
Loosen the nut (Item 1) [Figure 30-10-1] on the P-90223

hydrostatic pump drive shaft.
Installation: Tighten the nut to 258 - 325 N•m (190 - 240 Remove the two mounting bolts and nuts (Item 1)
ft-lb) torque [Figure 30-40-2].
Installation: Tighten the mounting bolts and nuts to 88 -

95 N•m (65 - 70 ft-lb) torque.

HYDROSTATIC PUMP (CONT'D)
Figure 30-40-3
P-90224

3] at the hydraulic pump mounting bracket.

Installation: Tighten mounting bolt to 125 - 135 N•m (90
- 100 ft-lb)
Remove the hydrostatic pump from the mounting bracket

and drive belt housing.
BEFORE START UP: Fill the hydrostatic pump with

hydraulic oil. This will remove trapped air in the
hydrostatic pumps before start up. (See Hydrostatic
Pump Startup on Page 30-40-3.)
Hydrostatic Pump Startup
Follow the hydraulic pump startup procedure. (See

Hydraulic Pump Startup on Page 20-60-7.)

HYDROSTATIC PUMP (CONT’D) Check the O-ring (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-5] for damage
Replenishing / High Pressure Relief Valve Removal
And Installation If the high pressure relief valve must be replaced, it must
be replaced as a complete unit.
Figure 30-40-4
The pressure setting for a new high pressure relief valve
is 36,2 MPa (362,0 bar) (5250 psi).
P-43857
There are four replenishing / high pressure relief valves

(Item 1) [Figure 30-40-4] in the hydrostatic pump
assembly. Two are located at the top of the pumps and
two at the bottom of the pumps for valve function.
NOTE: The two top valves are for the reverse drive
loop and the two bottom valves are for the
forward drive loop.
Figure 30-40-5
P-66670
Remove the high pressure relief valve (Item 1) [Figure

30-40-4] and [Figure 30-40-5] from the pump.
Assemble: Tighten the plug to 41 - 68 N•m (30 - 50 ft-lb)

torque.
Check for damage and replace as needed.

Parts Identification (Left Half)
Ref. Description
1
11
4 1. Snap Ring
10 1 2. Washer
5 2 3. Seal
8 3
4. Bearing
3 4 7 1
5. Key
9 1 6. Shaft
26
6 7. Housing
9 8. Plug
9. O-ring
9 10. Cover
10
11. Bolt
12. Pin
12 4 13. Swash Plate
9 14. Wear Plate
15. Piston Assembly
8 11 16. Piston Retainer
17. Retainer
14 18. Block

19. Spring
20. Valve Plate
16 21. Gasket
13 22. Poppet
2
23. Shim
17 15 24. Replenishing/High
Pressure Relief Valve
2 17 25. Coupler
12
2 26. Dust Seal
20
18
19
8
17
9
12
23
19
22 21
24
42
9 9
8
12 4
9
25 9
9 12
24
9
11 D-2428C

Parts Identification (Right Half)
Ref. Description
1. Bolt
2. End Cap
3. Plug 3
4. O-ring 4
5
5. Replenishing/High 3
Pressure Relief Valve 4
6. Gasket 2
7. Bearing 1
1
8. Pin
4
9. Valve Plate
10. Washer 5
6
11. Spring
12. Block
13. Retainer
14. Piston Assembly 7 4 9
3
15. Wear Plate
16. Swash Plate
17. Housing 10

18. Seal
10 8
19. Cover
20. Shaft 13
21. Snap Ring 11
13
22. Dust Seal
23. Piston Retainer 10
23
12
8
15
13
14
22 1
16 3
4
4
7 17
8
19
18
7
4
19
21 4
21
4 20 3
1
7
21
D-2427B

HYDROSTATIC PUMP (CONT'D) Figure 30-40-8
Disassembly
Figure 30-40-6
3
1
1 3
2
N-19571
1 Remove the pump coupler (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-8].

P-43858
Remove the large O-ring (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-8].
Remove the four mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-40- Remove the two small O-rings (Item 3) [Figure 30-40-8].
6].

Figure 30-40-9
Figure 30-40-7
1 1
N-19550
N-19570
Remove the four bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-9] from the

Separate the two hydrostatic pumps [Figure 30-40-7]. pump housing end cap.

HYDROSTATIC PUMP (CONT’D) Figure 30-40-12
Disassembly (Cont’d)
2
1
Figure 30-40-10
N-17194
2
Check the valve plate locating pin (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-
N-19551 12] for wear and replace if needed.
Check the needle bearing (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-12] for

Remove the pump housing end cap (Item 1) [Figure 30- wear and replace if needed.
40-10].

Figure 30-40-13
Remove the gasket (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-10].
Figure 30-40-11
1
1
N-17197
N-17193 Remove the rotating group (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-13]

from the pump.
Remove the valve plate (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-11].
Check the valve plate for wear. (Both Sides.)

3 3
Figure 30-40-14
1 1
3 2
3
2
N-17200
Check the ball guide retainer (Item 1) and washer (Item

N-17198 2) [Figure 30-40-16] for wear and replace as needed.
Remove the four pins (Item 3) [Figure 30-40-16] from the

Remove the slipper guide and pistons (Item 1) [Figure cylinder block.
30-40-14] from the cylinder block.

Check the cylinder block for wear and replace as needed.
Check all the pistons (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-14] for wear
and replace the rotating group as needed. Check pins (Item 3) [Figure 30-40-16] to see if they are
all the same length.
Figure 30-40-15
Figure 30-40-17
N-17199
N-17201
Remove the ball guide retainer (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-

15] from the cylinder block. Remove the thrust plate (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-17] from
the pump housing.

Figure 30-40-18
1
1
2
N-17240
3
Remove the snap ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-20] from
N-17481 the pump housing and remove the driveshaft and bearing
from the housing.
Remove the driveshaft key (Item 1) the snap ring (Item 2) Figure 30-40-21
and the support washer (Item 3) [Figure 30-40-18] from

the drive shaft end of the pump.
Figure 30-40-19
N-17241
Remove the snap ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-21] from

N-17239 the driveshaft and remove the bearing.
Check the bearing for wear and replace if worn.

Use a seal puller and remove the seal (Item 1) [Figure
30-40-19] from the pump housing.

Figure 30-40-22
N-17244
Remove the O-ring (Item 1) and bearing race (Item 2)

N-17242 [Figure 30-40-24] from the pump housing.
Figure 30-40-25
Check the pump shaft (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-22] for
wear and replace if needed.

Figure 30-40-23
N-17245
1 1
Check the bearing race (Item 1) and O-ring (Item 2)
N-17243 [Figure 30-40-25] for wear and replace as needed.
Remove the four mount bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-23]

from the lower trunnion cover. Remove the cover.

Figure 30-40-26
1
2
1 N-17250
1
Inspect the seal (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-28] in the upper

N-17246 trunnion cover and replace if needed.
Figure 30-40-29
Inspect the dust seal on the pintle shaft.

Remove the four mount bolts (Item 1) from the pump
housing and remove the linkage bracket (Item 2) [Figure
30-40-26].
Figure 30-40-27
N-17248
1 Remove the O-ring (Item 1) and bearing race (Item 2)

[Figure 30-40-29] from the pump housing.
N-17247
Remove the upper trunnion cover (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-

27].

1
Figure 30-40-30
N-17252
2
Tilt the swash plate (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-32] and

N-17249 remove the swash plate and lower bearing from the
pump housing.
Inspect the bearing race (Item 1) and O-ring (Item 2)

[Figure 30-40-30] and replace as needed.

Figure 30-40-31
N-17251
Slide the swash plate from side to side and remove the
tapered roller bearing (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-31] from
the swash plate shaft.

Assembly
Figure 30-40-33
1
1
2
N-17249
Install the tapered bearing (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-35] on

N-17253 the swash plate shaft.
Figure 30-40-36
Install the lower bearing (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-33] on
the swash plate.

Figure 30-40-34
N-17248
Install the bearing race (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-35] and O-

N-17252 ring (Item 3) [Figure 30-40-35] as shown in [Figure 30-
40-36].
Install the swash plate and bearing into the pump

housing [Figure 30-40-34].

Assembly (Cont’d)
Figure 30-40-37
1 N-17245
Figure 30-40-40
N-17247
Install the upper trunnion seal (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-37]

and cover.

Figure 30-40-38
1
N-17244
Install the bearing race (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-39] and O-

ring (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-39] at the lower trunnion as
shown in [Figure 30-40-40].
N-17246
Install the linkage bracket (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-38] and

the four mounting bolts and tighten to 24 - 30 N•m (18 -
22 ft-lb) torque.
Install the dust seals onto the pintle shafts

Assembly (Cont’d)
Figure 30-40-41
N-17241
Install the bearing and snap ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-

N-17243 43] on the pump shaft.
Figure 30-40-44
Align the marks on the lower trunnion cover and pump
housing as shown in [Figure 30-40-41].

Install the four mounting bolts and tighten to 24 - 30 N•m
Figure 30-40-42
1
1
N-17240
Install the pump shaft into the pump housing [Figure 30-
40-44].
Install the snap ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-44].

N-17242
Install the snap ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-42] on the

pump shaft.

Assembly (Cont’d)
Figure 30-40-45
1
1
1
1 2 3
N-17198
Assemble the piston assemblies into the slipper guide.

N-17200 Lubricate the pistons and cylinder block bores and insert
the piston assemblies into the cylinder bores [Figure 30-
40-47].
Install the four slipper pins (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-45]
into the cylinder block. Lay the pump housing on its side and install the cylinder

block, piston assembly into the housing.
Apply a small amount of grease to the washer (Item 2)
and install into the ball guide retainer (Item 3) [Figure 30- Figure 30-40-48
40-45].
Figure 30-40-46
N-17197
N-17199 Place the pump on a work surface with the end cap
opening up [Figure 30-40-48].
Install the ball guide retainer and washer (Item 1) [Figure

30-40-46] onto the slipper holddown pins.

Assembly (Cont’d)
Figure 30-40-49
1
1
2
N-17193
Coat the backside of the valve plate with petroleum jelly

N-17194 to hold it in position and install the valve plate onto the
charge pump, bronze face up [Figure 30-40-51].
Replace the needle bearing (Item 1) and valve plate The notch (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-51] on the valve plate
locating pin (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-49] in the charge must engage the locating pin.

pump.
Figure 30-40-52
Figure 30-40-50
2
1
N-19551
N-17196
Coat a new end cap gasket (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-52]

The bearing cage (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-50] will with petroleum jelly and install onto the end cap.
protrude from 2,0 - 2,5 mm (0.08 - 0.10 in) from the
surface of the charge pump.
The valve plate locating spring pin (Item 2) [Figure 30-

40-50] will protrude from 4,19 - 4,70 mm (0.165 - 0.185
in) from the surface of the charge pump.

Assembly (Cont’d)
Figure 30-40-53
1 1
N-19570
Install the two pumps together [Figure 30-40-55].

N-19550
Figure 30-40-56
Install the valve plate and end cap on the pump housing.
Tighten the bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-53] to 47 - 61

N•m (35 - 45 ft-lb) torque. 1
Figure 30-40-54
1
1
3 P-43858
2 Tighten the four bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-56] to 47 -

1 61 N•m (35 - 45 ft-lb) torque.
N-19571
Install the two small O-rings (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-54].
Install the large new O-ring (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-54].
Install the pump coupler (Item 3) [Figure 30-40-54].


HYDROSTATIC PUMP (SJC) The servo piston strokes the swash plate in the rotating
group. The rotating group generates flow to the A or B
Description ports on the hydrostatic pump. The flow from the A and B
ports is sent to the hydrostatic drive motors where
The hydrostatic pump is a fully proportional dual piston forward or reverse drive motor rotation is obtained.
pump in one pump casing. The endcaps are removable
to gain access to the rotating assemblies. There are swash plate angle sensors on the bottom of
the pump that monitor swash plate movement.
The hydraulic controllers are supplied with charge
pressure from an external charge pump. 12 volt electrical Ports are labeled on the hydrostatic pump casting.
solenoids shift a spool in the hydraulic controller that
directs flow to a servo piston.
Figure 30-41-1

P-90206
A,B Service Line Ports (High Pressure Outlet Ports to Drive Motors)
T Case Drain Port
MA Operating Pressure of “A” Port
MB Operating Pressure of “B” Port
R Air Bleed Port
X1,X2 Control Pressure Gauge Port
G Charge Pressure Inlet Port
MG Gauge Port For Charge Pressure

HYDROSTATIC PUMP (SJC) (CONT'D) Figure 30-41-3
Hydraulic Controller Removal And Installation
The loader’s right hand side hydraulic controller can be

removed with the hydrostatic pump still in the loader. The
loader’s left hand side hydraulic controller can only be 1
removed when the hydrostatic pump is separated from
the engine / hydrostatic pump cast mount.
Controller solenoids can be bled of trapped air in the

controller. This should be performed when hydraulic
controllers are replaced, removed or uncommanded
oscillations in the controls are present.
1
Raise the lift arms and install an approved lift arm support P-90239
Place the loader on jackstands. (See Procedure on Page Disconnect the wire harness (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-3]
10-10-1.) from both sides of the hydrostatic pump.
WARNING IMPORTANT

Put jackstands under the front axles and rear corners When repairing hydrostatic and hydraulic systems,
of the frame before running the engine for service. clean the work area before disassembly and keep all
Failure to use jackstands can allow the machine to parts clean. Always use caps and plugs on hoses,
fall or move and cause injury or death. tubelines and ports to keep dirt out. Dirt can quickly
W-2017-0286 damage the system.
I-2003-0888
Figure 30-41-4
Figure 30-41-2
1
1
1
P-90208
P-90207

Locate the two hydraulic controllers (Item 1) [Figure 30- hydraulic controller.
41-2] on the hydrostatic pumps.
Installation: Tighten the bolts to 10,4 N•m (7.7 ft-lb).

Hydraulic Controller Removal And Installation

(Cont'd)
1
Figure 30-41-5
3
2
1
4 P-64978
2
With the engine running and the loader on jack stands:
Bleed the trapped air in the controller by loosening the
P-90210 small set screw (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-7] a maximum of
two turns. Leave the screw loose until oil drips out of the
set screw. Tighten set screw to 2 N•m (18 in-lb) torque.
Remove the cover (Item 1) gaskets (Item 2) and control

(Item 3) [Figure 30-41-5] from the pump. Repeat the bleeding procedure for all of the solenoids.
Figure 30-41-6
2 2
P-90209
Install the controller with the feedback lever (Item 4)

[Figure 30-41-5] in the center of the servo piston groove
(Item 1) [Figure 30-41-6].
NOTE: Do NOT remove the three screens (Item 2)

[Figure 30-41-6] they will be damaged during
removal and must be replaced.
NOTE: When a hydraulic controller is replaced, the

hydrostatic pumps must be calibrated. (See
Hydraulic Controller Neutral Adjustment on
Page 30-51-36.)


Page 70-10-7.)
Remove the Hydraulic Pump. (See Removal And

Remove the Drive Belt. (See DRIVE BELT on Page 30- 1

50-1.)
P-90222
IMPORTANT
Use a puller (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-9] to loosen the
When repairing hydrostatic and hydraulic systems, pulley from the pump drive shaft.
parts clean. Always use caps and plugs on hoses, NOTE: DO NOT strike puller or pump shaft with a
tubelines and ports to keep dirt out. Dirt can quickly hammer. Internal pump damage may result.
damage the system.

I-2003-0888 Remove the nut and washer from the pump drive shaft.
Figure 30-41-8 Remove the pump pulley from the pump drive shaft.
Figure 30-41-10
1
1
P-90221
P-90223
Loosen the nut (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-8] on the
hydrostatic pump drive shaft.
Remove the two bolts and nuts (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-
Installation: Tighten the nut to 258 - 325 N•m (190 - 240 10].
ft-lb) torque
Installation: Tighten the bolts and nuts to 88 - 95 N•m

HYDROSTATIC PUMP (SJC) (CONT'D)
Figure 30-41-11
P-90224
Remove the two bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-11] at the

hydraulic pump mounting bracket.

Installation: Tighten the bolts to 125 - 135 N•m (90 - 100
ft-lb).
Remove the hydrostatic pump from the mounting bracket

and drive belt housing.
BEFORE START UP: Fill the hydrostatic pump with

hydraulic oil. This will remove trapped air in the
hydrostatic pumps before start up. (See Hydrostatic
Pump Startup on Page 30-40-3.)

Hydrostatic Pump Start Up
Before putting a hydrostatic pump back into operation,

the hydrostatic pump must be filled with hydrostatic fluid.
This should be performed when installing a new
hydrostatic pump or a pump that has been disassembled.
Starting a hydrostatic pump dry will cause premature

wear or permanent pump damage.
Under normal operation, the charge pump will keep the

hydrostatic pumps filled.
Fill the hydrostatic pump by removing a plug at the top of

the hydrostatic pump. A clean funnel should be used to
avoid washing contaminants into the hydrostatic pump.
Fill the hydrostatic pump case as much as possible
before start up.
Figure 30-41-12

1
P-90226
Remove the air bleed plugs (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-12].
BEFORE START UP: Fill one of the air bleed ports with
new hydraulic oil until the hydraulic oil flows out of the
other air bleed port. This will remove trapped air in the
hydrostatic pumps before start up.
Installation: Tighten plugs to 25 N•m (18 ft-lb) torque.
NOTE: The hydrostatic pump is removed from the

loader for photo clarity.

3 1
1. O-ring 5 4
2. Bolt
3. End Housing 7
4. O-ring 6
5. Right Rotating Assembly 8
6. Timing Pin
7. Bearing
8. Spacer/Coupler
9. Pin
10. Positioning Pin
11. O-ring 10
12. O-ring 11 9 2
13. Position Sensor 12
14. Washer 13
15. Bolt 14
15
16
22 17
21 19
24

23
20 18
26
18
25 27
19
29 26
16. Steel Cover

17. Bolt
18. Hydraulic Controller
6 19. High Pressure Relief
7 20. Case Housing
2 21. Bolt
22. Plug
23. Plug
28 24. Dowel Pin
25. Charge Pressure Relief
9 11 4 26. Left Servo
10 12 27. Right Servo
13 28. Left Rotating Assembly
15 29. End Housing
14
16 17
P-90240

High Pressure Relief And Bypass Valve
Figure 30-41-13
1
1
P-64437
Inspect the valve seat surface (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-15]

P-64431 for scratches and replace as needed.
Inspect the spring (Item 2) [Figure 30-41-15] for

There are four system high pressure relief valves (Item 1) breakage.
[Figure 30-41-13] in the back of the hydrostatic pump.

Inspect the seats inside the case housing.
Remove the relief valve cap (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-13].
Do not disassemble the relief valve assembly. If
Installation: Tighten cap to 150 - 170 N•m (111 - 125 ft- replacement is required, replace as an assembly.
lb) torque.
Factory setting on the relief valve is 36197 kPa (362 bar)
Figure 30-41-14 (5250 psi).
4
3
2 1
P-64436
Inspect the valve cap O-ring (Item 1) and back-up ring

(Item 2) [Figure 30-41-14] and replace as needed.
Remove relief valve assembly (Item 3) [Figure 30-41-14]

from the valve cap.
Inspect the conical spring (Item 4) [Figure 30-41-14] for

damage.

Charge Relief Valve

1 4 5
Figure 30-41-16 6
2 3
1 P-64435
Inspect the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-17].

P-64431
Inspect the poppet (Item 2) and the spring seat (Item 3)
[Figure 30-41-17] for damage or foreign material. Must
The charge relief valve (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-16] is move freely in the relief valve bore.
located on the back of the hydrostatic pump.

Inspect the sealing ring (Item 4) [Figure 30-41-17] and
Remove the charge relief valve. the mating seat in the pump housing for damage or
foreign material.
Installation: Tighten the charge relief valve to 70 N•m
(52 ft-lb) torque. Inspect the spring (Item 5) and the charge relief valve
shims (Item 6) [Figure 30-41-17].
NOTE: 1.0 mm shim = 300 kPa (3 bar) (43.5 psi) in

pressure change. Adding shims increases
charge pressure. Removing shims decreases
charge pressure.

Disassembly

the loader. (See Engine Removal And Installation on 1
Page 70-10-7.)
Remove the hydrostatic pump. (See Removal And

Figure 30-41-18
1
2
P-90228
1 Remove the bolts (Item 1) for the swash plate angle

1 sensor (Item 2) [Figure 30-41-20].
Figure 30-41-21

1
P-90226
Remove the hydraulic controllers (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-

18]. (See Hydraulic Controller Removal And Installation
on Page 30-41-2.)
Figure 30-41-19
3 3
2 2
1 1
P-90218
Remove the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-21].
3
3
P-90227
Swash plate angle sensors (Item 1) are mounted on the

bottom of the hydrostatic pump. They are protected by
steel covers (Item 2) [Figure 30-41-19].
Remove the two bolts (Item 3) and the steel cover (Item
2) [Figure 30-41-19] from both sides.

Figure 30-41-22
P-64464
1
Remove the end housing / rotating group assembly
P-64445 [Figure 30-41-24] from both ends of the pump.
Figure 30-41-25
Remove the bolts (Item 1) from the right end housing
(Item 2) [Figure 30-41-22] 1

Figure 30-41-23
P-64465
1
Remove O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-25].
P-64447
Remove the four bolts (Item 1) the left end housing (Item
2) [Figure 30-41-23].

Figure 30-41-26
RIGHT SIDE
B25012
2
Disassemble the right side rotating group [Figure 30-41-
P-64454 28].
Figure 30-41-29
Remove valve plate (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-26] from the
right side pump.

NOTE: The valve plates are NOT interchangeable
between the right and left sides.
Figure 30-41-27
LEFT SIDE
B25011
Disassemble the left side rotating group [Figure 30-41-

2 29].
P-64501
Remove valve plate (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-27] from the

left side pump.
NOTE: The valve plates are NOT interchangeable

between the right and left sides.

1
Figure 30-41-30
P-64471
Remove the spherical washer (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-

P-64475 32].
Figure 30-41-33
Remove the pistons (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-30] from the
rotating block.
1

Figure 30-41-31
1
P-64472
Do Not remove the pins (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-33] from

P-64476 the cylinder block.
Remove the pistons (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-31] from the

piston retainer.

1 1
Figure 30-41-34
P-64483
2
Remove the shell bearing races (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-

P-64479 36].
Remove the positioning pin (Item 2) [Figure 30-41-36].

Remove the swash plate (Item 1) from the endcap
housing (Item 2) [Figure 30-41-34]. Figure 30-41-37

Remove the link (Item 3) [Figure 30-41-34],
Figure 30-41-35
P-64485
Remove the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-37].

P-64482
Remove the shell bearing (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-35].

Figure 30-41-38
LEFT SIDE
1
P-76742
Remove the pump seal (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-40] by

P-64486 inserting a screw into the seal and prying out.
Figure 30-41-41
Figure 30-41-39
RIGHT SIDE

1
P-64488
P-76743
The drive shaft can be tapped out of the end housing with
Remove the snap ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-38] and a rubber mallet.
[Figure 30-41-39] from the end housing.
Remove the snap ring (Item 1) and remove the bearing
(Item 2) [Figure 30-41-41].

Figure 30-41-42
P-90231
Rotate the servo piston cover (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-44].

P-64490
Figure 30-41-45
Measure and record servo piston depth at the adjustment

screw [Figure 30-41-42].

Figure 30-41-43
1 1
P-90237
Slide the servo piston assembly out of the bore. [Figure

30-41-45].
P-90232
Remove servo piston bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-43].

Figure 30-41-46 1
2
1 2
P-64496
Remove the servo cover (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-48] from

P-64493 the servo piston.
Remove the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-48] from the

Remove the bushings (Item 1), seals and O-rings (Item cover.
2) [Figure 30-41-46] from the pump housing.

Figure 30-41-49
Figure 30-41-47
1
P-64497
P-64495
Remove snap ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-49] from the

Remove the lock nut (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-47] from the servo piston.
servo piston.

Figure 30-41-50
1
2
P-64498
Remove the piston stop adjustment mechanism (Item 1)

[Figure 30-41-50] from the servo piston.

Remove the O-ring (Item 2) [Figure 30-41-50]
Figure 30-41-51
2
1
P-64502
Remove the bearings (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-51].
Remove the coupler (Item 2) [Figure 30-41-51].

Inspection
Figure 30-41-52
P-64477
Inspect the mating surface of the piston retainer for

P-86718 scoring or scratches (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-54].
Figure 30-41-55
Inspect the valve plates (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-52] for
scratches or scoring. Replace a valve plate if the 1

scratches are deep enough to catch with a fingernail. 1
Figure 30-41-53
P-64472
1
Inspect the pins (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-55]. The pins

must be all the same length.
P-64476
Inspect the pistons, look for scoring and scratches. The

holes (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-53] in the slippers must not
be plugged.

Inspection (Cont’d)
Figure 30-41-56
P-64479
Inspect mating surface for the slippers on the swash

P-64474 plate (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-58].
Figure 30-41-59
Inspect the spherical washer for scoring and wear (Item
1) [Figure 30-41-56].

2
Figure 30-41-57
2
1
3
P-64482
Inspect individual roller bearings (Item 1) and machined

P-64478 surfaces (Item 2) [Figure 30-41-59] on swash plate.
Inspect the back surface of the rotating block (Item 1)

[Figure 30-41-57] where the valve plate seals. There
must be no scratches or scoring.
Inspect that the spring (Item 2) and snap ring (Item 3)

[Figure 30-41-57] are not bent or damaged.

Figure 30-41-60 1
1
P-64498
Inspect the servo piston stop adjustment (Item 1) [Figure

P-86723 30-41-62] for broken parts.
Figure 30-41-63
Inspect bearing surfaces (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-60] for
scratches or scoring.

Figure 30-41-61 1
3 1
P-64436
Inspect the conical spring (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-63] for

P-64488 damage.
Inspect the bearing (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-61].
Inspect wear surfaces (Item 2) for scratches. Inspect the

splines (Item 3) for excessive wear.

Figure 30-41-64
P-64437
Inspect the valve seat surface (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-64]

for scratches.

Inspect the spring (Item 2) [Figure 30-41-64] for
breakage.
Inspect the seats inside the case housing.
Do not disassemble the relief valve assembly. If

replacement is required, replace as an assembly.

Assembly
Figure 30-41-65
P-64497
2
Install the snap ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-67].

P-64502
Figure 30-41-68
Install the coupler (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-65].

Install the bearings (Item 2) [Figure 30-41-65].
Figure 30-41-66
1
1
2
P-64496
Install the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-68] on the servo

cover.
P-64498
Install the piston stop adjustment mechanism (Item 1) in

to the servo piston (Item 2) [Figure 30-41-66].

Assembly (Cont’d)
Figure 30-41-69
P-90237
2 Install the servo piston assembly [Figure 30-41-71].

P-64495
Figure 30-41-72
Install the servo cover (Item 1) on the servo piston to the

dimension recorded earlier. Install the lock nut (Item 2)

[Figure 30-41-69].
Figure 30-41-70
1
1
2
1
2 P-64466
Align the servo piston with the guide slot (Item 1) [Figure
30-41-72] parallel to the driveshaft center line.
P-64493
Install the bushings (Item 1), seals and O-rings (Item 2)

[Figure 30-41-70] in the pump housing.

Assembly (Cont’d)
Figure 30-41-73
1 1
P-90232
Install the bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-73].

Tighten the bolts to 10,4 N•m (7.7 ft-lb) torque.

Assembly (Cont’d)
LEFT SIDE
Figure 30-41-74 1
2
RIGHT SIDE
1 P-64503
2
Assembly: Align the timing pin (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-
P-64455 74] and [Figure 30-41-75] in the case housing with the
notch (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-76] and [Figure 30-41-77]
that does not go through the valve plate.
Figure 30-41-75
Align the shoulder of the roller bearing (Item 2) [Figure

LEFT SIDE 30-41-74] and [Figure 30-41-75] with the beveled edge
on the valve plate (Item 2) [Figure 30-41-76] and [Figure
30-41-77].
NOTE: Valve plate must sit FLUSH with the case

housing when properly installed.
Figure 30-41-78
1
2
P-64502
2
1
Figure 30-41-76
RIGHT SIDE
1
2
P-64488
Install the bearing (Item 1) and snap ring (Item 2) [Figure

30-41-78] on the shaft.
Install the shaft in both end housings.
P-64456

Assembly (Cont’d)
Figure 30-41-79
LEFT SIDE
P-64486
Install the snap ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-79] on both

sides of the pump.

Figure 30-41-80
RIGHT SIDE 2
P-76743
Install the seal (Item 1) and snap ring (Item 2) [Figure

30-41-80] on the right side pump.

Assembly (Cont’d)
Figure 30-41-81
1
1
P-64481
Install the locating wires (Item 1) through the bearings

P-64485 and into the hole (Item 2) [Figure 30-41-83] in the side of
the swash plate.
Install the O-ring [Figure 30-41-81] on the positioning Figure 30-41-84

pin.

Figure 30-41-82
1
1
2
2 2
1
P-64480
P-64483 Install the swash plate assembly over the shaft and in to
the end cap housing. The locating wires (Item 1) must
engage the holes (Item 2) [Figure 30-41-84] of the end
Install the positioning pin (Item 1). Install the bearing cap housing.
races with the tall edge (Item 2) [Figure 30-41-82] of the
race towards the outside of the housing.

Assembly (Cont’d)
Figure 30-41-85
1 1
P-64476
Install the pistons (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-87] in the piston

P-64479 retainer.
Figure 30-41-88
The swash plate (Item 1) must move smoothly on the
bearings. Install the feedback link (Item 2) [Figure 30-41-

85] on the swash plate.
1
Figure 30-41-86
P-64475
Install the piston / retainer (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-88]

assembly in the cylinder block.
P-64471
Install the ball guide (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-86] on the

cylinder.

Assembly (Cont’d)
Figure 30-41-89
1
1
P-64466
Install the end housing assembly into the pump housing.

P-64469 The feedback link (Item 2) [Figure 30-41-90] must
engage the notch in the servo piston (Item 1) [Figure 30-
41-91].
Install the cylinder block / piston assembly (Item 1)
[Figure 30-41-89] on the shaft. Figure 30-41-92

Figure 30-41-90
1 2
1
P-64463
P-64465
Align the dowel pin (Item 1) with the hole in the case
(Item 2) [Figure 30-41-92] as the end cap is installed.
Install the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-90].

Assembly (Cont’d)
1
Figure 30-41-93
1 1
1 1 P-90218
Install the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-95].

P-64445
Figure 30-41-96
Figure 30-41-94

1 1
2
1 1
P-64476
P-64447
Install the swash plate angle sensor (Item 1) into the slot
of the positioning pin (Item 2) [Figure 30-41-96].
Install the bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-93] and [Figure
30-41-94]. Tighten the bolts to 130 N•m (96 ft-lb) torque.

Assembly (Cont’d)
Figure 30-41-97
1
2
P-64475
Install the bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-97]. Tighten the

bolts to 3,1 N•m (27.4 in-lb) torque.

Figure 30-41-98
2 2
1 1
2 2
P-64469
Install the covers (Item 1) and bolts (Item 2) [Figure 30-

41-98]. Tighten the bolts to 51 N•m (38 ft-lb) torque.
Install the hydraulic controllers. (See Hydraulic Controller


Mechanical Neutral Adjustment

WARNING
The pump mechanical neutral adjustment sets the
position of the servo piston and pump swash plate
Hydraulic fluid escaping under pressure can have
relative to the hydraulic controller. This procedure should
be followed if the hydrostatic pump has been
disassembled for servicing the servo piston and the
setting has been disrupted.
immediately.
Place the loader on jackstands. (See Procedure on Page W-2145-0290
10-10-1.)
Figure 30-41-99
WARNING 1
1

W-2017-0286

Raise the lift arms, and install an approved lift arm

P-64973
REMOTE START TOOL (SERVICE TOOL) KIT - Connect a hydraulic hose (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-99]
7003031 on Page 10-61-1.) between port X1 and port X2 on each side of the
hydrostatic pump, to equalize the pressures on both ends
Disconnect the swash plate angle sensors in the of the servo pistons.
electrical harness. This prevents unwanted swash plate
movement error codes from occurring during Figure 30-41-100
adjustments. Disconnecting the sensors does not have to
be done directly at the sensor, follow the harness back to
find an accessible connector to disconnect. 1
1
Disconnect the speed sensors located on the top of the
motor carriers. This prevents uncommanded wheel
movement error codes from occurring during
adjustments.
P-90242

MB ports on the front side of the pump, and install 51711
kPa (517 bar) (7500 psi) pressure gauges.

Mechanical Neutral Adjustment (Cont’d)
Figure 30-41-101
P-90226
Loosen the pump neutral adjustment locknut (Item 1)

P-64438 [Figure 30-41-103].
Start the loader using the remote start tool and run at idle.
MA ports on the bottom of the pump, and install 51711

kPa (517 bar) (7500 psi) pressure gauges.
Figure 30-41-102 WARNING

Stay clear of the loader wheels. They will turn
whenever the pump is not centered.
W-2276-1297
1 1 Figure 30-41-104
1 1
P-90243
Remove the drive hoses from the A and B ports (Item 1)

[Figure 30-41-102]. Plug the ports with metal caps. The 1
caps must be able to handle at least 51711 kPa (517 bar)
(7500 psi). Plugging the A and B ports eliminates leakage
at the drive motors from causing errors in the pump P-90238
mechanical neutral setting.
Turn the adjustment screw (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-104]
clockwise, until one of the gauges registers an increase
in system pressure. Mark the position of the adjustment
screw.

Mechanical Neutral Adjustment (Cont’d)
Figure 30-41-105
P-90238
1
While holding the adjustment screw (Item 1) in position,

P-90238 tighten the lock nut (Item 2) [Figure 30-41-107] to 30
Turn the adjustment screw (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-105] Shut the loader OFF.
counterclockwise, until the other gauge registers an

increase in system pressure. Mark the position of the Remove the hydraulic hose from the X1 and X2 ports on
adjustment screw. the pump. Install the plugs and tighten to 25 N•m (18 ft-
lb) torque.
Figure 30-41-106
Remove the pressure gauges from the MA and MB ports
on the pump. Install the plugs and tighten to 25 N•m (18
ft-lb) torque.
NOTE: The Hydraulic Controller Neutral Adjustment

must be performed whenever the Mechanical
Neutral Adjustment is done. (See Hydraulic
Controller Neutral Adjustment on Page 30-50-
36.)
P-90238

clockwise, to a position halfway between the recorded
positions. The pressure gauges should read equal
pressures.

Hydraulic Controller Neutral Adjustment
The hydraulic controller neutral adjustment, aligns the

pump swash plate and the control spool so that a zero 1
angle control setting provides a zero degree swash plate
setting. This adjustment should be performed whenever
any part of the control or swash plate mechanisms are
adjusted, removed or after the pump mechanical neutral
setting is adjusted. The pump mechanical neutral setting
must be correct before performing the hydraulic controller
neutral adjustments.
NOTE: Procedure is shown for the left side hydraulic 1

controller. Procedure is the same for the right P-90239
side hydraulic controller, with the exception
of the following procedures. Disconnect the
electrical connectors for the right side Disconnect the wire harness (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-108]
hydraulic controller and connect pressure from the controller being adjusted.
gauges in the X1 and X2 ports on the right
side of the pump. Figure 30-41-109

10-10-1.)
1
WARNING
2
W-2017-0286
P-90226
Raise the lift arms, and install an approved lift arm
Remove the X1 plug (Item 1) and X2 plug (Item 2)
Raise the operator cab. (See Raising on Page 10-30-2.) [Figure 30-41-109] from the side of the hydrostatic pump
being adjusted.
7003031 on Page 10-61-1.)

Hydraulic Controller Neutral Adjustment (Cont’d)
Figure 30-41-110
P-90236

P-64975 clockwise, until one of the gauges registers an increase
in system pressure. Mark the position of the adjustment
screw.
Install 3447 kPa (34 bar) (500 psi) pressure gauges in the
X1 and X2 ports [Figure 30-41-110]. Figure 30-41-113

Figure 30-41-111
1
1
P-90236
P-90236
counterclockwise, until the other gauge registers an
Loosen the screw (Item 1) [Figure 30-41-111]. increase in system pressure. Mark the position of the
adjustment screw.
Start the loader using the remote start tool and run at an
idle.
WARNING
Stay clear of the loader wheels. They will turn
whenever the pump is not centered.
W-2276-1297

Hydraulic Controller Neutral Adjustment (Cont’d)
Figure 30-41-114
P-90236

clockwise, to a position halfway between the recorded

positions. The pressure gauges should read equal
pressures.
Figure 30-41-115
1
2
P-90236
While holding the adjustment screw (Item 1) in position,

tighten the locking screw (Item 2) [Figure 30-41-115] to
6,1 N•m (4.5 ft-lb) torque.
Shut the loader OFF.
Remove the pressure gauges from the X1 and X2 ports

on the pump. Install the plugs and tighten to 25 N•m (18
ft-lb) torque.
Connect the wire harness to the controller.
Perform a controller calibration procedure. (See

CALIBRATION on Page 60-160-1.)

DRIVE BELT Belt Replacement
Belt Adjustment Stop the engine and open the rear door.
The drive belt does not need adjustment. The belt has a Remove the battery. (See Removal And Installation on
spring loaded idler which constantly maintains the correct Page 60-20-1.)
belt tension.
Figure 30-50-1
P-90724A

Remove the drive belt shield bolt (Item 1) [Figure 30-50-
1].
Figure 30-50-2
P-90467
Do NOT loosen the drive belt shield mounting bolts (top

bolt shown) (Item 1). Slide the drive belt shield (Item 2)
toward the back of the loader to unseat the shield from
the top and bottom drive belt shield mounting bolts.
Remove the drive belt shield (Item 2) [Figure 30-50-2].

DRIVE BELT (CONT’D) Tighten the spring loaded idler adjustment bolt (Item 1)
[Figure 30-50-3] to 105 - 115 N•m (78 - 85 ft-lb) torque.
Belt Replacement (Cont’d)
Figure 30-50-5
Figure 30-50-3
Top Mounting Bolt
1
1
2
P-90468A
Bottom Mounting Bolt
P-90470
2
Loosen the spring loaded idler adjustment bolt (Item 1).

Insert a breaker bar (Item 2) [Figure 30-50-3] into the

slot provided in the stop arm as shown and push breaker
bar down to release tension on drive belt.
P-90469A
Tighten the adjustment bolt (Item 1) [Figure 30-50-3] to
hold the spring loaded idler off the drive belt.
Position the drive belt shield over the drive belt shield
Remove the drive belt from the hydrostatic pump pulley mounting bolts and slide the drive belt shield toward the
and flywheel pulley. Inspect the pulleys for wear. front of the loader to fully seat the shield onto the top and
bottom mounting bolts (Items 1 and 2) [Figure 30-50-5].
Install new drive belt.
Figure 30-50-6
Loosen the spring loaded idler adjustment bolt (Item 1)
[Figure 30-50-3] and allow the idler to contact the drive
belt.
Figure 30-50-4
1
P-90724A
Install the drive belt shield bolt (Item 1) [Figure 30-50-6].
Install the battery. (See Removal And Installation on

P-90471
Page 60-20-1.)
Move the breaker bar to adjust the stop arm until a gap of Close the rear door.
3,2 mm (0.125 in) (Item 1) [Figure 30-50-4] is achieved.

DRIVE BELT (CONT’D)
Stop Adjustment
See your SERVICE SCHEDULE for the correct interval to

check the idler stop adjustment. (See SERVICE
Stop the engine and open the rear door.
Figure 30-50-7

P-90470
Loosen the spring loaded idler adjustment bolt (Item 1)

and insert a breaker bar (Item 2) [Figure 30-50-7] into
the slot provided in the stop arm as shown.
Figure 30-50-8
P-90471
Move the breaker bar to adjust the stop arm until a gap of
3,2 mm (0.125 in) (Item 1) [Figure 30-50-8] is achieved.
Tighten the spring loaded idler adjustment bolt (Item 1)

[Figure 30-50-7] to 105 - 115 N•m (78 - 85 ft-lb) torque.

DRIVE BELT (CONT’D) Tensioner Pulley Disassembly And Assembly
Tensioner Pulley Removal And Installation Figure 30-50-11
Remove the engine air cleaner. (See Housing Removal

1
Remove the belt. (See Belt Replacement on Page 30-50-
1.)
Figure 30-50-9 2
1
1
3
P-90306
2
Loosen the two bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-50-11] but do
not remove.
Release the spring tension by allowing the adjustment

plate (Item 2) to slide past the tensioner pulley stop (Item
P-85520 3) [Figure 30-50-11].
Remove the two bolts (Item 1) and the adjustment plate

Loosen the spring loaded idler adjustment bolt (Item 1). (Item 2) [Figure 30-50-11].
Insert a 12,7 mm (1/2 in) breaker bar (Item 2) [Figure 30-
50-9] into the slot provided in the stop arm as shown and Figure 30-50-12
push breaker bar down to release tension on drive belt.
Tighten adjustment bolt (Item 1) [Figure 30-50-9] to hold

the spring loaded idler off the drive belt.
Figure 30-50-10
1 1
2
P-90304
Remove the pivot sleeve (Item 1) [Figure 30-50-12].
P-85741

10].
Remove the tensioner pulley (Item 2) [Figure 30-50-10].

DRIVE BELT (CONT'D)
Tensioner Pulley Disassembly And Assembly

(Cont’d)
Figure 30-50-13
P-90303
Disassembly the tensioner pulley as shown [Figure 30-

50-13].
Check the parts for wear and replace as needed.
NOTE: The wheel and arm assembly (Item 1) [Figure

30-50-13] are not serviceable and must be
replaced as a complete assembly.


DRAIN MANIFOLD Figure 30-60-2
Description
The drain manifold is an external assembly in the drain

circuit that returns the hydraulic oil to the reservoir.
2
Drain Manifold Removal And Installation
IMPORTANT 2
2
P100002
damage the system. Disconnect the wiring harness from the oil temperature
I-2003-0888 switch (Item 1) [Figure 30-60-2].
Raise the operator cab. (See Raising on Page 10-30-2.) Remove the three hoses (Item 2) [Figure 30-60-2].
Drain the hydraulic reservoir. (See Removing And Mark and cap all hoses and tubelines.

Figure 30-60-3
Figure 30-60-1
1
1
1
2
P100003
P100001
Remove the two hoses (Item 1) [Figure 30-60-3].

Remove the tubeline (Item 1) [Figure 30-60-1] from the
drain manifold. Remove the two bolts and nuts (Item 2) [Figure 30-60-3].
Mark and cap all hoses and tubelines. Mark and cap all hoses and tubelines.


DRIVE SYSTEM
BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-10-1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-10-1
Block Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-10-1
Block Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-10-2
TRACK UNDERCARRIAGE COMPONENTS (SOLID-MOUNTED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-1
Checking Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-2
Adjusting Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-3
Track Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-4
Idler (Front) Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-6
Track Tensioner Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-9
Idler (Rear) Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40-20-11
Roller Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40-20-11
Sprocket Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-12
Track Housing Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-13
TRACK UNDERCARRIAGE COMPONENTS (ROLLER SUSPENSION) . . . . . . . . . . . 40-21-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-21-1

Checking Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-21-2
Adjusting Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-21-3
Track Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-21-4
Idler (Front) Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-21-6
Track Tensioner Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-21-9
Idler (Rear) Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40-21-11
Roller Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40-21-11
Leaf Spring Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-21-12
Sprocket Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-21-13
Track Housing Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-21-14
TRACK MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-30-1

Track Damage Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-30-1


BRAKE
Description WARNING
Figure 40-10-1
W-2059-0598
1 Raise the operator cab. (See Raising on Page 10-30-2.)
Figure 40-10-2
P-85426
The brake is used to hold the machine in place. The

brake is operated by a switch (Item 1) [Figure 40-10-1]

located on the left panel.
Block Removal And Installation
DANGER
1 P-85428

10-2] located on the side of the transmission.
P-90328
AVOID DEATH
D-1009-0409

BRAKE (CONT'D) Block Disassembly And Assembly
Block Removal And Installation (Cont'd) Figure 40-10-5
Figure 40-10-3
1
2
P-85431
P-85427
Loosen the electrical brake solenoid nut (Item 1) and the
three fittings (Item 2)[Figure 40-10-5].
Disconnect and cap the tube line (Item 1) [Figure 40-10-
3] from the rear of the brake valve. Assembly: Tighten the solenoid nut to 5,4 - 6,8 N•m (48 -

60 in-lb) torque.
Figure 40-10-4
Figure 40-10-6
2 2
1
1 1
1
1 3
P-85430
P-85429
Mark the hydraulic hoses for proper installation.

Remove the solenoid nut (Item 1) and solenoid coil (Item
Remove and cap the four hydraulic hoses (Item 1) 2) [Figure 40-10-6].
[Figure 40-10-4].
Remove the solenoid valve (Item 3) [Figure 40-10-6]
Remove the two mount bolts (Item 2) [Figure 40-10-4]. from the block.
Remove the brake block from the loader.

BRAKE (CONT'D)
Block Disassembly And Assembly (Cont’d)
Figure 40-10-7
1
2 1
2 1
2 3
P-85432
Inspect the O-rings (Item 1) and back-up ring (Item 2)

[Figure 40-10-7] on the solenoid valve and replace as

needed.
Check the screens (Item 3) [Figure 40-10-7] and clean

with solvent.
Assembly: Tighten the solenoid valve to 21,7 - 27,1 N•m



TRACK UNDERCARRIAGE COMPONENTS (SOLID-
MOUNTED)
Description
Figure 40-20-1

MS2786S
The track carriage components consist of front and rear

idlers, rollers, the track, track tensioner, the drive
sprocket and the track housing [Figure 40-20-1].

TRACK UNDERCARRIAGE COMPONENTS (SOLID- Figure 40-20-3
MOUNTED) (CONT'D)
Checking Tension
Correct track tension is important for good performance

and to prevent the tracks from derailing or wearing
prematurely.
1
NOTE: The wear of track rollers vary with the working
conditions and different types of soil
conditions.
Park the loader on a level surface.
Figure 40-20-2
P-85869A
Figure 40-20-4

Track
13 - 16 mm Roller
(1/2 - 5/8 in)
1
P-85243B
Track
Raise one side of the loader and put jackstands at the B-18896C
front and rear of the loader frame so that the track is
about 76 mm (3 in) off the ground [Figure 40-20-2].
Lower the loader to the jackstands. Be sure the DO NOT put your fingers into the pinch points between
jackstands do not touch the tracks. the track and the roller. Use a 13 - 16 mm (1/2 - 5/8 in)
bolt, dowel or block to check the gap [Figure 40-20-3]
Measure the track sag at the middle track roller (Item 1) and [Figure 40-20-4].
[Figure 40-20-2]. The correct gap is 13 - 16 mm (1/2 - 5/
8 in).
WARNING
AVOID INJURY
Keep fingers and hands out of pinch points when
checking the track tension.
W-2142-0903

MOUNTED) (CONT'D)
Adjusting Tension
Figure 40-20-5
2 1
1
2 P-76047
Pressure must be released from the grease cylinder to

1 decrease track tension.
P-76325
Install the bleed tool (MEL-1560) on the bleed fitting (Item
1), adjust and tighten the collar (Item 2) [Figure 40-20-6]
to fit behind the edge of the access cover.
Loosen the access cover bolts and pivot the access
cover open [Figure 40-20-5].

Figure 40-20-7
NOTE: Fittings may be oriented differently than
shown. You MUST select the correct fitting for
the task required. The grease fitting (Item 1) is
used to add grease. The bleed fitting (Item 2)
[Figure 40-20-5] is used to remove grease.
1
Increase Track Tension
Add grease to the grease fitting (Item 1) [Figure 40-20-5]

until the track adjustment is correct [Figure 40-20-3] and
[Figure 40-20-4].
NOTE: Do not remove grease fitting unless pressure

is released using the bleed fitting. (See
P-76837
[Figure 40-20-6] on Page 40-20-3)
NOTE: If replacement is necessary, always replace

grease fitting (Item 1) [Figure 40-20-5] with Tighten the access cover bolt (Item 1) [Figure 40-20-7]
genuine Bobcat Parts. The fitting is a special to secure the tool.
fitting designed for high pressure.
Turn the tool 90° counterclockwise and let the grease
Decrease Track Tension flow into a container. Release pressure [Figure 40-20-7]
[Figure 40-20-4].
WARNING Tighten the bleed fitting. Pivot the access cover closed
and tighten the access cover bolts.
HIGH PRESSURE GREASE CAN
CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY Raise the loader. Remove the jackstands.
• Do not loosen grease fitting.
• Do not loosen bleed fitting more than 1 - 1/2 Repeat the procedure for the other track.
turns.
W-2781-0109 Dispose of grease in an environmentally safe manner.

MOUNTED) (CONT'D)
Track Removal And Installation IMPORTANT

Fluid such as engine oil, hydraulic fluid, coolants,
DANGER grease, etc. must be disposed of in an

environmentally safe manner. Some regulations
require that certain spills and leaks on the ground
must be cleaned in a specific manner. See local, state
and federal regulations for the correct disposal.
I-2067-0499
It may be necessary to adjust the MEL tool to loosen the

bleed fitting an additional turn after the pressure is
released from the first 1/4 turn. This will allow the grease
P-90328 to flow out faster when lifting the track in the next step.
You MUST pivot the access cover against the MEL tool
AVOID DEATH and tighten the mount bolt (Item 1) [Figure 40-20-8]
• Disconnecting or loosening any hydraulic before continuing.

D-1009-0409

1
1.)
P-85416
WARNING
With a chain hoist, lift on the track moving the front idler
Never work on a machine with the lift arms up unless assembly toward the rear of the track assembly until all
the lift arms are secured by an approved lift arm track tension has been released [Figure 40-20-8].
support device can allow the lift arms or attachment Tighten the bleed fitting using the MEL1560 tool (Item 1)
to fall and cause injury or death. [Figure 40-20-8].
W-2059-0598
Decrease the track tension. (See Adjusting Tension on

Page 40-20-3.)
NOTE: When the loader is on jack stands be sure the

bottom of the track clears the floor by at least
76 mm (3 in).

TRACK UNDERCARRIAGE COMPONENTS (SOLID- Put the track on the front idler wheel.
MOUNTED) (CONT'D)
Adjust the track to the proper tension. (See Adjusting
Track Removal And Installation (Cont’d) Tension on Page 40-20-3.)
Figure 40-20-9 NOTE: The grease tube must be completely retracted

against the coil spring assembly before
adding grease, to prevent air from being
trapped in the grease tube.
NOTE: Check the alignment of the grease tube (Item

1) [Figure 40-20-19] before adjusting the track.
P-85370
With pry bars, pry the track up and over the front idler
[Figure 40-20-9].

Completely remove the track from the front track
assembly.
Figure 40-20-10
P-85417
With a chain hoist lift the track clear of the drive sprocket
and remove the track from the loader [Figure 40-20-10].
To install the rubber track:
Completely retract the front idler and track tensioner.
Put the track over the rear drive sprocket lugs.
Put the track over the rear idler.
Slide the track under the rollers.

MOUNTED) (CONT'D)
Idler (Front) Removal And Installation
1 1
1.)
Remove the track. (See Track Removal And Installation

on Page 40-20-4.)
Figure 40-20-11
P-73967
Installation: Two short 10 mm (3/8 in) bolts (Item 1)

[Figure 40-20-13] may be inserted to keep the front idler
wheel in place until the track is installed.
1 NOTE: The bolts must be removed before completing

track installation. It will not be possible to

remove the bolts after track tension has been
set.
P-76843
Slide the front idler wheel out of the track housing

[Figure 40-20-11].
NOTE: The notch on the front idler wheel frame (Item

1) [Figure 40-20-11] is toward the top of the
track housing for installation.
Figure 40-20-12
P-76051
Installation: Make sure the pins (Item 1) [Figure 40-20-

12] on the front idler wheel frame engage the holes in the
track tensioner (Item 2) [Figure 40-20-14].

MOUNTED) (CONT'D)
Idler (Front) Removal And Installation (Cont’d)
Figure 40-20-14
P-76325
Installation: Track tensioner must be seated properly

1 against the end of the track housing [Figure 40-20-16].
P-85418
Slide the track tensioner (Item 1) [Figure 40-20-14] out

of the track housing.

Installation: Track tensioner must be oriented as shown
in [Figure 40-20-14] before sliding it into the track
housing.
Figure 40-20-15
1 2
P-76850
Installation: Track tensioner (Item 1) must slide into the

guide tube (Item 2) [Figure 40-20-15].

MOUNTED) (CONT'D)
Idler (Front) Removal And Installation (Cont'd) CORRECT
Figure 40-20-17
WRONG
2 2
1
1
P-85014A
Installation: When installing the track tensioner into the

loader verify the grease tube (Item 1) is properly seated
P-85371 against the coil spring assembly (Item 2) [Figure 40-20-
19].
Figure 40-20-18

WRONG
P-85014
Installation: [Figure 40-20-17] and [Figure 40-20-18]

shows the grease tube (Item 1) misaligned and not
seated properly against the coil spring assembly (Item 2).
[Figure 40-20-19] shows the grease tube (Item 1) and
the coil spring assembly (Item 2) properly assembled.

MOUNTED) (CONT'D)
Track Tensioner Disassembly And Assembly
WARNING 4
3
2
P-85018
P-62574
Remove the seal (Item 1), back-up ring (Item 2), O-ring
(Item 3), and wear ring (Item 4) [Figure 40-20-21] from
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH the grease tube.
• Spring loaded components under pressure can
cause serious injury or death. Installation: Apply oil to new O-ring, back-up ring, seal,
• Do not disassemble the coil spring assembly. and wear ring before installation.

W-2617-1004
Installation: Apply grease to area between seal and O-

Figure 40-20-20 ring before installing.
NOTE: The grease tube must be completely retracted

onto the chrome shaft before replacing the
2 grease fitting and adding grease, to prevent
air from being trapped in the grease tube.
P-85036
Remove the grease fitting (Item 1). Carefully apply low

pressure air to the grease fitting opening until the grease
tube (Item 2) slowly separates from the chrome shaft
(Item 3) [Figure 40-20-20].

MOUNTED) (CONT'D)
Track Tensioner Disassembly And Assembly (Cont’d) 8
WARNING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
P-85019
Inspect and replace any damaged parts.

P-62574
The items listed below refer to [Figure 40-20-23].
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH 1. Coil Spring Assembly

• Spring loaded components under pressure can 2. O-ring
cause serious injury or death. 3. Chrome Shaft
• Do not disassemble the coil spring assembly. 4. Seal

W-2617-1004 5. Back-up Ring
6. O-ring
Figure 40-20-22 7. Wear Ring
8. Grease Tube
1
NOTE: The O-ring (Item 2) is used to secure the
chrome shaft (Item 3) to the coil spring
assembly (Item 1) [Figure 40-20-23] during the
installation of the track tensioner into the
track housing.
P-85372
DO NOT DISASSEMBLE OR REPAIR THE COIL

SPRING ASSEMBLY. THE COMPRESSION FORCE OF
THE SPRING EXCEEDS 4536 kg (10,000 lb).
NOTE: The coil spring assembly (Item 1) [Figure 40-

20-22] is only sold as a complete assembly
from Bobcat Parts.

TRACK UNDERCARRIAGE COMPONENTS (SOLID- Roller Removal And Installation
MOUNTED) (CONT'D)
Remove the track from the loader. (See Track Removal
Idler (Rear) Removal And Installation And Installation on Page 40-20-4.)
Remove the track. (See Track Removal And Installation Figure 40-20-25
on Page 40-20-4.)
Figure 40-20-24
1
1
1
1
2
2 P-85421
P-76847 Remove the bolts (Item 1) [Figure 40-20-25] from the

roller shaft. (Both ends of the roller shaft.)
Remove the two mount bolts and washers (Item 1) Installation: Tighten the bolts or nuts to 410 - 450 N•m
[Figure 40-20-24]. (300 - 330 ft-lb) torque.
Remove the rear idler from the loader. Remove the roller from the track assembly.
Installation: Align the square sides of the idler shaft with

the notches in the track housing (Item 2) [Figure 40-20-
24].
Align the holes in the housing with the holes in the shaft.
Install the bolts and washers and tighten to 407 - 447


MOUNTED) (CONT'D)
Sprocket Removal And Installation
Figure 40-20-26
1
2
P-85407
Remove the six nuts (Item 1) [Figure 40-20-26] and

remove the drive sprocket from the motor.

NOTE: Install three (1/2” - 13UNC x 3 in) long bolts in
the sprocket holes (Item 2) [Figure 40-20-26]
to aid in the removal of the sprocket.
Installation: Tighten the nuts to 280 - 300 N•m (207 -

222 ft-lb) torque.

MOUNTED) (CONT'D)
Track Housing Removal And Installation
NOTE: Jackstands used when removing the track

must not interfere with track housing removal. 1

Remove the hydrostatic motor from the track housing.

(See Removal And Installation on Page 30-20-2.)
Support the track housing.

P-76864
Figure 40-20-27
At the rear of the loader remove the two mount bolts

1 (Item 1) [Figure 40-20-28].
Installation: Tighten the mount bolts to 410 - 450 N•m


Figure 40-20-29
P-85409

from the bottom track housing mount plate. (At the front
and rear of the loader.)

P-85408
At the front of the loader remove the two mount bolts

(Item 1) [Figure 40-20-29].
Remove the track housing from the loader.



TRACK UNDERCARRIAGE COMPONENTS (ROLLER
SUSPENSION)
Description
Figure 40-21-1

P-85368
The track carriage components consist of front and rear

idlers, rollers, leaf springs, the track, track tensioner, the
drive sprocket and the track housing [Figure 40-21-1].

TRACK UNDERCARRIAGE COMPONENTS (ROLLER Figure 40-21-3
SUSPENSION) (CONT'D)
Checking Tension
Correct track tension is important for good performance

and to prevent the tracks from derailing or wearing
prematurely.
NOTE: The wear of track rollers vary with the working

conditions and different types of soil
conditions.
Park the loader on a level surface.
Figure 40-21-2
P-85379A
Figure 40-21-4

Track
13 mm Roller
(1/2 in)
1
P100726
Track
Raise one side of the loader and put jackstands at the B-18896C
front and rear of the loader frame so that the track is
about 76 mm (3 in) off the ground [Figure 40-21-2].
Lower the loader to the jackstands. Be sure the DO NOT put your fingers into the pinch points between
jackstands do not touch the tracks. the track and the roller. Use a 13 mm (1/2 in) bolt, dowel
or block to check the gap [Figure 40-21-3] and [Figure
Measure the track sag at either middle track roller (Item 40-21-4].
1) [Figure 40-21-2]. The correct gap is 13 mm (1/2 in).
WARNING
AVOID INJURY
Keep fingers and hands out of pinch points when
checking the track tension.
W-2142-0903

Adjusting Tension
Figure 40-21-5
2 1
1
2 P-76047
Pressure must be released from the grease cylinder to

1 decrease track tension.
P-76325
Install the bleed tool (MEL-1560) on the bleed fitting (Item
1), adjust and tighten the collar (Item 2) [Figure 40-21-6]
to fit behind the edge of the access cover.
Loosen the access cover bolts and pivot the access
cover open [Figure 40-21-5].

Figure 40-21-7
NOTE: Fittings may be oriented differently than
shown. You MUST select the correct fitting for
the task required. The grease fitting (Item 1) is
used to add grease. The bleed fitting (Item 2)
[Figure 40-21-5] is used to remove grease.
1
Increase Track Tension
Add grease to the grease fitting (Item 1) [Figure 40-21-5]

[Figure 40-21-4].
NOTE: Do not remove grease fitting unless pressure

is released using the bleed fitting. (See
P-76837
[Figure 40-21-6] on Page 40-21-3)
NOTE: If replacement is necessary, always replace

grease fitting (Item 1) [Figure 40-21-5] with Tighten the access cover bolt (Item 1) [Figure 40-21-7]
genuine Bobcat Parts. The fitting is a special to secure the tool.
fitting designed for high pressure.
Turn the tool 90° counterclockwise and let the grease
Decrease Track Tension flow into a container. Release pressure [Figure 40-21-7]
[Figure 40-21-4].
WARNING Tighten the bleed fitting. Pivot the access cover closed
and tighten the access cover bolts.
HIGH PRESSURE GREASE CAN
CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY Raise the loader. Remove the jackstands.
• Do not loosen grease fitting.
• Do not loosen bleed fitting more than 1 - 1/2 Repeat the procedure for the other track.
turns.
W-2781-0109 Dispose of grease in an environmentally safe manner.

Track Removal And Installation IMPORTANT

Fluid such as engine oil, hydraulic fluid, coolants,
DANGER grease, etc. must be disposed of in an

environmentally safe manner. Some regulations
require that certain spills and leaks on the ground
must be cleaned in a specific manner. See local, state
and federal regulations for the correct disposal.
I-2067-0499
It may be necessary to adjust the MEL tool to loosen the

bleed fitting an additional turn after the pressure is
released from the first 1/4 turn. This will allow the grease
P-90328 to flow out faster when lifting the track in the next step.
You MUST pivot the access cover against the MEL tool
AVOID DEATH and tighten the mount bolt (Item 1) [Figure 40-21-7]
• Disconnecting or loosening any hydraulic before continuing.

D-1009-0409

1.)
WARNING P-85380

the lift arms are secured by an approved lift arm With a chain hoist, lift on the track moving the front idler
support device. Failure to use an approved lift arm assembly toward the rear of the track housing assembly
support device can allow the lift arms or attachment until all track tension has been released [Figure 40-21-
to fall and cause injury or death. 8].
W-2059-0598
Tighten the bleed fitting using the MEL1560 tool (Item 1)
Decrease the track tension. (See Adjusting Tension on [Figure 40-21-8].
Page 40-21-3.)
NOTE: When the loader is on jack stands be sure the

bottom of the track clears the floor by at least
76 mm (3 in).

Track Removal And Installation (Cont’d)
Figure 40-21-9
P-85369
With a chain hoist lift the track clear of the drive sprocket
and remove the track from the loader [Figure 40-21-10].
P-85370
Installation: Completely retract the front idler / track
tensioner.
With pry bars, pry the track up and over the front idler
[Figure 40-21-9].

Put the track on the front idler wheel.
Completely remove the track from the front track Put the track over the rear drive sprocket lugs.
assembly.
Slide the track under the rollers.
Put the track over the rear idler.
NOTE: Check the alignment of the grease tube (Item

1) [Figure 40-21-19] before adjusting the track.
Adjust the track to the proper tension. (See Adjusting

Tension on Page 40-21-3.)

Idler (Front) Removal And Installation
1 1
Remove the track. (See Track Removal And Installation
on Page 40-21-4.)
Figure 40-21-11
P-73967
Installation: Two short 10 mm (3/8 in) bolts (Item 1)

1 [Figure 40-21-13] may be inserted to keep the front idler
wheel in place until the track is installed.
NOTE: The bolts must be removed before completing

P-76843 track installation. It will not be possible to

remove the bolts after track tension has been
set.
Slide the front idler wheel out of the track housing
[Figure 40-21-11].
NOTE: The notch on the front idler wheel frame (Item

1) [Figure 40-21-11] is toward the top of the
track housing for installation.
Figure 40-21-12
P-76051
Installation: Make sure the pins (Item 1) [Figure 40-21-

12] on the front idler wheel frame engage the holes in the
track tensioner.

Idler (Front) Removal And Installation (Cont’d)
Figure 40-21-14
P-76325
Installation: Track tensioner must be seated properly

against the end of the track housing [Figure 40-21-16].

P-76844
Slide the track tensioner (Item 1) [Figure 40-21-14] out

of the track housing.
Installation: Track tensioner must be oriented as shown

in [Figure 40-21-14] before sliding it into the track
housing.
Figure 40-21-15
1 2
P-76850
Installation: Track tensioner (Item 1) must slide into the

guide tube (Item 2) [Figure 40-21-15].

Idler (Front) Removal And Installation (Cont'd) CORRECT
Figure 40-21-17
WRONG
2 2
1
1
P-85014A
Installation: When installing the track tensioner into the

loader verify the grease tube (Item 1) is properly seated
P-85371 against the coil spring assembly (Item 2) [Figure 40-21-
19].
Figure 40-21-18

WRONG
P-85014
Installation: [Figure 40-21-17] and [Figure 40-21-18]

shows the grease tube (Item 1) misaligned and not
seated properly against the coil spring assembly (Item 2).
[Figure 40-21-19] shows the grease tube (Item 1) and
the coil spring assembly (Item 2) properly assembled.

Track Tensioner Disassembly And Assembly
WARNING 4
3
2
P-85018
P-62574
Remove the seal (Item 1), back-up ring (Item 2), O-ring
(Item 3), and wear ring (Item 4) [Figure 40-21-21] from
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH the grease tube.
• Spring loaded components under pressure can
cause serious injury or death. Installation: Apply oil to new O-ring, back-up ring, seal,
• Do not disassemble the coil spring assembly. and wear ring before installation.

W-2617-1004
Installation: Apply grease to area between seal and O-

Figure 40-21-20 ring before installing.
NOTE: The grease tube must be completely retracted

onto the chrome shaft before replacing the
2 grease fitting and adding grease, to prevent
air from being trapped in the grease tube.
P-85036
Remove the grease fitting (Item 1). Carefully apply low

pressure air to the grease fitting opening until the grease
tube (Item 2) slowly separates from the chrome shaft
(Item 3) [Figure 40-21-20].

Track Tensioner Disassembly And Assembly (Cont’d) 8
WARNING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
P-85019

P-62574
The items listed below refer to [Figure 40-21-23].
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH 1. Coil Spring Assembly

• Spring loaded components under pressure can 2. O-ring
cause serious injury or death. 3. Chrome Shaft
• Do not disassemble the coil spring assembly. 4. Seal

W-2617-1004 5. Back-up Ring
6. O-ring
Figure 40-21-22 7. Wear Ring
8. Grease Tube
1
NOTE: The O-ring (Item 2) is used to secure the
chrome shaft (Item 3) to the coil spring
assembly (Item 1) [Figure 40-21-23] during the
installation of the track tensioner into the
track housing.
P-85372
DO NOT DISASSEMBLE OR REPAIR THE COIL

SPRING ASSEMBLY. THE COMPRESSION FORCE OF
THE SPRING EXCEEDS 4536 kg (10,000 lb).
NOTE: The coil spring assembly (Item 1) [Figure 40-

21-22] is only sold as a complete assembly
from Bobcat Parts.

TRACK UNDERCARRIAGE COMPONENTS (ROLLER Roller Removal And Installation
Idler (Rear) Removal And Installation And Installation on Page 40-21-4.)
Remove the track. (See Track Removal And Installation Figure 40-21-25
on Page 40-21-4.)
Figure 40-21-24
1
1
2
2 P-85374
P-76847 Remove the bolt and washer (Item 1) [Figure 40-21-25]

from the roller shaft. (Both ends of the roller shaft.)
Remove the two mount bolts and washers (Item 1) Remove the roller from the track assembly.
[Figure 40-21-24].
Installation: Support the roller from underneath with a
Remove the rear idler from the loader. hydraulic floor jack and tighten the bolts to 711,5 N•m
(525 ft-lb) torque.
Installation: Align the square sides of the idler shaft with
the notches in the track housing (Item 2) [Figure 40-21-
24].
Align the holes in the housing with the holes in the shaft.
Install the bolts and washers and tighten to 711,5 N•m

(525 ft-lb) torque.

TRACK UNDERCARRIAGE COMPONENTS (ROLLER Installation: Tighten the leaf spring bolts (Item 2)
SUSPENSION) (CONT'D) [Figure 40-21-26] and (Item 1) [Figure 40-21-27] to
406,7 N•m (300 ft-lb) torque.
Leaf Spring Removal And Installation
Figure 40-21-28
Figure 40-21-26
1
3
P-76930
Remove the leaf spring assembly [Figure 40-21-28] from

P-85375 the track housing.

NOTE: The leaf spring assembly [Figure 40-21-28] is
Remove the roller bolt and washer (Item 1) [Figure 40- only sold as a complete left-hand or right
21-26] from the roller shaft. (Both ends of the roller shaft.) hand assembly from Bobcat Parts.
Remove the roller from the track housing. Figure 40-21-29
Installation: Support the roller from underneath with a

hydraulic floor jack and tighten the bolts to 711,5 N•m
(525 ft-lb) torque.
Remove the leaf spring bolts (Item 2) [Figure 40-21-26]

from the leaf spring mounts. (Both sides of the track
housing.)
1
Figure 40-21-27
P-76027
1 The upper and lower leaf spring mounts are wider on one
side to prevent the leafs from rubbing on the track
housing during operation.
Installation: The leaf springs are installed correctly when

P-85377 there is a slight gap (Item 1) [Figure 40-21-29] between
the leafs and the track housing. (Cutaway view shown for
clarity.) The gap is easily seen at the roller end of the leaf
Access the front, inside leaf spring assembly bolts (Item spring (Item 3) [Figure 40-21-26].
1) [Figure 40-21-27] from underneath the loader through
an access hole in the track housing.

Sprocket Removal And Installation
Figure 40-21-30
1
2
P-85407
Remove the six nuts (Item 1) [Figure 40-21-30] and

remove the drive sprocket from the motor.

NOTE: Install three (1/2” - 13UNC x 3 in) long bolts in
the sprocket holes (Item 2) [Figure 40-21-30]
to aid in the removal of the sprocket.
Installation: Tighten the nuts to 280 - 300 N•m (207 -

222 ft-lb) torque.

Track Housing Removal And Installation
NOTE: Jackstands used when removing the track

must not interfere with track housing removal. 1

Remove the hydrostatic motor from the track housing.

Support the track housing.

P-76864
Figure 40-21-31
At the rear of the loader remove the two mount bolts

(Item 1) [Figure 40-21-32].
1

Figure 40-21-33
P-85422

from the bottom track housing mount plate. (At the front
and rear of the loader.)

P-85408
At the front of the loader remove the two mount bolts

(Item 1) [Figure 40-21-33].
Remove the track housing from the loader.
Installation: Tighten the mount bolts to torque.

TRACK MAINTENANCE Driving over sharp objects should be avoided. If this
is impossible, do not make turns while driving over
Track Damage Identification sharp objects.
The following pages show photos and illustrations of Cutting Of Steel Cords
track damage and the probable cause of the damage. It
is intended to be used for identifying the reason for track Figure 40-30-2
damage and how to avoid future track damage.
Track and Sprocket Rotation:
Figure 40-30-1
Move Sprockets to opposite sides of the loader
P-3864
Remove track

Reinstall 180° Figure 40-30-3
P-85440
NOTE: All applications and conditions will cause

wear on the track inbeds and sprocket teeth.
Rotating the tracks and sprockets will extend Steel Cords
their life. The track can be removed and PI-13034
reinstalled 180 degrees. The sprocket can be
removed and installed on the opposite side of
the loader [Figure 40-30-1]. Damage:
Prevention: Embedded steel cords are cut off [Figure 40-30-2]

and [Figure 40-30-3].
The following preventions should be taken to minimize
the risk of this damage:
Recommended track tension should be periodically

checked. (See DRIVE SYSTEM TOC on Page 40-
01.)
Avoiding quick turns on bumpy and rocky fields.
Drive carefully to avoid having stones and other

articles clog the rubber tracks.

TRACK MAINTENANCE (CONT'D) Causes of the damage:
Track Damage Identification (Cont'd) When the track rollers, sprockets and idler gears roll over
the embedded metals, abrasion of embedded metals is
Abrasion Of Embedded Metals inevitable. The following cases sometimes accelerate
their abrasion:
Figure 40-30-4
Rubber tracks are driven with an extraordinary heavy
load on them.
Rubber tracks are used on sandy fields.
Prevention:
As long as rubber tracks are used under normal

operating conditions, abnormal abrasion is unlikely to
occur. The level of abrasion should be carefully checked
when the machines are used for dozing which generate a
heavy load for rubber tracks, and when they are operated
under a sandy field condition for a long time.
P-3865 Figure 40-30-6

Damage:
Embedded metals will gradually wear away by friction Minimum Wear

[Figure 40-30-4].
Figure 40-30-5
Excessive Wear
PI-13037A
Track Rotation:
Certain applications or conditions can cause wear on the

track inbeds and sprocket teeth. Rotating the tracks 180
degrees will help extend track life [Figure 40-30-6]. (See
PI-13037 Track Damage Identification on Page 40-30-1.)
Remove the track and rotate it 180 degrees on the same

Replacement: side of the loader. (See DRIVE SYSTEM TOC on Page
40-01.)
When track embedded metals are worn
approximately 50% or more, replace the track.
Example of excessive wear is shown in [Figure 40-
30-4] and [Figure 40-30-5].

TRACK MAINTENANCE (CONT'D) Figure 40-30-8
Track Damage Identification (Cont'd)
Separation Of Embedded Metals
Figure 40-30-7
Idler
Rubber
track
PI-13039
Causes of the damage:
Embedded metals are adhered between the steel cords

P-4379 and the rubber body. The following cases generate
external forces greater than the adhesion strength,
causing separation of the embedded metals:

Damage:
When the idler continually rides on the projections of
Extraordinary outer forces applied to embedded embedded metals, the embedded metals will
metals cause their separation from the rubber track's eventually peel off [Figure 40-30-8].
body [Figure 40-30-7].
Figure 40-30-9
Replacement:
Even a partial separation of embedded metals

requires replacement of the track.
Guide
PI-13040
When a rubber track is detracked, it becomes stuck

between the guide or the undercarriage frame,
causing the separation of embedded metals [Figure
40-30-9].

Figure 40-30-10
Minimum
wear
Excessive
wear
PI-13041A
Sprocket Rotation:
PI-13041
Certain applications or conditions can cause wear on the
sprockets. Rotating the sprockets to the opposite side of
Excessively worn sprockets, example shown [Figure the loader will help extend sprocket life [Figure 40-30-
40-30-10] will pull embedded metals out of the track. 11]. (See Track Damage Identification on Page 40-30-1.)

Prevention: Remove the sprocket. (See DRIVE SYSTEM TOC on
Page 40-01.)
Similar to the prevention against the cutting of the steel
cords:
Recommended track tension should be periodically

checked. (See DRIVE SYSTEM TOC on Page 40-
01.)
Quick turns on bumpy and rocky fields should be

avoided.

Track Damage Identification (Cont'd) Embedded metal
Separation Of Embedded Metals Due To Corrosion
Figure 40-30-12
Good
Separation of
bonded rubber
cover
PI-13043
Embedded metals are bonded to the rubber body. The

P-4378 following operating conditions cause embedded metals
to corrode, causing deterioration of the bonding, and
finally resulting in separation of the embedded metals

Damage: from the rubber body [Figure 40-30-13].
Due to corrosion of embedded metals, the adhesion Excessively salty fields, like the sea shore
to the rubber body deteriorates, resulting in complete
separation [Figure 40-30-12]. Strong acidic or alkali soil conditions
Replacement: Compost spread grounds
Even a partial separation of embedded metals On tracks that are out of adjustment, the track rollers,
requires a rubber track replacement. idlers and sprockets will gradually wear the rubber
surface at track roller side, causing exposure of the
embedded metals. Consequently the embedded metals
will corrode resulting in their separation from the rubber
body.
Prevention:
If rubber tracks are used under such field conditions as

described under (Causes of the damage), they should be
washed with plenty of water. After being completely
dried, they should be stored correctly.
When the bonded rubber cover is separated from the

embedded metal projections and the metals in the rubber
body become loose, it is time to consider replacement of
the rubber track.

Cuts On The Lug Side Rubber Cuts
Figure 40-30-14
PI-13045
When rubber tracks drive over projections or sharp

P-4377 stones in the fields, the concentrated forces applied
cause cuts on the lug side rubber surface. In case of
making turns on projections, the lug side rubber surface

Damage: will have an even higher chance to be cut. If the cuts run
through the embedded steel cords, it might result in the
Cuts on the lug side rubber often occurs as one of the steel cords' breakage due to their corrosion. It is highly
most typical failure modes [Figure 40-30-14]. recommended to repair the cuts with cold vulcanization
rubber as soon as they are observed [Figure 40-30-15].
Replacement:
Prevention:
When a cut on the lug side rubber reaches the
embedded steel cords, it should be immediately Machine operators are requested to drive with great
repaired with cold vulcanization rubber. attention to the ground's surface especially in terrains of
the following type:
Construction sites
Demolition sites
Paths covered with rocks and wood
Concrete ridges
Stumpy fields
When operating on terrains as mentioned above, high

speed, quick turns and overloading should be avoided.

Track Damage Identification (Cont'd) Because of wound stress applied to rubber tracks around
the undercarriage parts during operation, the fatigue
Cracks On The Lug Side Rubber Due To Fatigue especially causes cracks on the lug side rubber surface.
Once the cracks occur, they gradually deteriorate with
Figure 40-30-16 even small external cracks. Also when operating near
seashores or under cold temperatures, rubber tracks are
more likely to suffer from ozone cracks.
Prevention:
Rubber tracks are designed with special rubber

compounds to prevent cracks due to fatigue. However,
external injuries on the lug side rubber sometimes cause
more chance of cracking. Machine operators should
observe soil conditions when driving, so as not to cause
external injuries to the lug side rubber. In order to
minimize the occurrence of ozone cracks, attention
should be paid to the following instructions for
maintenance:
P-4382
Avoid exposing stored tracks to direct sun light.

Figure 40-30-17 Avoid exposing stored tracks to direct rain and snow
fall.
Store tracks in well ventilated warehouses.
Use the tracks at least once a month.
P-4380
Damage:
Small cracks around the root of the lug as a result from

operation fatigue [Figure 40-30-16] and [Figure 40-30-
17].
Replacement:
When the cracks reach so deep that they expose the

steel cords, track replacement is required.

Track Damage Identification (Cont'd) Lug abrasion is more or less inevitable. Even if lug
abrasion is proceeding, the rubber track can be used.
Lug Abrasion However, as the traction performance deteriorates
accordingly, it is highly recommended to replace the
Figure 40-30-18 abraded tracks with new ones when the lug height
becomes less than 5 mm (0.2 in).
Prevention:
In order to prevent the rubber track from abnormal or

premature abrasion, the following operating conditions
should be avoided:
Making quick and repeated turns on concrete and

asphalt roads
Driving up and down hilly paths with slippage
Making frequent turns on paths covered with rocks

P-4381 and wood

Figure 40-30-19
Lug abrasion
PI-13049
Damage:
As its service time proceeds, the lug side inevitably

undergoes abrasion [Figure 40-30-18] and [Figure
40-30-19].
Replacement:
No replacement is required.

Cracks And Cuts On The Lug Side Rubber

Crack at the edge of Cut on lug side
Figure 40-30-20 embedded metal rubber
PI-13051
When rubber tracks drive over sharp projections,

CD-13050 intensive stress is applied to the lug side rubber surface,
especially at the edges of embedded metals, causing
cracks and cuts in the area around the embedded metals

Damage: [Figure 40-30-21].
Sometimes cracks and cuts on the lug side rubber at Prevention:

the edges of the embedded metals can be observed
[Figure 40-30-20]. To avoid extensive stress applied to the lug root where
metals are embedded, machine operators are requested
Replacement: to avoid driving over stumps and ridges.
Basically, no replacement is required unless the cuts on

the lug side rubber are discovered all around the edges
of the embedded metals, as this will result in a complete
cut off.

Abrasion Of The Track Roller Side

Track roller
Figure 40-30-22
Abrasion
PI-13053
The abrasion of the track roller side rubber surface

P-4383 occurs because of sand and gravel being clogged
between the rubber and the outside surface of the track
rollers. The stress pushes the sand and gravel against

Damage: the side of the rubber track to cause the abrasion [Figure
40-30-23].
The rubber surface on which track rollers run is
gradually abraded. It will end in the exposure of the The level of abrasion is highly dependent on terrain
embedded metals [Figure 40-30-22]. conditions. A higher level of abrasion will occur when the
rubber tracks are operated in fields covered with many
Replacement: stones and gravel. Small stones hardened with mud,
stuck to the track rollers increase the abrasion level. After
It is recommended to replace the rubber track when an extended period of abrasion, it will be more likely for
more than half of the embedded metals are exposed embedded metals to catch moisture through the
completely exposed. inside steel cords, which can cause breakage of steel
cords and separation of the metals from the rubber body.
Prevention:
After operation in wet fields containing many small

stones, wash off the mud that is stuck to the track rollers
completely. When operating on gravel paths and stony
grounds, machines should be driven slowly and the
turning radius should be big enough to prevent stones
and gravel from getting stuck to the track roller side
rubber.

Cuts On The Edges Of Track Roller Side
Figure 40-30-24
PI-13056
This damage is caused by objects on the field or by

P-4384 interference with the machine frame.
In case of damage by objects on the operating ground:

Figure 40-30-25
The edges of rubber track are often deformed largely
due to a bumpy ground surface, stones and other
objects, which cause extensive stress on the edges
resulting in the damage. Especially, when a machine
drives over concrete ridges, this type of damage
Edge Edge easily occurs [Figure 40-30-26].
PI-13055
Damage:
Both edges of a rubber track have no special

reinforcements. It sometimes occurs during operation
that they are cut or torn off [Figure 40-30-24] and
[Figure 40-30-25].
Replacement:
In such case, the rubber track does not have to be

replaced.

TRACK MAINTENANCE (CONT'D)
Cuts On The Edges Of Track Roller Side (Cont’d)
Figure 40-30-27
Cut
Tear
PI-13057

In case of damage by interference with the machine
frame
If a machine continues operating with rubber tracks

being detracked, the rubber tracks may get caught up
in the machine frame or undercarriage parts resulting
in damage. Furthermore, when a machine travels
along side slopes, the rubber tracks are deformed so
much that they come into contact with the machine
frame and undercarriage parts, which causes cutting,
gouging and rubbing of rubber tracks in the end
[Figure 40-30-27].
Prevention:
When traveling, a machine operator should be careful not

to drive over any projections on the ground. He should
also prevent rubber tracks from coming into contact with
concrete walls, ditches and ridges. If rubber tracks are
detracked, the machine should be stopped immediately
for retracting.

MAINFRAME
SEAT BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-10-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-10-1
Compression Spring Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-10-3
OPERATOR CAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-20-1

Gas Spring Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-20-1
Gas Spring Bracket Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-20-2
OPERATOR SEAT (SUSPENSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-30-1

Slide Rail Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-30-1
Seat Belt Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-30-2
Lower Cushion Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-30-2
Lower Cushion Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-30-3
Back Cushion Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-30-3
Shock Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-30-4

3-Point Seat Belt Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-30-4
BOB-TACH (HAND LEVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-40-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-40-1
Lever And Wedge Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-40-3
Pivot Pin Bushing And Seal Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-40-5
BOB-TACH (POWER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-41-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-41-1
Lever And Wedge Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-41-4
Pivot Pin Bushing And Seal Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-41-5
LIFT ARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-50-1

Stabilizer Bar Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-50-1
Link Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-50-2
REAR GRILLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-60-1

REAR DOOR (TAILGATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-70-1

Striker Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-70-2
Striker Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-70-2
Striker (Adjusting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-70-2
Latch Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-70-3

FUEL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-80-1
Fuel Level Sender Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-80-3
Fuel Fill Screen Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-80-3
CONTROL PEDALS AND LINKAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-90-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-90-1
Pedal Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-90-1
Linkage Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-90-2
Pedal (Adjusting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-90-3
Floor Pan Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-90-4
CONTROL PEDALS AND LINKAGES (ACS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-91-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-91-1
Pedal Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-91-1
Linkage Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-91-2
Pedal (Adjusting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-91-2
Floor Pan Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-91-3
CONTROL PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-100-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-100-1

Linkage Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-100-5
Pintle Arm Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-100-9
Linkage Neutral (Adjusting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-100-10
Linkage Travel (Adjusting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-100-14
Shock Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-100-18
CONTROL PANEL (SJC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-101-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-101-1
CONTROL HANDLE / LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-110-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-110-1
Lever Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-110-1
Boot Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-110-2
CONTROL HANDLE / LEVER (ACS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-111-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-111-1
Handle Sensor Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-111-1
Handle Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-111-4
Handle Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-111-5
Lever Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-111-5
Boot Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-111-6
CONTROL HANDLE / LEVER (SJC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-112-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-112-1
Joystick Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-112-1
Joystick Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-112-2

ACCESS PANEL (INSIDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-120-1
Removal And Installation (Left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-120-1
Removal And Installation (Right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-120-1
ACCESS PANEL (INSIDE) (SJC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-121-1

Removal And Installation (Left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-121-1
Removal And Installation (Right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-121-1
WINDOW (REAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-130-1

WINDOW (TOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-131-1

WINDOW (SIDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-132-1

CAB DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-140-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-140-1

Aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-140-3
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-140-4
Checking Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-140-4
ARMREST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-150-1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-150-1
LEFT SIDE LOWER PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-160-1

RIGHT SIDE LOWER PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-170-1

HEADLINER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-180-1


SEAT BAR Figure 50-10-2
Description
The seat bar is the secondary restraint system that has a

sensor that automatically stops the loader functions until
the seat bar is lowered.
The seat bar is located in the operator cab.

1
Figure 50-10-1
P-85652
Remove the seat bar mounting nuts (Item 1) [Figure 50-

1 10-2] (both sides).
Installation: Tighten the nuts to 34 - 38 N•m (25 - 28 ft-

lb) torque.

2 Lower the operator cab. (See Lowering on Page 10-30-
3.)
P-85653 P-85654 Figure 50-10-3
Raise the seat bar (Item 1) [Figure 50-10-1].
Disconnect the seat bar sensor (Item 2) [Figure 50-10-1]

from the cab harness.
1
Lower the seat bar.
P-90021
Remove the seat bar (Item 1) [Figure 50-10-3] from the

operator cab.
Reverse the above procedure to install the seat bar into

the operator cab.

SEAT BAR (CONT’D) Installation: Tighten the mounting bolt (Item 2) [Figure
50-10-4] and [Figure 50-10-5] to 34 - 38 N•m (25 - 28 ft-
Disassembly And Assembly lb) torque.
4 6
5 5
7 4 6
3 3
2 9 8 2 7
10
1
1
P-90022 P-90023

4 4
5 5
9 8
3 6
3 6 2
2 10 7
1
7
1
N-19219 N-19220
Assemble the parts as shown for the left side of the seat Assemble the parts as shown for the right side of the seat
bar pivot assembly [Figure 50-10-4] and [Figure 50-10- bar pivot assembly [Figure 50-10-6] and [Figure 50-10-
5]. 7].
Seat Bar Mount (Item 1) Seat Bar Mount (Item 1)

Mounting Bolt (Item 2) Mounting Nut (Item 2)
Keyed Plastic Bushing (Item 3) Pivot Bushing (Item 3)
Seat Bar (Item 4) Spacer Bushing (Item 4)
Magnetic Bushing Assembly (Item 5) Seat Bar (Item 5)
Pivot Bushing (Item 6) Keyed Plastic Bushing (Item 6)
Sensor Bracket (Item 7) Mounting Bolt (Item 7)
Sensor Mounting Nut (Item 8)
Sensor Mounting Bolt (Item 9) Installation: Tighten the mounting bolt (Item 7) [Figure
Mounting Nut (Item 10) 50-10-6] and [Figure 50-10-7] to 34 - 38 N•m (25 - 28 ft-
lb) torque.
Installation: Tighten the mounting bolt (Item 9) [Figure
50-10-4] and [Figure 50-10-5] to 5,6 - 7,9 N•m (50 - 70
in-lb) torque.

SEAT BAR (CONT’D) Figure 50-10-9
Compression Spring Disassembly And Assembly

6 7
Figure 50-10-8
5
4 8
3
2
1
P-90028
Disassemble and assemble the seat bar compression

N-19222 spring and parts as shown in [Figure 50-10-9].
Bolt (Item 1)
Turn the bolt (Item 1) [Figure 50-10-8] and [Figure 50- Bushing (Item 2)
10-9] out of the clevis. Spring (Item 3)

Bushing (Item 4)
Assembly: Apply Loctite® #518 adhesive to the bolt Clevis (Item 5)
threads. Adjust the compression spring by turning the Pin (Item 6)
bolt in past the end of the clevis three turns. Bushing (Item 7)
Rue Ring (Item 8)
NOTE: For procedures requiring the use of Loctite®
#518 adhesive, thoroughly clean and dry
affected parts before the application of
Loctite® #518.


OPERATOR CAB Figure 50-20-2
Gas Spring Removal And Installation
WARNING
Cylinder contains high pressure gas. Do not open.
Opening cylinder can release rod and cause injury or 1
death.
W-2113-0288
Raise the operator cab (See Raising on Page 10-30-2.)

P-85657
WARNING Remove the two bolts (Item 1) [Figure 50-20-2].
Figure 50-20-3
Attach a chain hoist to the grab handles of the

operator cab before removing the operator cab gas
spring(s). If the operator cab is tilted forward without
the gas spring(s) operational, the cab will fall and
could cause injury or death.
W-2760-0309
2
Figure 50-20-1 1
3
1
P-85652
Remove the retaining pin (Item 1), the pin (Item 2), and
the gas spring (Item 3) [Figure 50-20-3] from the loader.
NOTE: If the loader is equipped with a second gas

spring repeat the procedure for the other side.
P-85662
Install a strap and hoist (Item 1) [Figure 50-20-1] to the

cab handles.
Lift the cab with the hoist to release the pressure on the
gas spring(s).

OPERATOR CAB (CONT’D) Removal And Installation
Gas Spring Bracket Disassembly And Assembly
Figure 50-20-4
WARNING
Attach a chain hoist to the grab handles of the
3 operator cab before removing the operator cab gas
spring(s). If the operator cab is tilted forward without
the gas spring(s) operational, the cab will fall and
could cause injury or death.
1 W-2760-0309
1
2 Remove the throttle cable from the cab. (See Cable

Remove the operator cab gas spring(s). (See Gas Spring

P-85661
Remove the clevis (Item 1) from both ends, and the outer NOTE: Use the hoist connected to the operator cab
housing (Item 2) from the gas spring (Item 3) [Figure 50- grab handles to lower or (raise) the operator
cab when the gas spring(s) are disconnected.

20-4].
Installation: Apply a small amount of thread-locker on Figure 50-20-5

the threads of the gas spring rod before installing the
clevis (Item 1) [Figure 50-20-4].
WARNING
AVOID INJURY 1
Cylinders for raising and lowering operator cab have
gas under pressure. Do not open cylinder. Only
qualified service personnel can remove the cylinder.
W-2112-0987
P-85663
Disconnect the cab harness connector screw (Item 1)

[Figure 50-20-5].
Installation: Tighten the connector screw to 3,39 - 3,96


Figure 50-20-6
P-85658
Remove the two cab mount bolts and nuts (Item 1)

[Figure 50-20-6] from both sides of the cab.

Installation: Tighten the cab mount bolts and nuts to
24,4 - 29,8 N•m (18 - 22 ft-lb) torque.
Figure 50-20-7
P-85662
Using a strap and a hoist remove the cab from the loader.


OPERATOR SEAT (SUSPENSION) Slide Rail Removal And Installation
Removal And Installation Figure 50-30-2
Figure 50-30-1
1 1
P-85769
P-85776
Remove the operator seat. (See Removal And
Remove the two slide rail mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure

Remove the four seat mounting nuts (Item 1) [Figure 50- 50-30-2].
30-1] and washers from the operator seat mounting
studs. Figure 50-30-3

3.)
Remove the seat. 2
NOTE: With the seat removed, the cab may raise.
P-85770
Remove the two slide rails mounting bolts (Item 1)

[Figure 50-30-3].
Remove the slide rail (Item 2) [Figure 50-30-3] from the

bottom of the seat frame.

OPERATOR SEAT (SUSPENSION) (CONT’D) Lower Cushion Removal
Seat Belt Removal And Installation Figure 50-30-6
Figure 50-30-4
1 1
P-85773
P-85771
Lift up and push forward on the rear of the seat cushion
(Item 1) [Figure 50-30-6].
Remove the nut (Item 1) [Figure 50-30-4] from the seat
belt mount.

Figure 50-30-5
P-85772
Remove the nut (Item 1) [Figure 50-30-5] from the seat

belt mount.
Remove the seat belt.

OPERATOR SEAT (SUSPENSION) (CONT’D) Back Cushion Removal And Installation
Lower Cushion Installation Figure 50-30-9
Figure 50-30-7
2 1
1
2
P-85774
P-85773
P-85778
Tilt the seat all the way forward.
Insert the tab (Item 1) into the slot (Item 2) [Figure 50-30- Remove the two screws (Item 1) [Figure 50-30-9] and tilt
7]. the seat back to the upright position.

Figure 50-30-8 Remove the back cushion from the seat
1 1
P-85775
Push down on the front of the seat (Item 1) and push

back (Item 2) [Figure 50-30-8] to lock the seat into
position.

OPERATOR SEAT (SUSPENSION) (CONT’D) 3-Point Seat Belt Removal And Installation
Shock Removal And Installation Remove the operator seat. (See Removal And
Figure 50-30-10
Figure 50-30-11
1
1
2
1
P-85777
P-85785
Remove the operator seat. (See Removal And

Installation on Page 50-30-1.) Remove the mounting nut (Item 1) [Figure 50-30-11].

Remove the seat shock clips (Item 1) [Figure 50-30-10]. Remove the end release buckle (Item 2) [Figure 50-30-
(Both ends.) 11].
Remove the seat shock (Item 2) [Figure 50-30-10]. Figure 50-30-12
P-85784
Remove the mounting nut (Item 1) [Figure 50-30-12].
Remove the seat belt retractor (Item 2) [Figure 50-30-

12].

OPERATOR SEAT (SUSPENSION) (CONT’D) Figure 50-30-15
3-Point Seat Belt Removal And Installation (Cont’d)

2
Figure 50-30-13
1 3
1
P-85788
Remove the nut (Item 1) [Figure 50-30-15].

P-85786
Remove the shoulder harness guide and bushing (Item
2) and hardened washer (Item 3) [Figure 50-30-15].
13].

Figure 50-30-14
P-85787
Remove the shoulder harness retractor (Item 1) [Figure

50-30-14].


BOB-TACH (HAND LEVER) Figure 50-40-2
Description 1
The Bob-Tach is the section of the loader lift arm that

attachments mount to. The Hand Lever Bob-Tach uses
two manually operated, spring assisted, locking wedge
and lever assemblies to secure the attachment the Bob-
Tach.
The Bob-Tach is located on the front of the loader

connected to the loader lift arms.
Figure 50-40-1 P-85649

P-85554
Tilt the Bob-Tach forward, so it is parallel to the floor. Put

blocks (approximately 76,2 mm (3 in)) under each side of
the Bob-Tach [Figure 50-40-1].
Lower the Bob-Tach onto the blocks.


40 ft-lb) torque.

BOB-TACH (HAND LEVER) (CONT'D) Figure 50-40-5
Figure 50-40-3
1 P-31405
Check and replace O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 50-40-5] on

P-31402 the grease plug.
Figure 50-40-6
Remove the snap ring (Item 1) [Figure 50-40-3] from the
Bob-Tach pivot pin grease plug (both sides).

Figure 50-40-4
P-31403
1
Remove the nut (Item 1) [Figure 50-40-6] from the Bob-
P-31404 Tach pivot pin retaining bolt (both sides).
Use a grease gun and pump grease into the pivot pin
forcing the grease plug out of the Bob-Tach (Item 1)
[Figure 50-40-4].

BOB-TACH (HAND LEVER) (CONT'D) Lever And Wedge Disassembly And Assembly
Figure 50-40-7
P-85664
P-31406
Remove the lever mounting nut (Item 1) [Figure 50-40-
9].
Remove the retainer bolt (Item 1) [Figure 50-40-7] from
the Bob-Tach pin. Installation: Tighten the nut to 48 - 54 N•m (35 - 40 ft-lb)

torque.
Installation: Tighten the retainer nut and bolt (Item 1)
[Figure 50-40-6] and [Figure 50-40-7] to 446 N•m (330 Figure 50-40-10
ft-lb) torque.
Figure 50-40-8
2
P-85665
1
P-31407 Remove the washer and spring, (Item 1) and the lever
assembly (Item 2) [Figure 50-40-10].
With a 0,875 mm (7/8 in) punch (Item 1) [Figure 50-40-8]

and a hammer, drive the pivot pin out of the lift arm and
Bob-Tach.

BOB-TACH (HAND LEVER) (CONT'D) Figure 50-40-13
Lever And Wedge Disassembly And Assembly

(Cont'd) 4
Figure 50-40-11
1 3 2
P-85668
If the bolt (Item 1), handle pivot (Item 2), spring (Item 3),
or clevis (Item 4) [Figure 50-40-13] are damaged, put the
P-85666 assembly in a vise.
Remove the bolt and replace the damaged parts as

Use a punch and hammer to remove the roll pin (Item 1) needed.

[Figure 50-40-11] from the Bob-Tach wedge and spring
clevis. Assembly: Clean threads and apply Loctite® 242 to the
bolt (Item 1) [Figure 50-40-13], torque to 107,1 - 118,0
Remove the spring clevis assembly (Item 2) [Figure 50- N•m (79 - 87 ft-lb).
40-11].
Figure 50-40-12
P-85667
Remove the wedge (Item 1) [Figure 50-40-12] out the

bottom of the Bob-Tach.
Always replace bent or broken wedges.

BOB-TACH (HAND LEVER) (CONT'D)
Pivot Pin Bushing And Seal Removal And Installation
Figure 50-40-14
2 1
P-85669
Remove the Bob-Tach. (See Removal And Installation on

Page 50-40-1.)

Use a seal pick to remove seal (Item 1) [Figure 50-40-
14] from the Bob-Tach.
Remove and replace bushing (Item 2) [Figure 50-40-14]

with a driver tool and hammer.
Figure 50-40-15
3
NA5472
Installation: The seal (Item 1) needs to be seated in the

Bob-Tach (Item 2) to a depth of 12,7 mm (0.050 in) (Item
3) [Figure 50-40-15].


BOB-TACH (POWER) Removal And Installation
The Bob-Tach is the section of the loader lift arm that

attachments mount to. The Power Bob-Tach option uses
two hydraulically operated, spring assisted, locking
wedge and lever assemblies to secure the attachment to
the Bob-Tach.
The hydraulically operated Power Bob-Tach has a

hydraulic cylinder that opens and closes both wedge and
1
lever assemblies by pressing a switch on the right switch 2 2
panel. The switch activates the Power Bob-Tach block to
allow flow into or out of the hydraulic cylinder connected
to the levers on the Bob-Tach.
The Power Bob-Tach block is located on the rear of the P-85570

gear pump.
The Bob-Tach is located on the front of the loader Tilt the Bob-Tach forward, so it is parallel to the floor. Put
connected to the loader lift arms. blocks (approximately 76,2 mm (3 in)) under each side of
the Bob-Tach [Figure 50-41-1].

Lower the Bob-Tach onto the blocks.
Mark the hoses (Item 1) [Figure 50-41-1] for correct

installation.
Remove and cap the hoses from the cylinder.
Remove the washers and bolts (Item 2) [Figure 50-41-1]

from the cylinder (both ends).

40 ft-lb) torque.
Remove the cylinder from the Bob-Tach.

BOB-TACH (POWER) (CONT'D) Figure 50-41-4
Figure 50-41-2
1 1
P-31402
Remove the snap ring (Item 1) [Figure 50-41-4] at the

P-85554 Bob-Tach pivot pin grease plug (both sides).
Figure 50-41-5

40 ft-lb) torque.
Figure 50-41-3
P-31404
Use a grease gun and pump grease into the pivot pin
forcing the grease plug out of the Bob-Tach (Item 1)
[Figure 50-41-5] (both sides).
P-85649

BOB-TACH (POWER) (CONT’D) Figure 50-41-8
Figure 50-41-6
P-31406
1
P-31405 the Bob-Tach pivot pin (both sides).
Installation: Tighten the retainer nut and bolt (Item 1)

Check and replace the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 50-41-6] [Figure 50-41-7] and [Figure 50-41-8] to 446 N•m (330
on the grease plug. ft-lb) torque.

1
P-31403 P-31407
Remove the nut (Item 1) [Figure 50-41-7] from the Bob- With a 0,875 mm (7/8 in) punch (Item 1) [Figure 50-41-9]
Tach pivot pin retaining bolt (both sides). and a hammer, drive the pivot pin out of the lift arm and
Bob-Tach (both sides).
Remove the Bob-Tach from the loader.

BOB-TACH (POWER) (CONT'D) Figure 50-41-12
Lever And Wedge Disassembly And Assembly
Figure 50-41-10
1 1 2
P-85665
Remove the washer and spring, (Item 1) and the lever

P-85570 assembly (Item 2) [Figure 50-41-12].
Figure 50-41-13
Remove the washers and bolts (Item 1) [Figure 50-41-
10] from the cylinder (both ends).

lb) torque.
Remove the cylinder from the lever pivots.

1
Figure 50-41-11
P-85666
1 Use a punch and hammer to remove the roll pin (Item 1)

[Figure 50-41-13] from the Bob-Tach wedge and spring
clevis.
Remove the spring clevis assembly (Item 2) [Figure 50-

41-13].
P-85664
Remove the lever mounting nut (Item 1) [Figure 50-41-

11].
Installation: Tighten the nut to 48 - 54 N•m (35 - 40 ft-lb)

torque.

BOB-TACH (POWER) (CONT'D) Pivot Pin Bushing And Seal Removal And Installation
Lever And Wedge Disassembly And Assembly Figure 50-41-16

(Cont'd)
Figure 50-41-14
2 1
P-85669
P-85667 Remove the Power Bob-Tach. (See Removal And

Remove the wedge (Item 1) [Figure 50-41-14] out the Use a seal pick to remove seal (Item 1) [Figure 50-41-

bottom of the Bob-Tach. 16] from the Bob-Tach.
Always replace bent or broken wedges. Remove and replace bushing (Item 2) [Figure 50-41-16]
with a driver tool and hammer.
Figure 50-41-15
Figure 50-41-17
4 3
1
2
3 2
1
P-85668
NA5472
If the bolt (Item 1), handle pivot (Item 2), spring (Item 3),
or clevis (Item 4) [Figure 50-41-15] are damaged, put the Installation: The seal (Item 1) needs to be seated in the
assembly in a vise. Bob-Tach (Item 2) to a depth of 12,7 mm (0.050 in) (Item
3) [Figure 50-41-17].
Remove the bolt and replace the damaged parts as
needed.
Assembly: Clean threads and apply Loctite® 242 to the

bolt (Item 1) [Figure 50-41-15], torque to 107,1 - 118,0
N•m (79 - 87 ft-lb).


LIFT ARMS Figure 50-50-3
Stabilizer Bar Removal And Installation

1
NOTE: Remove the lift arm stabilizer bar from one
side of the loader at a time.
Figure 50-50-1
P-90591
1
2 With a slide hammer, remove the rear lift arm stabilizer
pin (Item 1) [Figure 50-50-3].
Remove the stabilizer bar from the loader.
Figure 50-50-4

P-90592A
Remove the retainer bolt (Item 1) [Figure 50-50-1] and

nut from the front stabilizer bar pivot pin.
Remove the stabilizer bar pivot pin (Item 2) [Figure 50-

50-1].
1
Figure 50-50-2
P-31595
Remove the bushings (Item 1) [Figure 50-50-4] from the

stabilizer bar (both ends).
Inspect the bushings and replace as needed.
P-90593

the stabilizer bar rear pivot pin at the lift arm.


LIFT ARMS (CONT'D) Figure 50-50-7
Link Removal And Installation

1
Figure 50-50-5
P-90594

P-90595 7] from the lift arm link pivot pin (both sides).

Install a sling and chain hoist on the lift arm link [Figure N•m (35 - 40 ft-lb) torque.
50-50-5].

Figure 50-50-8
Figure 50-50-6
1
1
P-90598
P-90597
Remove the lift arm pivot pin (Item 1) [Figure 50-50-8]

Remove the retainer bolt and nut (Item 1) [Figure 50-50- (both sides).
6] from the lift arm pivot pin (both sides).


LIFT ARMS (CONT'D) Removal And Installation
Link Removal And Installation (Cont’d) Put jackstands under the rear corners of the loader.
Figure 50-50-9 Raise the operator cab. (See Raising on Page 10-30-2.)

1 Figure 50-50-10
P-90610
Remove the lift arm link pivot pin (Item 1) [Figure 50-50-
9] (both sides).

P-90600
At the right side upright disconnect and cap the two tilt
Remove the lift arm link from the loader. cylinder hoses (Item 1) [Figure 50-50-10].
NOTE: Mark the hoses for proper installation.
Figure 50-50-11
P-90599
At the left side upright disconnect and cap the three

auxiliary hydraulic hoses (Item 1) [Figure 50-50-11].
NOTE: Mark the hoses for proper installation.

Figure 50-50-12
1
P-90611

P-85692 50-14] from the rod end of the lift cylinder (both sides).
Figure 50-50-15
Disconnect the electrical controls harness (Item 1)
[Figure 50-50-12]. (If equipped.)

Figure 50-50-13
1
1
P-90606
Install slings (Item 1) [Figure 50-50-15] on the lift arms

P-90602 and connect to a chain hoist.

50-13] from the pin on the rod end of the lift cylinder (both
sides).


Figure 50-50-16
1
2
P-90609
2
Remove the retaining bolt and nut (Item 1) and the pin
P-90604 (Item 2) [Figure 50-50-18] (both sides).

NOTE: Be sure the slings on the lift arms are in a N•m (35 - 40 ft-lb) torque.
position to balance the lift arms when being

removed. See (Item 1) [Figure 50-50-16]. Remove the lift arms from the loader.
Disconnect the stabilizer bar from both sides of the lift

arms (Item 2) [Figure 50-50-16].
Figure 50-50-17
P-90605
Position the front sling in the middle of the Bob-Tach as

shown in (Item 1) [Figure 50-50-17].
Support the lift arms with the chain hoist.


REAR GRILLE Figure 50-60-3
Figure 50-60-1
1
P100807
Align the tabs of the two side covers into the slots in the
P100808 loader frame and lower [Figure 50-60-3].
Figure 50-60-4
Flip the lockable handle (Item 1) [Figure 50-60-1] up and
turn the handle 90° counterclockwise. Lift and pull the

rear grille backward to remove from the loader.
Figure 50-60-2
P-85604
Align the edge of the rear grille under the loader frame
and slide rear grille in while lowering [Figure 50-60-4].
P100809A
Turn the lockable handle 90° clockwise and fold the
handle down.
Lift and remove the two side covers (Item 1) [Figure 50-
60-2].


REAR DOOR (TAILGATE) Figure 50-70-3
Figure 50-70-1 1
3
2
P-85695
1
Remove the top and bottom door hinge mounting bolts

P-85697 and nuts (Item 1) [Figure 50-70-3].
NOTE: Install the door stop (Item 2) and the door stop
Disconnect the light harness connector (Item 1) [Figure
retainer (Item 3) in the top hinge as shown
50-70-1] from the main frame harness.
[Figure 50-70-3].

Remove both rear lights (Item 2) [Figure 50-70-1] from
Installation: Tighten the mounting bolts and nuts to 34 -
the door. (See Rear Removal And Installation on Page
60-60-2.)
Lift the door away from the loader frame and put the door
Figure 50-70-2
flat on the floor.
1 1
P-90585
Secure the chain hooks (Item 1) [Figure 50-70-2] to the

door as shown.
Connect a chain hoist (Item 2) [Figure 50-70-2] to the

lifting chain.

REAR DOOR (TAILGATE) (CONT’D) Striker (Adjusting)
Striker Removal And Installation

1
Never service or adjust the machine when the engine
is running unless instructed to do so in the manual.
W-2012-0497
Figure 50-70-6
1
1
P-85698A
Remove the two striker mount bolts (Item 1) [Figure 50- 1

70-4].

Remove the striker assembly from the loader.
Striker Disassembly And Assembly

P-85698A
Figure 50-70-5
Loosen the striker assembly mount bolts (Item 1) [Figure
50-70-6].
2
3 Align the striker assembly in the center of the mounting
holes.
NOTE: Tighten the striker assembly, top mount bolt

only, until it will hold the striker assembly in
the center of the mounting slots.
4
1 Close the rear door. (This will align the striker assembly
to the correct position.)
Open the door.

P-31320A
Tighten both striker mount bolts (Item 1) [Figure 50-70-6]
to 125 - 135 N•m (90 - 100 ft-lb) torque.
Remove the lock nut (Item 1) [Figure 50-70-5].
Remove the rollers (Item 2) and the spacer (Item 3) from
the bolt (Item 4) [Figure 50-70-5].
Check the parts for wear and replace as needed.
Installation: Tighten the bolt (Item 4) and nut (Item 1) to

34 - 38 N•m (25 - 28 ft-lb) torque.

REAR DOOR (TAILGATE) (CONT’D) Figure 50-70-9
Latch Removal And Installation
Figure 50-70-7
1
1
P-85701
Remove the door handle (Item 1) [Figure 50-70-9] from

P-85699 the rear door.
Disconnect the spring (Item 1) [Figure 50-70-7] from the

rear door.

Remove the bolt and nut (Item 2) [Figure 50-70-7] from
the latch.
Figure 50-70-8
P-85700
Remove the spring (Item 1) [Figure 50-70-8] from the

door handle.
Remove the spring (Item 2) [Figure 50-70-8] from the

door latch.
Remove the door latch (Item 3) [Figure 50-70-8] from the

door handle.


FUEL TANK Figure 50-80-3

1.)
Remove the engine / hydrostatic pump assembly from 1

2
Page 70-10-7.)
Figure 50-80-1
P-85707
Disconnect the fuel vent hose (Item 1) and remove the

two bolts (Item 2) [Figure 50-80-3].
1 Figure 50-80-4
1 4

P-85714
2 3
Remove the three mount bolts (Item 1) [Figure 50-80-1]
from the access cover at the rear of the loader frame.
Remove the access cover.
Figure 50-80-2
1
P-85708
Disconnect the two fuel lines (Item 1) [Figure 50-80-4].

1
50-80-4] from the fuel level sender.
Remove the two mounting bolts (Item 3) and remove the

bracket (Item 4) [Figure 50-80-4].
P-85713
Remove the drain plug (Item 1) [Figure 50-80-2].
Drain the fuel into a container.

FUEL TANK (CONT'D) Figure 50-80-7
Figure 50-80-5
1
1
1 1
P-85711
At the right side of the loader, remove the two main frame
P-85710 mount bolts and nuts (Item 1) [Figure 50-80-7].
Installation: Tighten the main frame mount bolts to 542 -

Remove the bolts (Item 1) [Figure 50-80-5] from the 583 N•m (400 - 430 ft-lb) torque.
battery hold down plate.

Figure 50-80-8
Remove the hold down plate from the loader.
Figure 50-80-6
1 1 1
P-85712
2
P-85709 At the left side of the loader, remove the two main frame
mount bolts and nuts (Item 1) [Figure 50-80-7].
Remove the two mounting bolts (Item 1) and the bracket Installation: Tighten the main frame mount bolts to 542 -
(Item 2) [Figure 50-80-6]. 583 N•m (400 - 430 ft-lb) torque.
Lift the fuel tank and remove it from the loader frame.
NOTE: When installing the fuel tank, avoid striking

the tank with heavy objects to prevent
damage.

FUEL TANK (CONT'D) Fuel Fill Screen Removal And Installation
Fuel Level Sender Removal And Installation Figure 50-80-11
Figure 50-80-9
1
1
P-85707
P-85708
Remove the two bolts (Item 1) and disconnect the fuel fill
hose (Item 2) [Figure 50-80-11].
50-80-9] from the fuel level sender. Figure 50-80-12

Remove the fuel level sender.
Figure 50-80-10
P-85715
Remove the fuel fill screen (Item 1) [Figure 50-80-12].

P-85716
Inspect and replace as needed.
Inspect the fuel level sender and replace if worn or

damaged.


CONTROL PEDALS AND LINKAGES Figure 50-90-1
Description
The control pedals and linkages are connected to the 1

control valve. The control pedals will mechanically move
the lift and tilt spools on the control valve.
The control pedals and linkages are located on the lower

mainframe at the operators feet.
Pedal Removal And Installation
WARNING P100782
Never work on a machine with the lift arms up unless Remove the bolt (Item 1) [Figure 50-90-1] and nut from
the lift arms are secured by an approved lift arm the pedal linkage.
support device can allow the lift arms or attachment Check the bushing in the pedal for wear and replace as
to fall and cause injury or death. needed.
W-2059-0598

Figure 50-90-2
device.(See Installing on Page 10-20-1.)
Raise the operator cab.(See Raising on Page 10-30-2.)
DANGER
1
P100783
P-90328 Remove the two nuts (Item 1) [Figure 50-90-2] from the
pedal mounting bracket.
AVOID DEATH
• Disconnecting or loosening any hydraulic Remove the pedal assembly from the loader.
D-1009-0409

CONTROL PEDALS AND LINKAGES (CONT’D) Figure 50-90-5
Linkage Removal And Installation
Figure 50-90-3
1
1
2
P-85679
Remove the crossbar pivot bolt (Item 1) [Figure 50-90-

P100786 5].
Remove the crossbar from the pivot (Item 2) [Figure 50-

Remove the bolt and nut (Item 1) [Figure 50-90-3] to 90-6].
disconnect the lift pedal linkage from the crossbar.

Figure 50-90-6
Figure 50-90-4
2
1
P-85681
P-85680
Installation: Check the nylon bushing (Item 1) [Figure

Remove the hairpin clips (Item 1) and cross-pins (Item 2) 50-90-6] for wear and replace as needed.
[Figure 50-90-4] from the control valve lift spool.
Disconnect the crossbar from the control valve.

CONTROL PEDALS AND LINKAGES (CONT’D) The pedals should be positioned at a comfortable angle
so full movement of the pedal can be reached easily
Linkage Removal And Installation (Cont’d) while properly sitting in the loader seat.
1
2
1
P100782 P100783
Remove the bolt (Item 1) [Figure 50-90-7] and nut from Loosen the two mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure 50-90-9]
the pedal linkage. from the pedal mounting bracket.

Remove the linkage (Item 2) [Figure 50-90-7]. Figure 50-90-10
Figure 50-90-8
1
1
2
P100782
P-85675A
Loosen the bolt (Item 1) [Figure 50-90-10] and nut on
the pedal linkage.
Remove the bolt (Item 1) [Figure 50-90-8] and nut from
the pedal linkage. Check the bushing in the pedal for wear and replace as
needed.
Remove the linkage (Item 2) [Figure 50-90-8].
Tilt the pedal back and forth until an acceptable “neutral”
Pedal (Adjusting) angle is achieved on the pedal.
After installing the pedal, adjust the pedal angle so that Tighten the two nuts (Item 2) and pivot bolt (Item 1)
there is clearance under the rear of the pedal. The valve [Figure 50-90-10] on the pedal assembly to standard
spool must travel full stroke without the pedal hitting the torque.
floor panel.

CONTROL PEDALS AND LINKAGES (CONT’D)
Floor Pan Removal And Installation

on Page 50-100-2.)
Remove the pedals. (See Pedal Removal And

Remove the access panels. (See ACCESS PANEL

(INSIDE) on Page 50-120-1.)
Figure 50-90-11

1
1
P-85859 P-85860
Figure 50-90-12
1 1
P-85858
Remove the clips (Item 1) [Figure 50-90-11] and [Figure

50-90-12] from the sides of the floor pan.
Remove the floor pan (Item 2) [Figure 50-90-12].

CONTROL PEDALS AND LINKAGES (ACS) Figure 50-91-1
Description
1
The control pedals are connected to foot sensors located
behind the control panel. The foot sensors send an
electronic pulse to the actuators on the control valve. The
electronic pulse tells the actuators to move the lift or tilt
spools on the control valve.
The control pedals and linkages are located on the lower

mainframe at the operators feet.
Pedal Removal And Installation
P-85675
WARNING Remove the bolt (Item 1) [Figure 50-91-1] and nut from
the pedal linkage.
the lift arms are secured by an approved lift arm Check the bushing in the pedal for wear and replace as
support device. Failure to use an approved lift arm needed.

Figure 50-91-2
W-2059-0598
device.(See Installing on Page 10-20-1.)
Raise the operator cab.(See Raising on Page 10-30-2.)
DANGER 1
P-85676
Remove the two nuts (Item 1) [Figure 50-91-2] from the

pedal mounting bracket.
P-90328
Remove the pedal assembly from the loader.
AVOID DEATH
D-1009-0409

CONTROL PEDALS AND LINKAGES (ACS) (CONT’D) Pedal (Adjusting)
Linkage Removal And Installation After installing the pedal, adjust the pedal angle so that
there is clearance under the rear of the pedal. The valve
spool must travel full stroke without the pedal hitting the
Figure 50-91-3 floor panel.
The pedals should be positioned at a comfortable angle

so full movement of the pedal can be reached easily
1 while properly sitting in the loader seat.
Figure 50-91-5
1
1
P-90979
Remove the hairpin clip and the pin (Item 1) [Figure 50-
91-3] from the foot sensor.

P-85676
Figure 50-91-4
Loosen the two mounting nuts (Item 1) [Figure 50-91-5]
from the pedal mounting bracket.
Figure 50-91-6
1 1
2
P-90981
Remove the linkage (Item 1) [Figure 50-91-4] and the

rubber boot. P-85675
Repeat for other side.

Loosen the bolt (Item 1) [Figure 50-91-6] and nut on the
pedal linkage.
Check the bushing in the pedal for wear and replace as

needed.
Tilt the pedal back and forth until an acceptable “neutral”
angle is achieved on the pedal.
Tighten the two nuts (Item 2) and pivot bolt (Item 1)

[Figure 50-91-6] on the pedal assembly to standard
torque.

CONTROL PEDALS AND LINKAGES (ACS) (CONT’D)
Floor Pan Removal And Installation

on Page 50-100-2.)
Remove the pedals. (See Pedal Removal And

Remove the access panels. (See ACCESS PANEL

(INSIDE) on Page 50-120-1.)
Figure 50-91-7

1
1
P-85859 P-85860
Figure 50-91-8
1 1
P-85858
Remove the clips (Item 1) [Figure 50-91-7] and [Figure

50-91-8] from the sides of the floor pan.
Remove the floor pan (Item 2) [Figure 50-91-8].


CONTROL PANEL
Description
Figure 50-100-1

NA1034
The steering system consists of independent steering Pintle arms are of a two-piece design that allow easy
levers the operator uses to provide steering input to the adjustment of the neutral or “creep”.
loader.
The steering system returns the levers to their starting
The steering levers are attached to pivoting bellcranks position by means of the centering spring and the
that pivot on a steering shaft and plastic bushings. returning force of the torsion bushings.
The forward travel is adjusted by drift adjustment bolts. NOTE: Torsion bushings need to be replaced if torn
or rotating in the housing. Loosen torsion
The bellcranks are attached to steering linkage bars with bushing bolts slightly before adjustments are
torsion bushings pressed into the bellcranks. Bellcranks made.
mount to the control handle assembly and mount to the
control panel. Sequence of steering adjustments:
Steering linkage bars are a two-piece design. Steering 1. Set neutral of pintle arms, “creep”
linkage bars are adjustable in length for “full travel 2. Set full travel at steering linkage bars
adjustment”. 3. Set drift at drift adjustment bolts
Steering linkage bars attach to the pintle arms where a

rubber torsion bushing is pressed into the pintle arms.

CONTROL PANEL (CONT'D) Figure 50-100-2
2
DANGER
1
P-85846
P-90328
AVOID DEATH Figure 50-100-3


D-1009-0409
WARNING
the lift arms are secured by an approved lift arm P-85847
to fall and cause injury or death. Disconnect the control harness connectors (Item 1) and
W-2059-0598 the back-up alarm wires (Item 2) [Figure 50-100-2] and
[Figure 50-100-3] from the control levers.
WARNING
W-2017-0286

1.)

CONTROL PANEL (CONT'D) Disassembly And Assembly
Removal And Installation (Cont'd) Remove Control Panel. (See Removal And Installation
on Page 50-100-2.)
Figure 50-100-4
Figure 50-100-6
2
1
1 1
2
2 2
P-90612
1 1
P-85864
Scribe a mark across the top of the steering linkage bars

(Item 1) [Figure 50-100-4] which are connected to the Remove the nuts (Item 1) and the steering stabilizers

steering shaft on the control panel. (Item 2) [Figure 50-100-6].
Remove the four steering linkage mounting bolts, nuts

and rubber isolators (Item 2) [Figure 50-100-4].
Installation: Align the marks on the steering linkage

bars. Tighten the steering linkage mounting bolts to 47,5 -
54,2 N•m (35 - 40 ft-lb) torque.
Figure 50-100-5
3 2 3
3 3 P-85848
Remove the two bracket mounting bolts (Item 1) and the

knob (Item 2) [Figure 50-100-5] from the lift arm bypass
valve.
Remove the eight control panel bolts (Item 3) and the

control panel assembly (Item 4) [Figure 50-100-5].

Figure 50-100-7 2
2 2
1
3 1 3 3 P-85867
3
Remove the four bolts (Item 1) [Figure 50-100-9] from

P-85865 the control panel.
Remove the control handle assembly (Item 2) [Figure

Figure 50-100-8 50-100-9].

Figure 50-100-10
4
3
2
1
1
P-85861
P-85868
Remove the bolt and nut (Item 1), steering link, (Item 2),
and washers (Item 3) [Figure 50-100-7] and [Figure 50-
100-8]. Remove the tie straps (Item 1), the four nuts (Item 2), and
the plate (Item 3) [Figure 50-100-10].
Installation: Verify correct orientation of components
[Figure 50-100-7] and [Figure 50-100-8]. Remove the control handle (Item 4) [Figure 50-100-10].

CONTROL PANEL (CONT'D) Linkage Removal And Installation

W-2059-0598
1 2 1
WARNING
P-85872
Remove the two bolts (Item 1) from the bellcrank (Item 2) fall or move and cause injury or death.
[Figure 50-100-11]. W-2017-0286

Remove the bellcrank from the bracket [Figure 50-100- Lift and block the loader. (See Procedure on Page 10-10-
11]. 1.)
Figure 50-100-12 Raise the lift arms and install an approved lift arm support

2
3
1
P-85873
Inspect the shaft (Item 1), the bellcrank (Item 2), and the
bushings (Item 3) [Figure 50-100-11] for wear and
replace as need.
Repeat the procedure for the other control handle

assembly.

Linkage Removal And Installation (Cont’d)

1
Figure 50-100-13
2
1
2
P-48631
2
Remove the nut (Item 1) from the end of the centering

P-90612 spring shoulder bolt (Item 2) [Figure 50-100-14].
Remove the bolt / spring assembly.

Scribe a mark across the top of the steering linkage bars
(Item 1) [Figure 50-100-13] which are connected to the Installation: Tighten the centering spring bolt and a

steering shaft on the control panel. NEW lock nut to 34 - 38 N•m (25 - 28 ft-lb) torque.
Remove the four steering linkage mounting bolts, nuts Figure 50-100-15
and rubber isolators (Item 2) [Figure 50-100-13].

1
Installation: Align the marks on the steering linkage
bars. Tighten the steering linkage mounting bolts to 47,5 -
54,2 N•m (35 - 40 ft-lb) torque.
NOTE: After removal and installation of the linkage,

the linkage neutral adjusting procedure must
be performed. (See Linkage Neutral
(Adjusting) on Page 50-100-10.)
P-48632
Slide the centering plate (Item 1) [Figure 50-100-15] to

the right to remove it from the hydrostatic pumps.
NOTE: Directions are shown and stated as if you

were sitting in the operator’s seat.

Figure 50-100-16
2
7
6 8
3 1 4 1
1
P-48629
2
5
2 Check the wear on the centering blocks (Item 1) [Figure
P-48630 50-100-17].
If the centering blocks need replacement, remove the

The centering plate / centering spring assembly consists bolts (Item 2) [Figure 50-100-17]. Remove the centering
of the following parts: blocks.

ITEM DESCRIPTION Installation: Tighten the centering block bolts to 47,5 -
54,2 N•m (35 - 40 ft-lb) torque.
1 Bolt
2 Bushings NOTE: The washers go between the bolts and the
3 Washer centering plate.
4 Bushing Spacer NOTE: If the centering blocks are worn, they can be
5 Spring removed and rotated 180 degrees and
6 Lock Nut reinstalled.
7 Centering Plate
8 Guide Bushings

Figure 50-100-18
2
2
1
P-54615
3
Loosen the bolt (Item 1) [Figure 50-100-20].

P-54617
Remove the pintle base (Item 2) [Figure 50-100-20].
Remove the bolts and washers (Item 1) [Figure 50-100- Figure 50-100-21
18] from the pintle.

Installation: Tighten the bolts to 47,5 - 54,2 N•m (35 - 40
ft-lb) torque.
Remove the pintle arm (Item 2) from the pintle base (Item
3) [Figure 50-100-18].
Figure 50-100-19 2
1 3
1
2 P-48659
4 NOTE: When installing the pintle base (Item 1) onto

3
the pump shaft, the cutouts on the pump shaft
will not line up with the bolt (Item 3) [Figure
2 50-100-21].
1 Installation: Install the pintle base (Item 1) onto the

P-48624 pump shaft (Item 2) [Figure 50-100-21]. The top of the
pintle base should be level with the top of the pump shaft.
Tighten the bolts to 47,5 - 54,2 N•m (35 - 40 ft-lb) torque.
Remove the bolt and nut (Item 1) [Figure 50-100-19].
NOTE: After installing the linkage onto the
Inspect the washers (Item 2), pintle arm (Item 3) and the hydrostatic pumps the linkage neutral
steering control lever (Item 4) for damage and replace as adjusting procedure must be performed. (See
needed [Figure 50-100-19]. Linkage Neutral (Adjusting) on Page 50-100-
10.)
NOTE: The washers (Item 2) [Figure 50-100-19] are
hardened, and should only be replaced
through Bobcat Parts.

CONTROL PANEL (CONT'D) NOTE: Anti-sieze should be used on the adjusting
screw to prevent corrosion and allow free
Pintle Arm Disassembly And Assembly movement while adjusting.
Figure 50-100-22 Figure 50-100-24
2
4
3 1
2
3
1 P-48619
P-54624
Using a bushing driver (Item 1) remove the torsion

Remove the nut (Item 1) from the pintle roller cams (Item bushing (Item 2) by pressing the bushing through the
2) and inspect the pintle roller cams and washers (Item 3) pintle arm into an oversized socket (Item 3) to catch the
torsion bushing [Figure 50-100-24].

for damage [Figure 50-100-22].
Inspect the torsion bushing (Item 4) [Figure 50-100-22] Installation: Install the torsion bushing (Item 2) [Figure
for damage and replace as needed. 50-100-24] into the pintle arm using the same procedure
as the removal.
Installation: Tighten the nuts to 47,5 - 54,2 N•m (35 - 40
ft-lb) torque. NOTE: When the torsion bushing is installed, the
amount of bushing on each side of the pintle
Figure 50-100-23 arm should be the same.
4
2
P-54626
Remove the base pintle (Item 1) [Figure 50-100-23] from

the pump shaft.
Remove the retaining bolt (Item 2), adjusting screw (Item

3) and neoprene dampener (Item 4) from the base pintle
[Figure 50-100-23].
Inspect parts for wear and damage, replace as needed

[Figure 50-100-23].

Linkage Neutral (Adjusting)
The following tool listed will be needed to do the following

procedure:
Kit - 7003030 Remote Start Tool (Service Tool) or 1

MEL1563 Remote Start Tool.
Connect the Remote Start Tool (Service Tool) to the

loader. (See REMOTE START TOOL KIT-MEL1563 on
Page 10-60-1.) OR (See REMOTE START TOOL
(SERVICE TOOL) KIT - 7003031 on Page 10-61-1.)
Lift and block the loader. (See Procedure on Page 10-10- P-85845
1.)
Figure 50-100-25 Loosen the bolt / nut (Item 1) [Figure 50-100-26] only
until the tension is released from the torsion bushing.
3
Figure 50-100-27

2
1
P-48450A
Tool that may assist in the neutral adjustment [Figure 50- P-54613
100-25].
To make this tool use a locking grip C-Clamp and grind Loosen the nut (Item 1) only until the tension is released
one edge flat (Item 1) and grind the other edge (Item 2) from the torsion bushing (Item 2) [Figure 50-100-27].
[Figure 50-100-25] to a small rounded edge.
NOTE: The bolt must be loose enough to allow the
A steering centering block (Item 3) [Figure 50-100-25] is torsion bushing (Item 2) [Figure 50-100-27] to
also needed. The centering block can be placed as turn freely between the torsion bushing and
shown and welded to the C-clamp if desired. the steering linkage bar.
WARNING
W-2017-0286

CONTROL PANEL (CONT'D)
Linkage Neutral (Adjusting) (Cont’d) WARNING

Figure 50-100-28
W-2017-0286
1
loader. (See REMOTE START TOOL KIT-MEL1563 on
Page 10-60-1.) OR (See REMOTE START TOOL
(SERVICE TOOL) KIT - 7003031 on Page 10-61-1.)
Start the engine and run at low idle.
2 Move the traction lock override switch so the traction

P-54614 function is unlocked. On a standard loader the wedge
brake will unlock.
Loosen the two bolts (Item 1) holding the right centering NOTE: When the engine is started, the wheels /
block. Move the right hand centering block (Item 2) tracks may begin to move.

[Figure 50-100-28] until both pintle cams contact the
centering block. NOTE: In loaders equipped with manual steering and
hydraulic brake, the steering levers may have
NOTE: The left centering block is not adjustable. By to be moved during engine start-up to reduce
adjusting the right centering block the left the amount of creep. This reduction in creep
centering block will also become aligned will allow time for the engine to run and build
properly. up hydraulic charge pressure, which will
release the hydraulic brake.
Figure 50-100-29
Tighten bolts (Item 3) [Figure 50-100-29] to 47,5 - 54,2
N•m (35 - 40 ft-lb).
3
NOTE: Check for slack between centering blocks and
pintle cams. If there is excessive slack repeat
above steps [Figure 50-100-28] and [Figure
50-100-29].
1
P-48451
A modified locking grip C-Clamp and steering block

shown in [Figure 50-100-25] may be used to help in
aligning the centering blocks.
Install the centering block (Item 1) on the inside of the

pintle cams and the C-Clamp (Item 2) [Figure 50-100-
29] around both centering blocks.
Lock the C-Clamp in place.

CONTROL PANEL (CONT'D) NOTE: This procedure is shown for neutral
adjustment on the left side of the loader. The
Linkage Neutral (Adjusting) (Cont’d) procedure is the same for the right side
neutral adjustment.
Start the neutral adjustment procedure with the left
pump first and complete the neutral adjustment for Turn the adjustment screw (Item 1) [Figure 50-100-31]
the left pump before adjusting the right pump. counterclockwise until forward creep is seen.
Figure 50-100-30 Turn the adjustment screw (Item 1) [Figure 50-100-31] to

a point between forward and reverse where there is zero
creep.
Stroke the left steering lever to forward and allow the

2 1 lever to return to neutral. Stroke the left steering lever to
reverse and allow the lever to return to neutral. Check
that there is zero creep when the lever returns from either
direction, on the left side. Turn the adjustment screw (if
necessary) until zero creep is obtained.
P-48632

Loosen the left pump pintle adjustment lock bolts
(Item 1). (The right pump pintle adjustment lock bolts are
(Item 2) [Figure 50-100-30].) Loosen the bolts enough to
allow free movement between the pintle arm and the
pintle base.
NOTE: If the bolts are too loose or too tight, the

neutral adjustment may be affected.
Figure 50-100-31
P-54610
Move the engine speed control to high idle.
NOTE: The neutral range (dead-band) will vary

between the hydrostatic pumps.

Linkage Neutral (Adjusting) (Cont’d)
Figure 50-100-32
1
2 2 1
P-48632
Torque the left pump pintle adjustment lock bolts (Item 1)

[Figure 50-100-32] to 47,5 - 54,2 N•m (35 - 40 ft-lb).

Repeat the adjustment procedure for the right pump.
Torque the right pump pintle adjustment lock bolts (Item

2) [Figure 50-100-32] to 47,5 - 54,2 N•m (35 - 40 ft-lb).
Test both levers by moving them backward and forward

and letting them return to neutral by the return spring
force.
If the levers do not return to neutral and the wheels /

tracks do not come to a complete stop, repeat the
adjustment procedure again.
Stop the engine.
Remove one pintle adjustment bolt (Item 1) [Figure 50-

100-32] at a time and apply Loctite® #242 or equivalent
thread locker to the bolt and re-install the bolt. Torque the
bolt to 47,5 - 54,2 N•m (35 - 40 ft-lb). Repeat for the three
remaining pintle adjustment lock bolts.
NOTE: To maintain proper adjustment setting,

remove and reinstall only one bolt at a time.
New bolts can be installed with pre-applied
Loctite®.
Remove the Remote Start Tool (Service Tool).
NOTE: After the neutral adjustment is completed on

both pumps, the linkage travel adjustment
MUST be completed. (See Linkage Travel
(Adjusting) on Page 50-100-14.)

Linkage Travel (Adjusting)
NOTE: When the linkage travel adjusting procedure

is being done as part of the loader neutral
adjusting procedure, check the torsion
bushings at the pump and at the bell cranks to 1
be sure they are not binding or too loose,
which will affect the procedure.
WARNING
P-85845
support device. Failure to use an approved lift arm Loosen the bolt / nut (Item 1) [Figure 50-100-33] only
support device can allow the lift arms or attachment until the tension is released from the torsion bushing.
W-2059-0598
Figure 50-100-34

WARNING
of the frame before running the engine for service. 2
W-2017-0286

1.)
P-54613
Loosen the nuts (Item 1) only until the tension is released
Raise the operator cab. (See Raising on Page 10-30-2.) from the torsion bushings (Item 2) [Figure 50-100-34].
Pre-load tension in the torsion bushings must be The bolts must be loose enough to allow the torsion
removed before adjusting the steering linkage. bushing (Item 2) [Figure 50-100-34] to turn freely
between the torsion bushing and the linkage bar.

Linkage Travel (Adjusting) (Cont’d)
Figure 50-100-35
2
1
1 3
P-51132
Move the right side steering lever forward and install a 24

P-85878 mm (15/16 in) thick spacer (Item 1) between the center
plate (Item 2) and the mounting plate (Item 3) [Figure 50-
100-37].
Locate the control lever drift adjustment access hole in
the front of the control panel. This will allow the pintle arms to move freely while

adjusting the steering linkage for full forward travel
Turn the control lever drift adjustment bolts (Item 1) speed.
[Figure 50-100-35] (one on each control lever) out until
they no longer contact the bellcrank. Remove the 10 mm (3/8 in) thick spacer.
Figure 50-100-36 Figure 50-100-38
3 2
2
4
1
3
1
P-51131 P-51133
Move the right side steering lever to the rear and install a Before adjusting the linkage, verify the base pintle arm
10 mm (3/8 in) thick spacer (Item 1) between the pintle mounting bolt (Item 1) and both of the upper pintle mount
arm cam (Item 2) and the centering block (Item 3) bolts (Item 2) are tightened to 48 - 54 N•m (35 - 40 ft-lb)
[Figure 50-100-36]. torque. There should be no play between the pintle arm
and the square pump shaft [Figure 50-100-38].
Verify the cam mounting nuts (Item 4) [Figure 50-100-

36] are tightened to 48 - 54 N•m (35 - 40 ft-lb) torque.

Linkage Travel (Adjusting) (Cont'd)
Figure 50-100-39
1
1
1
P-51132
Remove the spacer (Item 1) [Figure 50-100-41].

P-85844
Figure 50-100-42
Loosen the two bolts and nuts (Item 1) [Figure 50-100-
39] on each steering linkage bar. 2

Figure 50-100-40
P-54613
Tighten the two bolts (Item 1) and nuts (Item 2) to 47,5 -

54,2 N•m (35 - 40 ft-lb) [Figure 50-100-42].
P-90615
Move the left control lever to the full forward position,

then pull forward on the left rear linkage bar until the
pintle arm is rotated to the front as far as possible
[Figure 50-100-40]. Use a locking plier, clamp the two
linkage bars together.
Installation: Tighten the nuts and bolts to 47,5 - 54,2

Check the lever movement to make sure that the pintle

arm and the control lever are both at full stroke at the
same time. This will allow for maximum forward speed.
Repeat the linkage travel adjustment procedure for the

right side linkage.

Linkage Travel (Adjusting) (Cont'd)
WARNING
1
W-2017-0286
Figure 50-100-43 P-85878
Push the control lever to full stroke and turn drift

adjustment bolt (Item 1) [Figure 50-100-44] and [Figure
50-100-45] in until it contacts the bellcrank.
1
Repeat steps on the other control lever.

Drive the loader forward and check for drift.
The traditional benchmark for drift is less than 3,05 m (10

ft) of “drift” in 30,48 m (100 ft) of travel distance.
If the drift is excessive to the left, turn the right

P-85845 adjustment bolt (Item 1) [Figure 50-100-44] and [Figure
50-100-45] in.
Tighten the two bolts and nuts (Items 1) [Figure 50-100- If the drift is excessive to the right, turn the left
43] to 47,5 - 54,2 N•m (35 - 40 ft-lb) torque at the steering adjustment bolt in.
bell cranks.
NOTE: When using the drift adjustment bolts, only
Installation: After removal, installation, and adjusting of adjust one bolt for each test drive.
the linkage, the Back-up Alarm must be inspected. (See
Inspecting on Page 60-210-1.) In addition, only move each bolt a maximum
of one turn for each test drive. This will help
Figure 50-100-44 prevent over-correction and excessive
reduction in travel speed.
Drift adjustment is for forward travel only.
Adjust the drift to an acceptable level.
Reinstall the plug in the drift bolt access hole after

adjustment.
P-85877

Shock Removal And Installation
Figure 50-100-46
1 2
P-85845
Remove the mounting nuts (Item 1) [Figure 50-100-46]

from the end of the shocks connected to the steering

linkages.
Remove the mounting nuts (Item 2) [Figure 50-100-46]

from the other end of the shocks connected to the
brackets on the control panel.
Installation: Tighten the nuts to torque.

CONTROL PANEL (SJC) Raise the lift arms and install an approved lift arm support
Description
The control panel is connected to the lower main frame
and wraps around the operator seat. There are no Figure 50-101-1
mechanical linkages connecting to the hydrostatic pumps
or the control valve. 1
WARNING
1
W-2017-0286
P-85879
Remove the three mount bolts (Item 1) [Figure 50-101-1]

DANGER

that secure the controller.
Figure 50-101-2
1
1
1
2
1
P-90328
AVOID DEATH
can cause lift arms to drop. 3
1 1
P-85881
D-1009-0409
Remove the 10 panel mount bolts (Item 1) [Figure 50-
101-2].
Remove the lift arm bypass knob and rubber washer

WARNING (Item 2) [Figure 50-101-2].
Remove the control panel (Item 3) [Figure 50-101-2].

W-2059-0598


CONTROL HANDLE / LEVER
Description
The control handles / levers are used to control the

forward and reverse travel.
The control handles / levers are mounted to the control

panel assembly.
Lever Removal And Installation
Figure 50-110-1
2
3

P-85882
Remove the tie strap and disconnect the electrical

connectors (Item 1) [Figure 50-110-1] from the control
lever.
Remove the four nuts (Item 2) and the plate (Item 3)

[Figure 50-110-1] used to mount the control lever.
Remove the control lever (Item 4) [Figure 50-110-1] by

sliding the lever through the control panel.
Installation: Tighten the four nuts to the plate so the

lever cannot be moved either right or left when seated in
the operator’s seat.

CONTROL HANDLE / LEVER (CONT’D)
Boot Removal And Installation
Remove the control handle / lever. (See Lever Removal

Figure 50-110-2
P-85883A

Remove the rubber boot (Item 1) [Figure 50-110-2].
Install the new boot and reinstall the steering lever.

CONTROL HANDLE / LEVER (ACS) Handle Sensor Removal And Installation
Figure 50-111-1 1
P-85882
P-21879
NOTE: The calibration procedure must be followed
when replacing handle sensor, foot pedal
The control handles / levers are used to control the sensor, actuator or ACS Controller. (See Lift
forward and reverse travel and the lift and tilt And Tilt Calibration (ACS) on Page 60-160-11.)

functions.The lift and tilt functions can be controlled by
handle sensors (Item 1) [Figure 50-111-1] that are Loosen the nuts (Item 1) [Figure 50-111-2].
located in the base of the control handle / levers.
Installation: Tighten the nuts so the lever cannot be
The control handles / levers are mounted to the control moved either right or left when seated in the operator
panel. seat.

CONTROL HANDLE / LEVER (ACS) (CONT’D) Figure 50-111-5
Handle Sensor Removal And Installation (Cont’d)
Figure 50-111-3
1 P-21860
2 Remove the handle lock solenoid connector (Item 1)

P-21836 [Figure 50-111-5] from the clip.
NOTE: Pry out with a small screwdriver and push the

Disconnect the harness connector (Item 1) from the connector down.
handle sensor connector [Figure 50-111-3].

Figure 50-111-6
Disconnect the harness connector (Item 2) [Figure 50-
111-3] from the handle lock solenoid connector. 1
Figure 50-111-4
5
1 2
4
1 P-21862
Remove one of the two mounting screws (Item 1) [Figure

P-21861 50-111-6] from the handle sensor.
Installation: Tighten screws to 3,6 - 4,3 N•m (32 - 38 in-

Remove the handle sensor connector (Item 1) [Figure lb) torque.
50-111-4] from the clip.
While removing the mounting pin (Item 2) from the
NOTE: Pry out with a small screwdriver and push the handle sensor, remove the plastic spacer (Item 3), the
connector down. spring (Item 4) and washer (Item 5) [Figure 50-111-6].

Handle Sensor Removal And Installation (Cont'd)

3
Figure 50-111-7
2
P-21878
1 Figure 50-111-10
P-21880
2 3
Remove one of the two mounting screws (Item 1) [Figure
50-111-7] from the handle sensor.

Installation: Tighten bolt to 3,6 - 4,3 N•m (32 - 38 in-lb)
torque.
Figure 50-111-8
7
8
1
P-21799
1
Installation: When installing the handle sensor into the
control handle, check the routing of the switch handle
4 wire harness (Item 1) [Figure 50-111-9] and [Figure 50-
3 111-10] to assure proper return of the control handle to
7 neutral and minimize harness movement.
6
5 NOTE: Route wires (Item 2) [Figure 50-111-9] and
2 [Figure 50-111-10] as shown away from stop
P-21882
strap (Item 3) [Figure 50-111-9] and [Figure 50-
111-10] to avoid wire damage.
Remove the handle sensor (Item 1) [Figure 50-111-8]
from the handle assembly. NOTE: The calibration procedure must be followed
when replacing handle sensor, foot pedal
NOTE: The handle sensor (Item 1) [Figure 50-111-8] sensor, actuator or ACS Controller. (See Lift
can only be replaced as a complete assembly. And Tilt Calibration (ACS) on Page 60-160-11.)
Check the spacer (Item 2), screws (Item 3), mounting

pins (Item 4), spring (Item 5), washer (Item 6), bolt / nut
(Item 7), and stop strap (Item 8) [Figure 50-111-8] and
replace as needed.

Handle Removal And Installation
Figure 50-111-11
1
1
N-17384
Remove the rubber handle cover (Item 1) [Figure 50-

P-21879 111-13] from the handle.
Figure 50-111-14
Remove the handle sensor (Item 1) [Figure 50-111-11].
(See Handle Sensor Removal And Installation on Page

50-111-1.)
Figure 50-111-12 1
1 2
N-17385
Using a small screwdriver, hold the handle spacer (Item

1) and remove the allen head screws (Item 2) [Figure
P16534 50-111-14] from the handle assembly.
Installation: Tighten the allen head screws to 4 N•m (35

Remove the switch handle (Item 1) [Figure 50-111-12]. in-lb) torque.
(See Switch Handle Removal on Page 60-130-4.)

CONTROL HANDLE / LEVER (ACS) (CONT’D) Lever Removal And Installation
Handle Disassembly And Assembly Figure 50-111-17
Figure 50-111-15 2
3
4
2
1
2
P-85882
1
N-17394
Remove the tie strap and disconnect the electrical
connectors (Item 1) [Figure 50-111-17] from the control
Remove the handle sleeve (Item 1) and bushings (Item lever.
2) [Figure 50-111-15] from the handle.

Remove the four nuts (Item 2) and the plate (Item 3)
Check all parts for wear and replace as needed. [Figure 50-111-17] used to mount the control lever.
Figure 50-111-16 Remove the control lever (Item 4) [Figure 50-111-17] by

sliding the lever through the control panel.
Installation: Tighten the four nuts to the plate so the

lever cannot be moved either right or left when seated in
the operator’s seat.
N-22796
Check the mounting bolt (Item 1) [Figure 50-111-16] that

connects the handle to the handle sensor unit for wear,
replace as needed.

CONTROL HANDLE / LEVER (ACS) (CONT’D)
Boot Removal And Installation
Remove the control handle / lever. (See Lever Removal

Figure 50-111-18
P-85883A

Remove the rubber boot (Item 1) [Figure 50-111-18].
Install the new boot and reinstall the steering lever.

CONTROL HANDLE / LEVER (SJC)
Description
The control panel has two electronic handles that control

the steering, lift, and tilt functions. There are no
mechanical connections to the hydrostatic pumps or the
control valve.
Joystick Testing
See Bobcat Advanced Troubleshooting System

(B.A.T.S.) or connect to service analyzer to check
function.

CONTROL HANDLE / LEVER (SJC) (CONT'D) Figure 50-112-3
Joystick Removal And Installation
device. (See Installing on Page 10-20-1.) 1
Figure 50-112-1
P-85891
1 Disconnect the joystick connector (Item 1) [Figure 50-

112-3] from the harness connector.
P-85890

Lift the rubber boot (Item 1) [Figure 50-112-1].
Figure 50-112-2
1
1
P-85889
Remove the four screws (Item 1) [Figure 50-112-2] and

lift the joystick control from the base.
Installation: Tighten the four screws to 47,5 - 54,2 N•m


ACCESS PANEL (INSIDE) Removal And Installation (Right)
Removal And Installation (Left) Remove the control pedal. (See Pedal Removal And
Remove the control pedal. (See Pedal Removal And
Installation on Page 50-90-1.) Figure 50-120-2
Figure 50-120-1
1 1
1
1
2
2
3
3
P-85677A
P-85677
Remove the top mounting screw (Item 1), washer (Item

2), and loosen the two bottom mounting screws (Item 3)
Remove the four mounting screws, (Item 1), washer [Figure 50-120-2] from the front access panel.
(Item 2), and remove the left access panel (Item 3)
[Figure 50-120-1]. Remove the front access panel from the loader.
Remove the front access panel from the loader.


ACCESS PANEL (INSIDE) (SJC) Figure 50-121-3
Removal And Installation (Left)
Figure 50-121-1
2 1
P-90587
2
Remove the two mounting nuts (Item 1), and remove the
P100731 foot rest (Item 2) [Figure 50-121-3].
Figure 50-121-4
Remove the two mounting nuts (Item 1), and remove the
foot rest (Item 2) [Figure 50-121-1].

2
Figure 50-121-2
3 2
1
1
P-90588
2
Remove the bolt and throttle pedal (Item 1), and remove
P100732 the mounting screws (Item 2) [Figure 50-121-4].
Remove the right inside access panel (Item 3) [Figure

Remove the mounting screws (Item 1), and remove the 50-121-4].
inside left access panel (Item 2) [Figure 50-121-2].
Removal And Installation (Right)


WINDOW (REAR) Disassembly And Assembly
WARNING
1
Wear safety glasses to prevent eye injury when any
of the following conditions exist:
• When fluids are under pressure.
• Flying debris or loose material is present.
• Engine is running.
• Tools are being used.
W-2019-0907
P-85705
Figure 50-130-1
Remove the screw (Item 1) from the latch [Figure 50-

130-2].
Installation: Tighten the screw (Item 1) [Figure 50-130-

2] to 21 - 23 N•m (180 - 200 in-lb) torque.
1 1
Figure 50-130-3
7
6
1
P-85706
5
Remove the rear window assembly by turning the two
latches (Item 1) [Figure 50-130-1] in until they disengage
from the window frame. 2
3
Push the rear window out the rear of the operator cab. 4
P-85704
NOTE: If rear window is broken, remove all glass
fragments from the rubber molding before
installing a new window. Inspect and replace any damaged parts.
Clean the area before installing the rear window The items listed below refer to [Figure 50-130-3].
assembly.
1. Latch
Reverse the procedure to install the rear window. 2. Spacer
3. Bushing
4. Washer
5. Screw
6. Rear Window
7. Seal


WINDOW (TOP)
Figure 50-131-1
1 1
P-85807
Install the bolts (Item 1) [Figure 50-131-1] through the

window grommets and through the cab holes.

Figure 50-131-2
1 1
1 1
P-85808
From inside the operator cab, install and tighten the four
nuts (Item 1) [Figure 50-131-2] on the window bolts.
Tighten the nuts (Item 1) [Figure 50-131-2] to 9 - 10 N•m



WINDOW (SIDE) Figure 50-132-3
1 1
Figure 50-132-1
1
1
1
1
2
P-90586
Support the window assembly and remove the six bolts

(Item 1) [Figure 50-132-3] from the window frame and
the operator cab.
P-85821 Installation: Tighten the six bolts (Item 1) [Figure 50-

132-3] to 9 - 10 N•m (80 - 90 in-lb) torque.

Figure 50-132-2 Remove the window assembly.
NOTE: The window assembly can only be replaced

as a complete unit.
1 3 4 5
2
P-85819
From inside the operator cab, remove the plastic cap

(Item 1), nut (Item 2), spring (Item 3), knob (Item 4), and
sleeve (Item 5) [Figure 50-132-1] and [Figure 50-132-2]
from the window assembly.
Installation: Tighten the nut (Item 2) [Figure 50-132-1]

flush to the end of the bolt.


CAB DOOR Figure 50-140-3
Description
The standard cab door is available as an option or dealer

installed kit. 1
Figure 50-140-1
P-85828
Lift the door (Item 1) [Figure 50-140-3] off the hinges.
Figure 50-140-4
2

P-85781A
2 1
Open the cab door.
Disconnect electrical connector (Item 2) and washer fluid

Figure 50-140-2
2
3
2 1
1
P-85837
P-85588A P-85589A
Remove the four bolts and nuts (Item 2) [Figure 50-140-

Rotate and pull the clip (Item 1) out of the gas spring 4] from the cab.
socket. Pull the gas spring socket (Item 3) straight off the
ball stud fitting (Item 2) [Figure 50-140-2]. Remove the hinges (Item 1) [Figure 50-140-4] from the
cab.
Installation: Install the hinges (Item 1) on the cab and

use the bolts and nuts (Item 2) [Figure 50-140-4] to
secure the hinges. Tighten to 9,6 - 10,7 N•m (85 - 90 in-
lb) torque.

CAB DOOR (CONT’D) Figure 50-140-7

2
Figure 50-140-5
4
3
1
1
1
P-85834
1 2
Remove the three bolts (Item 1) and the wiper motor

P-85829 assembly (Item 2) [Figure 50-140-7].
Figure 50-140-8
Remove the nuts (Items 1 and 2) and the wiper arms
(Item 3) [Figure 50-140-5].

2
Installation: Tighten the nut (Item 1) to 20 - 24 N•m (177
- 212 in-lb) torque and nut (Item 2) to 9 - 11 N•m (80 - 97 1
in-lb) torque.
Remove the wiper motor shaft nut (Item 4) [Figure 50-

140-5].
Installation: Tighten the nut (Item 4) to 9,9 - 14 N•m (88

4
- 124 in-lb) torque.
3
Remove the door from the loader. (See Removal And
4
Installation on Page 50-140-1.) P-85835
Figure 50-140-6
Remove the bolt (Item 1), the latch (Item 2), and spring
(Item 3) [Figure 50-140-8].
2
Remove the two nuts and bolts (Item 4) [Figure 50-140-
8].
1 Installation: Tighten the nuts (Item 4) to 31 - 34 N•m

1 1
P-85841
Remove the three tie straps (Item 1) and the wiper motor
assembly cover (Item 2) [Figure 50-140-6].

CAB DOOR (CONT’D) Aligning
Disassembly And Assembly (Cont’d) Figure 50-140-11
Figure 50-140-9 WRONG WRONG
4
P-85832A P-85839A
3
4
P-85836
Figure 50-140-12
Remove the bolt (Item 1), the latch (Item 2), and spring CORRECT CORRECT
(Item 3) [Figure 50-140-9].

9].
Installation: Tighten the nuts (Item 4) to 31 - 34 N•m

Figure 50-140-10
1
1
3
P-85833A P-85838A
1
When the striker or latch is NOT adjusted properly there
will be a gap (Item 1) [Figure 50-140-11] between the
door and the cab or the striker and the latch.
If adjustment is needed. (See Adjusting on Page 50-140-

4.)
2 2
When the striker or latch is adjusted properly there will be
P-85830A no gap (Item 1) [Figure 50-140-12] between the door
and the cab or the striker and the latch.
Disconnect the harness (Item 1) [Figure 50-140-10]. After verifying alignment check for proper operation. (See
Checking Operation on Page 50-140-4.)
Remove the two bolts (Item 2), and the latch assembly
(Item 3) from the cab door [Figure 50-140-10].
Remove the glass from the frame.

CAB DOOR (CONT’D) Checking Operation
Adjusting Figure 50-140-15
Figure 50-140-13
1
1
P-85413
P-85830
Sit in operator’s seat. Turn key ON, lower seat bar and
close the door. Press the PRESS TO OPERATE
Loosen the two bolts (Item 1) [Figure 50-140-13] and LOADER button (Item 1) [Figure 50-140-15].
adjust the latch as needed.

Open the door. The LIFT & TILT VALVE light (Item 2)
Figure 50-140-14 [Figure 50-140-15] will flash, an audible tone will sound,
and the message [DOOR] will appear in the display.
Close the door and the LIFT & TILT VALVE light (Item 2)
[Figure 50-140-15] will go out and the display will return
to machine hours.
P-85831
Loosen the striker and adjust as needed (Item 1) [Figure

50-140-14].
After adjusting the striker and latch recheck the

alignment of the door sensor. (See Aligning on Page 50-
140-3.)

ARMREST
Description
The armrests are located on each side of the seat. They

are adjustable for comfort.
Figure 50-150-1
P-90837

Adjustable armrests (Item 1) [Figure 50-150-1].

ARMREST (CONT’D) Figure 50-150-4
Slide the seat and the backrest all the way forward.
1
Remove the seat belt. (See Seat Belt Removal And
Figure 50-150-2
P-90845
Remove the top spacer (Item 1) and the bottom spacer

(Item 2) [Figure 50-150-4] from the seat.
1 Repeat for the other side.

P-90835

2].
Figure 50-150-3
P-90836
Remove the tie strap (Item 1) and disconnect the wire

harness connector (Item 2) [Figure 50-150-3].
Remove the nut (Item 3) [Figure 50-150-3].
Remove the armrest (Item 4) [Figure 50-150-3] from the

seat.

Remove the Joystick. (See Joystick Removal And

Remove the armrest. (See Removal And Installation on

Page 50-150-2.)
Figure 50-150-5
1
1
P-90840
Remove the two washers (Item 1) [Figure 50-150-7].
Figure 50-150-8

1
P-90838
2
Lift up on one edge and remove armrest cover (Item 1)
[Figure 50-150-5].
Figure 50-150-6
1 P-90841
2
Remove the two nuts and bolts (Item 1) and the support
tube (Item 2) [Figure 50-150-8].
1 1
P-90839
Remove the two bolts and washers (Item 1) and the

armrest shell (Item 2) [Figure 50-150-6].

Figure 50-150-9
1 1
3
2
2
P-90844
1
Remove the two nuts (Item 1) and the slide rail (Item 2)
P-90842 [Figure 50-150-11] from the armrest mount.
Repeat for the other side.

Figure 50-150-10

3
6
5 2
4 1
P-90843
Remove the nut (Item 1), washer (Item 2), and the plastic
washer (Item 3) [Figure 50-150-9] and [Figure 50-150-
10].
Remove the spacer (Item 4), plastic washer (Item 5), and
the bolt (Item 6) [Figure 50-150-10].
Installation: Tighten the nut to 21 - 23 N•m (180 - 200 in-

lb) torque.

LEFT SIDE LOWER PANEL Figure 50-160-3
Raise the operator’s cab.
Figure 50-160-1
1
1
1 1
P-90863 P-90856
1
Disconnect the wiper washer pump (Item 1) (if equipped)
1
[Figure 50-160-3] from the left side lower panel.
P-90897 Figure 50-160-4
Remove the five plastic rivets (Item 1) [Figure 50-160-1].

Remove the seat. (See Removal And Installation on
Page 50-30-1.)
1
Remove the 3-Point seat belt retractor (If equipped).
(See 3-Point Seat Belt Removal And Installation on Page 1
50-30-4.)
Lower the operator’s cab. 1
Figure 50-160-2 P-90856
Remove three plastic screws and the anchors (Item 1)

P-90867
Remove the storage compartment (Item 1) (if equipped)


LEFT SIDE LOWER PANEL (CONT’D) Figure 50-160-7
Figure 50-160-5
2
1 1
P-90858
1 Disconnect the hose (if equipped) (Item 1) and remove

P-90855 the hose (Item 2) [Figure 50-160-7] from the panel.
Figure 50-160-8
Remove the three plastic rivets and anchors (Item 1) and
the screw (Item 2) [Figure 50-160-5].

Figure 50-160-6
2 1
1
P-90852
Pull the left side lower panel (Item 1) [Figure 50-160-8]

P-90857 rear out and away from the side of the cab.
NOTE: Pull the left side lower panel away from the
Remove the two screws (Item 1) and the plastic rivet side of the cab far enough to access the wire
(Item 2) [Figure 50-160-6]. harness.

LEFT SIDE LOWER PANEL (CONT’D) Disassembly And Assembly
Figure 50-160-9 1
1 1
1 1
1
1
P-90860
P-90859
Press the four tabs (Item 1) [Figure 50-160-10] and
remove the HVAC control out of the left side lower panel.
Disconnect the HVAC or radio wire harnesses (Item 1)
[Figure 50-160-9] (if equipped). Figure 50-160-11

1
P-90865
NOTE: If the three clips (Item 1) [Figure 50-160-11] are

removed the cup holder will need to be
replaced.

LEFT SIDE LOWER PANEL (CONT’D)
Figure 50-160-12
1 1
1
1
P-90866

remove the speaker from the left side lower panel.

Figure 50-160-13
P-90864

and remove the washer tank from the left side lower
panel.

RIGHT SIDE LOWER PANEL Figure 50-170-3
Removal And Installation 2
Raise the operator’s cab.

1
Figure 50-170-1
1
1 1
1
P-90870
1
Remove the three plastic rivets and anchors (Item 1) and
1 the screw (Item 2) [Figure 50-170-3].
P-90897 Figure 50-170-4

Remove the five plastic rivets (Item 1) [Figure 50-170-1].
Remove the seat. (See Removal And Installation on

Page 50-30-1.)
2
1
Lower the operator’s cab.
Figure 50-170-2 1
1
1 P-90871
1
Remove the two screws (Item 1) and the plastic rivet
(Item 2) [Figure 50-170-4].
P-90869
Remove the three plastic screws and the anchors (Item

1) [Figure 50-170-2] from the right side lower panel.

RIGHT SIDE LOWER PANEL (CONT’D) Disassembly And Assembly
Figure 50-170-5
P-90879
P-90872
Remove the plastic nut and the lock washer (Item 1)
[Figure 50-170-7] from power port and remove the
Pull the right side lower panel (Item 1) [Figure 50-170-5] power port from the right side lower panel.
rear out and away from the side of the cab.

NOTE: The power port lock washer must be replaced
NOTE: Pull the right side lower panel away from the with a new when it has been removed.
side of the cab far enough to access the wire
harness. Figure 50-170-8
Figure 50-170-6
2 1
1
P-90877
2
1
P-90881
P-90873
Depress the tab (Item 1) [Figure 50-170-8] and remove
the radio from the right side lower panel.
Disconnect the wire harnesses (Item 1) and the antenna
(Item 2) [Figure 50-170-6] (if equipped with radio). Installation: Insert a screwdriver into the slot (Item 2)
[Figure 50-170-8] to lock the tab into place.
NOTE: Install the right side lower panel with the radio
removed to assist in connecting the power
port wire.

RIGHT SIDE LOWER PANEL (CONT’D)
Figure 50-170-9
P-90875
Remove the nut, washer, and cover, (Item 1) [Figure 50-

170-9] from the input.

Remove the input from the right side lower panel.
Figure 50-170-10
1
1
1
1
P-90876

remove the speaker from the right side lower panel.


HEADLINER Figure 50-180-3
Figure 50-180-1
1 1
1
P-90895
2
Remove the air duct (Item 1) [Figure 50-180-3] (if
P-90893 equipped).
Remove the cab light (if equipped). (See Cab Light

Remove the two screws (Item 1) and the rear shelf (Item Removal And Installation on Page 60-60-2.)
2) [Figure 50-180-1] (if equipped).

Figure 50-180-4
NOTE: The rear shelf has two panel clips on the
underneath side, lift vertically to disengage.
Installation: Tighten the screws to 2,3 N•m (20 in-lb)

torque.
1
1
Figure 50-180-2
1
1
2
1 P-90896
Remove the four retainers (Item 1) and remove the

headliner (Item 2) [Figure 50-180-4].
Installation: Route the cab light wire harness in the

P-90894 grove on the topside of the headliner (if equipped with
HVAC).
Remove the air duct (Item 1) [Figure 50-180-2] (if NOTE: Replace the retainers if needed.
equipped).


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM & ANALYSIS
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-10-1

Glossary Of Electrical Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-10-1
Standard Cab Harness Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-10-4
Deluxe Cab Harness Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-10-5
Mainframe Harness Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-10-6
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-10-7
Fuse And Relay Location / Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-10-9
Solenoid Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-10-11
BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-20-1
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-20-2
Using A Booster Battery (Jump Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-20-3
ALTERNATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-30-1
Belt Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-30-1
Belt Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-30-1
Charging System Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-30-2

Alternator Voltage Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-30-3
Low Voltage Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-30-3
High Voltage Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-30-4
STARTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-40-1
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-40-1
INSTRUMENT PANELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-50-1

Left Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-50-1
Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-50-3
Right Panel (Standard Key Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-50-4
Right Panel (Keyless Start Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-50-5
Right Panel (Deluxe Instrumentation Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-50-6
Left Switch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-50-8
Right Switch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-50-8
Left Panel Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-50-9
Right Panel (Standard Key Panel) Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-50-9
Right Panel (Keyless Start Panel) Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-50-10
Right Panel (Deluxe Instrumentation Panel) Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . 60-50-10
Key Switch Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-50-11
Alarm Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-50-11
Left Switch Panel Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-50-12
Right Switch Panel Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-50-12

LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-60-1
Front Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-60-1
Rear Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-60-2
Cab Light Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-60-2
BOBCAT CONTROLLERS (GATEWAY AND AUXILIARY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-70-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-70-1
Connector Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-70-2
BOBCAT CONTROLLER (ACS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-71-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-71-1
Connector And Wire Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-71-2
BOBCAT CONTROLLER (SJC) (DRIVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-72-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-72-1
Connector Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-72-2
SPEED SENSORS (SJC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-80-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-80-1
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-80-1
DIAGNOSTIC SERVICE CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-90-1

Viewing Service Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-90-1
Service Codes List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-90-2
BOBCAT INTERLOCK CONTROL SYSTEM (BICS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-100-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-100-1
Inspecting The BICS (Engine STOPPED - Key ON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-100-2
Inspecting Deactivation Of The Auxiliary Hydraulics System (Engine STOPPED - Key ON)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-100-2
Inspecting The Seat Bar Sensor (Engine RUNNING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-100-2
Inspecting The Traction Lock (Engine RUNNING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-100-2
Inspecting The Lift Arm Bypass Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-100-2
Inspecting Deactivation Of Lift And Tilt Functions (ACS And SJC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-100-2
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-100-3
SEAT BAR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-110-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-110-1
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-110-1
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-110-2
Bobcat Interlock Control System (BICS) Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-110-6

TRACTION LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-120-1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-120-1
Inspecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-120-3
CONTROL SYSTEM (ACS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-130-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-130-1
Handle Sensor Connector Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-130-3
Switch Handle Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-130-4
Switch Handle Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-130-6
Actuator Connector Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-130-9
Handle Lock Solenoid Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-130-10
Handle Lock Solenoid Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-130-10
Foot Sensor Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-130-11
Foot Sensor Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-130-12
Foot Sensor Lock Solenoid Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-130-12
ELECTRICAL / HYDRAULIC CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-140-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-140-2

Identification Chart ACD Group 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-140-3
ELECTRICAL / HYDRAULIC CONTROLS (ACS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-141-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-141-2
ELECTRICAL / HYDRAULIC CONTROLS (SJC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-142-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-142-2
SERVICE PC (LAPTOP COMPUTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-150-1

Connecting Remote Start Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-150-1
Connecting Remote Start Tool (Service Tool) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-150-1

CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-160-1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-160-1
Actuator Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-160-1
Lift And Tilt Calibration (SJC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-160-4
Hydrostatic Pump Calibration (SJC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-160-6
Lift And Tilt Calibration (ACS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-160-11
STEERING DRIFT COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-161-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-161-1
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-161-1
FLYWHEEL RPM SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-170-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-170-1
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-170-2
CONTROL PANEL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-180-1

Right Panel Setup (Deluxe Instrumentation Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-180-1
PASSWORD SETUP (DELUXE INSTRUMENTATION PANEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-190-1

Password Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-190-1
Changing The Owner Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-190-1

Changing The User Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-190-2
Password Lockout Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-190-2
PASSWORD SETUP (KEYLESS START PANEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-191-1

Password Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-191-1
Changing The Owner Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-191-1
Password Lockout Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-191-1
MAINTENANCE CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-200-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-200-1
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-200-2
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-200-5
BACK-UP ALARM SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-210-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-210-1
Inspecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-210-1
Adjusting Switch Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-210-2
Troubleshooting (Standard And ACS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-210-3
Troubleshooting (Joystick) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-210-4
Alarm Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-210-5
Switch Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-210-5
FRONT HORN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-220-1


CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENTS
NUM OF NUM OF NUM OF
CONN DESCRIPTION SHEET CONN DESCRIPTION SHEET CONN DESCRIPTION SHEET
PINS PINS PINS
C101 FUEL SHUTOFF SOLENOID 3 6 C423 BUCKET POSITION 2 13 FC1 FUSE CENTER 1 8 3
C103 TAILGATE 8 4,10,11,13 C425 BRAKE SOLENOID 3 7 FC2 FUSE CENTER 2 8 3
C104 ENGINE COOLANT SENSOR 2 6 C426 CAN (Remote Start Tool, ACD) 7 5 FRC1 FUSE RELAY CENTER 64 3,6,7,11,12
C105 HYD CHARGE PRESSURE 3 7 C434-1 LEFT WORKLIGHT 1 2 11
C106 ENGINE SPEED SENSOR 2 6 C434-2 LEFT WORKLIGHT 2 2 11 J1A GATEWAY CONTROLLER 34 3,6-8,10-13
C107 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE 3 6 C435-1 RIGHT WORKLIGHT 1 2 11 J1B GATEWAY CONTOLLER 26 3-10,13
C108 HYD TEMPERATURE SENDER 2 7 C435-2 RIGHT WORKLIGHT 2 2 11 J2A AUX CONTROLLER 34 7,10,13
C109 S/R ADAPTER HARNESS 2 6 C437 TWO SPEED MAKEUP 2 13 J2B AUX CONTROLLER 26 3,4,5,7,10,13
C110 ALTERNATOR 2 6 C441 TWO SPEED 2 13
C112 HYD OIL FILTER SWITCH 2 7 C446 HYDRAULIC FAN 2 7 SW1 BRAKE SWITCH 6 8
C126 HORN 2 13 C449 LEFT JOYSTICK (CAB HARN) 4 5 SW2 BEACON SWITCH 6 13
C129 CAB ACCESSORY 3 9 C450 RIGHT JOYSTICK (CAB HARN) 4 5 SW3 HAZARD SWITCH 6 13
C209 DOME LIGHT 3 9 C479 LEFT PANEL(BLACK) 12 5,8 SW4 HAND/FOOT, H/ISO SWITCH 6 9
C212 POWER SOCKET 2 9 C480 LEFT PANEL(GRAY) 12 8 SW5 POWER BOBTACH SWITCH 6 13
C252 WASHER 2 9 C482 SEATBAR SENSOR 3 9 SW6 BUCKET POSITION SWITCH 6 13
C277 AIR RIDE SEAT 6 13 C483 TEMP CONTROL SWITCH 3 12 SW9 TRAVEL CONTROL SWITCH 6 8
C278 RIGHT SPEAKER 2 13 C486 AC COMPRESSOR 2 12 SW10 BLOWER SWITCH 5 12
C279 LEFT SPEAKER 2 13 C489 MFR ACCESSORY 2 3,4 SW11 AC SWITCH 3 12
C308 BRAKE SOLENOID 2 7 C499 PTOL 4 8
C350 AC EVAPORATOR SWITCH 2 12 C500 RH KEY SWITCH 6 8 T1 BATT GROUND 1 4
C355 DLX or STD FUEL HARNESS 6 6,12,13 C503 RH DLX PANEL 6 5,8 T2 BUZZER GROUND 1 8
C404 BU ALARM-MFR HARN 2 3,10 C602 LEFT REAR TAIL LIGHT 2 11 T3 FLASHER 2 13
C405 AIR FILTER SWITCH 2 6 C603 RIGHT REAR TAIL LIGHT 2 11 T6 BATT GROUND 1 4
C406 FUEL SENDER 2 6 C606 POWER BOBTACH OPEN 2 13 T8 BATT GROUND 1 4
C408 CAB - MFR HARN CONNECTOR 48 3-5,8,9,11-13 C607 POWER BOBTACH CLOSE 2 13 T13 BUZZER POWER 1 8
C409 RIGHT HANDLE 10 10 C610 HVAC DUCT FAN 2 12 T14 PRE HEATER 1 6
C410 LEFT HANDLE 10 10 C611 BLOWER MOTOR 4 12 T15 RIGHT REAR WORK LIGHT(+) 1 11
C411 LEFT HANDLE 5 WAY (FLSHR) 5 13 C630 THERMOSTAT 3 12 T16 RIGHT REAR WORK LIGHT(-) 1 11
C412 LEFT HANDLE 2 WAY (HORN) 2 13 C635 HEATER VALVE 6 12 T17 LEFT REAR WORK LIGHT (+) 1 11
C415 HIGH FLOW SOLENOID 2 13 C667 DOOR 6 9 T18 LEFT REAR WORK LIGHT (-) 1 11
C418 FRONT ROD (MALE) 2 7 C670 EXTERIOR BEACON Dealer
6 Copy 13
-- Not for T19
Resale BACKUP ALARM 1 10
C419 FRONT BASE (FEMALE) 2 7 C676 RADIO 6 13 T20 BACKUP ALARM (GND) 1 10
C420 HYD LOCK 2 7
C421 TILT SPOOL LOCK 3 10
C422 TILT SPOOL LCOK 3 10
WIRE CATEGORIES FOR COLORS AND NUMBER RANGE SCHEMATIC INDEX

GROUP DESCRIPTION GROUP NUMBER RANGE WIRE COLOR COLOR CODE OVERVIEW PAGE 1,2
BATT FEED, GENERAL 1000 THROUGH 1499 RED RED POWER PAGE 3
BATT FEED, FUSED 1000 THROUGH 1499 RED/WHITE RED/WHT GROUND PAGE 4
BATT FEED, SWITCHED 1500 THROUGH 1999 ORANGE/WHITE RNG/WHT CAN BUS PAGE 5
BATTERY GROUND
CONTROLLER GROUND/RETURN
2000 THROUGH 2999
2000 THROUGH 2999
BLACK
BROWN
BLK
BRN
ENGINE
HYDRAULICS
PAGE 6
PAGE 7
WIRING SCHEMATIC
LBL
MONITORING
HYDRAULIC
3000 THROUGH 3999
4000 THROUGH 4999
LIGHT BLUE
LIGHT GREEN LGN
CAB DISPLAY
CAB
PAGE 8
PAGE 9
(STANDARD MACHINE)
CONTROLLER SUPPLY
LIGHTS
5000 THROUGH 5999
6000 THROUGH 6999
YELLOW
PINK
YEL
PNK
MANUAL CONTROLS
LIGHTS
PAGE 10
PAGE 11
OTHER FUNCTIONS 7000 THROUGH 7999 WHITE WHT HVAC PAGE 12 Printable Version Click Here
ENGINE 8000 THROUGH 8999 TAN TAN OPTIONS PAGE 13
COMMUNICATION
COMMUNICATION
9000 THROUGH 9999
9000 THROUGH 9999
PURPLE
PURPLE/WHITE
PUR
PUR/WHT
Sheet 1 of 13
517 of 898 Printed In U.S.A. 7197683
J1 CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENTS(GATEWAY CONTROLLER) J2 CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENTS(AUXILLIARY CONTROLLER)
PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION
A-1 HYDRAULIC LOCK RETURN B-1 HYD CHARGE PRESS A-1 FRONT AUX (F) RETURN B-1
A-2 LIFT SPOOL LOCK RETURN B-2 UNSW BATT A-2 REAR AUX (F) RETURN B-2 UNSW BATT
A-3 FUEL PULL RELAY B-3 UNSW BATT A-3 B-3 UNSW BATT
A-4 SWITCHED POWER OUT RELAY B-4 FUEL HOLD A-4 B-4 DIVERTED SOLENOID
A-5 LIGHT 1 RELAY B-5 LIFT SPOOL LOCK A-5 B-5 REAR AUX (F)
A-6 GLOW PLUG RELAY B-6 TRACTION LOCK HOLD A-6 B-6 RELIEF SOLENOID
A-7 STARTER RELAY B-7 TILT SPOOL LOCK A-7 B-7 REAR AUX (M)
A-8 TRACTION PULL RELAY B-8 CAN LO 1 A-8 B-8 CAN LO 1
A-9 B-9 CAN HI 1 A-9 B-9 CAN HI 1
A-10 TILT SPOOL LOCK RETURN B-10 A-10 REAR AUX (M) RETURN B-10
A-11 SPARE DIGITAL, ECU SINKS B-11 SEAT BAR A-11 LH PADDLE RIGHT B-11
A-12 B-12 FUEL LEVEL A-12 LH PADDLE LEFT B-12
A-13 TRACTION PULL RELAY FDBK B-13 BICS HYD LOCK HOLD A-13 RH RIGHT BUTTON UP B-13 FRONT AUX (F)
A-14 GLOW PLUG RELAY FDBK B-14 CAN HI 2 A-14 B-14
A-15 ENGINE SPEED B-15 GROUND P1 A-15 B-15 GROUND
A-16 AIR FILTER SWITCH B-16 GROUND P2 A-16 B-16 GROUND
A-17 LIGHT 2 RELAY B-17 GROUND P3, SENSOR A-17 B-17 HANDLE POT GND
A-18 FAN 2 RELAY B-18 ENGINE COOLANT TEMP (8 VOLT) A-18 FRONT AUX (M) RETURN B-18 RH PWM POT SIGNAL
A-19 PTOL LED B-19 FAN 2 OUTPUT A-19 B-19 FRONT AUX (M)
A-20 PTOL SWITCH B-20 CAN LO 2 A-20 B-20
A-21 SWITCHED POWER OUT RELAY FDBK B-21 REMOTE KEY A-21 B-21 RH TRIGGER
A-22 STATER RELAY FDBK B-22 RUN/ENTER A-22 LH RIGHT BUTTON DOWN B-22 SWITCHED POWER
A-23 B-23 SENSOR SUPPLY 8V A-23 B-23 HANDLE POT POWER (8 VOLT)
A-24 START ENGINE B-24 SENSOR SUPPLY 5V A-24 B-24
A-25 ENGINE OIL PRESS B-25 TWO SPEED MAKEUP A-25 B-25
A-26 SPARE B-26 TWO SPEED COIL A-26 HIGH FLOW RETURN B-26 HIGH FLOW
A-27 SPARE A-27
A-28 LIGHT 2 RELAY FDBK A-28 LH RIGHT BUTTON
A-29 A-29
A-30 FUEL PULL RELAY FDBK A-30 RH LEFT UP
A-31 LIGHT 1 RELAY FDBK A-31 RH LEFT DOWN
A-32 HYD OIL TEMP (8 VOLT) Dealer
A-32 Copy -- Not for Resale
A-33 A-33
A-34 HYD OIL FILTER SW1 A-34
HARNESS PART NUMBER

EXMF 7199263
MAINFRAME
LF 7196823
DLX CAB 7196753
STD CAB 7195991
DLX FUEL 7184255
STD FUEL 7149219
S/R 6733370
TAILGATE DOM 7175271
TRK BRAKE ADP 7165061
WHL 2 SPD ADP 7159366
WIRING SCHEMATIC
(STANDARD MACHINE)
Sheet 2 of 13
Printed In U.S.A. 7197683

518 of 898
1240/RED/WHT WIRE CATEGORIES FOR COLORS AND NUMBER RANGE
SHEET 8 GROUP DESCRIPTION GROUP NUMBER RANGE WIRE COLOR COLOR CODE
POWER
C503 RH DLX PANEL
C408 BATT FEED, GENERAL 1000 THROUGH 1499 RED RED
1400/RED/WHT BATT FEED, FUSED 1000 THROUGH 1499 RED/WHITE RED/WHT
CAB-MFR HARN SHEET 9
C667 DOOR HARNESS BATT FEED, SWITCHED 1500 THROUGH 1999 ORANGE/WHITE RNG/WHT
1450/RED/WHT 17 1450/RED/WHT 1420/RED/WHT BATTERY GROUND 2000 THROUGH 2999 BLACK BLK
SHEET 8
C500 RH KEY SWITCH CONTROLLER GROUND/RETURN 2000 THROUGH 2999 BROWN BRN
FC1 FUSE CENTER 1440/RED/WHT MONITORING 3000 THROUGH 3999 LIGHT BLUE LBL
2 SHEET 8
FUSE 1 25 A 1110/RED/WHT J1B HYDRAULIC 4000 THROUGH 4999 LIGHT GREEN LGN
C479 LH PANEL
1070/RED 1120/RED/WHT 1130/RED/WHT 3 GWY CTRLR CONTROLLER SUPPLY 5000 THROUGH 5999 YELLOW YEL
LIGHTS 6000 THROUGH 6999 PINK PNK
+12V 1025/RED
FUSE 2 25 A
1160/RED/WHT 1150/RED/WHT 3
OTHER FUNCTIONS
ENGINE
7000 THROUGH 7999
8000 THROUGH 8999
WHITE
TAN
WHT
TAN
J2B
BATTERY MEGAFUSE 1180/RED/WHT 2 AUX CTRLR COMMUNICATION 9000 THROUGH 9999 PURPLE PUR
100.0 Amps FUSE 3 OPEN COMMUNICATION 9000 THROUGH 9999 PURPLE/WHITE PUR/WHT
BATT_CABLE
LEGEND
SCHEMATIC INDEX
FUSE 4 OPEN PARTIAL CONNECTOR
OVERVIEW PAGE 1,2
POWER PAGE 3
GROUND PAGE 4
1010/RED
SHEET 6 CAN BUS PAGE 5
STARTER FC2 FUSE CENTER ENGINE PAGE 6
CONNECTOR
FUSE 1 25 A HYDRAULICS PAGE 7
1190/RED 1165/RED/WHT CAB DISPLAY PAGE 8
SHEET 5
C426 REMOTE RUN, ACD CAB PAGE 9
FUSE 2 25 A MANUAL CONTROLS PAGE 10
1040/RED 1490/RED/WHT 1410/RED/WHT WIRE BREAK
SHEET 13
(TWO WIRE BREAKS LIGHTS PAGE 11
C408 CAB-MFR CONN (OPTIONS)
FUSE 3 OPEN JOIN ONE WIRE) HVAC PAGE 12
1460/RED/WHT
SHEET 13 SHEET # OPTIONS PAGE 13
C412 LH HANDLE HORN
FUSE 4 15 A ACS PAGE 14
1290/RED 1370/RED/WHT
SHEET 9 SJC PAGE 15
C408 CAB-MFR CONN (ACCESSORIES)
FRC1 FUSE RELAY CENTER

1050/RED
FUSE 5 30 A
1350/RED/WHT
SHEET 6
SHEET 6 1060/RED FRC1 FUEL SHUTOFF RELAY
FUSE 6 30 A
FRC1 PRE HEATER RELAY 1310/RED 1360/RED/WHT
SHEET 7
1030/RED FRC1 TRACTION LOCK RELAY
SHEET 6
FUSE 9 15 A 1320/RED/WHT
FRC1 STARTER RELAY
SHEET 11
FUSE 10 20 A 1330/RED/WHT Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale
FRC1 REAR LIGH RELAY
1340/RED SHEET 11
FRC1 FRONT LIGHT RELAY
C404
FUSE 11 25 A BU ALARM-MFR HARN
1620/RNG/WHT
1300/RED 1140/RED/WHT 1720/RNG/WHT B SHEET 8
SHEET 12 (SEE ADDITIONAL C479 LH PANEL
FUSE1 25 A FRC1 HVAC RELAY OPTIONS SHEET)
1750/RNG/WHT 1940/RNG/WHT
SHEET 8
A T13 LH PANEL BUZZER
FUSE 2 25 A 1780/RNG/WHT C489
1760/RNG/WHT 1850/RNG/WHT SHEET 9 1930/RNG/WHT
MFR ACCESSORY SHEET 8
C408 CAB-MFR CONN (FR WIPER) C499 RH PANEL PTOL
FUSE 3 15 A 1550/RNG/WHT
SHEET 13 C408 1775/RNG/WHT
C408 CAB-MFR CONN (BKT POSITION) CAB-MFR HARN SHEET 8
SW1 BRAKE SWITCH
FUSE4 5 A 1660/RNG/WHT 1660/RNG/WHT 1590/RNG/WHT
43
SHEET 8
1530/RNG/WHT SHEET 10 C503 RH DELUXE PANEL
C410 LEFT HANDLE
1570/RNG/WHT 1520/RNG/WHT 1950/RNG/WHT
SHEET 10 SHEET 8
C409 RIGHT HANDLE J2B C500 RH PANEL KEY SWITCH
FUSE 7 25 A 1560/RNG/WHT 22
1795/RNG/WHT 1730/RNG/WHT AUX CTRLR
SHEET 5 1785/RNG/WHT
SHEET 9
C426 REMOTE RUN, ACD SW4 H/ISO SWITCH
FUSE 8 25 A
FRC1 1580/RNG/WHT
SWITCHED C408 CAB-MFR CONN (ACCESSORIES, OPTIONS) SHEET 8
POWER RELAY FUSE 12 15 A SW9 TRAVEL CONTROL SWITCH
SHEET 6
1050/RED 30
87
J1A
GWY CTRLR 1790/RNG/WHT
C110 ALT EXCITATION
SHEET 12
WIRING SCHEMATIC
2055/BLK 85 86 3380/LBL 4 C408 FRC1 HVAC RELAY
SHEET 6
SHEET 12
2030/BLK
CAB-MFR HARN
(STANDARD MACHINE)
1920/RNG/WHT 6 1920/RNG/WHT 1840/RNG/WHT
1830/RNG/WHT
SHEET 5
C449 LH JOYSTICK T750 (S/N ANKA11001 AND ABOVE)
SHEET 5
C450 RH JOYSTICK Printable Version Click Here
Sheet 3 of 13
519 of 898
LEGEND
WIRE CATEGORIES FOR COLORS AND NUMBER RANGE SCHEMATIC INDEX PARTIAL CONNECTOR
GROUND
BATTERY GROUND 2000 THROUGH 2999 BLACK BLK ENGINE PAGE 6 CONNECTOR
CONTROLLER GROUND/RETURN 2000 THROUGH 2999 BROWN BRN HYDRAULICS PAGE 7
MONITORING 3000 THROUGH 3999 LIGHT BLUE LBL CAB DISPLAY PAGE 8
HYDRAULIC 4000 THROUGH 4999 LIGHT GREEN LGN CAB PAGE 9
CONTROLLER SUPPLY 5000 THROUGH 5999 YELLOW YEL MANUAL CONTROLS PAGE 10 WIRE BREAK
LIGHTS 6000 THROUGH 6999 PINK PNK (TWO WIRE BREAKS
LIGHTS PAGE 11
OTHER FUNCTIONS 7000 THROUGH 7999 WHITE WHT JOIN ONE WIRE)
HVAC PAGE 12
ENGINE 8000 THROUGH 8999 TAN TAN SHEET #
OPTIONS PAGE 13
COMMUNICATION 9000 THROUGH 9999 PURPLE PUR
ACS PAGE 14
COMMUNICATION 9000 THROUGH 9999 PURPLE/WHITE PUR/WHT
SJC PAGE 15
2080/BLK
SHEET 5
C449 LH JOYSTICK
2070/BLK
SHEET 5
C450 RH JOYSTICK
2920/BLK C408
SHEET 8 CAB-MFR HARN
C479 LH PANEL
2940/BLK 2950/BLK 32 2950/BLK
SHEET 8
C499 PTOL
2960/BLK 16 2510/BLK 2110/BLK T6
SHEET 8 J1B BATT GND
C500 RH PANEL KEY SWITCH GWY CTRLR 15 2500/BLK
2250/BLK
SHEET 8 2765/BLK
C503 RH DELUXE PANEL SHEET 11
16 2540/BLK C408 CAB-MFR CONN (FR LIGHTS) T8
J2B 15 2745/BLK BATT GND
2550/BLK 2090/BLK SHEET 12
2930/BLK AUX CTRLR
SHEET 8 C408 CAB-MFR CONN (HVAC)
SW1 BRAKE SWITCH 2790/BLK
2830/BLK 2900/BLK 42 2900/BLK SHEET 9
SHEET 13 C408 CAB-MFR CONN (ACCESSORIES)
SW6 BKT POSITION SWITCH
2780/BLK
SHEET 8 2700/BLK SHEET 13
SW9 TRAVEL CONTROL SWITCH C408 CAB-MFR CONN (OPTIONS)
2785/BLK 2730/BLK
SHEET 13
C126 HORN
Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale SHEET 9
C408 CAB-MFR CONN (ACCESSORIES,OPTIONS)
2105/BLK
SHEET 11
2620/BLK
SHEET 11 T1
T16 RH REAR LIGHT
C103 BATT GND
2630/BLK C489
SHEET 11 TAILGATE HARN B 2720/BLK
T18 LH REAR LIGHT MFR ACCESSORY
2650/BLK 2600/BLK B 2600/BLK
SHEET 10
T20 BU ALARM 2400/BLK 2390/BLK
SHEET 6
2640/BLK C101 FUEL SHUTOFF SOLENOID
SHEET 11 2200/BLK
C602 LH REAR LIGHT SHEET 7
2610/BLK C425 BRAKE
SHEET 11 2770/BLK
C603 RH REAR LIGHT SHEET 13
C355 FUEL HARN (PWR BOB/AC)
2455/BLK
2170/BRN SHEET 13
SHEET 6 C423 BKT POSITION SOLENOID
C104 ENGINE COOLANT SENSOR 2710/BLK 2300/BLK
SHEET 5
SHEET 6 2160/BRN C426 REMOTE RUN, ACD
C106 ENGINE SPEED SENSOR
2320/BRN
SHEET 7
C112 HYD OIL FILTER SWITCH
2370/BRN J1B
SHEET 9
C408 CAB-MFR CONN (SEATBAR SENSOR) GWY CTRLR
SHEET 7
2220/BRN
C108 HYD TEMP SENDER
2230/BRN 17
WIRING SCHEMATIC
SHEET 7 2190/BRN
C105 HYD CHG PRESSURE SENDER
(STANDARD MACHINE)
SHEET 6
2180/BRN T750 (S/N ANKA11001 AND ABOVE)
C355 FUEL HARN (FUEL SENDER)
2140/BRN
SHEET 6
C107 ENG OIL PRESS SENDER
2150/BRN
Sheet 4 of 13
SHEET 6
C405 AIR FILTER SWITCH (PRINTED NOVEMBER 2010)

520 of 898
LEGEND
CAN BUS
CONTROLLER SUPPLY 5000 THROUGH 5999 YELLOW YEL WIRE BREAK
MANUAL CONTROLS
LIGHTS
PAGE 10
PAGE 11 (TWO WIRE BREAKS * DLX CAB HARN 7196753 ONLY
HVAC PAGE 12
ENGINE
COMMUNICATION
8000 THROUGH 8999
9000 THROUGH 9999
TAN
PURPLE
TAN
PUR
OPTIONS PAGE 13 SHEET # (NOT IN STD CAB HARN 7165991)
ACS PAGE 14
SJC PAGE 15
J1B C408
GWY CTRLR CAB-MFR HARN
8 9200/PUR 9270/PUR 9230/PUR 8 9230/PUR 9240/PUR 9250/PUR 9650/PUR 9630/PUR 4

CAN LO C479
9 9100/PUR/WHT 9170/PUR/WHT 9130/PUR/WHT 7 9130/PUR/WHT 9140/PUR/WHT 9150/PUR/WHT 9550/PUR/WHT 9530/PUR/WHT 3 LEFT PANEL (BLACK)
CAN HI
120 OHM 120 OHM
RESISTOR RESISTOR
C426 9260/PUR 4
Remote Run Tool, ACD Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale 9160/PUR/WHT 2
C503
RIGHT DELUXE PANEL
14 9500/PUR/WHT A
CAN HI
20 9600/PUR B
CAN LO
21 3090/LBL D REMOTE RUN KEY 1830/RNG/WHT 1
C SHEET 3
SHEET 3
1730/RNG/WHT E SWITCHED POWER SHEET 4
2070/BLK
9560/PUR/WHT
2
3
* C450
RIGHT JOYSTICK
1165/RED/WHT F (SJC/AWS ONLY)
SHEET 3 UNSWITCHED POWER 9660/PUR 4
2710/BLK G GROUND 9220/PUR 8
SHEET 4 J2B
9120/PUR/WHT 9
AUX CTRLR
1840/RNG/WHT 1
SHEET 3
SHEET 4
2080/BLK
9540/PUR/WHT
2
3
* C449
LEFT JOYSTICK
(SJC/AWS ONLY)
9640/PUR 4
WIRING SCHEMATIC
(STANDARD MACHINE)
Sheet 5 of 13
521 of 898
LEGEND
ENGINE
LIGHTS PAGE 11
HVAC PAGE 12
OPTIONS PAGE 13
ACS PAGE 14
SJC PAGE 15
FRC1
STARTER RELAY C109
30 S/R ADAPTER STARTER
1030/RED A
SHEET 3 87 8200/TAN TAN S M
B SHEET 3
3560/LBL B TAN R
85 86 8210/TAN 1015/RED
SHEET 12 2005/BLK
C110
B S 1020/RED
ALTERNATOR G
L 1800/RNG/WHT SHEET 3
EXCITATION
2015/BLK
FRC1 FUEL SHUTOFF

FUEL PULL SOLENOID
RELAY C101
D5 8100/TAN B
1350/RED/WHT 30 8120/TAN PULL 0.33 OHM
SHEET 3 87 3410/LBL
2400/BLK 2800/BLK C GND
85 86 SHEET 4
2025/BLK 8110/TAN
SHEET 7 8800/TAN A HOLD
24.5 OHM
FRC1 T14
GLOW PLUG PRE HEATER
RELAY 8500/TAN
1060/RED 30
SHEET 3 87 Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale
2016/BLK 85 86
2055/BLK
SHEET 3
6 8510/TAN
14 3420/LBL
3 8110/TAN
30 3410/LBL
7 8210/TAN
22 3560/LBL
C107
5140/YEL B +5V PWR
J1A SHEET 9
GWY CTRLR 25 3140/LBL C SIG ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
2140/BRN A GND SENDER (0.5-4.5V)
SHEET 4
C405
2150/BRN B GND
SHEET 4 AIR FILTER
16 3150/LBL A SIG
SWITCH (NC)
C106
15 3160/LBL
2160/BRN
A
B
SIG
ENGINE SPEED SENSOR
WIRING SCHEMATIC
SHEET 4 GND
(163 OHM)
C104
(STANDARD MACHINE)
B ENGINE COOLANT
18
SHEET 4 2170/BRN
3170/LBL A
GND
SIG
SENSOR (500-3000 OHM)
(8 VOLT)
4 8800/TAN Printable Version Click Here
J1B C355
GWY CTRLR FUEL HARN
C406
Sheet 6 of 13
12 3180/LBL C 3180/LBL OR 3100, LBL A SIG
2180/BRN D 2180/BRN OR 3110, LBL B GND
FUEL SENDER (PRINTED NOVEMBER 2010)
SHEET 4 (30 - 270 OHM)

522 of 898
LEGEND
PARTIAL CONNECTOR
BATT FEED, FUSED 1000 THROUGH 1499 RED/WHITE RED/WHT
HYDRAULICS
GROUND PAGE 4
BATTERY GROUND 2000 THROUGH 2999 BLACK BLK ENGINE PAGE 6
CONTROLLER GROUND/RETURN 2000 THROUGH 2999 BROWN BRN CONNECTOR
HYDRAULICS PAGE 7
HYDRAULIC 4000 THROUGH 4999 LIGHT GREEN LGN
CAB PAGE 9
CONTROLLER SUPPLY 5000 THROUGH 5999 YELLOW YEL
MANUAL CONTROLS PAGE 10 WIRE BREAK
LIGHTS PAGE 11 (TWO WIRE BREAKS
HVAC PAGE 12
ENGINE 8000 THROUGH 8999 TAN TAN
OPTIONS PAGE 13 SHEET #
COMMUNICATION 9000 THROUGH 9999 PURPLE/WHITE PUR/WHT ACS PAGE 14 C425
SJC PAGE 15
FRC1 B C308
TRACTION LOCK BRAKE
4100/LGN 4200/LGN A 4200/LGN A SOLENOID
RELAY TRACK 2 SPEED
2200/BLK C 2200/BLK B 9.8 OHM ADAPTER (SEE
1360/RED/WHT 30 SHEET 4
SHEET 3 3430/LBL 12 V ADDITIONAL
87
2025/BLK WHEEL 2 SPD ADAPTER HARNESS 7159366 OPTIONS SHEET)
SHEET 6 85 86 TRACK SINGLE SPD BRAKE ADAPTER HARNESS 7165061
2035/BLK 4110/LGN
SHEET 11
C425
B PULL 0.3 OHM

A HOLD 10.9 OHM
C WHEEL SINGLE SPEED
8
TRACTION LOCK
13
C108
2220/BRN B HYDRAULIC
GND
SHEET 4 TEMPERATURE
32 3220/LBL A SIG SENDER
500 - 3000 OHM
C112 (8 VOLT)
J1A 34 3320/LBL A SIG HYDRAULIC OIL
GWY CTRLR 2320/BRN B GND FILTER SWITCH (NC)
SHEET 4
C446
18 2910/BRN 2 GND HYDRAULIC
4010/LGN 1 SIG FAN SOLENOID
7.2 OHM 12 V
C420
1 2410/BRN B GND HYDRAULIC LOCK
4410/LGN A SIG SOLENOID
9.8 OHM 12 V
C105
2190/BRN B GND HYDRAULIC
SHEET 4
3190/LBL C SIG CHARGE
5190/YEL A +8V PWR PRESSURE
0.5-7.5V
4200/LGN
19 13 1 23 6
J1B +8V
GWY CTRLR
C418
J2A 18 2330/BRN 2 GND FRONT ROD
AUX CTRLR
4330/LGN 1 SIG SOLENOID (MALE)
3.3 OHM PWM
WIRING SCHEMATIC
1 2340/BRN
C419
2 GND
(STANDARD MACHINE)
FRONT BASE
4340/LGN 1 SIG SOLENOID (FEMALE)
3.3 OHM PWM T750 (S/N ANKA11001 AND ABOVE)
19 13
J2B
Sheet 7 of 13
AUX CTRLR
523 of 898
LEGEND
GROUP DESCRIPTION GROUP NUMBER RANGE WIRE COLOR COLOR CODE PARTIAL CONNECTOR
OVERVIEW PAGE 1,2
BATT FEED, GENERAL 1000 THROUGH 1499 RED RED
CAB DISPLAY
POWER PAGE 3
GROUND PAGE 4
BATT FEED, SWITCHED 1500 THROUGH 1999 ORANGE/WHITE RNG/WHT
CAN BUS PAGE 5
BATTERY GROUND 2000 THROUGH 2999 BLACK BLK
ENGINE PAGE 6 CONNECTOR
CONTROLLER GROUND/RETURN 2000 THROUGH 2999 BROWN BRN
HYDRAULICS PAGE 7
MONITORING 3000 THROUGH 3999 LIGHT BLUE LBL
CAB DISPLAY PAGE 8
CAB
MANUAL CONTROLS
PAGE 9
PAGE 10 WIRE BREAK
* DLX CAB HARN 7196753 ONLY
OTHER FUNCTIONS
ENGINE
7000 THROUGH 7999
8000 THROUGH 8999
WHITE
TAN
WHT
TAN
LIGHTS
HVAC
PAGE 11
PAGE 12
(TWO WIRE BREAKS
JOIN ONE WIRE) (NOT IN STD CAB HARN 7165991)
COMMUNICATION 9000 THROUGH 9999 PURPLE PUR OPTIONS PAGE 13 SHEET #
COMMUNICATION 9000 THROUGH 9999 PURPLE/WHITE PUR/WHT ACS PAGE 14
SJC PAGE 15
T13
BUZZER (+)
1940/RNG/WHT
SHEET 3 C499
LEFT PANEL
Press To Operate Loader
7040/WHT OR 9320, PUR BUZZER
(PTOL)
C479
T2
LEFT PANEL (BLACK) 1930/RNG/WHT 1
BUZZER (-) SHEET 3 SWITCHED POWER
2940/BLK 3
7040/WHT OR 9320, PUR 10 SHEET 4 GROUND
BUZZER
C408
2920/BLK 2 CAB-MFR HARN
SHEET 4 GROUND
1960/RNG/WHT 1440/RED/WHT 1 20 3030/LBL 1 3030/LBL OR 9380, PUR 2
SHEET 3 SHEET 3 UNSWITCHED POWER PTOL OUTPUT
*
SW9
TRAVEL CONTROL
SHEET 3
1620/RNG/WHT 5 SWITCHED POWER
J1A
19 2380/BRN 37 2380/BRN OR 9370, PUR 4
PTOL LED
SWITCH (OPTIONAL) 3400/LBL 11 LEFT BLINKER INPUT
SHEET 13 GWY CTRLR
C500
5 6 3500/LBL 8
4 SHEET 13 RIGHT BLINKER INPUT RIGHT KEY SWITCH PANEL
2700/BLK 2 3 3650/LBL 7 24 8130/TAN 4 8130/TAN OR 9360, PUR 2
SHEET 4 TRAVEL CONTROL INPUT START
1 9
3600/LBL OR 4500, LGN
PARK BRAKE INPUT 6
SW1 6
3 2 BRAKE SWITCH 12
1 J1B 22 3040/LBL 40 4
3040/LBL OR 9350, PUR RUN/ENTER SWITCH
3610/LBL OR 9310, PUR 4 5 GWY CTRLR
SHEET 3 1775/RNG/WHT 6
1950/RNG/WHT 5
SHEET 4 2930/BLK C480 SHEET 3 SWITCHED POWER
LEFT PANEL (GRAY) 1420/RED/WHT 1
SHEET 3 UNSWITCHED POWER
3620/LBL 12 2960/BLK 3
SHEET 9 DOOR SIGNAL SHEET 4 GROUND
11
10
9 C503
3610/LBL OR 9310, PUR 2 RIGHT DELUXE PANEL
PARK BRAKE OUTPUT
8 1590/RNG/WHT 5
7 SHEET 3 SWITCHED POWER
6 1240/RED/WHT 1
5 2250/BLK 3
4 SHEET 4 GROUND
6
3
1
WIRING SCHEMATIC
(STANDARD MACHINE)
Sheet 8 of 13
524 of 898
LEGEND
PARTIAL CONNECTOR
CAB
GROUND PAGE 4
HYDRAULICS PAGE 7
CONTROLLER SUPPLY
LIGHTS
5000 THROUGH 5999
6000 THROUGH 6999
YELLOW
PINK
YEL
PNK
MANUAL CONTROLS
LIGHTS
PAGE 10
PAGE 11
WIRE BREAK
(TWO WIRE BREAKS
OTHER FUNCTIONS 7000 THROUGH 7999 WHITE WHT
HVAC
OPTIONS
PAGE 12
PAGE 13
JOIN ONE WIRE)
SHEET #
(NOT IN STD CAB HARN 7165991)
ACS PAGE 14
SJC PAGE 15
*
SW4
HAND/FOOT (ACS)
H/ISO (SJC, AWS)
SWITCH
1785/RNG/WHT 2 1
SHEET 3 3
2060/BLK 5 6
SHEET 9
4
C408
CAB-MFR HARN
2
3
4235/LGN
4275/LGN
*C212
POWER
SOCKET
5 4550/LGN 2795/BLK 1 GND
1375/RED/WHT 2 +12V PWR
2790/BLK 24 2790/BLK 2790/BLK 2010/BLK

* C209
B GND
SHEET 4
1370/RED/WHT 23 1370/RED/WHT 1390/RED/WHT A +12V PWR DOME
SHEET 3
3640/LBL C DOOR SIG LIGHT
C129
CAB ACCESSORY
1210/RED/WHT A +12V BATT PWR
1580/RNG/WHT 16 1580/RNG/WHT B
SHEET 3
1865/RNG/WHT
C
+12V SW PWR
2820/BLK GND
1510/RNG/WHT
SHEET 13
1885/RNG/WHT SHEET 13
2210/BLK SHEET 13
2885/BLK SHEET 13
2060/BLK
SHEET 4
2730/BLK 33 2730/BLK
SHEET 9
*
C667
DOOR HARNESS
(SEE ADDITIONAL
OPTIONS SHEET)
3620/LBL 3630/LBL 4
SHEET 8 DOOR SIGNAL
1400/RED/WHT 5 DOOR UNSW PWR
SHEET 3
6
1850/RNG/WHT 27 1850/RNG/WHT 1850/RNG/WHT 1

SHEET 3 WIPER SWITCH, MOTOR SWITCHED POWER
C482 SEATBAR 2840/BLK 2
WIPER MOTOR GROUND
J1B SENSOR 7310/WHT 3
2370/BRN 45 2370/BRN OR 3910, LBL A GND WASHER SIGNAL
GWY CTRLR SHEET 4
11 3370/LBL 46 3370/LBL OR 3920, LBL B SIG * C252
L SIG
+5V
24 5100/YEL 5370/YEL 44 5370/YEL OR 3900, LBL C +5V PWR 2845/BLK X GND
WASHER
MOTOR WIRING SCHEMATIC
SHEET 6 5140/YEL
(STANDARD MACHINE)
Sheet 9 of 13
525 of 898
LEGEND
PARTIAL CONNECTOR
MANUAL
HYDRAULICS PAGE 7
CONTROLS
HVAC PAGE 12
ACS PAGE 14
SJC PAGE 15
C409
RIGHT HANDLE
J2A
K
AUX CTRLR G
1520/RNG/WHT A
SHEET 3
30 4940/LGN H
C404 31 4930/LGN J SKI CTRL
C103
BU ALARM-MFR HARN 4920/LGN E
TAILGATE HARN DETENT FLOW
T19 TERMINAL (+) 13 4910/LGN F
(SEE ADDITIONAL A 7100/WHT C 7100/WHT TWO SPD
OPTIONS SHEET)
4310/LGN C
BACK UP
4320/LGN D PWM
2650/BLK ALARM
SHEET 4 4300/LGN B (8 VOLT)
T20 TERMINAL (-)

21 17 18 23
C410
J2B LEFT HANDLE
C421 AUX CTRLR K
J1A 10 2670/BRN 3 GND D
GWY CTRLR 4670/LGN 1 SIG TILT SPOOL LOCK 28 4840/LGN C
2 7.8 OHM 12V 22 4830/LGN B SKI CTRL
12 4820/LGN G
C422 11 4810/LGN F SIDE SHIFT
2 2680/BRN 3 GND 1530/RNG/WHT A
LIFT SPOOL LOCK SHEET 3
4680/LGN 1 SIG J
7.8 OHM 12V
2 H
E
7 5
J1B
GWY CTRLR WIRING SCHEMATIC
(STANDARD MACHINE)
Sheet 10 of 13
526 of 898
LEGEND
PARTIAL CONNECTOR
LIGHTS
CONNECTOR
LIGHTS 6000 THROUGH 6999 PINK PNK LIGHTS PAGE 11 (TWO WIRE BREAKS
OTHER FUNCTIONS 7000 THROUGH 7999 WHITE WHT HVAC PAGE 12 JOIN ONE WIRE)
ENGINE 8000 THROUGH 8999 TAN TAN OPTIONS PAGE 13 SHEET #
ACS PAGE 14
SJC PAGE 15 C434-1
2735/BLK B GND LEFT FRONT
6100/PNK A SIG WORK LIGHT
C408
37.00 Watts
CAB-MFR HARN
C434-2
2765/BLK 28 2765/BLK 2750/BLK B GND LEFT FRONT
SHEET 4
50.00 Watts
C435-1
6000/PNK 25 6000/PNK 6120/PNK A SIG RIGHT FRONT
2760/BLK B GND WORK LIGHT
37.00 Watts
C435-2
6130/PNK A SIG RIGHT FRONT
50.00 Watts
FRC1
FRONT WORK C103
LIGHTS RELAY TAILGATE HARN C603
2610/BLK 2 GND
SHEET 3
1330/RED/WHT 30
6340/PNK
Dealer Copy -- Not forA Resale
6310/PNK 6310/PNK
SHEET 4
6320/PNK 1 SIG
RIGHT REAR
87 TAIL LIGHT
2105/BLK 85 86 C602
SHEET 4
2045/BLK 6330/PNK 1 SIG
2640/BLK LEFT REAR
2 GND
SHEET 4 TAIL LIGHT
5 6320/PNK
31 3460/LBL
J1A
17 6210/PNK
GWY CTRLR
28 3440/LBL
T16 TERMINAL (-)

2620/BLK GND
SHEET 4 RIGHT REAR
6210/PNK SIG WORK LIGHT
FRC1
REAR LIGHT T15 TERMINAL (+)
RELAY
1320/RED/WHT 30 T17 TERMINAL (+)
SHEET 3 87 6200/PNK H 6200/PNK SIG LEFT REAR
2630/BLK GND WORK LIGHT
2045/BLK 85 86 SHEET 4
2035/BLK T18 TERMINAL (-)
SHEET 7
WIRING SCHEMATIC
(STANDARD MACHINE)
Sheet 11 of 13
527 of 898
LEGEND
PARTIAL CONNECTOR
HVAC
HYDRAULICS PAGE 7
CONTROLLER SUPPLY 5000 THROUGH 5999 YELLOW YEL MANUAL CONTROLS PAGE 10
LIGHTS
OTHER FUNCTIONS
6000 THROUGH 6999
7000 THROUGH 7999
PINK
WHITE
PNK
WHT
LIGHTS PAGE 11
WIRE BREAK
(TWO WIRE BREAKS * DLX CAB HARN 7196753 ONLY
HVAC PAGE 12 JOIN ONE WIRE)
ENGINE
COMMUNICATION
8000 THROUGH 8999
9000 THROUGH 9999
TAN
PURPLE
TAN
PUR
ACS PAGE 14
SJC PAGE 15
2440/BLK * C610
2 GND
#
DLX FUEL HARN 7184255 ONLY
HVAC DUCT
7440/WHT 1 SIG FAN (NOT IN STD FUEL HARN 7149219)
C483
2560/BLK * C BLK
7420/WHT A DBL POTENTIOMETER
7425/WHT B (TEMP CONTROL
WHT SWITCH)
C635
* D SIG
2130/BLK C GND HEATER
7430/WHT A +12V PWR VALVE
B
E
F
FRC1 C408
*BLOWER
SW10
HVAC RELAY SWITCH

CAB-MFR HARN Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale
1140/RED/WHT 30 OFF
SHEET 3 87 1500/RNG/WHT 21 1500/RNG/WHT 5 2
1
2030/BLK 85 86 4
SHEET 3 6
SHEET 6
2005/BLK
1790/RNG/WHT 3 7530/WHT * C611
1 14.00 Amps High
SHEET 3 7410/WHT 7520/WHT 2 7.50 Amps Med BLOWER
SW11 7510/WHT 3 5.00 Amps Low MOTOR
21 3450/LBL
SHEET 4
2745/BLK 22 2745/BLK *
AC SWITCH 2580/BLK 4
J1A 7015/WHT 1 C 7400/WHT

GWY CTRLR 2100/BLK
3
11 7021/WHT 7020/WHT 34
* C630
3
THERMOSTAT
AC EVAPORATOR C350 2570/BLK 2

SWITCH B 7023/WHT 7020/WHT 1
A 7024/WHT
C355
FUEL HARN #
A 7024/WHT 7025/WHT
C486
1 SIG
WIRING SCHEMATIC
2 MAGNET CLUTCH
GND
SHEET 13
2290/BLK 2280/BLK
(COMPRESSOR)
(STANDARD MACHINE)
D4
Sheet 12 of 13
528 of 898
LEGEND
OVERVIEW PAGE 1,2
OPTIONS
ENGINE PAGE 6
HYDRAULICS PAGE 7
CAB DISPLAY PAGE 8
CAB PAGE 9
LIGHTS
OTHER FUNCTIONS
6000 THROUGH 6999
7000 THROUGH 7999
PINK
WHITE
PNK
WHT
LIGHTS PAGE 11 (TWO WIRE BREAKS * DLX CAB HARN 7196753 ONLY
ENGINE
COMMUNICATION
8000 THROUGH 8999
9000 THROUGH 9999
TAN
PURPLE
TAN
PUR OPTIONS PAGE 13 SHEET # (NOT IN STD CAB HARN 7165991)
SJC PAGE 15
# C607
C355
FUEL HARN C408
#
POWER 10 CAB-MFR HARN
BOB-TACH
SIG
GND
1
2
4470/LGN OR 7010, WHT
2470/OR 2770, BLK 2770/OR 2751, BLK
E
B
4470/LGN
2770/BLK
4470/LGN
4480/LGN
(NOT IN STD FUEL HARN 7149219)
CLOSE SHEET 4
2290/BLK
SHEET 12
#
*POWER
SW5 2 1
3
C606 BOBTACH
POWER 5 4
SIG 2 2480/OR 2775, BLK SWITCH 6
BOB-TACH 1 4480/LGN OR 7000, WHT
GND F 4480/LGN 9
OPEN
1380/RED/WHT
1410/RED/WHT 26 1410/RED/WHT 1200/RED/WHT
SHEET 3
X T3
C411
B 6010/PNK 15
1430/RED/WHT
6010/PNK L
* FLASHER CONN
C 3500/LBL
SHEET 8 D1
LEFT HANDLE A 6515/PNK 6500/PNK 36 6500/PNK 6530/PNK
*BEACON
SW2
6570/PNK
(BLINKER / FLASHER) E 6540/PNK
5 PIN D2 SWITCH
D 6415/PNK 6400/PNK 29 6400/PNK 6430/PNK
3400/LBL 2725/BLK 6
C103
SHEET 8
*SW3
HAZARD SWITCH
2
1
6700/PNK
4
1
5
2
(PINS 3 & 6 3
TAILGATE HARN
INTERNALLY 5 4 3
INSULATED)
2850/BLK
E 6410/PNK 6
EURO TAIL LIGHTS
(SEE ADDITIONAL D 6510/PNK
* C670
E
OPTIONS SHEET) 2780/BLK D
30 2780/BLK 2420/BLK BEACON/FLASHER
SHEET 4
6440/PNK F EXTERIOR HARNESS
6540/PNK B (SEE ADDITIONAL
1550/RNG/WHT 13 1550/RNG/WHT C OPTIONS SHEET)
C423
SHEET 3
LEFT +
C279
1 7820/WHT
* C676
3
A
3
BUCKET
POSITION
SIG A 4450/LGN D3 4455/LGN 35 4455/LGN 1
4
2 *BUCKET
SW6 SPEAKER
-
2 7830/WHT 4
2830/BLK 5 POSITION C278 RADIO CONN

SOLENOID GND B 2450/BLK 2455/BLK SWITCH
9.8 OHM SHEET 4 SHEET 4 6 2 7810/WHT 6
RIGHT -
C126 SPEAKER 1 7800/WHT 5
SHEET 4 2785/BLK + 1885/RNG/WHT 1
C412 B GND SHEET 9 PWR
FRONT 2885/BLK 2
LEFT HANDLE B 7210/WHT 38 7210/WHT A SIG SHEET 9 GND
HORN
(HORN) A 1460/RED/WHT
2 PIN
SHEET 3 C277
* 1
2
3
C415 1510/RNG/WHT 4 PWR
J2A HIGH FLOW SHEET 9 AIR RIDE
26 2460/BRN B GND 2210/BLK 5 GND
AUX CTRLR SOLENOID SHEET 9 SEAT
4460/LGN A SIG 6
7.5 OHM 12 V
J2B
26
AUX CTRLR
C437
WIRING SCHEMATIC
27 2360/BRN 2 GND TWO SPEED
4360/LGN 1 SIG
MAKEUP SOLENOID
8.8 OHM 12V TRACK 2 SPEED
(STANDARD MACHINE)
J1A
GWY CTRLR
26 2350/BRN
C441
2 GND TWO SPEED
ADAPTER (SEE
ADDITIONAL T750 (S/N ANKA11001 AND ABOVE)
OPTIONS SHEET)
4350/LGN 1 SIG SOLENOID Printable Version Click Here
5.1 OHM 12 V
25 26 Sheet 13 of 13
J1B
GWY CTRLR
529 of 898
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENTS
NUM OF NUM OF NUM OF
CONN DESCRIPTION SHEET CONN DESCRIPTION SHEET CONN DESCRIPTION SHEET
PINS PINS PINS
C101 FUEL SHUTOFF SOLENOID 3 6 C446 HYDRAULIC FAN 2 7 FC1 FUSE CENTER 1 8 3
C103 TAILGATE 8 4,10,11,13 C449 LEFT JOYSTICK (CAB HARN) 4 5 FC2 FUSE CENTER 2 8 3
C104 ENGINE COOLANT SENSOR 2 6 C450 RIGHT JOYSTICK (CAB HARN) 4 5 FRC1 FUSE RELAY CENTER 64 3,6,7,11,12
C105 HYD CHARGE PRESSURE 3 7 C453 RIGHT QUAD A DRIVE 4 15
C106 ENGINE SPEED SENSOR 2 6 C454 LEFT QUAD DRIVE 4 15 J1A GATEWAY CONTROLLER 34 3,6-8,10-13
C107 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE 3 6 C467 LIFT PEDAL LOCK 3 14 J1B GATEWAY CONTOLLER 26 3-10,13
C108 HYD TEMPERATURE SENDER 2 7 C468 TILT PEDAL LOCK 3 14 J2A AUX CONTROLLER 34 7,10,13
C109 S/R ADAPTER HARNESS 2 6 C469 TILT HANDLE 3 14 J2B AUX CONTROLLER 26 3-5,7,10,13
C110 ALTERNATOR 2 6 C470 TILT PEDAL 3 14
C112 HYD OIL FILTER SWITCH 2 7 C471 LIFT PEDAL 3 14 J1-ACS ACS CONTROLLER 8 14, 15
C126 HORN 2 13 C472 LIFT HANDLE 3 14 J2-ACS ACS CONTROLLER 10 14, 15
C129 CAB ACCESSORY 3 9 C474 BRAKE LIGHT 1 15 J3-ACS ACS CONTROLLER 10 14, 15
C209 DOME LIGHT 3 9 C479 LEFT PANEL(BLACK) 12 5,8 J5 DRIVE CONTROLLER 50 15
C212 POWER SOCKET 2 9 C480 LEFT PANEL(GRAY) 12 8
C252 WASHER 2 9 C482 SEATBAR SENSOR 3 9 SW1 BRAKE SWITCH 6 8
C277 AIR RIDE SEAT 6 13 C483 TEMP CONTROL SWITCH 3 12 SW2 BEACON SWITCH 6 13
C278 RIGHT SPEAKER 2 13 C486 AC COMPRESSOR 2 12 SW3 HAZARD SWITCH 6 13
C279 LEFT SPEAKER 2 13 C489 MFR ACCESSORY 2 3,4 SW4 HAND/FOOT, H/ISO SWITCH 6 9
C308 BRAKE SOLENOID 2 7 C492 ACS/SJC/AWS-MFR HARN 8 3,5,9 SW5 POWER BOBTACH SWITCH 6 13
C350 AC EVAPORATOR SWITCH 2 12 C493 ACS/SJC/AWS-MFR HARN 4, 15 3,4 SW6 BUCKET POSITION SWITCH 6 13
C355 DLX or STD FUEL HARNESS 6 6,12,13 C497 SJC HORN/BLINKER 3 13 SW9 TRAVEL CONTROL SWITCH 6 8
C404 BU ALARM-MFR HARN 2 3,10 C499 PTOL 4 8 SW10 BLOWER SWITCH 5 12
C405 AIR FILTER SWITCH 2 6 C500 RH KEY SWITCH 6 8 SW11 AC SWITCH 3 12
C406 FUEL SENDER 2 6 C501 A22 PUMP HARNESS 8 15
C408 CAB - MFR HARN CONNECTOR 48 3-5,8-9,11-13 C503 RH DLX PANEL 6 5,8 T1 BATT GROUND 1 4
C409 RIGHT HANDLE 10 10 C542 LEFT SWASHPLATE 3 15 T2 BUZZER GROUND 1 8
C410 LEFT HANDLE 10 10 C543 RIGHT SWASHPLATE 3 15 T3 FLASHER 2 13
C411 LEFT HANDLE 5 WAY (FLSHR) 5 13 C544 LEFT FORWARD DRIVE 2 15 T6 BATT GROUND 1 4
C412 LEFT HANDLE 2 WAY (HORN) 2 13 C545 LEFT REVERSE DRIVE 2 15 T8 BATT GROUND 1 4
C415 HIGH FLOW SOLENOID 2 13 C546 RIGHT FORWARD DRIVE 2 15 T13 BUZZER POWER 1 8
C418 FRONT ROD (MALE) 2 7 C547 RIGHT REVERSE DRIVE Dealer2 Copy --15Not for Resale
T14 PRE HEATER 1 6
C419 FRONT BASE (FEMALE) 2 7 T15 RIGHT REAR WORK LIGHT(+) 1 11
C420 HYD LOCK 2 7 T16 RIGHT REAR WORK LIGHT(-) 1 11
C440 RF BASE 2 14 C602 LEFT REAR TAIL LIGHT 2 11 T17 LEFT REAR WORK LIGHT (+) 1 11
C422 TILT SPOOL LCOK 3 10 C603 RIGHT REAR TAIL LIGHT 2 11 T18 LEFT REAR WORK LIGHT (-) 1 11
C423 BUCKET POSITION 2 13 C606 POWER BOBTACH OPEN 2 13 T19 BACKUP ALARM 1 10
C425 BRAKE SOLENOID 3 7 C607 POWER BOBTACH CLOSE 2 13 T20 BACKUP ALARM (GND) 1 10
C426 CAN (Remote Start Tool, ACD) 7 5 C610 HVAC DUCT FAN 2 12
C428 TILT ACTUATOR 8 14, 15 C611 BLOWER MOTOR 4 12
C429 LIFT ACTUATOR 8 14,15 C630 THERMOSTAT 3 12
C434-1 LEFT WORKLIGHT 1 2 11 C635 HEATER VALVE 6 12
C434-2 LEFT WORKLIGHT 2 2 11 C667 DOOR 6 9
C435-1 RIGHT WORKLIGHT 1 2 11 C670 EXTERIOR BEACON 6 13
C435-2 RIGHT WORKLIGHT 2 2 11 C676 RADIO 6 13
C437 TWO SPEED MAKEUP 2 13
C441 TWO SPEED 2 13 C707 OBW STOP BRAKE LIGHT 3 15

WIRING SCHEMATIC
move 2000 THROUGH 2999 BROWN BRN HYDRAULICS PAGE 7 (ACS / SJC MACHINE)
HYDRAULIC 4000 THROUGH 4999 LIGHT GREEN LGN CAB PAGE 9 T750 (S/N ANKA11001 AND ABOVE)
LIGHTS 6000 THROUGH 6999 PINK PNK LIGHTS PAGE 11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
ENGINE
7000 THROUGH 7999
8000 THROUGH 8999
WHITE
TAN
WHT
TAN
HVAC
OPTIONS
PAGE 12
PAGE 13
Sheet 1 of 15
COMMUNICATION 9000 THROUGH 9999 PURPLE PUR ACS PAGE 14
COMMUNICATION 9000 THROUGH 9999 PURPLE/WHITE PUR/WHT SJC PAGE 15
530 of 898
J1 CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENTS(GATEWAY CONTROLLER) J2 CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENTS(AUXILLIARY CONTROLLER)
PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION
A-1 HYDRAULIC LOCK RETURN B-1 HYD CHARGE PRESS A-1 FRONT AUX (F) RETURN B-1
A-2 LIFT SPOOL LOCK RETURN B-2 UNSW BATT A-2 REAR AUX (F) RETURN B-2 UNSW BATT
A-3 FUEL PULL RELAY B-3 UNSW BATT A-3 LEFT BLINKER RELAY B-3 UNSW BATT
A-4 SWITCHED POWER OUT RELAY B-4 FUEL HOLD A-4 RIGHT BLINKER RELAY B-4 DIVERTED SOLENOID
A-5 LIGHT 1 RELAY B-5 LIFT SPOOL LOCK A-5 HORN RELAY B-5 REAR AUX (F)
A-6 GLOW PLUG RELAY B-6 TRACTION LOCK HOLD A-6 B-6 RELIEF SOLENOID
A-7 STARTER RELAY B-7 TILT SPOOL LOCK A-7 B-7 REAR AUX (M)
A-8 TRACTION PULL RELAY B-8 CAN LO 1 A-8 B-8 CAN LO 1
A-9 B-9 CAN HI 1 A-9 B-9 CAN HI 1
A-10 TILT SPOOL LOCK RETURN B-10 A-10 REAR AUX (M) RETURN B-10
A-11 SPARE DIGITAL, ECU SINKS B-11 SEAT BAR A-11 LH PADDLE RIGHT B-11
A-12 B-12 FUEL LEVEL A-12 LH PADDLE LEFT B-12
A-13 TRACTION PULL RELAY FDBK B-13 BICS HYD LOCK HOLD A-13 RH RIGHT BUTTON UP B-13 FRONT AUX (F)
A-14 GLOW PLUG RELAY FDBK B-14 CAN HI 2 A-14 B-14
A-15 ENGINE SPEED B-15 GROUND P1 A-15 B-15 GROUND
A-16 AIR FILTER SWITCH B-16 GROUND P2 A-16 B-16 GROUND
A-17 LIGHT 2 RELAY B-17 GROUND P3, SENSOR A-17 B-17 HANDLE POT GND
A-18 FAN 2 RELAY B-18 ENGINE COOLANT TEMP (8 VOLT) A-18 FRONT AUX (M) RETURN B-18 RH PWM POT SIGNAL
A-19 PTOL LED B-19 FAN 2 OUTPUT A-19 B-19 FRONT AUX (M)
A-20 PTOL SWITCH B-20 CAN LO 2 A-20 LH FLOAT BUTTON B-20
A-21 SWITCHED POWER OUT RELAY FDBK B-21 REMOTE KEY A-21 B-21 RH TRIGGER
A-22 STATER RELAY FDBK B-22 RUN/ENTER A-22 LH RIGHT BUTTON DOWN B-22 SWITCHED POWER
A-23 B-23 SENSOR SUPPLY 8V A-23 B-23 HANDLE POT POWER (8 VOLT)
A-24 START ENGINE B-24 SENSOR SUPPLY 5V A-24 B-24
A-25 ENGINE OIL PRESS B-25 TWO SPEED MAKEUP A-25 B-25
A-26 SPARE B-26 TWO SPEED COIL A-26 HIGH FLOW RETURN B-26 HIGH FLOW
A-27 SPARE A-27
A-28 LIGHT 2 RELAY FDBK A-28 LH RIGHT BUTTON
A-29 A-29
A-30 FUEL PULL RELAY FDBK A-30 RH LEFT UP
A-31 LIGHT 1 RELAY FDBK A-31 RH LEFT DOWN
A-32 HYD OIL TEMP (8 VOLT)
Dealer
A-32
Copy -- Not for Resale
A-33 A-33
A-34 HYD OIL FILTER SW1 A-34
HARNESS PART NUMBER

EXMF 7199263
MAINFRAME
LF 7196823
DLX CAB 7196753
STD CAB 7195991
DLX FUEL 7184255
STD FUEL 7149219
S/R 6733370
TAILGATE DOM 7175271
TRK BRAKE ADP 7165061
WHL 2 SPD ADP 7159366
WIRING SCHEMATIC
(ACS / SJC MACHINE)
Sheet 2 of 15
531 of 898
1240/RED/WHT WIRE CATEGORIES FOR COLORS AND NUMBER RANGE
SHEET 8 GROUP DESCRIPTION GROUP NUMBER RANGE WIRE COLOR COLOR CODE
POWER
C503 RH DLX PANEL
C408 BATT FEED, GENERAL 1000 THROUGH 1499 RED RED
1400/RED/WHT BATT FEED, FUSED 1000 THROUGH 1499 RED/WHITE RED/WHT
CAB-MFR HARN SHEET 9
C667 DOOR HARNESS BATT FEED, SWITCHED 1500 THROUGH 1999 ORANGE/WHITE RNG/WHT
1450/RED/WHT 17 1450/RED/WHT 1420/RED/WHT BATTERY GROUND 2000 THROUGH 2999 BLACK BLK
SHEET 8
C500 RH KEY SWITCH CONTROLLER GROUND/RETURN 2000 THROUGH 2999 BROWN BRN
FC1 FUSE CENTER 1440/RED/WHT MONITORING 3000 THROUGH 3999 LIGHT BLUE LBL
2 SHEET 8
FUSE 1 25 A 1110/RED/WHT J1B HYDRAULIC 4000 THROUGH 4999 LIGHT GREEN LGN
C479 LH PANEL
1070/RED 1120/RED/WHT 1130/RED/WHT 3 GWY CTRLR CONTROLLER SUPPLY 5000 THROUGH 5999 YELLOW YEL
+12V 1025/RED
FUSE 2 25 A
1160/RED/WHT 1150/RED/WHT 3
OTHER FUNCTIONS
ENGINE
7000 THROUGH 7999
8000 THROUGH 8999
WHITE
TAN
WHT
TAN
J2B
BATTERY MEGAFUSE 1180/RED/WHT 2 AUX CTRLR COMMUNICATION 9000 THROUGH 9999 PURPLE PUR
100.0 Amps COMMUNICATION 9000 THROUGH 9999 PURPLE/WHITE PUR/WHT
BATT_CABLE FUSE 3 25 A 1
1270/RED 1170/RED/WHT LEGEND
SCHEMATIC INDEX
C493 PARTIAL CONNECTOR
OVERVIEW PAGE 1,2
SJC/ACS/AWS-MFR HARN
FUSE 4 25 A POWER PAGE 3
1280/RED 1235/RED/WHT 2 (4 PIN)
GROUND PAGE 4
1010/RED
SHEET 6 CAN BUS PAGE 5
STARTER FC2 FUSE CENTER ENGINE PAGE 6
CONNECTOR
FUSE 1 25 A HYDRAULICS PAGE 7
1190/RED 1165/RED/WHT CAB DISPLAY PAGE 8
SHEET 5
C426 REMOTE RUN, ACD CAB PAGE 9
FUSE 2 25 A MANUAL CONTROLS PAGE 10
1040/RED 1490/RED/WHT 1410/RED/WHT WIRE BREAK
SHEET 13
(TWO WIRE BREAKS LIGHTS PAGE 11
C408 CAB-MFR CONN (OPTIONS)
FUSE 3 OPEN JOIN ONE WIRE) HVAC PAGE 12
1460/RED/WHT
SHEET 13 SHEET # OPTIONS PAGE 13
C412 LH HANDLE HORN
FUSE 4 15 A ACS PAGE 14
1290/RED 1370/RED/WHT
SHEET 9 SJC PAGE 15
C408 CAB-MFR CONN (ACCESSORIES)
FRC1 FUSE RELAY CENTER
1050/RED
FUSE 5 30 A
1350/RED/WHT
SHEET 6
SHEET 6 1060/RED FRC1 FUEL SHUTOFF RELAY
FUSE 6 30 A
FRC1 PRE HEATER RELAY 1310/RED 1360/RED/WHT
SHEET 7
1030/RED FRC1 TRACTION LOCK RELAY
SHEET 6
FRC1 STARTER RELAY
SHEET 11
Dealer Copy
FRC1 REAR LIGH-- Not for Resale
RELAY
1340/RED SHEET 11
C404
FUSE 11 25 A BU ALARM-MFR HARN
1620/RNG/WHT
1300/RED 1140/RED/WHT 1720/RNG/WHT B SHEET 8
SHEET 12 (SEE ADDITIONAL C479 LH PANEL
FUSE1 25 A FRC1 HVAC RELAY OPTIONS SHEET)
1750/RNG/WHT 1940/RNG/WHT
SHEET 8
A T13 LH PANEL BUZZER
1760/RNG/WHT FUSE 2 25 A 1850/RNG/WHT 1780/RNG/WHT C489
SHEET 9 MFR ACCESSORY 1930/RNG/WHT
C408 CAB-MFR CONN (FR WIPER) SHEET 8
FUSE 3 15 A C499 RH PANEL PTOL
1550/RNG/WHT
SHEET 13 C408 1775/RNG/WHT
C408 CAB-MFR CONN (BKT POSITION) CAB-MFR HARN SHEET 8
SW1 BRAKE SWITCH
FUSE4 5 A 1660/RNG/WHT 1660/RNG/WHT 1590/RNG/WHT
43
SHEET 8
1530/RNG/WHT SHEET 10 C503 RH DELUXE PANEL
C410 LEFT HANDLE
SHEET 10 SHEET 8
C409 RIGHT HANDLE J2B C500 RH PANEL KEY SWITCH
FUSE 7 25 A 1560/RNG/WHT 22
1795/RNG/WHT 1730/RNG/WHT AUX CTRLR
SHEET 9
C426 REMOTE RUN, ACD SW4 H/ISO SWITCH
FUSE 8 25 A
FRC1 1580/RNG/WHT
SWITCHED C408 CAB-MFR CONN (ACCESSORIES, OPTIONS) SHEET 8
POWER RELAY FUSE 12 15 A SW9 TRAVEL CONTROL SWITCH
SHEET 6
1050/RED 30
87
J1A
GWY CTRLR 1790/RNG/WHT
C110 ALT EXCITATION
SHEET 12
WIRING SCHEMATIC
85 86 C408 FRC1 HVAC RELAY
SHEET 6
SHEET 12
2055/BLK
2030/BLK
3380/LBL 4
CAB-MFR HARN (ACS / SJC MACHINE)
1920/RNG/WHT 6 1920/RNG/WHT 1840/RNG/WHT
SHEET 5
C449 LH JOYSTICK T750 (S/N ANKA11001 AND ABOVE)
C492 1830/RNG/WHT
1740/RNG/WHT 6 SHEET 5
SJC/ACS/AWS-MFR HARN C450 RH JOYSTICK Printable Version Click Here
(8 PIN)
Sheet 3 of 15
532 of 898
LEGEND
GROUND
HVAC PAGE 12
OPTIONS PAGE 13
ACS PAGE 14
SJC PAGE 15
C493
2080/BLK
SHEET 5 SJC/ACS/AWS-MFR HARN
C449 LH JOYSTICK (4 PIN)
2070/BLK
SHEET 5
C450 RH JOYSTICK 3 2235/BLK
2920/BLK C408 4 2240/BLK
SHEET 8 CAB-MFR HARN
C479 LH PANEL
2940/BLK 2950/BLK 32 2950/BLK
SHEET 8
C499 PTOL
2960/BLK 16 2510/BLK 2110/BLK T6
SHEET 8 J1B BATT GND
C500 RH PANEL KEY SWITCH GWY CTRLR 15 2500/BLK
2250/BLK
SHEET 8 2765/BLK
C503 RH DELUXE PANEL SHEET 11
16 2540/BLK C408 CAB-MFR CONN (FR LIGHTS) T8
J2B 15 2745/BLK BATT GND
2550/BLK 2090/BLK SHEET 12
2930/BLK AUX CTRLR
SHEET 8 C408 CAB-MFR CONN (HVAC)
SW1 BRAKE SWITCH 2790/BLK
2830/BLK 2900/BLK 42 2900/BLK SHEET 9
SHEET 13 C408 CAB-MFR CONN (ACCESSORIES)
SW6 BKT POSITION SWITCH SHEET 11 2105/BLK
2780/BLK
SHEET 8 2700/BLK FRC1 FRONT LIGHT RELAY SHEET 13
SW9 TRAVEL CONTROL SWITCH 2530/BLK 2000 C408 CAB-MFR CONN (OPTIONS)
SHEET 10
SHEET 13 2785/BLK Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale
C409 RIGHT HANDLE SHEET 9
2730/BLK
C126 HORN C408 CAB-MFR CONN (ACCESSORIES,OPTIONS)
SHEET 10 2520/BLK
2620/BLK C410 LEFT HANDLE

SHEET 11 T1
T16 RH REAR LIGHT
C103 BATT GND
2630/BLK C489
SHEET 11 TAILGATE HARN B 2720/BLK
T18 LH REAR LIGHT MFR ACCESSORY
2650/BLK 2600/BLK B 2600/BLK
SHEET 10
T20 BU ALARM 2400/BLK 2390/BLK
SHEET 6
2640/BLK C101 FUEL SHUTOFF SOLENOID
SHEET 11 2200/BLK
C602 LH REAR LIGHT SHEET 7
2610/BLK C425 BRAKE
SHEET 11 2770/BLK
C603 RH REAR LIGHT SHEET 13
C355 FUEL HARN (PWR BOB/AC)
2455/BLK
2170/BRN SHEET 13
SHEET 6 C423 BKT POSITION SOLENOID
C104 ENGINE COOLANT SENSOR 2710/BLK 2300/BLK
SHEET 5
SHEET 6 2160/BRN C426 REMOTE RUN, ACD
C106 ENGINE SPEED SENSOR
2320/BRN
SHEET 7
C112 HYD OIL FILTER SWITCH
2370/BRN J1B
SHEET 9
C408 CAB-MFR CONN (SEATBAR SENSOR) GWY CTRLR
SHEET 7
2220/BRN 2230/BRN 17 WIRING SCHEMATIC
C108 HYD TEMP SENDER
SHEET 7 2190/BRN (ACS / SJC MACHINE)

C105 HYD CHG PRESSURE SENDER
SHEET 6
2180/BRN T750 (S/N ANKA11001 AND ABOVE)
C355 FUEL HARN (FUEL SENDER)
2140/BRN
SHEET 6
C107 ENG OIL PRESS SENDER Sheet 4 of 15
2150/BRN
SHEET 6
C405 AIR FILTER SWITCH (PRINTED NOVEMBER 2010)
533 of 898 Printed In U.S.A. 7197682
LEGEND
CAN BUS
MANUAL CONTROLS
LIGHTS
PAGE 10
PAGE 11
WIRE BREAK
HVAC PAGE 12
ENGINE
COMMUNICATION
8000 THROUGH 8999
9000 THROUGH 9999
TAN
PURPLE
TAN
PUR
ACS PAGE 14
SJC PAGE 15
J1B C408
GWY CTRLR CAB-MFR HARN
8 9200/PUR 9270/PUR 9210/PUR 9280/PUR 9230/PUR 8 9230/PUR 9240/PUR 9250/PUR 9650/PUR 9630/PUR 4
CAN LO C479
9 9100/PUR/WHT 9170/PUR/WHT 9110/PUR/WHT 9180/PUR/WHT 9130/PUR/WHT 7 9130/PUR/WHT 9140/PUR/WHT 9150/PUR/WHT 9550/PUR/WHT 9530/PUR/WHT 3 LEFT PANEL (BLACK)
CAN HI
120 OHM 120 OHM
RESISTOR C492 RESISTOR
(8 PIN)
C426 1 9260/PUR 4
9240/PUR C503
Remote Run Tool, ACD Dealer4Copy
9140/PUR/WHT ACS -- Not
CTRLR for Resale 9160/PUR/WHT 2 RIGHT DELUXE PANEL
14 9500/PUR/WHT A
CAN HI
20 9600/PUR B
CAN LO
21 3090/LBL D REMOTE RUN KEY 9290/PUR 7
1830/RNG/WHT 1
C 9190/PUR/WHT 8 SHEET 3
SHEET 3
1730/RNG/WHT E SWITCHED POWER
DRIVE CTRLR
SHEET 4
2070/BLK
9560/PUR/WHT
2
3
* C450
RIGHT JOYSTICK
1165/RED/WHT F (SJC/AWS ONLY)
SHEET 3 UNSWITCHED POWER 9660/PUR 4
2710/BLK G GROUND 9220/PUR 8
SHEET 4 J2B
9120/PUR/WHT 9
AUX CTRLR
1840/RNG/WHT 1
SHEET 3
SHEET 4
2080/BLK
9540/PUR/WHT
2
3
* C449
LEFT JOYSTICK
(SJC/AWS ONLY)
9640/PUR 4
WIRING SCHEMATIC
(ACS / SJC MACHINE)
Sheet 5 of 15
534 of 898
LEGEND
ENGINE
LIGHTS PAGE 11
OPTIONS PAGE 13
ACS PAGE 14
SJC PAGE 15
FRC1
STARTER RELAY C109
30 S/R ADAPTER STARTER
1030/RED A
SHEET 3 87 8200/TAN TAN S M
B SHEET 3
3560/LBL B TAN R
85 86 8210/TAN 1015/RED
SHEET 12 2005/BLK
C110
B S 1020/RED
ALTERNATOR G
L 1800/RNG/WHT
SHEET 3
EXCITATION
2015/BLK
FRC1 FUEL SHUTOFF

FUEL PULL SOLENOID
RELAY C101
D5 8100/TAN B
1350/RED/WHT 30 8120/TAN PULL 0.33 OHM
SHEET 3 87 3410/LBL
2400/BLK 2800/BLK C GND
85 86 SHEET 4
2025/BLK 8110/TAN
SHEET 7 8800/TAN A HOLD
24.5 OHM
FRC1 T14
GLOW PLUG PRE HEATER
RELAY 8500/TAN
1060/RED 30 Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale
SHEET 3 87
2016/BLK 85 86
2055/BLK
SHEET 3
6 8510/TAN
14 3420/LBL
3 8110/TAN
30 3410/LBL
7 8210/TAN
22 3560/LBL
C107
5140/YEL B +5V PWR
J1A SHEET 9
GWY CTRLR 25 3140/LBL C SIG ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
2140/BRN A GND SENDER (0.5-4.5V)
SHEET 4
C405
2150/BRN B GND
SHEET 4 AIR FILTER
16 3150/LBL A SIG
SWITCH (NC)
C106
15
SHEET 4
3160/LBL
2160/BRN
A
B
SIG
GND
ENGINE SPEED SENSOR WIRING SCHEMATIC
(163 OHM)
C104
(ACS / SJC MACHINE)
2170/BRN B GND ENGINE COOLANT
18
SHEET 4
3170/LBL A SIG
SENSOR (500-3000 OHM)
(8 VOLT)
4 8800/TAN
J1B C355
GWY CTRLR FUEL HARN
C406 Sheet 6 of 15
12 3180/LBL C 3180/LBL OR 3100 LBL A SIG
FUEL SENDER
SHEET 4
2180/BRN D 2180/BRN OR 3110 LBL B GND (30 - 270 OHM) (PRINTED NOVEMBER 2010)
535 of 898
LEGEND
PARTIAL CONNECTOR
HYDRAULICS
GROUND PAGE 4
HYDRAULICS PAGE 7
CAB DISPLAY PAGE 8
CAB PAGE 9
HVAC PAGE 12
ACS PAGE 14 C425
SJC PAGE 15
FRC1 B C308
TRACTION LOCK BRAKE
4100/LGN 4200/LGN A 4200/LGN A SOLENOID
RELAY TRACK 2 SPEED
2200/BLK C 2200/BLK B 9.8 OHM ADAPTER (SEE
1360/RED/WHT 30 SHEET 4
SHEET 3 3430/LBL 12 V ADDITIONAL
87
2025/BLK WHEEL 2 SPD ADP HARNESS 7159366 OPTIONS SHEET)
SHEET 6 85 86 TRACK SINGLE SPD BRAKE ADAPTER HARNESS 7165061
2035/BLK 4110/LGN
SHEET 11
C425
B PULL 0.3 OHM

A HOLD 10.9 OHM
C WHEEL SINGLE SPEED
8
TRACTION LOCK
13
C108
2220/BRN B HYDRAULIC
GND
SHEET 4 TEMPERATURE
32 3220/LBL A SIG SENDER
500 - 3000 OHM
C112 (8 VOLT)
J1A 34 3320/LBL A SIG HYDRAULIC OIL
GWY CTRLR 2320/BRN B GND FILTER SWITCH (NC)
SHEET 4
C446 Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

18 2910/BRN 2 GND HYDRAULIC
4010/LGN 1 SIG FAN SOLENOID
7.2 OHM 12 V
C420
1 2410/BRN B GND HYDRAULIC LOCK
4410/LGN A SIG SOLENOID
9.8 OHM 12 V
C105
2190/BRN B GND HYDRAULIC
SHEET 4
3190/LBL C SIG CHARGE
5190/YEL A +8V PWR PRESSURE
0.5-7.5V
4200/LGN
19 13 1 23 6
J1B +8V
GWY CTRLR
C418
J2A
AUX CTRLR
18 2330/BRN 2 GND FRONT ROD
SOLENOID (MALE)
WIRING SCHEMATIC
4330/LGN 1 SIG
3.3 OHM PWM
C419
(ACS / SJC MACHINE)
1 2 GND
2340/BRN
4340/LGN 1 SIG
FRONT BASE
SOLENOID (FEMALE) T750 (S/N ANKA11001 AND ABOVE)
3.3 OHM PWM
19 13 Sheet 7 of 15
J2B
AUX CTRLR (PRINTED NOVEMBER 2010)
536 of 898
LEGEND
OVERVIEW PAGE 1,2
BATT FEED, GENERAL 1000 THROUGH 1499 RED RED
CAB DISPLAY
POWER PAGE 3
GROUND PAGE 4
BATT FEED, SWITCHED 1500 THROUGH 1999 ORANGE/WHITE RNG/WHT
CAN BUS PAGE 5
ENGINE PAGE 6 CONNECTOR
CONTROLLER GROUND/RETURN 2000 THROUGH 2999 BROWN BRN
HYDRAULICS PAGE 7
CAB DISPLAY PAGE 8
CAB
MANUAL CONTROLS
PAGE 9
PAGE 10 WIRE BREAK
OTHER FUNCTIONS
ENGINE
7000 THROUGH 7999
8000 THROUGH 8999
WHITE
TAN
WHT
TAN
LIGHTS
HVAC
PAGE 11
PAGE 12
(TWO WIRE BREAKS
JOIN ONE WIRE) (NOT IN STD CAB HARN 7165991)
COMMUNICATION 9000 THROUGH 9999 PURPLE PUR OPTIONS PAGE 13 SHEET #
SJC PAGE 15
T13
BUZZER (+)
C499
LEFT PANEL
Press To Operate Loader
7040/WHT OR 9320, PUR BUZZER
(PTOL)
C479
T2
LEFT PANEL (BLACK) 1930/RNG/WHT 1
BUZZER (-) SHEET 3 SWITCHED POWER
2940/BLK 3
7040/WHT OR 9320, PUR 10 SHEET 4 GROUND
BUZZER
C408
2920/BLK 2 CAB-MFR HARN
SHEET 4 GROUND
1960/RNG/WHT 1440/RED/WHT 1 20 3030/LBL 1 3030/LBL OR 9380, PUR 2
SHEET 3 SHEET 3 UNSWITCHED POWER PTOL OUTPUT
*
SW9
TRAVEL CONTROL
SHEET 3
1620/RNG/WHT 5 SWITCHED POWER
J1A
19 2380/BRN 37 2380/BRN OR 9370, PUR 4
PTOL LED
SWITCH (OPTIONAL) 3400/LBL 11 LEFT BLINKER INPUT
SHEET 13 GWY CTRLR
5 6 3500/LBL 8 Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale C500
4 SHEET 13 RIGHT BLINKER INPUT RIGHT KEY SWITCH PANEL
2700/BLK 2 3 3650/LBL 7 24 8130/TAN 4 8130/TAN OR 9360, PUR 2
SHEET 4 TRAVEL CONTROL INPUT START
1 9
3600/LBL OR 4500, LGN
PARK BRAKE INPUT 6
SW1 6
3 2 BRAKE SWITCH 12
1 J1B 22 3040/LBL 40 4
3040/LBL OR 9350, PUR RUN/ENTER SWITCH
3610/LBL OR 9310, PUR 4 5 GWY CTRLR
SHEET 3 1775/RNG/WHT 6
2930/BLK 1950/RNG/WHT 5
SHEET 4 C480 SHEET 3 SWITCHED POWER
LEFT PANEL (GRAY) 1420/RED/WHT 1
3620/LBL 12 2960/BLK 3
SHEET 9 DOOR SIGNAL SHEET 4 GROUND
11
10
9 C503
3610/LBL OR 9310, PUR 2 RIGHT DELUXE PANEL
PARK BRAKE OUTPUT
8 1590/RNG/WHT 5
7 SHEET 3 SWITCHED POWER
6 1240/RED/WHT 1
5 2250/BLK 3
4 SHEET 4 GROUND
6
3
1
WIRING SCHEMATIC
(ACS / SJC MACHINE)
Sheet 8 of 15
537 of 898 Printed In U.S.A. 7197682
LEGEND
PARTIAL CONNECTOR
CAB
GROUND PAGE 4
HYDRAULICS PAGE 7
CONTROLLER SUPPLY
LIGHTS
5000 THROUGH 5999
6000 THROUGH 6999
YELLOW
PINK
YEL
PNK
MANUAL CONTROLS
LIGHTS
PAGE 10
PAGE 11
WIRE BREAK
(TWO WIRE BREAKS
HVAC
OPTIONS
PAGE 12
PAGE 13
JOIN ONE WIRE)
SHEET #
(NOT IN STD CAB HARN 7165991)
ACS PAGE 14
SJC PAGE 15
SW4
*
HAND/FOOT (ACS)
H/ISO (SJC, AWS)
SWITCH
1785/RNG/WHT 2 1
SHEET 3 3
SHEET 9 2060/BLK 5 6
4
C492
SHEET 10 4230/LGN C408
(8 PIN) CAB-MFR HARN
SHEET 10 4240/LGN
5
3
4220/LGN
4275/LGN
4235/LGN 2
3
4235/LGN
4275/LGN
*C212
POWER
SOCKET
2 4550/LGN 5 4550/LGN 2795/BLK 1 GND
1375/RED/WHT 2 +12V PWR
2790/BLK 24 2790/BLK 2790/BLK 2010/BLK

* C209
B GND
SHEET 4
1370/RED/WHT 23 1370/RED/WHT 1390/RED/WHT A +12V PWR DOME
SHEET 3
3640/LBL C DOOR SIG LIGHT
C129
CAB ACCESSORY
1210/RED/WHT A +12V BATT PWR
1580/RNG/WHT 16 1580/RNG/WHT B
SHEET 3
1865/RNG/WHT
C
+12V SW PWR
2820/BLK GND
1510/RNG/WHT
SHEET 13
1885/RNG/WHT SHEET 13
2210/BLK SHEET 13
2885/BLK SHEET 13
2060/BLK
SHEET 4
2730/BLK 33 2730/BLK
SHEET 9
*C667
DOOR HARNESS
(SEE ADDITIONAL
OPTIONS SHEET)
3620/LBL 3630/LBL 4
SHEET 8 DOOR SIGNAL
1400/RED/WHT 5 DOOR UNSW PWR
SHEET 3
6
1850/RNG/WHT 27 1850/RNG/WHT 1850/RNG/WHT 1

SHEET 3 WIPER SWITCH, MOTOR SWITCHED POWER
C482 SEATBAR 2840/BLK 2
WIPER MOTOR GROUND
J1B
GWY CTRLR SHEET 4
2370/BRN 45 2370/BRN OR 3910, LBL A GND SENSOR 7310/WHT 3
WASHER SIGNAL
11 3370/LBL 46 3370/LBL OR 3920, LBL B SIG * C252

L SIG
WASHER
24 5100/YEL 5370/YEL 44 5370/YEL OR 3900, LBL C +5V PWR X MOTOR
+5V 2845/BLK GND
SHEET 6 5140/YEL
WIRING SCHEMATIC
(ACS / SJC MACHINE)
Sheet 9 of 15
538 of 898
LEGEND
PARTIAL CONNECTOR
MANUAL
HYDRAULICS PAGE 7
CONTROLS
HVAC PAGE 12
ACS PAGE 14
SJC PAGE 15
C409
RIGHT HANDLE
(MANUAL/ACS ONLY)
J2A
2530/BLK K
SHEET 4
AUX CTRLR SHEET 9 4230/LGN G
1520/RNG/WHT A
SHEET 3
30 4940/LGN H
C404 31 4930/LGN J SKI CTRL
C103
BU ALARM-MFR HARN 4920/LGN E
TAILGATE HARN DETENT FLOW
T19 TERMINAL (+) 13 4910/LGN F
(SEE ADDITIONAL A 7100/WHT C 7100/WHT TWO SPD
OPTIONS SHEET)
4310/LGN C
BACK UP
4320/LGN D
2650/BLK ALARM PWM
SHEET 4 4300/LGN B (8 VOLT)
T20 TERMINAL (-)
C410
21 17 18 23
LEFT HANDLE
J2B (MANUAL/ACS ONLY)
C421 AUX CTRLR K
J1A 10 2670/BRN 3 GND 20 4640/LGN D
GWY CTRLR 4670/LGN 1 SIG TILT SPOOL LOCK 28 4840/LGN C
2 7.8 OHM 12V 22 4830/LGN B SKI CTRL
12 4820/LGN G
C422 11 4810/LGN F SIDE SHIFT
2 2680/BRN 3 GND 1530/RNG/WHT A
LIFT SPOOL LOCK SHEET 3
4680/LGN 1 SIG J
7.8 OHM 12V
2 4240/LGN H
SHEET 9
2520/BLK E
SHEET 4
7 5
J1B
GWY CTRLR WIRING SCHEMATIC
(ACS / SJC MACHINE)
Sheet 10 of 15

539 of 898
LEGEND
PARTIAL CONNECTOR
LIGHTS
CONNECTOR
OTHER FUNCTIONS 7000 THROUGH 7999 WHITE WHT HVAC PAGE 12 JOIN ONE WIRE)
ENGINE 8000 THROUGH 8999 TAN TAN OPTIONS PAGE 13 SHEET #
COMMUNICATION 9000 THROUGH 9999 PURPLE PUR ACS PAGE 14
COMMUNICATION 9000 THROUGH 9999 PURPLE/WHITE PUR/WHT PAGE 15
SJC C434-1
2735/BLK B GND LEFT FRONT
C408
37.00 Watts
CAB-MFR HARN
C434-2
2765/BLK 28 2765/BLK 2750/BLK B GND LEFT FRONT
SHEET 4
50.00 Watts
C435-1
6000/PNK 25 6000/PNK 6120/PNK A SIG RIGHT FRONT
37.00 Watts
C435-2
6130/PNK A SIG RIGHT FRONT
50.00 Watts
FRC1
FRONT WORK C103
LIGHTS RELAY TAILGATE HARN C603
1330/RED/WHT 30 Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

SHEET 4
2610/BLK 2 GND
RIGHT REAR
SHEET 3 87 6340/PNK 6310/PNK A 6310/PNK 6320/PNK 1 SIG
TAIL LIGHT
2105/BLK 85 86 C602
SHEET 4
2045/BLK 6330/PNK 1 SIG
2640/BLK LEFT REAR
2 GND
SHEET 4 TAIL LIGHT
5 6320/PNK
31 3460/LBL
J1A
17 6210/PNK
GWY CTRLR
28 3440/LBL
T16 TERMINAL (-)

2620/BLK GND
SHEET 4 RIGHT REAR
6210/PNK SIG WORK LIGHT
FRC1
REAR LIGHT T15 TERMINAL (+)
RELAY
1320/RED/WHT 30 T17 TERMINAL (+)
SHEET 3 87 6200/PNK H 6200/PNK SIG LEFT REAR
2630/BLK GND WORK LIGHT
2045/BLK 85 86 SHEET 4
2035/BLK T18 TERMINAL (-)
SHEET 7
WIRING SCHEMATIC
(ACS / SJC MACHINE)
Sheet 11 of 15

540 of 898
LEGEND
PARTIAL CONNECTOR
HVAC
HYDRAULICS PAGE 7
LIGHTS
OTHER FUNCTIONS
6000 THROUGH 6999
7000 THROUGH 7999
PINK
WHITE
PNK
WHT
LIGHTS PAGE 11
WIRE BREAK
ENGINE
COMMUNICATION
8000 THROUGH 8999
9000 THROUGH 9999
TAN
PURPLE
TAN
PUR
OPTIONS
ACS
PAGE 13 SHEET # (NOT IN STD CAB HARN 7165991)
PAGE 14
SJC PAGE 15
2440/BLK *
C610
2
#
GND HVAC DUCT
7440/WHT 1 SIG FAN (NOT IN STD FUEL HARN 7149219)
C483
2560/BLK * C BLK
7420/WHT A DBL POTENTIOMETER
7425/WHT B (TEMP CONTROL
WHT SWITCH)
C635
* D SIG
2130/BLK C GND HEATER
7430/WHT A +12V PWR VALVE
B
E
F
FRC1 C408
*BLOWER
SW10
HVAC RELAY SWITCH

CAB-MFR HARN
30 Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale OFF
1140/RED/WHT
SHEET 3 87 1500/RNG/WHT 21 1500/RNG/WHT 5 2
1
2030/BLK 85 86 4
SHEET 3
SHEET 6
2005/BLK
1790/RNG/WHT
6
3 7530/WHT
* C611
1 14.00 Amps High
SHEET 3 7410/WHT 7520/WHT 2 7.50 Amps Med BLOWER
SW11 7510/WHT 3 5.00 Amps Low MOTOR
21 3450/LBL
SHEET 4
2745/BLK 22 2745/BLK *
AC SWITCH 2580/BLK 4
J1A 7015/WHT 1 C 7400/WHT

GWY CTRLR 2100/BLK 3
11 7021/WHT 7020/WHT 34
* C630
3
THERMOSTAT
AC EVAPORATOR C350 2570/BLK 2

SWITCH B 7023/WHT 7020/WHT 1
A 7024/WHT
C355
FUEL HARN # C486
A 7024/WHT 7025/WHT 1 SIG
2290/BLK 2280/BLK
2 GND
MAGNET CLUTCH
(COMPRESSOR) WIRING SCHEMATIC
SHEET 13
D4 (ACS / SJC MACHINE)
Sheet 12 of 15
541 of 898
LEGEND
OVERVIEW PAGE 1,2
OPTIONS
ENGINE PAGE 6
HYDRAULICS PAGE 7
CAB DISPLAY PAGE 8
CAB PAGE 9
LIGHTS
OTHER FUNCTIONS
6000 THROUGH 6999
7000 THROUGH 7999
PINK
WHITE
PNK
WHT
LIGHTS PAGE 11 (TWO WIRE BREAKS * DLX CAB HARN 7196753 ONLY
ENGINE
COMMUNICATION
8000 THROUGH 8999
9000 THROUGH 9999
TAN
PURPLE
TAN
PUR OPTIONS PAGE 13 SHEET # (NOT IN STD CAB HARN 7165991)
SJC PAGE 15
C355
POWER
# C607
1 4470/LGN OR 7010, WHT
FUEL HARN
E
C408
10 CAB-MFR HARN 4470/LGN
#
SIG 4470/LGN
BOB-TACH
CLOSE
GND 2 2470/OR 2770, BLK 2770/OR 2751, BLK B 2770/BLK
SHEET 4 4480/LGN (NOT IN STD FUEL HARN 7149219)
SHEET 12 2290/BLK
*POWER
SW5 2 1
# C606 BOBTACH 3
POWER 5 4
SIG 2 2480/OR 2775, BLK SWITCH 6
BOB-TACH 1 4480/LGN OR 7000, WHT 4480/LGN
GND F 9
OPEN
1380/RED/WHT
1410/RED/WHT 26 1410/RED/WHT 1200/RED/WHT
SHEET 3
X T3
C411
B 6010/PNK 15
1430/RED/WHT
6010/PNK L
* FLASHER CONN
C 3500/LBL
SHEET 8 D1
LEFT HANDLE A 6515/PNK 6500/PNK 36 6500/PNK 6530/PNK
*BEACON
SW2
6570/PNK
(BLINKER / FLASHER) E 6540/PNK
5 PIN D2 SWITCH
D 6415/PNK 6400/PNK 29 6400/PNK 6430/PNK
3400/LBL 2725/BLK 6
C103
SHEET 8
*SW3
HAZARD SWITCH
2
1
6700/PNK
4
1
5
2
(PINS 3 & 6 3
TAILGATE HARN
INTERNALLY 5 4 3
2850/BLK
INSULATED) 6
EURO TAIL LIGHTS E 6410/PNK C670
(SEE ADDITIONAL D 6510/PNK * E
OPTIONS SHEET) 2780/BLK D
30 2780/BLK 2420/BLK
SHEET 4 Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale 6440/PNK F
BEACON/FLASHER
EXTERIOR HARNESS
6540/PNK B (SEE ADDITIONAL
1550/RNG/WHT 13 1550/RNG/WHT C OPTIONS SHEET)
C423
SHEET 3
LEFT +
C279
1 7820/WHT
* C676
3
A
3
BUCKET
POSITION
SIG A 4450/LGN D3 4455/LGN 35 4455/LGN 1
4
2 *BUCKET
SW6 SPEAKER
-
2 7830/WHT 4
2830/BLK 5 POSITION C278 RADIO CONN
SOLENOID GND B 2450/BLK 2455/BLK SWITCH
9.8 OHM SHEET 4 SHEET 4 6 2 7810/WHT 6
RIGHT -
C126 SPEAKER 1 7800/WHT 5
SHEET 4 2785/BLK + 1885/RNG/WHT 1
C412 B GND SHEET 9 PWR
FRONT 2885/BLK 2
LEFT HANDLE B 7210/WHT 38 7210/WHT A SIG SHEET 9 GND
HORN
(HORN) A 1460/RED/WHT
2 PIN
SHEET 3 C277
* 1
2
C497 3
5 7200/WHT C SJC 4 PWR
HORN/BLINKER AIR RIDE
4 6420/PNK A 2210/BLK 5 GND
(SEE ADDITIONAL SHEET 9 SEAT
J2A 3 6520/PNK B OPTIONS SHEET) 6
AUX CTRLR
C415
26 2460/BRN B GND HIGH FLOW
A SIG
SOLENOID
4460/LGN
7.5 OHM 12 V
J2B
26
AUX CTRLR
WIRING SCHEMATIC
C437
27 2360/BRN 2 GND TWO SPEED
MAKEUP SOLENOID
(ACS / SJC MACHINE)
4360/LGN 1 SIG
J1A
GWY CTRLR
8.8 OHM 12V TRACK 2 SPEED
ADAPTER (SEE
C441
ADDITIONAL Printable Version Click Here
26 2350/BRN 2 GND TWO SPEED OPTIONS SHEET)
4350/LGN 1 SIG SOLENOID
5.1 OHM 12 V
Sheet 13 of 15
25 26
J1B (PRINTED NOVEMBER 2010)
GWY CTRLR

542 of 898
ACS CONTROLLER
ACS
CONNECTOR J1-ACS CONNECTOR J2-ACS CONNECTOR J3-ACS
PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION
A +5V TO SENSORS A LIFT CYLINDER SENSOR-SPARE A TILT MOTOR 1
B SWITCHED POWER B FLOAT-SPARE B UNSWITCHED POWER
C HAND/FOOT INPUT C RESPONSE SELECTOR-SPARE C UNSWITCHED POWER
D CAN HIGH D TILT CYLINDER SENSOR-SPARE D LIFT MOTOR 2
E
F
G
H
CAN LOW
GROUND
GROUND
E
F
G
H
J
TILT ACTUATOR FEEDBACK
LIFT HANDLE
TILT HANDLE
LIFT ACTUATOR FEEDBACK
LIFT PEDAL
E
F
G
H
J
HANDLE ENABLE
LIFT MOTOR 1
PEDAL ENABLE
GROUND
GROUND
CONTROLS
K TILT PEDAL K TILT MOTOR 2
ACS HARNESS 7164144
J1-ACS
CONTROLLER
H 2280/BLK
2280/BLK
SEE MANUAL CONTROL
2240/BLK
PAGE FOR HARNESS CONN
MAINFRAME HARNESS 1170/RED/WHT C409 C466
C492 C493 J3-ACS K A
4275/LGN
4220/LGN 5 4 2240/BLK CONTROLLER
G B HANDLE
4275/LGN 3 3 B 1190/RED/WHT LOCK
A
C 4550/LGN 2 2 C 1180/RED/WHT H
7 1 1170/RED/WHT E J SKI CTRL
4220/LGN
8 J 2260/BLK C467 E DETENT
E 9240/PUR 1 H 3 F FLOW
2270/BLK 2510/BLK
D 9140/PUR/WHT 4 G 4280/LGN 1 LIFT C TWO SPD
4260/LGN
B 1740/RNG/WHT 6 2 SOLENOID D
A 2250/YEL PWM
+5V 13 OHM B
G 2250/BRN 12V
C468
FOOT PEDAL LOCK
2 C410
3 K
2500/BLK
Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale 4270/LGN 1 TILT D
SOLENOID FLOAT
C
B SKI CTRL
J2-ACS C472
CONTROLLER C429 G
2650/BRN B B GRD LIFT ACTUATOR SIDE
D 4610/LGN 8 F
F 4650/LGN C C SIG LIFT HANDLE SHIFT
7 A
5650/YEL A A +5V PWR HALL SENSOR
6 J
F 4600/LGN 5 H A
C469 HANDLE
4 E B
2750/BRN B B GND LOCK
G 4750/LGN C C SIG 5980/YEL 3 +5V PWR
TILT HANDLE
5750/YEL A A +5V PWR HALL SENSOR 2980/BRN 1 GND
3980/LBL 2 SIG
A C471
B 2 C428 TILT ACTUATOR
2660/BRN GND
C
J 4660/LGN 3 SIG K 4645/LGN 8
LIFT PEDAL
D 1 +5V PWR HALL SENSOR 7
5660/YEL
2980/BRN
2990/BRN
6
C470 A 4645/LGN 5
2760/BRN 2 GND 4
K 4760/LGN 3 SIG 5990/YEL 3 +5V PWR
TILT PEDAL
5760/YEL 1 +5V PWR HALL SENSOR 2990/BRN 1 GND
5750/YEL 3990/LBL 2 SIG
5650/YEL 5980/YEL
2250/YEL 5990/YEL
WIRING SCHEMATIC
H
E
3980/LBL
3990/LBL
(ACS / SJC MACHINE)
Sheet 14 of 15
543 of 898 Printed In U.S.A. 7197682
ACS CONTROLLER J5 DRIVE CONTROLLER
CONNECTOR J1-ACS CONNECTOR J2-ACS CONNECTOR J3-ACS PIN FUNCTION
SJC PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION 1 SAFETY IN

A +5V TO SENSORS A LIFT CYLINDER SENSOR-SPARE A TILT MOTOR 1 2 TWO SPEED SWITCH
B SWITCHED POWER B FLOAT-SPARE B UNSWITCHED POWER 3 SPARE DIGITAL INPUT 2
C HAND/FOOT INPUT C RESPONSE SELECTOR-SPARE C UNSWITCHED POWER 4 H PAT SWITCH
D CAN HIGH D TILT CYLINDER SENSOR-SPARE D LIFT MOTOR 2 5 ISO PAT SWITCH
6 ISO LITE
CONTROLS
E CAN LOW E TILT ACTUATOR FEEDBACK E HANDLE ENABLE
F F LIFT HANDLE F LIFT MOTOR 1 7 L SWASH PLATE ANGLE
G GROUND G TILT HANDLE G PEDAL ENABLE 8 R SWASH PLATE ANGLE
H GROUND H LIFT ACTUATOR FEEDBACK H GROUND 9 SPARE ANALOG 4
J LIFT PEDAL J GROUND 10 SPARE ANALOG 5
K TILT PEDAL K TILT MOTOR 2 11 L FWD RETURN
12 CAN HIGH
13 LF ANGLE
HARNESS PART NUMBER LIFT 14 RF ANGLE
C429 ACTUATOR
SJC WHEEL 7159325 S630, S650 S730, S750, S770 15 LR ANGLE
4600/LGN 5
SJC TRACK 7159458 T630, T650, T730, T750, T770 16 H PAT LITE
J5 - DRIVE SUSP JSTK 7163706 S630, S650, S730, S750, S770, 4610/LGN
6
8 17 RR ANGLE
T630, T650, T730, T750, T770
CONTROLLER 2980/BRN 1
4
GND 18
19
L JOYSTICK X
L JOYSTICK Y
C454 3980/LBL 2 SIG 20 R JOYSTICK X
29 2890/BRN 2880/BRN 3 7
GND 21 L FWD DRIVE
5880/YEL 1 +5V PWR 5980/YEL 3 +5V PWR
LEFT SPEED 22 CAN LOW
33 3880/LBL 2 SIG SENSOR
C428 23 R QUAD A DRIVE
34 3885/LBL 4 SIG TILT ACTUATOR
5990/YEL 3 +5V PWR 24 R QUAD B DRIVE
40 5890/YEL C453 4 25 TWO SPEED 1
+5V
5970/YEL
5870/YEL 1 +5V PWR 3990/LBL 2 SIG 26 BRAKE LIGHT OUTPUT
2870/BRN 3 GND 6
23 3870/LBL 2 RIGHT SPEED 27 GROUND
SIG 2990/BRN 1 GND
SENSOR 28 GROUND
24 3875/LBL 4 SIG 4640/LGN 5
7 29 SENSOR GROUND
C536 A22 PUMP HARNESS (7169309 or 7188448) 30 SENSOR SUPPLY 2 +5V
2970/BRN
5810/YEL 2 C543 4650/LGN 8
2810/BRN 4 2810/BRN or BLK 1 GND
31 L REV DRIVE
8 3810/LBL 3 3810/LBL or 4720, LGN 3 SIG 32 CAN SHIELD
1710/RNG/WHT 1 1710/RNG/WHT 2 +12V PWR K 33 L QUAD A DRIVE
J 34 L QUAD B DRIVE
J2-ACS
C537 RIGHT
E
5860/YEL 2 C542 SWASHPLATE 35 SAFETY OUT
H
2860/BRN 4 2860/BRN or BLK 1 GND 36 BACKUP ALARM
F
7 3860/LBL 3 3860/LBL or 4950, LGN 3 SIG 37 R JOYSTICK Y
G
1770/RNG/WHT 1 1770/RNG/WHT 2 +12V PWR
C 38 SPARE ANALOG 1
LEFT
C501 C546 SWASHPLATE D 39 SPARE PWM COIL 7
43 4260/LGN 1 4260/LGN 1 B 40 SENSOR SUPPLY 1 +5V
42 2660/BRN 2 2660/BRN or BLK 2
RIGHT FORWARD DRIVE
ACS CONTROLLER
A 41 L REV RETURN
42 R FWD RETURN
C547
44 4250/LGN 3 4250/LGN 1 A 43 R FWD DRIVE
RIGHT REVERSE DRIVE +5V 44 R REV DRIVE
45 2650/BRN 4 2650/BRN or BLK 2 G
J1-ACS
F 45 R REV RETURN
C545 9240/PUR E 46 TWO SPEED 2
31 4280/LGN 5 4280/LGN 1
9140/PUR/WHT D 47 UNSWITCHED BATTERY
41 2680/BRN 6 2680/BRN or BLK 2 LEFT REVERSE DRIVE
1760/RNG/WHT B 48 UNSWITCHED BATTERY
2280/BLK H
49 SPARE PWN COIL 6
C544 C
21 4270/LGN 7 4270/LGN 1 50 SWITCHED BATTERY
11 2670/BRN 8 2670/BRN or BLK 2 LEFT FORWARD DRIVE
K
C460
TO SJC BRAKE A 1 1
C474 1830/RNG/WHT +12V PWR
HARNESS D
26 4210/LGN A C450 2 2070/BLK 2 GND
J3-ACS
(SEE ADDITIONAL OPTIONS F RIGHT
RIGHT JOYSTICK 4 9660/PUR 4 CAN LO
SHEET)
2270/BLK H (CONNECTS TO JOYSTICK
2260/BLK J DLX CAB HARNESS)
C492 3 9560/PUR/WHT 3 CAN HI
1180/RED/WHT C
12 9190/PUR/WHT 8
1190/RED/WHT B
22 9290/PUR 7 C459
E
4 4550/LGN 2 1 1840/RNG/WHT 1 +12V PWR
G
6 4220/LGN 5
C449 2 2080/BLK 2 GND
16 4275/LGN 3 LEFT JOYSTICK
9140/PUR/WHT 4
LEFT
(CONNECTS TO 4 9640/PUR 4 CAN LO
9240/PUR 1 DLX CAB HARNESS) JOYSTICK
50 1750/RNG/WHT 1740/RNG/WHT 6
MAINFRAME 3 9540/PUR/WHT 3 CAN HI
HARNESS
27 2470/BLK C493
28 2490/BLK 2235/BLK 3
47 1250/RED/WHT 1235/RED/WHT 2
48 1260/RED/WHT 1170/RED/WHT 1
2240/BLK 4
WIRING SCHEMATIC
(ACS / SJC MACHINE)
1760/RNG/WHT
2280/BLK
2270/BLK
2260/BLK
1180/RED/WHT
1190/RED/WHT Sheet 15 of 15
C404
36 7100/WHT A (CONNECTS TO BACKUP
B ALARM C404 ON MFR
HARNESS)
7197682
544 of 898 Printed In U.S.A.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INFORMATION
Glossary Of Electrical Symbols

CONNECTIONS COMPONENTS
CONNECTOR - Harness - Used for GROUND - Frame - Used to
3500 A A 3500 connecting 2 harnesses together or a represent an component that is
C107
3520 C C 3520
3510 B B 3510
harness to a component. The internally grounded.
connector can vary from a single pin
to any number of pins (Example: 3 pin
connectors shown). The connector
LIGHT -
C107 pins can be numbered alphabetical
3500
A A
3500 (shown) or numerical (1, 2, 3 etc.).
C C
3520
B B
3520 The harness wires numbers are
3510 3510
called out next to the connector
(Example: 3500). SWITCH - Single Pole - Single Throw
(ON-OFF) Normally Open
The connector number is called out
next to the connector (Example:
C107). These connector numbers are
used for schematic identification only
and do not appear on the harness or

connector. SWITCH - Single Pole - Single Throw
(ON-OFF) Normally Closed.
COMPONENTS
- + BATTERY - Used for supplying and SWITCH - Single Pole - Double

storing electrical power for the Throw (ON-OFF-ON) - This switch
machine. can be in any of three positions.
(Some switches are spring activated
to return them to a certain position
+ POSITIVE ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT -
when released.)
Indicates positive battery circuit.
SWITCH - Double Pole - Single
Throw (ON-OFF) Open and Closed
positions will be specified depending
- NEGATIVE ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT - on switch application.)
Indicates battery ground circuit.
SWITCH - Double Pole - Double
Throw (ON-OFF) Open and Closed
ALTERNATOR - Used to create the positions will be specified depending
on switch application.
G electrical current to supply voltage to
the battery and components.
POTENTIOMETER - Variable
+ - resistance - Provides variable
STARTER - Uses battery current to resistance.
M start the machine engine.
GROUND - Used to represent an

external ground connection.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INFORMATION (CONT’D)
Glossary Of Electrical Symbols (Cont’d)

COMPONENTS SOLENOID - Fuel and Traction Lock -
HOLD PULL
15 ohm B
Dual solenoids. (The ohm rating of
I SWITCH - Ignition - Multi position 0.5 ohm A the solenoid coils are listed next to
B
switch to activate various start the component [if available]). The pull
ST functions at different positions. solenoid is energized for a short time.
START
HORN - Audible alarm. Sound is
R U N
O FF
activated manually by a switch.
BUZZER - Audible alarm. Sounds at

1 SWITCH - Light - Multi position switch a predetermined setting to warn the
2 to activate various lights at different operator of a component condition.
3
positions.
4 5 RESISTOR - Limits current flow.
6

DIODE - Allows electrical current to
ROTARY CONTROL - Provides flow in 1 direction only.
variable voltage proportional to
position.
L MOTOR - HVAC - Multi speed motor.
M
H M
GRD
87A 87 86 RELAY - Uses a low amp switch to GRD MOTOR - Wiper - Single or multi
control a high amp component. PARK V speed motor.
30 85 M
HIGH
FUSE - Used to protect the wire MOTOR - Washer - Single speed.

M
harness from an overloaded circuit.
25A (The fuse rating is listed next to the
fuse.)
PUMP - FUEL
3
700 3
710 SPLICE (•) - Used to show when
3
110 multiple wires are connected together
on the schematic. HOURMETER - Records the time the
H
+ - engine is running.
SOLENOID - ON / OFF - Electrically
1 activated coil that controls movement
2 magnetically. (The ohm rating of the POWER PLUG - Supplies 12 volt
- +
7.7 ohm
solenoid coil is listed next to the power for customer supplied
component [if available]). accessories.
SOLENOID - VARIABLE - Electrically GAUGE - Instrument - Indicates

A G certain engine or other component
activated coil that controls movement
B conditions. (The different types of
7.5 ohm magnetically. (The ohm rating and I S
gauge are marked with a icon that
12V
voltage of the solenoid coil is listed represents what function the gauge is
next to the component [if available]). monitoring. Example: the gauge
shown is for fuel.)

Glossary Of Electrical Symbols (Cont’d)

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
SENDERS AND SENSORS
+
A
PRESSURE SENDER - Provides a
A variable voltage proportional to
C
- C pressure. (Sender voltage rating is
B
B
0.5 - 7.5 V listed to show volts at high and low
setting.)
B
PRESSURE SWITCH - Switch opens
A or closes at a predetermined
pressure to active a function or to turn
on a warning light. (Switch is shown
in the open position.)
to TEMPERATURE SENDER - Provides

B a variable resistance (ohm) signal
A proportional to temperature. (Sender
500-3000ohm ohm rating is listed to show ohms at

high and low setting.)
A TEMPERATURE SWITCH - The

B switch opens or closes at a
predetermined temperature to active
a function or to turn on a warning
light. (Switch is shown in the closed
position.)
B FUEL SENDER - Provides a variable

resistance, based on the fuel level in
A
the tank. (Sender ohm rating is listed
30-270 ohm to show ohms at full and empty
setting.)
C HALL EFFECT SENSOR - Detects

B linear or rotary position and provides
A a proportional variable voltage.
A SPEED SENSOR - magnetic pickup -

detects rpm.
B

Standard Cab Harness Connectors
C129 C479
C480 C434-1
C434-2
C482
T13
T2

C499
C503
SW1
C435-1
C435-2
C500
C408
C126
MS2824

Deluxe Cab Harness Connectors
C209
C670 C479 C434-1

C480 C434-2
C499
T13
C482 T2
SW1
SW3
C500

C503 SW2
SW6
C435-1
C435-2
SW4
C667
C426
SW5
SW9
C611 C252
C630
C635
C126
C129 C253
C277 C279
C449 C483
C450 S3
T3
C278
C676
C212
MS2827

Mainframe Harness Connectors
C426
C405
C103 C 350
408
T11 T6
T1

T8 C355
T10 T4
C101 C105
C110 C104
C362
T12 C107
FRC1
C486 C446 FC1
C108 FC2
C423 C362
C441 C489
C415 C497
J2A
C409 J2B
C419 J1A
C420 C410 J1B
C418 C404 C411
C421 C437 C412
C422
C425
C492
C493
MS2825

Description
Figure 60-10-1
P-13849
P-90658
The loader has a 12 volt, negative ground, alternator

charging system.

The electrical system is protected by fuses located in the
operator cab and a 100 ampere master fuse [Figure 60-
10-1] located above the battery in the engine
compartment.
The fuses will protect the electrical system when there is

an electrical overload. The reason for the overload must
be found before starting the engine again.

Troubleshooting WARNING
assistance in locating and correcting problems which are AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
most common. Many of the recommended procedures Instructions are necessary before operating or
must be done by authorized Bobcat Service Personnel servicing machine. Read and understand the
only. Operation & Maintenance Manual, Operator’s
W-2003-0807
PROBLEM CAUSE
Battery will not take a charge. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Alternator will not charge. 1, 2, 5
Starter will not turn the engine. 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9

1. Alternator belt is loose or damaged.
2. Battery connections are dirty or loose.
3. Battery is damaged.
4. The ground connection is not making a good contact.
5. The alternator is damaged.
6. The engine is locked.
7. The starter is damaged.
8. The wiring or solenoid is damaged.
9. Check the fuses.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INFORMATION (CONT’D) Figure 60-10-4
Fuse And Relay Location / Identification
Figure 60-10-2
P100416
1
Remove the covers to check or replace the fuses [Figure
P100414 60-10-4].
A decal is located inside the access panel to show

The fuse / relay panels are located behind an access location and amperage ratings.
panel near the left foot pedal / footrest. Pull the panel at

each end (Item 1) [Figure 60-10-2] to remove. Install the fuse panel covers [Figure 60-10-3].
Figure 60-10-3 Line up the clips on the back of the access panel with the
slots provided and push the panel into place when
finished [Figure 60-10-2]. A locating pin prevents the
panel from being installed upside down.
A table is provided with details on amperage ratings and

circuits affected by each fuse and relay. [Figure 60-10-5
on Page 10]
P100415
The electrical system is protected from overload by fuses

and relays located under three fuse panel covers (Item 1)
[Figure 60-10-3].

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (CONT’D)
Fuse And Relay Location / Identification (Cont’d)
Figure 60-10-5
1 13 21 25
17
5 7 9 11
2 22 26
14 18
3 15 19 23 27
6 8 10 12
4 16 20 24 28
The location and amperage ratings are shown in the table below and on the decal [Figure 60-10-5]. Relays are identified
by the letter “R” in the AMP column.
REF ICON DESCRIPTION AMP REF ICON DESCRIPTION AMP REF ICON DESCRIPTION AMP

1 Alternator 15 11 Glow Plugs R 21 Bobcat Controller 25
2 Heater / HVAC 25 12 Fuel Shutoff R 22 ACS Controller 25
Cab Switched
3 Front Lights 20 13 5 23 Attachments 25
Power
4 Rear Lights 15 14 Bucket Position 15 24 Not Used --
Auxiliary
5 Starter R 15 Wiper / Washer 25 25 25
Controller
Switched Power Drive Controller

6 Front Lights R 16 and Non-SJC 25 26 and SJC Back-up 25
Back-up Alarm Alarm
Accessories and
7 Heater / HVAC R 17 Switched Power 25 27 25
Front Horn
8 Rear Lights R 18 Switched Power 25 28 Power Port 15
9 Switched Power R 19 Traction 30
10 Traction R 20 Fuel Shutoff 30

Solenoid Testing
Figure 60-10-6
P9175
Use a test meter to measure coil resistance [Figure 60-

10-6]. Coil wires do not have polarity. Correct resistance

for the pressure relief (small) coil is 7 - 10 ohm and the
other coils 5 - 8 ohm.
Replace the test meter with 12 volt power. You can see
and hear the spool shift.


BATTERY Figure 60-20-2
WARNING
Batteries contain acid which burns eyes and skin on
contact. Wear goggles, protective clothing and
rubber gloves to keep acid off body.
In case of acid contact, wash immediately with water.

In case of eye contact get prompt medical attention P-09589 P-09590
and wash eye with clean, cool water for at least 15
minutes.
Always clean the battery terminals and cable ends when
If electrolyte is taken internally drink large quantities installing a new or used battery [Figure 60-20-2].
of water or milk! DO NOT induce vomiting. Get
prompt medical attention. When installing the battery in the loader, do not touch any
W-2065-0807 metal parts with the battery terminals.

Connect the negative (-) cable last to prevent sparks.
Open the rear door.
Connect and tighten the battery cables.
Figure 60-20-1
Install and tighten the battery hold down clamp.
WARNING
1
BATTERY GAS CAN EXPLODE AND CAUSE
2 Keep arcs, sparks, flames and lighted tobacco away
from batteries. When jumping from booster battery
make final connection (negative) at machine frame.
Do not jump start or charge a frozen or damaged

P100285
battery. Warm battery to 16°C (60°F) before
connecting to a charger. Unplug charger before
Disconnect the negative (-) cable (Item 1) [Figure 60-20- connecting or disconnecting cables to battery. Never
1]. lean over battery while boosting, testing or charging.
W-2066-0910
Remove the battery hold down clamp (Item 2) [Figure
60-20-1].
Disconnect the positive (+) cable (Item 3) [Figure 60-20-

1] from the battery.
Remove the battery from the loader.

BATTERY (CONT’D)
Servicing
Figure 60-20-3
P-09589 P-09590
The battery cables must be clean and tight [Figure 60-

20-3]. Check electrolyte level in the battery. Add distilled

water as needed. Remove acid or corrosion from battery
and cables with sodium bicarbonate (baking soda) and
water solution.
Put Bobcat Battery Saver or grease on the battery

terminals and cable ends to prevent corrosion.
WARNING

In case of eye contact get prompt medical attention
minutes.
If electrolyte is taken internally drink large quantities

prompt medical attention.
W-2065-0807

BATTERY (CONT’D) Keep cables away from moving parts. Start the engine.
Using A Booster Battery (Jump Starting) After the engine has started, remove the negative (-)
cable (Item 4) first. Remove the cable from the positive
If it is necessary to use a booster battery to start the terminal (Item 2) [Figure 60-20-4].
engine, BE CAREFUL! There must be one person in the
operator’s seat and one person to connect and
disconnect the battery cables.
The key switch must be OFF or the STOP button must be

pressed. The booster battery must be 12 volt.
IMPORTANT
Damage to the alternator can occur if:
• Engine is operated with battery cables
disconnected.
WARNING • Battery cables are connected when using a fast
charger or when welding on the loader. (Remove
both cables from the battery.)
BATTERY GAS CAN EXPLODE AND CAUSE • Extra battery cables (booster cables) are
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH connected wrong.
Keep arcs, sparks, flames and lighted tobacco away I-2023-1285
make final connection (negative) at machine frame.
Do not jump start or charge a frozen or damaged

battery. Warm battery to 16°C (60°F) before
connecting to a charger. Unplug charger before
connecting or disconnecting cables to battery. Never
lean over battery while boosting, testing or charging.
W-2066-0910
Figure 60-20-4
2
4
3 1
P-90660A
Connect the end of the first cable (Item 1) to the positive

(+) terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end
of the same cable (Item 2) [Figure 60-20-4] to the
positive terminal on the loader starter.
Connect the end of the second cable (Item 3) to the

negative terminal of the booster battery. Connect the
other end of the same cable (Item 4) [Figure 60-20-4] to
the engine.


ALTERNATOR Move the alternator toward the engine as far as it will go
and remove the belt from the pulleys. Inspect the pulleys
Belt Adjustment for wear.
The alternator belt is a special maintenance free type that Install new belt.
is pretensioned over the pulleys. This belt eliminates the
need for a tensioning device and does not require Figure 60-30-3
periodic adjustment. Contact your Bobcat dealer for
replacement parts.
Belt Replacement
Remove the air conditioning belt. (See REGULAR

MAINTENANCE on Page 80-20-1.)
Figure 60-30-1 1
P100038

1 Use a prybar (Item 1) [Figure 60-30-3] to move the
alternator until the bottom alternator mounting bolt (Item
2) [Figure 60-30-2] can be installed.
3 Tighten the top alternator mounting nut (Item 1) and

bottom alternator mounting bolt (Item 2) [Figure 60-30-
2].
P100231
Install the air conditioning belt. (See REGULAR
MAINTENANCE on Page 80-20-1.)
Remove the clamp nut and bolt (Item 1). Remove the belt
shield mounting nuts and bolts (Item 2) and remove the Install the belt shield, mounting nuts and bolts, and clamp
belt shield (Item 3) [Figure 60-30-1]. nut and bolt [Figure 60-30-1].
Figure 60-30-2 Close the rear door.
P100034
Remove the bottom alternator mounting bolt (Item 2) and

loosen the top alternator mounting nut (Item 1) [Figure
60-30-2].

ALTERNATOR (CONT'D) Figure 60-30-4
Charging System Inspection
WARNING
2

In case of eye contact get prompt medical attention P-85914
minutes. If the charging system malfunctions check the following:
Check the condition and tension of the alternator belt.

If electrolyte is taken internally drink large quantities
(See Belt Adjustment on Page 60-30-1.) Replace belt if
worn or deteriorated.
prompt medical attention.
W-2065-0807 Inspect the alternator wiring harness and connectors at
alternator. Harness and connectors must be clean and

tight.
Check the fuse for the alternator in the fuse panel. If fuse
WARNING is burned, find the cause and repair / replace. If fuse is in
doubt, remove it and check for continuity.
BATTERY GAS CAN EXPLODE AND CAUSE Check the electrolyte level in the battery. Add distilled
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH water as needed. (Does not apply to maintenance free
Keep arcs, sparks, flames and lighted tobacco away batteries.)
make final connection (negative) at machine frame. Verify the charge of the battery. Make sure battery is fully
charged.
Do not jump start or charge a frozen or damaged Disconnect the battery cables (negative first, then
battery. Warm battery to 16°C (60°F) before positive). Inspect the cable clamps and battery posts for
connecting to a charger. Unplug charger before corrosion. Remove acid or corrosion from the battery
connecting or disconnecting cables to battery. Never and cables with a sodium bicarbonate and water
lean over battery while boosting, testing or charging. solution. Put grease on the cable ends and battery
W-2066-0910
terminals to prevent corrosion. Reconnect the cable to
the positive terminal.
IMPORTANT
disconnected.
• Battery cables are connected when using a fast
• Extra battery cables (booster cables) are
connected wrong.
I-2023-1285

ALTERNATOR (CONT'D) Low Voltage Testing
Alternator Voltage Testing Figure 60-30-6
Figure 60-30-5
P-85914
P-85916
Turn engine OFF and remove the L & S terminal
connector (Item 1) [Figure 60-30-6] from the alternator.
Open rear door.
Turn the remote start tool key to the ON position.

Connect the remote start tool to the loader. (See
REMOTE START TOOL KIT-MEL1563 on Page 10-60- Figure 60-30-7
1.)
Turn the engine on with the remote start tool and run at
idle. With a voltmeter, check the voltage between the B+
terminal and ground at the starter [Figure 60-30-5].
The voltage must be higher than 13.5 volts but lower than
14.7 volts at 21.1°C (70°F) (Alternator Temperature).
If the voltage is higher that 14.7 volts, proceed to the 2

following high voltage test.
If the voltage is lower than 13.5 volts, run the engine at

high idle and recheck voltage. If voltage is still below 13.5 1
volts, proceed with the following low voltage test. P-85915
Check the voltage across the “L” terminal (Item 1) and

ground (Item 2) [Figure 60-30-7]. The voltage should be
what the battery voltage is. If not, check wire harness,
relay and fuses. If the wire harness, relay and fuses are
okay remove alternator for replacement or repair.

ALTERNATOR (CONT'D)
High Voltage Testing
Figure 60-30-8
P-85917
Turn engine OFF and remove the L & S Terminal

connector (Item 1) [Figure 60-30-6] off the alternator.

Check the continuity between the “S” terminal (Item 1)
[Figure 60-30-8] and the positive (+) terminal on the
battery or starter terminal (Item 2) [Figure 60-30-8].
There should be continuity. If no continuity, replace wire
harness.
If voltage is still above 14.7 volts at 21.1°C (70°F)

(Alternator Temperature), then remove alternator for
replacement or repair.

ALTERNATOR (CONT'D) Figure 60-30-10
Remove the air conditioning belt. (See Compressor Drive

Belt Replacement on Page 80-20-2.)
IMPORTANT 2

disconnected.
• Battery cables are connected when using a fast P-85718
• Extra battery cables (booster cables) are Remove the alternator rain shield mounting nut and bolts
connected wrong. (Item 1) and remove the alternator rain shield (Item 2)
I-2023-1285 [Figure 60-30-10].
Figure 60-30-11
Figure 60-30-9

1
2
2
1
P-85609
P-85914
Remove the belt shield mounting nuts and bolts (Item 1)

Disconnect the negative (-) cable from the battery. and remove the belt shield (Item 2) [Figure 60-30-11].
Disconnect the red wire (Item 1) [Figure 60-30-9] from
the alternator which comes from the battery.
Disconnect the wiring harness connector (Item 2) [Figure

60-30-9] from the alternator.

ALTERNATOR (CONT'D) Parts Identification

1. Alternator 11. Bearing
Figure 60-30-12 2. Nut 12. Stator
3. Pulley 13. Bracket
4. Spacer 14. Sleeve
5. Bolt 15. Regulator
6. Bracket 16. Rectifier
1 7. Bolt 17. Cover
8. Bearing 18. Spacer
9. Retainer 19. Nut
10. Rotor
7
1
6
2 4 7 13 14
3 12
2
P-85611
10 11
5
Remove the top alternator mounting bolt (Item 1) and the 9
bottom alternator mounting bolt (Item 2) [Figure 60-30- 8

12].
Remove the belt and alternator from the loader. 19
18
17
16
15 C-3529B

STARTER Removal And Installation
Testing Open the rear door.
The key switch must be in the OFF position. Disconnect the negative (-) cable from the battery.
The battery must be at full charge. Figure 60-40-3

The cable connections on the battery must be clean and 2
tight.
3
Figure 60-40-1
Bat 1
S
M
3
Cranking
Motor P101566

Disconnect the positive (+) cable (Item 1) [Figure 60-40-
3] from the starter solenoid.
A-1992
Installation: Tighten the nut to 10.8 - 12.3 ft-lb (14,7 -

Connect a jumper wire between S terminal and BAT 16,7 N•m) torque.
terminal [Figure 60-40-1].
Disconnect the wire connector (Item 2) [Figure 60-40-3]
If the starter turns but does not turn the engine, the from the two solenoid wires.
starter drive has a defect.
Remove the three bolts (Item 3) [Figure 60-40-3].
Figure 60-40-2
Remove the starter from the engine.
Bat
S
M
Cranking
Motor
A-1991
Connect a jumper wire (of at least 4 gauge in size)

between the M terminal and the BAT terminal [Figure 60-
40-2].
If the starter turns, the defect is in the solenoid.
If the starter does not turn, the starter is defective.

STARTER (CONT'D)
1. Starter 30 13. Lever

2. Shaft 14. Gear
3. Gear 15. Bracket
4. Washer 16. Spring
5. Shaft 17. Gear
6. Stop Ring 34 18. Stop
33
7. Lever 19. Stop Ring
8. Holder 13 20. Ball
9. Spring 21. Armature
10. Spring 36 22. Washer
11. Plate 8 23. Seal
11
12. Seal 9
10
31
32 7
21
15
12 37

16
14
17 20
19 18
14
6
29
1 4
3
28
2
27
24. Yoke
35 25. Holder
26. Bracket
27. Ring
22 26
28. Bolt
29. Bolt
23 25 30. Switch
31. Seal
23 32. Bolt
33. Washer
34. Nut
35. Boot
24
36. Bracket
37. Bearing
B-19824

INSTRUMENT PANELS
Left Panel
Figure 60-50-1
2 3 12
7
1
16
4 13
6 8 9 11
10 15
5 14

17 20
18 19
21 22
23
P-90726B
The left instrument panel [Figure 60-50-1] is the same The table on the facing page shows the DESCRIPTION
for Standard Key Panel, Keyless Start Panel and Deluxe and FUNCTION / OPERATION for each of the
Instrumentation Panel equipped machines. components of the left panel.

INSTRUMENT PANEL IDENTIFICATION (CONT’D)
Left Panel (Cont’d)
REF.
DESCRIPTION FUNCTION / OPERATION
NO.
1 ENGINE TEMPERATURE GAUGE Shows the engine coolant temperature.
2 LEFT DIRECTION INDICATOR (Option) Indicates left flasher signals are ON.
3 GENERAL WARNING Malfunction with one or more machine functions. (See Service Codes*)
4 TWO-SPEED (Option) High range selected.
5 ENGINE MALFUNCTION Engine malfunction or failure. (See Service Codes*)
6 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Engine coolant temperature high or sensor error.
7 DISPLAY SCREEN Displays information. (See Display Screen in this manual.)
8 SEAT BELT Instructs operator to fasten seat belt. Remains lit for 45 seconds.
9 SEAT BAR The light comes on when the seat bar is UP.
10 LIFT AND TILT VALVE The light comes on when the lift and tilt functions cannot be operated.
11 PARKING BRAKE The light comes on when the loader cannot be driven.
12 RIGHT DIRECTION INDICATOR (Option) Indicates right flasher signals are ON.
13 SHOULDER BELT (Option) Instructs operator to fasten shoulder belt when operating in high range.
Remains lit while in high range.
14 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM MALFUNCTION Hydraulic system malfunction or failure. (See Service Codes*)

15 FUEL Fuel level low or sensor error.
16 FUEL GAUGE Shows the amount of fuel in the tank.
17 LIGHTS Press once for FRONT work lights and REAR taillights. (Left green LED
will light.) Press a second time to add REAR work lights. (Left and right
green LEDs will light.) Press a third time to turn all lights off. (Left and
right green LEDs will be off.)
Press and hold 5 seconds to display software version in display screen.
18 HIGH-FLOW (Option) Press once to engage the HIGH-FLOW auxiliary hydraulics. (Left green
LED will light.) Press a second time to disengage.
19 AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS Press once to activate the auxiliary hydraulic system. (Left green LED
will light.) Press a second time to deactivate the system.
20 INFORMATION Cycles through (after each button press):
• Hourmeter (On startup)
• Engine rpm
• Battery voltage
• Maintenance clock (Press and hold for 7 seconds when
displayed to reset the maintenance clock.)
• Service codes*
21 TRACTION LOCK OVERRIDE Functions only when the seat bar is raised and the engine is running.
Press once to unlock the brakes. Allows you to use the steering levers or
joystick(s) to move the loader forward or backward when using the
backhoe attachment. (See TRACTION LOCK OVERRIDE in this
manual.) Press a second time to lock the brakes.
22 PRESS TO OPERATE LOADER Press to activate the BICS when the seat bar is down and operator is
seated in operating position. Button will light.
Press and hold 3 seconds to access Drive Response and Steering Drift
Compensation adjustment menus. (See DRIVE RESPONSE and
STEERING DRIFT COMPENSATION in this manual.)
23 PARKING BRAKE (Standard on all Press the top to engage the Parking Brake. Press the bottom to
loaders) disengage. (See PARKING BRAKE in this manual.)
* See SYSTEM SETUP & ANALYSIS for Service Code description. (See DIAGNOSTIC SERVICE CODES on Page 60-
90-1.)

INSTRUMENT PANELS (CONT’D)
Display Screen
The display screen can display the following information:
• Operating hours.
• Engine revolutions per minute (rpm).
• Speed management setting.
• Maintenance clock countdown.
• Battery voltage.
• Service codes.
• Engine preheat countdown.
• Steering drift compensation setting.
• Drive response setting.
Figure 60-50-2

2
3 4 5 6 7
P-76461A
The display screen is shown in [Figure 60-50-2]. The

data display will show operating hours upon startup.
1. Data Display
2. Hourmeter
3. Speed Management
4. Engine Preheat
5. Engine Revolutions Per Minute
6. Battery / Charging Voltage
7. Service

INSTRUMENT PANELS (CONT’D) The switch location (Item 2) [Figure 60-50-3] can have
different functions depending on machine configuration.
Right Panel (Standard Key Panel) See the following table for more information.
Figure 60-50-3
FUNCTION /
REF. DESCRIPTION
OPERATION
ADVANCED Press the top to select
CONTROL SYSTEM Hand Controls; bottom
(ACS) (Option) to select Foot
Controls.
SELECTABLE Press the top to select

JOYSTICK ‘ISO’ Control Pattern;
CONTROLS (SJC) bottom to select ‘H’
(Option) Control Pattern.
FOUR-WAY Press the top to turn

FLASHER LIGHTS lights ON; bottom to
(Option) turn OFF.
ROTATING Press the top to turn

BEACON (Option) light ON; bottom to
P-85285 or turn OFF.
STROBE LIGHT
(Option)
This machine may be equipped with a Standard Key
Panel [Figure 60-50-3].
The Standard Key Panel has a key switch (Item 1)

[Figure 60-50-3] used to turn the loaders electrical
system on and off, and to start and stop the engine.

INSTRUMENT PANELS (CONT’D) 6. RUN Button: Used to turn on the loaders electrical
system.
Right Panel (Keyless Start Panel)
The switch location (Item 7) [Figure 60-50-4] can have
Figure 60-50-4 different functions depending on machine configuration.
See the following table for more information.
FUNCTION /
REF. DESCRIPTION
OPERATION
1 ADVANCED Press the top to select

Controls.
2 3
SELECTABLE Press the top to select

JOYSTICK ‘ISO’ Control Pattern;
4 (Option) Control Pattern.
5

6

(Option) turn OFF.
7
P-90819B
ROTATING Press the top to turn
This machine may be equipped with a Keyless Start or turn OFF.
Panel [Figure 60-50-4]. STROBE LIGHT
(Option)
1. Keypad (keys 1 through 0): Used to enter a number
code (password) to allow starting the engine. An
asterisk will show in the left panel display screen for
each key press.
2. LOCK Key: Used to lock keypad. The lock key will

display a red light to indicate a password is required
to start the loader. (See Password Lockout Feature
on Page 60-191-1.)
3. UNLOCK Key: Used to unlock keypad. The unlock

key will display a green light to indicate the loader can
be started without a password. (See Password
Lockout Feature on Page 60-191-1.)
4. START Button: Used to start the engine.
5. STOP Button: Used to stop the engine and shut

down the loaders electrical system.

INSTRUMENT PANELS (CONT’D) 6. STOP Button: Used to stop the engine and shut
down the loaders electrical system.
Right Panel (Deluxe Instrumentation Panel)
7. RUN Button: Used to turn on the loaders electrical
Figure 60-50-5 system.
The switch location (Item 8) [Figure 60-50-5] can have

1 different functions depending on machine configuration.
See the following table for more information.
2 FUNCTION /
REF. DESCRIPTION
OPERATION
3 ADVANCED Press the top to select
Controls.
5 SELECTABLE Press the top to select

6 JOYSTICK ‘ISO’ Control Pattern;

7 (Option) Control Pattern.
8
(Option) turn OFF.
P-90212A
This machine may be equipped with a Deluxe

Instrumentation Panel [Figure 60-50-5]. ROTATING Press the top to turn
1. Keypad (1 through 0): The keypad has two or turn OFF.
functions: STROBE LIGHT
(Option)
- To enter a number code (password) to allow starting
the engine.
- To enter a number as directed for further use of the
display screen.
2. Display Screen: The Display Screen is where all

system setup, monitoring and error conditions are
displayed.
3. Scroll Buttons: Used to scroll through display screen

choices.
4. ENTER Button: Used to make selections on the

display screen.
5. START Button: Used to start the engine.

INSTRUMENT PANELS (CONT’D) Enter The Password:
Right Panel (Deluxe Instrumentation Panel) (Cont’d) Use the numbers on the keypad to enter the password,
then press the [ENTER] button. A symbol will appear on
Figure 60-50-6 the display screen for each number entered [Figure 60-
50-6]. The left scroll button can be used to backspace if
an incorrect number is entered.
If the correct password is not entered, [INVALID

PASSWORD TRY AGAIN] will appear on the display
screen and the password will have to be reentered.
See CONTROL PANEL SETUP for further description of

screens to setup the system for your use. (See
CONTROL PANEL SETUP on Page 60-180-1.)
NA3017
The first screen you will see on your new loader will be as
shown in [Figure 60-50-6].

When this screen is on the display you can enter the
password and start the engine or change the default
language.
NOTE: Your new loader (with Deluxe Instrumentation

Panel) will have an Owner Password. Your
dealer will provide you with this password.
Change the password to one that you will
easily remember to prevent unauthorized use
of your loader. Keep your password in a safe
place for future needs.
Change Language:
Press the left or right scroll button to cycle through the

languages. The language that is stopped on will be the
default language used for the deluxe instrumentation
panel [Figure 60-50-6].
The language can be changed at any time. (See

CONTROL PANEL SETUP on Page 60-180-1.)

INSTRUMENT PANELS (CONT’D) Right Switch Panel
Left Switch Panel Figure 60-50-8
Figure 60-50-7

3
P-85320
P-85319
This machine may be equipped with a Right Switch Panel
[Figure 60-50-8].
This machine may be equipped with a Left Switch Panel
[Figure 60-50-7].
REF.
DESCRIPTION FUNCTION / OPERATION
NO.
REF.
DESCRIPTION FUNCTION / OPERATION 1 POWER Press and hold the up arrow to
NO.
BOB-TACH disengage the Bob-Tach
1 FOUR-WAY Press the top to turn lights ON; (Option) wedges. Press and hold the
FLASHER bottom to turn OFF. down arrow to engage the
LIGHTS (Option) Bob-Tach wedges into the
2 ROTATING Press the top to turn light ON; attachment mounting frame
BEACON (Option) bottom to turn OFF. holes.
or 2 NOT USED ---
STROBE LIGHT
(Option)
3 HYDRAULIC Press the top to engage
BUCKET Hydraulic Bucket Positioning;
POSITIONING bottom to disengage.
(Option)

INSTRUMENT PANELS (CONT’D) Right Panel (Standard Key Panel) Removal And
Installation
Left Panel Removal And Installation
Figure 60-50-11
Figure 60-50-9
1 1
1 1 2
2
P-85929
P-85928
Remove the two mounting bolts (Item 1) and the fastener

Remove the two mounting bolts (Item 1) and the fastener (Item 2) [Figure 60-50-11].
(Item 2) [Figure 60-50-9].

Installation: Be careful to not overtighten the instrument
Installation: Be careful to not overtighten the instrument panel mounting bolts to prevent stripping of the threaded
panel mounting bolts to prevent stripping of the threaded holes in the panels. Tighten the panel screws to 3 - 4 N•m
holes in the panels. Tighten the panel screws to 3 - 4 N•m (25 - 35 in-lb) torque.
NOTE: Inspect and replace the seal as needed (Item
NOTE: Inspect and replace the seal as needed (Item 3) [Figure 60-50-11].
3) [Figure 60-50-9].
Figure 60-50-12
Figure 60-50-10
1 P-85931
P-85930
Pull the right instrument panel down and disconnect the

Pull the right instrument panel down and disconnect the wire harness connector (Item 1) [Figure 60-50-12].
wire harness connectors (Item 1) [Figure 60-50-10] from
the panel. Remove the panel from the loader cab.
Remove the panel from the loader cab.

INSTRUMENT PANELS (CONT'D) Right Panel (Deluxe Instrumentation Panel) Removal
And Installation
Right Panel (Keyless Start Panel) Removal And
Installation Figure 60-50-15
Figure 60-50-13
3
3
1
1 1
1
2
2 P-90527
P-90819A
(Item 2) [Figure 60-50-15].

(Item 2) [Figure 60-50-13]. Installation: Be careful to not overtighten the instrument
panel mounting bolts to prevent stripping of the threaded
Installation: Be careful to not overtighten the instrument holes in the panels. Tighten the panel screws to 3 - 4 N•m
panel mounting bolts to prevent stripping of the threaded (25 - 35 in-lb) torque.
holes in the panels. Tighten the panel screws to 3 - 4 N•m
(25 - 35 in-lb) torque. NOTE: Inspect and replace the seal as needed (Item
3) [Figure 60-50-15].
NOTE: Inspect and replace the seal as needed (Item
3) [Figure 60-50-13]. Figure 60-50-16
Figure 60-50-14
P-90530
P-90818A
wire harness connector (Item 1) [Figure 60-50-16].
wire harness connector (Item 1) [Figure 60-50-14]. Remove the panel from the loader cab.
Remove the panel from the loader cab.

INSTRUMENT PANELS (CONT'D) Alarm Disassembly And Assembly
Key Switch Disassembly And Assembly Remove the left instrument panel. (See Left Panel
Remove the right instrument panel. (See INSTRUMENT
PANELS on Page 60-50-1.) Figure 60-50-18
Disconnect the key switch wiring harness.
Figure 60-50-17
2
P-85947
Remove the left side instrument panel.

P-85948
Remove the retaining nut (Item 1) [Figure 60-50-18]
from the loader alarm.
Remove the ignition key (Item 1) from the switch.
Remove the ignition switch retaining nut (Item 2) [Figure Remove the alarm from the loader instrument panel.
60-50-17] from the switch.
Remove the ignition switch from the control panel.

INSTRUMENT PANELS (CONT'D) Right Switch Panel Removal And Installation
Left Switch Panel Removal And Installation Remove the right panel. (See Right Panel (Standard Key
Panel) Removal And Installation on Page 60-50-9.)
Remove the left panel. (See Left Panel Removal And
Installation on Page 60-50-9.) Figure 60-50-21
Figure 60-50-19
1 2
1
P-85943
1
P-85945
Remove the two fasteners (Item 1) and the knob (item 2)

[Figure 60-50-21].
Remove the two fasteners (Item 1) [Figure 60-50-19].
Figure 60-50-22
Figure 60-50-20
1 1
P-85944
P-85946
Remove the fastener (Item 1) and the left side panel

Remove the fastener (Item 1) and the left side panel (Item 2) [Figure 60-50-22].
(Item 2) [Figure 60-50-20].

LIGHTS Figure 60-60-3
Front Removal And Installation 1
Disconnect the negative(-) cable from the battery. (See

Figure 60-60-1
1
P-85436
1
Figure 60-60-4
P-85433

Installation: Tighten the two bolts to 22 - 27 N•m (40 - 45

in-lb) torque.
Figure 60-60-2
P-85435
1
Remove the two bulbs (Item 1) [Figure 60-60-3] and
[Figure 60-60-4] from the housing by turning bulb a 1/4
1 turn.
NOTE: Two different light bulbs are used, take note

when removing to assure correct installation.
Reverse the above procedure to install the bulb.
P-85434
Disconnect the bulbs (Item 1) [Figure 60-60-2] from the

wire harness connectors.

LIGHTS (CONT’D) Cab Light Removal And Installation
Rear Removal And Installation Figure 60-60-7
Figure 60-60-5
1 2
P-85274
P-85438
Remove the screws (Items 1) [Figure 60-60-7] from the
cab light.
Remove the bulb assembly (Items 1 and 2) from the light
housing (Item 3) [Figure 60-60-5] by turning bulb NOTE: Do not pull the cab light to far away from the

assembly a 1/4 turn. headliner to prevent damage to the wires.
P-85437 P-85783
Using care press the rear light and housing from the door Disconnect the cab light (Item 1) [Figure 60-60-8].
[Figure 60-60-6].
Reverse this procedure for installation.

BOBCAT CONTROLLERS (GATEWAY AND
AUXILIARY)
Description
The Gateway controller is the main controller, it provides

information to all other controllers. All loaders have a
Gateway and Auxiliary controller.
The Gateway and Auxiliary controller are located behind

the access panel near the operators left foot.

AUXILIARY) (CONT’D)
Connector Identification
Gateway Controller
1 1
34 26
J1A J1B

Harness Connector View Harness Connector View
9 7 5 3 7 5 3
1 1
17 10 13 8
25 18 19 14
34 32 28 26 26 25 21 20
P-76622
J1A J1B P-76623
P-76624

Connector Identification (Cont’d)
J1A
WIRE
PIN COLOR DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
1 2410 BLACK HYD LOCK VALVE SOLENOID GROUND
2 2380 BLACK LIFT SPOOL SOLENOID GROUND
3 8110 TAN FUEL RELAY SIGNAL
4 8000 TAN SWITCHED POWER RELAY SIGNAL
5 6320 PINK MRKR LIGHT PWR RELAY SIGNAL
6 8510 TAN GLOW PLUG RELAY SIGNAL
7 8210 TAN STARTER RELAY SIGNAL
8 4110 LGN TRACTION LOCK RELAY SIGNAL
9 OPEN NA NA
10 2370 BLACK TILT SPOOL LOCK SOLENOID GROUND
11 7023 WHITE AC SIGNAL MONITOR

12 OPEN NA NA
13 4150 LGN TRACTION LOCK RELAY FEEDBACK
14 8550 TAN GLOW PLUG RELAY FEEDBACK
15 3600 LBL ENGINE SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
16 3700 LBL AIR FILTER SENDER SIGNAL
17 6210 PINK REAR LIGHT RELAY SIGNAL
18 2910 BLACK HYDRAULIC FAN GROUND
19 9370 PURPLE PTOL LED
20 9380 PURPLE PTOL SWITCH
21 8020 TAN SWITCHED POWER RELAY FEEDBACK
22 8250 TAN STARTER RELAY FEEDBACK
23 3440 LBL HYD FAN DIFF PRESS SWITCH SIGNAL
24 9360 PURPLE START ENGINE
25 3520 LBL ENGINE OIL PRESS SENDER POWER
26 2350 BLACK TWO SPEED GROUND
27 2360 BLACK TWO SPEED MAKEUP GROUND
28 6230 PINK REAR LIGHT RELAY FEEDBACK
29 OPEN NA NA
30 8150 TAN FUEL RELAY FEEDBACK
31 6330 PINK MRKR LIGHT PWR RELAY FEEDBACK
32 3300 LBL HYD TEMP SIGNAL
33 OPEN NA NA
34 3430 LBL HYD FILTER DIFF PRESS

J1B
WIRE
NUMBER
1 3420 LBL HYD CHARGE PRESS SENDER SIGNAL
2 1110 RED/WHT COMPUTER FUSE POWER OUT
4 8800 TAN FUEL SHUTOFF SOLENOID HOLD
5 4380 LGN LIFT SPOOL LOCK SOLENOID SIGNAL
6 4200 LGN TRACTION SOLENOID OUTPUT
7 4370 LGN TILT SPOOL LOCK SOLENOID SIGNAL
8 9210 PUR/WHT CAN LO 0
9 9110 PUR/WHT CAN HI 0
10 OPEN NA NA
11 3920 LBL SEATBAR SENSOR SIGNAL

12 3100 LBL FUEL SENDER SIGNAL
13 4410 LGN HYD LOCK SOLENOID SIGNAL
14 9500 PUR/WHT CAN HIGH 1
15 2500 BLACK COMPUTER GROUND
16 2510 BLACK COMPUTER GROUND
17 3010 LBL SENSOR GROUND
18 3200 LBL ENGINE COOLANT SENSOR SIGNAL
19 4010 LGN HYDRAULIC FAN SIGNAL
20 9600 PURPLE CAN LOW 1
21 9800 PURPLE REMOTE ATTACHMENT SIGNAL
22 9350 PURPLE RUN / ENTER
23 3400 LBL HYDRAULIC CHARGE PRESSURE
24 3930 LBL +5V SUPPLY
25 4360 LGN TWO SPEED MAKEUP
26 4350 LGN TWO SPEED SIGNAL

Auxiliary Controller
1 1
34 26
J2A J2B

Harness Connector View Harness Connector View
9 7 5 3 7 5 3
1 1
17 10 13 8
25 18 19 14
34 32 28 26 26 25 21 20
P-76647
J2A J2B P-76646
P-76645

J2A
WIRE
NUMBER
1 2340 BLACK FRONT BASE SOLENOID GROUND
2 2440 BLACK JEM BLOCK REAR BASE SOLENOID GROUND
3 6520 PINK LEFT BLINKER SIGNAL
4 6420 PINK RIGHT BLINKER SIGNAL
5 7200 WHITE HORN SIGNAL
6 OPEN NA NA
7 OPEN NA NA
8 OPEN NA NA
9 OPEN NA NA
10 2430 BLACK JEM BLOCK REAR ROD SOLENOID GROUND
11 4810 LGN LEFT HANDLE PADDLE RIGHT

12 4820 LGN LEFT HANDLE PADDLE LEFT
13 4910 LGN RIGHT HANDLE RIGHT ROCKER UP
14 OPEN NA NA
15 OPEN NA NA
16 OPEN NA NA
17 OPEN NA NA
18 2330 BLACK FRONT ROD SOLENOID GROUND
19 OPEN NA NA
20 4640 LGN FLOAT SIGNAL
21 OPEN NA NA
22 4830 LGN LEFT HANDLE RIGHT ROCKER DOWN
23 OPEN NA NA
24 OPEN NA NA
25 OPEN NA NA
26 2460 BLACK HIGH FLOW SOLENOID GROUND
27 OPEN NA NA
28 4840 LGN LEFT HANDLE RIGHT ROCKER UP
29 OPEN NA NA
30 4940 LGN RIGHT HANDLE LEFT ROCKER UP
31 4930 LGN RIGHT HANDLE LEFT ROCKER DOWN
32 OPEN NA NA
33 OPEN NA NA
34 OPEN NA NA

J2B
WIRE
NUMBER
1 OPEN NA NA
4 4450 LGN DIVERTER SOLENOID SIGNAL
5 4440 LGN REAR BASE SIGNAL
6 4480 LGN FRONT / REAR AUXILIARY SIGNAL
7 4430 LGN REAR ROD SIGNAL
8 9220 PURPLE CAN LO 0
9 9120 PUR/WHT CAN HI 0
10 OPEN NA NA
11 OPEN NA NA

12 OPEN NA NA
13 4340 LGN FRONT BASE SOLENOID SIGNAL
14 OPEN NA NA
15 2550 BLACK AUXILIARY CONTROLLER GROUND
16 2540 BLACK AUXILIARY CONTROLLER GROUND
17 4310 LBL RIGHT HANDLE PWM LOW
18 4320 LBL RIGHT HANDLE PWM SIGNAL
19 4330 LGN FRONT ROD SOLENOID SIGNAL
20 OPEN NA NA
21 4920 LGN RIGHT HANDLE TRIGGER RETURN
22 1560 RNG SWITCHED INPUT POWER
23 4300 LGN RIGHT HANDLE PWM HIGH
24 OPEN NA NA
25 OPEN NA NA
26 4460 LGN HIGH FLOW SOLENOID SIGNAL

BOBCAT CONTROLLERS (GATEWAY AND Figure 60-70-2

1 1
Lift and block the loader. (See Procedure on Page 10-10- 1 1

1.)
Remove the left inside access panel. (See Removal And

Installation (Left) on Page 50-120-1.)
P-85901
Figure 60-70-1
Remove the controller mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure

60-70-2] from the left fender.
2
Installation: Tighten the controller mounting bolts to 16 -

Remove the Gateway and Auxiliary controllers from the
loader.
1
P-85900
Unplug the two harness connectors (Item 1) [Figure 60-

70-1] from the Gateway controller.
Unplug the two harness connectors (Item 2) [Figure 60-

70-1] from the Auxiliary controller.
NOTE: The connectors are keyed and will only plug

in one way.

BOBCAT CONTROLLER (ACS)
Description
The ACS controller is on loaders equipped with the ACS

or the SJC option. This controller processes information
for the lift and tilt functions.
The ACS controller is housed in a grey colored plastic

shell with black potting. The ACS controller
communicates with the Bobcat Gateway Controller by
CAN communication wires. The ACS controller is
capable of receiving upgrades to the software.

BOBCAT CONTROLLER (ACS) (CONT’D)
Connector And Wire Identification
G H
J J1 J3
F K
E A
D B
J3 C H
G
F J
K J2
F E
G D A
E H B
C
A J2
B
D
J1
C
J3
J1 J2

P-21843
P/N PIN DESCRIPTION P/N PIN DESCRIPTION

J1 CONNECTOR, METRI-PACK J3 CONNECTOR, METRI-PACK
Orange A 5V HALL EFFECT SUPPLY Red A TILT ACTUATOR FORWARD
Orange B SWITCHED ACS POWER Red/White B UNSWITCHED ACS POWER
Green C HAND / FOOT INPUT Red/White C UNSWITCHED ACS POWER
Purple D CAN SIGNAL HIGH ACS Black D LIFT ACTUATOR REVERSE
Purple E CAN SIGNAL LOW ACS Green E HANDLE LOCK POWER
Purple F CAN SHIELD ACS Red F LIFT ACTUATOR FORWARD
Black G ACS GROUND Green G PEDAL LOCK POWER
Black H ACS GROUND Black H ACS GROUND
J2 CONNECTOR, METRI-PACK Black J ACS GROUND
A OPEN Black K TILT ACTUATOR REVERSE
B OPEN
C OPEN
D OPEN
Green E TILT SPOOL SIGNAL
Green F LIFT HANDLE SIGNAL
Green G TILT HANDLE SIGNAL
Green H LIFT SPOOL SIGNAL
Green J LIFT PEDAL SIGNAL
Green K TILT PEDAL SIGNAL

BOBCAT CONTROLLER (ACS) (CONT’D) NOTE: The calibration procedure must be followed
when replacing a controller. (See Lift And Tilt
Removal And Installation Calibration (ACS) on Page 60-160-11.)

1.)
Figure 60-71-1

P-85903
Unplug the harness connectors (Item 1) [Figure 60-71-1]

from the controller.
NOTE: The connectors are keyed and will only plug

in one way.
Figure 60-71-2
P-85902

2] from the controller.
Remove the controller from the loader.


BOBCAT CONTROLLER (SJC) (DRIVE) The SJC system uses electronic joysticks to control both
of the workgroups (lift and tilt) and the drive functions of
Description the loader. The control can be switched from ISO and H-
Pattern drive control layouts.
The drive controller is only on loaders equipped with the
SJC option. This controller processes information for the The workgroup actuators are the same as those used on
drive functions. the ACS system.
The drive controller is located behind the right side The hydrostatic drive pump has two electromagnetic coils
access panel near the operator’s right foot. on each of the two pumps to control the drive of the
loader. The coils will direct the forward and reverse
The drive controller monitors the position of the left outputs of the pump to the drive motors. The hydrostatic
joystick, pump swash plate angles and the output of the drive pump is equipped with position sensors mounted to
wheel speed sensors. the bottom of the swash plates to provide feedback to the
controllers to sense uncommanded swash plate
The drive controller works along with the ACS controller movement.
and communicates with the main Bobcat controller in an
SJC system. All these controllers are capable of software
upgrades.
RIGHT
HAND DRIVE HYDRAULIC
PANEL CONTROL MOTOR

ACS
CONTROL SPEED
LIFT / TILT SENSOR
ACTUATORS
GEAR ENGINE
INTERNAL CAN BUS
PUMP
SERIAL TT BUS
RIGHT
JOYSTICK
FWD / REV
ISO SWASH PLATE
SWITCH LEFT
JOYSTICK SENSORS
AUXILIARY DRIVE
CONTROL PUMP
LEFT SPEED
HAND SENSOR
PANEL
ACD HYDRAULIC
EXTERNAL CONTROL MOTOR
CAN BUS
GATEWAY
CONTROL
NA1208

BOBCAT CONTROLLER (SJC) (DRIVE) (CONT’D)
P-64295

BOBCAT CONTROLLER (SJC) (DRIVE) (CONT’D)
Connector Identification (Cont'd)
P-64296

BOBCAT CONTROLLER (SJC) (DRIVE) (CONT’D) Figure 60-72-3
Figure 60-72-1
1
1
P-64325
1
Installation: Note the keyed hole in the controller socket.
(Item 1) [Figure 60-72-3]. The keyed hole matches a tab
on the connector on the wire harness.
P-85879
Figure 60-72-4

Remove the three bolts (Item 1) [Figure 60-72-1] that
secure the controller.

Figure 60-72-2
J S
P-64325
Remove the drive controller [Figure 60-72-4].

1
P-64324
Remove the screw and wire harness (Item 1) [Figure 60-

72-2].
Installation: Tighten the connector screw to 3,39 - 3,96

N•m (30 - 35 in-lb) torque. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN!

SPEED SENSORS (SJC) Figure 60-80-2
Description
The speed sensors are used to monitor travel speed. The

speed sensor communicates to the system by sending a
pulse of electricity to the SJC controller.
Testing
device. (See Installing on Page 10-20-1.) 2
Connect the remote start tool to the loader. (See P-85924

REMOTE START TOOL KIT-MEL1563 on Page 10-60-
1.)
Locate the electrical connector (Item 1) [Figure 60-80-2]
Figure 60-80-1 for the left rpm speed sensor.
Disconnect the rpm speed sensor wire connector (Item

1 1), from the loader harness wire connector (Item 2)
[Figure 60-80-2].

Connect the rpm speed sensor test harness (Item 1)
[Figure 60-80-1] in line, between the loader wiring
harness and the speed sensor harness.
Turn the remote start key to ON position without starting

the loader.
Take a voltage reading, with the multimeter, at the speed

sensor test harness, between pin 1 and pin 3 [Figure 60-
P-28302 80-1].
The voltage should be 5 volts.

procedure: Repeat the procedure for the opposite side speed
sensor. (If needed.)
MEL1609-rpm Speed Sensor Test Harness [Figure 60-
80-1]
MEL1563 or 6689779-Remote Start Tool
Multimeter

SPEED SENSORS (SJC) (CONT'D) Figure 60-80-5

1
Remove the loader track. (See Track Removal And

Installation on Page 40-20-4.) 1
Figure 60-80-3
2 P-48741
Remove the access cover mount bolts (Item 1) [Figure

60-80-5].
1
Remove the speed sensor access cover from the loader.
Figure 60-80-6

P-85927
Remove the four access cover mount bolts (Item 1)

[Figure 60-80-3]. 1
Remove the access cover (Item 2) [Figure 60-80-3] from 2

the loader.
Figure 60-80-4
1
P-48742
Clean the area around the speed sensor, to prevent

1 contamination from getting into the hydrostatic motor
after the speed sensor is removed.
Remove the two speed sensor mount bolts (Item 1)

[Figure 60-80-6].
Installation: Lubricate the speed sensor O-ring with oil

before installing. Seat the sensor into the motor port prior
to installing the bolts. Tighten down the bolts, alternate
P-48740 tightening from left to right to evenly load the o-ring.
Tighten the speed sensor mount bolts to 9,94 N•m (88 in-
lb) torque.
At the back side of the hydrostatic motor mount (Item 1)
[Figure 60-80-4], locate the speed sensor access cover. Remove the speed sensor (Item 2) [Figure 60-80-6] from
the motor.

SPEED SENSORS (SJC) (CONT'D) Figure 60-80-9
Figure 60-80-7 1
2 P-26294
With a thin screwdriver lift the tabs and remove the wires
P-85924 from the connector [Figure 60-80-9].
Wire Code
Remove the zip tie (Item 1) [Figure 60-80-7] from the
wiring harness. 1 Red

2 White
Disconnect the speed sensor harness (Item 2) [Figure 3 Black
60-80-7] from the loader harness. 4 Blue
Remove the speed sensor from the loader.
Figure 60-80-8
P-26293
The electrical connector can be replaced.
The connector can be found in the harness repair kit.
Remove the connector wedge (Item 1) [Figure 60-80-8].


DIAGNOSTIC SERVICE CODES Deluxe Instrumentation Panel
Viewing Service Codes The optional Deluxe Instrumentation Panel offers an

additional view of service codes that includes a brief
The Service Codes will aid your dealer in diagnosing description.
conditions which can damage your machine.
The last 40 codes stored in history can also be viewed
Figure 60-90-1 using the Deluxe Instrumentation Panel.
Figure 60-90-2
Press a scroll button
2 (Item 1) repeatedly until
the Active Warnings
screen icon (Inset) is
highlighted.
1 1
The ACTIVE WARNINGS
screen displays active
1 service codes. Press [9]
P-76455G
to view the next service
code if more than one is
present. Press [4] to
Press the INFORMATION button (Item 1) to cycle the display a history of

DATA DISPLAY (Item 2) [Figure 60-90-1] until the service codes.
service code screen is displayed. If more than one
SERVICE CODE is present, the codes will scroll on the The WARNINGS
DATA DISPLAY. HISTORY screen will list
the Service Code
NOTE: Corroded or loose grounds can cause Number (CODE),
Hourmeter reading when
multiple service codes and / or abnormal the error occurred
symptoms. All instrument panel lights (HOUR), and the User
flashing, alarm sounding, headlights and (USER) who was logged
taillights flashing, could indicate a bad in to operate the machine
ground. The same symptoms could apply if when the error occurred.
the voltage is low, such as loose or corroded Press [9] to view the next eight Service Codes.
battery cables. If you observe these
symptoms, check grounds and positive leads A total of 40 Codes can be stored. When more than 40
first. codes occur, the oldest code will disappear and the
newest code will be in the number 1 position.
Press the list number

next to the service code
for more detail.
Press left scroll button to

back up one screen.
P-90378 / NA3025 / NA3000 / NA3038 / NA3035

DIAGNOSTIC SERVICE CODES (CONT'D)
Service Codes List
Figure 60-90-3 The following word errors may be displayed:
2 [REPLY] One or both instrument panel(s) not

1
communicating with the controller.
[CODE] The controller is asking for a password.

(Keyless Start and Deluxe Instrumentation Panels
only.)
[ERROR] The wrong password was entered.

(Keyless Start and Deluxe Instrumentation Panels
P-76461H only.)
P-76461P
P-76455G
[SHTDN] A shutdown condition exists.
Service Codes may be either a word (Item 1) or a number [DOOR] Operator cab door is open. (Lift and Tilt
(Item 2) [Figure 60-90-3]. functions will not operate.)
CODE DESCRIPTION CODE DESCRIPTION

A3623 ACD not programmed A8503 ACD output ‘F’ error OFF

A8002 ACD output ‘A’ error ON A8505 ACD output ‘F’ short to battery
A8003 ACD output ‘A’ error OFF A8506 ACD output ‘F’ short to ground
A8005 ACD output ‘A’ short to battery A8507 ACD output ‘F’ open circuit
A8006 ACD output ‘A’ short to ground A8532 ACD output ‘F’ overcurrent
A8007 ACD output ‘A’ open circuit A8602 ACD output ‘G’ error ON
A8032 ACD output ‘A’ overcurrent A8603 ACD output ‘G’ error OFF
A8102 ACD output ‘B’ error ON A8605 ACD output ‘G’ short to battery
A8103 ACD output ‘B’ error OFF A8606 ACD output ‘G’ short to ground
A8105 ACD output ‘B’ short to battery A8607 ACD output ‘G’ open circuit
A8106 ACD output ‘B’ short to ground A8702 ACD output ‘H’ error ON
A8107 ACD output ‘B’ open circuit A8703 ACD output ‘H’ error OFF
A8132 ACD output ‘B’ overcurrent A8705 ACD output ‘H’ short to battery
A8202 ACD output ‘C’ error ON A8706 ACD output ‘H’ short to ground
A8203 ACD output ‘C’ error OFF A8707 ACD output ‘H’ open circuit
A8205 ACD output ‘C’ short to battery
A8206 ACD output ‘C’ short to ground D3905 Left joystick X-axis not in neutral
A8207 ACD output ‘C’ open circuit D3907 Left joystick Y-axis not in neutral
A8232 ACD output ‘C’ overcurrent D4007 Right joystick Y-axis not in neutral
A8302 ACD output ‘D’ error ON D7501 CAN joystick communication error
A8303 ACD output ‘D’ error OFF D7504 No communication from drive controller
A8305 ACD output ‘D’ short to battery D7505 Left joystick X-axis not in neutral
A8306 ACD output ‘D’ short to ground D7507 Left joystick Y-axis not in neutral
A8307 ACD output ‘D’ open circuit D7508 Right joystick Y-axis not in neutral
A8332 ACD output ‘D’ overcurrent D7509 Operating mode switch short to ground or battery
A8402 ACD output ‘E’ error ON D7513 Right front wheel angle sensor unresponsive
A8403 ACD output ‘E’ error OFF D7514 Left front wheel angle sensor unresponsive
A8405 ACD output ‘E’ short to battery D7515 Right rear wheel angle sensor unresponsive
A8406 ACD output ‘E’ short to ground D7516 Left rear wheel angle sensor unresponsive
A8407 ACD output ‘E’ open circuit D7517 Left swash plate not in neutral
A8432 ACD output ‘E’ overcurrent D7518 Right swash plate not in neutral
A8502 ACD output ‘F’ error ON D7519 Left joystick X-axis out of range high

Service Codes List (Cont’d)

D7521 Left joystick Y-axis out of range high D7572 Drive pump not calibrated
D7522 Right joystick Y-axis out of range high D7573 Operating mode switch flipped while operating
D7523 Right front wheel angle sensor out of range high D7574 Right wheel speed uncommanded motion
D7524 Left front wheel angle sensor out of range high D7575 Left wheel speed uncommanded motion
D7525 Right rear wheel angle sensor out of range high D7576 No communication from ACS controller
D7526 Left rear wheel angle sensor out of range high D7577 Left speed sensor out of range high
D7527 Left swash plate out of position D7578 Right speed sensor out of range high
D7528 Right swash plate out of position D7579 Left speed sensor out of range low
D7529 Left joystick X-axis out of range low D7580 Right speed sensor out of range low
D7531 Left joystick Y-axis out of range low D7581 Right front steer retract short to battery
D7532 Right joystick Y-axis out of range low D7582 Left front steer retract short to battery
D7533 Right front wheel angle sensor out of range low D7583 Right rear steer retract short to battery
D7534 Left front wheel angle sensor out of range low D7584 Left rear steer retract short to battery
D7535 Right rear wheel angle sensor out of range low D7585 Sensor supply 1 out of range high
D7536 Left rear wheel angle sensor out of range low D7586 Sensor supply 2 out of range high
D7537 Sensor supply 1 out of range low D7587 Software update required
D7538 Sensor supply 2 out of range low D7588 Switched power stuck ON
D7539 Left swash plate sensor out of range high D7589 Switched power error OFF

D7540 Left swash plate sensor out of range low D7591 Left swash plate sensor reversed
D7541 Right swash plate sensor out of range high D7592 Right swash plate sensor reversed
D7542 Right swash plate sensor out of range low D7593 Right speed sensor unresponsive
D7543 Left forward drive solenoid error ON D7594 Left speed sensor unresponsive
D7544 Left reverse drive solenoid error ON D7595 Left speed sensor reversed
D7545 Right forward drive solenoid error ON D7596 Right speed sensor reversed
D7546 Right reverse drive solenoid error ON D7597 Controller programmed
D7547 Right front steer extend short to battery D7598 In drive calibration mode
D7548 Left front steer extend short to battery D7599 In angle calibration mode
D7549 Right rear steer extend short to battery
D7550 Left rear steer extend short to battery H1221 Right Primary out of range high
D7551 Steer pressure short to battery H1222 Right Primary out of range low
D7552 Back-up alarm error ON H1224 Right Primary not in neutral
D7553 Left forward drive solenoid error OFF H1321 Left Primary out of range high
D7554 Left reverse drive solenoid error OFF H1322 Left Primary out of range low
D7555 Right forward drive solenoid error OFF H1324 Left Primary not in neutral
D7556 Right reverse drive solenoid error OFF H2005 Boost solenoid short to battery
D7557 Right front steer extend short to ground H2006 Boost solenoid short to ground
D7558 Right front steer retract short to ground H2007 Boost solenoid open circuit
D7559 Left front steer extend short to ground H2032 Boost solenoid overcurrent
D7560 Left front steer retract short to ground H2205 Pressure control solenoid short to battery
D7561 Right rear steer extend short to ground H2206 Pressure control solenoid short to ground
D7562 Right rear steer retract short to ground H2207 Pressure control solenoid open circuit
D7563 Left rear steer extend short to ground H2232 Pressure control solenoid overcurrent
D7564 Left rear steer retract short to ground H2305 Rear base solenoid short to battery
D7565 Steer pressure short to ground H2306 Rear base solenoid short to ground
D7566 Back-up alarm error OFF H2307 Rear base solenoid open circuit
D7567 No communication from Gateway controller H2332 Rear base solenoid overcurrent
D7568 Angle sensors not calibrated H2405 Rear rod solenoid short to battery
D7569 Battery voltage out of range high H2406 Rear rod solenoid short to ground
D7570 Interrupted power H2407 Rear rod solenoid open circuit
D7571 Battery voltage out of range low H2432 Rear rod solenoid overcurrent


H2505 Rear aux relief short to battery M0116 Air filter not connected
H2506 Rear aux relief short to ground M0117 Air filter plugged
H2507 Rear aux relief open circuit M0216 Hydraulic / Hydrostatic filter not connected
H2605 Front base solenoid short to battery M0217 Hydraulic / Hydrostatic filter plugged
H2606 Front base solenoid short to ground M0309 Battery voltage low
H2607 Front base solenoid open circuit M0310 Battery voltage high
H2632 Front base solenoid overcurrent M0311 Battery voltage extremely high
H2705 Front rod solenoid short to battery M0314 Battery voltage extremely low
H2706 Front rod solenoid short to ground M0322 Battery voltage out of range low
H2707 Front rod solenoid open circuit M0409 Engine oil pressure low
H2732 Front rod solenoid overcurrent M0414 Engine oil pressure extremely low
H2805 Diverter rod solenoid short to battery M0415 Engine oil pressure shutdown
H2806 Diverter rod solenoid short to ground M0421 Engine oil pressure out of range high
H2807 Diverter rod solenoid open circuit M0422 Engine oil pressure out of range low
H2905 High-flow solenoid short to battery M0509 Hydraulic charge pressure low
H2906 High-flow solenoid short to ground M0510 Hydraulic charge pressure high
H2907 High-flow solenoid open circuit M0511 Hydraulic charge pressure extremely high
H2932 High-flow solenoid overcurrent M0514 Hydraulic charge pressure extremely low

H3028 Controller memory failure M0515 Hydraulic charge pressure shutdown
H3128 Interrupted power failure M0521 Hydraulic charge pressure out of range high
H3648 ACD multiple M0522 Hydraulic charge pressure out of range low
H3913 Left joystick grip no communication M0610 Engine speed high
H3916 Left joystick not connected M0611 Engine speed extremely high
H3928 Left joystick failure M0613 Engine speed no signal
H3948 Left joystick multiple M0615 Engine speed shutdown
H4013 Right joystick grip no communication M0618 Engine speed out of range
H4016 Right joystick not connected M0710 Hydraulic oil temperature high
H4028 Right joystick failure M0711 Hydraulic oil temperature extremely high
H4048 Right joystick multiple M0715 Hydraulic oil temperature shutdown
H4302 Horn error ON M0721 Hydraulic oil temperature out of range high
H4303 Horn error OFF M0722 Hydraulic oil temperature out of range low
H4423 Auxiliary not programmed M0810 Engine coolant temperature high
H4502 Right signal error ON M0811 Engine coolant temperature extremely high
H4503 Right signal error OFF M0815 Engine coolant temperature shutdown
H4602 Left signal error ON M0821 Engine coolant temperature out of range high
H4603 Left signal error OFF M0822 Engine coolant temperature out of range low
H4721 Sensor supply 1 out of range high M0909 Fuel level low
H4722 Sensor supply 1 out of range low M0921 Fuel level out of range high
H7314 Remote control failure M0922 Fuel level out of range low
H7328 Remote control no signal M1016 Hydraulic charge filter not connected
H7404 Main controller no communication M1017 Hydraulic charge filter plugged
H7604 Left hand panel no communication M1121 Seat bar sensor out of range high
M1122 Seat bar sensor out of range low
L0102 Left panel button 1 error ON M1305 Fuel hold solenoid short to battery
L0202 Left panel button 2 error ON M1306 Fuel hold solenoid short to ground
L0302 Left panel button 3 error ON M1307 Fuel hold solenoid open circuit
L0402 Left panel button 4 error ON M1402 Fuel pull output error ON
L7404 Left panel main controller no communication M1403 Fuel pull output error OFF
L7672 Left panel programming error M1407 Fuel pull output open circuit
M1428 Fuel pull output failure


M1502 Traction lock pull output error ON M3805 Auxiliary hydraulic lock short to battery
M1503 Traction lock pull output error OFF M3806 Auxiliary hydraulic lock short to ground
M1507 Traction lock pull output open circuit M3807 Auxiliary hydraulic lock open circuit
M1528 Traction lock pull output failure M3832 Auxiliary hydraulic lock overcurrent
M1605 Traction lock hold solenoid short to battery M4109 Alternator low
M1606 Traction lock hold solenoid short to ground M4110 Alternator high
M1607 Traction lock hold solenoid open circuit M4304 Keyless panel no communication
M1705 Hydraulic lock valve solenoid short to battery M4404 Auxiliary no communication
M1706 Hydraulic lock valve solenoid short to ground M4621 5 volt sensor supply out of range high
M1707 Hydraulic lock valve solenoid open circuit M4622 5 volt sensor supply out of range low
M1732 Hydraulic lock valve solenoid overcurrent M4721 8 volt sensor supply out of range high
M1805 Lift spool lock short to battery M4722 8 volt sensor supply out of range low
M1806 Lift spool lock short to ground M4802 Front light relay error ON
M1807 Lift spool lock open circuit M4803 Front light relay error OFF
M1832 Lift spool lock overcurrent M4807 Front light relay open circuit
M2005 Two-speed primary short to battery M4902 Rear light relay error ON
M2006 Two-speed primary short to ground M4903 Rear light relay error OFF
M2007 Two-speed primary open circuit M4907 Rear light relay open circuit

M2032 Two-speed primary overcurrent M5002 Front light output error ON
M2102 Glow plug output error ON M5003 Front light output error OFF
M2103 Glow plug output error OFF M5007 Front light output open circuit
M2107 Glow plug output open circuit M5028 Front light output failure
M2128 Glow plug output failure M5102 Rear light output error ON
M2202 Starter output error ON M5103 Rear light output error OFF
M2203 Starter output error OFF M5107 Rear light output open circuit
M2207 Starter output open circuit M5128 Rear light output failure
M2228 Starter output failure M5202 PTOL switch error ON
M2302 Starter relay error ON M5221 PTOL switch out of range high
M2303 Starter relay error OFF M5222 PTOL switch out of range low
M2402 Fuel pull relay error ON M5305 PTOL LED short to battery
M2403 Fuel pull relay error OFF M5306 PTOL LED short to ground
M2502 Traction pull relay error ON M5405 Tilt spool lock short to battery
M2503 Traction pull relay error OFF M5406 Tilt spool lock short to ground
M2602 Glow plug relay error ON M5407 Tilt spool lock open circuit
M2603 Glow plug relay error OFF M5432 Tilt spool lock overcurrent
M2721 Throttle primary out of range high M6402 Switched power relay error ON
M2722 Throttle primary out of range low M6403 Switched power relay error OFF
M2821 Throttle secondary out of range high M6505 EEC power short to battery
M2822 Throttle secondary out of range low M6506 EEC power short to ground
M3128 Interrupted power failure M6507 EEC power open circuit
M3204 Workgroup no communication M6604 EEC power no communications
M3304 Deluxe panel no communication M7002 Switched power output error ON
M3505 Hydraulic fan short to battery M7003 Switched power output error OFF
M3506 Hydraulic fan short to ground M7007 Switched power output open circuit
M3507 Hydraulic fan open circuit M7028 Switched power output failure
M3532 Hydraulic fan overcurrent M7102 Electric fan 1 output error ON
M3705 Two-speed secondary short to battery M7103 Electric fan 1 output error OFF
M3706 Two-speed secondary short to ground M7128 Electric fan 1 output failure
M3707 Two-speed secondary open circuit M7202 Electric fan 1 relay error ON
M3732 Two-speed secondary overcurrent M7203 Electric fan 1 relay error OFF


M7207 Electric fan 1 relay open circuit W3251 Lift actuator short to battery
M7304 Remote control no communication W3252 Tilt actuator short to battery
M7316 Remote control no signal from transmitter W3253 Lift handle / pedal short to ground
M7423 Main controller not programmed W3254 Tilt handle / pedal short to ground
M7472 Main controller in boot code W3255 Lift handle / pedal short to battery
M7497 Main controller software updated W3256 Tilt handle / pedal short to battery
M7504 Drive no communication W3257 Lift actuator reduced performance
M7604 Left display panel no communication W3258 Tilt actuator reduced performance
M7748 Key switch multiple W3259 Lift actuator wrong direction
M7839 Hourmeter changed W3260 Tilt actuator wrong direction
M7974 Door open W3261 Handle lock short to ground
W3262 Handle lock short to battery
W3223 ACS calibration required W3263 Pedal lock short to ground
W3224 ACS calibration failed W3264 Pedal lock short to battery
W3231 Tilt actuator fault W3265 Sensor supply voltage out of range
W3232 Tilt actuator wiring fault W3266 Battery voltage out of range
W3233 Tilt handle wiring fault W3267 Handle / pedal switch flipped while operating
W3234 Tilt actuator not in neutral W3268 Lift handle information error

W3235 Tilt handle / pedal not in neutral W3270 Right hand drive short to ground
W3236 Lift actuator fault W3271 Right hand drive short to battery
W3237 Lift actuator wiring fault W3274 Left joystick X-axis out of range
W3238 Lift handle wiring fault W3275 Interrupted unswitched power
W3239 Lift actuator not in neutral W3276 CAN joystick information error
W3240 Lift handle / pedal not in neutral W3277 Remote control information error
W3241 No communication W3905 Left joystick X-axis not in neutral
W3249 Lift actuator short to ground W4005 Right joystick X-axis not in neutral
W3250 Tilt actuator short to ground W4007 Right joystick Y-axis not in neutral

BOBCAT INTERLOCK CONTROL SYSTEM (BICS)
Description
Figure 60-100-1
1 2 3
4
3
P-85413C
The Bobcat Interlock Control System is an electronic

system that is used to protect the operator. The system

consists of the traction lock, seat bar sensor and the lift
and tilt lockouts solenoid.
These all have indicator lights on the left panel (Items 1,

2, 3) [Figure 60-100-1] of the loader cab.
The Press To Operate button (Items 4) [Figure 60-100-1]

activates the system and allows the operator to function
the loader.

BOBCAT INTERLOCK CONTROL SYSTEM (BICS) Inspecting The Traction Lock (Engine RUNNING)
(CONT'D)
6. Fasten seat belt, disengage parking brake, press the
Inspecting The BICS (Engine STOPPED - Key ON) PRESS TO OPERATE LOADER button and raise
seat bar fully. Move steering levers or joystick(s)
Figure 60-100-2 slowly forward and backward. The TRACTION lock
must be engaged. Lower the seat bar. Press the
1 PRESS TO OPERATE LOADER button.
2 3
7. Engage parking brake and move steering levers or
joystick(s) slowly forward and backward. The
TRACTION lock must be engaged.
4 NOTE: The PARKING BRAKE light on the left

instrument panel will remain ON until the
engine is started, the PRESS TO OPERATE
LOADER button is pressed and the parking
5
brake is disengaged.
6 Inspecting The Lift Arm Bypass Control

P-85413C
8. Raise the lift arms 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. Stop
engine. Turn lift arm bypass control knob 90°
1. Sit in operator’s seat. Turn key to RUN or press RUN
clockwise. Pull up and hold lift arm bypass control
button. Lower seat bar and disengage parking brake.

knob until lift arms slowly lower.
Press the PRESS TO OPERATE LOADER button
(Item 6). Two BICS™ lights (Items 1 and 2) [Figure
Inspecting Deactivation Of Lift And Tilt Functions
60-100-2] [SEAT BAR and LIFT AND TILT VALVE]
(ACS And SJC)
on left instrument panel must be OFF. The PRESS
TO OPERATE LOADER button will light.
9. Sit in operator’s seat and fasten seat belt. Lower seat
bar, start engine and press the PRESS TO OPERATE
2. Raise seat bar fully. All three BICS™ lights (Items 1,
LOADER button.
2 and 3) [Figure 60-100-2] [SEAT BAR, LIFT AND
TILT VALVE and PARKING BRAKE] on left
10. Raise lift arms about 2 m (6 ft) off the ground.
instrument panel must be ON. The PRESS TO
OPERATE LOADER button light will turn OFF.
11. Turn key OFF or press STOP button and wait for the
engine to come to a complete stop.
Inspecting Deactivation Of The Auxiliary Hydraulics
System (Engine STOPPED - Key ON)
12. Turn key ON or press RUN button. Press the PRESS
TO OPERATE LOADER button, move the control
3. Sit in operator’s seat, lower seat bar and press the
(foot pedal, hand control or joystick) to lower the lift
PRESS TO OPERATE LOADER button (Item 6).
arms. Lift arms must not lower.
Press the auxiliary hydraulics button (Item 5). The
auxiliary hydraulics light will be ON (Item 4) [Figure
13. Move the control (foot pedal, hand control or joystick)
60-100-2]. Raise the seat bar. The light must be OFF.
to tilt the bucket (or attachment) forward. The bucket
(or attachment) must not tilt forward.
Inspecting The Seat Bar Sensor (Engine RUNNING)
4. Sit in operator’s seat, lower seat bar, engage parking

brake and fasten seat belt. WARNING
5. Start engine and operate at low idle. Press the
PRESS TO OPERATE LOADER button. While raising AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
the lift arms, raise the seat bar fully. The lift arms must The Bobcat Interlock Control System (BICS) must
stop. Repeat using the tilt function. deactivate the lift, tilt and traction drive functions. If it
does not, contact your dealer for service. DO NOT
modify the system.
W-2151-0394

BOBCAT INTERLOCK CONTROL SYSTEM (BICS)
(CONT'D)
Troubleshooting
WARNING
The following troubleshooting guide is provided for Check for correct function after adjustments, repairs
assistance in locating and correcting BICS system or service. Failure to make correct repairs or
problems. It is recommended that these procedures be adjustments can cause injury or death.
done by authorized Bobcat Service Personnel only. W-2004-1285
PROBLEM SOLUTION#
All indicator lights flashing. 5
One of the indicator lights flashing. 1
Intermittent indicator lights. 2, 3, 4
SOLUTION SUGGESTIONS
1. Refer to BICS troubleshooting chart.
2. Check wire connections on Bobcat controller to make sure connectors are locked into place.
3. Check pins in connectors for pins pushed back or bent.

4. Use seatbar sensor tester MEL1428 to isolate problem between sensor and controller and wiring.
5. Possible low or high voltage.


SEAT BAR SENSOR Troubleshooting
Description The following troubleshooting chart is provided for

assistance in locating and correcting BICS system
The seat bar sensor is part of the BICS system. The seat problems. It is recommended that these procedures be
bar sensor sends a signal that indicates whether the seat performed by authorized Bobcat Service Personnel only.
bar is in the down or up position.
The sensor is located on the left side of the seat bar.

WARNING
W-2004-1285
PROBLEM SOLUTION #
Indicator light does not turn OFF when seat bar is lowered. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
1. Check sensor wire connection.

2. Use the BICS sensor tester MEL1428 with seat bar adapter MEL1567 to check sensor and controller.
3. Check for loose hardware.
4. Check keyed bushing to make sure magnet collar rotates with seat bar.
5. Check magnet collar magnets for contamination such as metal particles.

SEAT BAR SENSOR (CONT'D) Figure 60-110-3
Testing
Figure 60-110-1
1
P-4698
If there is no power light (Item 1) [Figure 60-110-3] on

P-85653 the sensor tester, check the tester or wiring harness.
Figure 60-110-4
Use Sensor Tester (MEL1428) and seat bar sensor
adapter (MEL1567) for the following procedure:

Connect the seat bar sensor adapter leads (MEL1567) to
the sensor tester.
1
Disconnect the seat bar sensor connector (Item 1)
[Figure 60-110-1].
Figure 60-110-2
P-4699
Lower the seat bar. The Sensor Test light (Item 1)

1 [Figure 60-110-4] should illuminate.
Raise the seat bar. The Sensor Test light (Item 1) [Figure
60-110-4] should go off.
If the above test fails, there is a problem with the seat bar
P-85925 sensor or with the sensor harness.
Disconnect the Sensor Tester.

Connect the Sensor Tester (Item 1) [Figure 60-110-2]
inline, to the seat bar sensor connectors. [Figure 60-110- Replace the Seat Bar Sensor. (See Removal And
2]. Installation on Page 60-110-3.)
Turn the key to the ON position. DO NOT START THE If the above test passes, run the seat bar sensor BICS
ENGINE. circuit test. (See Bobcat Interlock Control System (BICS)
Circuit Test on Page 60-110-6.)
The toggle switch (Item 2) [Figure 60-110-3] can be in
either the Absent or Present position.

NOTE: This procedure is performed with the seat bar

in the raised position and the technician in the 3
operators seat.
Figure 60-110-5
1 2
P100745
Remove the retaining pin (Item 1) and clevis pin (Item 2)

[Figure 60-110-7]. Remove the seat bar mounting bolt
and nut (Item 3) [Figure 60-110-7].
2
P100742

Remove the sensor mounting bolt and nut (Item 1)
[Figure 60-110-5]. Disconnect the sensor wiring
Figure 60-110-6
P100743
P100759
Tighten the clevis bolt (Item 1) until spring tension is

released from the clevis pin (Item 2) [Figure 60-110-6].
NOTE: Approximately 4 turns of the clevis bolt

should be adequate to release the spring
tension. When tension is released, the clevis
pin can easily be rotated using the retaining
pin.

SEAT BAR SENSOR (CONT'D) Remove and save the metal pivot bushing (Item 6)
[Figure 60-110-9].
Figure 60-110-10
Figure 60-110-8
3
1
4
P100748
P100746
Install the new keyed bushing (Item 1), magnet bushing

Pull the front of the seat bar down slightly from the top of (Item 2) and seat bar sensor (Item 3) [Figure 60-110-10].
the cab, while raising the sensor end of the seat bar up, Reinstall the metal pivot bushing (Item 4) [Figure 60-110-
away from the mount [Figure 60-110-8].
10].

NOTE: The sensor end of the seat bar will raise easily
ONLY if the front of the seat bar is pulled NOTE: The sensor must be centered on the metal
slightly down from the top of the cab. pivot bushing. When centered, the assembly
will slide freely into the mount.
Figure 60-110-9
Figure 60-110-11
5
3
3
1
6 1
2
2
P100747
P100749
Place a soft jaw locking pliers (Item 1) [Figure 60-110-9]
on the cab side screen to hold the seat bar above the Position the clevis (Item 1) over the mount (Item 2) and
mount. lower the end of the seat bar until the mounting bolt (Item
3) [Figure 60-110-11] is resting on the top of the mount.
Remove the clevis pin bushing (Item 2) [Figure 60-110-
9]. Apply grease to the shoulder of the bushing to help Remove the nut from the mounting bolt. Remove the
retain it during assembly. Reinstall the clevis pin bushing. mounting bolt and lower the seat bar until the seat bar
and mount holes align and the clevis is over the clevis pin
Remove and dispose of the keyed bushing (Item 3), bushing. Reinstall the seat bar mounting bolt. Apply
magnet bushing (item 4), and seat bar sensor (Item Loctite® 243 to the nut threads. Install the nut and tighten
5)[Figure 60-110-9]. to 46 N•m (34 ft-lb) torque.

SEAT BAR SENSOR (CONT'D)
Figure 60-110-12
1
2

P100751
P100759
Reinstall the clevis pin (Item 1), and retaining pin (Item 2)
[Figure 60-110-12].
Loosen the clevis bolt (Item 3) until the end of the bolt is
flush with the clevis, then tighten the clevis bolt three full
turns to set proper tension of the compression spring.
Reconnect the sensor wiring connector (Item 2) [Figure

60-110-5].
Reinstall the sensor mounting bolt and nut (Item 1)

[Figure 60-110-5] and tighten to 6,8 N•m (60 in-lb)
torque.
IMPORTANT
Be careful to not overtighten the sensor mounting
bolt and nut to prevent breakage of the sensor.
I-2088-1095
Verify correct seat bar sensor function by performing all

of the steps in the Bobcat Interlock Control System
(BICS™) inspection as described in the loader Operation
& Maintenance Manual.

Bobcat Interlock Control System (BICS) Circuit Test
Figure 60-110-13
3
1
1
P-4703
Connect Sensor Tester (Item 1) [Figure 60-110-14] inline

P-85653 to the seat bar sensor connectors.
Turn the key to the ON position. DO NOT START THE

Use Sensor Tester (MEL1428) and seat bar sensor ENGINE.
adapter (MEL1567) for the following procedure:

If the above test fails, there is a problem with the seat bar
Connect the seat bar sensor adapter leads (MEL1567) to sensor or with the sensor harness.
the sensor tester.
When the power light is illuminated, move the toggle
Disconnect the seat bar sensor connector (Item 1) switch (Item 2) [Figure 60-110-14] on the sensor tester
[Figure 60-110-13]. to the Present position.
NOTE: The sensor test light (Item 3) [Figure 60-110-

14] is only activated by the seat bar. It will be
off with the seat bar up or on with the seat bar
down.

SEAT BAR SENSOR (CONT'D)
Bobcat Interlock Control System (BICS) Circuit Test

(Cont’d)
Figure 60-110-15
P-85413
The BICS seat bar indicator light (Item 1) [Figure 60-110-

15] should turn OFF.
Figure 60-110-16
P-4699
Move the toggle switch (Item 1) [Figure 60-110-16] on

the sensor tester to the Absent position.
The Seat Bar light (Item 1) [Figure 60-110-15] should

illuminate.
If the above test fails, there is a problem with the Bobcat

Controller or the wiring harness.


TRACTION LOCK
Description
The Traction Lock Control System will lock the traction

drive system when the engine stops. The Traction Lock
Control System is incorporated into the Bobcat Interlock
Control System (BICS).

TRACTION LOCK (CONT'D)
Troubleshooting WARNING
assistance in locating and correcting BICS system Check for correct function after adjustments, repairs
problems. It is recommended that these procedures be or service. Failure to make correct repairs or
done by authorized Bobcat Service Personnel only. adjustments can cause injury or death.
W-2004-1285
PROBLEM SOLUTION #
Brake stays engaged. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,11
Intermittent activation of brake. 8, 9, 10,11
1. Make sure brake switch is not engaged.
2. Check the display for an error code.
3. If all lights indicate the brake should be released, but it doesn’t, check the brake 30 amp fuse.
4. When checking fuse, also check other fuses. Check the fuse block for correct orientation and location of fuses.
(See ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INFORMATION on Page 60-10-1.)
5. To test the solenoid, the coil should be about 9.8 ohm.

6. Check brake solenoid wiring voltage, solenoid wiring should read 12 volts.
7. Check the brake solenoid mounting nut for correct torque.
8. Check wire connections for loose connector body.
9. Check for loose or bent pins in connectors.
10. Check for loose spade connectors in fuse holder.
11. Check the flywheel rpm sensor and wiring.

TRACTION LOCK (CONT'D) Figure 60-120-2
Inspecting
Figure 60-120-1
P-85923
1
Check the wire connections at the engine speed sensor
P-85413 (Item 1) [Figure 60-120-2].
Check the adjustment of the flywheel speed sensor and

Fasten the seat belt, disengage the parking brake button, replace the speed sensor if needed. (See Adjustment on
press the PRESS TO OPERATE LOADER Button (Item Page 60-170-2.)

1) and raise the Seat Bar fully. Move the steering levers
slowly forward and backward. The TRACTION lock (Item NOTE: When the Traction Lock Override Button is
4) should be engaged. Lower the Seat Bar. Press the activated, the Traction Lock Override Control
PRESS TO OPERATE LOADER Button (Item 1) [Figure System will NOT engage the Traction Lock if
60-120-1]. the engine stops.
Engage the parking brake pedal and move the steering

levers slowly forward and backward. The TRACTION
lock should be engaged.
NOTE: The TRACTION light on the left instrument

panel will remain ON until the engine is
started, the PRESS TO OPERATE LOADER
Button is pressed and the parking brake is
disengaged.


CONTROL SYSTEM (ACS)
Description
The ACS option allows the operator to quickly switch

between foot and hand control modes. It uses the electric
actuators to control the lift and tilt spools, foot sensors,
handle sensors and a specially designed control handle.

CONTROL SYSTEM (ACS) (CONT'D)
Troubleshooting
The Advanced Control System (ACS) has a built-in diagnostic function to indicate the condition of the ACS controller. The
ACS controller continually monitors the lift handle sensor, lift actuator, tilt handle sensor, and the tilt actuator. The controller
also records alarm condition(s) as service code(s).
To see what error occurred. (See DIAGNOSTIC SERVICE CODES on Page 60-90-1.)

CONTROL SYSTEM (ACS) (CONT'D) Figure 60-130-3
Handle Sensor Connector Disassembly And

Assembly
Figure 60-130-1
1
3
2
1 P13733
With a pointed tool, lift the tab (Item 1) [Figure 60-130-3]

and pull the wire from the connector.
P16578
Installation: Install the wires into the connector as listed
below [Figure 60-130-3]:
The wire connector (Item 1) [Figure 60-130-1] can be

removed from the handle sensor wires, use the following 1-Terminal - Red
procedure. 2-Terminal - Black
3-Terminal - Green
Figure 60-130-2
1 1
1 1
P13725
P13725 P13732
Remove the wedge (Item 1) [Figure 60-130-2] from the

connector.

Switch Handle Removal
Figure 60-130-4
3 1
2
P13735
2 1
Using a pointed tool, press down on the tab (Item 1)

P-21879 [Figure 60-130-6] and pull the wire from the connector.
Figure 60-130-7
NOTE: Switch handle can be removed and installed
while in loader.

130-4] from the handle sensor connector.

130-4] from the handle lock solenoid connector.
1
Figure 60-130-5
P13725 P13732

harness connector (Black) that connects to the handle
1 lock solenoid connector.
P13725 P13732

harness connector (Gray) that connects to the handle
sensor connector.

Switch Handle Removal (Cont'd)
Figure 60-130-8
1
1
3 1
2
P-90994
1
Disconnect the left switch handle connectors (Item 1)
P13735 [Figure 60-130-10] from the loader wiring harness
connectors.
Use a pointed tool, press down on the tab (Item 1) Figure 60-130-11
[Figure 60-130-8] and pull the wire from the connector.

Figure 60-130-9
2 2
1
N-22783
P-90995 Roll the pistol grip handle cover (Item 1) [Figure 60-130-
11] down.
Disconnect the right switch handle connectors (Item 1) Using a small screwdriver, lift the handle tabs (Item 2)
[Figure 60-130-9] from the loader wiring harness [Figure 60-130-11] and slightly rotate the switch handle.
connectors.

CONTROL SYSTEM (ACS) (CONT'D) Switch Handle Installation
Switch Handle Removal (Cont'd) Figure 60-130-14
Figure 60-130-12
2
Tape back 1/2 of Wires Tape 1/2 of Wires
P-24233
P-21699
N-22784
When installing the new switch handle, tape the wire
terminals together.
Pull the switch handle and wiring harness assembly (Item
1) [Figure 60-130-12] from the control lever. The switch handle comes with a 152,4 mm (6 inch) piece

of heat shrink tube side on the end of the wires. Remove
Cut the wires (Item 2) [Figure 60-130-12] below the the heat shrink tube from the end of the wires before
switch handle and remove switch handle. routing through handle and control lever tube.
NOTE: Only cut the wires if the switch handle is bad NOTE: Leave all the other heat shrink tube on the
and needs replacement. If the switch handle is wires for protection.
good and just needs to be removed for control
handle or lever replacement, then remove the Tape half of the wires back and half forward [Figure 60-
connectors on the end of the harness and pull 130-14] to keep the harness small enough to route
switch handle up out of lever tube. through the control lever tube.
Figure 60-130-13
P-90996
Pull harness (Item 1) [Figure 60-130-13] out the bottom

of the control lever tube.

CONTROL SYSTEM (ACS) (CONT'D) Install the wires into the connectors as listed below:
Switch Handle Installation (Cont’d) Right Switch Handle
Figure 60-130-15 Ten-Pin Connector

A-Terminal - Orange
B-Terminal - White
C-Terminal - White/Black
D-Terminal - White/Red
E-Terminal - Dk. Green
1 F-Terminal - White/Lt. Green
G-Terminal - Yellow/Red
H-Terminal - Lt. Green
J-Terminal - Yellow
K-Terminal - Orange/Black
Three-Pin Connector
A-Terminal - Red/White
B-Terminal - Black/White
P-21700 C-Terminal - Purple/White
Left Switch Handle

Install the new switch handle and wires from the top of
the control lever. Ten-Pin Connector

A-Terminal - Orange
Route wire (Item 1) [Figure 60-130-15] through the B-Terminal - Dk. Blue
casting, along side the handle sensor and into the control C-Terminal - White
lever tube. D-Terminal - Purple
E-Terminal - Yellow/Red
NOTE: Do not pull the wire harness tight, allow a F-Terminal - Tan
small amount of slack or slight bend at the G-Terminal - Pink
handle pivot area. Verify the control handle H-Terminal - Orange/Black
returns to neutral position. J-Terminal - Blank
K-Terminal - Blank
Figure 60-130-16
Three-Pin Connector
A-Terminal - Red/White
B-Terminal - Black/White
C-Terminal - Purple/White
2
Two-Pin Connector
A-Terminal - Black
B-Terminal - Red
1
Five-Pin Connector
A-Terminal - Dk. Green
B-Terminal - Brown
C-Terminal - Blank
D-Terminal - Yellow
P-21695 E-Terminal - Blank
Remove tape from wires for installation and install the

152,4 mm (6 in) of heat shrink tube (Item 1) [Figure 60-
130-16] approximately 76,2 mm (3 in) into the control
lever. Apply heat to the exposed heat shrink tube.
Inspect the wire terminal tabs (Item 2) [Figure 60-130-

16] and re-bend tabs if necessary.

Switch Handle Installation (Cont'd)
Figure 60-130-17
3 1
2
1 P13735
Install the wires into the connectors as listed below:

P-90995
Left and Right Control Lever Switch Handle [Figure 60-
130-19]
Figure 60-130-18 1-Terminal - Red/White
2-Terminal - Black/White

3-Terminal - Purple/White
Figure 60-130-20
1
1
1
3
P-90994 2
Connect the handle harness connectors (Item 1) [Figure

60-130-17] and [Figure 60-130-18] to the loader harness
P13735
connectors.
Left and Right Control Lever Switch Handle [Figure 60-

130-20]
1-Terminal - Yellow/Red
2-Terminal - Open
3-Terminal - Orange/Black

Switch Handle Installation (Cont'd)
Figure 60-130-21
N-17741
Installation: Install the wires into the connector as listed

P-21804 below. The terminal numbers are written on the back of
the connector (Item 1) [Figure 60-130-23].
Connect the handle harness connectors to the sensor Lift And Tilt Actuator
and lock solenoid connectors [Figure 60-130-21]. 1. Terminal-Black/Green-Larger diameter wire (16

gauge)
Actuator Connector Disassembly And Assembly 2. Terminal-Green-Larger diameter wire (16 gauge)
3. Terminal-Red/Green-Larger diameter wire (16
NOTE: Actuator shown removed for clarity. Not gauge)
necessary for procedure. 4. Terminal-Open
5. Terminal-Red-Smaller diameter wire (18 gauge)
Figure 60-130-22 6. Terminal-Open
7. Terminal-Open
8. Terminal-Black-Smaller diameter wire (18 gauge)
1
P-66842
Check the actuator wiring harness connector (Item 1)

[Figure 60-130-22] and replace if broken.

CONTROL SYSTEM (ACS) (CONT'D) Handle Lock Solenoid Disassembly And Assembly
Handle Lock Solenoid Removal And Installation Figure 60-130-26
Figure 60-130-24
1
2
1 P-21878A
P-21836
Remove solenoid (Item 1) from the solenoid mount (Item
2) [Figure 60-130-26].
130-24] from the handle sensor connector. Installation: Apply a drop of oil to the solenoid threads

and tighten solenoid to 47 - 54 N•m (35 - 40 ft-lb) torque.
130-24] from the handle lock solenoid connector. Figure 60-130-27
Figure 60-130-25
P-21789
1
P-21832
Check the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 60-130-27] for
damage. Replace as necessary.
Remove the two screws (Item 1) [Figure 60-130-25]
holding the handle lock solenoid to the handle.
Installation: Tighten the screws to 3,6 - 4,3 N•m (32 - 38

in-lb) torque.
Remove handle lock solenoid assembly from handle.

Foot Sensor Removal And Installation
Figure 60-130-28
2‘
1
1
1 P-90980
Remove the two bolts (Item 1) and the foot sensor (Item
P-90979 2) [Figure 60-130-30].

Remove the hairpin clip and the pin (Item 1) [Figure 60-
130-28] from the foot sensor.

Figure 60-130-29
P-90982
Disconnect the wire harness (Item 1) [Figure 60-130-29]

from the foot sensor.

CONTROL SYSTEM (ACS) (CONT'D) Foot Sensor Lock Solenoid Removal And Installation
Foot Sensor Disassembly And Assembly Figure 60-130-33
Figure 60-130-31
1 1
P-90992
1
P-24269
Disconnect the wire harness (Item 1) [Figure 60-130-33]
from the foot sensor shield lock solenoid.
Remove the two bolts (Item 1) [Figure 60-130-31] from
the end of the foot sensor. Remove foot lock solenoid (Item 2) [Figure 60-130-33].

Installation: Tighten the bolts to 10,2 N•m (90 in-lb) Installation: Apply a drop of oil on the solenoid threads
torque. Apply Loctite® #242 to the threads. and tighten the solenoid to 47 - 54 N•m (35 - 40 ft-lb)
torque.
Figure 60-130-32
Figure 60-130-34
5
4
3 1
2
1 P-24270
P-21790
Remove the boot retainer (Item 1), boot (Item 2), spool
stop plate (Item 3) and O-ring (Item 4) [Figure 60-130- Check the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 60-130-34] for
32]. damage. Replace as necessary.
NOTE: Do not disassemble the sensor assembly

(Item 5) [Figure 60-130-32]. The sensor
assembly is a calibrated assembly and cannot
be serviced. Order through Bobcat Parts.

ELECTRICAL / HYDRAULIC CONTROLS
1 2 3 10 11 12
5
6
7 8
13
9
4
B-15781F / NA1014A / B-15781E
REF. NO. DESCRIPTION

1 TURN SIGNALS (Option)
2 REAR AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS (Option)

Also: ATTACHMENT FUNCTION CONTROL
3 ATTACHMENT FUNCTION CONTROL
4 FRONT HORN
5 ENGINE SPEED CONTROL
6 STEERING LEVERS
7 LIFT ARM PEDAL
8 TILT PEDAL
9 LIFT ARM BYPASS CONTROL
11 FRONT AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS
12 NOT USED
13 CONTINUOUS FLOW CONTROL FOR AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS

ELECTRICAL / HYDRAULIC CONTROLS (CONT’D)
Description
The Attachment Control Device (ACD) uses a 7 or 14 pin

connector to communicate between the loader and the
attachment.
Attachments with a 14 pin connector use four different

groups to control operations and hydraulic flow. Use
service Analyzer to determine what group is being used
and to troubleshoot the attachment / loader functions. If
service analyzer is not available use a ohmmeter to
check for jumpers on the attachment harness.
Group 0 = No Jumpers
Group 1 = Pins K,L
Group 2 = Pins K,P
Group 3 = Pins C,D
Refer to the Identification Chart ACD Group 0,1,2, or 3

for more detailed information.

Identification Chart ACD Group 0
Attachment Attachment
Switch Solenoid Number Harness Harness
Left side Control Number Activated Terminal Connector RIght Side Control
Handle Switches Activated Handle Switches
STD RH HFH RH / HFH Fourteen Pin

1 1 1 1, 7 1,7 K Connector
Viewed
2 2 2 2 2 K from front
(pin side of
3 1 1 1, 7 1,7 K connector)
of loader.
4 2 3,5,6 2 3,5,6 K,A,D
5 1 4,5,6 1 4,5,6 K,A,C
6 1 4,5,6 1 4,5,6 K,E
7 1 4,5,6 1 4,5,6 K,F
8 1 4,5,6 1 4,5,6 K,G
9 1 4,5,6 1 4,5,6 K,H
10, 11, - -- -- K No Jumpers
12, 13,

B-16447 14 B-16448
RH - Loaders with Rear Hydraulics Option.
HFH - Loaders with High Flow Hydraulics Option.
RH / HFH - Loaders with Rear Hydraulics and High
Flow Hydraulics Option.
3
Terminal K is activated with Key switch ON.
6 4
NOTE: For diagnostics and troubleshooting connect
the Service PC (See SERVICE PC (LAPTOP 2
1
COMPUTER) on Page 60-150-1.) 7
5
The ACD (Attachment Control Device)
automatically recognizes the use of the seven
or fourteen pin connector when connected.
Pressing the auxiliary hydraulics button and

moving the rear auxiliary hydraulic switch to NA1892
the right and left several times activates
solenoid numbers 3,4,5, and 6 at the diverter
valve. Solenoid Hydraulic Coupler Wiring
Number Number
Front Auxiliary Pressure Release is 1 Front Male (Rod) 4330
accomplished by manually pushing the male 2 Front Female (Base) 4340
and female couplers in at the front auxiliary 3 Diverter Rear (Rod) 4430
block.
4 Diverter Rear (Base) 4440
The High Flow Button in the left side 5 Bleed / Lock Valve (Base) 4480
instrument panel must be pushed ON to 6 Bleed / Lock Valve (Rod) 4450
activate solenoid number seven at the gear 7 High Flow on Pump 4460
pump.


1 1 1 1, 7 1,7 K Connector
Viewed
(pin side of
3 1 1 1, 7 1,7 K connector)
of loader.
4 1 1 1 1 K,M,D
5 1 1 1 1 K,M,C
6 1 1 1 1 K,M,E
7 1 1 1 1 K,M,F
8 1 1 1 1 K,M,G
9 1 1 1 1 K,M,H
10, 11, - -- -- K Jumpers K,L
12, 13,

B-16447 14 B-16448
3
6 4
1
5

Number Number
block.
pump.


1 1 1 1, 7 1,7 K Connector
Viewed
(pin side of
3 1 1 1, 7 1,7 K connector)
of loader.
4 2 2 2 2 K,A
5 1 1 1,7 1,7 K,A
6 - - - - K,E
7 - - - - K,F
8 - - - - K,G
9 - - - - K,H
10, 11, - -- -- K Jumpers K,P
12, 13,

B-16447 14 B-16448
3
6 4
1
5

Number Number
block.
pump.


1 1 1 - - K Connector
Viewed
2 2 2 - - K from front
(pin side of
3 1 1 - - K connector)
of loader.
4 - - - - K,A,D
5 - - - - K,A,C
6 - - - - K,E
7 - - - - K,F
8 - - - - K,G
9 - - - - K,H
10, 11, - -- -- K Jumpers C,D
12, 13,

B-16447 14 B-16448
3
6 4
1
5

Number Number
block.
pump.

ELECTRICAL / HYDRAULIC CONTROLS (ACS)
1 2 3 11 12 13
6
8 9
4
14
5 10
B-15781D / NA1164A / B-15781E

4 FLOAT CONTROL
5 FRONT HORN
6 ENGINE SPEED CONTROL
7 STEERING LEVERS AND LIFT / TILT HANDLES
8 LIFT ARM PEDAL
9 TILT PEDAL
13 NOT USED

ELECTRICAL / HYDRAULIC CONTROLS (ACS) (CONT’D)
Description

attachment.

Group 1 = Pins K,L
Group 2 = Pins K,P
Group 3 = Pins C,D



13 6
1 1 1 1, 7 1,7 K Connector 8 10
4 5 Viewed 2 1
2 2 2 2 2 K from front 11
12 7 (pin side of 9
3 1 1 1, 7 1,7 K connector)
of loader.
4 2 3,5,6 2 3,5,6 K,A,D
5 1 4,5,6 1 4,5,6 K,A,C
6 1 4,5,6 1 4,5,6 K,E
7 1 4,5,6 1 4,5,6 K,F
8 1 4,5,6 1 4,5,6 K,G
3
14 9 1 4,5,6 1 4,5,6 K,H
10, 11, - -- -- K No Jumpers
P-90898 12, 13, P-90899

P-90900 14 P-90900A
3
6 4
1
5

Number Number
block.
pump.


13 6
1 1 1 1, 7 1,7 K Connector 8 10
4 5 Viewed 2 1
12 7 (pin side of 9
3 1 1 1, 7 1,7 K connector)
of loader.
4 1 1 1 1 K,M,D
5 1 1 1 1 K,M,C
6 1 1 1 1 K,M,E
7 1 1 1 1 K,M,F
8 1 1 1 1 K,M,G
3
14 9 1 1 1 1 K,M,H
10, 11, - -- -- K Jumpers K,L
P-90898 12, 13, P-90899

P-90900 14 P-90900A
3
6 4
1
5

Number Number
block.
pump.


13 6
1 1 1 1, 7 1,7 K Connector 8 10
4 5 Viewed 2 1
12 7 (pin side of 9
3 1 1 1, 7 1,7 K connector)
of loader.
4 2 2 2 2 K,A
5 1 1 1,7 1,7 K,A
6 - - - - K,E
7 - - - - K,F
8 - - - - K,G
3
14 9 - - - - K,H
10, 11, - -- -- K Jumpers K,P
P-90898 12, 13, P-90899

P-90900 14 P-90900A
3
6 4
1
5

Number Number
block.
pump.


13 6
1 1 1 - - K Connector 8 10
4 5 Viewed 2 1
2 2 2 - - K from front 11
12 7 (pin side of 9
of loader.
4 - - - - K,A,D
5 - - - - K,A,C
6 - - - - K,E
7 - - - - K,F
8 - - - - K,G
3
14 9 - - - - K,H
10, 11, - -- -- K Jumpers C,D
P-90898 12, 13, P-90899

P-90900 14 P-90900A
3
6 4
1
5

Number Number
block.
pump.

ELECTRICAL / HYDRAULIC CONTROLS (SJC)
1 2 3 4 5 13 14 15 16 17
8
9
10
11
18
6 7 19
12
B-19873A / NA1165A / B-19874A

1 SPEED MANAGEMENT
2 STEERING DRIFT COMPENSATION
Also: DRIVE RESPONSE
4 STEERING DRIFT COMPENSATION
Also: DRIVE RESPONSE
6 SPEED MANAGEMENT
7 FRONT HORN
8 ENGINE SPEED CONTROL (HAND)
9 JOYSTICKS
10 FOOTRESTS
11 ENGINE SPEED CONTROL (FOOT)
14 NOT USED
16 NOT USED
18 FLOAT CONTROL

ELECTRICAL / HYDRAULIC CONTROLS (SJC) (CONT’D)
Description

attachment.

Group 1 = Pins K,L
Group 2 = Pins K,P
Group 3 = Pins C,D



1 1 1 1, 7 1,7 K Connector
8
13 6 Viewed 2 1
10
4
12
5
7
2 2 2 2 2 K from front 9 11
(pin side of
3 1 1 1, 7 1,7 K connector)
of loader.
4 2 3,5,6 2 3,5,6 K,A,D
5 1 4,5,6 1 4,5,6 K,A,C
6 1 4,5,6 1 4,5,6 K,E
7 1 4,5,6 1 4,5,6 K,F
14 8 1 4,5,6 1 4,5,6 K,G
3
9 1 4,5,6 1 4,5,6 K,H
10, 11, - -- -- K No Jumpers
P-24820A 12, 13, P-24802A

P-28316A 14 P-28316A
3
6 4
1
5

Number Number
block.
pump.


1 1 1 1, 7 1,7 K Connector
8
13
4
6 Viewed 2 1
10
12
5
7 2 2 2 2 2 K from front 9 11
(pin side of
3 1 1 1, 7 1,7 K connector)
of loader.
4 1 1 1 1 K,M,D
5 1 1 1 1 K,M,C
6 1 1 1 1 K,M,E
7 1 1 1 1 K,M,F
14 8 1 1 1 1 K,M,G
3
9 1 1 1 1 K,M,H
10, 11, - -- -- K Jumpers K,L
P-24820A 12, 13, P-24802A

P-28316A 14 P-28316A
3
6 4
1
5

Number Number
block.
pump.


1 1 1 1, 7 1,7 K Connector
13 6 Viewed 8
2 1
10
4
12
5
7
2 2 2 2 2 K from front 9 11
(pin side of
3 1 1 1, 7 1,7 K connector)
of loader.
4 2 2 2 2 K,A
5 1 1 1,7 1,7 K,A
6 - - - - K,E
7 - - - - K,F
14 8 - - - - K,G
3
9 - - - - K,H
10, 11, - -- -- K Jumpers K,P
P-24820A 12, 13, P-24802A

P-28316A 14 P-28316A
3
6 4
1
5

Number Number
block.
pump.


1 1 1 - - K Connector
13 6 Viewed 8
2 1
10
4 5
2 2 2 - - K from front 9 11
12 7
(pin side of
of loader.
4 - - - - K,A,D
5 - - - - K,A,C
6 - - - - K,E
7 - - - - K,F
14 8 - - - - K,G
3
9 - - - - K,H
10, 11, - -- -- K Jumpers C,D
P-24820A 12, 13, P-24802A

P-28316A 14 P-28316A
3
6 4
1
5

Number Number
block.
pump.

SERVICE PC (LAPTOP COMPUTER) Connecting Remote Start Tool (Service Tool)
Connecting Remote Start Tool Figure 60-150-2
Figure 60-150-1
1 2
2
3
1
P-76450
P16119
procedure:
procedure: Order from Bobcat Parts P/N: 6689779 - Remote Start

Tool (Service Tool) Kit
MEL1565 - Service Tool Harness Control Kit Includes:
MEL1566 - Service Tool Harness Communicator
(Computer Interface) 6689778 - Remote Start Tool (Service Tool)
NOTE: Make all connections with the key in the OFF 6689747 - Loader Service Tool Harness
position. 6689746 - Computer Service Tool Harness
6689745 - BOSS® Service Tool Harness
The Service PC (Item 1) with the Remote Start Tool (Item NOTE: Make all connections with the key in the OFF
2) [Figure 60-150-1]. When connected to the loader, the position.
Service PC is used to monitor, conduct diagnostics, and
upgrade software. The Service PC (Item 1) with the Remote Start Tool
(Service Tool) (Item 2) [Figure 60-150-2]. When
Connect the Service Tool Harness Communicator connected to the loader, the Service PC is used to
(MEL1566) (Item 3) [Figure 60-150-1] to the designated monitor, conduct diagnostics, and upgrade software.
serial port on the Service PC.
Connect the Remote Start Tool (Service Tool) Computer
NOTE: The recommended serial cable length should Service Tool Harness (Item 3) [Figure 60-150-2] to the
not exceed 4,6 m (15 ft). A serial cable longer designated serial port on the Service PC.
than 4,6 m (15 ft) will create a degraded signal
causing communication errors. NOTE: The recommended serial cable length should
not exceed 4,6 m (15 ft). A serial cable longer
Connect the other end to the connector on the Remote than 4,6 m (15 ft) will create a degraded signal
Start Tool. causing communication errors.
Connect the remote start tool to the loader. (See Connect the other end to the connector on the Remote
REMOTE START TOOL KIT-MEL1563 on Page 10-60- Start Tool (Service Tool).
1.)
NOTE: Refer to BobcatNET for PC requirements and loader. (See REMOTE START TOOL (SERVICE TOOL)
the latest Service Analyzer software. KIT - 7003031 on Page 10-61-1.)
NOTE: Refer to BobcatNET for PC requirements and

the latest Service Analyzer software.


CALIBRATION Actuator Testing
Calibration procedures must be followed when replacing

a hydraulic control valve, actuator, Drive / Drive+
Controller, ACS Controller, pump controller, hydrostatic
pump, or hydrostatic motor. Failure to calibrate after
component replacement may result in poor performance
or reduced life of actuator(s).
The Actuator Test is performed with the Service PC. The

Actuator Test should be used if reduced performance
codes are present or when replacing a controller or
actuator.
NOTE: The Actuator Test should be used as the

preferred method of actuator and valve spool CONTROL VALVE ACTUATORS
P-54336
calibration.
The Lift and Tilt Calibration (ACS) provides set points to [Figure 60-160-1] Excessive actuator loading can occur
the ACS controller to actuate the lift and tilt valve. The Lift if the actuator and valve spool components are
and Tilt Calibration (ACS) should be used if reduced misaligned. Misalignment may reduce spool stroke
performance codes are present or when replacing a performance and reduce the life of the actuator. Starting

controller or actuator. with software version 36, the Bobcat Service Analyzer
will be able to perform tests to diagnose actuator and
The Lift and Tilt Calibration (SJC) provides set points to valve spool misalignment.
the ACS controller to actuate the lift and tilt valve. The Lift
and Tilt Calibration (SJC) should be used if reduced Connect the Service PC (See SERVICE PC (LAPTOP
performance codes are present or when replacing a COMPUTER) on Page 60-150-1.)
controller or actuator.
If a Service PC is not available, (See Lift And Tilt
The Hydrostatic Pump Calibration (SJC) provides set Calibration (SJC) on Page 60-160-4.) or (See Lift And Tilt
points to the Drive controller to actuate the hydrostatic Calibration (ACS) on Page 60-160-11.).
controller that directs flow to a servo piston. Hydrostatic
Pump Calibration (SJC) should be performed when a NOTE: Warm the hydraulic oil to room temperature
desired travel path cannot be attained or replacing the 22°C (72°F), stop the engine and clear all
hydrostatic pump, hydrostatic motor, or controller. After active service codes before running the test.
Performing a Hydrostatic Pump Calibration (SJC),
Steering Drift Compensation can be used to fine tune the Once the test is initiated, an automatic calibration
hydrostatic pump control. sequence will start. When calibration is complete, the test
will be performed and the results can be viewed on the
For more information on Steering Drift Compensation Service PC (Laptop) monitor.
(See STEERING DRIFT COMPENSATION on Page 60-
161-1.)
NOTE: The Actuator Test is the only test that uses a

Service PC. The Lift and Tilt Calibration (ACS
or SJC) does not need to be performed if the
Actuator Testing is being performed with the
Service PC. The Hydrostatic Pump Calibration
does not need to be performed with the
Actuator Test or Lift and Tilt Calibration (SJC).

CALIBRATION (CONT’D) If the Actuator Test fails after the hydraulic oil is warmed,
go to the next step and loosen the bolts that mount the
Actuator Testing (Cont’d) actuator to the control valve. Loosen the bolts just
enough so the actuator can be moved slightly up / down
This test will engage both actuators to fully stroke the or side / side.
spools then allow the centering springs to return the
spools to neutral. Next, both actuators are engaged to Rerun the Actuator Test, if the test passes, check the
move the spools just past the neutral points then allow following probable causes in Column 1 [Figure 60-160-
the centering springs to return the spools to neutral. 2]. Check the probable causes in the order they are
listed. Repairing one cause may be all that is required.
When complete, the Actuator Test will show a pass mode Re-run the test to verify.
or fail mode. The pass mode indicates that no problems
were detected. The fail mode indicates one or a NOTE: Actuator and spool misalignment. Re-tighten
combination of three problems below. the two bolts evenly, turn the first bolt one
turn, then turn the other bolt one turn until
• Actuator slow return to neutral. The spool returns to both bolts are tight.
neutral too slowly.
If the Actuator Test failed due to a slow return to neutral
• Actuator did not fully extend / retract. During the test, after checking the probable causes in Column 1 [Figure
the spool was not able to fully stroke in both 60-160-2], check the following probable causes in
directions. Column 2 [Figure 60-160-2].
• Actuator out of neutral. The spool did not return to the • Contamination in the spool.
neutral window during the test.

• The spool end cap may be defective or the centering
NOTE: A time out will occur if the test cannot be spring may be broken. Inspect the end cap and the
completed within 8 seconds. If this happens, centering spring, replace if necessary.
retry the test.
• The wire harness or connectors may have an
Figure 60-160-2 intermittent short. Check the connections and wire
Run Actuator Test harnesses.
• The controller may be defective, replace the

Pass Fail controller.
Retest With Warm Hydraulic Oil
Pass Fail
Loosen Actuator
Pass Fail
Column 1 Column 2
Probable Cause Probable Cause
• Misaligned Assembly • Actuator
• Pin • End Cap / Center Spring
• Contamination in Spool • Wire Harness
• Controller
• Contamination in Spool
[Figure 60-160-2] If the initial Actuator Test results in a

fail mode due to a slow return to neutral, follow the
troubleshooting tree to pinpoint the probable cause.

CALIBRATION (CONT’D)
Actuator Testing (Cont’d)
If the initial Actuator Test results in the fail mode actuator

did not fully extend / retract, check the following.
• The actuator connectors may be reversed between

the lift and tilt actuator. Reverse the connectors and
rerun the Actuator Test.
• The actuator may be weak, replace the actuator.

spring may be broken. Inspect the end cap and the
centering spring, replace if necessary.
• Contamination in the spool.
If the initial Actuator Test results in the fail mode actuator

out of neutral, check the following.
• The actuator may be defective, replace the actuator.

spring may be broken. Inspect the end cap and the
centering spring, replace if necessary.
• Contamination in the spool.

CALIBRATION (CONT’D) Figure 60-160-4
Lift And Tilt Calibration (SJC)
The controller uses a calibration sequence to optimize

the control system. The optimizing ensures full spool
stroke (full flow) while preventing over stroke (loading) of
the actuator and resets the calibration points in the
controller.
NOTE: The Actuator Test is the preferred method to

calibrate the lift and tilt actuator. (See
Actuator Testing on Page 60-160-1.)
NOTE: This calibration procedure must be followed

when replacing the hydraulic control valve, lift P-85958 P-85958
or tilt actuator. Failure to calibrate after
component replacement may result in poor
performance or reduced life of actuator(s). Move the right joystick to the forward-right corner position
[Figure 60-160-4] and hold in position.
Figure 60-160-3
SJC

1
P-85307
With an operator in the seat and the seat bar down.
Close the cab door. (If loader is equipped.)
Place the loader Control Pattern Switch (Item 1) [Figure

60-160-3] in the ISO position.

Lift And Tilt Calibration (SJC) (Cont’d)
Figure 60-160-5
P-85413C
P-85493A
At the left panel, press the PRESS TO OPERATE Button

With the seat bar down, turn the ignition key ON [Figure (Item 1) [Figure 60-160-7] while holding the right joystick
60-160-5]. in position.
NOTE: Do not start the engine. Release the joystick.

Figure 60-160-6 NOTE: During the calibration cycle, the system will
beep three times. Once the calibration is
SJC complete, code W3224 (Calibration
Performed) will be generated.
The ACS controller will cycle the actuators.
The lift and tilt calibration is complete.
P-85307
The loader Control Pattern Switch (Item 1) [Figure 60-

160-6] will start flashing and will continue to flash until the
calibration procedure is completed.

CALIBRATION (CONT'D) Figure 60-160-9
Hydrostatic Pump Calibration (SJC)
WARNING
W-2017-0286 P-85493A

With the seat bar down, turn the ignition key ON [Figure
10-10-1.)
60-160-9].
Operator must be in the seat and the seat bar down.
NOTE: Do not start the engine.
Figure 60-160-8
Figure 60-160-10
SJC
SJC

1
1
P-85307
P-85307
Close the cab door. (If loader is so equipped.)

The Control Pattern ISO Switch (Item 1) [Figure 60-160-
10] will start flashing.
Place the loader Control Pattern Switch (Item 1) [Figure
60-160-8] in the ISO position.
Verify that the parking brake switch is in the OFF

position.

Hydrostatic Pump Calibration (SJC) (Cont'd)
Figure 60-160-11
B-19873
P-85960
B-19873 Move the left joystick to the reverse-right corner position

P-85959 [Figure 60-160-13] and hold in position.
Figure 60-160-14
Move the left joystick to the forward-left corner position
[Figure 60-160-11] and hold in position.

Figure 60-160-12
P-85413C
1
Press the PRESS TO OPERATE LOADER Button (Item
P-85413C 1) [Figure 60-160-14] while holding the left joystick in
position.
Press the PRESS TO OPERATE LOADER Button (Item Three audible beeps will sound.
1) [Figure 60-160-12] while holding the left joystick in
position.
Three audible beeps will sound.

Hydrostatic Pump Calibration (SJC) (Cont'd) SJC
Figure 60-160-15
P-85307
The Control Pattern ISO Switch (Item 1) [Figure 60-160-

P-85961 17] will stop flashing, and will remain ON for the rest of
the calibration procedure.
Allow the left joystick to go to the neutral position [Figure Figure 60-160-18
60-160-15].

Figure 60-160-16
P-85760A
1
P-85413C Move the throttle (Item 1) [Figure 60-160-18] to high idle.
NOTE: If at any time, during calibration, the operator

Press the PRESS TO OPERATE LOADER Button (Item needs to stop the loader, turn the key OFF, lift
1) [Figure 60-160-16]. the seat bar, or return the joystick to the
neutral position.
Three audible beeps will sound.
The calibration procedure will stop.
Start the engine from the RUN, RUN / ENTER position.
DO NOT TURN TO OFF POSITION. This would cancel To return to calibration mode, the operator
the calibration mode and the procedure would have to be must start the complete procedure from the
repeated. beginning.

Hydrostatic Pump Calibration (SJC) (Cont'd)
1 2
WARNING
W-2017-0286
Figure 60-160-19 P-64321
The loader speed will “ramp up” quickly (Item 1)

[Figure 60-160-20] and slow down 3 times in a row.
The loader will then “stair step” the speed (Item 2)

[Figure 60-160-20] until it reaches full speed and then
come to a stop.

Continue to hold the left joystick in the forward position
until the loader wheels or tracks come to a stop and an
audible beep is heard.
B-19873 Forward calibration is complete.

P-85962
NOTE: If the wheels or tracks do not stop moving in
Full Speed Forward in 2 minutes or less, there
Move and hold the left joystick to the forward position was an error in the calibration procedure. The
[Figure 60-160-19] until the forward calibration is operator must shut the loader OFF, and start
completed. the calibration procedure from the beginning.

CALIBRATION (CONT'D) NOTE: If the wheels or tracks do not stop moving in
Full Speed Reverse in 2 minutes or less, there
Hydrostatic Pump Calibration (SJC) (Cont'd) was an error in the calibration procedure. The
operator must shut the loader OFF, and start
Figure 60-160-21 the calibration procedure from the beginning.
There will be an audible beep, the PRESS TO OPERATE

LOADER button light will remain on. The TRACTION
light will illuminate, the SEAT BAR, and LIFT AND TILT
lights will be off. The D7598 error code will clear. There
should be no other codes in the display area.
Allow the joystick to go to the neutral position.
Once the calibration procedure is complete the Steering

Drift Compensation values will be reset to [S----] or
neutral.
B-19873 Press the PRESS TO OPERATE LOADER button. Move

P-85963 the left joystick to forward position [Figure 60-160-19]
and check for normal forward wheel or track rotation.
Move and hold the left joystick to the reverse position Move the left joystick to the reverse position [Figure 60-
[Figure 60-160-21] until the reverse calibration is 160-21] and check for normal reverse wheel or track

completed. rotation.
Figure 60-160-22 Stop the engine, and remove the loader from jackstands.
The calibration procedure is completed.
1 2 After calibration is complete, use Steering Drift

Compensation for fine tuning or if an acceptable line of
drift cannot be achieved. (See STEERING DRIFT
COMPENSATION on Page 60-161-1.)
If loader does not maintain a desired travel path with

Steering Drift Compensation at maximum setting [S-R10]
or [S-L10], see the electrical and hydrostatic
troubleshooting. (See Troubleshooting on Page 30-10-2.)
or (See Troubleshooting on Page 60-10-8.)
P-64321
The loader speed will “ramp up” quickly (Item 1)

[Figure 60-160-22] and slow down 3 times in a row.
The loader will then “stair step” the speed (Item 2)

[Figure 60-160-22] until it reaches full speed and then
come to a stop.
Continue to hold the left joystick in the reverse position

until the loader wheels or tracks come to a stop and an
audible beep is heard.
Reverse calibration is complete.

Lift And Tilt Calibration (ACS)
The controller uses a calibration sequence to optimize

the control system. The optimizing ensures full spool
stroke (full flow) while preventing over stroke (loading) of
the actuator and resets the calibration points in the
controller.
NOTE: The Actuator Test is the preferred method to

calibrate the lift and tilt actuator. (See
Actuator Testing on Page 60-160-1.)
P-85493A
NOTE: This calibration procedure must be followed

when replacing a hydraulic control valve, Close the cab door. (If loader is equipped.)
actuator or ACS controller. Failure to calibrate
after component replacement may result in With the seat bar down, turn the ignition key ON (Deluxe
poor performance or reduced life of Instrumentation Panel press RUN / ENTER) (Item 1)
actuator(s). [Figure 60-160-24].
Figure 60-160-23 NOTE: Do not start the engine.
ACS
Figure 60-160-25

1
P-85307B 1
Update the loader service software to the latest version. P-85413C
Place the rocker switch (Item 1) [Figure 60-160-23] in

Push the PRESS TO OPERATE button (Item 1) [Figure
the hand control mode.
60-160-25] to unlock the hand controls.

Lift And Tilt Calibration (ACS) (Cont’d)
Figure 60-160-26
Stroke Both Handles Fully In and Hold Them
P-85413C
Push the PRESS TO OPERATE button (Item 1) [Figure

B-16628 60-160-27] to begin calibration.
NOTE: The ACS icon will light up and if you listen

Fully stroke both control handles in toward the center of closely the cycling of the actuators can be
the cab and hold the handles [Figure 60-160-26]. heard. The ACS icon will stay lit until the

ignition key is cycled or the loader is started
Lift the seat bar, high enough for the PRESS TO and a function is operated.
OPERATE light (Item 1) [Figure 60-160-27] to go OFF.
NOTE: During the calibration cycle, the system will
Lower the seat bar. beep three times. Once the calibration is
complete, code W3224 (Calibration
Performed) will be generated.
Release the control handles.
Calibration is complete.

STEERING DRIFT COMPENSATION Operation
Steering Drift Compensation is available on SJC NOTE: Changes CANNOT be performed until the seat
equipped machines. bar is lowered, the engine is started and the
PRESS TO OPERATE LOADER button is
Description pressed to activate the BICS.
Steering Drift Compensation can be used to reduce Perform pre-starting and starting procedures:
steering drift to maintain a desired travel path in both
forward and reverse directions. 1. Fasten seat belt.
Examples of applications where this feature can be used: 2. Lower seat bar.
• To compensate for normal variations such as track 3. Place joysticks in neutral position.
tension and track wear.
4. Start the engine.
• Using side shift attachments such as trenchers,
planers and silt fence installers. 5. Press the PRESS TO OPERATE LOADER button.
• Driving on uneven terrain such as crowned road 6. Current drive response setting will be displayed briefly
surfaces. in the data display.
Figure 60-161-1 NOTE: Raising the seat bar or changing control

mode (ISO / H) will cause the machine to

STEERING DRIFT COMPENSATION disengage from steering drift compensation.
The last displayed setting will remain in effect
until the machine is turned OFF.
B-23580D
Steering drift compensation contains a total of 21

settings. Steering drift compensation can be set to any
point from neutral to [S-L10] left and from neutral to [S-
R10] right. [S----] is displayed when set for neutral
[Figure 60-161-1].

STEERING DRIFT COMPENSATION (CONT’D) Press the upper right button (Item 7) on the left joystick to
adjust back toward center. The display will decrease
Operation (Cont’d) down to neutral displayed as [S----] (Item 4). Another
press of the upper right button will cause [S-R01] (Item 5)
Figure 60-161-2 to appear in the data display (Item 2) [Figure 60-161-2].
The number will increase by one each time you press the
button up to a maximum of [S-R10]. The higher the
number, the greater the amount of steering drift
compensation to the right. Adjustments to steering drift
compensation will be effective immediately.
Figure 60-161-3
2
1
NA1011
3 4 5
P-76461L 2
P-76461N
1

P-76461M
Left Joystick Right Joystick NA1011
3 4
P-76461K
P-76461O
6 7
P-24820C P-24802C Saving The Steering Drift Compensation Setting:
The current steering drift compensation setting can be

Press and hold the PRESS TO OPERATE LOADER
saved by pressing and holding the PRESS TO
button (Item 1) for 3 seconds to access the drive
OPERATE LOADER button (Item 1) for 3 seconds.
response adjustment menu. Press the PRESS TO
[SET] (Item 3) will appear in the data display (Item 2)
OPERATE LOADER button (Item 1) again to adjust the
[Figure 60-161-3] and the machine will exit from the
loaders steering drift compensation setting. The current
steering drift compensation adjustment menu.
steering drift compensation setting will appear in the data
display (Item 2) [Figure 60-161-2].
OR
Press the upper left button (Item 6) on the left joystick to
Press the PRESS TO OPERATE LOADER button to exit
adjust the machine left. [S-L01] (Item 3) through a
from the steering drift compensation adjustment menu
maximum of [S-L10] will appear in the data display (Item
without saving the current setting. [DONE] (Item 4) will
2) [Figure 60-161-2]. The number will increase by one
appear in the data display (Item 2) [Figure 60-161-3] and
each time you press the button. The higher the number,
the upper left and upper right buttons on the left joystick
the greater the amount of steering drift compensation to
will no longer make changes to steering drift
the left. Adjustments to steering drift compensation will
compensation.
be effective immediately.
NOTE: The last displayed steering drift
compensation setting will remain in effect
until the machine is turned OFF. The machine
will revert back to the last saved setting the
next time it is started.

FLYWHEEL RPM SENSOR
Description
The flywheel rpm sensor has a magnet located on the

end of the sensor which senses breaks between the ring
gear teeth, the sensor relays this information back to the
controller which registers the rpm of the engine.
The flywheel rpm sensor is located just above the starter

on the left side of the engine.

FLYWHEEL RPM SENSOR (CONT’D) NOTE: New rpm sensors have a plastic tip which is
used as a gauge during installation. The
Adjustment plastic tip is designed to come off after the
engine is started.
Figure 60-170-1
1
2
P-85922
When reinstalling the rpm sensor, turn the rpm sensor

(Item 1) [Figure 60-170-1] in until it makes contact with

the engine flywheel.
Turn the jam nut (Item 2) [Figure 60-170-1] until it

contacts the flywheel housing. The jam nut should not be
tightened, it needs to turn with the rpm sensor when the
sensor is turned back out for adjustment.
Figure 60-170-2
P-85921
Turn the rpm sensor and the jam nut out from the
flywheel. Set a clearance of 1,27 mm (0.050 in) between
the jam nut and the housing with a feeler gauge (Item 1)
[Figure 60-170-2].
Remove the feeler gauge.
Tighten the jam nut (Item 2) [Figure 60-170-2] to 16 - 23


CONTROL PANEL SETUP Example
Right Panel Setup (Deluxe Instrumentation Panel) Languages
Icon Identification Figure 60-180-2
Figure 60-180-1 Press a scroll button

(Item 1) repeatedly until
the Display screen icon
(Inset) is highlighted.
1 1
Select
[2. LANGUAGES].
NA3025 Select the desired

language.

ICON DESCRIPTION
DATE / TIME
USER / HOURMETER
P-90385 / NA3025 / NA3012 / NA3023
CURRENT JOB HOURS
ACTIVE WARNINGS screen icon
VITALS screen icon
SERVICE screen icon
MAIN screen icon
ATTACHMENTS screen icon
SECURITY screen icon
DISPLAY screen icon
LEFT SCROLL button
RIGHT SCROLL button
ENTER button

CONTROL PANEL SETUP (CONT’D) The Deluxe Instrumentation Panel is easy to use.
Continue to set your own preferences for running /
Right Panel Setup (Deluxe Instrumentation Panel) monitoring your Bobcat loader.
(Cont’d)
More Examples
Clocks
Select …
DISPLAY screen icon
[1. CLOCKS]
SET TIME AND DATE

Select [1. TIME]
Use the keypad to enter date.
Press ENTER to continue.
Use the keypad to enter time.
Select AM / PM / 24hr.
RESET JOB CLOCK

(Owner password required if Job Clock is locked.)
Select [2. JOB CLOCK]

Press [4] to cycle between lock and unlock.
Press [9] to reset.
SET ALARM
Select [3. ALARM CLOCK]
Select alarm 1, 2 or 3.
Press [1] to cycle between ON and OFF.
Press [2] and use the keypad to enter alarm time.
Select AM / PM / 24hr.
Press [3] to cycle between ONCE, DAILY and
WEEKLY.
Selecting WEEKLY will prompt for a day selection
using number [4].
Vitals (Monitor the engine, hydraulic / hydrostatic,

electrical functions when engine is running.)
Select …
VITALS screen icon
Press [6] to cycle between METRIC or ENGLISH (M /
E) readouts.
You can monitor real-time readouts of:

Engine Speed
Engine Oil Pressure
Engine Coolant Temperature
System Voltage
Hydraulic Charge Pressure
Hydraulic Oil Temperature

PASSWORD SETUP (DELUXE INSTRUMENTATION Changing The Owner Password
PANEL)
Figure 60-190-1
Password Setup is available on machines with a Deluxe
Press a scroll button (Item
Instrumentation Panel. 1) repeatedly until the
Security screen icon
Password Description (Inset) is highlighted.
All new machines with a Deluxe Instrumentation Panel

arrive at Bobcat dealerships with the keypad in locked
1 1
mode. This means that a password must be used to start
the engine. Enter owner password and
press [ENTER].
For security purposes, your dealer may change the
password and also set it in the locked mode. Your dealer
will provide you with the password.
Master Password:
Select [1. USER
A permanent, randomly selected password set at the SETTINGS].
factory which cannot be changed. This password is
used for service by the Bobcat dealer if the owner
password is not known; or to change the owner
password.

Owner Password:
Select [1. OWNER].
Allows for full use of the loader and to setup the
Deluxe Instrumentation Panel. There is only one
owner password. It must be used to change the owner
or user passwords. Owner should change the
password as soon as possible for security of the
loader.
Select [2. CHANGE
User Password: PASSWORD].
Allows starting and operating the loader; cannot

change password or any of the other setup features.
For the procedures to change passwords (See Changing

The Owner Password on Page 60-190-1.) and (See
Enter new owner
Changing The User Passwords on Page 60-190-2.) password and press
[ENTER].
You will be prompted to

reenter the new owner
password.
Press [ENTER].
P-90399/NA3025/NA3016/NA3031/NA3033/NA3028/NA3015/NA3027

PASSWORD SETUP (DELUXE INSTRUMENTATION Password Lockout Feature
PANEL) (CONT’D)
Changing The User Passwords This feature allows the owner to unlock the password
feature so that a password does not need to be used
Figure 60-190-2 every time the engine is started.
Press a scroll button (Item
1) repeatedly until the Figure 60-190-3
Security screen icon
(Inset) is highlighted. Press a scroll button
(Item 1) repeatedly until
the Security screen icon
(Inset) is highlighted.
1 1
Enter owner password and
press [ENTER].
1 1
Enter owner password
and press [ENTER].
Select [1. USER

SETTINGS].
Select [2. MACHINE

LOCK].
Select user.
P-90399 / NA3025 / NA3016 / NA3031
NOTE: The procedure above can be followed to reset

Select [2. CHANGE the machine lock so that the machine requires
PASSWORD].
a password to start the engine.
Enter new user password

and press [ENTER].
Press [ENTER].
P-90399/NA3025/NA3016/NA3031/NA3033/NA3026/NA3010/NA3027

PASSWORD SETUP (KEYLESS START PANEL) Password Lockout Feature
Password Description This feature allows the owner to unlock the password
feature so that a password does not need to be used
Master Password: every time the engine is started.
A permanent, randomly selected password set at the Press the RUN button to turn on the loaders electrical
factory which cannot be changed. This password is system.
used for service by the Bobcat dealer if the owner
password is not known; or to change the owner Enter the five digit owner password using the number
password. keys (1 through 0).
Owner Password: Figure 60-191-2
Allows for full use of the loader. It must be used to

change the owner password.
Changing The Owner Password
Press the RUN button to turn on the loaders electrical

system.
Enter the five digit owner password using the number

keys (1 through 0) if locked.

1 2
Figure 60-191-1
P-90805
Press the unlock key (Item 2) [Figure 60-191-2].
The left panel display screen will show [CODE].

keys (1 through 0). The unlock key green light will flash,
then become solid.
1 2
The loader can now be started without using a password.
P-90805 NOTE: Use the following procedure to reset the

machine lock so that the loader requires a
password to start the engine.
Press and hold the lock (Item 1) and unlock (Item 2)
[Figure 60-191-1] keys for 2 seconds. Press the RUN button to turn on the loaders electrical
system.
The lock key red light will flash and the left panel display
screen will show [ENTER]. Press the lock key (Item 1) [Figure 60-191-2].
Enter a new five digit password using the number keys (1 The lock key red light will flash and the left panel display
through 0). An asterisk will show in the left panel display screen will show [CODE].
screen for each key press.
The left panel display screen will show [AGAIN]. keys (1 through 0). The unlock key green light will flash,
then the lock key red light will become solid.
Enter the new five digit password again.
You must now enter the password every time to start the
The lock key red light will become solid. loader.


MAINTENANCE CLOCK Figure 60-200-3
Description
The Maintenance Clock alerts the operator when the next

service interval is due. EXAMPLE: The Maintenance
Clock can be set to a 500 hour interval as a reminder for
the next 500 hour planned maintenance.
Figure 60-200-1
1
2
1 NA3040
The Deluxe Instrumentation Panel, if equipped, will

3 display a bar (Item 1) [Figure 60-200-3] showing time
remaining until next service. This bar will turn red when
service is past due. NEXT MAINTENANCE DUE will
P-76461R
change to MAINTENANCE PAST DUE and display the
number of hours past due.
During machine operation, a two beep alarm will sound
when there are less than 10 hours until the next planned Keys [4] and [9] can be used to adjust the service
maintenance. interval when the owner is logged in [Figure 60-200-3].

The remaining hours before maintenance is required will NOTE: Loaders equipped with a Standard Key Panel
appear in the data display (Item 1) for 5 seconds while or Keyless Start Panel will not display the
the service icon (Item 3) and hourmeter icon (Item 2) BobCARE PMSM message or NEXT
[Figure 60-200-1] flash. MAINTENANCE TYPE on the right panel.
NOTE: The display will show negative numbers after

counting down to zero.
The display will then revert back to the previous display

and will appear for 5 seconds every time the machine is
started until the maintenance clock is reset.
Figure 60-200-2
NA3034
The Deluxe Instrumentation Panel, if equipped, will

display a message (Item 1) [Figure 60-200-2] alerting
the operator to service the machine.
This message will remain for 10 seconds and will appear
for 10 seconds every time the machine is started until the
maintenance clock is reset.

MAINTENANCE CLOCK (CONT’D) Figure 60-200-6
Setup
Figure 60-200-4
P-76110
P-64243A
Select Install (Item 1) [Figure 60-200-6] to begin sending

The first analyzer screen has an added bar for the the dealer information to the controller.
Maintenance Clock. The clock will remain OFF until
activated. Click Continue (Item 1) [Figure 60-200-4] to Figure 60-200-7
view the next analyzer screen.

Figure 60-200-5
1
1
P-76113
3 Click SEND TO MACHINE (Item 1) [Figure 60-200-7] to

P-76110
send the dealer information to the machine controller.
Click Options (Item 1) and add your dealer name and NOTE: Verify that all correct option and kits are
phone number (Item 2). Click Save Options (Item 3) selected before clicking SEND TO MACHINE.
[Figure 60-200-5] the information is now stored.

Setup (Cont’d)
Figure 60-200-8
P-76112
1
Click the right arrow (Item 1) [Figure 60-200-10] to scroll
P-76114 through the tabs.
Figure 60-200-11
A green COMPLETE (Item 1) [Figure 60-200-8]

message will be displayed when the dealer information
has been transferred to the machine controller. 1
Click Back (Item 2) [Figure 60-200-8] to return to the

Bobcat Service Analyzer screen.
3
Figure 60-200-9 4 2
P-76111
Click the Maintenance tab (Item 1) [Figure 60-200-11] to

view the maintenance clock screen.
Click ON / OFF (Item 2) to turn the maintenance clock on

or off [Figure 60-200-11].
P-76110
The default Interval (Item 3) is 250 hours, it can also be
changed by placing the cursor in the box and typing the
Select Warnings (Item 1) [Figure 60-200-9]. new interval. Click SET / RESET (Item 4) [Figure 60-
200-11] to reset and set the maintenance clock.

Setup (Cont’d)
Figure 60-200-12
1
2
P-76110
Select Program / Update (Item 1) [Figure 60-200-14] to

P-76111 view the maintenance clock.
Figure 60-200-15
The current maintenance clock Length (Interval) and

Time Reset will be displayed (Item 1). This screen will 1
also store the most recent 20 entries of history. Once an
entry is added, it cannot be changed. If an entry is made
and the interval is not correct, make another entry and
click SET / RESET (Item 2) [Figure 60-200-12].
NOTE: If the interval is set to 10 hours or less, the

maintenance clock will reset and log a reset
time but the wrench icon, hour interval and
service icon will NOT be removed from the left
display screen.
P-64244A
Figure 60-200-13
After the maintenance clock has been activated, the first

analyzer screen shows the hours remaining on current
maintenance interval (Item 1) [Figure 60-200-15]. If past
1 the interval, the number will reflect negative hours.
P-76111
Select Back (Item 1) [Figure 60-200-13] to return to the

main menu.

MAINTENANCE CLOCK (CONT’D)
Reset
Figure 60-200-16
P-76455H
Press the information button (Item 2) until the display

screen (Item 1) [Figure 60-200-16] shows the
maintenance clock.
Press and hold the information button (Item 2) for 7

seconds until [RESET] (Inset) appears in the display
screen (Item 1) [Figure 60-200-16].


BACK-UP ALARM SYSTEM Inspecting
The back-up alarm will sound when the operator moves

both steering levers or joystick(s) into the reverse
position. Slight movement of the steering levers into the
reverse position is required with hydrostatic
transmissions, before the back-up alarm will sound.
P-90644
Inspect for damaged or missing back-up alarm decal

(Item 1) [Figure 60-210-1]. Replace if required.
Sit in the seat and fasten the seat belt. Engage the
parking brake. Pull the seat bar all the way down. Start
the engine. Press the PRESS TO OPERATE LOADER

button. Disengage the parking brake.
Move both steering levers or joystick(s) into the reverse

position. The back-up alarm must sound when all wheels
or both tracks are moving in reverse.
The back-up alarm is located on the inside of the rear

door.
Figure 60-210-2
2
P100048
Inspect the back-up alarm electrical connections (Item 1)

[Figure 60-210-2], wire harness (Item 2) [Figure 60-210-
2] and back-up alarm switches (if equipped) (Item 1)
[Figure 60-210-3] for tightness and damage. Repair or
replace any damaged components.
If the back-up alarm switches require adjustment, (See

Adjusting Switch Position on Page 60-210-2.)

BACK-UP ALARM SYSTEM (CONT’D) Figure 60-210-4
Adjusting Switch Position

1
NOTE: Joystick equipped machines do not have
back-up alarm switches and cannot be
adjusted. See your Bobcat dealer for service if
your back-up alarm does not sound. 2
Standard Controls And ACS (If Equipped) 3
Stop the engine and raise the operator cab. (See Raising
on Page 10-30-2.)
Place the steering levers in the neutral position.

P-85723A
Figure 60-210-3
Loosen the screws (Item 3) [Figure 60-210-4] securing

1
the back-up alarm switch. (Left side shown)
Position the back-up alarm switch so that the roller (Item

1) just makes contact with the bellcrank (Item 2) [Figure
60-210-4] without compressing the switch spring.

Torque the screws (Item 3) [Figure 60-210-4] securing
the switch to the bracket to 1,6 - 2,1 N•m (14 - 19 in-lb).
Repeat adjustment procedure for the other switch.

P-85722 3.)
Inspect back-up alarm system for proper function. (See

The back-up alarm switches (Item 1) [Figure 60-210-3] Inspecting on Page 60-210-1.)
are located alongside the steering bellcranks. Both
switches must be adjusted properly for the back-up alarm
to operate correctly.

BACK-UP ALARM SYSTEM (CONT’D)
Troubleshooting (Standard And ACS) WARNING

W-2003-0807
PROBLEM CAUSE
Back-up alarm will not sound when the operator moves both steering levers into the 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
reverse position.
Back-up alarm sounds when steering levers in neutral / forward position. 2, 6, 7

2. The back-up alarm switches are damaged.
3. The alarm is damaged.
4. The back-up alarm or switch wires are disconnected.
5. Check the fuses.
6. The wiring is damaged.
7. The back-up alarm switches need adjusting.

BACK-UP ALARM SYSTEM (CONT’D)
Troubleshooting (Joystick) WARNING

W-2003-0807
PROBLEM CAUSE
Back-up alarm will not sound when the operator moves joystick(s) into the reverse 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
position.
Back-up alarm sounds when joystick(s) in neutral / forward position. 5, 6

2. The alarm is damaged.
3. The alarm wires are disconnected.
4. Check the fuses.
5. The wiring is damaged.
6. The joystick controller is not working correctly.

BACK-UP ALARM SYSTEM (CONT’D) Switch Removal And Installation
Alarm Removal And Installation NOTE: Joystick equipped machines do not have
back-up alarm switches.
Standard Controls and ACS (If Equipped)
Figure 60-210-5
Stop the engine and raise the operator cab. (See Raising
on Page 10-30-2.)
2 Figure 60-210-6
P-85280
1
Disconnect the alarm connector (Item 1) [Figure 60-210-

5] from the alarm.
P-85723A
Remove the two nuts (Item 2) [Figure 60-210-5].
Remove the alarm and bracket from the loader. Place the steering levers in the neutral position.
Loosen the screws (Item 1) securing the back-up alarm

switches. Slide the switch (Item 2) [Figure 60-210-6] off
the mounting bracket.
Mark the wires for ease of assembly and disconnect

them from the switch.
Installation: Slide the alarm switches onto the mounting

bracket so the threaded plates are under the mounting
bracket. The rollers will face to the inside. During
installation of switches, adjust the switches (See
Adjusting Switch Position on Page 60-210-2.) and
inspect back-up alarm operation (See Inspecting on
Page 60-210-1.) are required.


FRONT HORN Figure 60-220-3
NOTE: Two different style horns are used.
Remove the left side lower panel. (See Removal And

Figure 60-220-1
1
1
1
P-90886
1

2 3].
2
3
Remove the front horn from the bracket.
P-90885 P-90901

Figure 60-220-2
2
3
1 3
P-90903 P-90902
Disconnect wire harness (Item 1) [Figure 60-220-1] and

[Figure 60-220-2] from the front horn.

1] and [Figure 60-220-2].
Remove the front horn and bracket from the loader (Item
3) [Figure 60-220-2].


ENGINE SERVICE
ENGINE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-10-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-10-1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-10-2
Torque Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-10-5
Engine Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-10-7
Engine Mount Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-10-14
Compression - Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-10-15
ENGINE SPEED CONTROL (SCPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-20-1

Cable Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-20-2
ENGINE SPEED CONTROL (SJC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-21-1

MUFFLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-30-1

AIR CLEANER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-40-1

Housing Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-40-1
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-50-1

Radiator Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-50-1
Hydraulic Fan Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-50-4
Hydraulic Fan Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-50-5
Lower Fan Duct Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-50-6
Blower Housing Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-50-6
Hydraulic Fan Motor Assembly Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-50-7
Fan Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-50-7
Hydraulic Fan Motor Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-50-8
Water Pump Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-50-9
Water Pump Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-50-9
Thermostat Housing Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-50-10
Thermostat - Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-50-10
LUBRICATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-60-1

Oil Pan Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-60-1
Oil Pump Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-60-2
Oil Pump Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-60-2
Oil Filter Cooler Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-60-4
Engine Oil Pressure - Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-60-5

FUEL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-70-1
Fuel Shutoff Solenoid - Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-70-1
Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-70-1
Fuel Injection Pump Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-70-2
Fuel Injection Pump Assembly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-70-6
Governor Housing Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-70-8
Governor Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-70-10
Fuel Camshaft Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-70-12
Fuel Injection Pump Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-70-14
Injection Pump - Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-70-20
Fuel Injector Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-70-24
Fuel Injector Nozzle Pressure - Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-70-25
Nozzle Spraying Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-70-26
Valve Seat Tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-70-26
CYLINDER HEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-1

Intake Air Heater - Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-1
Intake Air Heater Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-1
Valve Clearance Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-2
Valve Timing - Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-4
Cylinder Head Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-5

Cylinder Head Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-7
Cylinder Head - Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-8
Cylinder Head Top Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-8
Valve Guide - Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-9
Reconditioning The Valve And Valve Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70-80-11
Valve Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-13
Valve Tappets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-14
Rocker Arm And Shaft - Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-15
Push Rod Alignment - Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-15
CRANKSHAFT AND PISTONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-90-1

Piston And Connecting Rod Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-90-1
Piston And Connecting Rod - Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-90-3
Cylinder Bore - Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-90-7
Connecting Rod Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-90-8
Crankshaft Gear Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-90-8
Crankshaft And Bearings Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-90-9
Crankshaft And Bearings Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70-90-11
Crankshaft And Bearings - Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-90-13
CAMSHAFT AND TIMING GEARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-100-1

Timing Gearcase Cover Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-100-1
Timing Gears Backlash - Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-100-2
Idler Gear And Camshaft Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-100-2
Camshaft - Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-100-3
Idler Gear And Shaft - Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-100-5

TURBOCHARGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70-110-1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70-110-1
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70-110-1
FLYWHEEL AND HOUSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-120-1

Flywheel Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-120-1
Ring Gear Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-120-1
Housing Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-120-2
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-130-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-130-1
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-130-2


ENGINE INFORMATION
Description
The T750 has a Kubota direct injected V3800-DI-T turbo

diesel engine with a displacement of 3,8 L (230 in ). The
engine is rated at an SAE Gross 63,4kW (85.0 hp) and
has an open crankcase ventilation system [Figure 70-10-
1].
The engine has 4 cylinders and the rotation is counter-

clockwise (viewed from the flywheel side). It is equipped
with an air intake heater and mechanical timer with cold
start advance function for assisting in cold starts. Engine
block heaters are also available from Bobcat Parts.
To meet emission regulations it is also equipped with an

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system to reduce
Nitrogen Oxide (NOx).
The engine serial number is stamped on the engine and

is located near the injection pump. The model number is
located on the valve cover. Use these numbers to obtain
the correct service parts.

The engine is liquid cooled with a propylene glycol /
water mixture in a radiator. Coolant flow is controlled by a
thermostat. The cooling fan is driven by a hydraulic
motor. The speed of the fan is determined by the engine
coolant temperature sensor and the hydraulic /
hydrostatic fluid temperature sensor.
Figure 70-10-1
P100153

ENGINE INFORMATION (CONT’D)
Specifications
All dimensions are given in millimeters. Respective imperial dimensions are given in inches enclosed by
parentheses.
Valve Springs
Free Length (Intake and Exhaust) 35,1 - 35,6 (1.39 - 1.40)
Allowable Limit 34,6 (1.36)
Fitted Length (Intake and Exhaust) 31,5 (1.24)
Setting Load / Setting Length (Intake and Exhaust) 63,5 N/31,5mm (14.3 lb./1.24in)
Allowable Limit 45,9 N/31,5mm (10.3 lb./1.24in)
Tilt Allowable Limit (Intake and Exhaust) 1,0 (0.039)
Valve Timing
Intake Valve (Open) 14 degrees B.T.D.C.
(Close) 36 degrees A.B.D.C.
Exhaust Valve (Open) 45 degrees B.B.D.C.
(Close) 17 degrees A.T.D.C.
Rocker Arms

O.D. of Rocker Arm Shaft 15,973 - 15,984 (0.62886 - 0.62929)
I.D. of Rocker Arm Bushings 16,000 - 16,018 (0.62993 - 0.63062)
Oil Clearance Between Rocker Arm & Bushing 0,016 - 0,045 (0.00063 - 0.0017)
Camshaft
Journal O.D. 45,934 - 45,950 (1.8085 - 1.8090)
Bearing I.D. 46,0 - 46,025 (1.8111 - 1.8120)
Oil Clearance 0,050 - 0,091 (0.002 - 0.0035)
Alignment Allowable Limit 0,01 (0.0004)
Cam Lobe Height (Intake) 37,63 (1.481)
Allowable Limit (Intake) 37,13 (1.462)
Cam Lobe Height (Exhaust) 38,96 (1.534)
Allowable Limit (Exhaust) 38,46 (1.514)
Side Clearance Allowable Limit 0,30 (0.012)
Tappet
Oil Clearance Between Tappet & Guide 0,020 - 0,062 (0.0079 - 0.0024)
Tappet O.D. 23,959 -23,980 (0.94321 - 0.94409)
Tappet Guide I.D. 24,000 - 24,021 (0.94489 - 0.94570)

Specifications (Cont’d)
parentheses.
Cylinder Bore
Cylinder Bore I.D. 100,000 - 100,022 (3.93701 - 3.93787)

Oversized Cylinder Bore I.D. 100,500 - 100,522 (3.95670 - 3.95755)
Piston Rings
Ring Gap (Top Ring) 0,30 - 0,45 (0.012 - 0.017)
Ring Gap (2nd Ring) 0,30 - 0,45 (0.012 - 0.017)
Ring Gap (Oil Ring) 0,25 - 0,45 (0.0099 - 0.017)
Side Clearance of Ring Groove:

Top Ring 0,05 - 0,09 (0.002 - 0.003)
Second Ring 0,0930 - 0,120 (0.00367 - 0.00472)
Oil Ring 0,020 - 0,060 (0.00079 - 0.0023)
Pistons
Piston Pin Bore 30,000 - 30,013 (1.1811 - 1.1816)
Connecting Rod
Piston Pin O.D. 30,006 - 30,011 (1.1814- 1.1815)
Small End Bushing I.D. 1.1824 - 1.1829 (30,031 - 30,046)
Oil Clearance Between Piston Pin & Small End Bushing 0,020 - 0,040 (0.00079 - 0.0015)
Connecting Rod Alignment Allowable Limit 0,05 (0.002)
Oil Pump
Oil Pressure Rated RPM 200,0 - 386,1 kPa (1,9 - 3,9 bar) (29 - 56 psi)
Allowable Limit 144,8 kPa (1,4 bar) (21 psi)
Idle Speed Allowable Limit 48,3 kPa (0,48 bar) (7 psi)
Clearance Between Inner Rotor & Outer Rotor 0,040 - 0,16 (0.0016 - 0.0062)
Clearance Between Outer Rotor & Pump Body 0,100 - 0,184 (0.00394 - 0.00724)
End Clearance Between Inner Rotor & Cover 0,025 - 0,075 (0.00099 - 0.0029)

Specifications (Cont’d)
parentheses.
Crankshaft
Crankshaft Alignment Limit Permitted 0,02 (0.0008)

Oil Clearance Between Journal & Bearing 0,00071 - 0,0024 (0.018 - 0.062)
Limit Permitted 0,020 (0.0079)
Journal O.D. 74,977 - 74,990 (2.9519 - 2.9523)
Oil Clearance Between Crank Pin & Bearing 0,018 - 0,051 (0.00071 - 0.0020)
Crank Pin O.D. 52,977 - 52,990 (2.0857 - 2.0862)
Crank Pin I.D. (Blue) 56,010 - 56,020 (2.2052 - 2.2055)
Crank Pin I.D. (No Color) 56,000 - 56,010 (2.2048 - 2.2051)
Crankshaft Side Clearance 0,018 - 0,051 (0.00071 - 0.0020)
Timing Gear

Timing Gear Backlash:
Crank Gear - Idle Gear 0,0490 - 0,193 (0.00193 - 0.00759)
Idle Gear - Cam Gear 0,0490 - 0,189 (0.00193 - 0.0074)
Idle Gear - Injection Pump Gear 0,0300 - 0,165 (0.00119 - 0.00649)
Oil Clearance Between Idle Gear Shaft & Idle Gear Bushing: 0,050 - 0,091 (0.0020 - 0.0035)
Idle Gear Bushing I.D. 45,025 - 45,050 (1.7727 - 1.7736)
Idle Gear Shaft O.D. 44,959 - 44,975 (1.7701 - 1.7706)
Idle Gear Side Clearance 0,15 - 0,30 (0.0059 - 0.011)
Thermostat
Valve Opening Temperature 74,5 - 78,5°C (166.1 - 173°F)
Valve Fully Open 90°C (194°F)

parentheses.
Torque Values
Thread Size Material

(Dia. x Pitch)
Head Mark 4 Head Mark 7 Head Mark 10
M5 x 0.8 4 - 5 N•m
(3 - 4 ft-lb)
M6 x 1.0 8 - 9 N•m 8 - 12 N•m
(6 - 7 ft-lb) (6 - 9 ft-lb)
M8 x 1.25 8 - 12 N•m 15 - 22 N•m 24 - 34 N•m
(6 - 9 ft-lb) (11 - 16 ft-lb) (18 - 25 ft-lb)
M10 x 1.25 18 - 24 N•m 30 - 41 N•m 49 - 68 N•m
(13 - 18 ft-lb) (22 - 30 ft-lb) (36 - 50 ft-lb)
M12 x 1.25 30 - 41 N•m 54 - 73 N•m 94 - 118 N•m
(22 - 30 ft-lb) (40 - 54 ft-lb) (69 - 87 ft-lb)
M14 x 1.5 49 - 68 N•m 79 - 108 N•m 157 - 186 N•m

(36 - 50 ft-lb) (58 - 80 ft-lb) (116 - 137 ft-lb)
Troubleshooting
The following troubleshooting chart is provided for assistance in locating and correcting problems which are most
common. Many of the recommended procedures must be done by authorized Bobcat Service Personnel only.
PROBLEM CAUSE
Slow cranking speed. 1, 2, 3, 54
Engine will not start. 2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 19, 27, 28, 29
Difficult to start. 1, 2, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 27, 28, 29,54
No power for engine. 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23, 27, 28, 29
Engine is misfiring. 8, 9, 11, 12, 13, 15, 16, 17, 21, 22, 24, 25, 26, 28
Too much fuel consumption. 10, 12, 13, 15, 16, 17, 19, 20, 21, 23, 24, 25, 27, 28, 29
Black exhaust. 10, 12, 13, 15, 16, 17, 19, 20, 21, 23, 24, 25, 27, 28, 29
Blue / white exhaust. 4, 10, 15, 16, 17, 21, 23, 27, 29, 30, 50
Low oil pressure. 4, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 52
Engine knocking. 13, 15, 16, 19, 22, 24, 25, 27, 29, 31, 40, 41, 53
Engine running rough. 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 17, 18, 22, 24, 25, 26, 29, 40, 53
Vibration. 12, 13, 17, 21, 22, 25, 26, 29, 40, 42, 43
High oil pressure warning. 4, 33, 36
Overheating. 10, 12, 13, 15, 16, 20, 21, 40, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 51
Too much crankcase pressure. 22, 27, 29, 30, 40, 49
Poor compression. 10, 16, 21, 24, 25, 27, 28, 29, 30, 41, 53
Start and stop. 9, 10, 11

Troubleshooting (Cont’d)

1. Alternator belt is loose or damaged. 28. Worn valve and seats.
2. Bad electrical connections. 29. Broken or worn piston rings.
3. Faulty starter motor. 30. Worn valve stems or guides.
4. Incorrect grade of oil. 31. Worn or damaged bearings.
5. Low cranking speed. 32. Not enough oil in the crankcase.
6. Fuel tank empty. 33. Switch / sensor is defective.
7. Faulty stop control operation. 34. Oil pump worn.
8. Plugged fuel line. 35. Relief valve is sticking open.
9. Plugged fuel filter. 36. Relief valve is sticking closed.
10. Restriction in the air cleaner. 37. Broken relief valve spring.
11. Air in the fuel system. 38. Faulty suction pipe.
12. Faulty fuel injection pump. 39. Plugged oil filter.
13. Faulty fuel injectors. 40. Piston seizure.
14. Broken injection pump drive. 41. Incorrect piston height.
15. Incorrect injection pump timing. 42. Faulty engine mounting.
16. Incorrect valve timing. 43. Incorrect flywheel alignment.

17. Poor compression. 44. Faulty thermostat.
18. Plugged fuel tank vent. 45. Restriction in water jacket.
19. Incorrect grade of fuel. 46. Loose alternator belt.
20. Exhaust pipe restriction. 47. Plugged radiator.
21. Cylinder head gasket leaking. 48. Faulty water pump.
22. Overheating. 49. Plugged breather pipe.
23. Cold running. 50. Damaged valve stem deflectors.
24. Incorrect tappet adjustment. 51. Coolant level to low.
25. Sticking valves. 52. Plugged oil pump pipe strainer.
26. Incorrect fuel lines. 53. Broken valve spring.
27. Worn cylinder bores. 54. Damaged Battery

ENGINE INFORMATION (CONT’D) Remove the muffler. (See Removal And Installation on
Page 70-30-1.)
Engine Removal And Installation
Figure 70-10-2
DANGER
2 1
P-90328
AVOID DEATH
• Disconnecting or loosening any hydraulic P100305

can cause lift arms to drop. (SJC Controls Equipped)
unless supported by an approved lift arm Loosen the engine speed control cable adjustment nuts

(Item 1) and remove the engine speed control cable from
D-1009-0409 the ball pivot (Item 2). [Figure 70-10-2].
Figure 70-10-3
WARNING
W-2059-0598
2 1
Put jackstands under the rear corners of the loader.
device. (See Installing on Page 10-20-1.) P100304

(Manual Controls Equipped)
Replacing Hydraulic Fluid on Page 10-120-2.) Loosen the engine speed control cable adjustment nuts
(Item 1) and remove the engine speed control cable from
Remove the battery from the loader. (See Removal And the ball pivot (Item 2) [Figure 70-10-3].
Drain the engine coolant from the cooling system. (See

Removing And Replacing Coolant on Page 10-90-4.)
NOTE: If compressor is being removed for engine

removal it is not necessary to remove the A/C
hoses. Remove the mounting bolts and belt
and reposition the compressor.

ENGINE INFORMATION (CONT’D) Figure 70-10-6
Engine Removal And Installation (Cont'd)
Figure 70-10-4
1
5 4
1
2
3
2
P100312
Disconnect fuel shut-off solenoid connector (Item 1)

P100307 [Figure 70-10-6].
Remove the bolts for the wiring harness hold down

Disconnect engine ground cable (Item I) and chassis clamps (Item 2) [Figure 70-10-6].
ground cable (Item 2) [Figure 70-10-4].

Disconnect the engine starter positive cable (Item 3) Figure 70-10-7
[Figure 70-10-4].
Disconnect the starter wiring harness connector (Item 1

4)[Figure 70-10-4].
Disconnect flywheel rpm sensor (Item 5) [Figure 70-10-

4].
Figure 70-10-5
P100311
2
Disconnect fuel line (Item 1) [Figure 70-10-7] for lift
pump and plug.
2 3
Throttle cable bracket removed for photo clarity.
P100309
Disconnect engine oil pressure sender connector (Item 1)

[Figure 70-10-5].
Disconnect the alternator wiring (Item 2) [Figure 70-10-

5].
Disconnect the engine ground cable (Item 3) [Figure 70-

10-5].


2
Figure 70-10-8
P100323
Remove the two bolts (Item 1), coolant tube assembly

P100310 (Item 2) and hose (Item 3) [Figure 70-10-10].
Figure 70-10-11
Disconnect and plug fuel return line (Item 1) [Figure 70-
10-8].

Figure 70-10-9 1
P100314
Disconnect coolant return line (Item 1) [Figure 70-10-11].

P100313
Disconnect radiator hose (Item 2) [Figure 70-10-11] from
the thermostat housing.
Disconnect radiator hose (Item 1) [Figure 70-10-9].

Engine Removal And Installation (Cont'd) 1

2
Figure 70-10-12
2
1 1
P100319
2
Mark and disconnect the drive motor hoses (Item 1)

P100315 [Figure 70-10-14].
Disconnect the tandem pump case drain hose (Item 2)

Disconnect coolant temperature connector (Item 1) [Figure 70-10-14].
[Figure 70-10-12] from thermostat housing.

Disconnect Heater hoses (Item 2) [Figure 70-10-12] (If
equipped). NOTE: The hydraulic fittings (Item 1) [Figure 70-10-
17] on the hydrostatic pump must be
Figure 70-10-13 tightened to 128 - 138 N•m (94 - 102 ft-lb)
torque.
Figure 70-10-15
2
1 1
1
P100729
Remove and cap fan inlet hose (Item 1) [Figure 70-10-

P-85907
13].
Remove and cap fan outlet hose (Item 2) [Figure 70-10- Disconnect tandem pump suction hoses (Item 1) [Figure
13]. 70-10-15].
Disconnect the charge pump inlet hose (Item 2) [Figure

70-10-15].

Figure 70-10-16
1 P100321
Remove the mounting bolt (Item 1) [Figure 70-10-18]

P-85908 from the left engine mount.
Installation: Tighten the mounting bolt (Item 1) [Figure

Disconnect hydraulic control valve inlet hose (Item 1) 70-10-18] to 122 - 135 N•m (90 - 100 ft-lb) torque.
[Figure 70-10-16].

Figure 70-10-19
Figure 70-10-17
P100322
P100320 Remove the mounting bolt (Item 1) [Figure 70-10-19]

from the right engine mount.
Remove rear engine mounting bolt (Item 1) [Figure 70- Installation: Tighten the mounting bolt to 122 - 135 N•m
10-17]. (90 - 100 ft-lb) torque.
Installation: Tighten the mounting bolt to 122 - 135 N•m



1
Figure 70-10-20
P100302
Install the engine removal attachments (MEL1653-2)

(Item 1) and (MEL1686) (Item 2) [Figure 70-10-22] on
the engine.
Figure 70-10-23

1
P-76872
Use the engine removal tool (MEL 1653-1) [Figure 70-

10-20] and the attachments (MEL 1653-2), (MEL1686)
P100303
[Figure 70-10-22] and (MEL1711) [Figure 70-10-21] to
aid in the removal and installation of the engine.
Install the engine removal attachment (MEL1686) (Item
Figure 70-10-21 1) [Figure 70-10-23] on the right hand side of the engine
in place of the coolant tube assembly.
Tighten all the bolts and nuts that hold the engine
removal attachment onto the engine.
P100332

Figure 70-10-24
1 3
2
P100300
Install the engine removal attachment (Item 1) on the left

hand muffler support bracket (Item 2), exhaust manifold

(Item 3) and engine removal bracket (Item 4) [Figure 70-
10-24].
Installation: Use 9,525 x 38,1 mm (0.375 x 1.5 in) bolts

and nuts grade 5 minimum.
Figure 70-10-25
P100324
Install the engine removal tool (Item 1) into the

attachment (Item 2) and insert the pin (Item 3) [Figure
70-10-25].
Install the chain hoist on the eyelet [Figure 70-10-25] of

the removal tool.
Remove the engine / hydrostatic pump assembly from

the loader.

Engine Mount Replacement Washer

Engine
Figure 70-10-26 Mounting
Bracket
7 Engine
1
Mount
2
Snubbing Spacer
3 Washer
4
Loader
Frame P-90300
8
5
Install the new engine mount as shown in the cut away
P-85989 side view [Figure 70-10-28].
Tighten the mounting bolts to 122 - 135 N•m (90 - 100 ft-
Use the following procedure to install new rear engine lb) torque.
mount:

Figure 70-10-28
Remove the existing mount from the engine. Refer to
engine removal and installation for engine mount 1
locations. 4
Replace all three engine mounts one rear and two sides.
5 2
Use the parts shown to install the new engine mounts
[Figure 70-10-26]: 6 3
Hex Nut - (Item 1) 7
Washer - (Item 2)
Cup Washer - (Item 3)

P-85990A
Engine Mount - (Item 4)
Tube Spacer - (Item 5) Use the parts shown to install the new side engine
mounts [Figure 70-10-26].
Mounting Bolt - (Item 1)
Mounting Bolt - (Item 8)
Tube Spacer - (Item 4)
Retaining Nut - (Item 7)

Engine Mount Replacement (Cont’d)

1
Figure 70-10-29
Washer
Engine
Mounting
Bracket
Engine
Mount
Snubbing P100685
Washer
Spacer
Loader Figure 70-10-32
Frame P-85987
Install the new engine mount as shown in the cut away 1

side view [Figure 70-10-28].

Tighten the mounting bolts to 122 - 135 N•m (90 - 100 ft-
lb) torque. 2
Compression - Checking
Figure 70-10-30
1 P100352
Attach a push button starter switch (MEL1712) (Item 1)

[Figure 70-10-31] to the starter terminal S (Item 1) and
the positive battery cable (Item 2) [Figure 70-10-32].
Engage the starter 7 - 10 seconds until a maximum
compression reading is obtained.
Repeat this procedure multiple times per cylinder until a

average compression reading is recorded.
If the measurement is below the allowable limit, apply a

small amount of oil to the cylinder wall through the nozzle
P-37196 hole and measure the compression pressure again.
If the compression pressure increase after applying oil.

After warming up the engine, stop the engine and remove check the cylinder wall and piston rings.
the muffler, high pressure pipes, cylinder head cover,
overflow pipe, all nozzle holders and all nozzle gaskets. If the compression pressure is still less than the allowable
limit, check the top clearance, valve and cylinder head.
NOTE: Disconnect the fuel shutoff solenoid wiring NOTE: Check the compression pressure with the
harness. specified valve clearance.
Install a compression tester and nozzle adaptor Always use a fully charged battery for
(MEL1614) for diesel engines into the nozzle holder hole performing this test.
(Item 1) [Figure 70-10-30]. Variances in cylinder compression values
should be under 10%.

Compression - Checking (Cont’d)
Compres- Factory 3475 kPa / 250 rpm

sion pressure spec. (34,749 bar / 250 rpm)
(504 psi / 250 rpm)
Allowable 2558 kPa / 250 rpm
limit (25,579 bar / 250 rpm)
(371 psi / 250 rpm)
Tightening Nozzle holder 18 - 20 N•m

Torque clamp nut (13 - 15 ft-lb)
Overflow pipe 9,8 - 11,2 N•m
assembly retain- (7.24 - 8.31 ft-lb)
ing bolt
Cylinder head 6,9 - 11,2 N•m
cover bolt (5.1 - 8.31 ft-lb)
Injection pipe 23 - 36 N•m
retaining nut (17 - 26 ft-lb)

ENGINE SPEED CONTROL (SCPA) Disassembly And Assembly
Figure 70-20-1
1 2
P-85791
P-85789
Remove the nut (Item 1) and remove the two conical
washers (Item 2) [Figure 70-20-3].
1]. Remove the handle (Item 3) [Figure 70-20-3].

Figure 70-20-2 Installation: Install the two conical washers with the
concave surfaces facing each other (Item 2) [Figure 70-
20-3].
Installation: Tighten the nut (Item 1) [Figure 70-20-3]

until the speed control lever moves backward and
forward at a comfortable tension.
2 1
3
Figure 70-20-4
P-85790
The speed control cable (Item 1) is connected to the

speed control handle (Item 2) by a ball and socket end
[Figure 70-20-2].
Disconnect the speed control cable (Item 1) from the

speed control handle (Item 2) [Figure 70-20-2].
P-85792
Loosen the jam nut (Item 3) [Figure 70-20-2] from the

speed control cable. Inspect and replaced any damaged parts [Figure 70-20-
4].
Remove the cable from the speed control handle.

ENGINE SPEED CONTROL (SCPA) (CONT’D) Figure 70-20-7
Cable Removal And Installation

2
Remove the speed control lever. (See Removal And


3
Figure 70-20-5
P100304
1 The speed control cable is connected to the linkage by a

ball and socket end [Figure 70-20-7].
Loosen the jam nut (Item 1) [Figure 70-20-7] from the

speed control cable.

Disconnect the speed control cable (Item 2) from the
linkage (Item 3) by rolling the cable away from the engine
[Figure 70-20-7].
P100326
Remove the speed control cable.
Remove the tie strap (Item 1) [Figure 70-20-5].
Figure 70-20-6
P100325

clamps that secure the cable.

ENGINE SPEED CONTROL (SJC) Figure 70-21-3

1
Figure 70-21-1
2 1
1
P-90735
Remove the four bolts (Item 1) and washer (Item 2)

[Figure 70-21-3].
P-90733 Lay the assembly down.
Figure 70-21-4

Remove the two mounting nuts (Item 1) [Figure 70-21-1]
from the right side foot rest.
Remove the foot rest from the loader.

1
Figure 70-21-2
2
1 P100359
2
Loosen the engine speed control cable u-bolt nuts (Item
1) and remove the engine speed control cables from the
ball pivots (Item 2) [Figure 70-21-4].
P-90734
Remove panel assembly from the loader.
Loosen the clamping bolt (Item 1) and remove the engine

speed control foot pedal (Item 2) [Figure 70-21-2].
Installation: Install the engine speed foot pedal (Item 2)

but do not tighten the clamping bolt. Set the hand throttle
to high idle then place the foot pedal to high idle and
tighten the clamping bolt (Item 1) [Figure 70-21-2].

ENGINE SPEED CONTROL (SJC) (CONT'D) Figure 70-21-7

4
Figure 70-21-5
2 1
2
5
3
P100381
1
Remove the nuts (Item 1) and pivot bolts (Item 2) from
P100382 the engine speed control hand bracket assembly (Item 3)
[Figure 70-21-7].
Remove the spring (Item 1) from the engine speed Remove the engine speed control hand throttle cam lever
control foot pedal pivot assembly (Item 2) and the engine (Item 4) and engine throttle cable lever Item 5) [Figure

speed control hand throttle bracket (Item 3) [Figure 70- 70-21-7].
21-5]
Figure 70-21-8
Figure 70-21-6
P100380
P-90755
The pivot assemblies shown disassembled [Figure 70-

Remove the two bolts (Item 1) [Figure 70-21-6] from the 21-8].
engine speed control hand assembly.
NOTE: No lubrication is necessary or recommended
on the engine speed control.

ENGINE SPEED CONTROL (SJC) (CONT'D) Figure 70-21-11
Figure 70-21-9
P100375
The engine speed control foot pedal pivot assembly roller

P-90736 bearing [Figure 70-21-11] shown disassembled.
Remove the snap ring (Item 1) [Figure 70-21-9] from the

engine speed control foot pedal pivot.

Figure 70-21-10
P100376
The engine speed control foot pedal pivot assembly

shown disassembled, [Figure 70-21-10] replace worn
parts as needed.
NOTE: No lubrication is necessary or recommended

on the engine speed control.


MUFFLER
Open the rear door and remove the rear grille and side Figure 70-30-3
panels. (See Removal And Installation on Page 50-60-1.)
Figure 70-30-1
1 1
2
1 1
P100405
P100403
Remove the muffler mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure 70-
30-3] from the left side mounting bracket.

Remove the bolts (Item 1) from the engine cover (Item 2) Figure 70-30-4
[Figure 70-30-1] and remove engine cover.
Figure 70-30-2
1 1
1
1
P100406
P100404
Remove the muffler mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure 70-
30-4] from the exhaust manifold.
Remove the muffler mounting bolt (Item 1) [Figure 70- Remove the muffler from the loader.
30-2] from right side mounting bracket.
Reverse procedure for installation.


AIR CLEANER
Remove the rear grille from the loader. (See Removal

Figure 70-40-1
P100229

Remove the top two mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure 70-
40-1] from the air cleaner assembly.
Loosen the hose clamp (Item 2) and disconnect the hose

(Item 3) [Figure 70-40-1] from the air cleaner.
Disconnect the wire connector (Item 4) [Figure 70-40-1]

from the air cleaner sender.
Disconnect the scavenger hose (Item 5) [Figure 70-40-

1].
Remove the air cleaner from the loader.
Reverse procedure for installation.


ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM Figure 70-50-2
Radiator Removal And Installation
Remove the rear grille and side panels. (See Removal

1
Remove the oil cooler. (See Removal And Installation on

Page 20-90-1.)
WARNING
P100366
AVOID BURNS
Do not remove radiator cap when the engine is hot. Attach a hose to the coolant drain petcock (Item 1)
You can be seriously burned. [Figure 70-50-2] located to the left of the oil filter
W-2070-1203
assembly. Open the petcock and drain the coolant into a
container. Close the petcock and remove the hose.
Figure 70-50-1
Figure 70-50-3

1
P-90574
P100370
Loosen the radiator cap (Item 1) from the pressurized

expansion tank [Figure 70-50-3]. Disconnect and plug radiator air bleed hose (Item 1)
[Figure 70-50-3].

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM (CONT'D) Figure 70-50-6
Radiator Removal And Installation (Cont'd)
Figure 70-50-4
1
2 1
P100367
Disconnect the radiator hose (Item 1) and remove the

P100369 radiator hold down bolt (Item 2) [Figure 70-50-6].
Figure 70-50-7
Disconnect the pressurized expansion tank fill hose (Item
1) and radiator hold down bolt (Item 2) [Figure 70-50-2].

Figure 70-50-5
1
2
1
P100368P-
85952
Remove radiator hold down bolt (Item 1) [Figure 70-50-

P100365 7].
Disconnect the coolant air bleed hose (Item 1) and the

radiator hose (Item 2) [Figure 70-50-5].

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM (CONT'D)
Radiator Removal And Installation (Cont'd)
Figure 70-50-8
P-85954
Remove radiator hold down bolt (Item 1) [Figure 70-50-

8].

Remove the radiator (Item 2) [Figure 70-50-8].
Lift the radiator up and remove it from the loader.
NOTE: Coolant recovery tank removed for photo

clarity

Hydraulic Fan Description
The proportioning valve meters the flow through the fan

motor. The proportioning valve receives signals from the
controller which gathers information from both the engine
and hydraulic temperature sensors.
The hydraulic fan is used to cool the engine and

hydraulic / hydrostatic systems. The hydraulic fan
consists of a fan and hydraulic motor that is controlled by
a proportioning valve.
NOTE: The proportioning valve is factory set and can

not be adjusted accurately in the field due to
the adjustment being tamper proof.
The fan speed is determined by the engine coolant

temperature and the hydraulic fluid temperature.
Depending on these temperatures the fan speed (rpm)
can range from 0 - 4000 rpm.
The hydraulic fan speed at cold engine startup will range

from 0 to 500 rpm until the engine coolant and the
hydraulic fluid reach normal operating temperatures.
During normal operating temperatures the fan speed may

range from approximately 1900 - 3500 rpm.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM (CONT’D) Installation: Install coil mounting nut with the
counterbored space (Item 4) [Figure 70-50-10] facing
Hydraulic Fan Disassembly And Assembly towards the coil and tighten securely by hand.
Figure 70-50-9 Installation: Tighten coil valve stem (Item 3) [Figure 70-
50-10] to 28 - 34 N•m (21 - 25 ft-lb) torque.
Figure 70-50-11
4
1
3
1
P-76714A 2
NOTE: The mounting gasket (Item 1), proportioning

P-76637
valve, and proportioning valve O-rings, back

up washer and coil mounting nut (Item 2) are
available from Bobcat Parts. The fan motor Inspect and replace O-rings (Item 1) and back up washer
(Item 3) [Figure 70-50-9] must be replaced as (Item 2) [Figure 70-50-11] if necessary.
an assembly if damaged.
Figure 70-50-12
Remove the filter cover (Item 4) [Figure 70-50-9].
Installation: Tighten filter cover (Item 4) [Figure 70-50-

9] to 47,5 - 54 N•m (35 - 40 ft-lb) torque.
Figure 70-50-10
1
4
3
P-76717
2
Remove the pressure transducer (Item 1) [Figure 70-50-
1 12].
P-76716A Installation: Tighten the pressure transducer (Item 1)

[Figure 70-50-12] to 10 - 10,9 N•m (7.4 - 8.1 ft-lb) torque.
Remove coil mounting nut (Item 1), the coil (Item 2), and
the coil valve stem (Item 3) [Figure 70-50-10].
NOTE: Coil mounting nut must be replaced each time

it is removed. Coil mounting nuts are
available from Bobcat Parts.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM (CONT'D) Blower Housing Removal And Installation
Hydraulic Fan Disassembly And Assembly (Cont’d)
Figure 70-50-13
IMPORTANT
damage the system.
I-2003-0888
Remove the air conditioning condenser if equipped. (See

1 Removal And Installation on Page 80-60-1.)
Remove the oil cooler. (See Removal And Installation on

Page 20-90-1.)
P-76726
Remove the radiator. (See Radiator Removal And
Inspect and replace the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 70-50-
13] if necessary.
Figure 70-50-15

Lower Fan Duct Removal And Installation
Figure 70-50-14
1 1
2
P-90063
1
Remove the four bolts (Item 1) [Figure 70-50-15].
P100275
Remove the blower housing (Item 2) [Figure 70-50-15]
from the loader.
Unhook the rubber straps (Item 1) [Figure 70-50-13] and
remove lower fan duct.
NOTE: Engine and hydraulic fan assembly removed
for photo clarity.
NOTE: Line up the bushings and bolts thru the fan

shroud

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM (CONT’D) Fan Removal And Installation
Hydraulic Fan Motor Assembly Removal And Figure 70-50-18

Installation
Figure 70-50-16
1
1 2
5
5
1
4 P-90313
3
P100729 Remove the four bolts (Item 1) and the cover plate (Item
2) [Figure 70-50-18].
Remove the fan motor inlet hose (Item 1) and outlet hose Installation: Tighten the bolts to 10,2 N•m (7.5 ft-lb)

(Item 2) [Figure 70-50-16]. torque.
Remove the fan case drain hose (Item 3) [Figure 70-50- Figure 70-50-19
16].
Remove the charge pressure hose (Item 4) [Figure 70-

50-16].
Cap and plug all hose’s.

1
Disconnect the electrical connectors (Item 5) [Figure 70-
50-16].
Figure 70-50-17
P-90065
1
1 Remove the nut (Item 1) [Figure 70-50-19] and washer
from the motor shaft.
Installation: Tighten the nut to 61 - 75 N•m (45 - 55 ft-lb)

torque.
2
P100729
Remove the four bolts (Item 1) [Figure 70-50-17].
Remove fan assembly (Item 2) [Figure 70-50-17].

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM (CONT’D) Figure 70-50-22
Hydraulic Fan Motor Removal And Installation
Figure 70-50-20
2 2
P-90062
Use the following procedure to remove the fan hub from

P-90069 the fan motor shaft:
Install a bushing (Item 1) [Figure 70-50-22] in the hub to

Remove and discard the two nuts and cotter pins (Item 1) protect the fan motor shaft and threads during removal.
[Figure 70-50-20].

Use two bolts to position a puller (Item 2) on the bushing
Remove the two washers (Item 2) [Figure 70-50-20]. (Item 1) as shown [Figure 70-50-22].
Installation: Tighten the nuts to 10,2 N•m (7.5 ft-lb) NOTE: If a puller is not available one can be made if
torque. needed to remove the hub from the shaft.
Figure 70-50-21 Tighten the bolts and strike the puller with a hammer to
loosen the hub from the motor shaft.
P-90076
Remove and discard the two bolts (Item 1) [Figure 70-

50-21] then remove motor.
Installation: Tighten the bolts to 10,2 N•m (7.5 ft-lb)

torque.
NOTE: Always install new bolts, nuts, cotter pins,

and rubber gasket when installing the fan
motor.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM (CONT’D) Water Pump Disassembly And Assembly
Water Pump Removal And Installation Figure 70-50-25
Drain the fluid from the radiator. (See Removing And

Replacing Coolant on Page 10-90-4.) 2
Figure 70-50-23 1
1 3
B-22926A
Remove the water pump assembly.
P100371 NOTE: The seal (Item 1) is not a replacement part,

order water pump assembly. The gasket (Item

2) is available from Bobcat parts [Figure 70-
Remove the alternator belt (Item 1) [Figure 70-50-23]. 50-25].
Remove the four bolts (Item 2) from the water pump

pulley (Item 3) [Figure 70-50-23].
Remove the water pump pulley (Item 3) [Figure 70-50-

23]
Remove the six water pump bolts (Item 4) [Figure 70-50-

23].
Figure 70-50-24
3EEABAC1P120A
Remove the water pump (Item 1) [Figure 70-50-24] from

the gearcase.
When mounting the water pump, use a new gasket (Item

2) [Figure 70-50-24].

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM (CONT’D) Thermostat - Checking
Thermostat Housing Removal And Installation Figure 70-50-28
Figure 70-50-26
2
1
3
4
P-37172
P100372
Push down the thermostat valve and insert a string
between the valve and the valve seat.
Figure 70-50-27
Place the thermostat and a thermometer in a container

with water and gradually heat the water [Figure 70-50-
28].
5 Hold the string to suspend the thermostat in the water.
When the water temperature rises, the thermostat valve
will open, allowing it to fall down from the string.
Continue heating the water and read the temperature

when the valve has risen by about 8 mm (0.315 in).
6 If the measurement is not acceptable, replace the
thermostat.
P-37152 Thermostat’s valve Factory 166.1 - 3.3°F

opening tempera- spec. (74,5 - 78,5°C)
ture
Remove the thermostat cover mounting bolts (Item 1),
and remove the thermostat cover (Item 2) [Figure 70-50- Temperature at Factory 90°C
26]. which thermostat spec. 194°F
completely opens
Remove the thermostat assembly (Item 3) [Figure 70-
50-26].
Apply a liquid gasket only at the thermostat cover side of

the gasket (Item 4 [Figure 70-50-26].
Attach the thermostat (Item 5) with its hole (Item 6) facing

toward the air suction side [Figure 70-50-27].

LUBRICATION SYSTEM Figure 70-60-3
Oil Pan Removal And Installation
Remove the engine / hydrostatic pump package from the

loader. (See Engine Removal And Installation on Page
70-10-7.)
Figure 70-60-1
P-37127
Remove the oil strainer mounting bolts and remove the

oil strainer (Item 2) [Figure 70-60-3].
Install the oil strainer, using care not to damage the O-

ring.
P-37125

Apply liquid gasket to the oil pan (Item 3) [Figure 70-60-
2].
Remove the oil pan mounting bolts and remove the oil
pan (Item 1) [Figure 70-60-1]. Confirm that the liquid gasket coating surface is free of
water, dust and oil in order to maintain sealing effect.
Figure 70-60-2
Carefully apply the adhesive evenly.
NOTE: When mounting the adhesive-applied parts,

take care to fit them to the mating parts.
Assemble the adhesive-applied parts within

ten minutes.
To avoid uneven tightening, tighten mounting

bolts in diagonal order from the center.
P-37126

LUBRICATION SYSTEM (CONT’D) Oil Pump Inspection
Oil Pump Removal And Installation Figure 70-60-5
Remove the timing gearcase cover. (See Timing

Gearcase Cover Removal And Installation on Page 70-
100-1.)
Figure 70-60-4
P-37220
1
Measure the clearance between lobes of the inner rotor

and the outer rotor with a feeler gauge [Figure 70-60-5].
P-100076 If the clearance exceeds the factory specifications,

replace the oil pump rotor assembly.
Remove the oil pump cover (Item 1) [Figure 70-60-4]. Clearance Factory spec. 0,040 - 0,16 mm
between (0.0016 - 0.0062 in)
inner rotor Allowable 0,03 mm (0.01 in)
and outer Limit
rotor

LUBRICATION SYSTEM (CONT’D) Figure 70-60-7
Oil Pump Inspection (Cont’d)
Figure 70-60-6
P-100077
Put a strip of plastigage onto the rotor face with grease

P-37218 [Figure 70-60-7].
Install the cover and tighten the screws with the specified
Measure the clearance between the outer rotor and the torque.
pump body with a feeler gauge [Figure 70-60-6].

Remove the cover carefully, and measure the amount of
If the clearance exceeds the factory specifications, the flattening with the scale and record the clearance.
replace the oil pump rotor assembly.
If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace oil
Clearance Factory 0,100 - 0,184 mm pump rotor assembly and the cover.
between outer spec. (0.00394 - 0.00724 in)
rotor and Allowable 0,3 mm (0.01 in) Clearance Factory spec. 0,025 - 0,075 mm
pump body limit between (0.00099 - 0.0029 in)
rotor and Allowable 0,225 mm
cover limit (0.00886 in)
Tightening Oil pump cover 7,9 - 9,3 N•m

torque screw (5.8 - 6.8 ft-lb)

LUBRICATION SYSTEM (CONT’D) Oil Filter Cooler Removal And Installation
Oil Pump Inspection (Cont’d) Figure 70-60-9
Relief Valve 1
Figure 70-60-8
4 P100079
1
1 Remove the water pipe (Item 1) [Figure 70-60-9].
P100078
Remove the oil filter cartridge (Item 2) [Figure 70-60-9].

Remove the bolt (Item 1) [Figure 70-60-8]. Figure 70-60-10
Remove the relief valve (Item 2), the spring (Item 3) and
the packing (Item 4) [Figure 70-60-8].
Tightening Relief valve 69 - 78 N•m

torque (51 - 57 ft-lb)
P100080
Remove the oil cooler joint bolt (Item 1) [Figure 70-60-

10] and [Figure 70-60-11].
Installation: Tighten the oil cooler joint bolt to 40 - 44

N•m (29 - 32 ft-lb)

LUBRICATION SYSTEM (CONT’D) Figure 70-60-13
Oil Filter Cooler Removal And Installation (Cont’d)
Figure 70-60-11
1 P-76921
Install a pressure gauge [Figure 70-60-13].

P100081
Start the engine. After warming up, measure the oil
pressure of both idling and rated speeds.
Remove the oil cooler (Item 1) [Figure 70-60-11].
If the oil pressure is less than the allowable limit, check

Engine Oil Pressure - Testing the following:
Figure 70-60-12 Engine oil insufficient

Oil pump defective
Oil strainer clogged
Oil filter cartridge
Oil gallery clogged
Excessive oil clearance of bearing
Foreign matter in the relief valve
1 At idle speed Allowable limit 48,3 kPa

(0,48 bar)
(7 PSI)
At rated Factory spec. 199,9 - 386,1 kPa

speed (1,99 - 3,9 bar)
(29 - 56 PSI)
P100082
Allowable limit 21 PSI (1,447 bar)
Remove the oil switch (Item 1) [Figure 70-60-12].


FUEL SYSTEM Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Removal And Installation
Fuel Shutoff Solenoid - Checking Figure 70-70-3
Figure 70-70-1
3
1
P-76053
1 P-76053
Stop the engine and open the rear door. The fuel shutoff solenoid connector is located between
the fuel filter and the oil filter.

The fuel shutoff solenoid connector is located between
the fuel filter and the oil filter. Disconnect the fuel shutoff solenoid connector (Item 1)
[Figure 70-70-3].
Disconnect the fuel shutoff solenoid connector (Item 1)
[Figure 70-70-1]. Remove the two mounting bolts (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-
3] from the fuel stop solenoid.
Use an ohmmeter to check the fuel shutoff solenoid.
Remove the solenoid from the injection pump assembly
Figure 70-70-2 (Item 3) [Figure 70-70-3].
P100126
The reading between electrical connector terminal C and

terminal A must be approximately 15.6 ohm [Figure 70-
70-2].
The reading between electrical connector terminal C and

terminal B must be approximately 0.35 - 0.40 ohm.

Fuel Injection Pump Assembly Removal
Set the number four cylinder to Top Dead Center (T.D.C.)

compression stroke.
Figure 70-70-4
P100155
Timer Gear Puller (MEL1657)
Application: Use this puller for removing the timer gear

from the governor shaft.
P100154
Timer 0° Restoring Jig (MEL1656)
Application: Use this for restoring 0° in the timer gear.

Fuel Injection Pump Assembly Removal (Cont’d)
Figure 70-70-6
2
1
1
3
P-76996
With the number four piston at T.D.C. compression stroke

P-76933 place a mark on the timer gear and the idler gear where
the teeth engage (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-8].
Remove the lubrication tubeline (Item 1), the timer gear Pin the flywheel so that the engine does not turn.
cover mounting bolts (Item 2) and the timer gear cover

(Item 3) [Figure 70-70-6]. Figure 70-70-9
Figure 70-70-7
1 P-37513
1
P-76934
Remove the two flange bolts (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-9]
from the injection pump assembly.
Install the 0° Restoring Jig (MEL1656) (Item 1) on to the
timer gear (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-7].

Fuel Injection Pump Assembly Removal (Cont’d)
Figure 70-70-10 2
1 3
P-76936
Remove the timer gear nut and washer (Item 1) from the
P-37555 timer gear (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-12].
Install the timer gear puller (Item 4) onto the timer gear
Install two fuel camshaft lock bolts (Item 1 and 2) [Figure (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-12].
70-70-10] and [Figure 70-70-11] that are M8 X P1.25 X

L30 mm. Installation: Install the washer with the concave surface
(Item 3) [Figure 70-70-12] towards the timer gear.
Figure 70-70-11
Figure 70-70-13
2
1
P-37532
P-76937
Tighten the lower fuel camshaft lock bolt (Item 1) [Figure

70-70-11] until it comes into contact with the fuel Remove the timer gear (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-13].
camshaft.
NOTE: Timer Gear is not serviceable. If timer gear is
Tighten the upper fuel camshaft lock bolt (Item 2) [Figure damaged the entire assembly must be
70-70-11] until it comes into contact with the fuel replaced.
camshaft.
NOTE: Do not over tighten the lock bolts when in

contact with the camshaft.

Fuel Injection Pump Assembly Removal (Cont’d) 1

Figure 70-70-14
P-37540

P-76938 16] and move the fuel filter, to allow clearance for the
injection pump assembly to be removed.
Remove the timer gear assembly (Item 1) [Figure 70-70- Figure 70-70-17
14].

Figure 70-70-15 1
1
1
P-37539
P-76945 Remove the three injection pump assembly mounting

flange nuts (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-17]. (Two on the front
side and one on the back side of the injection pump
Disconnect the lubrication oil tubeline (Item 1) [Figure assembly.)
70-70-15].

FUEL SYSTEM (CONT’D) Fuel Injection Pump Assembly Installation
Fuel Injection Pump Assembly Removal (Cont’d) Set the number four cylinder to T.D.C. compression
stroke.
Figure 70-70-18
Figure 70-70-20
1
1
2
1
1
3
2
1
4 3
5
6
P100182
P-76939
Remove the three injection pump assembly support bolts

(Items 1) and the bracket (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-18]. Install the timer gear into the engine (Item 1) [Figure 70-

70-20].
Figure 70-70-19
NOTE: Align the marks on the timer gear to the idler
gear (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-20].
Install the 0° restoring jig (MEL1656) (Item 3) [Figure 70-

70-20]) onto the timer gear.
Install the injection pump assembly into the engine (Item

4) [Figure 70-70-20].
1
NOTE: Align the key (Item 5) in the keyway of the
timer gear.
Install the timer gear nut and washer (Item 6) [Figure 70-
70-20] and tighten to 74 - 83 N•m (55 - 61 ft-lb) torque.
P-76081
Remove the injection pump assembly from the engine

(Item 1) [Figure 70-70-19].

Fuel Injection Pump Assembly Installation (Cont’d)
Figure 70-70-21 3
1
3
P-76940
Install the two flange bolts (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-23] and

P-37539 tighten to 24 - 28 N•m (17 - 20 ft-lb) torque.
Move the injection pump assembly clockwise (viewed

Install the three mounting flange nuts (Item 1) [Figure from gearcase side), align the injection timing marks
70-70-21] and finger tighten (Two on the front side and (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-23] on the injection pump

one on the back side of the injection pump assembly.) assembly and on the engine gearcase.
Figure 70-70-22 Tighten the injection pump assembly mounting flange

nuts (Item 3) [Figure 70-70-23] (two on the front side and
one on the back side of the injection pump assembly) to
18 - 20 N•m (13 - 15 ft-lb) torque.
Figure 70-70-24
1
2 1
1 1
P-37532
Remove the two fuel camshaft lock bolts (Item 1) [Figure

70-70-22].
P-76944
Install the three injection pump assembly support bolts

(Items 1) and the bracket (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-24].
Tighten the injection pump assembly support bolts (Item

1) [Figure 70-70-24] to 18 - 20 N•m (13 - 15 ft-lb) torque.

FUEL SYSTEM (CONT’D) Governor Housing Disassembly And Assembly
Fuel Injection Pump Assembly Installation (Cont’d) Figure 70-70-27
Figure 70-70-25
P-76945
P100105
Connect the lubrication oil tubeline (Item 1) [Figure 70-

70-25] and torque to 15,7 - 19,6 N•m (11.6 - 15.4 ft-lb). Jig for Governor Connecting Rod

Figure 70-70-26 Application: Use MEL1637 (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-27] for
connecting the governor connecting rod to the rack pin of
the fuel injection pump assembly.
2
3
1
P-76933
Install the gear cover (Item 1), the gear cover mounting
bolts (Item 2) and lubrication tubeline (Item 3) [Figure
70-70-26].
Tighten the mounting bolts (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-26] to

24 - 28 N•m (17 - 20 ft-lb) torque.

FUEL SYSTEM (CONT’D) NOTE: (See Fuel Injection Pump Removal on Page
70-70-14.) for proper alignment of the
Governor Housing Disassembly And Assembly governor connecting rod procedure. The
(Cont’d) procedure will require a special tool part
number MEL1637.
Figure 70-70-28
Figure 70-70-30
2
1
3
P100084
P100086
Remove the injection pump assembly from the engine.

Slide off the governor connecting rod (Item 1) [Figure 70-
Remove the governor lubrication tubeline (Item 1) 70-29] and [Figure 70-70-30] from the rack pin of
[Figure 70-70-28]. injection pump.
Remove the stop solenoid (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-28]. For convenience, temporarily hook the start spring on the
rack pin hole of the governor connecting rod.
Detach the sight cover (Item 3) [Figure 70-70-28] from
the injection pump assembly Remove the governor housing mounting bolts.
Figure 70-70-29 Figure 70-70-31
4
1
2
P100085 P100087
Unhook the start spring (Item 1) from the rack pin (Item 2) Detach the governor housing assembly (Item 1) [Figure
[Figure 70-70-29] of injection pump assembly. 70-70-31] from the injection pump assembly.
Remove the nut (Item 3) [Figure 70-70-29]. NOTE: The injection pump assembly is lubricated
with engine oil. Oil will leak when the
NOTE: Be careful not to drop the nut inside. governor housing is removed from the
injection pump assembly.

FUEL SYSTEM (CONT’D)
Governor Disassembly And Assembly Tightening 9,8 - 11,3 N•m

GOVERNOR
torque HOUSING (7.23 - 8.32 ft-lb)
Figure 70-70-32
MOUNTING BOLT
1
Fork Lever
4
Figure 70-70-33
1 2
P100088
When reassembling the governor housing assembly

(Item 1) [Figure 70-70-32], lightly oil each inside part.

P100089
NOTE: Use care when installing the start spring (Item
2) to the governor connecting rod (Item 3)
[Figure 70-70-32] Pull out the governor fork lever shaft (Item 1) with a bolt
(Dia. 4 mm, Pitch: 0,7 mm, Length: more than 25 mm)
After sliding on the governor connecting rod onto the rack (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-33].
pin, tighten the governor connecting rod nut to the
specified torque using the jig (MEL1637) to keep the Figure 70-70-34
governor connecting rod horizontal.
Installation: Tighten the governor connecting rod nut to 1 2

2,8 - 4,0 N•m (2.1 - 2.9 ft-lb) torque.
NOTE: The tool (JIG) part number is MEL1637 for the

governor connecting rod alignment tool (Item
1) [Figure 70-70-57].
After tightening the nut, hook the start spring on the rack
pin.
Check the movement of the control rack of the injection

pump assembly by the stop lever.
P100090
NOTE: When installing the governor housing
assembly (Item 1) to the injection pump
assembly, be careful not to damage the O-ring Unhook the governor spring (Item 1) at the governor fork
(Item 4) [Figure 70-70-32]. lever (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-34] side.
NOTE: When linking the governor connecting rod to

the rack pin of injection pump, use the jig tor
keep the governor connecting rod horizontal.
Otherwise the injection pump control rack
may become stuck, and will cause difficult
starting of the engine or hunting of idle.

FUEL SYSTEM (CONT’D) Governor Fork
Governor Disassembly And Assembly (Cont’d) Figure 70-70-37
Figure 70-70-35
3
1 2 3
P100093
P100091
Figure 70-70-38
Remove the governor fork lever assembly from the 3 1

governor housing (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-35].

After reassembling the governor housing assembly,
check the movement of the governor fork lever (Item 2),
the speed control lever, stop lever, governor spring (Item
3) and governor fork lever shaft (item 4) [Figure 70-70-
35].
2
NOTE: When reassembling lightly oil the parts.
NOTE: Be careful not to deform the start spring.
Speed Lever P100094
Figure 70-70-36
Remove the governor lever assembly (Item 1) [Figure
1 2 70-70-38] from the governor housing.
Remove the start spring (Item 2) and the stop spring

(Item 3) [Figure 70-70-37] and [Figure 70-70-38].
P100092
Remove the speed control lever (Item 1) and the return

spring (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-36].

FUEL SYSTEM (CONT’D) Fuel Camshaft Removal And Installation
Governor Disassembly And Assembly (Cont’d) Figure 70-70-40
Stop Lever
Figure 70-70-39 1
1 2
P100096
3
Separate the governor housing assembly from the
P100095 injection pump assembly.
Remove the fuel feed pump from the injection pump

Remove the stop lever (Item 1) and the return spring assembly.
(Item 2) [Figure 70-70-39].
Remove the governor sleeve (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-40].
Remove the stop lever shaft (Item 3) [Figure 70-70-39].
Figure 70-70-41
P100097
Remove the injection pump (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-41].
Remove the fuel camshaft lock bolts.

Fuel Camshaft Removal And Installation (Cont’d)
Figure 70-70-42 2
3
1
P100100
2 Pull out the fuel camshaft (Item 1) and bearings (Item 2)

P100098 [Figure 70-70-44] together.
After removing the bearing’s snap ring (Item 3) [Figure

Fix the fuel camshaft with a open end wrench (Item 1), 70-70-44], press out the bearings.
and remove the governor weight mounting nut and the

governor weight (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-42]. Press the bearings into the fuel camshaft.
NOTE: Do not use the fuel camshaft lock bolts, when Install the snap ring at the gear side’s bearing.
remove the governor weight mounting nut.
Otherwise, the lock bolts or injection pump Install the fuel camshaft and bearings to the injection
housing might get damaged. pump housing.
Figure 70-70-43 Install the fuel camshaft stopper and tighten the fuel
camshaft stopper mounting screws to 7,9 - 9,3 N•m (5.8 -
1 6.9 ft-lb) torque.
Attach the governor weight to the fuel camshaft and

tighten the governor weight mounting nut to 63 - 72 N•m
P100099
Loosen the fuel camshaft stopper mounting screws and

remove the fuel camshaft stopper (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-
43].

FUEL SYSTEM (CONT’D) Fuel Injection Pump Removal
Fuel Camshaft Removal And Installation (Cont’d) Figure 70-70-46
Figure 70-70-45 3
1
2
1
4 P-76056
P100212
NOTE: The injection pump must be removed as a
complete assembly. Do Not remove individual
Fix the fuel camshaft with lock bolts so the key way on pump barrels. If individual pump barrels are
the fuel camshaft (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-45] is facing to removed, the pump must be recalibrated in a

the four o’clock position. certified injection shop.
Install the injection pump assembly to the injection pump NOTE: The injection pump can be replaced with the
housing. engine crankshaft in any position.
Attach the O-ring and the cover and tighten the cover Disconnect and plug the fuel hose (Item 1) and fuel
mounting bolts. overflow hose (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-46].
Install the governor sleeve to the fuel camshaft. Disconnect the four injection lines (Item 3) [Figure 70-
70-46] at the injection pump.
Check the movement of the governor sleeve.
Remove the sight cover (Item 4) [Figure 70-70-46] from
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the O-ring. the injection pump assembly.
NOTE: Be careful the direction of the governor NOTE: Mount the check valve (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-
sleeve. 46] with the arrow pointing towards the fuel
tank.
NOTE: When reassembling lightly oil the parts.

Fuel Injection Pump Removal (Cont’d)
Figure 70-70-47 1
1 1
P-37524
Disconnect the starter spring hook (Item 1) [Figure 70-

P-76946 70-49].
NOTE: Be careful to not deform the starter spring.

Disconnect the four injection lines (Item 1) [Figure 70-
70-47] at the injection nozzle assemblies. Figure 70-70-50

Remove the injection lines from the loader.
1
Figure 70-70-48
2
P-37525
Remove the governor connecting rod nut (Item 1)

P-76053 [Figure 70-70-50].
NOTE: Be careful not to drop the governor

Disconnect the electrical connector (Item 1) from the fuel connecting rod nut.
stop solenoid. Then remove the two mounting bolts (Item
2) [Figure 70-70-48] from the fuel stop solenoid. Installation: Tighten the governor connecting rod nut to
2,8 - 4,0 N•m (2.1 - 2.9 ft-lb) torque.
Remove the solenoid (Item 3) [Figure 70-70-48] from the
injection pump.

Fuel Injection Pump Removal (Cont’d)
Figure 70-70-51 1
P-37527
With the injection pump mounting bolts and nuts loose,

P-37526 be sure the governor connecting rod (Item 1) [Figure 70-
70-53] clears the pin on the injection pump.
Disconnect the governor connecting rod (Item 1) [Figure Figure 70-70-54

70-70-51] from the injection pump.

Figure 70-70-52
1 1 2
1
1
2
P-37529
P-37528 Align the pin on the injection pump (Item 1) [Figure 70-
70-54] with the notch in the housing.
Remove the five injection pump mounting bolts (Item 1) Remove the injection pump from the injection pump
[Figure 70-70-52]. housing.
Remove the three injection pump mounting nuts (Item 2) NOTE: When taking out the injection pump, be
[Figure 70-70-52]. careful not to hit it against the governor
connecting rod.
Installation: Tighten the injection pump mounting bolts
to 24 - 28 N•m (17 - 20 ft-lb) torque. Tighten the injection
pump mounting nuts to 18 - 21 N•m (13 - 15 ft-lb) torque.

Fuel Injection Pump Installation

1
Figure 70-70-55
P100105
Figure 70-70-58
P100102
1
Install the injection pump (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-55] onto
the fuel injection pump assembly, and tighten the

mounting bolts and nuts.
Figure 70-70-56
P100106
Place the jig (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-57] and [Figure 70-

70-58] in the stop solenoid mounting hole of the injection
pump assembly.
NOTE: The tool (JIG) part number is MEL1637 for the

P100104 governor connecting rod alignment tool (Item
1) [Figure 70-70-57].
Hook the governor connecting rod (Item 2) [Figure 70-

70-56] to the rack pin of the injection pump assembly.
Installation: Tighten the governor connecting rod nut to

2,8 - 4,0 N•m (2.1 - 2.9 ft-lb) torque.

Fuel Injection Pump Installation (Cont’d)

1
Figure 70-70-59
2
1
P100109
Make sure the permanent magnet at the top of the jig

P100107 (Item 1) is attracted to the governor connecting rod (Item
2). To do this, turn the jig a little clockwise and
counterclockwise and look into the sight cover hole to
Figure 70-70-60 see if the governor connecting rod (Item 2) [Figure 70-
70-59] moves right and left accordingly [Figure 70-70-

60] and [Figure 70-70-61].
Figure 70-70-62
2 1
P100108
P100110
Slightly tighten the governor connecting rod nut (Item 1)

on the governor connecting rod (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-
62].
Holding down the jig (Item 3) by hand, tighten up the

governor connecting rod nut (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-62]
to 2,8 - 4,0 N•m (2.1 - 2.9 ft-lb) torque.

Fuel Injection Pump Installation (Cont’d)
Figure 70-70-63
2
P100113
Move the stop lever (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-64] and

P100111 visually check to see if the fuel injection pump connecting
rack comes smoothly back to the start position by the
counter force of the start spring. At the same time,
Hook the start spring (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-63] and visually check to see if there is no twist in the sliding point
[Figure 70-70-62] to the rack pin. (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-65] between the governor fork

lever and the governor connecting rod from the stop
Figure 70-70-64 solenoid mounting hole.
If the control rack fails to move back smoothly, remove

the start spring and the governor connecting rod nut, and
go through the above procedure starting with [Figure 70-
70-57].
Finally fit the sight cover and the stop solenoid back into
place.
P100112

Injection Pump - Timing
Figure 70-70-66
2
1
1
3
P-37538
Align the timing mark on the injection pump assembly

P-76933 (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-68] with the timing mark on the
gearcase housing.
Remove the lubrication tubeline (Item 1), the timer gear Figure 70-70-69
cover mounting bolts (Item 2) and the timer gear cover

(Item 3) [Figure 70-70-66].
Figure 70-70-67
2 1 1
2
P-76056
1
1 Disconnect the four injection lines (Item 1) [Figure 70-
P-76934 70-69] from the injection pump.
Install the 0° Restoring Jig (MEL1656) (Item 1) on to the

timer gear (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-67].

FUEL SYSTEM (CONT'D) Figure 70-70-72
Injection Pump - Timing (Cont’d)
Figure 70-70-70 1
P-37543
Install a short plastic tube (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-72] in

P-76946 the number one cylinder port of the injection pump. The
tube should fit securely and point upward.
Disconnect the four injection lines (Item 1) [Figure 70- Figure 70-70-73
70-70] from the injection nozzle assemblies.

Remove the injector lines from the engine.
Figure 70-70-71
2
1
3
P100707
2
Disconnect the wiring connector (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-

73] from the engine speed control sensor.
1 P-76053
Remove the speed sensor (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-73]
from the engine.
70-71] from the fuel shutoff solenoid.

from the fuel shutoff solenoid.
Remove the fuel shutoff solenoid from the engine (Item

3) [Figure 70-70-71].

Figure 70-70-74
P-37544
Check the location of the engine timing mark, by looking

P-37543 in the engine speed sensor hole on the engine flywheel
casting (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-76].
Turn the engine counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel Figure 70-70-77

end) until the fuel partially fills the plastic tube (Item 1)

[Figure 70-70-74].
Figure 70-70-75 2
P-37542B
The timing mark (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-77] should be

P-37543 located in the center of the engine speed sensor hole.
NOTE: The T.D.C. hole (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-77] in

After there is fuel rise seen in the plastic tube, rotate the the flywheel will not be visible in the speed
engine back (clockwise) at least 90°. sensor hole.
Slowly rotate the engine counterclockwise (viewed from If the timing mark is not located in the center of the hole,
flywheel end) and stop turning when the fuel begins to rotate the injection pump assembly until the injection
rise in the plastic tube (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-75]. timing is adjusted.
The injection timing is 5.25 - 6.75° (0.0917 - 0.177 rad.)

before T.D.C.


2
Figure 70-70-78
1
2
3
1
P-76933
Install the timer gear cover (Item 1), the gear cover
P-76073 mounting bolts (Item 2) and lubrication tubeline (Item 3)
[Figure 70-70-80].
Make sure the injection pump assembly timing mark Tighten the mounting bolts (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-80] to
(Item 1) is aligned with the crankcase timing mark (Item 24 - 28 N•m (17 - 20 ft-lb) torque.
1) [Figure 70-70-78].

NOTE: If the injection timing is not within the Install flywheel rpm sensor. (See Adjustment on Page 60-
specification, rotate the injection pump 170-2.)
assembly to adjust the injection timing.
Figure 70-70-79
1
1
P-76079
Loosen the four fuel injection pump housing nuts (Item 1)

[Figure 70-70-79].
Rotate the injection pump (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-79]

counterclockwise (viewed from the flywheel side) to delay
the injection timing.
Rotate the injection pump (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-79]

clockwise (viewed from the flywheel side) to advance the
injection timing.
Remove the 0° Restoring Jig (MEL1656).

Fuel Injector Removal And Installation
Figure 70-70-81
1
P-37579
Remove the nut (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-83] from the

1 injection nozzle assembly hold down clamp.
P100114
Installation: Tighten the injection nozzle assembly hold

Remove the injection nozzle oil seal (Item 1) from the down clamp nut to 18 - 21 N•m (13 - 15 ft-lb) torque.
cylinder head cover (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-81].

Figure 70-70-84
Installation: Install new injection nozzle oil seals.
Remove the cylinder head cover (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-

81].
Installation: Tighten the valve cover bolts to 6,9 - 11,2

N•m (5.1 - 8.31 ft-lb) torque.
1
Figure 70-70-82
P-37580
1
1 Remove the nozzle hold down clamps (Item 1) [Figure
70-70-84] from the injection nozzle assembly.
P-37578
Remove the five over flow tubeline retaining bolts (Item

1) [Figure 70-70-82].
Installation: Tighten the retaining bolts to 9,8 - 11,2 N•m

(7.24 - 8.31 ft-lb) torque.

FUEL SYSTEM (CONT'D) Fuel Injector Nozzle Pressure - Checking
Fuel Injector Removal And Installation (Cont’d) The tools listed below will be needed to do the following
procedures:
Figure 70-70-85
MEL4200 - Injector Nozzle Tester
MEL4201 - Injector Nozzle Tester Adapter Set
Figure 70-70-87
1
P-37581
Remove the injection nozzle assembly (Item 1) [Figure

70-70-85] from the engine.

P100115
Figure 70-70-86
Install the injection nozzle assembly onto the nozzle

tester (MEL4200).
1
Slowly move the tester handle to measure the pressure
at which fuel begins jetting out from the nozzle.
2
If the measurement is not within the factory
specifications, repair or replace the injection nozzle
assembly.
NOTE: injection nozzle assembly gasket must be

replaced when the injection nozzle assembly
is removed for checking.
P-37583
Injection Factory 1st 18,6 - 19,6 MPa

pressure specification stage (186,4 - 196,1 bar)
Check the injection nozzle assembly O-rings (Item 1) and
(2703 - 2844 psi)
nozzle washer (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-86].
Always replace the injection nozzle assembly O-rings

and washer before installation.

FUEL SYSTEM (CONT'D) Valve Seat Tightness
Nozzle Spraying Condition Figure 70-70-89
Figure 70-70-88
Correct Incorrect
P100117
P100116
Install the injection nozzle assembly on to a nozzle tester
(MEL4200).
Install the injection nozzle assembly onto a nozzle tester
(MEL4200), and check the nozzle spraying condition. Raise the fuel pressure, and keep at 16,7 MPa (166,7

bar) (2418 psi) for 10 seconds.
If the spraying condition is defective, repair or replace the
injection nozzle assembly. If any fuel leak is found, repair or replace the injection
nozzle assembly.
Valve seat Factory No fuel leak at 16,7

tightness specification. MPa (166,7 bar)
(2418 psi)

CYLINDER HEAD Intake Air Heater Removal And Installation
Intake Air Heater - Testing Figure 70-80-3
Figure 70-80-1
1 2 2
P100124
P100124
Disconnect the electrical wire from the intake heater lead
(Item 1) [Figure 70-80-3]
Disconnect the electrical wire (Item 1) [Figure 70-80-1]
from the air intake heater. Remove the four mount bolts (Item 2) [Figure 70-80-3]

from the intake air heater housing.
Figure 70-80-2
lb) torque.
Figure 70-80-4
1
2
P100127
Measure the resistance between + terminal (Item 1) and

intake air heater body (Item 2) [Figure 70-80-2].
P-37560
If the resistance is open, the intake air heater is faulty.

NOTE: When installing the intake air heater in the
Intake air Factory spec. Approx. 0.3 ohm housing, install the intake air heater so the
heater (At cold occasion) heater lines (Item 1) [Figure 70-80-4] are
resistance vertical, to prevent a short-circuit in the
system.

CYLINDER HEAD (CONT’D) Figure 70-80-7
Valve Clearance Adjustment
NOTE: Valve clearance must be checked and

adjusted when engine is cold. 1
Figure 70-80-5
P-37579

1 injector nozzle holder clamp.
Installation: Tighten the injector nozzle holder clamp nut

P-76089 to 18 - 20 N•m (13 - 15 ft-lb) torque.

Figure 70-80-8
Remove the high pressure pipes (Item 1) and the valve
cover (Item 2) [Figure 70-80-5].
Installation: Tighten the injection pipe retaining nut to 23

- 36 N•m (17 - 26 ft-lb) torque.
Installation: Tighten the cylinder head cover screw to

1
6,9 - 11,2 N•m (5.1 - 8.31 ft-lb) torque.
Figure 70-80-6
P-37580
1
Remove the nozzle holder clamps (Item 1) [Figure 70-
1 80-8] from the injector nozzle.
P-37578
Remove the five over flow pipe retaining bolts (Item 1)

[Figure 70-80-6].
Installation: Tighten the retaining bolts to 9,8 - 11,2 N•m

(7.24 - 8.31 ft-lb) torque.

Valve Clearance Adjustment (Cont’d)
Figure 70-80-9
2
2 P-37195
Loosen the lock nut (Item 1) of adjusting screw (Item 2)

P-37194 [Figure 70-80-10] (push rod side) and insert the feeler
gauge between the rocker arm and the bridge head. Set
the adjusting screw to the specified value, then tighten
Set number one piston to top dead center on the the lock nut.
compression stroke.

Valve Factory spec. 0,23 - 0,27 mm
Before adjusting the valve clearance, adjust the bridge to clearance (0.0091 - 0.010 in)
set the height of valves.
NOTE: After adjusting, tighten the lock nut (Item 2)
Loosen the lock nut (Item 2) and turn the adjusting screw
[Figure 70-80-10] securely.
(Item 1) [Figure 70-80-9] to adjust the bridge.
Apply pressure with your finger to the rocker arm and Adjustment IN. EX.
screw in the adjusting screw slowly until you feel the cylinder
screw touch the top of valve stem, then tighten the lock Location of piston
nut. When No. 1 piston is 1st * *
at compression top 2nd *
dead center
3rd *
4th
When No. 1 piston is 1st
at overlap position 2nd *
3rd *
4th * *

Valve Timing - Checking
NOTE: Engine removed for photo clarity
Figure 70-80-11
1 2
P100143
Rotate the engine, until the timing mark on the injection

pump fuel cam gear (Item 1) is meshed with the idler
gear (Item 2) [Figure 70-80-13].
P100145
Look for a timing mark on the idler gear (Item 1), if one is
not present, mark the engaged teeth (Item 2) [Figure 70-

Remove the two bolts (Item 1) [Figure 70-80-11] from 80-13] to aid in reassembly.
the throttle linkage mount and the injection pump gear
cover. Figure 70-80-14
Figure 70-80-12
2 2
1 2
3
2
P100142
2 P100144
Any time the timing mark (Item 1) on the fuel cam gear is
meshed with the idler gear (Item 2) [Figure 70-80-14] the
Remove the timer lubricating pipe (Item 1) [Figure 70- engine is on top dead center of the compression stroke
80-12] from the injection pump gear cover and engine. on number four cylinder.
Remove the seven cover mounting bolts (Item 2) [Figure

70-80-12] from the injection pump gear cover.
Remove the injection pump gear cover (Item 3) [Figure

70-80-12] from the engine.

CYLINDER HEAD (CONT’D) Cylinder Head Removal And Installation
Valve Timing - Checking (Cont’d) Remove the fuel injectors. (See Fuel Injector Removal
Figure 70-80-15
Figure 70-80-17
1
1
3
P-37599
P-37201
Install a 9,525 mm (0.375 in) bolt through the hole in the

flywheel casting (Item 1) [Figure 70-80-15]. Remove the rocker arm assembly (Item 1) [Figure 70-

80-17].
Figure 70-80-16
Remove the push rods (Item 2) [Figure 70-80-17].
Remove the bridge arms (Item 3) [Figure 70-80-17].
Figure 70-80-18
1
P-37519
Remove the flywheel cover from the engine flywheel

housing.
P-37158
Check to see that the bolt (Item 1) [Figure 70-80-16] is
completely through the flywheel.
Place the push rods into the tappets (Item 3) [Figure 70-
The engine is now pinned on Top Dead Center. 80-18], check to see if their ends are properly engaged
with the grooves.
NOTE: After reassembling the rocker arm, be sure to

adjust the valve clearance.

Cylinder Head Removal And Installation (Cont’d)

1
Figure 70-80-19
P-37156
Make sure to note the notch (a), (b) or (c) of cylinder

P-37228A
head gasket (Item 1) [Figure 70-80-21] in advance.
Replace the same notch (a), (b) or (c) as the original

Loosen the hose clamps and remove the water return cylinder head gasket (Item 1) [Figure 70-80-21].

Select the cylinder head gasket (Item 1) thickness to
Figure 70-80-20 meet with the top clearance when replacing the piston,
piston pin bushing, connecting rod or crank pin bearing.
Take care handling the gasket so as not to damage it.
NOTE: When replacing the piston, piston pin

bushing, connecting rod or crank pin bearing,
select the cylinder head gasket thickness to
meet with the top clearance.
P-37266
Remove the cylinder head bolts in the order of (18) to (1)

[Figure 70-80-20], and remove the cylinder head.
Remove the cylinder head gasket.
Tightening Cylinder head 98,1 - 107 N•m

torque bolts (72.4 - 79.5 ft-lb)
The cylinder head should be free of scratches and dust.
Tighten the cylinder head bolts gradually in the order of

(1) to (18) after applying engine oil to the threads.
Be sure to adjust the valve clearance. (See Valve

Clearance Adjustment on Page 70-80-2.)

CYLINDER HEAD (CONT’D) Cylinder Head Disassembly And Assembly
Cylinder Head Removal And Installation (Cont’d) Figure 70-80-24
Figure 70-80-22
2 1
3
5
P-37204A
P-37203
Remove the valve spring collets (Item 1) after
compressing the valve spring (Item 3) with the valve
Figure 70-80-23 spring retainer (Item 2) [Figure 70-80-24].

Remove the valve seal (Item 4) and the valve (Item 5)
1 [Figure 70-80-24].
Figure 70-80-25
3EEABAC1P026A 2
Measure the piston head’s recessing or protrusion from

the crankcase cylinder face (Item 1) [Figure 70-80-22] at 3
four spots per each piston using the dial gauge as shown
P-37118
in [Figure 70-80-23] and average the four pistons.
Install the valve spring with its small-pitch end (Item 2)

downward toward the head side (Item 3) [Figure 70-80-
25].
Wash the valve stem and valve guide hole, and apply
engine oil sufficiently.
After installing the valve spring collets, lightly tap the

stem to assure proper fit with a plastic hammer.

Cylinder Head - Servicing Figure 70-80-27
Figure 70-80-26
1 2 P-37162
P-37212
If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, correct it
with a surface grinder.
Thoroughly clean the cylinder head surface.
Place a straightedge on the cylinder head’s four sides
Measure the clearance with a straightedge (Item 1) and a and two diagonal [Figure 70-80-27].
feeler gauge (Item 2) [Figure 70-80-26].

Cylinder Head Allowable 0,05 mm
Cylinder Head Top Clearance Surface Flatness Limit 0.002 in
NOTE: Be sure to check the valve recessing after

correcting.
Select the suitable cylinder head gasket, refer to the table below.
Notch of Cylinder Head Thickness of cylinder head gasket Piston Head’s recessing
Gasket or protrusion from the
level of crankcase
cylinder face. (average
of 4 pistons)
Before tightening After tightening
2 notches (a) 0,90 mm 0,80 mm -0,07 - +0,049 mm
(0.035 in) (0.031 in) (-0.0028 - +0.0019 in)
1 notch (b) 1,00 mm 0,90 mm +0,050 - +0,149 mm
(0.0394 in) (0.035 in) (+0.0020 - +0.0058 in)
Without notch (c) 1,05 mm 0,95 mm +0,150 - +0,20 mm
(0.0413 in) (0.037 in) (+0.0059 - +0.0078 in)

Valve Guide - Checking
The tool described below is not provided. The tool is

used for inserting and removing the valve guides.Use the
dimensions below [Figure 70-80-28] and [Figure 70-80-
29] to make this tool.
Figure 70-80-28
P-37138
Remove carbon from the valve guide section.
Measure the valve stem O.D. with an outside micrometer

[Figure 70-80-30].
Figure 70-80-31

P-37187
Figure 70-80-29
P-37139
P-37188
Measure the valve guide I.D. of the cylinder head at the
most wear part as shown in [Figure 70-80-31] with a
A 20 mm dia. (0.79 in dia.) small hole gauge and calculate the clearance.
B 11,7 - 11,9 mm dia. (0.461 - 0.468 in dia.)
C 6,50 - 6,60 mm dia. (0.256 - 0.259 in dia.)
D 225 mm (8.86 in)
E 70 mm (2.8 in)
F 45 mm (1.8 in)
G 25 mm (0.98 in)
H 5 mm (0.2 in)
I 6,70 - 7,00 mm dia. (0.264 - 0.275 in dia.)
J 20 mm dia (.0.79 in dia.)
K 12,5 - 12,8 mm dia (0.493 - 0.503 in dia.)
L 8,90 - 9,10 mm (0.351 - 0.358 in dia.)
C1 Chamfer 1,0 mm (0.039 in)
C0.3 Chamfer 0,3 mm (0.01 in)

Valve Guide - Checking (Cont’d)
If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the

valves. If it still exceeds the allowable limit, replace the
valve guide. 1
2
Clearance Factory Intake 0,055 - 0,085
between spec. valve mm (0.0022 -
valve stem 0.0033 in) 3
and guide Exhaust 0,055 - 0,085
valve mm (0.0022 -
0.0033 in)
Allowable 0,1 mm (0.004 in) P-76091
limit
Valve stem Factory Intake 6,960 - 6,975 Press the used valve guide out of the cylinder head (Item
O.D. spec. valve mm (0.2741 - 1) [Figure 70-80-32] using the special driver tool.
0.2746 in)
Put oil on the outside diameter of the new valve guide.
Exhaust 6,960 - 6,975 Press the new valve guide into the cylinder head from the
valve mm (0.2741 - top side. Use the special driver tools (Items 2 and 3)

0.2746 in) [Figure 70-80-32], press the new guide until the tool
contacts the cylinder head.
Valve guide Factory Intake 7,030 - 7,045
I.D. spec. valve mm (0.2768 - Ream the valve guide to the correct specifications.
0.2773 in)
Exhaust 7,030 - 7,045
valve mm (0.2768 -
0.2773 in)

Reconditioning The Valve And Valve Seat 1 2

15° Exhaust
Figure 70-80-33 30° Intake
PI-9995
Check the seat surface and valve face (Item 1) [Figure

PI-9993 70-80-35].
(a) identical dimensions above and below the valve seat

Grind the valve face to the correct angle using a valve re-
facer [Figure 70-80-33]. If the seat surface (b) is too wide, use a 30 degree cutter

(Item 2) on the intake, and a 15 degree cutter on the
NOTE: Before correcting the valve and seat, check exhaust to get the correct width (Item 3) [Figure 70-80-
the valve stem and the I.D. of the valve guide 35].
section, and repair if necessary.
Valve Seat Intake 1,6 - 2,0 mm
After correcting the valve seat, be sure to Width (0.063 - 0.078 in)
check the valve recessing [Figure 70-80-37].
Exhaust 2,3 - 2,6 mm
Clean the valve seat and combustion chamber. (0.091 - 0.10 in)
Figure 70-80-34 Valve Seat & Intake 60 degrees

Face Angle Exhaust 45 degrees
Correct the valve with a valve refacer.
After resurfacing the seat, inspect for even valve seating,

apply a thin film of compound between the valve face and
valve seat, and fit them with valve lapping tool.
45° Exhaust
15° Exhaust 60° Intake Check the valve seating with prussian blue. The valve
30° Intake seating surface should show good contact all the way
around.
PI-9994
Grind the valve seat surface in the cylinder head to the

correct angle [Figure 70-80-34].

CYLINDER HEAD (CONT’D) Valve Recessing
Reconditioning The Valve And Valve Seat (Cont’d) Figure 70-80-37
Valve Lapping
Figure 70-80-36
P-37213
Clean the cylinder head, the valve face and seat.

P-37214
Insert the valve into the valve guide.

Apply compound evenly to the valve lapping surface. Measure the valve recessing with a depth gauge [Figure
70-80-37].
Insert the valve into the valve guide. Lap the valve onto
its seat with a valve lapper [Figure 70-80-36]. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace
the valve.
After lapping the valve, wash the compound away and
apply oil, then repeat valve lapping with oil. If it still exceeds the allowable limit after replacing the
valve, correct the valve seat face of the cylinder head
Apply prussian blue to the contact surface to check the with a valve seat cutter or valve seat grinder.
percentage of the seated valve. If it is less than 70%,
repeat valve lapping again. Then, correct the cylinder head surface with a surface
grinder, or replace the cylinder head.
NOTE: When valve lapping is performed, be sure to
check the valve recessing and adjust the Valve Factory Intake (recessing)
valve clearance after assembling the valve. recessing spec. valve 0,60 - 0,80 mm
(0.024 - 0.031 in)
Exhaust (recessing)
valve 0,850 - 1,05 mm
(0.0335 - 0.0413
in)
Allowable (recessing)
limit 1,2 mm (0.047 in)

Valve Spring
Figure 70-80-38
P-37254
Measure the free length (A) with vernier calipers [Figure

P-37255 70-80-39]. If the measurement is less than the allowable
limit, replace it.
Place the valve spring on a tester and compress it to the Put the spring on a surface plate, place a square on the
same length it is actually compressed in the engine side of the spring, and check to see if the entire side is

[Figure 70-80-38]. contact with the square. Rotate the spring and measure
the maximum (B) [Figure 70-80-39]. If the measurement
Read the compression load on the gauge. exceeds the allowable limit, replace.
If the measurement is less than the allowable limit, Check the entire surface of the spring for scratches.
replace it. Replace spring, if any are found.
Setting Factory Intake 63,5 N / 31,5 Free length Factory Intake 35,1 - 35,6 mm
load / setting spec. valve mm (14.3 lb / (A) spec. valve (1.39 - 1.40 in)
length 1.24 in)
Exhaust 35,1 - 35,6 mm
valve (1.39 - 1.40 in)
Exhaust 63,5 N / 31,5
Allowable Intake 34,6 mm
valve mm (14.3 lb /
limit valve (1.36 in)
1.24 in)
Exhaust 34,6 mm
Allowable Intake 45,9 N / 31,5
valve (1.36 in)
limit valve mm (10.3 lb /
1.24 in) Tilt (B) Allowable 1,0 mm (0.039 in)
limit
Exhaust 45,9 N / 31,5
valve mm (10.3 lb /
1.24 in)

Valve Tappets
Figure 70-80-40
P-37174
Measure the tappet O.D. with an outside micrometer

P-37202 [Figure 70-80-41].
Measure the I.D. of the tappet guide bore with a cylinder

Remove the tappets (Item 1) [Figure 70-80-40] from the gauge, and calculate the oil clearance [Figure 70-80-41].
crankcase.

If the oil clearance exceeds the allowable limit or the
Before installing the tappets (Item 1) [Figure 70-80-40], tappet is damaged, replace the tappet.
apply engine oil to aid in assembly and initial start up.
Oil clearance Factory 0,020 - 0,062 mm
NOTE: Mark the cylinder number to the tappets to between tappet spec. (0.00079 - 0.0024 in)
prevent interchanging. and guide Allowable 0,07 mm (0.003 in)
limit
Tappet O.D. Factory 23,959 - 23,980 mm

spec. (0.94327 - 0.94409 in)
Tappet guide Factory 24,000 - 24,021 mm
I.D. spec. (0.94489 - 0.94570 in)

CYLINDER HEAD (CONT’D) Push Rod Alignment - Checking
Rocker Arm And Shaft - Checking Figure 70-80-43
Figure 70-80-42
P-76926
P-37173
Place the push rod on V blocks [Figure 70-80-43].
Measure the rocker arm bearing I.D. with an inside Measure the push rod alignment [Figure 70-80-43].
micrometer [Figure 70-80-42].

If the push rod exceeds the allowable limit, replace the
Measure the rocker arm shaft O.D. with an outside push rod.
micrometer, and then calculate the oil clearance [Figure
70-80-42]. Push rod Allowable 0,25 mm (0.0098 in)
alignment limit
rocker arm and measure the oil clearance again. If it still
exceeds the allowable limit, replace the rocker arm shaft.

or rocker arm spec. (0,00063 - 0,0017 in)
shaft and Allowable 0,15 mm (0.0059 in)
bearing limit
Rocker arm Factory 15,973 - 15,984 mm

shaft O.D. spec. (0.62886 - 0.62929 in)
Rocker arm Factory 16,000 - 16,018 mm
I.D. for shaft spec. (0.62993 - 0.63062 in)


CRANKSHAFT AND PISTONS Figure 70-90-2
Piston And Connecting Rod Removal And

Installation
Remove the oil pan. (See Oil Pan Removal And

Remove the cylinder head. (See Cylinder Head Removal

1
Figure 70-90-1
1 P-37159
Align the marks (Item 1) [Figure 70-90-2] with each

other. (Face the marks toward the injection pump.)
Apply engine oil to the connecting rod bolts and lightly

thread it in by hand then tighten it to the specified torque.
If the connecting rod bolts do not thread together

smoothly, clean the threads. If the connecting rod bolt is
still hard to thread in, replace it.
P-37128
NOTE: When using the existing crank bearing, put
marks on the crank pin bearing and the
Remove the connecting rod bolts (Item 1) [Figure 70-90- connecting rod in order to keep their position.
1] from connecting rod cap.
Insert the crank pin bearing.
Remove the connecting rod caps.
Tightening Connecting 79 - 83 N•m
torque rod screw (58 - 61 ft-lb)

CRANKSHAFT AND PISTONS (CONT'D) Figure 70-90-4
Piston And Connecting Rod Removal And 1

Installation (Cont’d)
Remove the top ridge from the cylinder bore with a ridge
reamer.
Turn the flywheel and set a piston to the top dead center.
Remove the piston and connecting rod.
Installation:
Before installing the piston into the cylinder, apply engine

oil to the cylinder to aid in reassembly and initial start up. P-37233A
NOTE: Do not change the combination of cylinder

and piston. Make sure of the position of each When inserting the piston into the cylinder, face the mark
piston by marking. For example, mark “1” on (Item 1) [Figure 70-90-4] on the connecting rod toward
the No. 1 position. the injection pump.

1 Top Ring Gap Oil Ring
Gap
0.79 rad. (45°)
Piston
Pin Hole
Second Ring
Gap Oil Ring Gap
P-37208 P-37209
Install the pistons using a piston ring compressor (Item 1) NOTE: When inserting the piston into the cylinder,
[Figure 70-90-3]. place the gap of the compression ring 1 on the
opposite side of the combustion chamber and
stagger the gaps of the compression ring 2
and oil ring marking a right angle from the gap
of the compression ring 1 [Figure 70-90-5].

Piston And Connecting Rod - Servicing

7
The Small End Bushing Replacing Tool can be made
using the dimensions below. One set of dimensions is for 9
8
the press out tool and one for press fit.
6 1
Figure 70-90-6
5
4 3
P-37210
1. Piston Pin
2. Piston
P-37189
3. Piston Pin Snap Ring

4. Compression Ring 1
Small End Bushing Replacing Tool
5. Compression Ring 2
Application: Use to press out and to press fit the small
end bushing in the connection rod. 6. Oil Ring
(Press out) 7. Connecting Rod
A 157 mm (6.18 in) 8. Mark ( ↑ )

B 14,5 mm (0.571 in)
C 120 mm (4.72 in) 9. Numbering Mark
D 30 mm dia. (1.181 in dia.)
E 32,95 mm dia. (1.297 in dia.) Remove the piston rings using a piston ring tool [Figure
F 20 mm (0.79 in) 70-90-7].
a 0,0000063 mm (0.00025 in)
b 0,0000063 mm (0.00025 in) Remove the piston pin (Item 1), and separate the
C1 Chamfer 1,0 mm (0.039 in) connecting rod (Item 7) from the piston (Item 2) [Figure
C2 Chamfer 2,0 mm (0.079 in) 70-90-7].
(Press fit) Installation: When installing the piston pin, immerse the
piston in 176°F (80°C) oil for 10 to 15 minutes and insert
A 157 mm (6.18 in) the piston pin to the piston.
B 14,5 mm (0.571 in)
C 120 mm (4.7244 in) Assemble the piston to the connecting rod with the ↑
D 30 mm dia. (1.181 in dia.) mark (Item 8) and the connecting rod numbering mark
E 42,000 mm dia. (1.6535 in dia.) (Item 9) [Figure 70-90-7] facing same side.
F 20 mm (0.79 in)
a 0,0000063 mm (0.00025 in) NOTE: Mark the same number on the connecting rod
b 0,0000063 mm (0.00025 in) and the piston so as not to change the
C1 Chamfer 1,0 mm (0.039 in) combination.

Piston And Connecting Rod - Servicing (Cont’d)
Figure 70-90-8
P-37161
When installing the ring, assemble the rings so that the

2 manufacture’s mark (Item 1) [Figure 70-90-10] near the
P-37211A
gap faces the top of the piston.
Be sure the crank pin bearing and the connecting rod are Figure 70-90-11
same I.D. colors (Items 1 and 2) [Figure 70-90-8].

Figure 70-90-9
P-37253
Measure the piston pin bore I.D. in both the horizontal

P-37160
and vertical directions with a cylinder gauge [Figure 70-
90-11].
When installing the oil ring onto the piston, place the
expander joint (Item 1) on the opposite side of the oil ring If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace
gap (Item 2) [Figure 70-90-9]. the piston.
Piston pin Factory 30,000 - 30,013 mm

bore I.D. spec. (1.1811 - 1.1816 in)
Allowable 30,05 mm (1.183 in)
limit

Piston And Connecting Rod - Servicing (Cont’d)
Figure 70-90-12
1 2
P-37179
Press out the used bushing using a small end bushing

P-37178 replacing tool (Item 1) [Figure 70-90-13].
Figure 70-90-14
Measure the O.D. of the piston pin where it contacts the
bushing with an outside micrometer [Figure 70-90-12].

Measure the I.D. of the piston pin bushing at the
connecting rod small end with a cylinder gauge [Figure 1
70-90-12].

bushing. If it still exceeds the allowable limit, replace the
piston pin.

between piston spec. (0.00079 - 0.0015 in)
pin and small Allowable 0,15 mm (0.0059 in)
end bushing limit P-37142A
Piston pin O.D. Factory 30,006 - 30,011 mm Clean a replacement small end bushing and connecting
spec. (1.1814 - 1.1815 in) rod bore, and apply engine oil to aid in assembly.
Small end bush- Factory 30,031 - 30,046 mm
ing I.D. spec. (1.1824 - 1.1829 in) Place the bushing onto the tool and press-fit it with a
press (Item 2) [Figure 70-90-13] so that the seam (Item
1) [Figure 70-90-14] of the bushing is flush with the
connecting rod.

CRANKSHAFT AND PISTONS (CONT'D) Piston Ring Gap
Piston And Connecting Rod - Servicing (Cont’d) Figure 70-90-16
Piston Ring Groove
Figure 70-90-15
P-37180
Insert the piston ring into the lowest part of the liner which
P-37215 is the least worn.
Measure the ring gap with a feeler gauge [Figure 70-90-

Remove carbon from the ring grooves. 16].
Measure the clearance between the ring and the groove If the gap exceeds the allowable limit, replace the piston
with a feeler gauge [Figure 70-90-15]. ring.
If the clearance exceeds allowable limit, check the new Compression Factory spec. 0,30 - 0,45 mm
rings on an old piston and if it is out of spec, replace the ring 1, 2 (0.012 - 0.017 in)
piston.
limit
Factory spec. Compression 0,05 - 0,09 mm
ring 1 (0.002 - 0.003 in)
Oil Ring Factory spec. 0,25 - 0,45 mm
Compression 0,0930 - 0,120 mm
(0.0099 - 0.017 in)
ring 2 (0.00367 - 0.00472
in) Allowable 1,25 mm (0.0492 in)
limit
Oil Ring 0,020 - 0,060 mm
(0.00079 - 0.0023 in)
Allowable Compression 0,15 mm (0.0059 in)
limit ring 1
Compression 0,20 mm (0.0079 in)
ring 2
Oil ring 0,15 mm (0.0059 in)

Cylinder Bore - Checking
Figure 70-90-17
1
P-37164
When the cylinder is worn beyond the allowable limit

P-37169 (Item 1), bore and hone it to the specified dimension
(Item 2) [Figure 70-90-19].
Use a gauge to check the inside measurement of the Cylinder I.D. Oversize 100,500 - 100,522
cylinder bore [Figure 70-90-17]. (Item 2) (+ 0.5 mm) mm

Spec. (3.95670 - 3.95755
Figure 70-90-18 in)
Maximum Allowable limit 100,65 mm
wear (3.96260 in)
1
Finishing Hone to 8 - 30 μin Rz.
———
(0.2 - 0.8 μm Rz.)
2
Replace the piston and piston rings with oversize (0,5
mm) ones.
3 NOTE: When the oversize cylinder is worn beyond

the allowable limit, replace the cylinder block
with a new one.
P-37163
Measure the six points with a cylinder gauge to find out

the maximum wear [Figure 70-90-18].
NOTE: Generally, position (1) in the (a, b) direction (at

about 20 mm (0.79 in) from the top) shows the
maximum wear [Figure 70-90-18]. Since
position (3) at the lower part of the bore will
show the minimum wear
Cylinder bore Factory 100,000 - 100,022 mm

I.D. spec. (3.93701 - 3.93787 in)
Allowable 100,150 mm
limit (3.9429 in)

CRANKSHAFT AND PISTONS (CONT'D) Crankshaft Gear Removal And Installation
Connecting Rod Alignment Remove the timing gearcase cover. (See Timing
Gearcase Cover Removal And Installation on Page 70-
Figure 70-90-20 100-1.)
Remove the idler gear. (See Idler Gear And Camshaft

Figure 70-90-21
P-37181
NOTE: Since the I.D. of the connecting rod small end

bushing is the basis of this check, check the

bushing for wear beforehand.
B-3686
Install the connecting rod on the connecting rod

alignment tool. Remove the crankshaft gear with a puller [Figure 70-90-
21].
Put a gauge over the piston pin, and move it against the
face plate [Figure 70-90-20]. Remove the crankshaft key.
If the gauge does not fit squarely against the face plate,
measure the space between the pin of the gauge and the
face plate.
If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace

the connecting rod.
Connecting rod Allowable 0,05 mm (0.0020 in)

alignment limit

Crankshaft And Bearings Removal 1
Remove the flywheel housing. (See Housing Removal

3 3
Remove the oil pan. (See Oil Pan Removal And
Figure 70-90-22
2
P-37130A
NOTE: Before disassembling, check the side

clearance of crankshaft. Also check it during
reassembly. Check the crankshaft side
clearance. (See Crankshaft And Bearings -
Servicing on Page 70-90-13.)

3EEABAC1P115A Remove the eight bearing case cover mounting bolts
(Item 2) [Figure 70-90-23].
Application: Use for aligning the crankcase 1 and 2. Install the two bolts removed earlier into the bolt hole
(Item 3) [Figure 70-90-23] of bearing case cover to
A 115 mm (4.53 in) remove it.
B 56 mm (2.2 in)
C 17 mm (0.67 in) NOTE: Install the bearing case cover / oil seal
D 20 mm (0.79 in) assembly with the casting mark labeled “UP”
E 14 mm (0.55 in dia.) (Item 1) [Figure 70-90-23] at the top.
F 11 mm (0.43 in dia.)
G 14 mm (0.55 in dia.)
H 17,5 mm (0.6890 in)
I 17,5 mm (0.6890 in)
J 35 mm (1.4 in)
K 19mm (0.75 in)

Crankshaft And Bearings Removal (Cont’d)
Figure 70-90-24
1
2
2
3EEABAC1P098A
Remove the fourth bearing case (Item 1) and the thrust

bearing (Item 2) [Figure 70-90-26].
P-37133
Figure 70-90-27
Remove the bolts (Item 1) that secure the crankcase 2
[Figure 70-90-24] to crankcase 1.

Remove the crankcase 2 (Item 2) [Figure 70-90-24].
Figure 70-90-25
1
2
P-37137
Remove the crankshaft [Figure 70-90-27].
3EEABAC1P099A
Remove the bolts (Item 1) and the bearing cases (Item 2)

[Figure 70-90-25] from crankcase 1.

Crankshaft And Bearings Installation
Figure 70-90-28
1
1
2
2
3EEABAC1P098A
NOTE: Install the main bearing case having the same

number as the one engraved on the
3EEABAC1P097A
crankcase, and set the casting mark “F/W
SIDE” on the main bearing case towards the
Install the thrust bearing (Item 1) [Figure 70-90-28] on flywheel side.
both sides of the fourth mainbearing case with the oil
groove facing out. Install the fourth bearing case (Item 1) and the thrust

bearing (Item 2) [Figure 70-90-30].
Install the main bearings (Item 2) [Figure 70-90-28].
Figure 70-90-31
Figure 70-90-29
3EEABAC1P099A
P-37137
NOTE: Install the main bearing case having the same

Install the crankshaft [Figure 70-90-29]. number as the one engraved on the
crankcase, and set the casting mark “F/W
SIDE” on the main bearing case towards the
flywheel side.
Apply oil to the bearing case bolts and tighten them to the
specified torque.
Tightening Main bearing 137 - 147 N•m

torque case screw (102 - 108 ft-lb)

Crankshaft And Bearings Installation (Cont’d)

1
Figure 70-90-32
P-37133
Tighten the crankcase 2 mounting bolts (Item 1) with

P-37134
even force on the diagonal line to secure the crankcase 2
[Figure 70-90-34] to crankcase 1.
NOTE: Make sure the crankcase 1 and 2 are clean. Tightening Crankcase 2 mounting 49 - 55 N•m
torque bolt (37 - 41 ft-lb)

Apply liquid gasket (Item 1) [Figure 70-90-32]
to the crankcase 2 as shown.
Figure 70-90-33
3EEABAC1P096A
Match the crankcase 1 (Item 1) and crankcase 2 (Item 2)

[Figure 70-90-33] referring to the flywheel’s contoured
face.
Tighten the crankcase 2 mounting bolts loosely.
Install the jig (Item 3) [Figure 70-90-33] to the specified

torque. This helps to minimize the level difference
between the crankcase 1 and the crankcase 2 (at the
flywheel side) Gap must be 0,05 mm (0.002 in) or
smaller.
Tightening Flywheel housing 78 - 90 N•m

torque bolt (58 - 66 ft-lb)

CRANKSHAFT AND PISTONS (CONT'D) Crankshaft And Bearings - Servicing
Crankshaft And Bearings Installation (Cont’d) The following special tools are not provided, [Figure 70-
90-37], [Figure 70-90-38] and [Figure 70-90-22].
Figure 70-90-35
Figure 70-90-37
P-37131
NOTE: When replacing the oil seal, use caution

installing the seal in the bearing case cover as
not to install it tilted. The seal should be flush
with the cover. P-37114

Apply liquid gasket (Item 1) [Figure 70-90-35] to the Gearcase Oil Seal Replacing Tool
bearing case cover evenly.
Application: Use to press fit the oil seal.
Figure 70-90-36
A 148,8 mm (5.858 in)
1
B 50 mm (2.0 in)
C 18,8 mm (0.740 in)
D 13,7 - 13,9 mm (0.540 - 0.547 in)
E 11 mm (0.43 in)
F 18 mm dia. (0.71 in dia.)
G 38 mm dia. (1.5 in dia.)
H 45 mm dia. (1.8 in dia.)
I 57,90 - 58,10 mm (2.280 - 2.287 in)
J 79,5 mm dia. (3.13 in dia.)
K 87 mm (3.4 in)
L 12 mm (0.47 in)
M 40 mm (1.6 in)
P-37130A N 120 mm (4.72 in)
NOTE: Install the bearing case cover / oil seal

assembly with the casting mark labeled “UP”
(Item 1) [Figure 70-90-36] at the top.
Tighten the bearing case cover mounting bolts with even

force on the diagonal line.
Tightening Bearing Case Cover 24 - 27 N•m

torque mounting bolt (18 - 20 ft-lb)

CRANKSHAFT AND PISTONS (CONT'D) Crankshaft Side Clearance
Crankshaft And Bearings - Servicing (Cont’d) Figure 70-90-39
Figure 70-90-38
3EEABAC1P105A
Set a dial indicator with its tip on the end of the crankshaft
[Figure 70-90-39].
Measure the side clearance by moving the crankshaft to

the front and rear.

Crankshaft Factory spec. 0,15 - 0,31 mm
side clearance (0.0059 - 0.012 in)
limit
P-37115
If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace
the thrust bearings.
Auxiliary Socket For Fixing Crankshaft Sleeve
Application: Use to fix the crankshaft sleeve of the diesel

engine.
A Rmax = 12.5 S
B 94,5 - 95,0 mm (3.72 - 3.74 in)
C 40 mm (1.6 in)
D 30 mm (1.2 in)
E 12 mm (0.47 in)
F 7,90 - 8,10 mm (0.311 - 0.318 in)
G 20 mm (0.079 in)
H 130 mm (5.12 in)
I 99,40 - 99,60 mm (3.914 - 3.921 in)
J 95,05 - 95,20 mm (3.743 - 3.748 in)
K 3 mm dia. (0.1 in dia.)
L 15 mm (0.59 in)
M 10 mm (0.39 in)
N 90 mm (3.5 in)
O 115 mm (4.53 in)
P 16,9 - 17,1 mm (0.666 - 0.673 in)

Crankshaft And Bearings - Servicing (Cont’d)
Figure 70-90-40
P-37182
Support the crankshaft with V block on the surface plate

P-37144 and set a dial indicator with its tip on the intermediate
journal at right angle [Figure 70-90-41].
If the same size bearing can not be used because of the Rotate the crankshaft on the V block and get the
crankshaft journal wear, replace it with an oversized one misalignment (half of the measurement).

referring to the table and [Figure 70-90-40].
If the misalignment exceeds the allowable limit, replace
Oversize dimensions of crankshaft journal. the crankshaft.
Oversize 0,2 mm 0,4 mm Crankshaft Allowable 0,02 mm

(0.008 in) (0.016 in) alignment limit (0.0008 in)
Dimension A 29,20 - 29,25 mm 29,40 - 29,45 mm
(1.150 - 1.151 in.) (1.158 - 1.159 in)
Dimension B 169,10 - 169,15 169,2 - 169,25
mm mm
(6.6575 - 6.6594 (6.6615 - 6.6633
in) in)
Dimension C 2,8 - 3,2 mm 2,8 - 3,2 mm
radius radius
(0.11 - 0.12 in. (0.11 - 0.12 in
radius) radius)
The crankshaft journal must be fine-finished to higher

than (0.8-S)


1
Figure 70-90-42
P-37147
NOTE: To replace it with a specific STD service part,

P-37145 make sure the crank pin bearing has the same
ID color as the connecting rod [Figure 70-90-
43].
Clean the crank pin and crank pin bearing.
ID Connect- Crank pin bearing

Put a strip of plastigage [Figure 70-90-42] on the center Color ing rod
of the crank pin.
Large-end Class Center wall
NOTE: Never insert the plastigage into the crank pin in dia. thickness
oil hole. Be sure not to move the crankshaft Blue 56,010 - L 1,496 - 1,501
while the connecting rod bolts are tightened. 56,020 mm mm
(2.2052 - (0.05890 -
Install the connecting rod cap and tighten the connecting 2.2055 in) 0.05909 in)
rod bolts to the specified torque, and remove the cap
without 56,00 - S 1,491 - 1,496
again.
Color 56,01 mm mm
(2.2048 - (0.05870 -
Measure the amount of the flattening with the scale, and
2.2051 in) 0.05889 in)
record the oil clearance.
If the oil clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace Undersize crank pin bearing.
the crank pin bearing.
Undersize Bearing Marking
If the same size bearing can not be used because of the 0,2 mm Crank pin bearing 02 020 US
crank pin wear, replace it with an undersized one (0.008 in)
referring to the table.
0,4 mm Crank pin bearing 04 040 US
(0.016 in)
Crank pin Factory spec. 52,977 - 52,990 mm
O.D. (2.0857 - 2.0862 in)
Oil clearance Factory spec. 0,018 - 0,051 mm

between crank (0.00071 - 0.0020
pin and crank in)
pin bearing Allowable 0,20 mm
limit (0.0079 in)

Figure 70-90-44
P-37149
Clean the crankshaft journal and crankshaft bearing.

P-37146
Put a strip of plastigage on the center of the journal
[Figure 70-90-45].
Undersize dimensions of crankpin.
NOTE: Never insert the plastigage into the oil hole of

Undersize 0,2 mm 0,4 mm the journal.
(0.008 in) (0.016 in)
Dimension 2,8 - 3,2 mm 2,8 - 3,2 mm Install the main bearing case and tighten the bolts to the
A radius radius specified torque, and remove the cases again.
(0.11 - 0.12 in (0.11 - 0.12 in
radius) radius) Measure the amount of the flattening with the scale and
record the oil clearance.
Dimension 1,0 - 1,5 mm 1,0 - 1,5 mm
B radius radius If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the
(0.040 - 0.059 in (0.040 - 0.059 in crankshaft bearing.
radius) radius)
Dimension 52,777 - 52,790 52,577 - 52,590 Crankshaft Factory spec. 74,977 - 74,990 mm
C mm mm Journal O.D. (2.9519 - 2.9523 in)
(2.0779 - 2.0783 (2.0700 - 2.0704
in) in)
Oil clearance Factory spec. 0,018 - 0,062 mm
between (0.00071 - 0.0024 in)
The crank pin must be fine-finished to higher than (0.8- crankshaft Allowable 0,20 mm (0.0079 in)
S) journal and limit
crankshaft
Holes to be de-burred and edges rounded with 0.040 - bearing
0.059 in. (1,0 -1,5 mm) relief.

CRANKSHAFT AND PISTONS (CONT'D) Crankshaft Sleeve
Crankshaft And Bearings - Servicing (Cont’d) Figure 70-90-47
Figure 70-90-46
2
1 4
P-37148
P-37269
Remove the used crankshaft sleeve (Item 1) [Figure 70-
90-47] using a special-use puller set.
Undersize dimensions of crankshaft journal [Figure 70-
90-46]. Set the sleeve guide (Item 4) to the crankshaft (Item 2)

[Figure 70-90-47].
Undersize 0,2 mm 0,4 mm
(0.008 in) (0.016 in) Heat a new sleeve to a temperature between 150 -
Dimension 2,8 - 3,2 mm 2,8 - 3,2 mm 200°C (302 - 392°F), and fix the sleeve to the crankshaft.
A radius radius
(0.11 - 0.12 in (0.11 - 0.12 in Press the sleeve onto the shaft using the auxiliary socket
radius) radius) (Item 3) [Figure 70-90-47].
Dimension 1,0 - 1,5 mm 1,0 - 1,5 mm NOTE: Install the sleeve with the chamfered surface
B radius radius facing outward.
(0.040 - 0.059 in (0.040 - 0.059 in
radius) radius)
Dimension 74,777 - 74,790 74,577 - 74,590
C mm mm
(2.9440 - 2.9444 (2.9361 - 2.9366
in) in)
Crankshaft pin must be fine-finished to higher than

(0.8-S). Holes to be de-burred and edges rounded with
1,0 -1,5 mm (0.040 - 0.059 in) relief.

CAMSHAFT AND TIMING GEARS Figure 70-100-3
Timing Gearcase Cover Removal And Installation
Figure 70-100-1
1
2
3EEABAC1P089A
Confirm that the liquid gasket coating surface is free of

P-37231 water, dust and oil in order to maintain sealing effect.
Carefully apply the adhesive evenly (Item 1) [Figure 70-

Install the engine flywheel pin. 100-3].

Remove the crankshaft bolt (Item 1) [Figure 70-100-1]. NOTE: Apply a liquid gasket to the gearcase cover.
Remove the drive pulley (Item 2) [Figure 70-100-1]. NOTE: Assemble the adhesive-applied parts within
the manufactures specified cure time.
NOTE: Clean the crankshaft bolt and the drive pulley
sleeve surface thoroughly and tighten the bolt
securely to specified torque. Figure 70-100-4
Tightening Crankshaft 255,0 - 274,6 N•m

torque bolt (188.1 - 202.5 ft-lb)
Figure 70-100-2
1
2
3EEABAC1P094A
Be careful not to damage the O-ring (Item 1) and water

1 pipe (Item 2) [Figure 70-100-4] when reassembling.
3
3EEABAC1P093A NOTE: Replace O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 70-100-4] when
reassembling.
Remove the gearcase cover (Item 1) [Figure 70-100-2].
NOTE: Use care when removing the gearcase cover

not to damage the water pipe (Item 2) [Figure
70-100-2].

CAMSHAFT AND TIMING GEARS (CONT’D) Idler Gear And Camshaft Removal And Installation
Timing Gears Backlash - Checking Figure 70-100-6
Figure 70-100-5
3
2
1
P-76096
3EEABAC1P100A
Remove the three bolts (Item 1) from the idler gear
[Figure 70-100-6].
Set a dial indicator (lever type) with its tip on the gear
tooth (Item 1) [Figure 70-100-5]. Remove the Idler gear (Item 2) [Figure 70-100-6].

Move the gear to measure the backlash, holding its Align the holes (Item 3) on the camshaft gear with the
mating gear. camshaft retainer plate bolts (Item 4) [Figure 70-100-6].
If the backlash exceeds the allowable limit, check the oil Remove the bolts (Item 4) [Figure 70-100-6].
clearance of the shafts and the gear.
Remove the camshaft from the engine block.
If the oil clearance is proper, replace the gear.
Installation:
Crank gear & Idle Factory 0,049 - 0,193
gear spec. mm Figure 70-100-7
(0.0019 - 0.0076
in)
1
Allowable 0,22 mm
limit (0.0087 in)
Idle gear & Camshaft Factory 0,049 - 0,189
gear spec. mm
3
(0.0019 - 0.0074
in)
Allowable 0,22 mm 2
limit (0.0087 in)
Idle gear & Injection Factory 0,030 - 0,165
pump gear spec. mm
4
(0.0012 - 0.0065
3EEABAC1P095A
in)
Allowable 0,22 mm
limit (0.0087 in) Set the crankshaft at the top dead center of No. 1 and 4
cylinder and the camshaft key to the top position and
align the marks of idle gear and camshaft gear and crank
gear to assemble them [Figure 70-100-7].

CAMSHAFT AND TIMING GEARS (CONT’D) Alignment
Camshaft - Servicing Figure 70-100-9
Side Clearance
Figure 70-100-8
P-37175
Support the camshaft with V block on the surface plate

3EEABAC1P102A and set a dial indicator with its tip on the intermediate
journal at right angle [Figure 70-100-9].

Set a dial indicator with its tip on the camshaft [Figure Rotate the camshaft on the V blocks and get the
70-100-8]. misalignment (half of the measurement).
Measure the side clearance by moving the camshaft gear If the misalignment exceeds the allowable limit, replace
to the front and rear. the camshaft.
If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace Camshaft Allowable 0,01 mm
the camshaft stopper. alignment limit (0.0004 in)
Side clearance Factory 0,070 - 0,22 mm

spec. (0.0028 - 0.0086 in)
Allowable 0,030 mm
limit (0.012 in)

CAMSHAFT AND TIMING GEARS (CONT’D) Figure 70-100-12
Camshaft - Servicing (Cont’d)
Figure 70-100-10
P-37140
Measure the camshaft journal O.D. with an outside

P-37176 micrometer [Figure 70-100-12].

Measure the height of the camshaft lobe at its highest camshaft.
point with an outside micrometer [Figure 70-100-10].

If the measurement is less than the allowable limit, of camshaft spec. (0.0020 - 0.0035 in)
replace the camshaft. journal Allowable 0,15 mm
limit (0.0059 in)
Intake and Factory Intake 37,63 mm
exhaust spec. valve (1.481 in)
camshaft Camshaft Factory 45.934 - 45.950 mm
Exhaust 38,96 mm
lobe height journal O.D. spec. (1.8084 - 1.8091 in)
valve (1.534 in)
Camshaft Factory 46.000 - 46.025 mm
Allowable Intake 37,13 mm
journal I.D. spec. (1.8110 - 1.8120 in)
limit valve (1.462 in.)
Exhaust 38,46 mm
valve (1.514 in)
Figure 70-100-11
3EEABAC1P103A
Measure the cylinder block bore I.D. for camshaft with an

inside micrometer [Figure 70-100-11].

CAMSHAFT AND TIMING GEARS (CONT’D) Side Clearance
Idler Gear And Shaft - Servicing Figure 70-100-14
Figure 70-100-13
3EEABAC1P101A
P-37189
Set a dial indicator with its tip on the idle gear [Figure 70-
100-14].
Bushing Replacing Tool
Measure the side clearance by moving the idle gear to

Application: Use to press out and press fit the bushing. the front and rear.
1. For idle gear bushing. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace
the idle gear collar.
A 196 mm (7.72 in)
B 37,5 mm (1.48 in) Side clearance Factory 0,15 - 0,30 mm
C 150 mm (5.91 in) spec. (0.0059 - 0.011 in)
D 44,95 mm dia.
(1.770 in dia.)
limit
E 48,075 - 48,100 mm dia.
(1.8928 - 1.8937 in dia.)
F 20 mm dia (0.79 in dia)
a 0,0000063 mm (0.00025 in)
b 0,0000063 mm (0.00025 in)

CAMSHAFT AND TIMING GEARS (CONT’D) Figure 70-100-17
Idler Gear And Shaft - Servicing (Cont’d)
Figure 70-100-15
P-37177
Using an idle gear bushing replacing tool, press out the

3EEABAC1P104A used bushing.
Clean a new idle gear bushing and idle gear bore, and
Measure the idle gear shaft O.D. with an outside
apply engine oil to them.
micrometer [Figure 70-100-15].

Using an idle gear bushing replacing tool, press in a new
Figure 70-100-16
bushing to the specified dimension [Figure 70-100-17].
P-37141
Measure the idle gear bushing I.D. with an inside

micrometer, and calculate the oil clearance [Figure 70-
100-16].
If the oil clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace

the bushing.
Clearance Factory 0,050 - 0,091 mm

between idle spec. (0.0020 - 0.0035 in)
gear shaft Allowable 0,10 mm
and idle gear limit (0.0039 in)
bushing
Idle gear Factory 45,025 - 45,050 mm

bushing I.D. spec. (1.7727 - 1.7736 in)
Idle gear Factory 44,959 - 44,975 mm
shaft O.D. spec. (1.7701 - 1.7706 in)

TURBOCHARGER Testing
Description Remove the turbocharger. (See Removal And Installation

on Page 70-110-2.)
Figure 70-110-1
Radial Clearance
Figure 70-110-2
1
P100134
The turbocharger is located between the exhaust and

P-76099
intake manifolds. It is driven by hot exhaust gases and

supplies air at more than atmospheric pressure to the
intake. Lubrication for the turbocharger is supplied with Move the compressor / turbine wheel (up and down, right
pressurized oil from the main engine oil galley. The and left) (Item 1) [Figure 70-110-2].
location of the turbocharger is between the engine and
the blower housing. If the compressor / turbine wheel contacts the housing,
replace the turbocharger assembly.
The oil is delivered to the turbocharger through a tubeline
(Item 1) and returns to the engine block through a Check the oil tubelines for leaks.
drainage tubeline (Item 2) [Figure 70-110-1].
The turbocharger internal components are not

serviceable.

TURBOCHARGER (CONT’D) Figure 70-110-4

1 2
WARNING
Turbochargers, operate at high speed and high 4
temperatures. Keep fingers, tools and other objects
away from the inlet and outlet ports. Avoid contact
with hot surfaces.
W-2257-1196 3
NOTE: Engine removed for photo clarity. P100133
Figure 70-110-3
Loosen the intake hose clamp (Item 1) and remove the
intake hose (Item 2) [Figure 70-110-4].
1
2 Loosen the air cleaner hose clamp (Item 3) and remove
the air cleaner hose (Item 4) [Figure 70-110-4].

Installation: Tighten the hose clamp (Item 3) [Figure 70-
110-4] to 3,4 - 4,0 N•m (30 - 35 in-lb) torque.
3 Figure 70-110-5
1
P100134
Remove the bolt (Item 1) and tubeline (item 2) [Figure

70-110-3].
Remove the bolts (Item 3) and tubeline (Item 4) [Figure

70-110-3].
1
P100135
Remove the four exhaust tube bolts (Item 1) [Figure 70-

110-5].

TURBOCHARGER (CONT’D)
Figure 70-110-6
2
1
P100140
Remove the two EGR heat shield mounting bolts (Item 1)

and remove the shield (Item 2) [Figure 70-110-6].

Figure 70-110-7
3
2
4 1
1 P100138
Remove the eight turbocharger mounting bolts (Item 1)

[Figure 70-110-7].
Remove the turbocharger assembly (Item 2) [Figure 70-

110-7].
Remove the two bolts (Item 3) from the turbocharger

flange mount (Item 4) and remove flange [Figure 70-110-
7].
Installation: During installation replace all gaskets.


FLYWHEEL AND HOUSING Ring Gear Removal And Installation
Flywheel Removal And Installation Figure 70-120-2
Figure 70-120-1
1
P-37365
P100238
NOTE: The lead chamfer on ring gear tooth must face
the starter.
NOTE: To avoid damage to the RPM sensor, remove
the RPM sensor before removing the flywheel. The ring gear (Item 1) [Figure 70-120-2] on the flywheel

is an interference fit. Heat the ring gear enough to
Remove the Flywheel RPM Sensor. (See FLYWHEEL expand it and hit it with a hammer to remove it evenly.
RPM SENSOR on Page 60-170-1.)
Clean the outer surface of the flywheel to give it a smooth
Remove the drive belt. (See Belt Replacement on Page fit.
30-60-1.)
Clean the new ring gear and heat it to a maximum
Remove the belt tension pulley assembly. (See Tensioner temperature of 220°C (428°F).
Pulley Removal And Installation on Page 30-50-4.)
Fit the ring gear over the flywheel. Make sure the gear is
Remove the bolts (Item 1) [Figure 70-120-1] from the seated properly.
flywheel.
Remove the flywheel from the engine crankshaft.
Installation: Tighten the flywheel bolts to 98 - 108 N•m

Installation: There are two alignment pins that are used

to install the flywheel in the proper position for timing
purposes.

FLYWHEEL AND HOUSING (CONT’D)
Figure 70-120-3
1
1
1
1
1
P100237
Remove the drive belt. (See Belt Replacement on Page

30-50-1.)

Remove the hydrostatic pump. (See Removal And
Remove the belt tension pulley assembly. (See Tensioner

Pulley Removal And Installation on Page 30-50-4.)
Remove the starter. (See Removal And Installation on

Page 60-40-1.)
Remove the flywheel housing mounting bolts (Item 1)

[Figure 70-120-3].

Remove the flywheel housing from the engine.

EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM
Description
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) is a system in which the exhaust gas with lean oxygen is cooled and returned to the
cylinders again in order to lower the combustion temperature.
An External / Mechanical EGR consists of a water cooled EGR cooler, mechanical EGR valve, reed valve and thermo
valve. When the coolant temperature is high and the boost pressure is low, the EGR valve will not open. If the coolant
temperature is high and the boost pressure is also high, the EGR valve will open allowing cooled gas back into the intake
manifold.
The reed valve between the EGR valve and the intake manifold prevents fresh air from flowing into EGR system.
Figure 70-130-1
2
2
7
9

11
7 3
10 12
8
4
1
13
15
6
14
P-76942
The items listed below refer to Page 70-130-1 [Figure

70-130-1].
1. Thermo Valve 9. Cooled EGR Gas

2. Mechanical EGR Valve 10. To The Intake Manifold
3. Reed Valve 11. Fresh Air
4. Intake Manifold 12. Cooled EGR Gas Merges With Fresh Air
5. Exhaust Manifold 13. Exhaust
6. EGR Cooler 14. Coolant Inlet
7. Boost Pressure 15. Coolant Outlet
8. Coolant Temperature

EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM Cold Engine Coolant Temperature Test
(CONT'D)
Start the engine and run at low idle.
Testing
Start Service Analyzer and select [Monitor].
There are two tests for checking the EGR system. Both
tests will need to be performed and the coolant must be Select [Engine Temperature].
monitored through the Service Analyzer.
The Cold Engine Coolant Temperature Test will need to

be performed with the engine coolant below 55°C
WARNING
(131°F). The Hot Engine Coolant Temperature Test will
need to be performed with the engine coolant above AVOID BURNS
70°C (158°F). Some surfaces of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation
system can be hot. Use caution when conducting
diagnostic tests.
Allow the engine to cool before servicing.

WARNING W-2716-0208
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH NOTE: Verify the engine temperature is below 55°C
When the engine is running during service, the (131°F). If the engine temperature is above
steering levers or joysticks must be in neutral and 55°C (131°F), let the engine cool down and
the parking brake engaged. restart the Cold Engine Coolant temperature

W-2717-0208 Test.
NOTE: Monitor the engine coolant temperature using

the Service Analyzer.
MACHINE FALLING OR MOVING CAN CAUSE

1
Put jackstands under the front and rear of the
machine before running engine for service.
W-2718-0208

1.)
Open the rear door.
Connect the Service PC (See SERVICE PC (LAPTOP

COMPUTER) on Page 60-150-1.) P-76949
Measure the surface temperature of the EGR pipe (Item

WARNING 1) [Figure 70-130-1] with an Infrared Thermometer.
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH If the engine coolant temperature is below 55°C (131°F)
When an engine is running in an enclosed area, fresh and the surface temperature of the EGR pipe is 50°C
air must be added to avoid concentration of exhaust (122°F) or below, the EGR system is OK, Continue with
fumes. If the engine is stationary, vent the exhaust the Hot Engine Coolant temperature Test.
outside. Exhaust fumes contain odorless, invisible
gases which can kill without warning. If the surface temperature of the EGR pipe reads 100°C
W-2050-0807 (212°F) or above continue this Cold Engine Coolant
Temperature Test.

EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM Hot Engine Coolant Temperature Test
(CONT'D)
Verify the engine temperature is above 70°C (158°F), if
Testing (Cont’d) the engine temperature is below 70°C (158°F) run the
engine to bring the temperature above 70°C (158°F) then
Figure 70-130-2 continue with the Hot Engine Coolant Temperature Test.
Figure 70-130-4
P-76956
P-76949
Disconnect the boost hose (Item 1) [Figure 70-130-2]

from the intake.
Figure 70-130-3 1) [Figure 70-130-4] with an Infrared Thermometer.
With the engine coolant temperature above 70°C (158°F)

1 and the surface temperature of the EGR pipe 100°C
(212°F) or above, the EGR system is OK.
If the surface temperature of the EGR pipe is 50°C

(122°F) or below continue this Hot Engine Coolant
Temperature Test.
Figure 70-130-5
P-76949
1
1) [Figure 70-130-3] with an Infrared Thermometer.
If the surface temperature of the EGR pipe declines, the

thermo valve has failed.
1
If the surface temperature of the EGR pipe stays above
100°C (212°F), the EGR valve has failed. P-76956
Disconnect the two hoses (Item 1) [Figure 70-130-5].

EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM
(CONT'D)
Testing (Cont’d)
Figure 70-130-6
P-76957
Connect a hose (Item 1) [Figure 70-130-6] directly

between the intake manifold and the EGR valve.
Figure 70-130-7
P-76949

1) [Figure 70-130-7] with an Infrared Thermometer.
If the surface temperature of the EGR pipe increases, the

thermo valve has failed.
If the surface temperature of the EGR pipe is 50°C

(122°F) or below, the EGR valve has failed.

EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM Figure 70-130-9
(CONT'D)
WARNING
AVOID BURNS
Some surfaces of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation
system can be hot. Use caution when conducting
diagnostic tests.
Allow the engine to cool before servicing. P-76952

W-2716-0208
Allow the engine to cool before working on the EGR Remove the EGR valve (Item 1) [Figure 70-130-9].
system.
Installation: When reassembling replace with new
Figure 70-130-8 gaskets.
Figure 70-130-10

1 2
3 1
4 2
5 3
P-76951
P-76954
Remove the EGR pipe (Item 2) from the EGR valve (Item
1) [Figure 70-130-8].
Disconnect the hose (Item 1) from the intake manifold
Remove the EGR cooler (Item 4), the coolant inlet pipe flange [Figure 70-130-10].
(Item 6) and the coolant outlet pipe (Item 3) [Figure 70-
130-8]. Disconnect the hose (Item 2) from the EGR valve [Figure
70-130-10].
Remove the EGR flange (Item 5) [Figure 70-130-8].
Remove the thermo valve (Item 3) [Figure 70-130-10].
Installation: When reassembling replace with new
gaskets. Installation: Tighten the thermo valve to 30 - 39 N•m (22
- 28 ft-lb)
NOTE: If the thermo valve is dropped it must be

replaced with a new one.


HEATING, VENTILATION, AIR CONDITIONING
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-10-2

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-10-2
Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-10-3
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-10-4
Safety Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-10-7
REGULAR MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-20-1

Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-20-1
Compressor Drive Belt Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-20-2
Compressor Drive Belt Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-20-2
Condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-20-2
Air Conditioning Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-20-2
Air Conditioning Service Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-20-3
Evaporator / Heater Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-20-4
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-30-1
Blower Motor Does Not Operate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-30-1
Blower Motor Operates Normally, But Air Flow Is Insufficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-30-1
Insufficient Cooling Although Air Flow And Compressor Operation Are Normal . . . 80-30-1

The Compressor Does Not Operate At All, Or Operates Improperly . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-30-1
Gauge Pressure Related Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-30-2
Troubleshooting Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-30-4
Temperature / Pressure Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-30-8
Poor A/C Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-30-10
HVAC Repair And Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80-30-11
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-30-12
Engine Coolant Bypassing The Heater Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-30-18
Heater Valve Not Opening Or Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-30-19
SYSTEM CHARGING AND RECLAMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-40-1

Refrigerant Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-40-1
Reclamation And Charging With Recovery / Charging Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-40-2
COMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-50-1
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-50-2
Oil Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-50-3
CONDENSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-60-1
RECEIVER / DRIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-70-1

Receiver / Drier Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-70-1
Pressure Relief Valve Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-70-2
Pressure Switch Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-70-3
Schrader® Valve Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-70-4

EVAPORATOR / HEATER UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-80-1
THERMOSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-90-1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-90-1
EXPANSION VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-100-1

EVAPORATOR COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80-110-1

HEATER COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-120-1

BLOWER FAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-130-1

HEATER VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-140-1



AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM FLOW
Description
In an air conditioning system the refrigerant is circulated under pressure through five major components in a closed circuit.
At these five points in the system the refrigerant goes through pressure and temperature changes.
The compressor (Item 1) (See Chart on Page 80-10-3.) takes in low temperature, low pressure refrigerant gas through the
suction valve (low pressure side) and as the name indicates, pressurizes the refrigerant and forces it through the discharge
valve (high pressure side) and to the condenser (Item 2) (See Chart on Page 80-10-3.)
Ambient air passing through the condenser removes the heat from refrigerant resulting in physical state change in the
refrigerant from a gas to a liquid.
The liquid refrigerant moves on to the receiver / drier (Item 3) (See Chart on Page 80-10-3.) where impurities such as
moisture and dirt are filtered out. The receiver / drier also serves as the storage tank for the liquid refrigerant. The liquid
refrigerant (still under high pressure) flows to the expansion valve (Item 4) (See Chart on Page 80-10-3.)
The expansion valve meters the amount of refrigerant entering the evaporator coil (Item 5) (See Chart on Page 80-10-3.)
As the refrigerant passes through the expansion valve, it again changes its physical state. It becomes a low temperature,
low-pressure liquid and saturated vapor. The low pressure liquid immediately starts to boil and vaporize as it enters the
evaporator. The hot humid air of the machine's cab is drawn through or blown across the evaporator by the evaporator fan
(Item 6) (See Chart on Page 80-10-3.) Since the refrigerant is colder than the air, it absorbs the heat from the air which
results in cooled air, which is pushed into the cab by the blower. The moisture in the air condenses on the evaporator coil

and drips into the drain pan, which directs the water out of the cab.
The refrigerant cycle is completed when the low temperature low pressure gas is again drawn into the compressor.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM FLOW (CONT'D)
Chart
Thermostat
Cold Air
Evaporator
5
Evaporator
4
Expansion Valve
Blower
6

1 Compressor
2 Condenser
Pressure
Switch
Sight
Glass
Fan
Dessicant
3 Receiver Drier
Status Of R134a_______________________________________________
High Pressure Gas Low Pressure Liquid
High Pressure Liquid Low Pressure Gas

b-16691

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM FLOW (CONT'D) Figure 80-10-3
Components
1
Figure 80-10-1
2
P-89545
Receiver / Drier: The receiver / drier (Item 1) [Figure 80-

P-89538 10-3] is the unit that receives the liquid refrigerant from
the condenser and removes moisture and foreign matter
from the system. It also serves as a storage tank for the
Compressor: The compressor (Item 1) [Figure 80-10-1] extra liquid refrigerant until it is needed by the evaporator.
is the pump that circulates the refrigerant throughout the

system. It raises the pressure of the refrigerant for heat Figure 80-10-4
transfer through the condenser and evaporator.
NOTE: The A/C system (Compressor) is

recommended to be turned on for at least 5
minutes weekly throughout the year to
lubricate the internal components.
Figure 80-10-2 1
1 N-22206
Pressure Relief Valve: The pressure relief valve (Item 2)

[Figure 80-10-3] is located on the receiver drier
assembly. This small brass valve (Item 1) [Figure 80-10-
4] is a safety feature that is designed to open and release
the A/C charge if the pressure reaches 3,7 MPa (36,9
P-85824 bar) (535 psi).
Condenser: The condenser (Item 1) [Figure 80-10-2] is

the unit that receives the high pressure, high temperature
refrigerant vapor from the compressor and condenses it
into a high temperature liquid.

Components (Cont'd)
Figure 80-10-5 4
3
1 2
P-90420A
1
Evaporator Coil: The evaporator coil (Item 1) [Figure 80-
P-92602 10-7] cools and dehumidifies the air before it enters the
cab.
Heater / Evaporator Unit: The heater / evaporator unit Thermostat: The thermostat (Item 2) [Figure 80-10-7]
(Item 1) [Figure 80-10-5] is located behind the loader controls the temperature of the evaporator coil.

cab. The unit delivers the cold air for the A/C and warm
air for heat into the cab. The unit contains the blower, Heater Coil: The heater coil (Item 3) [Figure 80-10-7]
heat and A/C coils, thermostat and expansion valve. supplies the warm air into the cab by passing air through
the coil.
Figure 80-10-6
Heater / Evaporator Blower: The blower (Item 4) [Figure
80-10-7] is used to push air through the heater and
evaporator coils and into the cab.
P-92659
Expansion Valve: The expansion valve (Item 1) [Figure

80-10-6] controls the amount of refrigerant entering the
evaporator coil.

Components (Cont'd)
Figure 80-10-8
1
1
2
3
4 P-89545
Pressure Switch: The pressure switch (Item 1) [Figure

P-92638 80-10-10] will disengage the compressor clutch at high
pressure readings over 2,6 MPa (26,5 bar) (384 psi) on
the high side, or at very low pressure of 193,1 kPa (1,9
Control Panel: The panel (Item 1) [Figure 80-10-8] has bar) (28 psi) or less on the high side, which indicates loss
three separate components. of refrigerant.

Fan Switch: This is a four position rotary switch (Item 2)
[Figure 80-10-8]. When the fan switch is in the off
position the A/C will not engage, but the heat valve will
operate, as it is controlled by the ignition power.
A/C Switch: The rocker switch (Item 3) [Figure 80-10-8]

will be illuminated when the A/C is engaged.
Potentiometer: The potentiometer (Item 4) [Figure 80-

10-8] controls the Heat Valve from fully Off to fully On.
This can be used in conjunction with the A/C for defrost
of the windows and temperature control.
Figure 80-10-9
P-90353
Heater Valve: The heater valve (Item 1) [Figure 80-10-9]

is used to control the amount of engine coolant that flows
to the heater coil.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM FLOW (CONT'D)
Safety Equipment
WARNING
Figure 80-10-11
In the event of a leak, wear safety goggles. Escaping
refrigerant can cause severe injuries to eyes. In
contact with a flame, R134a refrigerant gives a toxic
gas.
W-2371-0500
R-134a inside a canister or in an A/C system is a liquid

under pressure. When it escapes or releases into the air,
ITS TEMPERATURE DROPS TO 21.6 F DEGREES
“INSTANTLY”. If it spills on your skin or in your eyes you
should flood the area with cool water and SEEK
MEDICAL ATTENTION FAST! It is a good idea to wear
gloves [Figure 80-10-12] to prevent frost bite if you
should get refrigerant on your hands.
P16398
Figure 80-10-12
WARNING

HFC 134A refrigerant can be dangerous if not
properly handled. Liquid 134A may cause blindness
if it contacts the eyes and may cause serious
frostbite if it contacts the skin.
• Gaseous 134A becomes lethal (phosgene) gas
when it contacts open flame or very hot
substances.
• NEVER SMOKE when there is the possibility of
even small amounts of 134A in the air.
Any servicing work that involves release or addition
of 134A to the system must be done by a competent
P16399 refrigeration dealer who has the proper equipment,
knowledge, and experience to service refrigeration
equipment.
In servicing A/C and heater systems you will be exposed W-2373-0500
to high pressures, temperatures and several chemical
hazards. Moving belts and pulleys are normal shop
hazards.
In addition to exercising caution in your work, DO WEAR

SAFETY GLASSES OR A FACE SHIELD [Figure 80-
10-11] when you are using R-134a or a leak detector,
adjusting service valves or the manifold gage set
connectors. Safety glasses or a transparent face shield
are practical safety items and one or the other is
absolutely required.


REGULAR MAINTENANCE Recirculation Filter
Filters Figure 80-20-2
Fresh Air Filters
Figure 80-20-1
1
2 P100755
1
The recirculation filter is located behind the operator’s
seat inside the operator cab. The filter cover is held in
P-90489A
place with three clips. Pull the cover at each end (Item 1)
P-90492A
[Figure 80-20-2] to remove.

The fresh air filters are located behind the side windows Rinse the filter elements with water or use a vacuum to
outside the operator cab. (Right side shown) Remove the clean. Do not use solvents.
retaining screw (Item 1) and filter cover (Item 2) [Figure
80-20-1]. Line up the clips on the filter cover with the slots provided
and push the cover into place.
Shake the filter (Item 3) [Figure 80-20-1] or use low
pressure air to remove dirt. This can be done several
times before replacement is required. Install the filter,
filter cover and retaining screw.

REGULAR MAINTENANCE (CONT’D) Inspect the pulleys for wear.
Compressor Drive Belt Adjustment Install new belt.
The air conditioning belt is a special maintenance free Figure 80-20-4

type that is pretensioned over the pulleys. This belt
eliminates the need for a tensioning device and does not
require periodic adjustment. Contact your Bobcat dealer
for replacement parts.
Compressor Drive Belt Replacement

1
Figure 80-20-3
P100271
Insert a breaker bar (Item 1) [Figure 80-20-4] into the

square opening provided in the air conditioning

compressor bracket as shown. Move the breaker bar
1 down until the bottom air conditioning compressor
mounting bolt (Item 1) [Figure 80-20-3] can be installed.
Tighten the mounting nut and bolts (Items 1 and 2)

P100070
[Figure 80-20-3].
Condenser
The condenser should be cleaned with the oil cooler and

the radiator.
Air Conditioning Lubrication

2
Run the air conditioning for about 5 minutes every week
to lubricate the internal components.
P100071
NOTE: The engine is shown removed for visual

clarity.
Remove the bottom air conditioning compressor

mounting bolt (Item 1) [Figure 80-20-3].
Loosen the top air conditioning compressor mounting nut

and bolt (Item 2) [Figure 80-20-3].
Move the air conditioning compressor toward the engine

as far as it will go and remove the belt from the pulleys.

REGULAR MAINTENANCE (CONT’D)
Air Conditioning Service Chart
Service Company / Phone Number:

Date:
Machine Model: Machine Dealer:
Machine Serial Number: Customer:
Machine Hours:
Pre Service Conditions 15 Minutes 30 Minutes Notes
Ambient Temperature:
Louver Temperature:
Cab Temperature At Head Position:
Temperature Into Condenser:
High Side Pressure
Low Side Pressure
Ambient Humidity
Observations:

Explain Services Required:
Post Service Conditions 15 Minutes 30 Minutes Notes

Ambient Temperature:
Louver Temperature:
Cab Temperature at Head Position:
Temperature Into Condenser:
High Side Pressure
Low Side Pressure
Ambient Humidity
Observations:

REGULAR MAINTENANCE (CONT’D)
Evaporator / Heater Coil
Figure 80-20-5
P100756

Unhook cover latches (Item 1) [Figure 80-20-5] and
remove the cover.
Figure 80-20-6
P100757
Use low pressure air or water to remove debris from the

heater coil (Item 1) and evaporator (Item 2) [Figure 80-
20-6].
Install the cover and lower the operator cab. (See

Lowering on Page 10-30-3.)

TROUBLESHOOTING
Blower Motor Does Not Operate
Possible Cause Inspection Solution

1. Blown fuse. Inspect the fuse / wiring. Replace fuse / repair wiring.
2. Broken wiring or bad Check the fan motor ground and connectors. Repair the wiring or connector.
connection.
3. Fan motor malfunction. Check the lead wires form the motor with a circuit Replace Motor.
tester.
4. Resistor malfunction. Check resistor using a circuit tester. Replace Resistor.
5. Fan motor switch Check power into and out of the fan switch. Replace Fan Switch.
malfunction.
Blower Motor Operates Normally, But Air Flow Is Insufficient

1. Evaporator inlet obstruction. Check evaporator for plugging. Remove obstruction and clean
evaporator fins with air or
water.
2. Air leak. Check to make sure air ducts are properly Repair or adjust.
connected and seals are not damaged.
3. Defective thermo. switch Check thermostat using a circuit tester. Replace thermostat.

(frozen evaporator).
4. Plugged cab filters Check cab recirculation and fresh air filters. Clean or replace filters.
Insufficient Cooling Although Air Flow And Compressor Operation Are Normal

1. System low on refrigerant. The high side pressure will be low and bubbles Repair any leaks and recharge
may be present in sight glass on receive drier. the refrigerant to the correct
level.
2. Excessive refrigerant. The high pressure side pressure will be high. Use refrigerant recovery
equipment to capture excess
refrigerant. Charge to the
correct refrigerant level.
The Compressor Does Not Operate At All, Or Operates Improperly

1. Loose belt. The belt is vibrating or oscillating. Replace belt.
2. Internal compressor The compressor is locked up and the belt slips. Replace compressor.
malfunction.
Magnetic clutch related
3. Low battery voltage. Clutch slips. Recharge the battery.
4. Faulty coil. Clutch slips. Replace the magnetic clutch.
5. Oil on the clutch surface. Clutch slips. Replace or clean the clutch
surface.
6. Open coil. Clutch does not engage and there is no reading Replace clutch.
when a circuit tester is connected between the coil
and terminals.
7. Broken wiring or poor Clutch will not engage. Inspect the ground and Repair.
ground. connections.
8. Wiring harness Test the conductance of the pressure switch, Check operation / thermostat
components. thermostat, Relay, etc. LED status.

TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT'D)
Gauge Pressure Related Troubleshooting
Normal compressor suction (low side) and discharge (high side) pressure at ambient temperatures of 30 - 38°C (86 - 96°F)
and compressor speed of approximately 3200 rpm are:
High pressure side pressure: 1447,9 - 1827,1 kPa (14,5 - 18,3 bar) (210 - 265 psi)
Low pressure side pressure: 103,4 - 227,5 kPa (1,0 - 2,3 bar) (15 - 33 psi)
As a rule of thumb the high side pressure will be around eight times greater then the low side pressure.

Low pressure side Too The low pressure side pressure normally becomes too
high. high when the high pressure side pressure is too high. As
this is explained below, the following inspection is only
used when the low pressure side is too high.
1. Expansion valve Frost is present on the suction hose. Replace expansion valve.
opens too far.
2. Defective The high and low pressure side gauge pressures Replace compressor.
compressor. equalize when the magnetic clutch is engaged.
Low pressure side Too
low.
1. Low refrigerant The high side pressure will be low and bubbles may be Repair any leaks and recharge
charge. present in sight glass on receiver drier. the refrigerant to the correct

level.
2. Clogged or closed The expansion valve’s inlet side is frosted. Moisture or Clean or replace the expansion
expansion valve. other contaminants can be the cause. Valve.
3. Restriction between Frost on the line between drier and expansion valve. A Flush system or replace hose.
drier and expansion Negative low pressure reading may be shown.
valve.
4. Thermostat The evaporator is frozen. Adjust thermostat’s
malfunction. temperature setting or probe
placement or replace
thermostat.
5. Restriction in Excessive frost on receiver drier. Replace receiver drier.
receiver drier.
High pressure side Too
high.
1. Poor condenser Dirty or clogged condenser fins. Condenser fans not Clean fins, and / or repair the
performance. operating. fan.
2. Excessive The high pressure side pressure will be high. Use refrigerant recovery
refrigerant. equipment to capture excess
refrigerant. Charge to the
correct refrigerant level.
3. Excessive oil charge. The high pressure side will be high. Evacuate system. Remove oil
from condenser and
compressor. Measure oil from
compressor and add correct oil
charge back into compressor.
Flush system with nitrogen.
Replace drier.
4. Air in system. Pressure is high on both high and low sides. Evacuate and recharge with
refrigerant.
5. Restriction in drier, High pressure side will be high, and low pressure side Evacuate and flush system
condenser or high will be low. replacing defective parts.
pressure line.

Gauge Pressure Related Troubleshooting (Cont'd)

High pressure side Too
low.
1. Low refrigerant charge. The high side pressure will be low. Repair any leaks and
recharge the refrigerant to
the correct level.
System pressures Equal
1. Clutch not operating. See magnetic clutch related topics above.
2. Compressor not Equal high and low pressures. Replace compressor.
pumping.

Troubleshooting Tree
P-90410

Troubleshooting Tree (Cont’d)
P-90411

P-90412

P-90413

Temperature / Pressure Chart
NORMAL EVAPORATOR RANGE NORMAL CONDENSER RANGE

TEMP F PSIG TEMP F PSIG
16 15.69 93 110.20
18 17.04 94 112.10
20 18.43 95 114.10
22 19.87 100 124.30
24 21.35 102 128.50
26 22.88 104 132.90
28 24.47 106 137.30
30 26.10 108 141.90
32 27.79 110 146.50
34 29.52 112 151.30
36 31.32 114 156.10
38 33.17 116 161.10
40 35.07 118 166.10
42 37.03 120 171.30
44 39.05 122 176.60

45 40.09 124 182.00
50 45.48 126 187.50
55 51.27 128 193.10
60 57.47 130 198.90
65 64.10 135 213.70
70 71.19 140 229.40
75 78.75 145 245.80
80 86.80 150 263.00
85 95.40 155 281.10
90 104.40 160 300.10
91 106.30 165 320.10
92 108.20 170 340.80

Temperature / Pressure Chart (Cont’d)
Evaporator
Pressures represent gas temperatures inside the coil. not the coil surface. For an estimate of the temperature of the air
coming off the coil add -13 - -12°C (8 - 10°F) to the temperature on the chart.
Condenser
Temperatures are not ambient temperatures but condensing temperatures. Add 4.4°C (40°F) to the ambient temperature
to get the condensing temperature and then refer to the pressure chart to see appropriate pressure for ambient
temperature.
Example: Ambient Temperature=90°F

90°F
+40°F
130°F condenser temperature=200 psig
Conditions and pressures will vary from system to system. Check with MCC for system specifications.

TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT'D) Check the A/C condenser for dirt or mud and clean if
necessary. (See Removal And Installation on Page 80-
Poor A/C Performance 60-1.)
Start the loader, lock the park brake, and engage the A/C Check the A/C evaporator coil for dirt or mud and clean if
system with the blower fan on High. Run the loader at full necessary. (See Removal And Installation on Page 80-
throttle for approximately 15 minutes, with the loader cab 110-1.)
door closed.
Check the engine coolant to see if it is bypassing the
Figure 80-30-1 heater valve. (See Engine Coolant Bypassing The Heater
Valve on Page 80-30-18.)

P-90356
Figure 80-30-2
N-22411
Check the temperature at the louvers (Item 1) [Figure

80-30-1] with a thermometer [Figure 80-30-2].
The louver temperature should be between 2,2 - 11,6°C

(45 - 53°F.) depending on the amount of humidity in the
air and ambient temperature.
If louver temperature is too high. (See Troubleshooting

Tree on Page 80-30-4.)
Check the blower for proper operation, or noise, and

replace if necessary. (See Removal And Installation on
Page 80-130-1.)

HVAC Repair And Leaks
Figure 80-30-3
P-90361
Whenever the A/C system is opened to the atmosphere

or there has been a leak in the system, the receiver /

drier (Item 1) [Figure 80-30-3] must be changed.
Never leave hose fittings, compressor fittings or

components uncapped while working on the A/C system.

TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT’D) Figure 80-30-6
Electrical System
Check to see if the compressor clutch is engaging.

1
With an operator in the loader seat and the cab door
open, turn the loader key switch to RUN OR press the
RUN Button, without starting the loader.
Figure 80-30-4
P-90357
Locate the loader harness and the compressor clutch

wire (Item 1) [Figure 80-30-6].
2
1 Disconnect the loader harness (Item 1) [Figure 80-30-6]
from the compressor clutch wire.

Figure 80-30-7
P-92638
Push the A/C switch (Item 1) to the ON position. Turn the

blower switch (Item 2) [Figure 80-30-4] to the first ON
position.
1
The compressor clutch should make a click sound, which
indicates the clutch is engaging.
Figure 80-30-5
P-90358
1 With a multi meter, check the resistance to the

compressor clutch (Item 1) [Figure 80-30-7].
If there is no resistance value, replace the compressor

clutch.
P-85412
If the compressor clutch does not engage, check the

HVAC fuse (Item 1) [Figure 80-30-5] located in the fuse
panel.
Open the rear door (tailgate).

Electrical System (Cont’d)
Figure 80-30-8
P-90360
1
Using a multi meter check the loader wiring harness

P-90358 (Item 1) [Figure 80-30-10] for voltage.
The voltage should be around 12 volts.

With a multi meter, check the voltage to the compressor
clutch at the loader harness (Item 1) [Figure 80-30-8]. If there is no voltage at the wiring harness, check the

harness for broken wires.
The voltage reading should be around 12 volts.
Figure 80-30-11
If there is no power at the clutch, check the wiring
If there is power at the clutch, reconnect the wiring

harness to the compressor clutch.
Figure 80-30-9
1
P-90360
If there is voltage at the harness, check the resistance at

2
the pressure switch (Item 1) [Figure 80-30-11].
If there is no resistance value, check for low refrigerant

1 P-90361 level. (See Reclamation And Charging With Recovery /
Charging Unit on Page 80-40-2.)
Disconnect the loader harness (Item 1) from the pressure If a resistance value is seen, the pressure switch is good.
switch (Item 2) [Figure 80-30-9].
Reconnect the loader harness to the pressure switch.

TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT’D) If there is a resistance value, check the blower.
Electrical System (Cont’d) Figure 80-30-14
Figure 80-30-12
P-90363
P-90363
Disconnect the blower wiring connector (Item 1) [Figure
80-30-14] from the loader wiring harness.
Figure 80-30-15

Disconnect the thermostat wiring connector (Item 1
[Figure 80-30-12] from the loader wiring harness.
Figure 80-30-13
1
2 P-90362
1
Check the loader harness (Item 1) [Figure 80-30-15] for
P-90362 voltage. The voltage should be 12 volts.
If there is no voltage at the wiring harness, check the

Check the loader harness (Item 1) [Figure 80-30-13] for harness for broken wires.
voltage. The voltage should be 12 volts.
If there is voltage at the wiring harness, check the
If there is no voltage at the wiring harness, check the resistance to the blower at the blower wiring connector
harness for broken wires. (Item 2) [Figure 80-30-15].
If there is voltage at the wiring harness, check the If there is no resistance value replace the blower. (See
thermostat (Item 2) [Figure 80-30-13] for resistance. Removal And Installation on Page 80-130-1.)
The resistance value of the thermostat should be 10 ohm If there is a resistance value check the climate controls at
at 20°C (68°F). the control panel inside the loader cab.
If there is no resistance value, replace the thermostat.


Electrical System (Cont’d)
Figure 80-30-16 C
H
B
1 M
N-22288
If there is voltage at the wiring harness, check the blower

P-90364 switch [Figure 80-30-18] for resistance.
With the switch in the 1 position, there should be

Remove the control panel (Item 1) [Figure 80-30-16] resistance between C terminal and the B terminal. And
from the left side lower panel. also between the C terminal and the L terminal frame

[Figure 80-30-18].
Figure 80-30-17
resistance between C terminal and the B terminal. And
also between the C terminal and the M terminal frame
[Figure 80-30-18].

resistance between C terminal and the B terminal. And
1 also between the C terminal and the H terminal frame
[Figure 80-30-18].
If any of the above resistance tests fail, replace the

blower switch.
If the above resistance tests are good, check the A/C

P-90365 switch.
Disconnect the loader wiring harness (Item 1) [Figure

80-30-17] from the blower switch.
Check the loader harness for voltage. The voltage should

be 12 volts.


TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT’D) If no resistance value is found, replace the A/C switch.
Electrical System (Cont’d) If a resistance value is found, check the potentiometer.
Figure 80-30-19 The potentiometer will effect the A/C system and also
effect the operation of the heater.
If heater valve does not open, or close, or the A/C does

not work, check the potentiometer.
1
Figure 80-30-21
1
P-90367
At the loader cab, disconnect the loader harness (Item 1)

[Figure 80-30-19] from the A/C switch.

Check the harness for voltage. The voltage should be 12
P-90366
volts.
If there is no voltage at the wiring harness, check the At the loader cab, disconnect the loader harness (Item 1)
harness for broken wires. [Figure 80-30-21] from the potentiometer.
Figure 80-30-20 Check the loader harness (Item 1) [Figure 80-30-21] for
voltage. The voltage should be 12 volts.

1
2
N-22289
If there is voltage at the wiring harness, check the A/C

switch [Figure 80-30-20] for resistance.
With the switch in the OFF position there should be no

resistance between any of the three terminals on the A/C
switch.
With the switch in the ON position there should be

resistance between terminal (Item 1) and terminal (Item
2) [Figure 80-30-20].

Electrical System (Cont'd)
Figure 80-30-22
A C
A C
B
N-22290
B
The resistance between the wire terminal A and wire

N-22290 terminal B frame [Figure 80-30-24] should be around 0K
ohm.
If there is voltage at the wiring harness, check the Check the resistance between the wire terminal C and
potentiometer [Figure 80-30-22] for resistance. wire terminal B frame [Figure 80-30-24] should be

around 10K ohm.
The resistance should be 10K ohm between wire pin A
and wire pin C frame [Figure 80-30-22].
If no resistance is found replace the potentiometer.
Figure 80-30-23
P-90368
To check the resistance of the white wire, turn the

potentiometer control (Item 1) [Figure 80-30-23]
counterclockwise to the full A/C position.

TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT’D) Engine Coolant Bypassing The Heater Valve
Electrical System (Cont'd) Raise the lift arms and install an approved lift arm support
Figure 80-30-25
Figure 80-30-27
2 3
1 1
P-90369
P-90364A
To check the resistance of the white wire, turn the

potentiometer control (Item 1) [Figure 80-30-25] Push the A/C switch (Item 1) to the OFF position, turn the
blower switch (Item 2) to position 1, then turn the

clockwise to the full Heater position.
temperature control (Item 3) [Figure 80-30-27]
Figure 80-30-26 counterclockwise to the full A/C position, with the loader
ignition switch OFF.

1.)
A C
Start the loader and run at high idle, for ten minutes.
Figure 80-30-28
B
N-22290
Check the resistance between the wire terminal A and

wire terminal B frame [Figure 80-30-26] should be
around 10K ohm. 1
Check the resistance between the wire terminal C and

wire terminal B frame [Figure 80-30-26] should be
around 0K ohm.
If the resistance is not found replace the potentiometer. P-90371
Check the heater hose (Item 1) [Figure 80-30-28] for

temperature.
If the hose is hot, the heater valve is leaking by, and

needs to be replace.

TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT’D) Place the remote start tool on the left fender of the loader,
so the heater valve can be clearly seen. Watch the valve
Heater Valve Not Opening Or Closing shaft (Item 1) [Figure 80-30-30], as the key of the remote
start is turned to the ON position without starting the
Raise the lift arms and install an approved lift arm support loader. The heater valve should rotate. Place a mark on
device. (See Installing on Page 10-20-1.) the loader shaft.
Figure 80-30-29 Turn the remote start key to the OFF position and remove
the remote start tool from fender.
Lower operator cab.
Turn the temperature control (Item 3) [Figure 80-30-29]

to the High Heater position, with the loader ignition switch
OFF.
Raise the operator cab.
Place the remote start tool on the left fender of the loader,
2 3 so the heater valve can be clearly seen. Watch the valve
1 shaft (Item 1) [Figure 80-30-30], as the key of the remote
start is turned to the ON position without starting the
P-90364A loader. The heater valve should rotate.

If it does not rotate, check the potentiometer for proper
Push the A/C switch (Item 1) to the OFF position, turn the function. (See Electrical System on Page 80-30-12.)
blower switch (Item 2) to position 1 and turn the
temperature control (Item 3) [Figure 80-30-29] to the Replace the heater valve. (See Removal And Installation
High A/C position, with the loader ignition switch OFF. on Page 80-140-1.)

1.)
Figure 80-30-30
P-90370
NOTE: The HVAC assembly is removed for photo

clarity.


SYSTEM CHARGING AND RECLAMATION Connect the Refrigerant Identifier to its power source.
Refrigerant Identification Follow the steps displayed on the refrigerant identifier

screen.
Allow two minutes for the refrigerant identifier to display

WARNING the type of refrigerant and air content. An alarm will
sound if potentially flammable hydrocarbons are present
and will also indicate on the visual display.
refrigerant can cause severe injuries to eyes. In Disconnect the refrigerant identifier from the loader A/C.
gas. If the refrigerant is dangerous or flammable, it must be
W-2371-0500 evacuated from the A/C system into a separate container
and properly and safely disposed of.
Figure 80-40-1
If R134a is found, evacuate the system.
1

N-23024
NOTE: It is recommended to identify the type of

refrigerant that is in the A/C system and if it is
pure enough to use. The tool MEL1592,
Refrigerant Identifier (Item 1) [Figure 80-40-1]
will determine, the kind of refrigerant and any
possible harmful or dangerous substances
that may be present in the system. Thus
preventing mixing of dangerous material with
your reclaimed R-134a in your reclaimer, and
further contamination to other A/C systems
that are reclaimed and charged from your
MEL1581 Recovery / Recycling / Recharging
Machine.
NOTE: This test is run with the loader engine OFF,

and the A/C switch in the OFF position.
Connect the Refrigerant Identifier to the low pressure

hose.

SYSTEM CHARGING AND RECLAMATION (CONT'D) Figure 80-40-3
Reclamation And Charging With Recovery / Charging

Unit
Figure 80-40-2
N-22291
IMPORTANT: Only trained technicians should

perform the reclaiming and recharging.
WARNING

P-90372
HFC 134A refrigerant can be dangerous if not
properly handled. Liquid 134A may cause blindness
Locate the low pressure port (Item 1), and high pressure if it contacts the eyes and may cause serious
port (Item 2) [Figure 80-40-2]. frostbite if it contacts the skin.
• Gaseous 134A becomes lethal (phosgene) gas
when it contacts open flame or very hot
substances.
WARNING • NEVER SMOKE when there is the possibility of
even small amounts of 134A in the air.
Any servicing work that involves release or addition
In the event of a leak, wear safety goggles. Escaping of 134A to the system must be done by a competent
refrigerant can cause severe injuries to eyes. In refrigeration dealer who has the proper equipment,
contact with a flame, R134a refrigerant gives a toxic knowledge, and experience to service refrigeration
gas. equipment.
W-2371-0500 W-2373-0500
Use an approved recovery / charging unit [Figure 80-40-

3] to evacuate the system.

SYSTEM CHARGING AND RECLAMATION (CONT'D) Figure 80-40-6

Unit (Cont'd)
Figure 80-40-4
N-22292
Turn the reclaimer unit [Figure 80-40-6] to the ON

position and follow the on screen instructions.
P-90374
NOTE: The A/C system holds 0,68 kg (1.5 lb) of
refrigerant.
Figure 80-40-5

Figure 80-40-7
P-90373
N-22381
Connect the reclaimer to the loader A/C charge ports

(Item 1) [Figure 80-40-4]. NOTE: The reclaimer unit, has a complete step by
step set of instructions [Figure 80-40-7] to
Connect the Blue hose (Item 2) [Figure 80-40-5] to the follow for reclamation and recharging of the
low pressure port and open the valve. A/C system. A trained technician should
follow these instructions as they may vary
Connect the Red hose (Item 3) [Figure 80-40-5] to the slightly depending on the model and brand of
high pressure port and open the valve. reclaimer used.


COMPRESSOR

WARNING
device. (See Installing on Page 10-20-1.) In the event of a leak, wear safety goggles. Escaping
Raise the operator cab. (See Raising on Page 10-30-2.) contact with a flame, R134a refrigerant gives a toxic
gas.
Evacuate the A/C system. (See Reclamation And W-2371-0500
Charging With Recovery / Charging Unit on Page 80-40-
2.)
Figure 80-50-3
Open the rear door.
Figure 80-50-1

1
P-89543
Remove the compressor hoses (Item 1) [Figure 80-50-3]

from the compressor.
P-90357
Installation: Tighten the compressor hoses to 29,8 N•m

(22 ft-lb) torque.
Disconnect the loader harness (Item 1) [Figure 80-50-1]
from the compressor clutch wire.
Cap and plug the compressor hoses and the fittings with
with the proper A/C caps and plugs.
Figure 80-50-2
Figure 80-50-4
1
2 1
P-89538
P-89534
Remove the compressor mount bolt (Item 1) and the belt

(Item 2) [Figure 80-50-2]. Remove the compressor mount bolts and nuts (Item 1)
[Figure 80-50-4].
Installation: Tighten the compressor mount bolt to 46
N•m (34 ft-lb) torque. Remove the compressor from the loader.

COMPRESSOR (CONT'D) If the amount of refrigerant in the system has decreased,
charge the system. (See SYSTEM CHARGING AND
Oil RECLAMATION on Page 80-40-1.)
Figure 80-50-5 Open the cab door and windows.
Run the blower at maximum speed.
Run the compressor for at least 20 minutes at 800 - 1200

1 rpm.
Remove the compressor from the loader. (See Removal

P-90486
The compressor (Item 1) [Figure 80-50-5] is factory filled

with 150 - 170 cc's of PAG 100 oil (Poly Alkelene Glycol).

Unlike engine oil, it is not necessary to frequently check
or change the compressor oil.
It is necessary to check, replenish or replace the

compressor oil in the following cases:
• When ever the evaporator, condenser or receiver-

drier is replaced.
• Whenever the refrigerant has leaked from the system.
When one of the components (the evaporator, condenser

or receiver-drier) is replaced, one ounce of oil should be
added for each component replaced.
If the A/C compressor is changed, no oil should be added

to the system, because the compressor comes factory
filled with oil.
NOTE: Only PAG 100 oil should be used, and never

mix R-12 and R-134a Oils.
The compressor oil should be checked as follows when

oil is being added to an in service loader.
There is a close affinity between oil and refrigerant.

During normal operation, part of the oil circulates with the
refrigerant in the system. Therefore, when checking the
amount of oil in the system or replacing any system
component, the compressor must be run in advance to
ensure return of oil to the compressor.

COMPRESSOR (CONT'D) Figure 80-50-8
Oil Check
Figure 80-50-6
1
P-90486
NOTE: After draining the oil through the drain hole

P-90487 and the connectors, extract the remaining oil
through the discharge-side connector by
rotating the drive pulley (Item 1) [Figure 80-50-
Figure 80-50-7 8] several times by hand.

Measure the drained oil in a measuring cylinder.
Check the oil for contamination, dirt, metal shavings, or

varnish color, discard the oil if contaminated.
NOTE: If metal shavings are found in the compressor

oil, replace the complete compressor
assembly.
Figure 80-50-9
P-16534A
Remove the oil drain plug (Item 1) [Figure 80-50-6] and

drain the oil through the connectors and the oil drain hole 1
[Figure 80-50-7].
Installation: Tighten the oil drain plug to 13 - 15 N•m (9.4

- 10.8 ft-lb) torque.
P-90487
Add new compressor oil through the suction side

Installation: Add 150 - 170 cc's of PAG 100 oil.
NOTE: The suction port on the compressor is marked

with an SUC and is the larger port on the
compressor.


CONDENSER Figure 80-60-2
Remove the rear grille. (See Removal And Installation on 1

Page 50-60-1.)
Remove the refrigerant from the A/C system. (See

Unit on Page 80-40-2.)
P-89546
Figure 80-60-1

routes from the condenser to the receiver / dryer.
Cap and plug the hose and the condenser fittings with
1 the proper A/C caps and plugs.

Figure 80-60-3
P-85824 1
Remove the two brackets (Item 1) [Figure 80-60-1].
WARNING P-89548

refrigerant can cause severe injuries to eyes. In Disconnect the hose (Item 1) [Figure 80-60-3] that
contact with a flame, R134a refrigerant gives a toxic routes from the condenser to the compressor.
gas.
W-2371-0500 Cap and plug the hose and the condenser fittings with
the proper A/C caps and plugs.
Remove the condenser.


RECEIVER / DRIER Figure 80-70-1
Receiver / Drier Removal And Installation
WARNING
the lift arms are secured by an approved lift arm 1
W-2059-0598
P-90488
Remove the rear grille. (See Removal And Installation on
Page 50-60-1.)
NOTE: Mark the A/C hoses (Item 1) [Figure 80-70-1]
Remove the refrigerant from the A/C system. (See for proper installation.
Unit on Page 80-40-2.) Remove the two A/C hoses (Item 1) [Figure 80-70-1]
from the receiver / drier.

Both fittings on the drier are the same size, so the hoses
WARNING can be hooked up incorrectly.
Cap and plug the hoses and the receiver / drier fittings
In the event of a leak, wear safety goggles. Escaping with the proper A/C caps and plugs.
contact with a flame, R134a refrigerant gives a toxic NOTE: When replacing a receiver / drier in an A/C
gas. system 30 cc (1 fl oz) of PAG 100 oil must be
W-2371-0500 added to the system when recharging.
Figure 80-70-2
P-90493
Note the flow direction on the receiver / drier (Item 1)

[Figure 80-70-2] for proper installation.

RECEIVER / DRIER (CONT’D) Pressure Relief Valve Removal And Installation
Receiver / Drier Removal And Installation (Cont’d) Figure 80-70-5
Figure 80-70-3
1
N-22205
P-92665
The pressure relief valve (Item 1) [Figure 80-70-5] is
located on the receiver / drier.
Loosen the two clamps (Item 1) and remove the receiver
/ drier (Item 2) [Figure 80-70-3]. Figure 80-70-6

Figure 80-70-4
N-22206
P-89521
The pressure relief valve [Figure 80-70-6] is designed to
open and release the A/C charge if the pressure reaches
Remove the two mount bolts (Item 1) [Figure 80-70-4] 3,7 MPa (36,9 bar) (535 psi).
from the receiver / drier mount bracket.
This will cause the A/C system to shut down, saving the
compressor.
The pressure relief valve is a secondary protection

device in the A/C system, with the pressure switch
shutting down the system at 2,6 MPa (26,5 bar) (384 psi).
NOTE: If a pressure relief valve is found open, check

the A/C system for problems. Replace the
complete receiver / drier unit.

RECEIVER / DRIER (CONT’D) Figure 80-70-8
Pressure Switch Removal And Installation
Figure 80-70-7
1
1 P-90488
Remove the pressure switch (Item 1) [Figure 80-70-8]

P-90361 from the A/C high pressure hose.
Remove the pressure switch from the loader.

Disconnect the loader wire harness (Item 1) [Figure 80-
70-7] from the pressure switch wire harness.

NOTE: The pressure switch can be changed without
evacuating the A/C system.
WARNING
gas.
W-2371-0500

RECEIVER / DRIER (CONT’D)
Schrader® Valve Removal And Installation
Figure 80-70-9
N-22166
The Schrader® valve (Item 1) [Figure 80-70-9] is located

in the A/C high pressure hose and is located under the

pressure switch.
Remove the refrigerant from the A/C system. (See

Unit on Page 80-40-2.)
Remove the pressure switch.
With a Schrader® valve removal tool, remove the valve

from the hose.

EVAPORATOR / HEATER UNIT Figure 80-80-3
Evacuate the A/C system. (See Reclamation And

Charging With Recovery / Charging Unit on Page 80-40- 1
2.)
2
Figure 80-80-1 2
P-90421
NOTE: Support the evaporator / heater unit before

1 1 removing the mounting hardware.
Remove the two nuts (Item 2) [Figure 80-80-3].

Figure 80-80-4
P-90363
3
Disconnect the expansion / heater unit wiring (Item 1)

[Figure 80-80-1].
2
Figure 80-80-2
3 1
P-90422
1 Disconnect the two A/C hoses (Item 1) [Figure 80-80-4].
Cap and plug the hoses and the expansion valve fittings
Installation: Tighten the A/C hoses to 29,8 N•m (22 ft-lb)

P-90423 torque.

NOTE: Cap the heater hoses and the heater valve
with plugs to prevent coolant loss from the Remove the two nuts (Item 3) [Figure 80-80-4].
system.
Remove evaporator / heater unit from the loader.
Remove the two hoses (Item 1) [Figure 80-80-2].


THERMOSTAT The EDT has the following protection built in:
1. Over temperature
Description
2. Over current from clutch output
The Electronic De-icing Thermostat (EDT) is a micro
controller based module that measures evaporator coil 3. Voltage (Above and below operational limits or
temperature and cycles the compressor clutch to reverse voltage)
maintain a constant evaporator pressure. Onboard circuit
protection and diagnostics are also built into the module. 4. Short circuit protection (Output shorted to ground)
NOTE: The EDT has a six second delay before start 5. Temperature sensor open and short detection
up to protect the compressor clutch.
The EDT will turn the clutch on when the evaporator coil DETECTION
MALFUNCTION STATUS LED
temperature is above 2°C (35.6°F). If the EDT does not INTERVAL
detect any malfunction, it will continue to operate and the Temperature Continuous 1x per second
status LED will be lit continuously. When the evaporator sensor
temperature is below -2°C (28.4°F), the EDT will turn off
Temperature At A/C start up 2x per second
the clutch and status LED.
sensor open and
short detection
Figure 80-90-1
Compressor Continuous 3x per second
clutch short to
battery

1
P-90576
When the EDT detects an open or short from the

temperature sensor, the status LED (Item 1) [Figure 80-
90-1] will blink once per second and the output signal to
the clutch will be turned off. The status LED will flash two
times per second when EDT detects an open circuit
(current draw less than 200 mA), short circuit or over
current (current draw greater than 7A) from the clutch
output. The status LED will flash three times per second
when the compressor clutch is shorted to ground.
NOTE: The EDT will attempt to restart every 20

seconds until the fault is repaired.

THERMOSTAT (CONT’D) Figure 80-90-4
NOTE: The thermostat can be changed without

evacuating the A/C system, or removing the 1
evaporator / heater unit from the loader.
NOTE: The evaporator / heater unit is shown

removed for photo clarity.
P-92613
Figure 80-90-2
Remove the thermostat probe (Item 1) [Figure 80-90-4]

from the A/C evaporator coil.
Figure 80-90-5

1 2
P-92606
Remove the nine screws (Item 1) and cover (Item 2)

[Figure 80-90-2].
P-92609
Figure 80-90-3
Remove the thermostat (Item 1) from the evaporator /

heater unit [Figure 80-90-5].
P-92603
Remove the three screws (Item 1) and left cover (Item 2)

[Figure 80-90-3].

EXPANSION VALVE Figure 80-100-2

1
Raise the operator cab. (See Raising on Page 10-30-2.) 1

1
Evacuate the A/C system. (See Reclamation And
2.)
2
1
WARNING P-90416
In the event of a leak, wear safety goggles. Escaping NOTE: The evaporator / heater unit is removed for
refrigerant can cause severe injuries to eyes. In photo clarity.
gas. Remove the four screws (Item 1) and the cover (Item 2)
W-2371-0500 [Figure 80-100-2].

Figure 80-100-3
Figure 80-100-1
1
2
1
1
P-90417
P-92659
Remove the five screws (Item 1) and the cover (Item 2)

Remove the two A/C hoses (Item 1) [Figure 80-100-1]
[Figure 80-100-3].
from the expansion valve.
Installation: Tighten the two A/C hose fittings to 29,8

Cap and plug the hoses and the expansion valve fittings

EXPANSION VALVE (CONT'D)
Figure 80-100-4
P-90418
Remove the two evaporator fittings (Item 1) [Figure 80-

100-4] from the expansion valve.

Installation: Tighten the two evaporator fittings to 29,8
Remove the two mount bolts (Item 2) [Figure 80-100-4].
Remove the expansion valve from the loader.
Cap and plug the evaporator tubelines (Item 1) [Figure

80-100-4] and the expansion valve fittings with the
proper A/C caps and plugs.
Figure 80-100-5
N-22085
The expansion valve [Figure 80-100-5] is replaced as a

complete unit.

EVAPORATOR COIL Figure 80-110-2
1
1
2
Evacuate the A/C system. (See Reclamation And 1
2.)
NOTE: The evaporator / heater unit is removed for

photo clarity. 1
P-90417
WARNING Remove the five screws (Item 1) and the cover (Item 2)
[Figure 80-110-2].
In the event of a leak, wear safety goggles. Escaping Figure 80-110-3


gas.
W-2371-0500
Figure 80-110-1
1
1
1
1
P-90418
Disconnect the two evaporator fittings (Item 1) [Figure

80-110-3] from the expansion valve.
2
1 Installation: Tighten the two evaporator fittings to 29,8
P-90416 N•m (22 ft-lb) torque.
Cap and plug the evaporator tubelines (Item 1) [Figure

80-110-3] and the expansion valve fittings with the proper
photo clarity.
A/C caps and plugs.
Remove the four screws (Item 1) and the cover (Item 2)
[Figure 80-110-1].

EVAPORATOR COIL (CONT'D)
Figure 80-110-4
2
2
3
P-90420A
Remove the thermostat probe (Item 1) [Figure 80-110-4]

from the evaporator coil.

Remove the two retaining clips (Item 2) [Figure 80-110-
4] that connect the evaporator coil, to the heater coil.
Remove the evaporator coil (Item 3) [Figure 80-110-4].
Figure 80-110-5
P-90424
Inspect the evaporator coil [Figure 80-110-5] for leaks,

Clean with low pressure water or air.

HEATER COIL Figure 80-120-3
Remove the evaporator coil (If equipped with A/C). (See 2

Remove the heater valve. (See Removal And Installation

on Page 80-140-1.) 1

photo clarity.
3
Figure 80-120-1
P-90440
Remove the three screws (Item 1) and cover (Item 2)

[Figure 80-120-3].
1 2
Remove the tie strap and move the wire harness (Item 3)
[Figure 80-120-3] off to the side.

Figure 80-120-4
1
P-90419A
2 1
Remove the nine screws (Item 1) and the cover (Item 2)
[Figure 80-120-1].
Figure 80-120-2 1
2
1
P-90445
1
Remove the five screws (Item 1) and cover (Item 2)
3
[Figure 80-120-4].
P-90439
Remove the three screws (Item 1) and cover (Item 2)

[Figure 80-120-2].
Remove the two screws (Item 3) [Figure 80-120-2].

HEATER COIL (CONT'D)
Figure 80-120-5
P-90441
Remove the bolt, spacer, and nut (Item 1) [Figure 80-

120-5].

Remove the heater coil from the unit.
Figure 80-120-6
P-90443
The heater coil [Figure 80-120-6] can be cleaned with

low pressure air or water.

BLOWER FAN Disassembly And Assembly
Remove the evaporator / heater unit. (See Removal And

Remove the heater coil. (See Removal And Installation 2

on Page 80-120-1.)
Figure 80-130-1
1 1
2
P-90458
1 1 Remove the eight screws (Item 1) [Figure 80-130-2]

from the blower wheel cover.
2
Remove the two screws (Item 2) [Figure 80-130-2] from

the resistor.
P-90457
Figure 80-130-3
Remove the two screws (Item 1) [Figure 80-130-1].
Remove the blower fan (Item 2) [Figure 80-130-1] from 1

the evaporator / heater unit.
2
P-90465
Remove the outside rings (Item 1) and the blower wheel

cover (Item 2) [Figure 80-130-3].
Inspect the outside rings and blower wheel covers for

wear and replace as needed [Figure 80-130-3].

BLOWER FAN (CONT'D) Figure 80-130-6
Figure 80-130-4
P-90463
1 Check the blower housing and blower motor mount for

P-90459 wear and replace as needed [Figure 80-130-6].
Figure 80-130-7
NOTE: Mark the wires for proper installation.

Remove the two wires (Item 1) [Figure 80-130-4] from
the blower motor.
Figure 80-130-5
1 1
P-90461
Remove the blower wheel outside clamp (Item 1) [Figure

80-130-7] from the blower wheel.
P-90460
Remove the screw (Item 1) [Figure 80-130-5] from the

bottom side of the blower motor.
Remove the blower motor from the blower housing.

BLOWER FAN (CONT'D)
Figure 80-130-8
1
3
4
P-90462
Remove the blower wheel (Item 1), inside clamp (Item 2),
inside ring (Item 3), and spacers (Item 4) [Figure 80-130-

8] from the blower motor shaft and inspect for wear.
NOTE: The number and size of spacers (Item 4)

[Figure 80-130-8] may vary.
Repeat the procedure for the other blower wheel.


HEATER VALVE Figure 80-140-2

3 4
NOTE: The heater valve is not serviceable and must

be replaced as a complete assembly.
Remove any tie-straps that hold the heater hoses.

2
NOTE: The evaporator / heater unit is shown
removed for photo clarity. P-90415
Figure 80-140-1
with plugs to prevent coolant loss from the
system.
Remove the heater hose clamp (Item 1) [Figure 80-140-

2].

1
Remove the heater hose from the heater valve.

3 heater valve mount.
2 Remove heater hose clamp (Item 3) and the heater valve
(Item 4) [Figure 80-140-2] from the evaporator / heater
P-90414 unit.

with plugs to prevent coolant loss from the
system.
Remove the heater hose clamp (Item 1) [Figure 80-140-

1].
Remove the heater hose.
Disconnect the loader wiring harness (Item 2) [Figure

80-140-1] from the heater valve.

heater valve mount.


SPECIFICATIONS
(T750) LOADER SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-10-1

Machine Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-10-1
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-10-2
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-10-3
Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-10-3
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-10-4
Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-10-4
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-10-5
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-10-5
Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-10-6
Ground Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-10-6
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS FOR BOLTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-20-1

Torque For General SAE Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-20-1
Torque For General Metric Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-20-2
HYDRAULIC CONNECTION SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-30-1

Straight Thread O-ring Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-30-1
Flare Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-30-2

Tubelines And Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-30-2
HYDRAULIC / HYDROSTATIC FLUID SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-40-1

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-40-1
CONVERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-50-1
Decimal And Millimeter Equivalent Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-50-1
U.S. To Metric Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-50-1
881 of 898 SPEC-01 T750 Service Manual

882 of 898 SPEC-02 T750 Service Manual

(T750) LOADER SPECIFICATIONS
Machine Dimensions
• Dimensions are given for loader equipped with standard track and 80 inch Heavy Duty Construction and Industrial
bucket and may vary with other bucket types. All dimensions are shown in millimeters. Respective imperial dimensions
are given in inches enclosed by parentheses.
• Where applicable, specifications conform to SAE or ISO standards and are subject to change without notice.
2235 mm
(88 in)
1981 mm
(78 in)
2032 mm
1532 mm (80 in)
(60.3 in)

98°
4232 mm
(166.6 in)
42°
853 mm
(33.6 in)
3353 mm
(132 in)
2065 mm
(81.3 in)
2649 mm
(104.3 in)
31.3°
31.5°
1618 mm
206 mm
(63.7 in)
(8.1 in)
2903 mm
(114.3 in)
3597 mm
(141.6 in)
NA5372
Changes of structure or weight distribution of the loader can cause changes in control and steering response and
can cause failure of the loader parts.
883 of 898 SPEC-10-1 T750 Service Manual

(T750) LOADER SPECIFICATIONS (CONT’D)
Performance
STEEL TRACK ROLLER SUSPENSION SOLID-MOUNTED

UNDERCARRIAGE UNDERCARRIAGE
Rated Operating Capacity 1293 kg (2850 lb) 1338 kg (2950 lb) 1508 kg (3325 lb)
with 200 Pound Frame
--- 1383 kg (3050 lb) 1554 kg (3425 lb)
Mounted Counterweight Kit
--- 1417 kg (3125 lb) 1588 kg (3500 lb)
--- 1451 kg (3200 lb) 1622 kg (3575 lb)
Tipping Load 3694 kg (8143 lb) 3823 kg (8429 lb) 4309 kg (9500 lb)
Operating Weight 5004 kg (11032 lb) 4938 kg (10887 lb) 4684 kg (10327 lb)
Breakout Force - Lift 2719 kg (5995 lb) 2729 kg (6017 lb) 2566 kg (5659 lb)
Breakout Force - Tilt 2741 kg (6045 lb) 2777 kg (6123 lb) 2690 kg (5931 lb)
Push Force 3229 kg (7118 lb) 3167 kg (6982 lb) 3046 kg (6715 lb)
Travel Speed
- Single Speed Loader 0 - 10,6 km/h (0 - 6.6 mph) 0 - 10,6 km/h (0 - 6.6 mph) 0 - 10,6 km/h (0 - 6.6 mph)
- Two-Speed Loader (Option)
Low Range --- 0 - 9,8 km/h (0 - 6.1 mph) 0 - 9,8 km/h (0 - 6.1 mph)

High Range --- 0 - 17,2 km/h (0 - 10.7 mph) 0 - 17,2 km/h (0 - 10.7 mph)

Engine
Make / Model Kubota / V3800-DI-TE3 Tier 3

Fuel / Cooling Diesel / Liquid
Horsepower
- ISO 9249 EEC / SAE J1349 Net 61,0 kW (81.8 hp) @ 2400 rpm
- ISO 14396 Gross 62,5 kW (83.8 hp) @ 2400 rpm
- SAE J1995 Gross 63,4 kW (85.0 hp) @ 2400 rpm
Torque
- ISO 9249 EEC / SAE J1349 Net 305,4 N•m (225.3 ft-lb) @ 1600 rpm
- SAE J1995 Gross 310,0 N•m (228.6 ft-lb) @ 1600 rpm
Low Idle rpm 1250 - 1400
High Idle rpm 2525 - 2650
Number of Cylinders 4
Displacement 3769 cm3 (230 in3)
Bore / Stroke 100 mm / 120 mm (3.94 in / 4.72 in)
Lubrication Gear Pump Pressure System with Filter
Crankcase Ventilation Open Breathing
Air Cleaner Dry replaceable paper cartridge with separate safety element

Ignition Diesel - Compression
Air Induction Turbo-Charged
Engine Coolant Propylene Glycol / Water Mixture
Starting Aid Air Intake Heater - Automatically activated as needed in RUN position.
Drive System
Main Drive Fully hydrostatic, rubber track drive

Transmission Infinitely variable tandem hydrostatic piston pumps, driving two fully reversing
hydrostatic drive motors
Tracks (Tension) Grease cylinder and spring

Controls
Vehicle Steering Direction and speed controlled by two hand operated steering levers or optional
joystick(s)
Loader Hydraulics
- Lift and Tilt Controlled by separate foot pedals or optional Advanced Control System (ACS)
or optional Selectable Joystick Controls (SJC)
- Front Auxiliary Controlled by electrical switch on Right Hand steering lever or joystick
- Rear Auxiliary (Option) Controlled by electrical switch on Left Hand steering lever or joystick
Auxiliary Pressure Release Pressure relieved through quick couplers; Push couplers in, hold for 5 seconds
Engine Hand lever speed control, additional foot operated speed control pedal with SJC
option; key-type start switch or optional Keyless Start Panel or optional Deluxe
Instrumentation Panel and function error shutdown.
Starting Aid Air intake heater automatically activated as needed in RUN position
Service Brake Two independent hydrostatic systems controlled by two hand operated steering
levers or optional joystick(s)
Secondary Brake One of the hydrostatic transmissions
Parking Brake (Standard) Spring applied pressure release multi-disk brake activated by manually operated
switch on left instrument panel

Hydraulic System
Pump Type Engine driven, gear type

Pump Capacity - Standard 87,1 L/min (23.0 U.S. gpm)
Pump Capacity - High-Flow Option 138,2 L/min (36.5 U.S. gpm)
System Relief at Quick Couplers 23,8 - 24,5 MPa (238 - 245 bar) (3450 - 3550 psi)
Filter (Hydraulic / Hydrostatic) Replaceable beta 10 micron = 200, drop in element
Filter (Charge) Replaceable beta 10 micron = 200, drop in element
Hydraulic Cylinders Double-acting; tilt cylinders have cushioning feature on dump and rollback
Bore Diameter: Lift Cylinder (2) 76,2 mm (3.00 in)
Tilt Cylinder (2) 76,2 mm (3.00 in)
Rod Diameter: Lift Cylinder (2) 44,5 mm (1.75 in)
Stroke: Lift Cylinder (2) 660,2 mm (25.99 in)
Control Valve - Standard 3-Spool, open center, manually operated with spring detent for lift float.
Electrically controlled auxiliary spool
Control Valve - ACS and SJC 3-Spool, open center with electric actuator controlled lift with float and tilt.
Electrically controlled auxiliary spool
Fluid Lines SAE Standard tubelines, hoses and fittings
Fluid Type BOBCAT FLUID, Hydraulic / Hydrostatic
6903117 - (Two - 2.5 U.S. gal)
6903118 - (5 U.S. gal)
6903119 - (55 U.S. gal)
Hydraulic Function Time:
Raise Lift Arms 4.03 Seconds
Lower Lift Arms 2.86 Seconds
Bucket Dump 2.34 Seconds
Bucket Rollback 2.05 Seconds

Electrical System
Alternator Belt driven, 90 amperes, open frame

Battery 12 volts, 950 cold cranking amperes @ -18°C (0°F),
180 Minute reserve capacity @ 25 amperes
Starter 12 volts, gear type, 3,0 kW (4.02 hp)
Instrumentation Gauges:
Engine Coolant Temperature, Fuel Level.
Warning lights:
Fuel Level, Seat Belt, Engine Coolant Temperature, Engine Malfunction,
Hydraulic System Malfunction, General Warning.
Indicators:
BICS Functions, Two-Speed, 3-Point Shoulder Belt, Turn Signals, Engine
Preheat.
Data Display:
Operating Hours, Engine rpm, Speed Management Setting, Maintenance Clock
Countdown, Battery Voltage, Service Codes, Engine Preheat Countdown,
Steering Drift Compensation Setting, Drive Response Setting.
Other:
Audible Alarm, Lights, Option / Accessory Switches.
Optional Deluxe Instrumentation Panel:

*Additional displays for: Engine rpm, Coolant Temperature and Oil Pressure;
System Voltage, Hydrostatic Charge Pressure and Hydraulic Oil Temperature.
*Additional Features Included: Keyless Start, Digital Clock, Job Clock, Password
Lockout, Multi-language Display, Help Screens, Diagnostic Capability and
Engine / Hydraulic Systems Shutdown Function.
Capacities
Fuel 103,1 L (27.2 U.S. gal)

Engine Oil with Filter Change 11,4 L (12.0 qt)
Engine Cooling System
with Heater 15,1 L (4.0 U.S. gal)
without Heater 14,4 L (3.8 U.S. gal)
Hydraulic / Hydrostatic Reservoir 9,8 L (2.6 U.S. gal)
Hydraulic / Hydrostatic System 36,0 L (9.5 U.S. gal)
Hydrostatic Drive Motor (Each) 180 mL (6.1 U.S. fl oz)

Tracks
Standard Rubber 450 mm (17.7 in) Rubber, C-Pattern

Optional Rubber Narrow 320 mm (12.6 in) Rubber, C-Pattern
Steel 340 mm (13.38 in) Steel, Triple Grouser
Ground Pressure
STEEL TRACK ROLLER SUSPENSION SOLID-MOUNTED

UNDERCARRIAGE UNDERCARRIAGE
Rubber track - 450 mm (17.7 in) 0,030 MPa 0,029 MPa
---
(0,30 bar) (4.4 psi) (0,29 bar) (4.2 psi)
Rubber track - 320 mm (12.6 in) 0,043 MPa 0,041 MPa
---
(0,43 bar) (6.2 psi) (0,41 bar) (5.9 psi)
Steel track 0,043 MPa
--- ---
(0,43 bar) (6.2 psi)

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS FOR BOLTS
Torque For General SAE Bolts
The following table shows standard torque specifications for bolts with zinc phosphate coating. Bolts purchased from
Bobcat that have zinc phosphate coating are specified by the letter H following the part number.
THREAD
SAE GRADE 5 SAE GRADE 8
SIZE
9,0 - 10,2 12,4 - 13,6
0.250
N•m (80 - 90) (110 - 120)
(in-lb) 20,3 - 22,6 24,2 - 27,1
0.3125
(180 - 200) (215 - 240)
34 - 38 47 - 54
0.375
(25 - 28) (35 - 40)
54 - 61 81 - 88
0.4375
(40 - 45) (60 - 65)
88 - 95 122 - 136
0.500
(65 - 70) (90 - 100)
122 - 136 170 - 190
0.5625
(90 - 100) (125 - 140)
170 - 190 240 - 260
0.625
(125 - 140) (175 - 190)

300 - 330 410 - 450
0.750
(220 - 245) (300 - 330)
450 - 490 645 - 710
0.875
(330 - 360) (475 - 525)
645 - 710 985 - 1085
1.000
N•m (475 - 525) (725 - 800)
(ft-lb) 880 - 975 1425 - 1600
1.125
(650 - 720) (1050 - 1175)
1200 - 1360 2000 - 2200
1.250
(900 - 1000) (1475 - 1625)
1630 - 1830 2720 - 2980
1.375
(1200 - 1350) (2000 - 2200)
2040 - 2240 3530 - 3870
1.500
(1500 - 1650) (2600 - 2850)
2720 - 2980 4680 - 5150
1.625
(2000 - 2800) (3450 - 3800)
3390 - 3730 5830 - 6500
1.750
(2500 - 2750) (4300 - 4800)
4270 - 4750 7450 - 8300
1.875
(3150 - 3500) (5500 - 6100)
5150 - 5700 8800 - 9800
2.000
(3800 - 4200) (6500 - 7200)

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS FOR BOLTS (CONT'D)
Torque For General Metric Bolts
THREAD SIZE MATERIAL

(DIA. X PITCH) HEAD MARK 4 HEAD MARK 7 HEAD MARK 10
4 - 5 N•m
M 5 x 0.8
(3 - 4 ft-lb)
8 - 9 N•m 8 - 12 N•m
M 6 x 1.0
(6 - 7 ft-lb) (6 - 9 ft-lb)
8 - 12 N•m 15 - 22 N•m 24 - 34 N•m
M 8 x 1.25
(6 - 9 ft-lb) (11 - 16 ft-lb) (18 - 25 ft-lb)
18 - 24 N•m 30 - 41 N•m 49 - 68 N•m
M 10 x 1.25
(13 - 18 ft-lb) (22 - 30 ft-lb) (36 - 50 ft-lb)
30 - 41 N•m 54 - 73 N•m 94 - 118 N•m
M 12 x 1.25
(22 - 30 ft-lb) (40 - 54 ft-lb) (69 - 87 ft-lb)
49 - 68 N•m 79 - 108 N•m 157 - 186 N•m
M 14 x 1.25
(36 - 50 ft-lb) (58 - 80 ft-lb) (116 - 137 ft-lb)

HYDRAULIC CONNECTION SPECIFICATIONS
Straight Thread O-ring Fitting
Figure SPEC-30-1
Nut Nut
Washer
Washer
O-ring
O-ring
A-1852
Lubricate the O-ring before installing the fitting. Loosen

the jam nut and install the fitting. Tighten the jam nut until

the washer is tight against the surface [Figure SPEC-30-
1].
Figure SPEC-30-2
O-ring Boss
Tightening Torque
x TORQUE
x N•m
Thread Size (ft-lb)
7/16” - 20 18 (13)
9/16” - 18 30 (22)
3/4” -1 6 54 (40)
7/8” - 14 81 (60)
1-1/16” - 12 114 (84)
1-3/16” - 12 133 (98)
1-5/16” - 12 160 (118)
1-7/16” - 12 209 (154)
1-5/8” - 12 221 (163)

HYDRAULIC CONNECTION SPECIFICATIONS Tubelines And Hoses
(CONT’D)
Replace any tubelines that are bent or flattened. They will
Flare Fitting restrict flow and cause heat.
Figure SPEC-30-3 Replace hoses which show signs of wear, damage or

weather cracked rubber.
Always use two wrenches when loosening and tightening

hose or tubeline fittings.
P-85926
Use the following procedure to tighten the flare fitting:

Tighten the nut until it makes contact with the seat.
Use the chart [Figure SPEC-30-4] to find the correct

tightness needed. If the fitting leaks after tightening,
disconnect it and inspect the seat area for damage.
Figure SPEC-30-4
Flare Fitting Tightening Torque
Tubeline x TORQUE
Outside x N•m
Diameter Thread Size (ft-lb)
1/4” 7/16” - 20 18 (13)
5/16” 1/2” - 20 23 (17)
3/8” 9/16” - 18 30 (22)
1/2” 3/4” - 16 54 (40)
5/8” 7/8” - 14 81 (60)
3/4” 1-1/16” - 12 114 (84)
7/8” 1-3/16” - 12 133 (98)
1” 1-5/16” - 12 160 (118)
1-1/4” 1-5/8” - 12 209 (154)
1-1/2” 1-7/8” - 12 221 (163)
2” 2-1/2” - 12 342 (252)

SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications WARNING
RECOMMENDED ISO VISCOSITY GRADE (VG) During cold weather (0°C [32°F] and below), do not
AND VISCOSITY INDEX (VI) operate machine until the engine has run for at least
five minutes at less than half throttle. This warm-up
period is necessary for foot pedal operation and safe
stopping. Do not operate controls during warm-up
period.
When temperatures are below -30°C (-20°F), the

hydrostatic oil must be heated or kept warm. The
hydrostatic system will not get enough oil at low
temperatures. Park the machine in an area where the
temperature will be above -18°C (0°F) if possible.
W-2027-0910
TEMPERATURE RANGE ANTICIPATED
DURING MACHINE USE
[3] BOBCAT All-Season Fluid
[4] BOBCAT Synthetic Fluid

[5] BOBCAT Biodegradable Hydraulic / Hydrostatic
Fluid (Unlike biodegradable fluids that are vegetable
based, Bobcat biodegradable fluid is formulated to
prevent oxidation and thermal breakdown at operating
temperatures.)
DO NOT use automatic transmission fluids in the loader

or permanent damage to the transmission will result.
WARNING
W-2072-0807
When temperatures below -18°C (0°F) are common, the

loader must be kept in a warm building. Extra warm-up
time must be used each time the loader is started during
cold temperature conditions. Cold fluid will not flow easily
and it makes action of the hydraulic function slower. Loss
of fluid flow to the hydrostatic transmission pump
(indicated by TRANS light ON) can cause transmission
damage in less than 60 seconds.


CONVERSIONS
Decimal And Millimeter Equivalent Chart

U.S. To Metric Conversion Chart


ALPHABETICAL INDEX
(T750) LOADER SPECIFICATIONS CRANKSHAFT AND PISTONS . . . . . .70-90-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPEC-10-1 CYLINDER (BOB-TACH) . . . . . . . . . . .20-22-1
ACCESS PANEL (INSIDE) (SJC) . . . 50-121-1 CYLINDER (LIFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-20-1
ACCESS PANEL (INSIDE) . . . . . . . . . 50-120-1 CYLINDER (TILT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-21-1
AIR CLEANER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80-1 CYLINDER HEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70-80-1
AIR CLEANER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-40-1 DELIVERY REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM FLOW . 80-10-2 DIAGNOSTIC SERVICE CODES . . . . .60-90-1
ALTERNATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-30-1 DRAIN MANIFOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-60-1
ARMREST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-150-1 DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-50-1
BACK-UP ALARM SYSTEM . . . . . . . 60-210-1 ELECTRICAL / HYDRAULIC CONTROLS
BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-20-1 (ACS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-141-1
BLOWER FAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-130-1 ELECTRICAL / HYDRAULIC CONTROLS
BOBCAT CONTROLLER (ACS) . . . . . 60-71-1 (SJC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-142-1
BOBCAT CONTROLLER (SJC) (DRIVE) ELECTRICAL / HYDRAULIC CONTROLS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-72-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-140-1
BOBCAT CONTROLLERS (GATEWAY AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INFORMATION
AUXILIARY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-70-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-10-1

BOBCAT INTERLOCK CONTROL SYSTEM EMERGENCY EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-190-1
(BICS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-100-1 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . .10-90-1
BOB-TACH (HAND LEVER) . . . . . . . . 10-130-1 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . .70-50-1
BOB-TACH (HAND LEVER) . . . . . . . . . 50-40-1 ENGINE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . .70-10-1
BOB-TACH (POWER) BLOCK . . . . . . 20-120-1 ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM . . .10-110-1
BOB-TACH (POWER) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-131-1 ENGINE SPEED CONTROL (SCPA) . .70-20-1
BOB-TACH (POWER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-41-1 ENGINE SPEED CONTROL (SJC) . . .70-21-1
BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-10-1 EVAPORATOR / HEATER UNIT . . . . . .80-80-1
BUCKET POSITION VALVE . . . . . . . 20-100-1 EVAPORATOR COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . .80-110-1
CAB DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-140-1 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR)
CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-160-1 SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70-130-1
CAMSHAFT AND TIMING GEARS . . 70-100-1 EXPANSION VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80-100-1
CHARGE PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-30-1 FIRE PREVENTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
COMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-50-1 FLYWHEEL AND HOUSING . . . . . . .70-120-1
CONDENSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-60-1 FLYWHEEL RPM SENSOR . . . . . . . .60-170-1
CONTROL HANDLE / LEVER (ACS) . 50-111-1 FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
CONTROL HANDLE / LEVER (SJC) . 50-112-1 FRONT AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC COUPLER
BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-130-1
CONTROL HANDLE / LEVER . . . . . . 50-110-1
FRONT HORN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-220-1
CONTROL PANEL (SJC) . . . . . . . . . . 50-101-1
FUEL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-100-1
CONTROL PANEL SETUP . . . . . . . . 60-180-1
FUEL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70-70-1
CONTROL PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-100-1
FUEL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-80-1
CONTROL PEDALS AND LINKAGES (ACS)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-91-1 HEADLINER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-180-1
CONTROL PEDALS AND LINKAGES . 50-90-1 HEATER COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80-120-1
CONTROL SYSTEM (ACS) . . . . . . . . 60-130-1 HEATER VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80-140-1
CONVERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPEC-50-1 HYDRAULIC / HYDROSTATIC FILTERS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-70-1
897 of 898 INDEX-01 T750 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC / HYDROSTATIC FLUID REAR AUXILIARY DIVERTER VALVE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPEC-40-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-110-1
HYDRAULIC / HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM REAR DOOR (TAILGATE) . . . . . . . . . 50-70-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-120-1 REAR GRILLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-60-1
HYDRAULIC CONNECTION RECEIVER / DRIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-70-1
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPEC-30-1
REGULAR MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . 80-20-1
HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (ACS) OR
(SJC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-41-1 REMOTE START TOOL (SERVICE TOOL) KIT
- 7003031 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-40-1 REMOTE START TOOL KIT-MEL1563 10-60-1
HYDRAULIC FLUID RESERVOIR . . . .20-80-1 RIGHT SIDE LOWER PANEL . . . . . 50-170-1
HYDRAULIC PUMP (HIGH FLOW) . . .20-61-1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
HYDRAULIC PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-60-1 SEAT BAR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-110-1
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM INFORMATION SEAT BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-10-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-10-1 SEAT BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-200-1
HYDROSTATIC DRIVE MOTOR . . . . .30-20-1 SERIAL NUMBER LOCATIONS . . . . . . . . 1-14
HYDROSTATIC PUMP (SJC) . . . . . . . .30-41-1 SERVICE PC (LAPTOP COMPUTER)
HYDROSTATIC PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-40-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-150-1
HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM INFORMATION SERVICE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-10-1 SPARK ARRESTOR MUFFLER . . . . 10-150-1

INSTRUMENT PANELS . . . . . . . . . . . .60-50-1 SPEED SENSORS (SJC) . . . . . . . . . . 60-80-1
LEFT SIDE LOWER PANEL . . . . . . .50-160-1 STARTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-40-1
LIFT ARM BYPASS CONTROL VALVE 20-50-1 STEERING DRIFT COMPENSATION 60-161-1
LIFT ARM SUPPORT DEVICE . . . . . .10-20-1 STOPPING THE ENGINE AND LEAVING THE
LIFT ARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-50-1 LOADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-180-1
LIFTING AND BLOCKING THE LOADER SYSTEM CHARGING AND RECLAMATION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-40-1
LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-60-1 THERMOSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-90-1
LOADER IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS FOR BOLTS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-20-1
LOADER STORAGE AND RETURN TO
SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-170-1 TOWING THE LOADER . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50-1
LUBRICATING THE LOADER . . . . . .10-140-1 TRACK MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . 40-30-1
LUBRICATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . .70-60-1 TRACK UNDERCARRIAGE COMPONENTS
(ROLLER SUSPENSION) . . . . . . . . . 40-21-1
MAIN RELIEF VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-30-1
TRACK UNDERCARRIAGE COMPONENTS
MAINTENANCE CLOCK . . . . . . . . . .60-200-1 (SOLID-MOUNTED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-1
MAINTENANCE SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 TRACTION LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-120-1
MUFFLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70-30-1 TRANSPORTING THE LOADER ON A
OIL COOLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-90-1 TRAILER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40-1
OPERATOR CAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-30-1 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-30-1
OPERATOR CAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-20-1 TURBOCHARGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70-110-1
OPERATOR SEAT (SUSPENSION) . .50-30-1 WINDOW (REAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-130-1
PASSWORD SETUP (DELUXE WINDOW (SIDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-132-1
INSTRUMENTATION PANEL) . . . . . .60-190-1 WINDOW (TOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-131-1
PASSWORD SETUP (KEYLESS START
PANEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-191-1
PIVOT PINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-160-1
898 of 898 INDEX-02 T750 Service Manual

t750 Bobcat Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

t750 Bobcat Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

t750 Bobcat Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual

T750 Compact Track Loader

S/N ANKA11001 & Above

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

6989737 (12-10) Printed in U.S.A. © Bobcat Company 2010

CORRECT CORRECT CORRECT

P-90216 NA1711 NA1715

WRONG WRONG WRONG

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

NA1722 NA1725 B-6589

3 of 898 1-1 T750 Service Manual

4 of 898 1-2 T750 Service Manual

SAFETY & MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-01

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-01

HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-01

DRIVE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-01

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM & ANALYSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-01

ENGINE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-01

HEATING, VENTILATION, AIR CONDITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-01

ALPHABETICAL INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .INDEX-01

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

5 of 898 1-3 T750 Service Manual

6 of 898 1-4 T750 Service Manual

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

FIRE PREVENTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

SERIAL NUMBER LOCATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

LOADER IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

7 of 898 1-5 T750 Service Manual

8 of 898 1-6 T750 Service Manual

3. The seat belt must be 11. Bob-Tach wedges and

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

4. The seat bar must be 12. Safety treads must be in good

6. Machine signs (decals) must 14. Check hydraulic fluid level,

7. Steering levers, hand controls 15. Inspect for fuel, oil or

8. Check for correct function of 16. Lubricate the loader.

9 of 898 1-7 T750 Service Manual

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

22. Check for any field

10 of 898 1-8 T750 Service Manual

11 of 898 1-9 T750 Service Manual

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

• The Skid-Steer Loader Operator Training Course is

DANGER available through your local dealer or at

WARNING • The Skid-Steer Loader Safety Video is available from

12 of 898 1-10 T750 Service Manual

The dealer and owner / operator review the

Cutting or drilling concrete containing sand or rock

Call Before You Dig

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

13 of 898 1-11 T750 Service Manual

Check hydraulic tubes, hoses and fittings for damage

Maintenance Always clean fluid spills. Do not use gasoline or diesel

Flammable debris (leaves, straw, etc.) must be removed

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Do not use the machine where exhaust, arcs, sparks or

Check the spark arrestor exhaust system regularly to

Battery gas can explode and cause serious injury. Use

14 of 898 1-12 T750 Service Manual